Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world’s books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
atthtto: //books.gqoogle.com/
Que T ite. 46.560
THE GIFT OF
THE HEIRS or
CORNELIUS ©. FELTON
(Class of 1827),
LATE PRESIDENT oF
HARVARD COLLEGE,
Received 21 January,
A. / AY
©
-
EEE
3. 2044 102 853 876
Cad. C. C.J LE
A. Jayla
5 RE . μ᾿ ἢ : e e- ᾿
N ) [2 a 5 ) ." ) es
Δ In tn 1}, yo Yo ὁ:
a . 4 ’ a ὴ
tr) ἃ 3 — a. ἃ δ \
a
ν.
8 a
AN
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR
In ea
OF
THE GREEK LANGUAGE,
CONTAINING A SERIES OF
GREEK AND ENGLISH EXERCISES
FOR TRANSLATION,
WITH THE REQUISITE VOCABULARIES,
AND AN
APPENDIX
ON THE HOMERIC VERSE AND DIALECT.
BY
DR. RAPHAEL KÜHNER,
CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER.
FROM THE GERMAN BY
SAMUEL H. TAYLOR,
PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER, MASS.
/
U
ANDOVER:
ALLEN, MORRILL, AND WARDWELL.
NEW YORK: MARK H. NEWMAN.
LONDON: WILEY & PUTNAM.
1846.
Aus Το thts πο, Soe
v
‘
The Heirs of ©. ©. Felton:
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by
ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDWELL,
in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of Massachusetts.
ANDOVER:
ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDWELL, PRINTERS.
STERBOTYFED BY
8. N. DICKINSON AND CO., BOSTON.
PREFACE.
\
RaPHAEL KüÜHner, the author of the following Grammar, was
born at Gotha, in 1802. Among his early classical teachers were
Döring, Rost, and Wüstemann. At the University of Gottingen,
he enjoyed the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen, and Ottfried
Müller, men of great distinction in classical philology. For more
than twenty years, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum at Hano-
ver, one of the principal German gymnasia, and has consequently
had the most favorable opportunities, as a practical teacher, to un-
derstand the wants of students and to be able to meet them.
In addition to several other important works, Dr. Kühner has
published three Greek Grammars :
1, A Copious Greek Grammar, containing 1150 octavo pages,
which has been translated by W. E. Jelf, M. A. of the
University of Oxford.
2. A School Greek Grammar, which has been translated and
published in this country.
8. An Elementary Greek Grammar, the original of the Der
work, from the second edition of which a very faithful trans-
lation was made by John H. Millard, St. John’s College,
Cambridge, the Greek and English exercises and the accom-
panying Vocabularies, however, having been omitted.
The grammatical principles of the present work, so far as they
extend, are the same as those contained in the Larger Grammar
already published in this country, the latter being designed to carry
forward the student in the same course which he had commenced in
the former. The work enjoys the highest reputation among classi-
cal scholars both in Europe and America. It is based on a thor-
iv PREFACE.
[2
ough acquaintance with the laws and usages of the language. The
author has evidently studied the genius of the Greek, and has thus
prepared himself to exhibit its forms and changes, and general phe-
nomena, in an easy and natural manner. His rules and statements
are comprehensive, embracing under one general principle a variety
of details. The analysis of the forms can hardly be improved. The
prefixes and suffixes, the strengthening and euphonic letters, are
readily distinguished from the root of the word. The explanation
of the Verb in particular, is so clear and satisfactory, that, after a
little practice, the student can take the root of any verb, and put it
into any given form, or take any given form and resolve it into its
elements. The rules of Syntax, too, are illustrated by so full a col-
lection of examples, that the attentive student cannot fail to under-
stand their application.
The work is designed to be sufficiently simple for beginners, and
also to embrace all the more general principles of the language
The plan is admirably adapted to carry the student forward under-
standingly, step by step, in the acquisition of grammatical knowl-
edge. As soon as the letters and a few introductory principles, to»
gether with one or two forms of the verb, have been learned (the
sections marked with a [7] being omitted), the student begins to
translate the simple Greek sentences into English, and the English
into Greek. As he advances to new forms or grammatical princi-
ples, he finds exercises appropriate to them, so that whatever he
commits, whether forms or rules, is put in immediate practice. The
advantage of this mode of study is evident. The practical applica-
tion of what is learned is at once understood; the knowledge ac-
quired is made definite; the forms and rules are permanently fixed
in the mind, and there is a facility in the use of them whenever
they may be needed. The student, who attempts to commit any
considerable portion of the Grammar without illustrative examples,
finds it difficult to retain in his memory what he has learned. There
is a confusion and indigtinctness about it. One form often runs into
another, and one rule is confounded with another. But if each suc-
cessive principle is carefully studied, and then immediately put in
PREFACE. v
practice, in translating the Greek and ‚English exercises, and is af-
terwards frequently reviewed, there will, in the end, be an immense
saving of time, the student will be prepared to advance with plea-
sure from the less to the more difficult principles, and in the subse-
quent part of his course, he will experience no difficulty in regard
to grammatical forms and rules. One of the most serious hin-
drances to the rapid and profitable advancement in the Greek and
Latin Languages, is a want of an intimate acquaintance with their
elementary principles.
The plan of the author proposes that the vocabularies accompa-
nying the exercises, be committed to memory. In doing this, the
student should be made to understand the value of the ear, as well
as of the eye, the advantage to be derived from the former being
‘altogether too much neglected in the acguisition of a foreign lan-
guage. When the student first sees. a new word, let him fix the
form distinetly in his mind, and associate with it its meaning, so
that the meaning may afterwards readily recall the word, or the
word the meaning. Then, too, let him pronounce the word, and
associate its meaning with its sound, so that when the word is again
heard, the meaning may at once suggest itself. The child acquires
its knowledge of language almost wholly by the ear; and if the
student in his efforts to learn a new language, would imitate the
ehild in this respect, his progress would undoubtedly be much more
rapid. This method would require that the words be often pro-
nounced, their definitions being at the same time carefully associa-
ted with them. This will in no way be so successfully accomplished
as by requiring the vocabularies to be committed to memory. If
the student knows that, when the Greek words are pronounced by
his teacher, he must give the definition, or that, when the definition
is given him, the corresponding Greek will be required, his atten-
tion will be more carefully and perseveringly directed to the forms
and sounds of the words in his exercises ; he will soon have at his
command an extensive vocabulary of the words in more common —
use, and will save much time, which is so often lost in turning
again an again to the same word in the lexicon. Such a process,
Ar |
vi PREFACE.
too, will be of great service in cultivating the habit of fixed and
close attention. In addition to the exercises contained in the
book, it will awaken new interest in the class, if the teacher give
exercises of his own, either in Greek or English, and require these
to be translated at once by the members of the class. It will be
profitable, also, for any one of the class to propose exercises for the
others to translate. On this subject generally, however, the expe-
rienced teacher will be able to point out the best course to his pupils.
In preparing the present work, it has been the aim of the trans-
lator to adapt it to the wants of students in this country. He has
occasionally, therefore, made slight changes in the original, where it
seemed desirable. Occasionally, too, he has given explanations of
his own in the body of the book, where he supposed the wants of
the younger pupils might require them. But all the principles of
the Grammar and nearly all the arrangement are retained as they
were given by the author. The translator has endeavored to make
such a book as the author himself would have done, under similar
᾿ eireumstances.
The English exereises in the Etymological Part of the Grammar,
were taken from the Greek Delectus of the late Dr. Alexander Al-
len, London, as they had been translated by him from the Elemen-
tary Grammar of Kühner. The exercises in the Syntax were trans-
lated by Mr. John N. Putnam, of the Theological Seminary, An-
dover.
In conclusion, the translator would acknowledge his special obli-
gations to Mr. R. D. C. Robbins, Librarian, Theological Seminary,
Andover, and to Mr. A. J. Phipps, Instructor in Phillips Academy,
for the highly valuable assistance they have rendered in correcting
the proofs.
ANDOVER. May 1. 1846.
ad
.12,
. Alphabet .
. Pronunciation of particular Let-
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAP. lL—Tue LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS.
ters A : ‘ ; 2
. Division of the Vowels.—Diph-
thongs ᾿ ς 2
. Division of the Osksonanie 3
Page 1|$ 5. Breathings
6.
7.
. Page4
Marks of Crasis and Elision 5
Movable Consonants at the end
of a word : : 5
8. Change of Consonants in Inflec-
tion and Derivation R 6
CHAP. IL— SYLLaAgLEs.
. Quantity of Syllables ..9
. Accentuation . . 9
. Change and Removal of the Ac-
cent by Inflection and Con-
traction : . 10
Change and Removal of the Ac-
cent in connected Discourse 12
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Atonics or Proclitics . 4182
Enclitics 2 18 °
Inclination of the Aa 13
Enclitics accented . . 14
Division of Syllables . 14
Punctuation-marks . . 15
CHAP. UI.—19. SOME GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VERB, Page 15.
CHAP. IV. —SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.
. Nature and Division of the Sub-
stantive 2 ᾿ . 17
. Gender of Substantives . 17
. Number, Case and Declension 18
. Nature and Gender of the Adjec-
tive ‘ . 9
. General View of the Preposi-
tions. : A . 1.9
. First Declension ; 20
. Endings of the first Dediaasten =“
. Feminine Nouns of the first De-
clension β 20
Masculine Nouns of the first De-
clension . ß . 24
28.
29.
30.
3l.
32.
33.
Second Declension . . 98
Contraction of the second De-
clension : , . 98
Attic second Declension 30
Third Declension . . 88
Remarks on the Case-endings of
the third Declension . 32
Gender, Quantity and Accentna-
tion of the third Declension 833
A. WORDS WHICH IN THE GENITIVE
HAVE A CONSONANT BEFORE THE
ENDING -oc, ji. 6. WORDS WHOSE
STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT.
viii TABLE OF CONTENTS.
$34. I. The Nominative exhibits the | § 42. II. Words in -nc, -e¢ . 4
pure Sem . . 34 | 43. Words in -w¢ (Gen. -wog), and in
35. II. The Nominative lengthens the -wc and -w (Gen. -oo¢) 46
short final vowel ofthe Stem 35 | 44. Words in -ac (Gen. “a0s); 8 and in
36. Syncopated nouns, 6. g. πατήρ, -o¢ (Gen. -eo¢) . 47
etc. ; . . 87] 45. II. Words in -ıs, -vs . 49
$7. The Nominative appends o to| 46. Words in -ic, -i,-vc,-v . 49
the Sem . . 38| 47. Irregular Nouns of the third De-
88. The Stem ends in a Tau-mute 39 clension : 51
39. Neuters ending in randxr 40; 48. Irregular Adjectives - 62
40. The Stem ends in v or vr 42| 49. Comparison of Adjectives 54
B. Worps waice 1x tHe Gexitive| 50. A. First form of Comparison 54
HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE THE END-| 51. B. Second form of Comparison 58
ING -ος : : : . 48] 52. Anomalous forms of Compari-
41. I. Substantives in -εύς, -αὖς, son 59
«οὖς . ° Φ e 43
CHAP. V.—ADVERB.
83. Nature, Division and Formation | 54. Comparison of Adverbs . 61
of the Adverb 5 . 60
CHAP, }1.--Ῥκοόκουκ.
55. Nature and Division of Pro-| 60. Demonstrative Pronouns . 66
nouns . : Ε . 62! 61. Relative Pronouns . . 66
56. Personal Pronouns . . 62) 62. Indefinite and Interrogative Pro-
57. Reflexive Pronouns . . 63 nouns . . 67
58. Reciprocal Pronoun . 64, 63. Correlative Pronouns . 68
59. Possessive Pronouns 65 | 64. Lengthening of Pronouns 69
CHAP. VIL—Nvumerats.
65. Nature and Division of the Nu- | 68. Declension of the first four Nu-
merals . : ; . 69 merals . ; 2 . 12
66. Numeral Signs - «+ 10] 69. Numeral Adverbs . . 78
67. Summary of the Cardinals and
Ordinals *. oe: cw. 70
CHAP. VIII.—Tuer Ver».
70. Nature ofthe Verb . . 73| 76. Conjugation of the Verb . 75
71. Classes of Verbs . . 73] 77. Stem, Augment and Reduplica-
72. Tenses. ; . . 74 tion.— Verb-characteristic 75
78. Modes . . . . 74| @8. Inflection-endings . . 76
74. Participials—Infinitive and Par-| 79. (a) Tense-characterisic and
ticiple » «ww Tense-endings . . 76
75. Numbers and Persons of the| 79. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-
verbr... vowels. . . . 77
$ 80.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
108.
104.
. Accentuation of the Verb
. More particular view of the Aug-
TABLE OF CONTENTS. ix
Remarks on the Personal-endings | $ 105. Remarks on the Characteristic
and Mode-vowels . 7
. Conjugation of the regular Verb
in -@ 79
. Remarks on the ‘Paradigm 84
. Remarks on the Formation of the
84
85
Attic Future
ment and Reduplicafion 91
. Syllabic Augment 91
. Temporal Augment 92
. Remarks on the Augment 92
. Reduplication 93
. Attic Reduplication 94
. Augment and Reduplication in
Compound Words 95
. Remarks on and Redu-
plication 96
. Division of Verbs in τῷ an
to the Characteristic, together
with Remarks on the Forma-
tion of the Tenses 96
. Formation of the Tenses of Pure
Verbs . 97
Verbs which retain the short
Characteristic Vowel in Form-
ing the Tenses 98
Formation of the Aor. Sad Fut.
Pass. and Perf. and Plup. Mid.
or Pass. with o . 99
Contract Pure Verbs 100
Remarks on the Conjugation of
Contract Verbs. « 104
Contract Verbs which retain the
short Characteristic-vowel in
Forming the Tenses 110
Paradigms of the above 110
Impure Verbs . 114
Strengthening of the Stem 114
Change or Variation of the
Stem-vowel 115
Remarks on the Sesondary
Tenses 116
A. More VERBS
Introduction to Mute Verbs 117
106.
| 117
Formation of the Tenses of
Mute Verbs 118
PaRADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS.
107.
1 07.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
121.
Verbs whose Characteristic is a
Pi-mute 119
Pure Characteristic ß, 7, ¢ 119
Impure Characteristic, x7 in
Pres. and Impf. 120
Verbs whose Characteristic is a
Kappa-mate . . 121
Verbs whose Characteristic is a
Tau-mute 121
B. Liqurp Verns.
Formation of the Tenses 124
Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 126
Shorter Paradigms arranged ac-
cording to the Stem-vowel of
the Future 128
With a in the Future 128
With e in the Future 129
With ¢ and ö in the Future 129
Special Peculiarities in the For-
mation of Single Verbs, both
Pure and Impure 132
Syncope and Metathesis . 134
Verbs in τω with the Stem of
the Pres. strengthened 134
Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthed in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting v before the
ending . 184
Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting ve before
the ending . 185
Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting ἄν, more
a av, before the end-
ing 137
(a) ἄν or acy is inserted withont
any change 137
121. (Ὁ) ἄν is inserted before the
Tense-ending and v is inser-
ted before the Characteristic-
consonant of the Pure Stem
137
4122. Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by annexing the two
Consonants ox or the syllable
LOK A ὃ ; 139
133. Verbs whose Pure Stem is
strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by prefixing the Redu-
plication . ; . 141
124. Verbs to whose Pure Stem e is
added in the Pres. and Impf.
142
125. Verbs whose Stem is Pure in
the Pres. and Impf., but which
in other Tenses assume a Stem
with the Characteristic e 143
$ 131. First Class of Verbs in “μὲ
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
151
132. Second Class of Verbs in -uı 153
133. Paradigms of Verbs in -wı 153
134. Remarks on the Paradigms 156
SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μί.
135. Verbs in -μό which annex the
Personal-endings to the Stem-
yowel . 163
135. Verbs in -α 163
136. Verbs in -e 166
137. Eli, to be, and eiut,togo 166
. Verbs in -«ı which annex the
syllable ννῦ or vd to the Stem-
vowel and append to this the
Personal-endings . 169
. Verbs whose Stem ends in a
Vowel and assumes ννῦ 170
126. Verbs whose Tenses are formed | 140. Verbs whose Stem ends in a
from different Roots, and Consonant and assumes νῦ 171
which are classed together only | 141- Inflection of κεῖμαι and ἦμας 172
in respect to signification 146 142. Verbs in -w which follow the
| analogy of Verbs in -wı, in
VERBS IN -μὶ. forming the second Aor. Act.
127. Conjugation of Verbs in -μέ 148 and Mid. . . . 178
128. Division of Verbs in -wı 148} 143, Olda, I know . 175
129. Mode-vowels 149| 144. Deponents, and Active Verbs
130. Personal-endings 149 whose Fut. has a Mid. form 176
SYNTAX.
CHAP. L—ELements or A SIMPLE SENTENCE.
145. Nature of a Sentence.— Subject.
—Predicate 179
146. Agreement. . 180
147. Exceptions to the General Rules
of Agreement . . 182
147b. Agreement when there are seve-
ral Subjects . 184
148. The Article. . 185
149. Classes of Verbs 193
150. Remarks on tbe Classes of
Verbs . : . . 198
151. Tenses and Modes . 198
152. More Particular View of the
Tenses : : . 198
153. More Particular View of the
Modes : ; . 208
153. Remarks on the Modal Adverb
dy : ; : 205
CHAP. IL—154. Arrripurives, Page 207.
CHAP. UI.—155. Tae Ossective Construction, Page 209.
' TABLE OF CONTENTS. xi
CasEs.
$156. Genitive ; . 209
157. Local Relation. — "Genitive of
Separation . . 209
158. Causal Relation of the Genitive
210
158. Active Genitive : . 210
158. Genitive as the expression of
Cause : : . 215
158. Genitive denoting certain Mu-
tual Relations . . 217
159. Accusative : : . 220
159. Accusative of Effect . 220
159. Accusative of the Object on
. which the action is perform-
ed ὲ Ε ? . 221
160. Double Accusative . 224
161. Dative. : a « 226
162. Prepositions . ᾿ . 230
A. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE.
163. Prepositions with the Gen. only,
ἀντί, πρό, ἀπό, ἐκ, ἕνεκα 231
164. Prepositions with the Dat. only,
ἐν, σύν ‘ . 283
165. Prepositions with the Acc. only,
ἀνά, ei, . . 338
$ 166. Prepositions with the Gen. and
Acc., διά, κατά, ὑπέρ . 235
167. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat.
and Acc., ἀμφί, περί, ἐπί; με-
τά, παρά, πρός, ὑπό. 237
168. Remarks on the Construction of
Verbal Adjectives in -T£og,
-Téa, -Téov, and on the Con-
struction of the Comparative
243
169. Remarks on the Use of Pro-
. nouns ; Ξ . 344
170. The Infinitive : 248
171. Infinitive without the Article 249
172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with
the Infinitive ; . 249
173. Infinitive with the Article 251
174. The Participle r . 252
175. The Participle as the Comple:
ment of the Verb . 253
176. The Participle used to express
Adverbial Relations and Sub-
ordinate en Circum-
stances -. 257
177. The Adverb . ὃ . 259
Syntax or COMPOUND SENTENCES.
CHAP. I.—178. Coörnınarıon, Page 268.
CHAP. IL—SUBORDINATION.
179. Principal and Subordinate
Clause . . 265
180. Substantive Sentenices . 266
181. Final Substantive-Sentences in-
troduced by we, iva, ete. 268
182. Adjective-Sentences . 270
183. Adverbial Sentences . 275
183. Adverbial Sentences of Place
and Time . : . 275
184. Causal Adverbial Sentences 278
185. Conditional Adverbial Senten-
ces ’ . 278
186. Adverbial Sentences denoting
Consequence or Effect 281
187. Interrogative Sentences . 283
188. Oblique or Indirect Discourse 285
203.
204.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
APPENDIX.
Homeric Diarectr.
. Remarks on the Hexameter 287
. Quantity 289
. Hiatus 2 290
. The Homeric Dialect 290
. Digamma 291
. Contraction. — Diaeresis.—Cra-
sis. —Synizesis.—Apocope 291
. Change of Consonants 292
DECLENSIONS.
. Suffix φιε(ν) 293
. First Declension 293
. Second Declension ‚294
. Third Declension 294
. Anomalous Words . 296
. Adjectives ; : . 297
. Comparison 297
Pronouns ‘ 4 . 297
Numerals ‘ a . 298
Tue VERB.
§ 205. Augment.—Reduplication
206. Personal-endings and Mode-
vowels
299
207. Contraction and Resolution in
Verbs ‘ ᾿ 3
208. Formation of the Tenses
209. Conjugation in -w .
210. Eli, to be
211. Eiwt, to go
300
302
302
303
VERBS IN - WHICH IN THE SECOND
Aor. Acr. axp Min., ΙΝ THE Pere.
AND PLur. Acr., anp Pres.
AND
IMPF., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF
VERBS IN -μί.
212. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 303
213. Perf. and Plup. Act.
214. Pres. and Impf.
304
304
ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER I.
THE LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS.
$1. Alphabet.
Tue Greek language has twenty-four ietters, vis.
Fors. Sounn. Nam
A «4 a Alga Alpha
B ß b Bra Bita
r y € Tape Garame
4 3 d Jdüre Delta
E ὃ e short 'E wilor Epsilon
Z ζ Γ Zire. ta
H 7 e long Hra Ets
Θ ϑ th Θῆτα Théta
I N i Jere. Tota
K x k Kanna
A A 1 Adupßda Lambda
„Mm u m Ms Mu
N γ n Nv Nu
5 & x Ξὲ xi
O 0 o shert Ὃ pingde Omicron
I " p ἔπε Pi
P 0 r ‘Po Rho
Σ σς Β Σίγμα Sigma
r φ t Ταῦ Tau
T v u Ὗ ψιλόν Upsilon
® 9 ph bi; Phi
X χ ch XT Chi
yw pe Wi Pri
R 0
. Ὁ
ἕ
eo
E
R
3 PRONUNCIATION.—DIVISION OF VOWELS. [98 2, 3.
Remanx. Sigma (σὴ takes the form ¢ at the end of a word; 6. g. σεισμός.
This small ¢ may be used ‘also in the middle of compound words, when the
first part of the compound ends with Sigma; 6. g. προςφέρω, δυςγενής.
§2. Pronunciation* of particular Letters.
a has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant im the same
syllable, 6. g. xaA-xöc ; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or ἐ, e. g. ἀνα».
στάσεως, στρατιώτης ; also when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a syllable
not final, e.g.4y-a-Dü, xa-ra ; it has the sound of a in father, when it is followed
by a single p, if in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word, except when
the word is a monosyllable, in which case it has the sound of a in fate, 6. g.
Bap-fta-pos, yap, ἀγαϑά, τά.
y before y, x, χ and £ has the sound of ng in angle, 6. g. ἄγγελος, ang-gelos,
’Ayxions, Anchises, συγκόπη, syncope, λάρυγξ, larynz ; y before vowels always has
the hard sound, like g in get. |
e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, 6. g. μέγ-ας, uer-@; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a
word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, or when it forms ἃ syllable by it-
self, 6. g. ye, 3é-w, προς-ἔ-ϑηκε.
ἢ has the sound of 6 in me, e. g. μονή.
ı has the sound of : in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, 6. g. ἐλπί-σι, ὅτι;
the sound of. in pin, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable,
6. g. πρίν, κίν-δυνος.
£ in the middle of a word has the sound of x, e.g. πρᾶξις ; at the beginning
of a word, the sound of ¢, 6. g. ξένος.
o has the sound of short o in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, e.g. Aöy-og, κῦ-ρος ; the sound of long ὁ in go, when it ends a
word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, e. g. τό, ὑπό, ϑο-ός.
o has the sharp sound of s in am; except it stands before μ, in the middle of
a word, or at the end of a word after 7 or w, where it has the sound of ¢, e.g.
σκηνή, νόμισμα, γῆς, κάλως. ;
T followed by ı never has the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. Γαλατία-- Galatia,
not Galashia.
v has the sound of u in tıdip, 6. g. τύχη.
x has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e.g. ταχύς.
@ has the sonnd of long o in note, e.g. ἄγω.
§3. Division of the Vowels.—Diphthongs.
s and o are always short vowels; ἡ and always long; «, ı and
v either long or short.
The short vowels are indicated by (“), the long by (7), e.g.
a, @ The mark (“) shows that the vowel may be either long or
short, 6. g. &.
% For rules on the division of syllables, see $ 17.
§ 4] DIPHTHONGS.—DIVISION OF CONSONANTS. 8
The diphthongs are :
os pronounced like at in atsle, 6. ᾳ. aif
εἰ “ “ eg « sleight, “ δεινός ,
ot “ “gg ὦ otl, “ κοινός
os “« “ wht “ whine, “ vids
av “ “ au “laud, “ ναῦρ
ev and sy “ “ en ὦ feudal, «ἔπλευσα, ηὖξον
ov and ὧν “ “ ou “ sound,* οὐρανός, οωὐτός ;
also a, ἢ and φ, i.e. ὦ, 7 and ὦ with an-Jota subscript. These
three diphthongs, which are called improper diphthongs, we pro-
nounce like a, 7 and ὦ without an Jota subscript.
Rem. 1. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded these
diphthongs, and how they are represented in English ; ac is expressed by the
diphthong ae, εἰ by t and &, v by y, οἱ by oe, ov by τ; 6. δ.
Φαῖδρος, Phaedrus, Evpo¢, Eurus, Θρᾷκες, Thraces,
Γλαῦκος, Glancus, Βοιωτία, Boeotia, Θρῷσσα, Thressa,
Νεῖλος, Nilus, Μοῦσα, Maga, τραγῳδός, tragoedus.
Avxeiov, Lyc&um, Εἰλεύϑυια, Tithyia,
Rem. 2. With the capital letters, the Iota subscript of ¢, y and is placed in
a line with the vowel; e.g. Ac==¢, Hi=y, Qe=y.
Rem. 3. When two vowels, which regularly form a diphthong, are to be pro-
nounced separately, it is indicated by two points called diaeresis, eo over the
second vowel (¢, v); e.g. ei, of, αὖ.
84. Division of the Oonsonants.
1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the organs by
which they are formed, into : .
Palatals, y x x
Linguals, ὃ t ®v di oc
Labials, B 2 ῳ p.
Exercise for Reading, ye. yy. καὶ. χε. χει..---ϑε. Sat. On. τα. τε.
£0. τῷ. τῳ. Tov. rav. ty. 8ι. Gar. dw. pala. vv. vas. vEw. 97. θῶ.
ga. gu. Ge. σα. σον. σευω. --- βου. βουν. Bara. Badle. πι. wor.
πῶ. παν. Pi. POO. Pav. φυγή. Mv. μη. μοι.
2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or less
influence of the organs of speech in their formation, into:
(a) Semi-vowels, viz. A u 9 9, which are called Liquids, and the
sibilant o;
(Ὁ) Mutes, viz. By 32x ¢ yy. These nine mutes are divided .
* By some, however, pronounced like ou in groep. .
a BREATHINGS. [§ 3,
(a) According to the organ of epeech, into three Palatals, three
Linguals and three Labials ;
(b) According to their names, into three Kappa-mutes, three Tau-
mutes, and three Pi-mutes ;
(c) According to the stress of artieulation, into three smooth Mutes,
three medial Mutes, and three rough Mutes. |
ROUGH,
1 Kappa-mutes
|S TS [| TS EE (| ERE ERE ἢ eae yt cS
ϑ Tau-mutes
ee eee | epeceietneeeetee |) eee ees | eee ee
gt β φ Pi-mutes.
8. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the sibilant o, three
double consonants originate,—
wy from no Bo go
— from xe yo yo
ζ from do.
Exercise for Reading. λαμβδα. λαμβανω. pv. pedlog. pada. vv.
PUXTES. νυσσω. ρευσις. ρίπτω. σιγμα. TEV. καππα. καιφα. κοινὸν.
γαρ. γραν. χϑων.---τον. τὴν. τοῖν. τεμφω. τραῦμα. Celta. δεοινοτῆς.
Gea. θητα. θαυμα. ϑαυμασια. ----πανετὰα. πρῶτα. ποιῶ. πανομεν.
βητα. Bawo, Ballo. βλαπτομδν. φευγω. φονδυώ. φειδομαι. --- ψι.
ψανω. ψαλλω. ψαλτηρ. ψυχη. ξι. ξεχκος. ξανϑος. Euros. Insa.
ζητησις.
$5. Breathings.
1. Every vowel is pronounced with a Breathing ; this is either a
smooth or rough Breathing. The smooth is indicated by the mark
(’), the rough by (°). One of these marks is placed over every
vowel which begins a word; 6. g. wor, ἰσεηρια. The rough breath-
ing corresponds to the English and Latin 4. The smooth breathing
is connected with every vowel, which has not the rough.
2. In diphthongs, the mark of the breathing is placed over the
second vowel; 6. g. vios, evdvg, αὐτικα.. But when the improper
diphthongs α, y, 9, are capital letters, the breathing is placed over
the first vowel ; 6. g. “4idn¢, pronounced like «dns, Hades.
8. The liquid g is pronounced with the rough breathing, and
hence has the mark of the breathing at the beginning of the word ;
e. g. ῥαβδος. When two o’s occur in the middle of a word, the first
88 6,7.] CRABIS AND ELISION.— MOVABLE. CONSONANTS. 5
is pronounced with the smooth breathing, the last with the rough.
The first has the mark of the smooth, the last that of the rough
e. g. Πυῤῥος. |
Exercise for Reading. ἀλφα. αὐξανω. αἰϑηρ. αἷμα. ἐμον. ἕκων.
εἶτα. εἷμα. εὐρει. εὐρισκω. ὀλιγον. Oivov. οἷον. οἷον. Ara. ηὐξον.
ἥκων. tore. iva. ἱπποι. ὑπο. υἱοι. tony. ἀδω. Nıön.
86. Mark of Orasis and Elision (Corönis—
Apostrophe.)
1. The mark of Crasis and Elision is the same as the amooth
breathing.
2. When two words come together, the one ending, and the other
beginning, with a vowel, these two vowels frequently coalesce and
form one long syllable. This coalescence is called Crasis, and the
mark by which it is indicated, Corönis. The Coronis is placed
over the syllable formed by Crasis, and when this syllable is a diph-
thong, over the second vowel. But the Coronis is omitted, when,a
word begins with a vowel or diphthong formed by crasis; e. g. τὸ
ὄνομα == τοὔνομα, τὸ ἔπος = τούπος, τὰ ἀγαϑά = τἀγαϑά, ὁ οἶνος
= ᾧνος. .
᾿ Rum. In Crasis the Jota subscript ($ 3) is written only when the ¢ belongs to
the last of the coalescing vowels ; 6. g. καὶ elra=adra; but καὶ ἔπειτατεικἄάπειτα.
8. Eiisten is to be distinguished from Crasis. It consists in the
omission of a vowel before a word beginning with a vowel. The
mark by which Elision is indicated, is called Apostrophe ; 6. g. ἀπὸ
οἴκου = an οἴκου. The Apostrophe i is omitted in compound words ;
6. g. ἀπέφερον from ἀπο-ἔφερον.
187. Movable Consonants at the end of.a word.
1. Another means of avoiding the coneurrence of two vowels in’
two successive words, is by appending ay (called » re,
suffixed ) to certain final syllables, viz.
(«) to the Dat. PL in σι, to the two adverbs, πέρυσι, the last year,
παντάπασι, umiversally, end all adverbs of: place in σε; 6. g.
πᾶσιν ἔλεξα ; ἡ Πλαταιᾶσιν ἡ ἡγεμονία § 5
(ß) to the third Pers. Sing. and Pl. in σε; eg. τύπτουσιν ἐμέ,
_ φτίϑησιν ἐν τῇ τραπέζῃ ; so also to ἐστί;
(7) to the third Pers. Sing. in 8; 6. g. ἔτυπτεν ἐμέ;
(δ) to the numeral εἴκοσι, although even before vowels the # is
often omitted; ¢. g. εἴκοσιν ἄγδρες and εἴκοσι ἄνδρες ;
1%
é CHANGE OF CONSONANTS: [$ 8.
Ram. In Attic prose, v ἐφελκυστικόν regularly stands at the end of complete
eactions, and sometimes before the longer punctuation-marks, where no vowel
follows. ;
2. The word οὕτως (thus) always retains its full form before a
vowel, but drops its final o before another consonant; 6. g. ov rag
ἐποίησεν, but οὕτω ποιῶ. So also ἄχρις and μέχρις.
8. In like manner the Prep. ἐξ (ex) retains its full form before
vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants takes the
form ἐκ; 6. g. ἐξ εἰρήνης, εἰρήνης ἐξ, but ἐκ τῆς εἰρήνης ; so also in
composition ; 6. g. ἐξελαύνειν, but ἐχτελεῖν.
4. So the negative οὐκ (not) becomes ov before aconsonant; e. g,
οὐκ αἰσχρός, but οὐ καλός ; and before a rough breathing it becomes
οὐχ; 6. g. οὐχ ἡδύς ; yet not before the aspirate g; e. g. ov ῥίπτω.
TSS: Change of Consonants in Inflection and
Derivation.
1. A Tau-mute (z ὃ @) before another Tau-mute is changed
into 0; ©. g.
ἐπείϑ.ϑην from πείϑω becomes ἐπείσϑην
πειϑ-τέδο “ ᾳείϑω “ πειστέος
hpeiö-Inv “ΣΖᾷἐρείδω ε ἠρείσϑην.
2. A Pi-mute (a 8 φ) before pis ange into jt,
a Kappa-mute (x74) “ p “7,
a Taumute (7859) “ u ἐξ “ zeug
(a) Pimute: λέλειπομαι from λείπω becomes λέλειμμα,
τέτριβ-μαι : τρίβω “Ὁ τέτριμμαι
γέγραφμαι “γράφω “ γέγραμμαι
(2) sie ee “Oo nn “ πέπλεγμαι
Aéhey-pat “ Ayo = remains λέλεγμαι
BéBpex-pat ““βρέχω becomes βέβρεγμαι
a
(y) Tau-mute: ἤἦνυτ-μαι “ Σᾷἀνὕύτω ἤνυσμαι
ἤρειδομαι “ς-ΣἀἐρείωωἬ “ ἤρεισμαι
πέπειϑιμι. “Φ meiden “ πέπεισμαι
κεκόμδ-᾽ι με “Ὁ κομίζωωηὠω “ κεκόμιαμαι.
8 A Pimute (πβ φ) with σ is changed into ψ,
a Kappa-mute (x y x) with o is changed into $,
a Tau-mute (s ö 9) disappears before 0 ; 6. g.
(s) Pi-mute: λεΐνσω from λείπω becomes λεΐψω
τρίβσω τρίβω τρίψω
ypagow “ γράφω “Ὁ γράψω
(8) Eappe-mute: πλσθ, “ ὄπλέκω -πλέξω
“λέγω “aM
βρέ βρέχ Bote
OW “ rm) 1 Ω
(7) Tan-mute : ἀνύτσυ ae ἀνὅτω “« évbou
πείϑαω “ set du 6 weiow
ἐλπίδδωω: “ bAriva a ἐλπΐσω.
8 8. CHANGE OF CONSONANTS.
7
Remark 1. The Prep. ex before σ is an exception; 6. g. ἐκσώζω, not ἐδώζω.
4. N before a Pi-mute (2 βὶ φ w) is changed into u,
N before a Kappa-mute (x y x §) is changed into 7,
N before a Tau-mute (7 ὃ 9) is not changed; e. g.
᾿ἐν-πειρία becomes ἐμπειρία ovv-kaliw becomes συγκαλέω
ἐν-βάλλω «“ ἐμβάλλω συν-γιγνώσκω Ἅ“ συγγιγνώσκω
ἔν. φρων “4 ἔμφρων σύν-χρονος “ σύγχρονος
ἔν- ψῦχος “ ἔμψθχος συν-ξέω a συγξέω ;
but ovvreivo, συνδέω, συνϑέω.
Rum. 2. The enclitics form an exception; e.g. ὄνπερ, révye, not ὄμπερ, Töyye.
5. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid ; e. g.
συν-λογίζω becomes συλλογίζω συν-μετρία becomes συμμετρία
ἐν-μένω ae ἐμμένω vr Pinto + συῤῥίπτω.
Ren. 3. The preposition ἐν before p is an exception; 6. g. ἐνρίπτω, not ἐῤ-
ῥίπτω.
6. N is dropped before o and ζ; the preceding vowel, short by
nature, remains short after the omission of » before a ; e.g.
συν-ζυγία becomes συζυγέα, δαίμον-σι becomes δαέμοσι.
Rum. 4. Exceptions: 'E v, e.g. ἐνσπείρω, ἐνζεύγνυμι; παλῖν, eg. radin
σκίος ; some forms of inflection and derivation in -cas and -σὶς ; 6. g. πέφανσαι
from φαίνω, and some few substantives in -ἰνς and -ὖνς, The » of σύν in com-
position, is changed into o before another o followed by a vowel; e. g. συσσώζω,
instead of συνσώζω ; but when σ᾽ is followed by a consonant, » is dropped ; e.g.
σύν-στημα becomes σύστημα.
7. But when » is joined with a Tau-mute, both mutes disappear
before o, and, as a compensation, the short vowel is lengthened be-
fore o, namely, 8 into &, o into ov, &, i, ὕ into ὦ, i, 0; 6. g.
τυφϑέντ-σι becomes τυφϑεῖσε — AgovT-ct becomes λέουσι
orévd-ow “ oreiow ἕλμινδ-σι “ EAuloı
RAVT-OL νὰ πᾶσι δεικνύντ-σι Νὴ δεικνῦσι
τύψαντ-σι = τὐψάσι Ξενοφῶντ-σι ““ Ξιενοφῶσι.
8. A Pi-mute (2 8 9) or a Kappa-mute (x 7 x) before a Tau-
mute, must be of the same order as the Tau-mute, i. e. smooth, mid-
dle or rough. Hence only a smooth Mute (z x) can stand before
the smooth Mute 7; only a medial (8 7) before the medial 3; only
an aspirate (9 x) before the aspirate 9; consequently, zz and xr;
Bd and 73; gd and y@; 6. g.
A before tT becomes mas: from τρίβω τέτριβ.ιται = τέτριπται
τ πο" γράφω γέγραφ-ται = γέγραπται
: “rer “ g “ λέγω λέ “Ταὶ == λέλεκται
χ “rer “ x “6 £6 βρέχω βέβρεχ-ται = βέβρεκται
aeg « “ “ κύπτω κύπ-δα = κύβδα
“ud u Bu & γράφω γράφιδνν = γράβδην
μ “ug & y* «πλέκω eins = πλέγδην
8 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [938
x before 4 becomes y as: from βρέχω βρέχ-δην zz βρέγδην ᾿
φ “ “ πέμπω ἐπέμπ-ϑην -- ἐπέμφϑην
B 66 4 “ φ “ 66 τρίβω ἐτρίβ-ϑην == ἐτρίφϑην
key & ys ς πλέκω ἐπλέκ-ϑην — ἐπλέχϑην
y “8 « x“ “ yo ἐλέγ-ϑην = ἐλέχϑην.
Rem. 5. The preposition ἐκ does not undergo this change ; e. g. ἐκδοῦναι, ἐκ-
ϑεῖναι, etc., not ἐγδοῦναι, ἐχϑεῖναι.
9. The smooth mutes (π x τ) before a rough breathing, are chan-
ged into the cognate aspirates (9 x 9), not only in inflection and
derivation, but also in two sepaxate words. The medials (6 7 δ),
however, are thus changed only in the inflection of the verb; in
other cases they remain unchanged ; hence:
ἀπ’ ob = ἀφ᾽ ob, ἐπήμερος om ἐπί, ἡμέρα) = ἐφήμερος
ἐπυφαίνω (from ἐπί, ὑφαίνω) = ἐφυφαίνω, TETUn-d = τέτυφα
οὐκ ὁσίως ΞΞ = οὐχ ὁσίως, δεκήμερος (from δέκα, ἡμέρα) = δεχήμερος
ἀντ’ ὧν = dv¥ ὧν (from ἀντί), ἀντέλκω (from ἀντί, ἔλκω) = ἀνθέλκω
εἰν τς —elAoxa, but λέγ᾽ ἑτέραν, not λέχ᾽ ἑτέραν.
τέτριβ-ἁ = τέτριφα, but tpi’ οὕτως, not τρῖφ᾽ ae
Rex. 6. This change also takes place in Crasis; 6. g. Sérepa from τὰ ἕτερα
(4 6.2). When two smooth mutes precede an aspirate, they must both be chan-
ged into aspirates (No. 8); ©. g. ἐφϑήμερος, instead of ἑπτήμερος (from ἑπτά,
ἡμέρα), νύχϑ'᾽ ὅλην, instead of νύκτ᾽ ὅλην.
10. ¥f, in the reduplication of verbs, whose stem begins with an
aspirate, this aspirate is to be repeated, then the first aspirate is
changed into the corresponding smooth Mute; thus,
φε-φίληκα from en is nun into πεφίληκα
χέ-χῦκα “xf KEIUKG .
ϑέ-ϑῦκα “ iw ἡ τέϑυκα ı
di-Onu stem OE “ τίϑημι.
Ihe two verbs, ϑύειν», to sacrifice, and τιϑέγαι (stem OE), to place,
also follow this rule, in the passive endings which begin with 9 ; e. g.
ἐτύ-ϑην, τυ-ϑήσομαι, ἐτέ-ϑην, τε-ϑήσομαι, instead of ἐθϑύ-ϑην, EIE-Imv.
11. In words whose stem begins with 7 and ends with an aspirate,*
the aspiration ia transferred to the smooth τ, when the aspirate be-
fore the final syllables beginning with o, 7 and u, must be changed
into an unaspirated consonant (according to No. 3. 8.. 2.) ; by this
transfer, τ is changed into the aspirate 9. Thus:
τρέφ-ω is changed into (ϑρέπ-σω) vi le epee tap (ϑρέπμα) ϑρέμμα
ταφή, ΤΑΦ-ὦ into ϑάψω, ϑώπ-τω, (τέϑαπο-μαι) τέϑαμμαι
τρύφος, ΤΡΎΦ-ὦ into ϑρύψω, ϑρύπ-τω (τέϑρυπ-μαι) τέϑρυμμαι
* Some other Grammarians regard the words to which this principle applies,
as having two aspirates in the root; but as it is not euphonic for two successive
ram to begin with an aspirated letter, the first must be smooth, as long as
e second remains, and when the second disappears, the first becomes rough
again ; hence ἔχω (properly ἔχω), but Fut. &e.—Tx.
65 9, 10.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.—ACCENTUATION. 9
τρέχε into ( ϑρέχεσομαι) ϑρέξομαι ;---τριχ-ός into ϑρίξ, ϑριξίν
ταχύς has ϑάσσων in the oor (But τεύξω from τεύχω, τρύξω
from τρύχω, remain unchanged).
Rem. 7. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, τρέφω, ϑάπτω (stem
TA®), ϑρύπτω (stem TPY®), begin with 9, the aspiration of the two final com
sonants ¢¥, ehanges 7, the initial consonant of the stem, into 3; e. g.
ἐϑρέφ-ϑην, ϑρεφ- ϑῆναι, ϑρεφ-ϑήσεσϑαι
ἐϑάφ.ϑην, ϑαφ.ϑεῖς, ἜΤΟΣ τεϑάφ-ϑαι.
Rex. 8. In the imperative-ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both syllables
would begin with 3, viz. -ϑηϑιέ, not the first, but the last aspirate is changed into
the corresponding smooth mute, thus: -Önrı; 6. g. τύφϑητι, not τύφϑηϑι."
12. P is doubled,—(a) when the augment is prefixed; e. g. ἔῤ-
ὅδον ; (Ὁ) in composition, when ρ 18 preceded by a short vowel; e.g.
ἄῤῥηκτος, βαϑύῤῥοος ; but εὔτρωστος (from ev and godvvupt).
CHAPTER II.
SYLLABLES.
89. Quantity of Syllables. \
1. A syllable is short by nature, when its vowel is short, viz. δ᾽
9, &, t, v, and when a vowel or single consonant follows a short vow-
el; 6. g. ᾿δνδ μισὰ, Env Ero.
2. A syllable i is long by natufe, when the vowel i 15 8 simple, long
vowel, viz. 7, ὦ, &, i, ¥, oradiphthong ; 6. g. “ρῶς, κρένω, γέφῦρα,
ἰσχύρους, παϊδεύῇς ; hence contracted syllables are always long;
6. ξ- "ἄκων (from ἀέκων), Borovs (from βότρυας).
3. A syllable with a short vowel is made long by position, when
two or more consonants or a double consonant (¢ § w) follow the
short vowel; 6. g. ᾿ἐκστέλλω, εὐψᾶντες, κόραξ (κόρῶκος), τράπεζα.
Rexarr. But when a short vowel stands before a mute and liquid, it regu-
larly remains short; 6. g. dréxvoc, ἄπέπλος, ᾿ἄκμή, βότρυς, didpüxuos. In two
eases, however, ἃ short vowel before a mute and liquid is made long, —{a) in
eomposition ; 6. g. ᾿ἐκνέμω ; (Ὁ) when one of the medials (3 y δ) stands before
one of the three liquids, A u v ; 6. g. βίβλος, eböduog, πέπλεγμαάι.
810. Accentuatton.
1. The accentuation of a word of two or more syllables, consiste
in pronouncing one syllable with a stronger* or clearer tone than
# In our pronunciation of the.Greek, however, we do uot observe the written ,
accent; θα the Greeks undoubtedly distinguished the syllable on which the
written accent stands, by a greater stress of voice. —TR.
10 CHANGE OF ACCENT BY INFLECTION, BTC. (§ 11.
the other ; 6. g. destrictible, immörtal. A monosyHabic werd also,
must be accented, so as to form, in connected discourse, an indepen-
dent sound. The Greek language has the following marks of ac-
centuation :
(a) The acute (’), to denote the sharp tone ; 8. g. λόγος ;
(Ὁ) The circumflex.(~), to denote the protracted tone; 6. g.
σώμα;
(c) The grave (ἢ), to denote a softened acute on the final sylla-
bles of words in connected discourse (§ 12, 1.). The grave
is also used instead of the acute to distinguish certain words ; 5
e. g. τὶς, any one, and τίς, who ὃ
Rem. 1. The accent stands upoi the second vowel of diphthongs; and, at the
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand after
the breathing, but the circumflex over it ; 6. g. ἅπαξ, atAecog, ἂν εἴπης, ebpog, αἷμα.
But with capital letters, the accent is placed after the breathing, over the first vowel
of the diphthongs ¢, 9, »; e.g. "Αἰδης. With the diaeresis (αὶ 3. Rem. 3.), the
acute stands between, and the circumflex over, the points; e. g. ἀΐδης, κληῖδι.
2. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether
this is long or short; 6. g. καλός, ἀνθρώπου, πόλεμος ; yet upon the
antepenult, only when the last is short, and is not long by position ;
6. g. ἄνϑρωπος, but ἀνθρώπου.
3. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two syllables,
but that syllable must always be long by nature; e.g. τοῦ, cope;
it stands upon the penult, however, only when the ultimate is short,
or long by position only; e. g. τεῖχος, χρῆμα, πρᾶξις, αὐλαξ (Gen.
-0.%05), xalavgoy, κατήλιψ, Anuovef.
Rem. 2. According to the accentuation of the last syllable, words have the
following names:
(a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute; 6. g. τετυφώς, κακός, Jip ;
(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute; 6. g. τύπτω ; :
(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute; 6. g. ἄνθρωπος, τυ-
πτόμενος, ἄνϑρωποι, τυπτόμενοι ;
(d) Perispoména, when the ultimate has the eirenmflex ; e. g. κακῶς;
(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the cireumflex: e/g. πρᾶγμα, 9
λοῦσα;
(7) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented ; 6. g. πράγματα, πρᾶγμα.
T§11. Ohange and Removal of the Accent by In-
flection and Contraction.
1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quantity
of its final syllable or in the namber of its syllables, then, according
§ 11.} CHANGE OF THE ACORENT BY INFLEOTION, ETC. il
40 the preceding rules, there is generally also a change or. removal
of the accent.
(a) By lengthening the final syllable,
(a) A Proparoxytone, as πόλεμος, becomes ἃ ere ;
6. g. πολέμου:
(8) A Properispomenon, as ψεῖχος, a Paroxytone; e.g. rei-
yous ;
(7) An Oxytone, as ϑεός, a Perispomenon;e.g.@eov. Yet
this change is limited to particular instances. See § 26,
: 5, (a).
(b) By shortening the final syllable,
(«) A dissyllabic Paroxytone with long penult, as φεύγω,
becomes a Properispomenon; 6. g. gevye, but τἄτεω,
tärze;
(8) A polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long
or short, becomes a Proparoxytone ; e. g. βουλεύω, Bov-
deve.
(c) By the accession of a syllable or syllables at the beginning of
a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the beginning of
the word; 6. g. φεύγω, ἔφευγον. By the accession of syllables at
the end of a word, on the contrary, the accent is removed towards
the end of the word; 6. g. τύπτω, τυπτόμεϑα, τυφϑησόμεϑα.
Rem. 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and the
exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below under the accen:
tuation of the several parts of speech.
2. In respect to contraction, the following principles apply :
(1) When neither of two syllables to be contracted is accented,
the contracted syllable also is unaccented, and the syllable which,
previous to contraction, had the accent, retains it also after the con-
traction ; 6. g. giles == φίλει, but φιλέδι == φιλεῖ, γένεϊ = γένει, γ8-
ψέων == γενῶν.
(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is accent-
ed, the contracted syllable also is accented:
(a) The contracted syllable when composed of the antepenult and
penult, takes the accent which the general rules require; e. g-
ἀγαπάομαι = ἀγαπῶμαι φιλεόμενος = φιλούμενος
ἑσταότος -- ἑστῶτος ὀρϑόουσι ἘΞ ὀρϑοῦσι
ὑλήεσσα == ὑλῆσσα ὃ | τιμαόντων -- τιμώντων ;
(Ὁ) The contracted syllable, when it is the ultimate, takes:
(a) The acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted
has the acute; 6. g. ἑσταύς = ἑστώς ;
12 CHANGE OF ACCENT.——ATONTOS. [$$ 12, 18.
(8) The circumflex, when ahs Beet Of as ey Ean io be com-
tracted, is accented ; 6. g. "yok en ἠχοῖ.
Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below under the
contracted declensions and conjugations.
1§12. Change and Removal of the Arcent in
connected Discourse.
1. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of the grave, i. 6.
by the close connection of the werds with each other, the sharp tune is weaken-
ed or depressed ; 6. g. El μὴ μητρυιὴ περικαλλὴς "Hepißora ἦν. But the acute
must stand before every punctuation-mark, by which an actual division is made
in the thought; 6. g. Ὁ μὲν Κῦρος ἐπέρασε τὸν ποταμόν, ol δὲ πολέμιοι ἀπέ-
φύγον.
: Exceptions. The interrogatives ric, τί, quis? quid? always remain oxytoned.
2. In Crasis (§ 6. 2), the accent of the first word is omitted, and the word formed
from the two, has the accent of the second word ; 6. g. τὰ ἀγαϑά = rayada, τοῦ
οὐρανοῦ == τοὐρανοῦ, τῇ ἡμέρᾳ == ϑὴμέρᾳ, τὸ ὄνομα = τοὔνομα ; yet, according
to the general rule ($ 10. 3), the long vowel formed by Crasis takes the circum-
dex instead of the acute, when the second word was a dissyllabie paroxytone,
with a short final syllable; 6. g. τὸ ἔπος = τοὗπος, τὰ ἄλλα = τάλλᾳ, τὸ ἔργον
= τούργον, τὰ ὅπλα = Borda.
8. In Elision ($ 6, 3), the accent of the elided vowel goes back as an acute upon
the preceding syllable; yet, when the word, from which a vowel has been elided,
is a preposition or one of the particles, ἀλλά, οὐδέ, μηδέ, or one of the enclitics,
τινά and ποτέ, the accent of the elided vowel wholly disappears, and also when
the accented vowel of monosyllabie words is elided ; e. g.
πολλὰ Enadov = πόλλ᾽ ἔπαϑορ παρὰ é == παρ᾽ ἐ
δεινὰ ἐρωτᾷς = δείν᾽ ἐροτὸς ἀπὸ pater = ἀφ᾽ Psi
φημὶ ἐγ = ony’ ἀλλὰ ἐγώ = == ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ
τ τ ρα, ἔλεξας == aloyp’ ἔλεξας οὐδὲ ἐγώὥ: «-- οὐδ᾽ "6
ἑπτὰ ἦσαν = Ent’ ἧσαν τιμὰ ἔλεγε = τιν᾽ ἔ
7818. Atonics or Proclities.
Some small words are termed Atonics or Prodlitics, which, in
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following word,
that they, as it were, coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They
are:
(a) the forms of the article, 6, 7, οἱ, ai;
(b) the prepositions, ἐν, in, εἰς (85), into, ἐκ (ἐδ, ex, ὡς, ad;
(c) the conjunctions, es, as, that, so that, when, ei, if;
(d) ov (οὐκ, οὐχ), not; but at the end of ἃ sentence and with the
meaning No, it has the accent; 6. g. ov (οὔκ).
-
$$ 14, 15.] ENCLITIOS.-INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 18
1814 Enclitics.
Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in certain cases, to the
preceding word, that they either lose their tone, or throw it back
upon the preceding word; 6. g. φίλος zes, πόλεμύς tie. They sre:
(a) The verbs εἰμί, to be, and φημί, to say, in the Pres. Indic., except the
second Pers. Sing. el, thou art, and ¢7¢, thou sayest ;
(Ὁ) The following forms of the three personal pronouns :
LP. 8. μοῦ | ILP.S.ooö | I. Ῥ. 5. οὗ Dual. σφωΐν Pi. σφίσι(ν)
μοί σοί οἱ
μέ σέ g
(c) The indefinite pronoun, ris, ri, through all the cases and numbers, to-
gether with the abridged forms rod and τῷ, and the indefinite adverbs πώς,
πώ, 7H, Tov, ποϑί, ποϑέν, rot, ποτέ; the corresponding interrogative words,
on the contrary, are always accented ; 6. g. τίς, Ti, πῶς, ete. ;
᾿(ἅ) The particles, τέ, roi, γέ, viv, πέρ, ϑήν, and the inseparable particle, δέ,
both when it expresses the direction whither; 6. g. "Epeßöcde, to Erebus, and also
when it serves to strengthen a word ; 6. g. τοσόςδε.
1815. Inclination of the Accent.
1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the ae-
cent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence G 12.1),
again becomes acute; e. g.
ϑήρ τις for ϑὴρ τὶς καλός ἐστιν for καλὸς ἐστίν
καί τινες ““ καὶ τινές ποταμός γε “ ποταμὸς γέ
καλύς τε “5 καλὸς τέ ποταμοί τινες ““ ποταμοὶ τινές.
2. A Perispomenon unites with the folowing enclitic withont
further change of the accent; e. g.
φῶς τι for φῶς τὶ φιλεῖτις ἴων φιλεῖ τὶς
φῶς ἐστιν ““ φῶς ἐστίν ᾿ καλοῦ τινος “καλοῦ τινός.
REMARK. Long syllables in enelitics age considered in respect to-the accen-
tuation as short; hence olyrivaiy, ὦντενων are viewed as separate er compound
words, like καλῶν τίνων.
8. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic enclitie
without further change of the accent; but there is no inclination
when the enclitic is a dissyllable ; 6. g.
ee bane cot Ge μήν ΝΕ
4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the fol-
lowing enelitie, and take an acute accent on the last syllable.
ἄνϑρωπός τις for ἄνϑρωπος τὶς σῶμά rı for σῶμα τὶ
ἄνθρωποί τινες “ ἄνϑρωποι τινές σῶμά ἐστιν “ σῶμα ἐστίν.
2
14 ENCLITICS ACCENTED.— DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. [§§ 16, 17.
Remark. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back its accent
on the preceding; 6. g. ef πέρ τίς σέ μοί φησί more.
1816. Enclities Accented.
1. The enclitics at the beginning of a sentence, retain their accent; 6. g. 7-
μὲ ἐγὼ τοῦτο.----Τινὲς λέγουσιν.---Εἰσὶ Seoi.—Bat instead of éori(y) at the be-
ginning of a sentence, the form ἔστι(») ia used; alse, if it stands in connection
with an Inf. for ἔξεστι(ν), and after the particles ἀλλ, el, οὐκ, μή, ὡς, καί, μέν,
ὅτι, ποῦ, also after the pronoun τοῦτ᾽ ; 6. g."Eore ϑεός.--- στι σοφὸς avip.—
Ἔστιν οὕτως.--- Ἔστιν ἰδεῖν, ἰδεῖν ἔστιν, licet videre.—El ἔστιν, οὐκ ἔστιν, τοῦτ᾽
ἔστιν.
2. Φημί and the other persons of the Ind., retain the accent, if they are sepa-
rated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark; 6. g. Ἔστιν ἀνὴρ üya-
ϑός, φημί. :
8. The enclitic personal pronouns, σοῦ, col, σέ, ol, σφίσι(ν), retain their ac-
cent:
(a) When an accented Prep. precedes; 6. g. παρὰ σοῦ, μετὰ σέ, πρὸς σοί. In
this case, instead of the enclitic forms of the Pron. of the first Pers., the
longer, regularly accented forms are chosen ; e. g.
παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ not παρά pov, πρὸς ἐμοί not πρός pot,
Kar’ ἐμέ. “ Kara pe, περὶ ἐμοῦ “ περί μον.
RemARK. The unaccented prepositions are united to the enclitic forms ; e. g.
ἔκ μου, Ev μοι, ἔς σε, ἔς με, Ex cov, ἔν σοι.
(0) After oopalative or disjunctive conjunctions; 6. g. ἐμὲ καὶ σέ, ἐμὲ ἢ σέ,
as generally, when the pronouns are emphatic, 6. g. in antitheses.
(c) The forms ot, ol, &, are accented only when they are used as reflexive
pronouns.
4. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the en-
elitic rests, disappears by Elision; e.g. καλὸς δ᾽ ἐστίν, but καλὸς δέ ἐστιν --
πολλοὶ & εἰσίν, but πολλοὶ δέ εἰσιν.
1817. Division of Syllables.
PRELIMINARY Remaek: The division of syllables, according to our mode of
pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the aceent.*
The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word.
1. In dissyllables, a single consonant following a or ı in the penult, is joined
to the final syllable; e. g. d-yw, πα-ρά, μά-λα, I-va, ἱ-τός, I-xwp.
2. In dissyliables, a single consonant following e or 0, is joined to the first
syllable; 6. g. λόγ-ος, τέλεος. ᾿
#* The term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference
to our pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek
95:18, 19.] PURETUATION-MARKA.— VIEWS OF THE VERB. 15
3. The double consonants £ and 7 are joined to the vowel preceding them;
e. g. TGS-w, δίψ-ος, πρᾶξ-ις, üvrıraf-üuevog. But ¢ is joined to the vowel fol-
lowing it, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the an-
tepenult—in which case it is joined with these vowels; 6. g. voui-Cw, νόμι-ζε,
dprü-lo ; but τράπεξζ-α, 5L-06, νομίζ-ὀμεν, ἀρπάζοομεν.
4. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and
ı having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and o having
the accent, is joined to these vowels; 6. g. dyadic, ποτραμός, βα-σιλ-έα, ὑ-πολ-
αβών, ὁ-πότ-ερος, τίϑ-ομεν.
Exception. A single consonant after an accented syllable, and followed by two
vowels, the first of which is e or ¢, is joined to the vowel after it; e. g. στρα-τίω,
ἀναστώ-σεως, στρα-τιώτης. : ; :
5. A single consonant after a long vowel or v is joined to the vowel follow-
ing; ©. g. φω-νή, χρή-μα, ἥ-κω, Sul-Aoc, ὀπα-δός; apyi-poc, pi-piac, ἀϑῦ-μία,
φῦ-γόντες, gb-youer.
Exception. A single consonant following long @ or ¢ in the antepenult, and
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding; 6. g. ünoxplv-aro, ton-
püv-auev. :
' 6. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are sepa»
rated; 6. g. moA-Au, lo-ravat, τέϑ-νηκα, ϑαῤ-ῥαλέως, κλυτοτέχ-νης.
Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel ;
@ g. ἐτι-τρωσκον.
7. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel, if not, the last only;
@ g. ἄν-ϑρωποῤ, av-dpia, but ἐτέρφ-ϑην.
᾿ 8, Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part
ends with a consonant; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a
short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e.g. éx-Baive, ovv-
ἐκ-φώνησις, πρόϑ-εσις, ἀνάβ-ασις, but ὑπο-φήτης, not ὑποφ-ήτης ; so mapa-Balve.'
17818 Punctuation-marks.
The colon and semicolon are indicated by a period at the top of the line;
6. g. εὖ ἔλεξας : πάντες γὰρ ὡμολόγησαν. The interrogation-point is like our
semicolon; ὁ. g. τίς ταῦτα ἐποίησεν; The period, comma and exclamation-
_ point are like ours.
CHAPTER III.
§ 19. Some general vtews of the Verb.
1. The verb expresses action; 6. g. to Bloom, to strike. In
Greek there are three classes of verbs, viz. active, passive and mid-
dle. The middle has a reflexive signification, i. e. it expresses an
action which proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, i. 6.
an action which the subject performs on itself; 6. g. τύπτομαι, I
16 SOME GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VERB. F§ 19.
strike myself, βουλεύσομαι, I advise myself, ἀμύνομαι, I defend myself.
In most of the tenses, the middle and passive forms are the same ;
e. g. τύπτομαι, 7 strike myself and I am struck.
2. At present only those forms of the verb are given which are
necessary for translating the exercises that occur before the entire
verb is presented.
Num- | Num-
Mode. |berand Present Active. ber and Present Middle or Passive. -
Person. Person.
Inpica-} 8. 1. | BovAet-w, I advise. 8. 1. | βουλεύ-ομαι, I advise my-
TIVE. | j self, or am advised.
| βουλεύ-εις, thou ad. 2. | βουλεύ-ῃ, thou advisest thy-
visest. | self, or art advised.
βουλεύ-ει, he, she, or 8. | βουλεύ-εται, ἢ advises him-
it advises. self, or is advised.
βουλεύ-ομεν, we ad- . 1. !Boviev-öueda, we advise
vise.
βουλεύ-ετε, ye advise.
βουλεύ-ουσι(ν), they | 8. | βουλεύ-ονται, they advise
advise. themselves, or are advised.
. | βούλευ-ε, advise thou.| S. 2. | βουλεύου, advise thyself,
or be advised.
βουλεύ-ετε, advise ye.| P. 2. | βουλεύ-εσϑε, advise your-
selves, or be advised.
Bovaet-ety, to advise. βουλεύ-εσϑαι, to advise one-
. self, or be advised.
Remark. On the v ἐφελκυστικόν in βουλεύουσιν, see § 7, 1. (b).
8. Also the following forms of the irregular verb eiui, to be, may
be learned :
wd he, she, or it is ἦν, he, she, or it was
eloi(v), they are ἧσαν, they were
ἦσϑι, be, ire, let him, her, or it be ἔστε, be ye.
I. Vocabulary* and Exercises for Translation.
’Aei, always. el, if. xai, and, even.
ἀληθϑεύω, to speak the ἕπομαι, w. dat. to follow, κακῶς, badly, cowardly.
truth. [1γ. | accompany. καλῶς, well.
ἀνδρείως, manfully, brave- éodiw, w. gen. and acc. to κολακεύω, to flatter.
ἀριστεύω, to be the best, eat, corrode. μάχομαι, το. dat. to fight,
excel. Exeı, it has itself, it is. contend.
βιοτεύω, to live. ἡδέως, pleasantly, cheer- Mh, not, always placed be-
βλακεύω, to be lazy. fully, with pleasure. Sore the Imperative and
γράφω, to write, enact. ϑαυμάζω, to wonder, ad- Subjunctive.
διώκω, to pursue, strive af- mire. ὀδύρομαι, to moum, la-
ter. μετρίως, moderately. ment.
* All the vocabularies are designed to be committed to memory before trans-
lating the exercises.
$6 20, 21.] SBUBSTANZIVE AND ADIECTIVE.-GBNDER. 1
ob (οὐκ, atx), not. [sate. πιστεύομφε, tabe believed. χάξρω, w dat. terajoice, to
παιδεύω, to bring up, edu- σπεύδω, to hasten, exert rejoice at, or over, de-
maivw,to play, joke,play at. oneself. light in.
πίνω(), το. gen.and ace.,to φεύγω, to flee, flee from, ψέγω, to blame.
drink. shun.
Rute or Syntax. The verb agrees with its subject-nominative,
in number and person. In Greek, as in Latin, the subject of the
first and second person of the verb, need not be expressed except
for emphasis, it being sufficiently indicated by the ending of the verb.
’ "Act ἀλήϑευε. Xaipe. "Emov. Μὴ ddipecde. Ἣδέως Bioretw. Kadir
παιδεύομαι. Καλῶς γράφεις. El κακῶς γράφεις, ψέγῃ. El κολακεύει, οὐκ adage
ϑεύει. EI κολακεύει, ob πιστεύεται. ᾧΦεύγομεν. El φεύγομεν, διωκόμεϑα.
Κακῶς φεύγετε. El βλακεύετε, ψέγεσϑε. Ei ἀνδρείως μάχεσϑε, ϑαυμάζεσϑε.
El κολακεύουσιν, οὐκ ἀληϑεύουσιν. Ob καλῶς ἔχει φεύγειν. Καλῶς ἔχει av
δρείως μάχεσϑαι. El διώκῃ, μὴ φεῦγε. ᾿Ανδρείως μάχον. El βλακεύαυσι, ψέ-
γονται. El ἀληϑεύεις, πιστεύῃ. ᾿Αεὶ ἀριστεύετε. Μετρίως ἔσϑιε καὶ πῖμε
καὶ παῖζε.
I speak the truth. If I speak the truth, I am believed. Rejoice (pl.). Mourn
thou not. Thou livest pleasantly. He writes well. It is (has itself) well, to
speak the truth. Always speak (pl.) the truth. Follow (pl.). He is well brought
ap. Flatter thou not. If thou flatterest, thou art not believed. To be believed,
is (has itself) well. If we are lazy, we are blamed. If ye speak the truth, ye
are believed. If they fight bravely, they are-admired. If they flee; they ‘are
pursued. Be thou always the best.
CHAPTER IV.
THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.
§ 20. Nature and division of the Substantive.
A substantive is used to express a thing or object. There are
two classes of substantives: (a) the names of persons, as man,
woman ; (b) the names of things, as earth, garden.
§ 21. Gender of Substantives.
The gendgr of substantives, which is three-fold, as in Latin, is
‘determined partly by their signification, and partly by their ending.
The last mode of determining the gender will be treated under the
several declensions. With respect to the signification, the follow-
iB NUMBER, CASE AND DEOLENSION. [$ 22.
1. Names of males, of nations, winds, months, mountains, and
most rivers, are masculine.
2. Names of females, of countries, islands, most cities, most trees,
and plants, are feminine.
8. The names of the letters and fruits, infinitives, diminutives in
-ov, except the proper names of females, e. g. 7 Aeovzıor, all indecli-
nable words, and finally, every word used as the mere symbol of a
sound, 6. g. τὸ μήτηρ, the word mother, are neuter.
4, The names of persons, which have only one form for the
Masc. and Fem., are of common gender; 6. g. ὁ ἡ θεύς, god and
goddess.
8 22. Number, Case and Declension.
1. The Greek has three numbers, the Singular, the Plural,
and the Dual, which denotes two.
2. It has five Cases, namely :
(1) Nominative, the case‘of the subject ;
(2) Genitive, the whence-case ;*
(3) Dative, the where-case ; -
(4) Accusative, the whither-caze ;
(5) Voeative, the case of direct address.
Rem. 1. The Nom. and Voce. are called direct cases, the others, oblique cases.
‘Substantives and adjectives of the Neuter gender have the same form in the
Nom., Acc. and Voc. of the three numbers. The Dual has only two forms for
cases, one for the Nom., Acc. and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat.
8. There are in Greek three different ways of inflecting sub-
stantives and adjectives, distinguished as the First, Second and
Third Declensions.
Res. 2. In parsing a substantive, fhe beginner may accustom himself to an-
swer the following questions: what case? what number? what declension? what
gender? from what nominative, 6. g. is ἀνθρώποις 1
QUESTIONS: ANSWERS:
What cise? Dative case ;
What number? Plural number ;
What declension ? Second declension ;
‘What gender ? Masculine gender ;
From what nominative? From the Nom. ἄνϑρωπος ;
e. g. σώματος is the Gen. Sing. of the third declension, neuter gender, from the
nominative σῶμα, body.
“Ὁ See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 156 soq.— Ta.
65 23, 24] ° ADJECTIVE. PREPOSITIONS. 19
823. Nature and Gender of the Adjective.
1. The adjective expresses a quality, which is considered either
as already belonging to an object, e. g. the red rose, or one which
is merely attributed to an object, e. g. the rose is red. In both in-
stances, in Greek, as in Latin, the adjective agrees with its sub-
stantive in Gender, Number and Case; e.g:6 ἀγαϑὸς ἄνϑρωπος,
bonus homo, ὁ ἄνϑρωπος &y α 805 ἐστιν, homo bonus est; ἡ καλὴ
Μοῦσα, pulehra Musa, ἡ Movoa καλή ἐστιν, Musa pulchra est;
τὸ καλὸν ἔαρ, pulchrum ver, τὸ ἔαρ καλόν ἐστιν, ver pulchrum
est. |
2. Hence the adjective, like the. substantive, has three genders.
Yet all adjectives do.not have separate forms for the three genders ;
tnany- have ‘but two separate endings, viz. one for the masculine and
feminine gender, the other for the neuter; 6. g. ὁ ἥσυχος ἀνήρ, a
yuiet man, ἡ ἥσυχος γυνή, a quiet woman, τὸ ἥσυχον τέχνον, @
guiet child; several, indeed, have only one ending, which commonly
indicates only the masculine and feminine genders, seldom the neuter
gender; 6. 8.6 φυγὰφ ἀνήρ, an exiled man, ἡ φυγὰς γυνή, an
exiled woman.
8. The declension of adjectives, with few exceptions, is like that
of substantives. |
§ 24. General view of the Prepositions.
Prerimrnary Remark. Before proceeding to the declensions, a general
view of the prepositions will be given, as a knowledge of. these is indispensable
in translating. .
I. Prepositions with one case. σύν, cum, with, and the adverb.
(a) With the Genitive: ἅμα, together with.
ἀντί, ante, before, for, instead of, 6 (c) With the Accusative :
πρό, pro, before, for, ἀνά, on, upon, up, through,
ἀπό, ab, from, by, εἰς, Lat. in with Acc., into, to,
ἐκ (ἐξ before a vowel), ex, ont of, from, wc, to, ad.
ἕνεκα, for the sake of; on account of.
Here belong several adverbs which, . II. Prepositions with Genitive and
like prepositions, govern the Gen., viz. Accusative.
mpoodev and ἔμπροσϑεν, before, διά, through, by; with Acc. often, on ac-
ὄπισϑεν, behind, count of,
ἄνευ and χωρίς, without, κατά, de, down, with Acc. often, through.
πλήν, except. - ὑπέρ, super, over, above ; with Gen. often,
(b) With the Dative: Ser.
20 FIRST DECLENSION.-—FEMININE NOUNS. [§§ 25, 26.
IIL. Prepositions with Gen., Dat.and παρά, by, near; with Gen. from (pro-
Accusative. perly from being near some one) ;
ἀμφί and περί, around, about ; with Gen. with Acc. to (properly into the pres-
often, for, ence of some one),
ἐπί, upon, αἱ; with Acc. often, towards, πρός, before; with Acc. often, to,
against, . ὑπό, sub, under.
μετά, with; with Acc. often, after,
825. First Declension.
The first declension has four endings, ὦ, 7 (or &), ἄς and ns; α
and 7 are feminine, ἄς and ἧς masculine gender.
ENDINGS.
826. L Feminine Nouns.
1. (a) The Nom. ends in -& or -«, and the @ remains in all the
cases, if it is preceded by e, ὃ or ı (@ pure); 6. g. χώρα, land, ἰδέα,
form, σοφία, wisdom, χρεία, utility, εὔνοια, good-will. These make
the Gen. in -&s, Dat. in -¢. Here belong also some substantives
in -&; e. g. ἀλαλά, and some proper names; 6. g. Avdooueda,
Ande, Φιλομήλᾶ, Gen. -as, Dat. -@.
(Ὁ) The Nom. ends in -«, which remains only in the Acc. and
Voc.; in the Gen. and Dat., the -α is changed into -n, if it is pre-
ceded by A, AA, 0, 00 (rz), ζ, ἕξ, w.
(c) In other instances, the Nom. ends in -7, which remains through
all the cases of the Sing.
2. When -a is preceded by 8 or «, in some words -éa is con-
tracted into -7, and -éa into -&. Then the final syllable remains
circumflexed in all the cases.
4367
FIBST DECLENSION.—FEMININE NOUNS.
PARADIGMS.
a. n through all the cases.
Justice.
δίκ-η
δίκ-ης
dix-y
δίκ-ην
δίκ-η
δίκ-αι
Otx-Gv
δίκ-αις
δίκ-ἃς
δίκ-αι
Honor. _
Thun
τιμῆς
Tey
τιμήν
τιμή
τιμαί
τιμῶν
τιμαῖς
τιμᾶς
Opinion.
γνώμη
γνωμῆς
γνωμῇ
γνωμῆν
γνωμῇ
γνῶμαι
γνωμῶν
γνώμαις
γνώμᾶς
21
Fig-tree.
συκ-(ἐα)ῆ
συκ-ἧς
συκ-ῇ
συκ-ἣν
συκ-ῇ
ovK-ai
συκ-ῶν
συκοαῖς
συκ-ἂς
συκ-αῖ
Tıual
γνῶμαι
γνώμᾶ
γνώμαιν
Dual. N. A. V. τὰ
.G.andD. ταῖν
δίκ-ἃ
δίκ-αιν
συκ-ἃ
συκ-αῖν.
τιμᾶ
τιμαῖν
b. a through all the cases.
6. ἅ 6. ne.
(a) long a. (b) short a.
Shadow. Country. Mina Hammer. Muse. Lioness.
S.N. [ἡ σκ- χώρὰ wv-(da)ä | σφῦραἀ Moicd λέαινᾶ
᾿ς ΕὔἹΚἹ | τῆς σκι-ῶᾶς χώρᾶς μν-ᾶς σφύρᾶ:ς: Μούσης λεαίνης
D. | rH σκιᾷ yoog μν-ᾷ σφύρᾷ ° Motoy Aecaivy
A. | τὴν oKi-dy xüpäav μν-ᾶν odüpav Μοῦσᾶν Akamwäv
‚v.Io ori χώρᾷἄ μν-ᾶ σφῦράαᾳ Moica λέαινᾶ
P.N | αὖ oral χῶραι μν-αῖ σφῦραι Μοῦσαι λέαιναι
G. τῶν σκιῶν χωρῶν μν-ῶν σφυρῶν Μουσῶν λεαινῶν
D. | ταῖς σκι-αῖς χῶραις μν-αῖς σφύραις Μούσαις λεαΐίναις
Α. [ τὰς σκιᾶς χώρᾶς μν-ᾶς σφύρᾷ: Μούσᾶς λεαίνᾶς
V. [ὦ σκι-αί χῶραι μν-αἴ σφῦραι ἩΜοῦσαι λέαιναε
Dual | τὸ σκιἅ xüpa μν-ἃ o¢tpa Movoü APaivä
~ ~ ΄ “ ΄ id 4 .
ταῖν oxt-aiv χώραιν uv-alv σφύραιν Μούσαιν λεαίναιν.
Remax. The feminine of all adjectives of three endings, is like the declen-
sion of the above paradigms ; e.g.7 καλὴ τιμή, the glorious honor; ἡ χρυ σῇ
(contracted from χρυσέᾶ, as συκῆ from συκέα) στολῇ, the golden robe, τῆς xpv-
σῆς στολῆς; ἡ δικαία γνώμη, the just opinion, τῆς δικαίας γνώμης; ἢ
ἐχϑρὰ χώρα, the hostile land, τῆς ἐχϑιρᾶς χώρας.
8. The quantity of the endings is given in ἡ 25. The feminine ending -α, is
always long in adjectives ; 6. g. ἐλεύϑερος ἐλευνϑέρα ἐλεύϑερον, free.
4. With regard to the accentuation, it is to be observed that:
(8) The plural ending -a ı, is considered short in respect to the accent; hence
Aéatvat-(not Aeaivar), Motoar (not Μούσαι) ;
(b) The accent remains on the accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the
laws of accentuation permit.
Exceptions. (a) The vocative déo ror a from δεσπότης, lord ;
(8) In adjectives in -o¢, -7 (-d), τον, the feminine is accented on the same syl-
lable as the masculine, through all the cases, where the nature of the final sylla-
ble permits. Hence the nominative plural feminine of βέβαιος, ἐλεύϑερος, ἀν-
22 FIRST DECLENSION.--FEMINING NOUNS. [§ 26.
ϑρώπινος, is accented on the antepenult, vis. βέβαιοι, Bi Barat, ἐλεύϑεροι,
ἐλεύϑεραι, ἀνϑρώπινοι, ἀνϑρώπιεναι, although the feminine Sing. on ac-
count of the long ending -7 and -d, is a paroxytone, viz. BeBaid, ἐλευϑέρα, üv-
Ypwrivn ;
_ (y) In the Gen. PL of the first Dec., the final syllable -ων is circumflexed ; 6. g.
λεαινῶν from λέαινα, νεανιῶν from νεανίας. But to this there are the following
exceptions: (1) Feminine adjectives and participles in -o¢, -7 (-&), τον, are ac-
cented like the Gen. of masculines; 6. g. τῶν καλλίστων Μουσῶν, from κάλλισ»
τος, καλλίστη, κάλλιστον ; . but other feminine adjectives and participles, are cir-
cumflexed in the Gen. Pl.; e.g. βαρύς, βαρεῖα, βαρύ, Gen. Pl. Bapéwy, Baperar;
—(2) The substantives χρήστης, usurer, ἀφύη, anchovy, ἐτησίαι, monsoons, and χλού-
νης, wild-boar, which in the Gen. Pl. remain Paroxytones, thus χρήστων, ἀφύων.
5. The accent of the Nom. is changed according to the quantity of the final
syllable, as follows :
(a) Oxytones become Perispomena, in the Gen. and Dat. of all three numbers
@ g. τιμῆς, -§, τῶν, «αἷς, -aiv; this is true also of the second declension.
(b) Paroxytones with a short penult, remain paroxytones throngh all the
cases, except the Gen. Pl., which is always circumflexed on the final syllable ;
on the contrary, paroxytones with a long penult, become properispomena, when
the ultimate is short, which is the case in the Nom. Pl.; 6. g. γνώμη, γνῶμαε, but
γνωμῶν; "Arpelöns, ’Arpeidat, but ᾿Ατρειδῶν ; on the contrary, δίκη, δίκαι, but
δικῶν.
(c) Propertspomena become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long; 6. g.
Μοῦσᾶ, Μούσης;
(d) Proparoxytones become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long; 6. g.
λέαινα, λεαίνης.
᾿Αδικία, Gen. «ας, 77, injus-
tice. =
ἀδολεσχία, -as, 4, loqua-
ciousness, prating.
GA divin, -ἧς, vera, true.
ἀπέχομαι, w. gen., to ab-
stain from, keep oneself
from.
ἀρετή, -ἧς, ἢ» virtue.
βία, -ας, ἡ, violence.
βοήϑεια, -ας, 7, help.
γίγνομαι, to become, arise,
be.
διαβολή, "15, 9, calumny.
δίκη, -ης, %, Justice,
right, a judicial sen-
tence.
elxw, w. dat, to give way
to, to yield to.
If. Vocabulary.
ἐπαγγέλλομαι,ἴο promise.
ἐπάγω, to bring on.
hdovn, «ἧς, ἧ, pleasure.
ϑεραπεύω, to esteem, hon-
or, worship. .
κακία, -ας, ἢ, vice.
καρδία, -ας, 7, the heart.
καταφῦγή, -ῆς, ἡ, & refuge.
λύμη, -ης, ἡ, disgrace.
λύπη, -ης, 9, sorrow.
λύρα, “a, N, & lyre.
Ava, to loose, free, dispel,
violate (a treaty), abol-
ish.
μέριμνα, -ης, ἦ, care.
μοῦσα, -nc, ἡ, a muse.
6, ἡ, To, the,
weiSouat, w. dat., to be-
lieve, trust, obey.
πενία, -ας, ἢ, poverty.
πλεονεξία, -ac, 7, avarice,
πολλάκις, often.
συνήϑεια, -ac, #, inter-
course, society.
Teipw, tero, to wear out,
weaken, tire, plague.
τίκτω, to beget.
τρῦὕφή, -ἧς, 7, excess, luxu-
rious indulgence, effem-
inacy.
φιλία, «ας, ἡ, friendship.
χαλεπῆ, It, molesia, bur
densome, troublesome,
oppressive.
xpeia, -ac, 7, need, inter-
course,
ὡς, as.
§ 26.] FIRST DECLENSION.— FEMININE NOUNS. 28
Rues or Syntax. 1. Transitive verbs govern the Accusative.
2. Verbs and adjectives expressing the relation of to or for in
English, govern the Dative.
Elxe τῇ Big. Ἢ λύρα τὰς μερίμνας Aber. ᾿Απέχου τῆς κακίας. A φιλία
ὁπαγγέλλεται καταφυγὴν καὶ βοήϑειαν. ᾿Απέχον τῶν ἡδονῶν, Ἣ μέριμνα τὴν
καρδίαν ἐσθίει. Θεραπεύετε τὰς Μούσας. Μὴ πείϑου διαβολαῖς.2 Ἢ δίκη
πολλάκις τῇ ἀδικίᾳ εἴκει. Πολλάκις χαλεπῇ πενίᾳϑ τειρόμεϑα. "Τὴν ἀδολεσ-
χίαν φεύγετε. Ἢ κακία λύπην ἐπάγει. Τρυφὴ ἀδικίαν καὶ πλεονεξίαν τίκτει.
Φεῦγε τὴν τρυφὴν ὡς λύμην. Av ἀρετῆς καὶ συνηϑείας καὶ χρείας ἀληϑινὴ φιλίὰ
γίγνεται.
Abstain ye from violence. Flee thou from vice. Cares corrode the heart.
Flee thou from pleasures. Trust ye not to calumny. The Muses are honored.
Do not give way (pl.) to pleasure. Virtue begets true friendship. The heart
is corroded by cares (dat.). Sorrow is brought on by vice.
Il. Vocabulary.
"Ayo, to lead, bring, con- döfa, -ns, #, report, fame, πᾶσα, -ns, every, all.
duct. reputation. rinto, to fall.
ἁπλῆ, -ἧς, simple. ἐσθλή, -ἧς, good, noble, πολλή, -ἧς, much, many.
ἀργυρέα, ἀργυρᾶ, -üc, argen- splendid. πορφυρέᾶ, πορφυρᾶ, -ἂς,
᾿ς ἔφα, silver (adj.). εὐϑύνω, to make straight, purple (adj.).
ἀστραπῇ, -ῆς, ἡ, lightning. Trectify. ῥᾳδίως, easily.
ἀτιμία, -ας, , dishonor. εὐκόλως, quickly. σκολιά, -ὥς, crooked, per
βᾶσίλεια, -ας, h, a queen. εὐνομία, -ας, 4, good ad- verted.
βασιλεία, -ας, 9, king- ministration. στολή, -ἧς, 7, a robe.
dom. Eyw,to have, hold, contain. τύχη, -7¢, 4, fortune, pl.
βλάβη, -ns, ἦν injury. κατέχω, to hold back, re- (generally) misfortunes.
βροντή, -ἧς, ἡ, thunder. strain. [liant. φέρω, fero, to bear, bring.
γλῶττα, -n¢, 7, the tongue, Aaumpä,-äs, splendid, bril- χρυσέα, χρυσῆ, -ἧς, aurea,
a language. [life. μεγάλη, -7¢, magna, great. golden.
δίαιτα, -7¢, 7, & mode of μεταβολή, -ἧς, 7, change.
Ῥῇ κακίᾳ πᾶσα ἀτιμία Exerac. “Pading φέρε τὴν πενίαν. Bpovrn ἐκ Aap-
πρᾶς ἀστραπῆς γίγνεται. Ἢ ἀρετὴ ἐσθλὴν δόξαν ἔχει. Ἑῤνομία εὐϑύνει δίκας
σκολιάς. Δίκη δίκην τίκτει καὶ βλάβη βλάβην. ᾿Απλῆν δίαιταν ἄγε. Κάτεχε
τὴν γλῶτταν. Ἢ τύχη πολλὰς μεταβολὰς ἔχει. Tleviav φέρετε. Al λαμπραὶ
τύχαι εὐκόλως πίπτουσιν. Φέρε τὰς τύχας. Ἢ ἀρετὴ οὐκ εἴκει ταῖς τύχαις.
᾿Απέχεσϑε χαλεπῶν μεριμνῶν. Ἥ βασίλεια μεγάλην βασιλείαν ἔχει. Ἢ στολή
ἐστι πορφυρᾶ. Χρυσᾶς καὶ ἀργυρᾶς στολὰς ἔχομεν. :
Flee from cares. Vice begets dishonor. Good reputation follows virtue.
The perveried sentence is rectified by good administration. The lightning is
brilliant. Good reputation arises from virtue. Yield not to misfortunes. From
splendid fortunes often arise splendid cares.
2 § 157. * § 161, 2 (a), (δ). 5 § 161, 3.
24 FIRST DECLENSION.—MASOULINE NOUNS. [51
§ 27. I. Masculine Nouns.
The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ov; those in -a¢ retain the
α in the Dat., Acc. and Voc., and those in -ἧς retain the ἡ in
the Acc. and Dat. Sing. The Voe. of nouns in -y¢ ends in ὦ,
(1) all in -τῆς ; 6. g. τοξότης, Voc. τοξότα, προφήτης, Voc. προφῆτα ;
(2) all substantives in -7g composed of a substantive and a verb;
e. g. γεωμέτρης, Voc. γεωμέτρα, μυροπώλης, a salve-seller, Voc. μυ-
gozoda ; (3) national names in -ἧς ; 6. g. Πέρσης, a Persian, Voe,
Πέρσα.---- All other nouns in -ς have the Voc. in -7; 6. g. Πέρσης,
Perses, Voc. I1égon.—The plural of masculine nouns does not differ
from that of feminine. :
Rem. 1. Several masculine nouns in -dc have the Doric Gen. in ἃ, namely,
πατραλοίας, μητραλοίας, patricide, matricide, ὀρνιϑοϑήρας, fowler; also several
proper names; 6. g. ᾿Αννίβας, -a, Σύλλας, -d; finally, contracts in -d¢; 6. g.
βοῤῥᾶς, from βορέας.
PARADIGMS.
Citizen. Youth. Fowler.
Bing. N. | πολίτης ῬἙρμί(ξας)ῆς veaviag ὀρνιϑοϑήρῶᾶς βοῤῥᾶς
G. | πολέτου Ἑρμοῦ νεανίου ppa βοῤῥᾶ
D. | πολέτῃ Ἑρμῇ γνεανίᾷ ὀρνιϑοϑήρᾷ βοῤῥᾷ
A. | wodirny Ἑρμῆν veaviay ὀρνιϑοϑήρῶν βοῤῥᾶν
V. | πολῖτᾶ Ἑρμῆ veavlä ὀρνιϑοϑήρᾶ βοῤῥᾶ.
Plur. N. | πολῖται Epuai νεανίαι ὀρνιϑοϑῆραι
G. | πολιτῶν Ἑρμῶν νεανιῶν ὀρνιϑοϑηρῶν
D. | πολίτας ὩἙρμαῖς γεανίαις ὀρμεϑοϑήραιςρ
A. | πολίτας Ἑρμᾶς γεανίς ὀρνιϑοϑήρας
V. | πολῖται Ἑρμαϊῖ νεανίαι. ὀρνιϑοϑῆραε
Dual. πολίτα Ἑρμᾶ νεανίά ὀὄρνιϑοϑήρᾶ
πολίτην ὩἙρμαῖν νεανίαιν ὀρνιϑοϑήραιν
Ben. 2. Adjectives of one ending in -7¢ and -a¢, are declined in the same
manner; e.g. ἐϑελοντῆς πολίτης, a willing citizen, ἐ ϑελον τοῦ πολίτου,
ἐϑελονταὶ πολῖται; μονίας νεανίας, a lonely youth, μον ίου νεανίου, μο-
νίᾳ νεανίᾳ.
IV. Vocabulary.
᾿Αδολέσχης, -ov, ὁ, a pra- ness; with ἄγειν, to be ὀρέγομαι, το. gen., to strive
after,
ter. quiet. : \
ἀκούω, to hear. ϑάλαττα, -ne, 4, the sea. πρέπει, w. dat., it is be
ἀκροάτής, «οὔ, 6, an audi-
tor.
βλάπτω, w. ace., to injure.
δεσπότης, -ov, ὁ, & master.
εὐκοσμία, -ac, 7, good or-
der, decorum.
hoözia, -ας, ἡ, quiet, still-
Dearne, -οὔ, ὁ, & spectator.
pavdävw, to learn, study.
μέλει, το. dat. of. the person
and gen. of the thing, it
concerns.
ναύτης, -ov, 6, nauta, ἃ
sailor.
coming, it becomes.
mpoonket, w. dat., it is be-
coming, it becomes.
σοφία, -ac, 7, wisdom.
τέχνη, της, 9, art.
τρυφητήῆς,-οὔ, ὁ, luxurious,
riotous, voluptuous.
$38.] SECOND DECLENSION. Re
Rue or Syntax. One substantive governs another in the Geni-
tive, when the latter signifies a different thing from the former.
The substantive in the Gen. defines or explains more particularly
the one by which it is governed.
Mävdave, ὦ νεανία, τὴν σοφίαν. TloAirg πρέπει εὐκοσμία. Neaviov σοφίαν
ϑαυμάζω. Φεῦγε, ὦ πολῖτα, τὴν ἀδικίαν. Τὴν ὀρνιϑοϑήρα τέχνην ϑαυμάζομεν.
᾿Ακροαταῖς καὶ ϑεαταῖς mpoghkeı ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν. Φεύγετε, ὦ ναῦται, βοῤῥᾶν.
Βοῤῥᾶς ναύτας πολλάκις βλάπτει. ᾿Ορέγεσϑε, ὦ πολῖται, τῆς ἀρετῆς." Συβα-
ρῖται τρυφηταὶ ἦσαν. Ναύταις μέλει τῆς ϑαλάττης.) Φεῦγε, ὦ Πέρση. Σπαρ-
τιᾶται μεγάλην δόξαν ἔχουσιν. Φεύγω νεανίαν τρυφητήν. ᾿Αδολεσχῶν ἀπέχου.
"Axove, ὦ δέσποτα.
Learn, O youths, wisdom! Good order becomes citizens. We admire the
wisdom of youths. Shun, O citizens, injustice! To the Spartans there was
great fame (i. 6. they had great fame). Keep yourself from voluptuous youthg.
Flee from praters. Keep yourself from a prater. It becomes an auditor and a
spectator to observe (ἄγω) stillness. Flee from a voluptuous youth,
V. Voeabulary.
Δικαιοσύνη, -ns, ἢ, justice. κλέπτης, -ov, ὁ, a thief. στρατιώτης, -ov, ὁ, a sol
ἐπιμέλομαι, το. gen. to care κρίτῆς, -oü, ὁ, a judge. dier, a warrior.
for, take care of, take vavayia,-ac, 7, shipwreck. τεχνίτης, -ov, 6, an ar
care. οἰκέτης, -ov, ὁ, a servant. tist.
ἐραστής, -oö, ὁ, a lover, a πιστεύω, το. dat., to trust, τρέφω, to nourish, support,.
friend. rely upon. keep, bring up.
ϑαυμαστή, -ἧς, admiranda, πιστεύομαι, to be trusted, ψεύστης, -ov, ὁ, a liar:
- wonderful. be. believed.
Ἢ τῶν Σπαρτιατῶν ἀρετὴ ϑαυμαστή ἐστιν. Φεῦγε, ὦ Πέρσα. Kpiraic πρέ-.
qe. δικαιοσύνη. "Ἔστι τῶν στρατιωτῶν περὶ τῶν πολιτῶν μάχεσϑαι. Φεῦγε
ψεύστας. Ἔστι δεσπότου ἐπιμέλεσϑαιβδ τῶν οἰκετῶν. Μὴ πίστευε ψεύστῃ..
Τεχνίτην τρέφει 9 τέχνη. "Ex ψευστῶν γιγνόνται κλέπται. Σπαρτιᾶται δόξης
καὶ τιμῆς ἐρασταὶ ἦσαν. "Ex βοῤῥᾶ πολλάκις γίγνεται ναυαγία. Θαυμάζομεν
τὴν Ἑρμοῦ τέχνην.
The Persians flee. Justice becomes the judge. It is the duty of a soldier to.
fight for the citizens. Flee from a liar. Trust not liars. Art supports artists
We admire Hermes. Soldiers fight. Liars are not believed.
8 98, Second Declension.
The second declension has two endings, -ος and -oy; nouns in -ος
are mostly masculine, but often feminine; nouns in -o» are neuter.
Feminine diminutive proper names in -09 are an exception; 6. g.
ἡ Γλυκέριον.
14 158, 3. (Ὁ). 58.158, 6.1. (Ὁ). ὃ ἔστε with the Gen, it is the duty of any
one, see $ 158, 2. *4158,6.L (b).
8
SECOND DECLENSION.
ENDINGS.
[$ 2&
Messenger. Fig.
i ὁ ἄγγελος τὸ σῦκον
τοῦ οὐ τῆς νήσου ἀγγέλου τοῦ σύκου
τῷ λόγῳ τῇ νήσ᾽υ τῷ Dep ἀγγέλῳ τῷ σύκῳ
τὸν λόγεον τὴν νῆσον τὸν ϑεόν ἄγγελον τὸ σὕκον
V.| 6 λόγε ὦ vice ὦ Sede ἄγγελε ὦ σῦκον
‚N. | οἱ Ady-oc αἱ νῆσοι οἱ ϑϑεοί ἄγγελε τὰ σῦκα
G. | τῶν λόγ-ων τῶν νήσων τῶν ϑεῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν σύκων
D. | τοῖς λόγοοις ταῖς νήσοις τοῖς ϑεοῖς ἀγγέλοις τοῖς σύκοις
Α. τοὺς Aöy-ovg τὰς νήσους τοὺς ϑεοὺύς ἀγγέλους τὰ σῦκα
ν.] ὦ λόγοι ὦ νῆσοι ὦ ϑεοί ἄγγελε © σῦκα
τὼ λόγω τὰ νήσω τὼ ϑεώ ἀγγέλ τὼ σύκω
τοῖν λόγεοιν ταῖν νῆσοιν τοῖν ϑεοῖν row τοῖν σύκοιν.
Res. 1. The Voc. of words in -o¢ commonly ends in ε, though often in -ος ;
e. g. ὦ φίλε and ὦ φίλος ; always ὦ ϑεύς.
Rem. 2. On the accentuation, the following observations are to be noted : The
accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quantity of the
final syllable permits; the Voc. ἀ ὃ ε λ ge from ἀδελφός, brother, is an exception.
—The plural ending -oı, like -αὐ in the first declension [§ 26, 4. (a)], with re-
spect to the accent, is considered short. The change of the accent is the same
as in the first declension ($ 26, 5.), except in the Gen. Pl., where the accent re-
tains the place, which it has in the!Nominative. See the paradigms.
Rem. 3. Adjectives in -o¢, -7 (ἃ), -ov, in the masculine and neuter, and those
of two endings in -o¢ (Masc. and Fem.), -ov (Neut.), are declined like the pre-
ceding paradigms; e.g. ἀγαθός, ἀγαϑῆ, ἀγαϑόν, good, ὁ ἀγαϑὸς λόγος,
a good speech, τὸ ἀγαϑὸν τέκνον, a good child, πάγκαλος, πάγκαλον,
very beautiful, ὁ πάγκαλος λόγος, a very beautiful speech, ἡ πάγκαλος μορ-
φή, a very beautiful form, τὸ πάγκαλον τέκνον, a very beautiful child. Adjec-
tives of two endings in -o¢, -ov are almost all compounds. Adjectives of three
endings in -o¢ preceded by e, ¢ or p, and those in -oo¢ preceded by p, like nouns
of the first dectension, in -@ pure and -pa,, have the Nom. Fem. in -a; 6. g. χρύσ-
eos, xpvo-~£a, χρύσ-εον, ἐχϑρός, -ü, -ὄν, δικρόος, -ὁᾷ, -dev.
Rem. 4. It will be seen by the following paradigms, that, in adjectives in -og,
“ἢ (-a), -ov, the masculine and neuter are declined like the cnt en
and the faminine like the first.
SECOND DECLENSIORN.
PARADIGMS OF ÄDJECTIVES.,
‚N. 1 uyad-ög ἀγαϑ-ῆ ayad-öv, good | φίλι-ος φιλί-ἃ ᾿φίλι-ον, lovely
G. | ἀγαϑ-οὔ ἀγαϑ-ῆς ἀγαϑ-οῦ φιλίςου φιλί-ἃς φιλί-ου
D. ayad-@ éyad-97 ἀγαϑ-ᾧῷ φιλεῳ Hella φιλί-ῳ
A. | ἀγαϑ-όν ἀγαϑ-ήν ἀγαϑ-όν φίλι-ον φιλί-ἂν φίλε-ον
V. | dyad-é ἀγαϑ-ή ἀγαῦ-όν | φίλε giri-d φίλι-ον
P.N. | ἀγαϑ-οί dyad-ai uyad-a φίλιτ-οι φίλι-αι φίλε-α
G. | ἀγαϑ-ῶν ἀγαϑ-ν ἀγαϑ-ῶν φιλί-ων φιλί-ων φιλί-ων
D. | ἀγαϑ-οῖς ἀγαϑ-αῖς ἀγαϑ-οῖς φιλί-οις φιλί-αις φιλί-οις
A. | ἀγαϑ-οὖς üyad-üc dyad-a φιλίτους φιλί-ἃς φίλι-α
V. ἀγαϑ-οἱ dyad-ai ἀγαϑ-ά φίλε-οι φίλι-αι φίλια
Dual. | dya¥-6 dyad-d dyad-o φιλίω φιλί.-α φιλίτω
φιλί-οιν. φιλίκαιν φιλί-οιν.
ayad-ciy ἀγαϑ-αῖν dyad-oiv.
VI. Vocabulary.
᾿Αγαϑόν, -oü, τό, a good ἐχϑρός, -ot, ὁ, an enemy. οἶνος, -ov, ὁ, wine.
thing, an advantage.
ἄγγελος, -ov, 6, ἃ mes-
ἄνϑρωπος, -ov, ὁ, & man.
διδάσκῶλος, -ov, ὁ, & tear
cher.
δοῦλος, -ou, 6, a slave.
ἔργον, -ov, TO, an action,
a work, a business.
ἐσϑλός, -ἤ, -όν, good, no-
ble, splendid.
éraipoc, -ov, 6, a compan-
ion, 8 friend.‘ [tune.
εὐτυχία, -ας, ἢ, good for-
Rove or SYNTax.
a singular verb.
Δίωκε καλὰ ἔργω. Tleldov τοῖς τοῦ διδασκάλου λόγοις.
μανϑάνεις.
ἀνϑρώπων φροντίζουσιν.3
γοις ἕπεται κινδῦνος.
ἀγϑρώποις ἐχϑρός ἐστιν.
ϑεός, τοῖς φίλοις εὐτυχίαν.
Mioyera# ἐσθλὰ κακοῖς.
ϑεός, -ed, 6, God, a god. παρέχω, to grant, afford,
κἄκός, -7, -όν, bad, wicked. offer.
κακόν, -οὗὔ, τό, an evil πιστός, -ἤ, -6v, faithful,
κἄλός, -7, -όν, beautiful, trustworthy.
good; τὸ καλόν, good- πολλοΐ, -ai, -4, many. '
ness,beauty,or the beau- φέλος, -ov, ὁ, a friend, φῇ
tiful. Aog, τῇ, τον, dear.
κίνδυνος, -ου, ὁ, danger. φροντίζω, w. gen., to care
λόγος, -av, ὁ, a word, a for, trouble oneself a-
report, reason. bout; w. ace., to reflect
μετέχω, το. gen., to take on, think about.
part in. -Xaipe, to rejoice.
μίσγω, misceo, w. dat., to
mix.
A. subject inthe neuter plural usually takes
Ilap’ ἐσϑλῶν ἐσϑλὰ
Πιστὸς ἑταῖρος τῶν ἀγαϑῶν καὶ τῶν κακῶν μετέχει. Οἱ ϑεοὶ τῶν
Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι τοὺς ϑεοὺς ϑεραπεύουσιν. Πολλοὶς ἔρ-
Ὁ κακὸς τοῖς ϑεοῖς καὶ τοῖς
Ol ἄνθρωποι τοῖς ἐσϑλοῖς χαίρουσιν. 5 Πάρεχε, ὦ
Φέρε, ὦ δοῦλε, τὸν οἶνον τῷ νεανίᾳ. Ὁ οἶνος λύει
ric μερίμνας. Χαλεπῷ ἔργῳ δόξα ἕπεται.
Follow the words of your (the) teachers. God cares formen. Men worship
God. Dangers accompany many actions. Grant, O God, happiness to my (the)
friend! Keep yourself from the bad man. I rejoice over the noble youth.
Trust not the word of a liar, my (O) dear young man.
3 $ 158, 3. (b).
δ § 161, 2. (c).
1 § 161, 2 (a), (6).
ὃς 158, 6. I. (b).
Ҥ 161, 2 (a), (a). te ar
"Afıog, -ἰᾶ, -109, w. ger,
CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENBION.
VIL. Vocabulary.
ϑάνᾶτος, -ov, ὁ, death.
[8 29.
μέος, -ὥ, “ον, young, ὁ νέος,
worthy, worth. ϑεῖον, -ov, τό, the Deity. -ov,the youth, the young
ἀπο-λύω, w. acc. of the per- ϑυμός, -oü, ὁ the mind, man.
son and gen. of the thing, Courage. vöoos, -0v, 7, ἃ disease, an
to free from, release. ϑύρᾶ, -ας, 7, a door. illness.
äpyüpog, -ov, ὁ, silver. κλείω, to shut, fasten. obx (before an aspirate in-
Biog, -ov, 5, life, a liveli-
hood.
βουλή, -ns, 7, counsel, ad-
vice. [τοὶ].
dixoorüota, -ας, ἧ, a quar-
stead of οὐκ), not.
πόνος, -ov, ὁ, trouble, toil,
hardship.
elyn, -ἧς, 7, silence.
χρόνος, -ov, ὃ, time.
χρῦσός, -oö, 6, gold.
μαϑητής, -oö, ὁ, a pupil, a
learner.
μέτρον, -ov, τό, & measure,
moderation.
μοχλός, -οὔ, ὁ, a bolt, a
εὑφραίνω, to rejoice, glad- _lever. [ble.
den, cheer. μῦρίος͵,-ἰἃ, -iov, innumera-
Τὸ καλόν ἐστι μέτρον τοῦ βίου, oby ὁ χρόνος. Ὃ Bavaroc rode ἀνθρώπους
ἀπολύει πόνων; καὶ κακῶν. ‘O οἶνος εὐφραίνει τοὺς τῶν ἀνϑρώπων ϑυμούς.
Σὺν μυρίοις πόνοις τὰ καλὰ γίγνεται. Τὸ ϑέϊον τοὺς κακοὺς ἄγει πρὸς τὴν di-
anv. Πιστὸς φίλος χρυσοῦ καὶ ἀργύρον ἄξεός ἐστιν ἐν χαλεπῇ διχοστασίᾳ. TloA-
Aal νόσοι ἐν ἀνθρώποις εἰσίν. Βουλὴ εἰς ἀγαϑὸν ἄγει. Σιγὴ νέῳ τιμὴν φέρει.
Ἥ ϑύρα μοχλοῖς κλείεται. ἫἪ τέχνη τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τρέφει. "Ὦ φίλοι μαϑη-
ταί, τῆς σοφίας καὶ τῆς ἀρετῆς ὀρέγεσϑε."
By death (dat.) men are freed from troubles and evils. By (ὑπό, w. gen.) the
Deity the bad man is brought to justice. The bolt fastens the door. Art sup-
ports the man. My (Q) dear pupil, strive after wisdom and virtue. Diseases
weaken men. My friends, follow the words of the judges.
§ 29. Contraction of the Second Declension.
1. A small number of substantives, where o or 8 precedes the
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect.
PARADIGMS.
Navigation. Circumnavigation.
S.N. ὁ πλόος πλοῦς ὁ περίπλοος περίπλους τὸ ὀστέον
. | πλόου πλοῦ περιπλόου περίπλου ὀστέον ὀστοῦ
πλόῳ πλῷ περιπλό περίπλῳ ὀστέῳ ὀστῷ
πλόον πλοῦν περίπλοον περίπλουν ὀστέον ὀστοῦν
περίπλοε περίπλου
P. πλόοι πλοῖ περίπλοοε περίπλοι ὀστέα ὀυτὰ
πλόων πλῶν περιπλόων περίπλων ὀστέων ὀστῶν
πλόοις πλοῖς περιπλόοις περίπλοις ὀστέοις ὀστοῖς
πλόους πλοῦς περιπλόους περίπλους ὀστέα ὀστᾶ
περίπλοοι περίπλοι
περιπλόω
περιπλόοιν
4168, 7. (y).
ὀστῶ
ὀστοῖν.
ὀστέω
ὀτέοιν
περίπλω
[4
περίπλοιν
3 § 161, 8.
ἃ § 158, 3, (b).
§ 29.] CONTRACTION OF THE SLOOND DECLENSION. 2
4
Remarx. Here belong, (a) Multiplicative adjeetives in -60¢ (-ot¢), -69 (-#),
«όον (-otv); e. g. ἁπλοῦς, -7, -oüv, simple ;—(b) Adjectives of two endings in
-00¢ (-ovc) Masc. and Fem., and -0 0 v (-ovv) Neut.; e.g. ὁ ἡ εὔνους, τὸ εὔνουν,
well disposed, which differ from the declension of substantives, only in not con-
tracting the neuter plural in -oc; e.g. τὰ εὔνοα réxva;—(c) Adjectives in
-eo¢ (-od¢), -£a (-#), -eov (-odv), which denote a material; e. g. χρύσεος
χρυσοῦς, χρυσέᾶ χρυσῇ, χρύσεον χρυσοῦν, yolden. When a vowel or p precedes
the feminine ending -éd, -éd@ is not contracted into -7, but into -d, (4 26, 1);
6. g.
ἐρέ-εος ἐρεοῦς, ἐρε- ἐἃ Eped, épé-eov ἐρεοῦν, woollen. -
ἀργύρ-εος ἀργυροῦς, äpyvp-Ea ἀργυρ ἄ, ἀργύρ-εον ἀργυροῦν, silver.
PARADIGMS.
Golden.
χρυσέ-α.
χρυσῆ
xpvons
χρυσῇ
χρυσῆν.
a
χρυσῆ
χρυσαῖ
χρυσῶν
χρυσαῖς χρυσοῖς
χρυσᾶς χρυσᾶ
χρυσαῖ χρυσᾶ i ἁπλαῖ
χρυσᾶ χρυσῶ x ἁπλᾶ
ἔν χρυσοῖν. i ἀπλαῖν ἀπλοῖν.
Accentuation. The following are to be noticed as exceptions to the rules in
$ 11,2: (a) πλόω = πλώ, ὀστέω = ὀστώ, instead of 714, ὀστῶ ; (Ὁ) compounds
and polysyliabic proper names, which retain the accent on the penult, even
when as a ciseumflex, it should be removed upon the contracted syHable; 6. g.
περιπλόου == πορίπλου, instead of περιπλοῦ ; εὐμόῳ = εὔνῳ, instead of εὐνῷ ; {ec}
τὸ κάνεον = κανοῦν, instead of κάνουν, basket, and also adjectives in -eoc, -éa,
-00v; eg. χρύσεος -ε- χρυσοῦς, χρυσέᾶ = χρυσῆ, χρύσεον -- χρυσοῦν,
instead of χρύσους, χρύσουν ; finally, substantives in -eog = -οὖς ; 6. g. ἀδελῷι-
deöc = ἀδελφιδοῦς, instead οὗ ἀδελφιδούς, nephew.
VIIL Vocabulary.
᾿Ἀδηλος, -ov, uncertain, ἐκ-καλύπτω, to disclose. xat—«ai, both—and.
unknown. ἐπι-κουφίζω, to aleviate. κάἄνεον = -οὖν͵ -ἔου = «οὔ;
ἀλήϑεια, -ας; ἡ, truth. ἐρίζω, w. dat., to contend τό, a basket. [ror.
ἄνοος = -ους,-οον = -ovv, with. κάτοπτρον, -ov, τό, & Mir-
imprudent, irrational. εὔνοος = -ove, πιοῦν, κύπελλον, ου, τό, a goblet.
ἀργύρεος = -οῦς, -ἔᾶ =-d, well-wishing, well-dis- λέγω, to say, call or name;
«ον = οὗν, silver, ἡ 6. posed, kind. νόος = νοῦς, -dov = -οῦ,
made of silver. Separatva,-nc,4,afemale 6, the understanding,
ἄρτος, -ov,.6, bread. servant. the mind.
8»
80 ATTIO SECOND DEOLENSION. = [$ 30.
ὀδέγοι, -at, -a, few. ὄχλος, -ov, ὁ, piebs, the x&Atvör, -oö, ὁ, a bridte.
ὀργῇ, «ἧς, N, anger. common people. [to. χώλκεος τα -οὔς, -ta = -ἢ,
᾿Ορέστης, -ov, ὁ, Orestes. προς-φέρω, to bear or bring -ἔον = -oüv, brazen.
ὀστέον = = -οὖν, gov = od, sla του, 6, sleep, slum- ψυχή, -ἧς, 9, the soul.
τό, a bone. ber
RuLE or Syntax. One reale following another to explain
it, and referring to the same person or thing, is put in the same
case. This construction is called Apposition.
Ὁ λόγος ἐστὶ τὸ τοῦ νοῦ κάτοπτρον. Τὸν νοῦν ἔχουσιν ol ἄνϑρωποι διδάσ-
xadov. Τὸν εὔνουν φίλον ϑεράπευε. ’OAlyoı πιστὸν νοῦν ἔχουσιν. Ὁ πλοῦς
στιν ἄδηλος. Σὺν νῷ τὸν βίον ἄγε. Ὁ ὄχλος οὐκ ἔχει νοῦν. Μὴ ἔριζε τοῖς
‚üvorc.! Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς eivol? εἰσιν. ᾿Ορέγου φίλων εὔνων. Τὰ τοῦ
“"Ορέστου ὀστᾶ ἐν Τεγέᾳ ἦν. Al ϑεράπαιναι ἐν κανοῖς τὸν ἄρτον προςφέρουσιν.
‘Ol ϑεοὲ καὶ καλὸν καὶ κακὸν πλοῦν τοῖς ναύταις παρέχουσιν. Ψυχῆς χαλινὸς
ἀνϑρώποιςξ 6 νοῦς ἐστιν. Πολλάκις ὀργὴ ἀνθρώπων νοῦν ἐκκαλύπτει. ᾿Απλοῦς
ἐστιν ὁ τῆς ἀληϑείας λόγος. Δόγος εὔνους ἐπικουφίζει λύπην. Τὸ κύπελλόν
ἔστιν ἀργυροῦν. Ὁ ϑάνατος λέγεται χαλκοῦς ὕπνος
The understanding is a teacher to men. The well-disposed friend is honored.
Keep yourself from the irrational. Strive after a well-disposed friend. Bring
‘bread in-a basket. Honor, O young man, a simple mind! Fiee from impru-
dent youths. Trust, O friend, well-disposed men! Young men are often im-
prudent. The goblet is golden.
8 80. The Attte Second Declension.
Several words (substantives and adjectives) have the endings -og,
{(Masc. and Fem.) and -0» (Neut.), instead of -o¢ and -o», and re-
tain the -ὦ through all the cases instead of the common vowels and
diphthongs of the second Dec., and place under the -c an Jota sub-
script, where the regular form has -ῷ or -os; thus, -ov and -« be-
come -@ ; -o¢, -ov and -οὐς become -ws, -av and -a¢; -ot, -οἱς and
το» become -ῷ, -ῴς and -φν ;—-0, τῷ and -ὧν remain unchanged.
The Voc. is the same as the Nominative.
PARADIGMS.
Hall.
τὸ ἀνώγε-ων
ἀνώγε-ω
ἀνώγε-ῳ
Sing
N.
G.
D.
A.
Vv.
Plur. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D.N. A. V. A f Aay-o
G. and D. λε-ῷν λαγ-ῷν ἀνώγε-ῳν ,
1416], 3. (a), (7). 5.416], δ. (a). 8 § 161, 5.
$-80.] ATTIO SECOND DECLENSION. ὁ 51
Singular. Plural. Dual.
ὁ ἡ ἵλεως, Td ἴλεων | ol al they, τὰ Tew | τὼ τὰ τὼ Tew
τοῦ τῆς τοῦ ἴλεω τῶν ἵλεων τοῖν ταῖν τοῖν ἴλεῳν
τῷ τῇ τῷ ἵλεῳ τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς ἴλεῳς | τοῖν ταῖν τοῖν ἴλεῳν
τὸν τὴν τὸ ἵλεων τοὺς τὰς ἴλεως,τὰ ἴλεω | τὼ τὰ τὼ ἴλεω
ἔλεως, ἵλεων Dep, ἴλεω ἴλεω.
Rem. 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender reject the v in the Acc.
Sing., namely, ὁ λαγώς, the hare, τὸν λαγών and λαγώ, and commonly % ἕως, the
dawn, ἡ ἁλώς, a threshing-floor, 7 Κέως, ἡ Kös, 6 Αϑως, ἡ Τέως, and the adjec-
tives ἀγήρως, not old, ἐπίπλεως, full, ὑπέρχρεως, guilty.
Rem. 2. Accentuation. Proparoxytoncs retain the acute on the antepenult in
all the cases of all numbers, the two syllables -ewe and -ewv, etc. being considered,
as it were, but one; yet those with a long penult, as ἄγηρως, are paroxytones
in the Dat. Sing. and Pl., and also in the Gen. and Dat. Dual; 6. g. ἀγήρῳ, ἀγή-
pyc, dynppv. Oxytones in -ös, retain this accent even in the Gen.; 6. g. λεώ
instead of λεῶ.
IX. Vocabulary.
᾿Αγήρως, -wv, not getting évedpetw, w. dat., to lie in λαμβάνω, to take, receive,
old, unfading. wait for. gain. .
"dere, -oö, ὁ, an eagle. ἔπαινος, -ov, 6, praise. νεώς, -O, ὁ, a temple.
alypaAwroc, -ov, captured. εὔχομαι, to pray, beg. πλεῖστος, -7, -0v, MOSt
ἀνδρεῖος, -a, -ov, manly, Ünpevrüs, -οὔ, ὁ, a hunts- ῥᾷδιος, -id, -cov, easy.
brave. man, & sportsman. σέβομαι, to honor, rever-
ἀνώγεων, -@, τό, ἃ, hall, a ϑηρεύω, to hunt, catch. ence.
ἴλεως, των, merciful. τἄώς, -ὦ, 6, a peacock.
room.
ἀπάγω, to lead away. κάλως, -w, ὃ, & rope. υἱός, -οὔ, ὁ, & son.
Patvo, to walk, go, pro- κτίζω, to found, build. ὥσπερ, as, just as.
ceed. λαγώς, -@, ὃ, a hare.
Τοῖς ϑεοῖς' ved κτίζονται. Οὐ ῥᾷδιόν ἐστιν ἐπὶ κάλων βαίνειν. Διώκομεν
τοὺς λαγώς. ᾿Ανδρόγεως ἣν ὁ τοῦ Μίνω υἱός. Οἱ λαγῷ ϑηρεύονται ὑπὸ τῶν
ϑηρευτῶν. Etyou τῷ ἴλεῳ ϑεῷ. Οἱ ἀετοὶ τοῖς λαγῷς ἐνεδρεύουσιν. Σέβεσϑε
τοὺς ἴλεως ϑεούς. Οἱ ἀνδρεῖοι ἄγηρων ἕπαινον λαμβάνουσιν. Ἑὔχου τὸν ϑεὸν
Deo ἔχειν. Οἱ ϑεοὶ τοῖς üyadoic? Meg εἰσιν. Αἱ ἡδοναὶ ἀπάγουσι τὸν πλεῖστον
λεὼν ὥςπερ αἰχμάλωτον. Οἱ Σάμιοι τῇ Ἥρᾳ! καλοὺς ταὼς τρέφουσιν.
We build beautiful temples to the gods. To walk on a rope is not easy.
The huntsmen hunt hares. God is merciful. Worship the merciful God. By
the Samians beautiful peacocks are kept in honor of Hera (say, to Hera). Keep
yourselves, O citizens, from the irrational multitude! Get out of the way of
(εἴκω, w. gen.) the irrational multitude. The huntsman strives after (pursues)
hares.
X. Vocabulary. ,
’Aräyopevw, to call. üpern, -ἧς, 7, bravery, vir- βασίλεια, -wv, Ta, a royal
ἀρέσκω, w. dat., to please. tue. . palace.
1§ 161, 5. | 28161, δ. (a).
33. THIRD DECLENSION.— 0A68-ENDINGS. [$$ 31, 82.
yüperh, «ἧς, 7, a wife. ἕως, -@, ἡ, the dawn. ποιητής, ob, ὁ, ἃ poet.
δειλός,-ή,-ὁν,ἀταϊὰ, worth- ϑηρίον, -ου, τό, a wild ῥοδοδάκτυλος, -ον, rosy-
less, bad. beast, an animal. 5
ἐκ-φέρω, to bring forth, "Tepöc, -G, -Ov, w. gem, sa- στήλη, «ἧς, 7, a piller.
produce. [ous. cred to. |
ἐκικίνδυῦνος, -qv, danger- |
Οἱ rag τῆς Ἥρας ἱεροὶ ἦσαν. Θαυμάζομεν Μενέλεων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀρετῇ. Ol ποιη-
ταὶ τὴν “Ew ῥοδοδώκτυλον ἀπαγορεύσυσιν.υ Ἢ ἀλήϑεια πολλάκις οὐκ ἀρέσκει
τῷ λεῷ. Ἔ λένη ἣν ἡ Μενέλεω γαμετή. Ἢ Βαβυλωνία ἐκφέρει πολλοὺς ταώς.
Ἔν τοῖς τῶν Seay νεῷς πολλαὶ στῆλαι ἧσαν. Οἱ λαγῷ δειλὰ ϑηρία εἰσίν. Ὁ
περὶ τὸν "Αϑω πλοῦς ἣν ἐπικίνδυνος. Τὰ βασίλεια καλὰ ἀνώγεω ἔχει.
Menelaus is admired for his bravery. In the royal palace are splendid rooms.
Huntsmen catch peacocks. Peacocks are beautiful Trust not the speech of.
the people, O citizens! The huntsman lies in wait for peacocks. Good citi-
zens flee from the irrational multitude. ‘Youths lie in wait for hares. The pil-
lars of the temples are beautiful.
831. Third Declension. .
The third declension has the following Case-endings :
Neut. —
mostly as the Nom.; Neut.—
These endings are appended to the unchanged stem of the word ; e.g. ὁ ga
an animal, Gen. ϑηρ-ός.
$32. Remarks on the Case-endings.
1. The pure stem is frequently changed in the Nom. of masculines and femi-
nines. But this is found again by omitting the genitive ending -o¢; 6. g. ὁ κό-
pas, a raven, Gen. köpax-og.
2. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nominative. Yet the euphony of the
Greek language does not permit a word to end with τ. Hence, in this case, r
is either wholly rejected or is changed into its cognate o; 6. B-
_ {πεπερὶ _ [τὸ πέπερϊ πεπέρι-ος OF ε-ος
g ) σελας g | τὸ σέλας a} ( σέλασ-ος) σέλα-ος
σωματ 2 τὸ (σῶματ) σῶμα | σώματ-ος
τερατ᾽ τὸ (τέρατ) τέρας . ( répar-o¢
8. The Accusative singular has the form in » with masculines and feminines
in -i¢, -v¢, -aug and -ovs, whose stem ends in -t, “Ὁ, -av and -ov; e.g. .
Stem rod: Nom. πόλις Acc. πόλιν Stem βοτρυ Nom. βότρυς Acc. βότρυν.
vav ναῦς ναῦν βου βοῦς βοῦν.
But the Acc. has the form in -α, when the stem ends in a consonant; 6. g. φλεβ,
φλέψς, HAEßa —nopax, κόραξ, κόρακ-α ---- λαμπαδ, λαμπάς, λᾶμπάδοα.
-------ο--- m Ce
8.8.1 THIRD DEC.—GENDER, QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. 38
Yet barytoned substantives in -ἰς and -vs, of two or more syliables, whose
stems end with a Tau-mute, in prese, have only the form in -v; e.g.
Stem &pıd Nom. ἔρις Acc. ἔριν
ὀρνιϑ , ὄρνις ὄρνιν
κορυϑ κόρυς κόρυν
xapir χάρις ᾿χώριν.
4. The Voc. is either like the Nom. or the stem. See the Paradigms.
5. On v ἐφελκυστικόν, see § 7, 1, (a).
§ 33. Gender, Quantity and Accentuation of the
Third Declension.
I. Gender. The gender of the third declension will be best learned by obser-
vation. The following rules, however, may be observed:
(a) Masculine; (a) Substantives in -av, -vv, -ας (Gen. -avog, -avroc), -evg, -ην,
-eıp (except ἡ xeip, hand), -vp (except τὸ πῦρ, fire), -ovc (except Td οὖς, ear) ——
(B) those in -ὧν, -np, -wp, -nc (Gen. -nros), -ws (Gen. -wrog), -%, with several
exceptions.
᾿ (Ὁ) Feminine; (a) Substantives in -ἄς (Gen. -ador), -avg, -ἐνς, -vve, ~ and
«ὡς (Gen. -οὖς) ; -ότης, «της ; -εἰς (except ὁ κτείς, comb) ;—(G) those in -c¢, -ıv,
ws, τῶν (Gen. -avoc), with several exceptions. Those in -§ vary between the
Masc. and Fem. gender.
(c) Neuter; All substantives in -a, -ἢ, -op, -wp, -ος, -1, -ap, (except ὁ pap, &
&arling), -ας (Gen. -arog, -aos, except ὁ λᾶς, a stone), and contracts in -7p.
_ I. Quantity. Words whose Nom. ends in -aé, -ἰξ, -vg, -ay, -ἰΨ, -vyp, «ἰς and
us, have the penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according
as the vowel of the above endings is short or long by nature; 6. g. ὁ ϑώραξ,
coat of mail, -axos, ἡ ply, reed, ῥῖπός, ἡ ἀκτῖς, ray, -ivoc, but ἡ BGAGE, clod, «ἄκος,
ἡ Eins, hope, -Ἶδος.
III. Accentuation. (a) The accent remains, through the several Cases, on the
accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws of accentuation permit; e. g.
τὸ πρᾶγμα, deed, πράγματος, but πραγμάτων, τὸ ὄνομα, name, ὀνόματος, but övo-
μάτων, ὁ ἡ χελιδών, swallow, χελιδόνος, Ξενοφῶν, -ὥντος, -ὥντες, -ὥντων. The
particular exceptions will be noticed in the paradigms. (Ὁ) Words of one syl-
lable are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, on the final syllable,
the short syllables -og, -ı and -oı, taking the acute, and the long syllables -wv
and om, the circumflex; 6. g. 6 piv, μηνός, umvi, μηνοῖν, μηνῶν unai(v).
Exceptions. The following monosyllabic substantives are paroxytoned in the
Gen. Pl. and in the Gen. and Dat. Dual: ἡ des, torch, ὁ ὁμώς, slave, ὁ ἡ Sac,
jackal, τὸ οὖς, Gen. ὠτός, ear, ὁ ἡ παῖς, child, 6 ons, moth, ὁ ἡ 'Τρώς, Trojan, ἡ
φῴς, Gen. φῳδός, a burning, τὸ φῶς, Gen. φωτός, light ; ©. g. dadwv, δάδοιν, ϑώων,
ὥτων, arow, παίδων, παίδοιν, σέων, Τρώων, φῴδων, φώτων. Moreover, notice
should also be taken of πᾶς, all, every, Gen. παντός, Dat. παντί, but πάντων,
κᾶἄσι(ν), ὁ Tay, Gen. Πανός, but τοῖς Πᾶσι(ν).
84 TEIBD DRO.—STEMA RNDING IN A CONSONANT. [ὅ.84.
A. Worps WHICH IN THE GENITIVE HAVE A CONSONANT ΒΚ»
FORE THE ENDING -05, i. 6. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A
CONSONANT.
§34.L The Nominative exhibits the pure stem.
The case endings are appended to the unchanged Nominative.
Stems which end in -»z (= Ξενοφῶν) 8 and τ (m δάμαρτ), must drop
the τ according to § 32, 2; hence Ξενοφῶν, Gen. -ὥντ-ος, δάμαρ,
Gen. -αρτ-ος.
ὁ, Paean. ὁ, Age. ὃ, Xenophon. ὁ, Month. τό, Nectar.
παιᾶν αἰών Ξενοφῶν μήν νέκταρ
παιᾶν-ος αἰῶν-ος Ξενοφῶντο-ος μην-ύς νέκταρ-ος
παιᾶνοι alav-ı Ξενοφῶντ-ι μην-ῖ ψνέκταρ-ι
παιᾶν-α αἰῶν-α Ξενοφῶντ-α μῆν-α νέκταρ
παιᾶν αἰών Ξενοφῶν 7 véxTap
παιῶν-ες αἰῶν-ες ΞἘενοφῶντ-ες 7 véxTap-a
παιάνων. αἰώνων Ξενοφώντων μ νεκτάρ-ων
παιᾶ-σι(ν}» αἰῶ.σι(ν}Ὲ nur i(v)* νέκταρ-σι(ν)
παιᾶν-ας αἰῶνας. Ξενοφῶντ-ας μὴν véxTap-a
παιᾶν-ες αἰῶν-ες Ξενοφῶντ-ες 7 νέκταρ-α
παιᾶν-ε αἰῶν-ε ενοφῶντ. νέκταρ-8
παιάγεοοιν αἰώνεοοιν Ξενοφώντ-οιν νεκτάροοιν.
Rem. 1. The three words in -ὧν, Gen. -ωνὸς, viz. ᾿Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, ἥ
ἅλων, threshing-floor, can be contracted in the Acc. Sing. after dropping ν, thus,
᾿Απόλλω, Tloce:d&, ἅλω. The three substantives, ᾿Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν and σω-
hp, preserver, contrary to the rule [$ 33, III. (a)], have in the Voc. ὦ "Απολλον,
Ἡόσειδον, σῶτερ.
Rem. 2. The neuters belonging to this class all end in -p (-ap, -op, -wp, -vp);
τὸ πῦρ (Gen. müp-ög), fire, has v long, contrary to § 32, 2.
XL Focabulary.
"Adu, to sing, celebrate in ϑάλλω, to bloom, be ver- πῦρ, müpög, τό, fire.
“N.
G.
D.
A.
Υ.
: Ν.
σ.
D.
A.
¥.
song. dant. orroudaioc,-aid,-aiov, zeal-
ἀνα-γιγνώσκω, to read. ϑήρ, ϑηρός, 6, a wild beast. ous, diligent, earnest,
αἰών, -Gvoc, ὁ, aevum, an κιϑάρᾶ, -ac, h, ἃ lyre. serious.
age, a space of time, κρατήρ, -jpoc, 6, a mixing τέρπω, to delight.
time, lifetime. bowl, goblet. τέρπομαι, w.dat.,to delight
βιβλίον, -ov, τό, a book. λειμών -ὥνος,ὁ, ἃ. meadow. in, or be delighted at.
γιγνώσκω, to know, think, νέπτω, to wash. χείρ, χειρός, 7, the hand.
judge, try, perceive. παιάν, -dvoc, 6, a war- χορός, -oö, ὁ, a dance.
ϑἅλία, -ac, #, a feast. song, a song of victory. ψήν, ψηνός, ὁ, a wasp.
Φεῦγε τοὺς ϑῆρας. Χεὶρ χεῖρα νίπτει. ᾿Απέχου τοῦ ψωνόςς Ol λειμῶνες
ϑάλλουσιν. Οἱ στρατιῶται ἄδουσι παιᾶνα. ‘Ev πυρὶ χρυσὸν καὶ ἄργυρον Yıy-
* Instead οὗ παιᾶνσι, αἰῶνσι, Ξενοφῶντσι, μηνσί, § 8, 6 and 7.
§35,] THIRD DEO-—STEMS- LENGTHENED IN THE NOM. δῦ
φώσκομεν. Ἰολλοὶ παρὰ κρατῆρι γίγνονται φίλοι ἑταῖροι. Οἱ ἄνθρωποι τέρ-
frovras κιϑάρᾳ' καὶ ϑαλίᾳ καὶ χοροῖς καὶ παιᾶσιν. Ol Ἕλληνες τὸν ᾿Απόλλῳ
καὶ τὸν Ποσειδῶ σέβονται. Οἱ σπουδαῖοι μαϑηταὶ τὰ τοῦ Ξενοφῶντος βιβλία
ἡδέως ἀναγιγνώσκουσιν.
Flee from the wild beast. Wash your (the) hands. Keep yourself from
wasps. ° The meadow is verdant. Soldiers delight in war-songs. War-songs
are sung by (ὑπό, w. gen.) the soldiers. We delight in beautiful meadows.
Flee from vile (κακάς) wasps. Many ere friends of the bowl. Poets pray to
Poseidon. ;
535. IL The Nominative lengthens the short final
vowel ofthe stem, 2orotnto ἢ.
_ According to § 82, 2. stems in γε must drop ¢ in the Nom.; e.g.
λέων, instead of λέωνε.
6, Shepherd. 4, = 5 ΤΉΙΒΕΥ, ὁ, Lion.
5. N. | ποιμὴν ᾿λέ
G. ποιμέν-ος ‘clamp
Ὁ. | ποιμέν-ι δαίμον-ι
A. | ποιμέν-α daluov-&
V. | ποιμήν δαῖμον
P.N. | ποιμέν-ες m. Aéovt-e¢ αἰϑέρ-ες ῥήτορ-ες
ποιμέν-ων λεόντων αἰϑέρ-ων ῥητόρ-ων
ποιμέ-σι(ν}Ἐ δαίμοσιν)» λέουσι(ν}Ὲ αἰϑέρ-σι(ν) ῥήτορ σι(ν)
ποιμέν-ας δαίμον-ας Aéovr-ag αἰϑέρ-ας ῥήτορ-ας
ποιμέν-ες ϑαίμον-ες Aéovr-e¢ αἰϑέρ-ες ῥήτορ-ες
δαίμον-ε λέοντ-ε αἰϑέρ-ε ῥήτορ-ε
δαιμόν-οιν λεόντ-οεν αὐἐϑέρ-οιν ῥητόρ-οιν.
Rem. I. Oxytoned substantives of this class retain in the Voc. the long vowel
(n, ©); thus, ὦ mouumv. The Voc. däep from danp, brother-in-law, is an excep-
tion; its accent also differs from the fundamental rule [$ 33, IIL (a)]. This
difference occurs also in the Voc. of ᾿Αμφίων, -iovoc, ᾿Αγαμέμνων, -ovos, viz.
"Audıov, ᾿Αγάμεμνον. Comp. § 34, Rem. 1.
Rex. 2. Ἡ χείρ, hand, Gen. xeip-ds, etc. has in the Das. Pl. and Dual yep-
oi(v) and χεροῖν.
Rea. 3. The following in -wv, Gen. -ovog, reject the » in particular Cases,
and suffer contraction: ἡ εἰκών, image, Gen. εἰκόνος and εἰκοῦς, Dat. εἰκόνι, Acc.
εἰκόνα and εἰκώ, Acc. Pl. εἰκόνας and eixobc,—the irregular accentuation of εἰκώ
and εἰκούς should be noted; ἡ ἀηδών, nightingale, Gen. ἀηδόνος and ändoüs, Dat.
ündoi; 7 χελιδών, swallow, Gen. χελιδόνος, Dat. χελιεδοῖ.
Rem. 4. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives ὁ ἡ ἀπάτωρ, τὸ ἄπατορ, father-
less, and ἀμήτωρ, ἄμητορ, motherless, Gen. -ορος ;—(b) the adjective ὁ ἡ ἄῤῥην,
rd ἄῤῥεν, male, Gen. ἄῤῥενος ;—(c) adjectives in -wy (Masc. and Fem.), -ov
(Neut.); δ. g. ὁ ἡ εὐδαΐμων, rd εὔδαιμον, fortunate, and comparatives in -wv, -ov,
or -Iov, -lov. These comparatives, after dropping » admit contraction in the
1§161,2.(c). * Instead of ποιμένσι, δαίμονσι, λεόντσι, see καὶ 8, 6 and 7.
86 THIRD DEC.—STEMS LENGTHENED IN un MOM [ὃ 8.
Acc. Sing. and in the Nom., Acc. and Vec. PL In the Voc. the accent differs
from the rule [ὁ 33, OL (a)]. But compounds in -gowy follow the rule; 6. g.
κρατερόφρων, Voc. κρατερόφρον.
S.N iia ὑδ Pa any
„N. μων εὔδαιμον
σ. εὐδαίμονος ἐχϑίονος
D. εὐδαίμονι ἐχϑίονι
A. | εὐδαίμονα εὔδαιμον | ἐχϑίονα and
Bio ἔχϑιον
V. εὔδαιμον
P.N. | εὐδαίμονες εὐδαίμονα | ἐχϑίονες ἐχϑίονα | μείζονες
é ᾿ ἐχϑίω | peilove
G. εὐδαιμόνων ἐχϑιόνων μειζόνων
D. εὐδαίμοσι(ν) ἐχϑίοσι(ν) μείζοσι(ν)
A. | εὐδαίμονας εὐδαίμονα | ἐχϑίονας ἐχϑίρνα | μείζονας μείζονα
ἐχϑίους ἐχϑίω | μείζους μείζω -
V. | like the Nominative. | like the Nominative. | like the Nominative.
ebdaluove ἐχϑίονε μείζονε
εὐδαιμόνοιν. ἐχϑιόνοιν. μειζόνοιν.
XIL Vocabulary.
"Αγᾶν, too much, too. ἡγεμών, -övog, ὁ, a leader. πράττω, to do, act; w.adv.,
éyéAn,-n¢,7,0 herd, a flock. κολαστῆς, -οὔ, ὁ, a pun- to fare.
ἄδικος, -0v, unjust. isher. σώφρων, -0v, sound-mind-
aldnp, -Epos, ὃ, , cether, λιμήν, -ἕνος, 6, a harbour. ed, wise, sensible.
the heavens. vaiw, to dwell. ὑπέρφρων, -ov, high-mind-
γέρων, -ovrog, 6, an old ὁδός, -οὔ, 7,a way; with ed, haughty.
man. [nity. elxw, to retire from the φρήν, -evöc, ἡ, pl. φρένες,
δαίμων, -ovoc, 6,9, a divi- way. the understanding, the
δῆμος, -ov, 6, the people, ὄλβιος, -ia, -cov, and 6A- mind or spirit.
the mob. Pıog, -ov, happy. φυλάττω, to guard, look
ed, well, εὖ πράττω, w.acc., ποιμῆν, -Evos, ὁ, a herds- after, defend.
to do well to. man, a shepherd.
Tov γέροντα et πρᾶττε. Σέβου τοὺς δαίμονας. Ol ποιμένες τὰς ἀγέλας φυ-
λάττουσιν. Τὸν κακὸν φεῦγε, ὡς κακὸν λιμένα. "Avev δαίμονος ὁ ἄνϑρωπος
οὐκ δλβιός ἐστιν. Ὁ ϑεὸς ἐν αἰϑέρι ναίει. ᾿Αεὶ χαλεπαὶ μέριμναι τείρουσι τὰς
τῶν ἀνθρώπων φρένας. “ἕπου ἀγαϑοῖς ἡγεμόσιν. Elke, ὦ νεανία, τοῖς γέρουσι
τῆς ὁδοῦ. Πολλάκις δῆμος ἡγεμόνα ἔχει ἄδικον νοῦν. Ὁ ϑεὸς κολαστής ἔστι
τῶν ἄγαν ὑπερφρόνων. Ἔχε νοῦν σώφρονα. "Q δαῖμον, πάρεχε τοῖς γέρουσι
μεγάλην εὐτυχίαν. Οἱ Önpevral τοῖς λέουσιν ἐνεδρεύουσιν '
Do well (pl.) to old men. Reverence (pl.) the Deity. The flocks are guard-
ed by the shepherd. Follow a good leader. Go, youth, out of the old man’s
way. The mob often follows bad leaders. The spirit (pl.) of man is worn out
by (dat.) oppressive cares. Keep yourself from the bad man, as from a bad
harbour. The flocks follow the shepherds. Ye (0) gods, guard the good old
men.
Φ
8436] TEIRD DEC.— STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE NOM. 37
§ 86. The following substaatives in -7e belong to the preceding
ui Viz. ὁ πατήρ, father, ἡ μήτηρ, mother, ἡ ϑυγάτηρ, daugh-
ter, ἡ γαστήρ, belly, ἡ Δημήτηρ, Demeter (Ceres) and ὁ ἀνήρ, man,
which differ from those of the above paradigms only in rejecting a
in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in the Dat. P]., and in inserting an
ἃ in the Dat. PL before the ending -ot, so as to soften the pronun-
ciation. The word ἀνήρ (stem asp), rejects ἃ in all Cases and
Numbers, except the Voc. Sing., but inserts a 8, to soften the pro-
nunciation.
ὁ, Father. 7, Mother. ἢ, Daughter.
Sing. N. | πατήρ μήτηρ ϑυγάτηρ ἀνήρ
G. | πατρ-ός μητρός ϑυγατρός ἀν-διρός
D. | rarp-i μητρί ϑυγατρί v-6-pi
A. | xarép-a μητέρα ϑυγατέρα év-d-pa
V. | πάτερ μῆτερ ϑύγατερ ἄνερ
Plar. N. πατέρ-ες μητέρες ϑυγατέρες ἄν-δ-ρες
G. | πατέρ-ων μητέρων ϑυγατέρων ἀν-ὁ-ρῶν
D. | πατρ-ἅ-σι(ν) unrpäe:(») ϑυγατρᾶσι(ν) ἀν-δ-ρ-ἅ-σι(ν)
A. | πατέρ-ας μητέρας ϑυγατέρας ἄν-ὅ-ρας
V. | πατέρ-ες μητέρες ϑυγατέρες ἄν-δ-ρες
D.N. A. V.| πατέρ-ε μητέρε ϑυγατέρε ἄν-ὅ-ρε
G. and D. πατέρτοιν μητέροιν ϑυγατέροιν at
Remark. Also the word ὁ ἀστήρ, -Epos, a star, which has. no syncopated
form, belongs to this class on account of the form of the Dat. PL ἀστράσι. The
word ἡ Δημήτηρ has a varying accent, viz. Δήμητρος. Ayunrpı, Voc. Δή-
μῆτερ, but Acc. Anunrépa.
XIIL Vocabulary.
"AdAov, -ov, TO, a prize,a slave to, serve, work στέργω, to love, to be con-
reward. for. tented with.
γαστήρ, -Tpös, 7, the belly. ἐχϑαίρω, to hate. χαρίζομαι, w. dat., to com-
δουλεύω, w. dat., to be a σοφός, -7, -dv, wise. ply with, oblige, gratify.
Στέργετε τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα. Μὴ δούλευε γαστρί. Χαῖρε, ὦ φίλε
νεανία, τῷ ἀγαϑῷ πατρὶβδ καὶ τῇ ἀγαϑῇ μητρί. Μὴ κακῷ σὺν ἀνδρὶ βουλεύου.
Τῇ Δήμητριδ πολλοὶ καὶ καλοὶ νεῷ ἦσαν. Ἢ ἀγαϑὴ ϑυγάτηρ ἡδέως πείϑεται
τῇ φίλῃ μητρί. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ ἄνδρες ϑαυμάζονται. Πολλάκις ἐξ ἀγαϑοῦ πατρὸς
γίγνεται κακὸς υἱός. "Exdalpw τὸν κακὸν ἄνδρα. Τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς ἀνδράσι μεγά-
An δόξα ἔπεται. Ἢ τῆς Δήμητρος ϑυγάτηρ ἦν Tlepoegévy. Ὦ φίλη ϑύγατερ,
στέργε τὴν μητέρα. Ἥ ἀρετὴ καλὸν ἀϑλόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶδ σοφῷ. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ υἱοὶ
τὰς μητέρας στέργουσιν. Οἱ Ἕλληνες Δημητέρα σέβονται. Πείϑεσθϑε, ὦ φίλοι
veaviat, τοὶς πατράσι καὶ ταῖς μητράσιν. Xapilov, ὦ πάτερ, τῇ Ovyarpi.
1 § 161, 3. (a), (δ). 3416], 2. 9416], 3. (d).
er) 2. (2) ἫΝ fi 161, 5. μὰ ; (a)
4
2
38 THIRD DEC.—NOM. APPENDS 6 TO THE stew. [$ 87.
Love, O youths, your (the) fathers and mothers! Consult not with bad
men. Good daughters cheerfully follow their (the) mothers. We admire a
good man. Obey, my dear youth, your (the) father and mother. Gratify, dear
father, thy (the) good son. Pray to Demeter. Strive, O son, after the reputa-
tion of thy (the) father. The prize of wise men is virtue.
5.87. The Nominative appends o to the stem.
(a) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute—f, 2, 9; 7, 77, % 7.
On the coalescence of these with o so as to form w and &, see § 8, 3.
KOpGK-0¢
KOpax-t
KOpaK-@
N.
G.
D.
A.
V. κόραξ
N.
G.
D..
A.
Vv.
κόρᾶκ-ες
Kopük-wv
κύρἄξι(ν)
κύρᾶκ-ας
λαίλαᾶπο-ες KOpaK-e¢
DNA VY. Aallän-e κόρἄκ-ε
Q. and Ὁ.. Aadin-ow Kopük-oLv
Remark. Here belong adjectives in -§ (Gen. -yos, -κος, -xoc) and - (Gen.
-xoc): 6. g.6 ἡ äpräf, Gen. -dyoc, rapax, 6. ἡ ἧλιξ, Gen. -ixoc, aequalis, ὁ ἢ
μῶνῦξ, Gen. -üxos, one-horned ; ὁ ἡ αἰγίλίψ, Gen. -Imog, high. —
XIV. Vocabulary.
᾿Αγών, -ὥνος, ὁ, a contest. κόραξ, -dxoc, 6, a crow, a ὄρτυξ, -üyog, ὁ, a quail.
alf, -yöc, ὁ, ἡ, a goat. raven. ὀρχηϑμός, -oü, ὁ, a dance.
ἀλεκτρυών, -ὄνος, 6, ἢ, Ὁ κρώζω, to croak. ὄψ, ὁπός, ἡ, the voice.
cock. μάστιξ, -Iyog, 7, a scourge, πολύπονος, -ov, laborious.
&oıdn, At, ἢ, Ὁ song. a whip. σῦριγξ, -ıyyos, h, ἃ flute.
δέ, but. μέν----δέ, truly— but; on τέγτιξ, -Iyos, ὁ, a grass-
ἐλαύνω, to drive. ᾿ the one hand,—on the hopper. [tor.
ἵππος, -ov, ὁ, a horse. other: used in antithe- φέναξ, -dxoc, ὁ, an impos-
καΐ---καί, both—and, as ses; μέν, seldom to be φόρμιγξ, -cyyoc, 7, a harp.
well as. translated. | inp, ὠπός, ἢ, the counte-
κόλαξ, -üxog, ὃ, a flatterer. μύρμηξ, -nxoc, 6, an ant. nance.
Ol κόρακες Κκρώζσυσιν. Τοὺς κόλακας φεῦγε. ᾿Ἀπέχου τοῦ φένακος. Ol ἄν-
'ϑῥωποι τέρπονται φάρμιγγι καὶ ὀρχηϑμῷ καὶ ὠδῇ. Ol ἵπποι μάστιξιν ἐλαύνον-
‘was. Al φόρωϊγγες τοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων ϑυμοὺς τέρπουσιν. Τέττιξ μὲν rérreye
φίλος ἐστί, μθρμηκι δὲ μύρμηξ. Ol ποιμένες πρὸς τὰς σύριγγας ἄδουσιν. Tapa
"rote ᾿Αϑηναίοις καὶ ὀρτύγων καὶ ἀλεκτρυόνων ἀγῶνες ἧσαν. Οἱ ποιμένες τὰς
14187. 4816], 2 (c).
§ 88.} THIRD DEC.—NOM. APPENDS ¢ TO THE STEM. 88
τῶν αἰγῶν ἀγέλας εἰς τοὺς λειμῶνας ἐλαύνουσιν. Μυρμήκων καὶ ὀρξύγων βίος
πολύπονός ἐστιν. ἸΠολλοὶ ἀγαϑὴν μὲν ὦπᾳ, κακὴν δὲ ὄπα ἔχουσιν.
The raven croaks. Flee from the flatterer. Keep. yourselves from impos-
tors. Men are delighted by the harp. The horse is driven with the whip. The
shepherd sings to the flute. The life of the ant and of the quail is laborious.
The shepherd guards the goats. Flutes delight shepherds.
§ 38. (Ὁ) The stem ends in a Tau-mute—d, τ, xc, 0,90. On
the Acc. Sing. in -« and -», see ὃ 82, 3.
7, Torch. 7, Helmet. 6,7, Bird. ὁ, King. m Tape-worm.
λαμπάς" κόρυς" ὄρνις" ἄναξ" .EAuuvc*
Aaumüd-og κόρυϑ-ος ὄρνιϑ-ος ἄνακτοεος ἕλμινϑ-ος
Aaumüd-ı κόρυϑ-ι ὄρνῖϑ-ι ἄνακτ-ι ἔλμινϑοι
Aauräd-a κόρυν öpviv ἄνακτ-α ἕλμινϑ-α
λαμπάς κόρυς ὄρνις ἄναξ ἔλμινς
λαμπάδ-ες κόρυϑ-ες ᾿ς ὄρνϊῖϑεες ἄνακτοες ἔλμινϑο-ες
Aaumüd-wv κορύϑτων ὀρνΐϑοων ἀνάκτ-ων ἑλμίνϑεων
λαμπά-σι(ν)" 'κὀρυ-σι(νῚ" ὄρντ-σι(ν)" ἄναξι(ν)" : EAul-ou(v)*
Aaumäd-ag κόρυϑ-ας öpvid-ar ἄνακτ-ας EAuvd-ag
λαμπωαδ-ες κόρυϑ-ες ὄρνιϑ-ες ἄνακτ-ες ἔλμινϑ.ες
λαμπάδ-ε κόρυϑ-ε ὄρνζϑ-ε. avaxt-e EApivd--e
Aaumäd-ov κορύϑ-οιν ὀρνῖϑ-ον §=—s avdxt-orw ἐἐλμίνϑοοιν.
A
<bboz|<punZz
:P
Ψ
Ὶ
Rem. 1. The word ὁ ἡ παῖς, child, Gen. παιδός, has παῖ in the Vocative.
Rem. 2. Here belong adjectives in -ıs and -t, Gen. -cduc, -ıros; e.g. ὁ ἡ eb-
Raptc, τὸ εὔχαρι, Gen. -ıTos, pleasing ; those in -üc, Gen. -adoc; 6. g. ὁ ἡ φυγάς,
Gen. -ἄδος, exiled; those in -7¢, Gen. -7rog; 6. g. ὁ ἡ ἀργής, Gen..-froc, white ;
those in -@s, Gen. -ὥτος ; e.g. ὁ ἡ ἀγνώς, Gen. -ὥτος, unknown; those in -t¢,
Gen. -ἰδος ; 6. g. ὁ ἡ ἀνώλκις, Gen. -doc, weak, ἡ πατρίς, Gen. -idoc, native land ;
those in -ὕς, Gen. -ὕδος ; 6. g. ὁ 7 νέηλυς, Gen. -vdog, lately come.
XV. Vocabulary.
Απαλλάττω, w. gen. of the κατα-κρύπτω, to conceal. πένης, -ητος, ὁ, 7, poor.
thing, to set free from. κολάζω, to punish. πλούσιος, -ta, -ἰον, rich.
ἅπασα, -4¢, every. κοῦφος, -7, -ov, light, vain. πλοῦτος, ὁ, riches, wealth.
γέλως -wroc, ὃ, laughter. μακαρίζω,ϊο esteem happy. Ypovric, «δος, ἡ, care, con-
Eyeipw, to awaken, excite. νεότης, -7T0¢, 7, youth. cern.
ἕλμινς, τινϑος, 7, ἃ worm. νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ, night, νυκ- φιλοχρημοσύπη,-ἧς, ἦ, ava-
ἐλπίς, -idoc, 7, hope. τός, by night, in the rice.
ἔρις, -idoc, 4, contention, might. . χάρις, «ἔτος, ἡ, favor, kind-
strife. . ὁμοιότης, «τος, ἦν, like- ness,gratitude,elegance.
ἔρως, -ωτος, ὁ, love. ness, χρηαμοσύνῃ, ns, ἦν need-
κακότης, -nTog, ἢ, Wicked- παῖς, παιδός, 6, #, »chikl, _iness, poverty:
ness, Vice. a boy.
* Instead of λαμπάδι, κόρυϑς, ὄρνιϑςο, ἄνακτς, ἔλμινϑς; Dat. PL λαμπάδσε,
etc., see $ 8, 3.
40 THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. [ὃ 39.
Οἱ ὄρνεθες ἄδουσιν. Χάρις χάριν τίκτει, ἔρις ἔριν. Maxapilouev τὴν veö-
ξητα. Χρησμοσύνη τίκτει ἔριδας. Πλούσιοι πολλάκις τὴν κακότητα πλούτῳ
κατακρύπτουσιν. "QO καλὲ παῖ, εὖ πρᾶττε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. Ἢ φιλοχρημοσύνη
μήτηρ κακότητος ἁπάσης ἐστίν. Οἱ πένητες πολλάκις εἰσὶν εὐδαίμονες. ‘H σο-
gia ἐν τοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων ϑυμοῖς ϑαυμαστοὺς τῶν καλῶν ἔρωτας ἐνεγείρει. Ὁ
ϑάνατος τοὺς ἀνθρώπους φροντίδων ἀπαλλάττει. Ἥ φιλία dv ὁμοιότητος γίγ-
ψεται. Οἷνος ἐγείρει γέλωτα. "Ev νυκτὶ βουλὴ τοῖς σοφοῖς γίγνεται. Ol oo-
φοὶ κολάζαυσι τὴν κακότητα. Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι πολλάκις κούφαις ἐλπίσι τέρπονταε.
The bird sings. From favor arises favor; from contention, contention. By
(dat.) wisdom a wonderful love (pl.) of the beautiful is awakened in the minds
of men. By (dat.) the song of birds we are delighted. Wine dispels the eares
of men. Flee, my (0) boy, from vice. From (dat.) likeness arises friendship.
‘We delight in birds (daz.).
§ 89. The stems of neuters belonging to this class, end in ¢ and
sr. But as the laws of euphony admit neither z nor κα at the end
of a word, z and also κέ, are either omitted, or ¢ is changed into o.
Comp. § 38, 2. In the words, ro γόνυ, knee, and τὸ δόρυ, spear,
from the stems yovar and dogaz, «a, the final vowel of the stem, is
changed into v, in the Nominative.
τὸ, Body. i τὸ, Wonder.
σῶμα ό Ya τέρας
σώματ-ος ά τέρατ-ος
σώματ-ι ᾿ τέρατ-ι
σῶμα τέρας
σώματ-α ύ 2 τέρατ-α
σωμάτ-ων a τεράτ.ων
σώμα-σι(ν)" γάλαξι(ν)" τέρα-σι(ν}"δὀ ὠ-σί(ν)"
σώματ-α γάλακτ-α τέρατ-α ὧτ-α
σώματ-ε γόνατ-ε γάλακτ-ε τέρατ-ε or-e
σωμάτ-ον Yovar-oıv γαλάκτ-οιν τεράτ-οιν ὦτ-οιν.
XVI. Vocabulary.
“Auäprnua, -Groc, τό, an δόρυ, δόρατος, τό, a spear. πρᾶγμα, -ἄτος, τό, an ac-
S.
N.
G.
D.
A.
“N.
G.
D.
A,
error, an offence. ἐϑίζω, to accustom. tion, a business, a thing,
ἅπτομαι, w. gen., to attach Vepüreia, «ας, 7, care, ser- an exploit.
oneself to, touch. vice. ῥῆμα, -ärog, τό, a word.
βαστάζω, to carry. ἱδρώς, -Groc, ὃ, sweat. σπένδω, to pour libations,
ϑαοήϑημα, -üror, τό, help. ἱκέτης, -ov, 6, a suppliant. pour ont.
γάλα, -axroc, τό, milk. μικρός, -d, «ὄν, small. ταυτολογΐα, -ac, h, tan-
yebouat, w. gen. to taste, μῦϑος, -ov, ὁ, a speech, a tology, a repetition of
enjoy. word, an account. what has been said be-
χυμνάζω, to exercise. ποικίλος, -ἢ, τον, various, _ fore.
διαμείβομαι, to exchange. variegated. φαῦλος, -ἢ, -ov, bad.
# Instead σώματσι, yavaroı, γάλακτσε, etc., see § 8, 3. t Instead of ὡς.
§ 39.] THIRD DEOLENSION.-—NEUTERS. 4
χρῆμα, -ürog, τό, a thing; χρηστός, -ἦ, -öv, useful, χωριαμός, -o, 6, separa
pl. property, money, good, brave. tion.
treasures,
"Ev χαλεποῖς πράγμασιν dAlyoı ἑταῖροι πιστοΐ elow. Τῆς ἀρετῆς πλοῦτον od
διαμειβόμεϑα τοῖς χρήμασιν. Οἱ ἱκέται τῶν γονάτων! ἅπτονται. ‘O ϑάνατός
ἐστι χωρισμὸς τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ τοῦ σώματος. Ὁ πλοῦτος παρέχει τοῖς ἀνθρώποις
«οικίλα βοηϑήματα. Μὴ πείϑου κακῶν ἀνθρώπων ῥήμασιν. Mn δούλενε, ὦ
nal, τῇ τοῦ σώματος ϑεραπείᾳφ. Οἱ Ἕλληνες ταῖς Νύμφαις κρατῆρας γάλακτος
σπένδουσιν. "Εϑιζε καὶ γύμναζε τὸ σῶμα σὺν πόνοις καὶ ἰδρῶτε. Ol ἀῤολέσχαι
τείρουσι τὰ ὦτα ταῖς ravroAoyiay.* υχὴν ἔϑιζε, ὦ παῖ, πρὸς τὰ χρηατὰ πράγ-
ματα. Οἱ φαΐλοι pido: τῶν ὥτων οὐχ ἅπτονται. Τοῖς ὠσὶν᾽ ἀκούομεν. Μὴ
ἔχϑαιρε φίλον μικροῦ ἁμαρτήματος ἔνεκα. Τεύου, ὦ παῖ, τοῦ γάλακτος" οἱ
στρατιῶταρ δόρατα βαστάζουσιν.
In a difficult business there are few faithful friends. Exercise, Ὁ youths,
your (the) body with labor and sweat! Strive, O boy, after noble actions.
Many mon delight in money. From a noble action arises reputation. We ad-
mire noble actions. Boys taste milk with pleasure. Soldiers fight with spears,
Bxruarx. The word τὸ τέρας usually admits contraction in the plural, aftey
Τ is,dropped; 6. g. τέρᾷ, τερῶν ; τὸ γέρας, reward of honor, τὸ γῆρας, old age, τὰ
κρέας, “Ποῖ, and τὸ κέρας, horn, reject the 7 in all numbers, and then suffer con-
traction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Pl., except
fhe ‘Dat. Pi.; besides these forms, eon κέρας has also the regular form
with τ.
Sing. N. | τὸ κέρας τὸ κρέας
σ. κέρατ-ος and (κέρα-ος(ἢ κέρως (xpéa-oc) κρέως
D. xepar-ı amd (κέρα-ἢ κέρᾳ (xpéa-t) apeg
A. κέρας κρέας
Plur. N. stpar-a and (xépa-a) κέρᾶ κρέα-α) κρέα
G. κεράττων and (κερά-ων) κερῶν κρεά-ων) κρεῶν
D. képa-ou(v) ay”
A. kepar-a = and (xépa-a) κέρᾶ (xpéa-a) κρέα
D.N. A V. κέραττε and (xépa-e) κέρα (xpéa-e) κρέα
G. and D. Kepar-ory and (κερά-οιν) xep (xped-orv) κρεῷν.
XVII. Vocabulary.
Avépia, «ας h, bravery. εὐεξία, good condition. προ-τρέπω, to turn to, im-
γέρας, τό, a reward, a gift ϑεμέλιον, -ov, τό, a foun- pel. [pet.
of honor. dation. σάλπιγξ, -tyyoc, ἢ, atrum-
γῆρας, τό, old age. κέρας, τό, a horn. σημαΐνω, to give a sign,
διάτροφῆ, -ἧς, 7, nourish- κρέας, -ἕαος = -éwc, τό, or signal.
ment.. flesh, meat. ὑπάρχω, to be at hand, or
δύσκολος, -ov, difficult, πέμπω, to send. to be had, be.
troublesome. πρόβᾶτον, -ov, τό, asheep. Yapıakov,-ov,rö,aremefy,
ἔλᾶφος, -ov, 6, 4, ἃ stag.
16.158, 8. (Ὁ). °§161,5. ὃ 616], 3. (4), (ὁ). 4§161,8. 5 § 168, 5, (a).
45
42
Ol ϑεοὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τέρα. πέμπουσιν.
ϑάνατός ἐστιν.
καὶ προβάτων γάλα καὶ κρέα πρὸς διατροφὴν ὑπώρχει.
οἱ στρατιῶται σημαίνουσιν.
Aus ἐν παισίν ἔστιν ἡ τοῦ σώματος εὐεξία. Αἱ ἔλαφοι κέρα ἔχουσιν.
ἐστιν ὁ ἐν γήρᾳ βίος.
THIRD DECLENSION.~—STEMS IN 9 OR 9€.
[8 40.
Τῶν, ἐν γήρᾳ κακῶν φάρμακον 6
Τὰ γέρα τοὺς στρατιώτας εἰς ἀνδρείαν προτρέπει.
Kipaoı! καὶ σάλπιγξιν
Ποικίλων κρεῶν" γευόμεϑα. Καλοῦ γήρως ϑεμέ-
Ἐξ αἰγῶν
Δύςκολός
By (ὑπό, w. gen.) the gods, prodigies are sent to men. Death abolishes the
evils of old age. By (dat.) rewards, soldiers’are impelled to bravery.
Rejotee,
O youth, at the reward. We admire the beautiful horns of the stag. Many
evils accompany old age. Bear the troubles of old age.
§ 40. (ὁ) The stem ends in » or #z.
Sing.
N.
G.
D.
A.
Υ.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
4:
7
N
| G. and
jam
6, Dolphin.
δελφίς"
Beate ty)
δελφῖν-ες
δελφΐν-ων
δελφῖ-σι(ν)"
δελφῖν-ας
δελφῖν-ες
δελφῖν-ε
δελφΐν-οιν
ὁ, Giant.
γίγας"
γίγαντ-ος
yiyavr-ı
yiyavr-a
γίγἄν
γίγαντ-ες
γιγάντων
yiya-oı(v)”
yiyavr-a
yiyavr-ec
yiyavr-e
γιγάντ-οιν
ὀδόντ-ες
ὀδόντ-ων
ὀδοῦ-σι(ν)"
ὀδόντ-ος "
ὀδόντ-ες
ὀδόντ-ε
ὀδόντ-οιν.
Rew. 1. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives in -ας, -aıva, -αν, viz. μέλας,
-atva, -av, black, and τάλας, -aıva, -av, wretched ;—(b) πᾶς, πᾶσα,
πᾶν, all, every, and its compounds; 6. g. Gras, Grdoa, ἅπαν ;—(c) Ex dy,
-οὔσα, - ὄν, willing, -vros, -obong, -Övros, and ἄκων, ἄκουσα, ἄκον, unwilling »—
(4) adjectives in -eıs, -εσσα, - εν, which are peculiar, inasmuch as the Dat.
Pl., masculine and neuter, ends in - eo: instead of - εἰσι; e.g.
Black.
Sing. N. | μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν
G. || μέλᾶνος μελαίνης μέλανος
D. |μέλανε μελαίνῃ μέλανι
A. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν
V. | μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν
Plur. N. | μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα πᾶσαι πάντα
G. | μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων πασῶν πάντων
D. | wéAace μελαίναις μέλασι πάσαις πᾶσι
A. | μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα πάσας πάντα
V. | μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα πᾶσαι πάντα
D.N. ᾿ V.| wéAave μελαίΐνα μέλανε πάντε πάσα πάντε
G. and D. — — μελάνοιν. | πάντοιν πάσαιν πάντοιν.
1$161, 3. 5. (a).
* Instead of ῥῖνς, bebe yiyavrs, ὀδόντς, pivot, etc., see § 8, 6 and 7.
8.41.1 THIRD BROLENSION.—STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL.
Singular
«ἈΦ
χαρίεις Ἔ χαρίεσσα χαρίεν
χαρίεσσα χαρίεν
Dual N. A. V.
G. and Ὁ.
48
Graceful.
xapievre χαριέσσᾶ
χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν.
Plural.
N. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα
χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος | G. | χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν - χαριέντων
χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι
χαρίεντα χαῤρίεασαν χαρίεν
χαρίεν
D. | χαρίεσι(ν) χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι(ν)
A. | χαρίεντας χαριέσσᾶς χαρίεντα
V. | χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα
χαρίεντε
Rem. 2. Adjectives compounded with ὁδούς, are declined like ὀδούς ; 9. g. ὁ
4 μονόδους, τὸ μονόδον, ane-toathed, Gen. μονόδοντος ; adjectives in -ας, Gen
-avroc, like γίγας ; 68. g. ὁ ἡ ἀκάμας, untiring, Gen. -avroc.
*Axric, -ivoc, 7, a beam, 8
ray.
ἄκων -ουσα, -ov, wnwill-
ings
ἅπας, -üca, «ἄν, all to-
‘gether, every.
αὐτός, -7, -6, ipse, ὁ αὑτός,
the same.
XVII. Vocabulary.
ἑκών, «οὔσα, «ὅν, willing.
ἐλέφας, -αντος, 6, an ele-
phant, ivory.
ebrropoc,-ov,w.gen.,abound-
ing in.
ἥλιος, -ov, ὁ, the sun.
κωτΐλος,-η,-ον, loquacious.
Asalvo, to make smooth,
ὁδοῦς, -Övroc, ὁ, a tooth.
ὀσφραίνομαι, to smell.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, every, all,
ποτέ, once, sometimes.
Blc, ῥινός, ἡ, the nostril,
the nose.
TraAdc,-atva,-ay, wretched.
φιλάνϑρωπος, -ov, man-
grind. loving, philanthropic.
; μάχη, -ἧς, 9, & battle. χαρίεις -E000, -Ev, grace-
γίγᾶς, -avrog, ὃ, a giant. μέλας, -awva, «ἄν, black, ful.
δελφΐς, -Ivoc, ὁ, a dolphin. dark.
Οὐ πᾶσιν dvSparore ὁ αὐτὸς νοῦς ἐστιν. τοῖς ὀδοῦσι! τὰ βρώματα λεαΐνομεν.
Οἱ δελφῖνες φιλάνϑρωποί εἰσιν. Ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς ἀγαϑοῦ πάντα κακὰ φέρειν.
Πολλαὶ Λιβύης χῶραι ebropoi εἶσιν ἐλέφαντος. Πάντες κωτίλον ἄνϑρωπον ἐχ-
ϑαίρουσιν. Τοῖς yiyacl? ποτε ἣν μάχη πρὸς τοὺς ϑεούς. Ταῖς τοῦ ἡλίου ἀκτῖ-
σι χαίρομεν. Ῥινῶν ἔργον ἐστὶν ὀσφραίνεσθαι.
The teeth grind the food. We smell with the nose (dat.). The gods once
had a battle with the giants (To the gods there was once a battle against the
giants). We admire the beautifulivory. Trust not all men. The business of
the teeth is, to grind the food. It is proper for (it is, w. gen.) every man to wor-
ship the Deity.
βρῶμα, -ἅτος͵ τό, food, vic-
* tuale,
4
B. WorpDs WHICH IN THE GENITIVE HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE
THE ENDING -06.
841. I. Substantives in -evs, -αὖς, -οὔς.
The stem of substantives in -evs, -αὖς, -ovg ends inv. The v
remains at the end of a word and before consonants, but is omitted
* The dropping the v before o lengthens e into εἰ.
1 § 16], 8, 26158 2. 3 § 161, 2. (ἃ). 4 § 161, 2. (c).
44 THIRD DECLENSION.—STEMS BNDING IN A VOWNL. [$ 41.
in the middle between vowels. Those in -evc have -¢é in the Acc.
Sing. and -¢a¢ in the Acc. PL; in the Gen. Sing., they take the
Attic Gen. -ἕως instead of -gog, and in the Dat. Sing. and Nom.
Pl., admit contraction, which is not usual in the Acc. Plural. Those
in -αὖς and -ov¢g admit contraction only in the Acc. Plural.
ὁ, King. ὁ, A measure. ὁ, ἡ, Ox. ἡ, An old woman.
5. N. βασιλεῦς χοεύς βοῦς, bis for böve γραῦς
G. | Baorré-we χο(έω)ῶς βο-ός . γρᾶ-ός
D. | βασιλεῖ χοεῖ βο- ypa-i
A. | βασιλέ-ἃ χο(έαγᾷ βοῦν γραῦν
Vi. | βασιλεῦ χοεῦ βοῦ ; γραῦ
P.N. | βασιλεῖς χοεῖς βό-ες γρᾶ-ες
6. | βασιλέ-ων xo(Ew)@v © βο-ῶν γρᾶ-ῶν
D. | βασιλεῦσι(ν) χοεῦσι(ν) βουσί(ν) γραυσί(ν)
A. | βασιλέ-ἂς χο(έα)ᾶς (Bö-ag) βοῦς (γρᾶ-ας) γραῦς
V. | βασιλεῖς χοεῖς βό-ες γρᾶ-ες
Dual. | βασιλέ-ε xoée Bo-e ypü-e
βασιλέ-οιν χοέοιν Bo-oiv ypa-oiv.
Remark. Among the older Attic writers, the Nom. and Voc. Pl. of those in
«ες, end also in -ἧς ; 6. g. βασιλῆς, instead of βασιλεῖς.
XIX. Vocabulary.
"Apxo, w. gen., to begin, to εἰκάζω, το. dat, to liken, ὀφθαλμός, -οὔ, ὁ, an eye.
command, rule. compare. πολυλόγος ον, loquacious.
ἀτιμάζω, not to honor, de- ἐπιμέλεια, -ac, ἢ, care. πρό, w. gen., before.
spise. Sie, to sacrifice. ré—ai,both—and, as well
ἀχάριστος, -ov, unthank- ἱερεύς, -Ews, 6, a priest, as.
ful, ungrateful. λῆρος, -ov, ὃ, loquacity. φονεύω, to murder, kill.
᾿Αχιλλεύς, Achilles. [ing. νομεῦς, -éwc, 6, pastor, a xoebs, vows, ὁ, ἃ measure
βούλομαι, to wish, be will- herdsman, a shepherd. for liquids, a pouring-
γονεύς, -éwc, 6, a parent, νομῆ, «ἧς» 7, pasture. vessel.
pl. parents.
Ol βασιλεῖς ἐπιμέλειαν ἔχουσι τῶν πολιτῶν. ‘H ἀγέλη τῷ vopei Ererau.!
‘O Ἕκτωρ ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αχιλλέως φονεύεται. Οἱ ἱερεῖς. τοῖς ϑεοῖρξ βοῦς ϑύουσιν.
Κῦρος παῖς ἣν ἀγαϑῶν γονέων. Οἱ ἀχάριστοι τοὺς γονέας ἀτιμάζουσιν. Tei-
Vou, ὦ παῖ, τοῖς γονεῦσιν. Τηλέμαχος ἣν ᾽Οδυσσέως υἱός. Βούλου τοὺς γονέας
πρὸ παντὸς ἐν τιμαῖς ἔχειν. Οἱ τῶν γραῶν λῆροι τὰ ὦτα τείρουσιν. Καλῶς
ἄρχεις, ὦ βασιλεῦ. Αἱ γρᾶες πολυλόγοι εἰσίν. Οἱ νομεῖς τὴν βοῶν ἀγέλην εἰς
νομὴν ἄγουσιν. "Ὅμηρος τοὺς τῆς Ἥρας ὀφϑαλμοὺς τοῖς τῶν βοῶν εἰκάζει
Πάτροκλος φίλος ἣν ᾿Αχιλλέως. Κῦρον, τὸν τῶν a a er ἐπί re τῇ
ἀρετῇ καὶ τῇ σοφίᾳ ϑαυμάζομεν.
The king cares for the citizens. The herds follow the TERN Oxen are
sacrificed by (ὑπό, w. gen.) the priests to the gods. The old women by (their)
1 § 161, 2. (a), (ὁ). * 4161, 5.
§42.] THIRD DECLENSION.—-WORDS IN -ἧς AND -δῷ. 45
prating (dat.) plague our (the) ears. Ye rule well, O kings! O priests, sacri-
fice an ox to the god! It is proper for (it is, το. gen.) a good herdsman td take
care of the oxen. Children love their (the) parents.
|
§ 42. II. Words in -ns, -ς ; -wg (Gen. -wog) and -ὡς and -ὦ (Gen.
-00¢) ; -ας (Gen. -aog), -o¢ (Gen. -806).
1. The stem of words of this class ends in o. In respect to the
remaining or omission of o, the same rule is observed, as in regard
to v in the preceding class of substantives, viz. the 6 remains at the
end of a word and before consonants, but is omitted in the middle
between vowels. In the Dat. Pl. a o is omitted; 6. g. ὁ Owe,
jackal, τοῖς ϑω-σί().
(1) Words in-7¢ and -ες.
' 2. The endings -7¢, -es, belong only to adjectives (the ending -x¢
being masculine and feminine, and -e¢ neuter), and to proper names
in -φάνης, -μένης, -γένης, -κράτης, -μήδης, -πείϑης, -σϑένῃς and
(-xAens) -κλῆς, having the termination of adjectives. The neuter
exhibits the pure stem.
3. The words of this class suffer contraction, after the omission
of σ, in all Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing. and the Dat. PL;
and those in -κλέης, which are already contracted in the Nom. Sing.
into -κλῆς, suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Singular.
Singular.
σαφής, clear. ei (σαφέ-α) σαφῆ
(σαφέ-ος) σαφοῦς 3
3 σαφεῖ :
σαφῆ σαφές (σαφέ-ας) (σαφέ-αὐ σαφῆ
wae σαφέ-ες) L (cagé-a) σαφῆ
σαφέ-ε
a ἐπ D. D,| σαφέ-οιν σαφοῖν. ᾿
Singular. Plural. Dual.
ἡ τριήρης, tareme. (τρεῆρε-ε)ὺ τριήρεις (τριῆρε-ε) τριήρη
( τριῆρε-ος) τριήρους τριηρέ-ων and τριήρων (τριηρέ-οιν) τριηροῖν
aa τριήρει τριήρε-σι(ν)
τριήρετα τριήρη (τριήρε-α(ἢ τριήρεις
τρίηρες ee, τριήρεις
Σωκράτης | εν ΣΥΝ Περικλῆς
Σωκράτους (Περικλέε-ος) Περικλέους
Σωκράτει (Περικλέε-ἢ (Περεκλέει) ἸΠερικλεῖ
Σωκράτη (Περικλέε-α) Περικλέᾶ
Σώκρατες (Περίκλεες) ΠπΠΠερίκλεις.
Rex. 1. The contraction in the Dual, viz. τριήρεε = τριήρη is worthy of no-
tice, since here -ee is contracted into -7, and not as elsewhere, into -eı.
Bex. 2. In adjectives in -#¢, -e¢, preceded by a vowel, -ea is commonly not
46 THIRD DECLENSION:-"WORDS IN “Οὐ. [§ 48.
͵
contracted into -7 (as in σαφέα = σαφῆ), but into -@ (as in Περικλέε-α = «λέα) ;
e g. ἀκλεῆς, without fame, Masc. and Fem. Acc. Sing, and Neut. Nom. Acc. and
Voce. Pl. ἀκλεέα = ἀκλεᾶ, ὑγιής, healthy, vytéa = ὑγιᾶ.
Rem. 3. Proper names with the above endings, and also "Ἄρης, form the Acc.
Sing. both socording to the first and third declensions, and are therefore called-
Heteroclites ; e. g Σωκράτεα = Σωκράτη, and Σωκράτην according to the first
declension. Yet with those in -κλῆς the Acc. in -κλῆν is not usual in good aA
tic prose.
Rem. 4. The Voc. of paroxytones differs, m its nissan from the ἘΠ
in ὁ 33, III. (a). In the contracted Gen. Pl., τριήρης, αὐτάρκης, contented, and
compounds of ἦϑος, are paroxytones, contrary to the rule [ὁ 11, 2. (2) (Ὁ) (#)],
XX. Vocabulary.
Aloxpöc,-&,-öv,disgraceful. δουλεία, -ac, 7, slavery. morünöc, -οὔ, ὁ, a river.
ἀκρᾶτής, -éc, immoderate, ἐλεαίρω, to pity. σοφιστής, -oö, ὁ, a teacher
incontinent, intemper- ἐλώδης, -ec, marshy. of eloquence, a sophist.
ate, wanting in self- Ἰνδική, ἡ, India. ' σωτηρία, -ac, 4, safety,
command. κάλᾶμος, -ov, ὃ, ἃ reed. welfare.
ἀληϑής, -éc, true. λέγω, to say. τόπος, -ov, 6, ἃ place.
ἀτυχής, -és, unfortunste. Μανδάνη, Mandane. rpdyadia, «ας, 7, a trag-
᾿Αστυάγης, Astyages. ὁμιλία, -ας,. ἢ, το. dat. edy.
ἀφᾶγῆς, -ἔς, unknown, ob- intercourse (with any.
scure. one).
Al τοῦ Σοφοκλέους τραγῳδίαι καλαί εἰσιν. "Τὸν Περικλέα ἐπὶ τῇ σοφίᾳ ϑαυ-
μάζομεν. Τῷ Σωκράτει; πολλοὶ μαϑηταὶ ἧσαν. Ἢ Ἰνδικὴ παρά τε τοὺς mora-
μοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἑλώδεις τόπους φέρει καλάμους πολλούς. Λέγε ἀεὶ τὰ ἀληϑῆ.
᾿Αναξαγόρας, ὁ σοφισνής, διδάσκαλος ἦν τοῦ Ἰϊερικλέους. "2 Ἡράκλεις, τοῖς
ἀτυχέσι σωτηρίαν πάρεχε. “Ἐπαμεινώνδας πατρὸς ἣν ἀφανοῦς. "EAgaipe τὸν
ἀτυχῆ ἄνϑρωπον. Μανδάνη ἣν ϑυγάτηρ ᾿Αστνυάγους, τοῦ Μύδων βασιλέως.
᾿θρέγεσϑε, ὦ νεανίαι, ἀληϑῶν λόγων. Ol ἀκρατεῖς αἰσχρὰν δουλείαν; δουλεύου-
σιν. Μὴ ὁμιλέαν ἔχε ἀκρατεῖ ἀνθρώπῳ.
Pericles had great wisdom (to Pericles there was grest wisdom). Pity un-
fortunate men. Many young men were pupils of Socrates. The intemperate
(man) serves a disgraceful slavery. We admire Sophocles for his (the) splen-
did tragedies. ‘True werds are believed. We pity the life of unfortunate men.
Do not have intercourse with intemperate men.
948. (2) Words in -ος (Gen, -cog), and in -og and -ὦ (Gen. -00¢).
(4) -ως, Gen. -wog.
3. ὃ ὁ, ἡ Bac, Jackal. Pi. ϑῶ-ες S. ὁ ἥρως, Hero. Pl. ἥρω-ες
w-d¢ “ϑώ-ων ἤρω-ος ἡρώ-ων
D. ϑω- ϑω-σί(ν) ἤρω-ι §pw-as(v)
4 ϑῶ-α ϑῶ-ας ἤρω-α and ἤρω ἤρω-ας and pec
Bar ϑῶ-ες ἥρως ἤρω-ες
D. Ms V. ϑῶ.ε, G. and D. om. D. hpw-e, ἠρώ-οιν.
5 6161, 3. (. ὀζἧἋΕ158,1. 8 $159, 3. 466], 2 (a) (a).
---.«- ----ν--.-.-- ὠἜ
8.44.1} THIED-PEGLENBRON.--WORDE IN “αν, - AND -ας. #7
(0) -we and -o, Gen. -ooc=-ovg.
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The ending
-o¢ is retained in the common language enly in the substantive «i-
8eg. The Dual and Pl. are formed like substantives in -o¢ of the
second declension, thus, αὐδοί, “0, etc.
ἡ PR Fre ἦχος), Echo.
(hx6-0c) ἠχοῦς
αἰδοὶ
αἰδῶ
αἰδοῖ.
XXL Vocabulary.
’Ayadög, -7, -Ov, good. . Admnpös, -é, -ev, sail, trow- προσιβλέκω, to look at.
αἰδώς, 7, shame, modesty, blesome. mp6o-esu, adsum, to be
reverence. Avoias, Lysias. ‚present, be joined to.
ὅὁμώς, duwög, 6, a slave. λῦρϊκός, -7, -dv, lyric. σέβας, τό, (only in Nom.
εὐεστώ, -d0¢ = -οῦς, , ὄψις, -εως, ἡ, the counte- and Acc.) respect, e-
well-being, pen area ‚Ranoe, -the visage. teem.
ἱστοριογράφος, -ov, ὁ, an πάτρως, wog, ὁ, an πλοῖο ψεύδω, to belie, deceive;
— ) (by the father’s side). Mid. to lie.
κῆπος, του, 6 ‚a garden. πειϑώ, -ὅος == -oös, ἦ, per-
BUASIVENERE.
Ὅμηρος ᾷδει πολλοὺς ἥρωας. Τὴν τῶν ἡρώων ἀρετὴν ϑαυμάζομεν. Οἱ badd,
βίον λυπηρὸν ἄγουσιν. Ὁ τοῦ πάτρωος κῆπος καλός ἐστιν. ‘Optyov, ὦ rai,
αἰδοῦς. Αἰδὼς ἀγαϑοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἔπεται. Τὸν ΔΑυσίαν ἐπὶ τῇ πειϑοῖ καὶ χάριτι
ϑαυμάζομεν. Τῇ αἰδοῖ πρόςεστι τὸ σέβας. Μὴ πρόςβλεπε τὴν Τοργοῦς ὄψιν.
ὮὯ Ἠχοῖ, ψεύδεις πολλάκις τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. Πάντες ὀρέγονται εὐεστοῦς. TIpk-
ne. νεανίᾳ αἰδῶ ἔχειν. ἘΚλειὼ καὶ Ἐρατὼ Μοῦσαί εἰσιν. Τὴν μὲν Κλειὼ ϑερα-
“εύονσιν οἱ ἱστοριογράφοι, τὴν δὲ ’Eparo ol λυῤικοὶ ποιητάΐ.
Homer celebrates the hero Achilles in song. The bravery of the hero is
wonderful. Slaves lead (to slaves there is) a troublesome life. The uncle has
(to the uncle there is) a beautiful garden. All delight in prosperity. Admire,
O young man, with reverence, the actions of good men! We admire the pev-
suasiveness and elegance of Lysias. We are often deceived by Echo..
§ 44. (3) Words in -ας (Gen. -aog), and in -ος (Gen. -e0¢).
(a) τας, Gen. -aoc.
Only the neutérs 10 σέλας, light, and τὸ δέπας, goblet, belong to
this class.
Sing. N. | τὸ σέλας, light. Pl. ofAe-a and σέλα Dual. ofAa-e
ad G. ἐλ eh λά-ων oeda-oty.
OfA0-0¢ σε ,
D. oéAa-i and σέλᾳ σέλα-σι(ν)
σέλας
Α. σέλα-α and σέλα
43 THIRD DECLENSION.-—WORDS IM -06. [944
(Ὁ) -ος, Gen. -eoc=-ovg.
Substantives of this class are likewise neuter. In the Nom.,
8, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into ὁ.
τὸ γένος for yévec, genus. τὸ κλέος for κλέες, glory.
: (γένε-ο) γένους (xAée-oc) κλέους
D. (yéve-i) γένει (xAée-i) κλέει
Α. γένος κλέος
Piur. N. (yéve-a) γένη (κλέε-α) κλέὰᾶ
σ. yeve-wv and γενῶν (xAcé-wr) κλεῶν
D. yéve-ou(y) κλέε-σι(ν)
Α. (yéve-a) γένη (κλέε-α) κλέα
Dual. ( yéve-e)
(xAée-e)
(γενέ-οιν
κλεέ-οιν
κλέη
κλεοῖν.
Remakk. On the contraction in the Dual of -ee into -7 instead οὗ -εἰ, see $ 42,
Rem. 1; -ea in the plural preceded by a vowel, is contracted into -a, not into -2 ;
6. g. κλέεα = xAéG. Comp. Περικλέα ($ 42, Rem. 2).
¢
XXIL Vocabulary.
"ADAG, sed, but. εἶδος, -eog == -ovc, τό, the κρίνω, cerne, to separate,
ἄνεμος, -ov, ὁ, the wind. figure, the form. jadge, discern, choose.
ἄνϑος, -εος = -ovc, τό, a ἔπος, -eog = -ouc, τό, a μῆκος, -e0¢ == -οὐς, TO, 4
flower. {safe. word. length.
ἀσφαλής, -é¢, firm, secure, ζημία, -ας, ἡ, injury, pan- πονηρός, -d, «ὄν, dishonest,
γένος,-ξος = -ovc, TO, race, ishment, loss. wicked.
descent. ϑάλπος, -e0¢ = -ovg, τό, σέλας, -αος, τό, splendor.
γῆ, γῆς, 7, the earth. heat. trpoc,-eo¢= -ouc,Té, height,
δειλός, -7, -6v, cowardly, ϑνητός, 7, -öv, mortal. elevation.
worthless. κέρδος, -e0¢ = -ους, τό, χαλκός, νοῦ, 6, brass.
dapivöc, -7, -όν, spring, 1. €. gain. ψεῦδος, -20¢ = -ov¢, TO,
belonging to the spring, κλέος, -éeog = -ἔους, τό, 8 lie. [cold.
(Eap) vernal. fame, plfamous actions. ψῦχος, -e0¢ = -ους, τό,
Ἢ γῆ ἄνϑεσιν kapıvois ϑάλλει: Tüv κακῶν δειλὰ ἔπη φέρουσιν ἄνεμοι. Μὴ
ἀπέχου ψύχους καὶ ϑάλπους. Τὸ καλὸν ob μήκει χρόνου Kpivouer, ἀλλὰ ἀρετῇ.
Οὐκ ἀσφαλές ἐστι πᾶν ὕψος ἐν ϑνητῷ γένει. Μὴ ψεύδη λέγε. ᾿Απέχον πονῆ-
ρῶν κερδῶν. Képdn πονηρὰ ζημίαν ἀεὶ φέρει. Karonrpov εἴδους χαλκός ἐστιν,
οἶνος δὲ νοῦ. Ol ἄνθρωποι κλέους ὀρέγονται. Οἱ ἄνδρες κλέει χαίρουσιν. Ol
ἀνδρεῖοι κλεῶν ὀρέγονται. Θαυμάζομεν τὰ τῶν ἀνδρῶν κλέα..
Abstain from dishonest gain. We delight in spring flowers. Keep not
yourself, O youth, from cold (pl.) and heat! (pl.). Flee from dishonest gains.
Punishment follows the lie. We admire the Hellenes for (ἐπί, w. dat.) their
(the) famous actions. Soldiers are impelled to noble actions by (dat.) the love
for (gen.) fame. The famous actions of soldiers are admired.
I See rule of Syntax, p. 27.
88.45, 46.] “THIRD DEOLENSION.— WORDS IN «ἐξ, -ὖς, -t, -v. 49
§ 45. IIL Words in -ἰς, -vg, -t, -v.
(1) Words in «ἔς, -0¢.
Sing. N. | ὁ xis, corn-worm. 6, ἡ σῦς, a boar, ἃ sow. ὁ ἰχϑύς, fish
G al-6¢ av-d¢ ἰχϑῦ-ος
D xi-t ov-i Ixs-i
A. κῖν σῦν ly Sty
V. xl ob byd6
Plur. N. xt-e¢ ot-ec ἰχϑῦύ-ες
G. κὶ-ῶν σῦ-ῶν ἰχϑύ-ων
D.
A.
V.
XXII. Vocabulary.
"Αγκιστρον;ου͵ 76, ahook. βάτραχος, -ov, ὃ, a frog. νέκος, -ὕος, 6, 8 corpse, 8
ἀγρεύω, to such βότρῦς, -toc, ὁ, & cluster dead body.
ἄμπελος, -ov, #, a vine. of grapes. παγίς, -Ἶδος, ἡ, a trap, a
ἀνα-κύπτω, to peep up or Loos, -n, -ov, like, equal. snare.
out, emerge. μῦς, -Dög, ὁ, müs, müris, a oräxtg, -dog, ὁ, an ear
βασιλεύω, το. gen. to be mouse. of corn. ᾿
king, rale.
Οἱ ἐχϑύες ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀνακύπτουσιν. Ol Önpevral τὰς σύας ἀγρεύουσιν.
Πάντες ἴσοι νέκυες " ψυχῶν δὲ ϑεὸς βασιλεύει. Ἢ ἄμπελος φέρει βότρυς. Ἢ
γῆ φέρει στάχυας καὶ βότρνας. Ol μύες παγίσιν ἀγρεύονται. Ol Σύροι σέβον-
ται τοὺς ἰχϑῦς ὡς ϑεούς. Τοῖς uvol® μάχη ποτὲ ἣν πρὸς τοὺς βατράχους. ’Ay-
κίστροις ἐνεδρεύομεν τοῖς ἰχϑύσιν.
We catch fishes with hooks. The huntsman lies in wait for the boars. The
clusters (of grapes) and ears (of corn) are beautiful. The vine is abounding
(εὔπορος, w. gen.) in clusters of grapes. The frogs once had a battle with the
mice (To the frogs was once a battle against the mice).
§ 46. (2) Words tn -is, ¢, ὅς, ὕ
The stem-vowels ı and v remain only in the Acc. and Voe. Sing. ;
in the other Cases they are changed into e. In the Gen. Sing. and
Pi., masculine or feminine substantives end in -wg and -os,—in
which case ὦ has no influence on the place of the accent. Comp.
§ 30, Rem. 2.
1 4 158, 7. (a). 3 § 161, 2. (a).
5
20 THIRD DECLENSION.——- WORDS IN οὕς, «ἵ vg, 0. —[§ 46.
N. | ἡ moi, city. ὁ πῆχνς, cubit. τὸ oivamı, mustard. rd ἄστυ, city.
Bing.
πόλε-ως πήχε-ως σινώπε-ος ἄστε-ος
πόλει πήχει σινάπει ἄστει
πόλιν πῆχυν σίναπι ἄστυ
ἄστυ
πόλι σίνατι
[4 e
πόλεις σινάπῃ
SPORA <pve:
πόλε-ων πήχε-ων σιναπέ-ων ἀστέ-ων
πόλε-σι(ν) πήχε-σιιν) σινάπε-σι(ν) ἄστε-σι(ν)
πόλεις πήχεις σινάπη ἄ
πόλεις πήχεις σινάπη ἄστη
Dual. πόλε-ε πήχε-ε σινάπε-ε ἄστε-ε
woAé-oty πηχέ-οιν σιναπέ-οιν
Rex. 1. Here belong adjectives in ὅς, -eZa, -6, the declension of which does
not differ from that of substantives, except that the Gen. of the masculine sin-
gular has the common form -éo¢ (not -ew¢), and that the neuter plural is always
uncontracted. Thus:
Singular. Sweet. Plural.
. γλυκύς γλυκεῖα γλυκύ N. | γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλυκέα
. | γλυκέ.ος γλυκείᾶς γλυκέ-ος γλυκέων γλυκειῶν γλυκέων
γλυκεῖ γλυκείᾳ γλυκεῖ γλυκέσι(ν) γλυκείαις γλυκέσι(ν)
D.
γλυκύν γλυκεῖαν γλυκύ . γλυκεῖς YApnelüg γλυκέα
.| γλυκό γλυκεῖα γλυκύ .| γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλνκέα
Dal! ν A. Ψ. | yAunie γλυκεί γλυκέε
and D. | γλυκέοιν γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν.
Here also τς sanjeouves in -üg, -ö, Gem. -eo¢, which are declined like
γλυκύς, «ὖ, except that the nenter plural in -ea is contracted into - (as ἄστη);
e. g. ὁ ἡ δίπηχυς, τὸ δίπηχν, two cubits long, τὰ διπήχη.
Rem. 2. Some substantives in -is, and also adjectives in -t¢, -ἰ, 6. g. ἴδρες,
Iöpı, slalled in, have a regular inflection; so also the werd ἡ ἔγχελυς, eel, in the
singular.
Bing. ὁ, ἡ πόρτις, calf. ἡ ἔγχελυς, eel. ὁ, ἧ οἷς, sheep.
πόρτε-ος ἐγχέλν-ος οἷός
πόρτιοι πόρτί ἐγχέλνυ- oli
πόρτιν ἔγχελυν δὶν
πόρτι ἔγχελν
πόρτι-ες κόρτὶς
πόρτι σι) ὀ ΑΑΜπέλε σι) ὀὠ οεῖ
πόρτι-σι(ν ἐλε-σι(ν oloi(v
πόρτας möpreg ἐγχέλεις "a
woprt-e¢
woptt-e
wropri-oww
XXIV. Vocabulary.
Ἀρχή, is, ἦν a beginning, trates, authorities, of- ἀσέλγεια, -ας, f, excess.
command, pl. magis- fices of ommend Beßa:os,-a,-ov firm secure.
§ 47.] IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 51
βροτός, -4, -öv, mortal. μόνος, -ἢ, -ov, alone. πύργος, -οὐ, &, a tower.
βρῶσις, -ewc, 7, eating. νόμος, -ov, ὁ, alaw. - σπάώνες, -εφρ, ἡ, Repdiness, |
διάφορος, -ov, different. ὄνησις, -εως, ἡ, advantage. want.
δῶρον, -ov, τό, a gift. πῆχυς, -εως, 6, the elbow, στάσις, -ewg, ἡ, a faction,
ἔνδεια, -ac, h, want. 8 cubit. sedition.
ἐπιϑυμία, -ac, ἡ, desire. πόλεμος, -ov, ὁ, war. σύνεσις, -ewc, ἡ, under-
καρπός, -06, 6, fruit. πόλις, -εως, #, ἃ town, a standing.
κόσμος, -ov, ὁ, an oma- state, a city. ὕβρις, -εως, ἦ, insolence,
ment, order, the world. πόρτις, -to¢, ὁ, ἣν, a heifer. haughtiness.
κτῆμα, -üros, τό, ἃ pos- πόσις, -εως, A, drinking, φύλαξ, -κος, ὁ, ἃ ghard, ἃ
session. [session. drink. guardian.
κτῆσις, -εως, 7, gain, pos- πρᾶξις, -ewg, 7, an action. φύσις, -εως, 7, nature.
᾿Ασέλγεια τίκτει ὕβριν. Ἔν πόσει καὶ βρώσει πολλοί εἰσιν Eralpoı, ἐν δὲ
σπουδαίῳ πράγματι ὀλίγοι. Ὃ πλοῦτος σπάνεωςϊ καὶ ἐνδείας τοὺς ἀνϑρώπους
λύει. "Enov τῇ φύσει.Σ2 Αἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος ἐπιϑυμίαι πολέμους καὶ στάσεις
καὶ. μάχας παρέχουσιν. Ἔν ταῖς πόλεσιν αἱ ἀρχαὶ νόμων φύλακές εἶσιν. ᾿Απέ-
xeode, ὦ πολῖται, στάσεων. ᾿Ορέγεσϑε καλῶν πράξεων. Διάφοροί εἰσιν al
τῶν βροτῶν φύσεις. Ἔξ ὕβρεως πολλὰ κακὰ γίγνεται. Ἑακοῦ ἀνδρὸς δῶρα
ὄνησιν οὐκ ἔχει. Δόξα καὶ πλοῦτος ἄνευ συνέσεως οὐκ ἀσφαλῇ κτήματά εἰσιν.
Οἱ καρποὶ γλυκεῖς εἶσιν. ᾿Αρετῆς βέβαιαί εἰσιν αἱ κτήσεις μόναι. Πολλὰ ἄστη
τείχη ἔχει. Οἱ τοῦ ἄστεος πύργοι καλοί εἶσιν. Οἱ πύργοι τῷ ἄστειϑ κόσμος eloiv.
Riches free from neediness and want. In the state the magistrates are the
guardians of the laws. Strive, O young man, after a noble action! The pos:
session of virtue is alone secure. Good laws bring order to states. Soldiers
fight for the safety of cities. Files, O citizens, from factions! |
§ 47. Irregular Nouns of the Third Deelenston.
1. ἀνήρ, see § 36 ; γάλα, γόνυ, δόρυ, οὖς, § 89; χείρ, § 35, Rem. 2.
2. Γυνή (ἡ, woman), Gen. yvvaıx-og, Dat. yuvas-i, Acc. yu- -
vaix-a, Voc. γύναι; Pl. γυναῖκες, γυναικῶν, yuvarsi(s), γυναΐκαρ,
3. Ζεύς, Gen. Aeog, Dat. Δεῖ, Acc. Aix, Voc. Ζεῦ...
4. Θρίξ (ἡ, hair), Gen. τριχ-ός, Dat. PL ϑριξί(»), see § 8, 11.
5. Κλείς (m, key), Gen. κλειδ-ός, Dat. κλειδ-ί, Ace. κλεῖδ-α
and (commonly) κλεῖν; Pl. Nom. and Acc. κλεῖς, also xAsides,
κλεῖδας.
6. Κύων» (ὁ, 9, dog), Gen. κυν-ός, Dat. κυνί, Ace. κύνα, Voc.
κύον; Pl. κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσί(), κύνας.
7. Aas (ὁ, stone), Gen. Aaos, Dat. λῶξ, Acc. λῶν, seldom Aaa ; |
Pi. lass, λάων, λάεσσι(9).
8. Μάρευς (ὁ, 7, witness), Gen. μάρτυρος, Dat. μάρτυρι, Acc.
μάρτυρα, more seldom μάρτυν; Dat. Pl. μάρτῦσι(»).
9. Ναῦς (ἢ, navis), Gen. νεώς, Dat. νηΐ, Acc. savy; Dual:
16157. ἔΓψ186Ὶ, 3. (4) (ὁ. ὠ δὅ6168, 8. (). HC
52 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. [§ 48.
Gen. and Dat. seoiv (Nom. and Acc. are not in use); Pl. νῆες,
„eos, vavai(y), ναῦς. Comp. γραῦς, § 41.
10. Ὕ δ ὧρ (τό, water), Gen. ὕδατος, etc.
XXV. Vocabulary.
᾿Αϑηναῖος, ου, 6, an Athe- rile to set a, guide. paprupia,-ac, ἡ, testimony.
. nian. ἱστός, -oü, ὁ, a οἰκία, -ac, 7, a house.
“hénc, -ov, ὁ, Hades, the κεφαλή, ae h, the head. οἶκος, -ov, 6, a house.
Fe of the lower world xiorn, -ns, 7, a chest, a περίδρομος, -ov, running
Pluto). coffer. round, gad- -about.
ἄπιστος, -ov, unfaithful, κοιλαίνω, to hollow out. πέτρα, -ας, 7, ἃ rock.
incredible. [treaty. κομίζω, to ) bring. oTdywv, -dvog, 7, & drop,
δέησις, -εως, ἡ, an en- xreic, -evöc, ὁ, a comb. or dropping.
δέχομαι, to receive. κτενίζω, to comb. σώζω, to save, preserve.
ἐκκλησία, -ας, ἢ, an as- κύβος, -ov, ὁ, a die. σωτήρ, -ἦρος, ὃ, 8. saver,
sembly. κὐβερνήτης,-ου, ὁ, asteers- a preserver.
Opis, cone %, the hair. man, 8, pilot. ὠφέλεια,-ας, 7, advantage,
Al γυναῖκες τῷ κόσμῳ χαίρουσιν. Οἱ Ἕλληνες σέβονται Δία. Ταῖς γυναιξὲν
ἡ αἰδὼς πρέπει. Οἱ κύνες τὸν οἶκον φυλάττουσιν. Ὃ κυβερνήτης τὴν ναῦν
ἐϑύνει. Al σταγόνες τοῦ ὕδατος πέτραν κοιλαίνουσιν. Ἐχϑαίρω γνναῖκα πε-
ρίδρομον. Τῆς γυναικός ἐστι τὸν οἶκον φυλάττειν. Τυναικὸς" ἐσθλῆς ἐστι σώ-
Gey οἰκίαν. ‘Agi εὖ πίπτουσιν οἱ Διὸς κύβοι. Οἱ κύνες τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ὠφέ-
λείαν καὶ ἡδονὴν παρέχουσιν. Αἱ τῶν μαρτύρων μαρτυρίαι πολλάκις ἄπιστοί
εἰσιν. 'lorol γυναικῶν ἔργα, καὶ οὐκ ἐκκλησίαι. Κόμιζε, ὦ παῖ, τὴν τῆς κίσ-
τῆς κλεῖν. Ὦ Ζεῦ, δέχου τὴν τοῦ ἀτυχοῦς δέησιν. Κάστωρ καὶ Πολυδεύκης
τῶν νεῶν σωτῆρες ἦσαν. Τυναικιῖ πάσῃ κόσμον ἡ σιγὴ φέρει. Οἱ γέροντες
ὀλίγας τρίχας ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ ἔχουσιν. ὯὮ γύναι, σῶζε τὴν οἰκίαν. Τῷ wre τὰς
τρίχας κτενίζομεν. Ὁ Αἰακὸς τὰς τοῦ "Adov κλεῖς φυλάττει.
The woman delights in ornament. It is the duty (it is, το. gen.) of women to
look after the house. Bring, O boy, the key of the house! Women delight in
beautiful hair. The Athenians had (To the Athenians were) many ships.
Trust not all witnesses. It is the business (it is, w. gen.) of dogs to guard the
house. Zeus had (To Zeus were) many temples. The fishes peep up from the
water. The steersmen guide the ships. Modesty becomes a woman.
§ 48. Irregular Adjectives.
N. i πραεῖα πρῶον, mild.
G. | πράου πραείὰς πράον
D. | πράῳ mpaeig πράῳ
A. | πρᾶον πραεῖαν πρᾶον
V. | πρᾶος, πρᾶε πραεῖα πρᾶον
Ν. πρᾶοι and πραεῖς πραεῖαι πραέα
G. πραέων πραειῶν πραέων
D. | πράοις and πραέσι(ν πραείαις πραέσι(ν)
Α. πράους and πραεῖς πραείὰς πραέα
V. | πρᾶοε and πραεῖς πραεῖαι πραέα.
DN. AV. πράω mpaeiä πράω
G.and D. | πράοιν πράοιν.
14188, 3. 3416], 5. 3416], 8.
πραείαιν
IRREGULAR ADJEOTIVAS.
N. Ἰπολύς πολλή πολύ, much. | μέγας μεγάλη μέγα, great
G. πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ μεγάλον μεγάλης μεγώλονυ
D. πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ μεγάλῳ μεγώλῃ μεγάλῳ
Α. πολύν πολλὴν πολύ μέγαν μεγάλην peya
V. [πολύ πολλή πολύ μέγα μεγάλη μέγα
Plur. N. | πολλοί πολλαί πολλά ἐγάλοι μέγώλαι μεγάλα
6. | πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν nee mi ps
μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων
etc. regular. gular.
λιπών λιποῦσα Aumöv
λιπόντος λιπούσης λιπόντος
λιπόντι Amobog λιπόντι
crüv
στάντος
στώντι
στᾶσα
στάσης
oraoy
στᾶς
στάντος
στώντι
στώντα
στάς
στάντες
στάντων
oräcı(v)
στάντας
στάντες
στάντε
στάντοιν
στᾶσαν
στᾶσαι
στασῶν
στάσαις
στᾶσαι
στάσα
στώσαιν
«εἶσα
στάν
στάν
στάντα
στώντων
στᾶσι(ν)
4
στάντα
στάντα
στάντε
στάντοιν.
Ζ
-ἔν
λιπόντα λιποῦσαν λιπόν
λιπών λιποῦσα λιπόν
λιπόντες Δλιποῦσαι λιπόντα
λιπόντων λιπουσῶν λιπόντων
λιποῦσι(ν) λιπούσαις λιποῦσι(ν)
λιπόντας λιπούσᾶς λιπόντα
λιπόντες λιποῦσαι λιπόντα
λιπόντε λιπούσὰ Aixévre
λιπόντοιν λιπούσαιν λιπόντοιν.
«οὖσα «οὖν
λειφϑείς
λειφϑέντος
λειφϑέντι
λειφϑέντα
λειφϑεῖς
λειφϑέντες
λειφϑέντων
λειφϑεῖσι(ν)
λειφϑέντας
λειφϑέντες
Dual | λειφϑέντε
λειφϑέντοιν
-EITOL
«ἕντι
-ἐν
«ἔν
«ἔντα
«ἔντων
-εἴσι(ν)
-£vra
«ἔντα
-εἰσης
-eioy
-eloav
-eloa
«εἶσαι
«εἰσῶν
-εἶσαις
«εἰσᾶς
«εἶσαι
«οὔντα
«οὔντων
«οὔσι
«οὖντα
«οὔντα
ἀγγελοῦντες
ἀγγελούντων
ἀγγελοῦσι
ἀγγελοῦντας
ἀγγελοῦντες
4>Uaz|#>baz| Bl<pyozi<pyoz
«οὔντε
εοὔντοιν.
-évTe
«ἔντοιν.
-eiod
> a
a
: YYE λοῦντε
«εἰσαίν
ἀγγελούντοιν
«οὔσαιν
REMARK. All participles in -ας are declined like στάς, and all present, second
Aor. and first Fut. participles in -wv, like λιπών, and first and second Aor. pas-
sive participles, like λειφϑείς, and all second Fut. Act. participles, like ἀγγελῶν.
Αἴγυπτος, -ov, 7, Egypt.
XXVI. Vocabulary.
κακῶν Ἰλιάς, a multi-
πάϑος, -ξος = -οὐς, τό,
ἄλγος, -e0¢ = -ους, τό, tude of evils. suffering, a passion.
pain. Μακεδών, -övos, ὁ, Mace- πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, much,
ἀφϑονία, -ας, 7, absence donian. many, great.
of envy, abundance. μέγα, greatly. πρᾶος, πραεῖα, πρᾶον, soft,
ἔϑος, -eo¢ = -ους, τό, eus- 5Alyog,-n,-ov,little,small. mild.
tom, manner. ὀφέλλω, to nourish, in- mpoo-ayopeto, to call,
Ἰλιάς, -ἀδος, 7, the Diad, crease. name.
5*
r
34 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [98 49, 50.
axpbo-adoc, -ov, #, an ap- σῖτος, -ov, ὁ, corn. be connected or attend-
proach, an income, rev- φόβος, -ov, ὁ, fear; φόβον ed with fear.
enue, reditus, ἔχειν, to have fear, to
TloAdy olvov πίνειν κακόν ἐστιν. Οἱ βασιλεῖς μεγάλας προςόδους ἔχουσιν.
Ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ πολλὴ σίτον ἀφϑονία ἦν. "H ϑάλαττα μεγάλη ἐστίν. Μέγα πά-
dos προςαγορεύομεν ᾿Ιλιάδα κακῶν. Κροίσῳ! ἣν πολὺς πλοῦτος. Πολλώκις ἐξ
ὀλίγης ἡδονῆς μέγα γίγνεται ἄλγος. Πραέσι (πρώοις) λόγοις ἡδέως εἴκομεν.
Ta μεγάλα δῶρα τῆς τύχης ἔχει φόβον. Πολλῶν ἀνϑρώπων ἔϑη ἐστὶ πραέα.
Πόνος ἀρετὴν μέγα ὀφέλλει. Οἱ παῖδες τοὺς πραεῖς (πράους) πατέρας καὶ τὰς
πραείας μητέρας στέργουσις ὋὉμιλίαν ἔχε τοῖς πραέσιν (mpüoıs) ἀνθρώποις.
Al γυναῖκες πραεῖαΐ εἰσιν. ᾿Αλέξανδρον, τὸν τῶν Μακεδόνων βασιλέα, μέγαν
ἀπαγορεύουσιν.
Abstain from much wine. Kings have (to kings are) great revenues. Egypt
has (in Egypt is) great abundance of corn. Croesus has (to Croesus are)
great riches. Strive after mild manners. Women have (to women is) a mild
nature (φύσις). Alexander, king of the Macedonians, is called the Great.
§ 49. Comparison of Adjectives.
The Greek language has two forms to indicate the two degrees
of comparison (Comparative and Superlative); much the most
common form is -¢2go0¢, -τέρ ἃ, -τερον, for the Comparative,
and -raras, -τάτη, -τατον, for the Superlative; a much
more rare form is -iw», -i09, or -@9, -0», for the Compara-
tive, and -toros, -iory, -ἐστον, for the Superlative.
Rem. 1. The Superlative expresses a quality in the highest degree, or only
in a very high degree.
Rem. 2. Instead of the simple forms of the Comparative and Superlative, the
Greek, like the Latin, can prefix μᾶλλον (magis) and μάλιστα (maxime) to the
Positive:
§50. A. First Form of Oomparitson.
Comparative, -7 £905, -tT£QG, - τερον.
Superlative, -rarog, -τάτη, -τατον.
The following adjectives annex these forms in the following man-
ner:
1, Adjectives in - 0¢, - 7 (- ἃ), -o».
(a) Most adjectives of this class, after dropping o, annex the
above endings to the pure stem, and retain the o, when a syllable
long by nature or by position, § 9, 3, precedes, (a mute and liquid
always make the syllable long here); but, in order to prevent the
1 § 161, 2. (d * § 161, 2. (a), (a).
8 50.] ADJEOTIVES.-——FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 55
concurrence of too many short syllables, o is lengthened into ὦ, when
a short vowel precedes; e. g.
xovd-oc, light, Com. κουφ-ό-τερος Sup. κουφ-ό-τατος, -7, -ov,
ἰσχθρ-ὄς, strong, “ loytp-6-rTepoc, “ ἰσχῦρ-ό-τατος,
λεπτ-ός, thin, ““ Δεπτού-τερος, ἐς λεπτ-ό-τατος
σφοδρ-ὅς, vehement, “ ᾿σφοδρ-ό-τερος, "4. σφοδρ-ό-τατος,
πικρ-ύς, bitter, ss πικρ-ό-τερος, “ πικρ-ό-τατος,
σοῴ-ός, wise, “ σοφ-ὥώ-τερος, “ σοφ-ώ-τατος,
Exüp-öc, firm, “ Exüp-ü-repog, “ ἐχῦρ-ώ-τατος,
afi-oc, worthy, “ ἀξικώ-τερος, “ ἀξῥιώ-τατος.
(Ὁ) Contracts in -e0¢ == -ovg and -00¢ == -ovg, suffer contraction
in the Comparative and Superlative also, since a of the former is ab-
sorbed by ὦ, but the latter, after dropping og, insert the syllable ες,
which is contracted with the preceding 0; 6. g.
πορφύρ-εος == πορφυρ-οῦς ἀπλ-όος = ἁπλεοῦς
πορφυρ-εώτερος == πορφυρ-ώ-τερος ἁἀἁπλο-ἔσ-τερος = ἀπλεούς-τερος
πορφυρ-εώτατος = πορφυρ-ώ-τατος ἀἀἁπλο-ἔσ-τατος = ἁπλ-οὔσ-τατος.
Here belong also contracts of two endings in -οὐ ς and -ovv; e.g. εὔνεοος
== εὔν-ους, Neut. ebv-oov = eiv-ovv, Com. εὐνο-ἔσ-τερος = ebv-odo-Tepog, Sup.
evvo-éo-raroc = εὑν-οὔσ-τατος.
(c) The following adjectives in - Log, viz. γδρα ες, old, 2 a-
λαιός, ancient, 280 atog, on the other side, σ χο λ αἷο ς, at lei-
sure, drop -o¢ and append -zsgo¢ and -τατος to the root; 6. g.
yepat-6e, Com. yepai-repoc, Sup. yepai-raroc,
παλαι-ός, “ παλαΐςτερος, “ madai-raroe.
(d) The following adjectives in -0 ς, viz. 233409, calm, 7 συ-
106, quiet, ἴδιο ς, own, ἴσο ς, equal, μέσος, middle, 609 QLos,
early, ὄψιος, late, and πρῶ ἴος, in the morning, after dropping
-0¢, insert the syllable αἱ, so that the Comparative and Superlative
of these adjectives are like the preceding in -ato¢; 6. g.
péo-o¢, Com. μεσ-αΐ-τερος, Sup. μεσ-αΐ-τατος,
idt-o¢ “4 ἰἠἐδι-αἴ-τερος, ἰδι-αἴ-τατος.
Rem. 1. Φίλος, beloved, dear, has three different forms: φιλώτερος, ὀιλώ-
τατος; φίλτερος, φίλτατος ; φιλαίτερος, φιλαίτατος.
(6) Two adjectives in -ος, viz. ἐῤῥωμένος, strong, and
ἄκρατος, unmixed, after dropping -og, insert the syllable e¢; 6. g.
ἐῤῥωμεν-ἔσ-τερος, ἐῤῥωμεν-ἔσ-τατος, ἀκρατ-ἔσ-τερος, ἀκρατ-ἔσ-τατος.
So also αἰδοῖος, modest, has αἰδοιέστατος in the Superlative.
(f) The following adjectives in -os, viz. λάλος, talkative,
μονοφάγος, eating alone, ὀψοφ ἄγος, dainty, and 270706,
poor, after dropping os, insert the syllable ἐς; 6. g. λάλ-ος, Com..
λαλ-ίσ-τεροφ, Sup. λαλ-ίσ-τατος.
w-.
56 ADJIECTIVES.—PIRST FORM OF comparison, ὠ [ὅ 50.
II. Adjectives in ng, Gen. -ov, and pepdyy, -dc, false, Gen.
-gog, shorten the ending -7¢ into -4¢; 6. g. wdwe-nc, Gen. -ov, thiev-
ish, Com. xAenz-io-regog, Sup. πλεπε-ίσ-τατος ; wevdioregos, ψευ-
δίστατος.
XXVIL Voeadulary.
᾿Αγάλλω, to adorn ; Mid. ἔϑνος, -e0¢ == -ους, τό, ἃ πτωχός, -f, -dv, begging,
w. dat., to pride oneself nation, a people. very poor.
in, be proud of, delight Λακεδαιμόνιος, -ov, 6, a σιωπή, Ag, 9, silence.
in Lacedaemonian. τίμιος, -G, «ον, honored,
αἱρετός, -7, -6v, Choice, νομέζω, to think, deem. esteemed, valuable.
eligible ; Comparative, οὐδεῖς, οὐδεμία, no one; χελιδών, -Ovog, 7, ἃ swal-
preferable to. οὐδέν, nothing. low.
βίαιος, -a, -ov, violent. πατρίς, -Ἶδος, ἡ, native χρήσιμος, -ἢ, -0v, usefal,
δίκαιος, -G, -ov, Ate di- country: advantageous.
Katog, -ov, just.
RuLe or Syntax. The expression denoting comparison, which
in English is subjoined to the Comparative by than, is subjoined
in Greek, by 7, than (quam), or, what is more usual, by the Gen.
without 7, when that expression must have stood in the Nom. or
Acc. after 7 if expressed. Hence the rule: : The Comparative gov-
erns the Gen. when 7 is omitted.
"Ἀριστείδης πτωχότατος ἦν, ἀλλὰ δικαιότατος. Οἱ Κύκλωπες βιαιότατοι ἧσαν.
Καλλίας πλουσιώτατος ἣν ᾿Αϑηγναίων. Οὐδὲν σιωπῆς ἐστι χρησιμώτερον. Σιγῇ
nor’ ἐστὶν αἱρετωτέρα λόγου. Οὐκ ἔστι σοφίας τιμιώτερον. Σοφία πλούτου
κτῇμα τιιμῶτερόν ἐστιν. Ἢ Λακεδαιμονίων δίαιτα ἦν ἀκλουστάτῃ. Ol yepal-
τεραι ταῖς τῶν νέων τιμαῖς ἀγάλλονται. Οὐδὲν πατρίδος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις φίλ’
τερον. Οἱ Ἰνδοὶ παλαίτατον ἔϑνος νομίζονται. "Ὦ νεανίαι, ἔστε ἡσυχαίτατοι.
Οἱ Σπαρτιατικοὶ νεανίαι ἐῤῥωμενέστεροι ἦσαν τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων. Πολλοὶ τῶν χε-
λιδόνων εἰσὶ λαλίστεροι. Οἱ δοῦλοι πολλάκις ψευδίστατοι καὶ κλεπτίστατοξ
εἶσιν.
The father is wiser than the son. The most valuable possession is that of
virtue. The life of Socrates was very simple. No one of the Athenians was
more just than Aristides. The eldest are not always the wisest. Men are
quicter than boys. The Lacedaemonians were very strong. Old women are
often very loquacious. The raven is very thievish.
III. Adjectives of the third Declension :
Those in -ὕ ς, -8ia, -4,—-16, -8¢ (Gen.-20¢),—-@$, - a9,
and the word μάκαρ, happy, append -τερος and -aros im-
mediately to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter form; 6. δ.
γλυκύς, Neut. ύ — γλυκύ-τερος ἘΣ ΤῊΣ
ἀληϑῆς, Neut. -ἔς -- ἀληϑέσ-τερος ηϑέσοτατος
1416], 2. (e). 5161, 5. (a). 41462
§50.] _ADJECTIVES.—FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 57
πένης, Neut. -e¢ — πενέσ-τερος “πενέσ-τατος
μέλας, Neut. -av --- μελάν-τερος μελάν-τατος
τώλας, Neut. -ἂν — ταλάν-τερος ταλάν-τατος
μώκαρ, Neut. -ap — μακάρ-τερος μακάρ-τατος.
Rem. 2. The adjectives ἡ δύς, ταχύς and πολύς are compared in -ζων
and “ὧν. See 451, 1. and § 52, 9.
IV. -reoos and -zarog are appended to the pure stem, after
the insertion of a single letter or of a whole syllable :
(a) Compounds of γάριες insert m; 6. g.
ἐπίχαρις, -t, Gen. ἐπιχάριτ-ος, pleasant,
Com. ἐπιχαριτ-ώ-τερος, Sup. ἐπιχαριτ-ὦ-τατος.
(Ὁ) Adjectives in -ὦ 9, -o» (Gen. -ovos), insert eg; 6. g.
εὐδαίμων, Neut. εὔδαιμον, happy,
Com. εὐδαιμον-ἔσ-τερος, εὐδαιμον-ἔσ-τατος.
. (ce) Adjectives in -§ sometimes insert eg, sometimes ἐς ; ©. g.
égnaig, Gen. ἀφήλικο-ος, growing old, ἅρπαξ, Gen. ἅρπαγοος, rapax,
Com. ἀφηλικ-ἔσ-τερος, Com. ἀρπαγ-ίσ-τερος,
Sup. ἀφηλικ-ἔσ-τατος, Sup. dpray-io-rarog.
V. Adjectives in -eug, -89, insert o, the » of the stem being
dropped, § 8, 6; e. g.
χαρίεις, Neut. χαρίεν, pleasant,
Com. χαριέστερος, Sup. χαριέξεστατος.
ΧΧΎΤΙΙ. Vocabulary.
Αὐϑέοψ, -οπος, 6, an Al γῆρας, -αος, τό, old age. ὁρμῆ, -ἧς, ἡ, impulse, seal,
thiopian. ἐγκρατής, -é, continent, desire, rushing.
Αἴτνη, ns, ἡ, Actna. abstinent, moderate. οὐδέ, and not, neither, not
alıya, quickly. εὐσεβής, -é¢, pious. even.
ἅρπαξ, -ayos, rapacious, εὔχαρις, -troc, attractive. παραπλήσιος, -G, -ov, and
rapax. [weak. ἥβη, -ns, 4, youth. παραπλήσιος, -ov, like.
ἀσϑενής, -ἔς, powerless, μεσότης, -TnTog, ἧ, me- παρέρχομαι, to pass by.
ἀτυχία, -a¢, #, misfortune. diocrity, moderation. πρέσβυς, -eia, -v, and
Badic, -eia, -v, deep, pro- vönua,-aroc,rö, athought, πρέσβυς, -voc, and -ewe,
found. 8 conception. old.
βαρύς, -eia, -b, heavy, bur- ὀρϑός, -7, -dv, straight, ὠκύς, -eia, -6, quick.
densome. correct, upright.
Alıya, ὡς νόημα, παρέρχεται ἥβη, οὐδ᾽ ἵππων ὁρμὴ γίγνεται ὠκυτέρα. TO γῆ-
ρας βαρύτερόν ἐστιν Αἴτνης. Ὁ ϑάνατος τῷ βαϑυτάτῳ ὕπνῳ; παραπλήσιός ἐσ-
τιν. Οἱ νέοι τοῖς τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἐπαίνοις χαίρουσιν. Φιλίας δικαίας κτῆσίς
ἐστιν ἀσφαλεστάτη. Ἢ μεσότης ἐν πᾶσιν ἀσφαλεστέρα ἐστίν. Ol γέροντες ἀσ-
ϑενέστεροί εἶσι τῶν νέων. Βουλῆς ὀρϑῆς οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀσφαλέστερον. Οἱ κορα»
κες μελάντατοί elow. Ἥ ’Αφροδίτη ἣν εὐχαριτωτάτη. Οἱ εὐσεβέστατοι εὐδαι»
μονέστατοί εἰσιν. Σωκράτης ἐγκρατέστατος ἣν καὶ σωφρονέστατος. Ἔν ταῖς
ἀτυχίαις πολλάκις οἱ ἄνϑρωποι σωφρονέστεροι εἶσιν, ἢ ἐν ταῖς εὐτυχίαις. Kpt-
τίας ἣν ἁρπαγίστατος. Ἥ ’Adpodirn ἣν χαριεστάτη πασῶν Sear.
1 § 161, 2. (b). *§ 161, 2. (6).
58 ADIBOTIVES.-—SECOND FORM OF CompaRison. [§ δ].
Age is very burdensome. Nothing is quicker than thought. Moderation is —
the safest. No bird is (there is not a bird) blacker than the raven. The
Ethiopians are very dark. Nothing is more attractive than youth. No one of
the Athenians was more moderate or more sensible than Socrates. No one was
more rapacious than Critias. Nothing is more graceful than a beautiful flower.
§51. B. Second Form of Comparison.
Comparative, -i ὦ », Neut. -i 0», or -w », Neut. -o ».
Superlative, -ı0205, -i07n, 10709.
Rem. 1. On the declension of the Comparative, see $ 85, Rem. 4.
This form of comparison includes,
I. Some adjectives in -vs, which drop -vg and append -ίων, etc. ;
this usually applies only to 73v¢, sweet, and ταχύ ς, swift. Ta-
χύς has in the Comparative ϑάσσων (Att. θάττων, ὃ 8, 11), Neut.
θᾶσσον (Sarrov). Thus:
ἠδιύς, Com. ἡδιΐων, Nent. 76-I0v, Sup. ἦδ-:ιστος, -n, -ov.
ταχ-ῦς, “ aoowr, Att.. ϑάττων, Neut. ϑᾶσσον, Att. Yärrov, Sup. τάχιστος.
Rem. 2. The others in -t¢, as adic, deep, βαρύς, heavy, βραδύς, slow,
βραχύς, short, γλυκύς, sweet, δασύς, thick, ebpüg, wide, ὁ ξ ύ ς, sharp,
πρέσβυς, old, Oxt¢, swift, have the form in -ὕτερος, -ὅτατος, § 50, III.
IL. The following adjectives in -gog, viz. αἰσχρός, base, ἐ χ-
8005, hostile, xv800¢, honorable, and ο ἐκτρ ὁ ς, wretched (but
always in the Comparative, oixzgorsgog), the ending -go¢ here also
being dropped; e. g. αἰσχρός, Com. aicy-ieov, Neut. aicy-iov, Sup.
αἰσχ-ιστος. |
XXIX. Vocabulary.
"AAAoc, -7, -0, alius, -a, ud, καιρός, -οὔ, 6, the right οἰκτρός, -a, -6v, pitiahle,
another, τὰ dGAja = time, an opportunity; miserable.
τάλλα, the rest, every- time (in general). dopun, -H¢, 9, ἃ smell.
thing else. [imical. λουπός, -7, -0v, remaining Ödss, -ewg, ὁ, -7, a snake.
ἐχϑρός, -a, -ov, hostile, in- uera-depw, to remove, παρέχομαι, to afford, bring
ζῶον, -ov, τό, aliving bee change. forth.
ing, an animal.
Ὁ βαϑύτατος ὕπνος ἧδιστός ἐστιν. TloAAa ἄνϑη ἡδίστην ὀσμὴν παρέχεται.
Οὐδὲν ϑᾶττόν ἐστι τῆς ἥβης. Τὴν αἰσχίστην δουλείαν! οἱ ἀκρατεῖς δουλεύουσιν.
Πάντων ἤδιστόν ἐστιν ἡ φιλία. Οὐδὲν αἴσχιόν ἐστιν, ἢ ἄλλα μὲν ἐν νῷ ἔχειν,
ἄλλα δὲ λέγειν. Οἱ ὄφεις τοῖς λοιποῖς ζώοις" ἔχϑιστοί εἰσιν. Ὁ τῶν πλουσίων
βίος πολλάκις οἰκτρότερός ἐστιν, ἢ ὁ τῶν πενήτων. Taxsara? ὁ καιρὸς μεταφέρει
τὰ πράγματα.
‘ Nothing is more pleasant than a very deep sleep. Nothing is more disgrace-
fal than slavery. The horses are very quick. There is nothing more inimical
than bad advice. The old man has for (dat.) the old man the most pleasant
1§ 159, 24161, 5. (a). 3 Adverbially.
8 52.] ADIEOTIVES.——ANGMALOUE FORMS OF COMPARISON. 980
apeech, the boy fer the bey: The poor have always a very miserable lif. .
. Nothing is more miserable than poverty.
$52. Anomalous Forms of Comparison.
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
1. ἀγαϑός, good, ἀμείνων, Neut. ἄμεινον ἄριστος
βελτίων βέλτιστος
κρείσσων, Att. κοείττων κράτιστος
᾿ λῷστος
2. κακός, bad, κακίων κάκιστος
χείρων χείριστος
ἥσσων, Att. ἥττων (inferior)
8. καλός, beautiful, καλλίων κάλλεστος
4. ἀλγεινός, painful, ἀλγεινότερος ἀλγεινότατος
ἀλγίων ; ἄλγιοτος
δ. μακρός, long, μακρότερος μακρότατος and μήκιστος
6. μικρός, small, μικρότερος μικρότατο
ἐλάσσων, Att. ἐλάττων ἐλάχιστος
Η ὀλίγος, an} FR ὀλίγιστος
γας, είζων ἐστος
9. πόνο much, rn or πλέων εἴτα
10. ῥάδιος, easy, ῥάων ᾿ ῥᾷστος
ΕἸ. πέπων, ripe, “επκαΐτερος wenalraro
12. πίων, fat, TOT EPOS RLÖTaTOg.
XXX. Vocabulary.
᾿Αναγκαῖος, -ἃ, -ov,and ἀν- ἔμφῦτος, -ov, implanted. μαλακός, -7, -ὄν, soft.
αγκαῖος, -ov, necessary. ἐνίοτε sometimes. πόλεμος, -0v, ὁ, war.
ἀνάγκη, -ns, ἢ, necessity, &mdvula, «αἵ, 4, desire. σκώπτω, to joke, jest (Eng.
compulsion. εὐτυχής, -éc, fortunate. scoff ).
ἀναρχία, -ac, ἡ, want of 7, or; ἤ--ἦ, either—or, στέργω, to love, to be sat-
government, anarchy. aut—cut. isfied, contented with.
βλάβι, ns, ἦν injury. Ἰβηρία, -as, ἡ, Spain. σύμβονλος, -ov, 6, an ad-
γείτων, -ονος, ὁ, ἡ, a ἰσχύω, to be strong or viser.
neighbor. able, have power, avail. σωφροσύνη, -n¢, ἡ, sound-
γνώμη, opinion, view. κελεύω, to order, bid. mindedness, modesty,
ἐλεύϑερος, «ἃ, -ov, and κολακεία, -ac, h, flattery. wisdom, chastity.
ἐλεύϑερος, -ov, free- κροκόδειλος, -ov, ὁ, a croc-
born, free. odile.
Rue or Syntax. Ὥς with the Superlative strengthens it, as
quam in Lat. ; 6. g. ὡς τάχιστα, quam celerrime, as quick.as possible.
Οὐχ ὁ paxpSraros βίος ἄριστός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ ὁ σπουδαιότατος. Merpov ἐπὶ
πᾶσιν ἄριστον. Ῥνῶμαι τῶν γεραιτέρων ἀμείνους εἰσίν. ὩΣύμβουλος οὐδεῖς ἐστι
βελτίων χρόνου. Ἢ λέγε σιγῆς npelrrova, ἢ σιγὴν ἔχε. ‘Aci κράτιστόν ἐστι
τὸ ἀσφαλέστατον. Σκώπτεις, ὦ λῷστε. ᾿Εσϑλῶν κακίους ἐνιότε εὐτυχέστεροί
εἶσιν. Οὐκ ἔστι λύπης χεῖρον ἀνθρώπῳ κακόν. Κολακεία τῶν ἄλλων ἀπάντων
κακῶν χείριστόν ἐστιν. "Asp μαλακὸς τὴν ψυχήν ἐστι nal? χρημάτων ἥττων."
δ 4 161, 5. * The Ace. u een 3 also.
4 is δι slaye to many.
60 ADVERB.—NATURE, DIVISION AND FORMATION. [$ 58.
Ταῖς yuvackty' ἡ σωφροσύνη καλλίστη ἀρετή ἐστιν. Οὐκ ἔστι κτῆμα᾽ κάλλιον
φίλου. Ἢ δουλεία τῷ “ἐλευϑέρῳ ἀλγίστη ἐστίν. Ἥ ὁδὸς μηκίστη ἐστίν. Ὃ
κροκόδειλος ἐξ ἐλαχίστου γίγνεττε μέγιστος. Ἢ γῆ ἐλάττων ἐστὶ τοῦ ἡλίου.
Στέργε nal? τὰ μείω. ᾿Ολέγιστοι ἄνϑρωποι εὐδαίμονές εἰσιν. Οὐδεὶς νόμος la-
χύει μεῖζον τῆς ἀνάγκης. Μικρὰ κέρδη πολλάκις μείζονας βλάβας φέρει. '’Αναρ-
χίας μεῖζον οὐκ ἔστι κακόν. Ὁ πόλεμος πλεῖστα κακὰ φέρει. "Ἐμφνυτός ἐστι
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἡ τοῦ πλείονος ἐπιϑυμία. Τυνὴ ἐσϑλὴ πλεῖστα ἀγαϑὰ τῷ οἴκῳ
φέρει. Ta ἀναγκαῖα τοῦ Biov? φέρε ὡς ῥίστα. Τὸ κελεύειν ῥᾷόν ἐστι τοῦ πράτ-
τειν. Οἱ καρποὶ πεπαίτατοί εἶσιν. Ἔν τῷ τοῦ πατρὸς κήπῳ οἱ βότρνες πεπαί-
τεροΐ εἰσιν, ἢ ἐν τῷ τοῦ γείτονος. "IBnpia τρέφει πιότατα πρόβατα.
There is nothing better than a very diligent life. The opinion of the old is
the best. The best adviser is time. Nothing is better than that which is most
safe (than the safest). The worst (persons) are often very fortunate. Sadness
is the worst evil to man. Nothing is worse than flattery. The immoderate
man is a slave to pleasures. In women nothing is better than modesty. Toa
free man nothing is more painful than slavery. The crocodile is very long.
The son is smaller than the father. The good often have more property than
the bad. The poor are often in greater honor than the rich. Avarice is a very
great evil. Nothing brings more evils than war. To order is very easy. It is
easier to bear poverty than sadness. We taste the ripest fruits with great plea-
sure.‘ The sheep of the father are fatter than those of the neighbor.
CHAPTER V.
THE ADVERB.
§ 53. Nature, Division and Formation of the
Adverb.
1. Adverbs are indeclinable words, denoting a relation of place,
time or manner ; 6. g. ἐκεῖ, there, viv, now, καλῶς, beautifully, in a
beautiful manner.
2. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives by assuming the
ending -w¢. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the
adjective ; and since the stem of adjectives of the third declension
appears in the genitive, and adjectives in the Gen. Pl. afe accented
like adverbs, the following rule may be given for the formation of
adverbs from adjectives: viz. - 0» the ending of the adjective in
the Gen. PL, is changed into - ὦ ς ; 6. g.
φίλοος, lovely, Gen. Pi. φίλ-ων Adv. φίλεως
λεός, Fair, “ Kaha kal-öc
καίρι-ος, timely, “4 καιρίκων καιρί-ως
*4161,5. also. 41568,8, “Neuter plural of the superlative of ἡδύς.
§ $4] COMPARISON OF ADVERRS. &
ἀπλί(ό-αρ)οῦς, simple, Gen. PL ἁπλ(ό-ωνγῶν Adv. duilö-wg)ör
εὔν(οτορ)ους, (εὐνό-ων) εὔνων «(εὐνό-ως) εὔνως
πᾶς, all, παντός, “ πώντ-ων ° πάντ-ως
σώφρων, prudent, “ αωφρόν-ων σωφρόν-ως
χαρίεις, pleasant, “ χαριέντοων χαριέντ-ως
ταχύς, swift, “ Τάχε ΟΥ ταχέως
Eyag, ae eyal-wv eyaa-we
ἀληθής, pend “ ἀληϑ(ξων)ῶν ἀλυϑ(ἐ ως)ῶς
συνήϑης, accustomed, 4 _ (ovvnde-wv) συνήϑων (συνηϑέ-ως) συνήϑως.
Rem. 1. On the accentuation of compounds in -ἤϑως and of the compound
αὐτάρκως, comp. $42, Rem. 4; also on the accentuation of εὔνως, instead of ed-
νῶς, $ 29, p. 29.
Rem. 2. By appending the three endings -ϑεν, -3: and -de (-ce), to substan-
tives, pronouns and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the three relations of
place, whence (-Sev), where (- 8ι) and whither (- δὲ or -ce); e. g. οὐρανό-ϑεν, from
‚Heaven, οὐρανό-ϑι, in Heaven, obpavéy-de, into or to Heaven.
Rem. 8. The ending -de is commonly appended to the Acc. of substantives
only. To pronoans and primitive adverbs, -ce is appended instead of -de; 6. g.
ἐκεῖ-σε, thither, ἄλλο-σε, to another place. In plnral substantives in -a¢, -ode be-
comes -Le; 6. g. ᾿Αϑήναζε, to Athens.
8. Besides adverbs with the ending -ὡς, shere are many which
evidently have a case-inflection; e. g. ἐξαπίνχο, suddenly, αὐτοῦ,
there, etc. The Acc. Sing. and Pl. of adjectives is very frequently
naed adverbially; 6. g. μέγα κλαίειν, $0 weep much.
854. Compartson of Adverbs.
1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, have commonly no indepen-
dent adverbial ending for the different forms of comparison, but, in
the Comparative, use the heuter singular, and in the Superlative,
the neuter plural of the corresponding adjectives 6. g.
σοφῶς from σοφός Com. σοφώτερον Sup. δοφώτατα
aepiic waging σαφέστερον σαφέστατα
χοριέντως ““ χαρίεις xapeéerepov χαριέστατα
εὐδαιμόνως “« εὐδαίμων εὐδαιμονέστερον εὐδαιμονεστατα
αἰσχρῶς “ αἰσχρός αἴσχῖον ᾿ αἴσχιστα
ἡδέως “ ἡἠδίς ἧδῖον hdıora
ταχέως “ ταχύς ϑᾶσσον, -ττον τάχιστα.
2. All primitive adverbs in -w, e. g. ἄνω, κάτω, ἔξω, ἔσω, ete,
retain this ending regularly in the Comparative, and for the most
part in the Superlative ; e. g.
ἄνω, above Com. ἀνωτέρω Sup. ἀνωτάτω
κάτω, below, ᾿ . κατωτέρω κατωτάτω.
In like manner, most other primitive adverbs have the ending -ὦ in
the Comparative and Superlative; e. g.
6
@ THE PRONOUNS ἐγώ, σύ, οὗ. [9 55, 56.
ἀγχοῦ, near, Com. ἀγχοτέρω Sup. dyyorare
πέρα, ; . περαιτέρω Sup. wanti
τηλοῦ, τηλοτέρω τηλοτάτω
ἑκάς, ἑκαστέω ἑκαστάτω
ἐγγύς, Ds ἐγγυτέρω ἐγγυτάτω and
ἐγγύτερον ἐγγύτατα
CHAPTER VI.
THE PRONOUN. "
§ 55. Nature and Division of Pronouns.
Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea of an object,
but only the relation of an object to the speaker, since they show
whether the object is the speaker himself (the first person), or the
person or thing addressed (the second person), or the person or
thing spoken of (the third person) ; e. g. J (the teacher) give to you
(the scholar) it (the book). Pronouns are divided into five princi-
pal classes, viz. personal, demonstrative, relative, indefinite and
interrogative pronouns.
| 856. I. Personal Pronouns.
A. Substantive personal pronouns.
(a) The simple ἐγώ, ego, σύ, tu, ov, sui
Si :
aber N ar
Gen. μοῦ ᾿ΐμου), ee of me σοῦ (σον), of thee | οὗ (ob), of lames etc.
ne μοί (μοι), ἐμοί, tome | aot Sa Ὁ to thee | ol (ol), to himself, etc.
μέ (ne), ἐμέ, me σέ oe E (é), himself, etc.
@p lee a book seh ger both, | σφωΐν ( them
voy, us to us | σφῷν, odwlv (σφωΐ
17 Tu TR
N ; 2 ee Ei
nn μεῖς, we ic, 7 εἴς, t. σφέ:
ἡμῶν, of us suse γ᾿ (0) σφῶν; 9 aa =
Dat ἡμῖν, to us ὑμῖν, to you (0) σφίσι(ν) (σφισι), to them
ἡμᾶς, us ὑμᾶς, you (9) σφᾶς, Neut. σφέα (σφεα), them.
Rem. 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, with-
out any mark of accentuation. Comp. § 14, (b). On the signification and use
of the third person of the pronoun, see § 169, Rem. 2.
9.57.) THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ὁμανερῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ. 68
XXXL Vocabulary.
Βλέπω, to look at, see. δια-φέρω, το. gen. to be σπουδαΐως, zealously, dili-
yap, for. different from, differ gently.
γράμμα, -aroc, τό, that from. συγχαίρω, το. dat., to re-
which is written, an al- δια-φϑείρω, to destroy, lay joice with. ,
phabetical letter, pl. let- waste. χαριέντως, gracefully.
ters, literature.
Ἐγὼ μὲν γράφω, od δὲ παίζεις. Σέβομαΐ ce, ὦ μέγα Zed. ᾿Ὦ παῖ, dxové
μου. Ὁ πατήρ μοι φίλτατός ἐστιν. Ὁ ϑεὸς det σε βλέπει. El με βλάπτεις,
οὐκ ἐχϑρῶν διαφέρεις. ’Eyo ἐῤῥωμενέστερός εἰμί cov. ἭἫδέως πείϑομαί σοι,8
ὦ πάτερ. Ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν συγχαίρομεν. Ἢ λύρα ὑμᾶς εὐφραίνει. Ὃ ϑεὸς ἡμῖν
πολλὰ ἀγαϑὰ παρέχει. 'Ὃ πατὴρ ὑμᾶς στέργει. ᾿Ανδρείως μάχεσϑε, ὦ στρα-
τιῶται " ἡμῶν γάρ ἐστι τὴν πόλιν φυλάττειν " εἰ γὰρ ὑμεῖς φεύγετε, πᾶσα ἢ πό-
λις διαφϑείρεται.ς: Ἡμῶν" ἐστιν, ὦ παῖδες, τὰ γράμματα σπουδαίως μανϑάνειν.
Ἢ. μήτηρ νὼ στέργει. Νῷν hv κακὴ νόσος. Σφὼ ἔχετε φίλον πιστότατον.
Σφῷν ὁ πατὴρ χαρίζεται " σφὼ γάρ σπουδαίως τὰ γράμματα μανϑάνετε.
Rue or Syntrax. The Nom. of personal pronouns is expressed,
only when they are emphatic, particularly, therefore, in antitheses.
Ren. 2. In the following examples, the italicized pronouns must be express-
ed in Greek.
We write, but you play. We both are writing, but you both are playing. I
reverence you, O gods! O boy, hearus! God sees you always. If you injure
us, you do not differ from enemies. We are stronger than you. You rejoice
with us. I obey you cheerfully, O parents. Our (the) father loves me and
thee. Our (the) mother loves us both. It is my duty (it is of me) to guard the
house; for I am the guardian of the house. It is thy duty, O boy, to learn dili-
gently ; for thou art a pupil. The lyre affords (to) me and thee pleasure. Both
of you had (to you both, was) a very bad illness. Both of you have (to you
both is) a very faithful friend. Our (the) father gratifies both of us (us both)
checrfully ; for both of us study literature diligently.
§ 57. (Ὁ) The reflexive pronouns ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, δαυτοῦ.
1. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second person decline
separately, in the plural, both pronouns of which they are composed ;
6. g. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ; that of the third person is either simply ἑαυτῶν,
αὑτῶν, etc., or σφῶν αὐτῶ», etc. ὶ
1 § 158, δ. (b). 2 § 157. 24161, 2. (a), (3). 4 § 158, 3.
64 THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. [ὃ 58.
Sin ,
ἐμαυτοῦ, -ἧἥς, of σεαυτοῦ, -ῆς. ΟΥ ἑαυτοῦ, «ἧς, or [self
σαυτοῦ, “it, of thysdf αὑτοῦ, -ῆς, of himself, of Be her-
ἢ, to σεαυτῷ, τῇ, or αυτῷ, τῇ, ΟΥ̓ [to itsel
myself σαυτῷ, ΕΝ to thyself αὑτῷ, to himself, to
ἐμαυτόν, -M, σεαυτόν, τῆν, ΟΥ̓ ἑαυτόν, τῆν, -ö, or
σαυτόν, «ἦν, thysdf arty, -ἦν, -6, himself, her.
b b ig ἑαυ ὑ
ἡ αὐτῶν, 0 μῶν αὐτῶν, 0 τῶν ora τῶν, or
ee “ selves u σφῶν αὐτῶν, of themselves
: ne abroic, «αἷς, | ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, -aic, to ἑαυτοῖς -αἷς, or αὑτοῖς -αἷς,οτ
ourselves σφίσιν αὐτοῖς -aic fo t
ute αὐτούς, -@g, | ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, -ἄς, your- ἑαυτούς, -ἄς, -G, OF αὑτούς,
ourselves selves «ἄς, -ά, or
σφᾶς αὐτούς, -üc, σφέα at-
ra, themselves
$ 58. (c) The reciprocal pronoun.
The reciprocal pronoun expresses & mutual action of several
persoris to each other.
Plur. τ ἀλλήλων, of ome another, Dual. ἀλλήλοιν, -aıv, -0ıv
| ἀλλήλοις, -αες, -οἐς ἀλλήλοιν, -aty, -οἷν
᾿ ἀλλήλους, -ας, -α ἀλλήλω, -ἄ, -W.
XXXIL Vocabulary.
"2aBovor, -ov, tot seuilg- μᾶλλον, (= μάλιτον com- οὑσία, «ας, ἦ, being ; pro-
ing, mherivious. parative of μάλα) more, perty, possession.
PAaBepic,-c,-dv, injurious. rather, sooner. — περι-φέρω, to carry about.
κακοῦργος, -ov, injurious, μόνον, adv., only, alone. πλεονέκτης, -ov, avari-
’ wicked. [doer. Οὐρανίδαε, -wv, ol, the in- cions. [rich.
xaasipyos, -ov, 6, an evil- habitants of Ouranos, πλουτίζω, to enrich, make
κατά, w.acc., according to. the gods. ὠφέλιμος, -ov, useful.
Ὁ βίος πολλὰ λυπηρὰ ἐν ἑαυτῷ (αὑτῷ) φέρει. Τίγνωσκε σεαυτόν (σαυτόν).
BobAov ἀρέσκειν näcı,! μὴ σαυτῷ μόνον. Ὁ σοφὸς ἐν ἑαυτῷ περιφέρει τὴν οὐ-
σίαν. Φίλων ἔπαινον μᾶλλον N σαυτοῦ λέγε. ᾿Αρετὴ nad’ ἑαυτήν ἐστι καλή.
Οἱ πλεονεκται ἑαυτοὺς μὲν πλουτίζουσιν, ἄλλους δὲ βλάπτουσιν. Οὐχ οἱ ἀκρα-
τεῖς τοῖς μὲν ἄλλοις βλαβεροΐ, ἑαυτοῖς (σφίσιν αὐτοῖς) δὲ ὠφέλιμοί εἶσιν, ἀλλὰ
κακοῦργοι μὲν τῶν ἄλλων, ἑαυτῶν (σφῶν αὐτῶν) δὲ πολὺ κακουργότεροι. Ἥμεϊς
ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἥδιστα χαριζόμεϑα. "Αφϑονοι Οὐρανίδαι καὶ ἐν ἀλλήλοις εἰσίν.
Οἱ κακοὶ ἀλλήλους βλάπτουσιν.
The wise carry about their (the) possessions with them. The avaricious man
makes himself rich, but he injures others. Ye please yourselves. The immode-
rate man is not injurious to others and useful to himself, but he is an evil-doer
to others and much more injurious to himself. Good children love one another.
1 § 161, 2. (c).
8 59.] ADJECTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS, . 65
§ 59. B. Adjective personal pronouns, or possessive pronouns.
Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of substantive
personal pronouns :
ἐμός, -N, -όν, meus, -a, -um, from ἐμοῦ) ἡμέτερος, -τέρᾶ, -Tepov, noster, -tra,
-trum, from ἡμῶν ;
σός, -7, -öv, tuus, a, -um, from σοῦ ; ὑμέτερος, «τόρᾶ, “τερον, vester, Ara, drum,
from ὑμῶν ;
᾿ ὅς, 7, ὄν, suus, from ov, instead of which, however, the Attic writers use the
Gen. ἑαυτοῦ, -ἧς, -öv, in the reflexive signification, and αὐτοῦ, -ῆς, -@v,.
in the signification of the personal pronoun of the third person; e. g. Bret
τὸν ἑαυτοῦ υἱόν or τὸν υἱὸν τὸν ἑαυτοῦ, he strikes HIS OWN son, τύπτει αὐτοῦ
τὸν υἱόν or τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, he strikes H18 son, (i. 6, the son of him, ¢jus). The
position of the Greek article should be observed.
XXXII. Vocabulary.
Mednuwv, -ov, negligent, μεταχειρίζομαι, to uphold, σῶμα, -arog, τό, the body.
dilatory. lead. τέκνον, του, τό, & child.
Rute or Syntax. The possessive pronouns are expressed in
Greek, only when they are particularly emphatic, especially, there-
fore, in antitheses. When not emphatic, they are omitted, and their
place i is supplied by the article, which stands before the substantive ;
6. g 7 μήτηρ στέργει τὴ» «ϑυγατέρα, the mother loves HER daughter.
Instead of the adjective personal pronouns ἐμός, σός, ete., the Greek
uses, with the same signification, the Gen. of substantive personal
pronouns, both the simple forms (in the singular the enclitics pov,
cov) and the reflexives (ἐμαυτοῦ). The position of the article may
be learned from the following examples.
Ὁ ἐμὸς πατὴρ ἀγαϑός ἐστιν or ὁ πατήρ pov or μοῦ ὁ πατὴρ ἀγαϑός ἐστιν ;
or ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ narnp or ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀγαϑός ἐστιν. Οἱ ὑμέτεροι παῖδες
σπουδαίως τὰ γράμματα μανϑάνουσιν. Οἱ παῖδες ὑμῶν καλοί εἰσιν. Ὕμῶν ol
παῖδες σπουδαϊοΐ εἰσιν. Τὰ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τέκνα or τὰ τέκνα τὰ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ψέ-
γομεν. Ὁ σεαυτοῦ φίλος or ὁ φίλος ὁ σεαυτοῦ πιστός ἐστιν, ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ φίλος or
ὁ φίλος ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ ἄπιστός ἐστιν. Ὁ σὸς νοῦς τὸ σὸν σῶμα μεταχειρίζεται. Ὁ
μὲν ἐμὸς παῖς σπουδαῖός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ σὸς μεϑήμων.
Thy father is good. My slave is bad. Our children learn diligently. Many
(persons) love the children of others, but not their own. He admires his own
actions, but not those of the others.
6*
66. DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. [8 60, 61.
860. IL Demonstrative Pronouns.
ara
‘self, or he, she, it.
this.
N.|öde fde τόδε | οὗτος ae τοῦτα αὐτός αὐτῇ αὐτό
G. | τοῦδε τῆςδε τοῦδε | τούτου ταύτης τούτου | αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ
Ὠ. [τῷδε rüde τῷδε τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ αὐτῷ αὐτὴ αὐτῷ
Α. | τόνδε τήνδε. τόδδ τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο | αὐτὸν αὐτήν αὐτό
Plural.
N, [olde alde rade |ovroe atras ταῦτα | αὐτοί αὐταί αὐτά
G. |rüvde τῶνδε τῶνδε | τούτων τούτων τούτων | αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν
ly roicde ταῖςδε τοῖςδε | τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις | αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς
Α.] τούςδε τάςδε τάδε | τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα | αὐτοῦς αὐτάς αὐτά
rade rode Ἰτούτω ταύτα τοῦτω αὐτώ αὐτά abrö
near taivde Toivde | τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν | abroiy atraiv αὐτοῖν.
Like οὗτος are declined τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτο(νῚ, tantus, -a, -um, τοιοῦτος,
τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο(ν), talis, «6, τηλεκοῦτος, τηλικαύτη, τηλικοῦτο(ν), 80 great, so
ald; it is to be noted, (a) that the Neuter Sing., besides the form in o, has
also the common form in ov; (Ὁ) that in all forms of οὗτος, which begin
with r, the r is dropped. .
Ifke αὐτός are declined ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο, he, she, it, ἄλλος, ἄλλη, ἄλλο,
als, alia, aliud. The article 6, #, τό is declined like öde, the de being omit-
. ted.
Singular. Plural.
τυσαύτη porary τασοῦτοι τοσαῦται τοσαῦτα
τοσαύτης τοσούτου τοσούτων τοσούτων τοσούτων
τοσαύτῃ τοσούτῳ τοσούτοις τοσαύταις τοσούτοις
τοσαύτην nn | τοσούτους τοσαῦτας τοσαῦτα
N. A. | τοσούτω ER τοσούτω
τοσούτοιν τοσαύταιν τοσούτοιν.
Remarx. The pronoun αὐτάς, -7, -6, signifies either self, ipse, ipsa, ipsum,
or is used for the oblique Cases of ihe personal pronoun of the third person, he,
she, it; is,ea,id. With the article, viz. 6 αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, it sig-
nifies the same (idem, eadem, idem). The article usually coalesces by Crasis ($ 6,
2) with αὐτός and forms one word, viz. αὑτός, instead of ὁ αὐτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό,
usually ταὐτόν, ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτῷ, ταὐτῇ, ete.
861. IIL Relative Pronoun.
§ 62.] INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 67
§ 62. IV. Indefintte and Interrogdtive Pronouns.
The indefinite and interrogative pronouns have the same form,
but are distinguished by the accent and position, the indefinite be-
ing enclitic [ὃ 14, (c) ], and placed after some word or words, whilst
the mterrogative is aecented and placed before.
Rem. 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, they
place before their stem the relative 6, which, however, (except in the case of
ὅςτις) is not inflected ; 6. g. ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος, ὁπότερος, ete.
Declension of τὲς, τίς and ὅςτις.
N. | τὰς, some one N. τὶ, some thing τίς; quis? τί; quid?
G. | τινός or τοῦ τίνος or τοῦ
D. | τινί or τῷ τίνι or τῷ
A. | τινά N. τὶ τίνα τί
Plur. N. | τινές N. τινά and ἄττα river riva
G. | τινῶν τινῶν
Ὁ. | τεσί(ν) τίσι(ν)
. A. τινάς N. τινά and ἄττα τίνας τίνα
Dual. N. A. | τινέ rive
G. and D. | rıvoiv rivoty.
a Es
N. | ὅςτις, whoever ἥἧτις 5 τι | olrıvec αἵτινες ἅτινα or ἅττα
G. | οὗτινος or ὅτου ἧἥςτινος ὧντινων (rarer ὅτων) τισι(ν)
D.| drwı oröro ὅτινι οἷςτισι(ν) (rarer ὅτοις) αἱςτισι(ν) οἷς-
A. | ὄντινα ἥντινα ὅ τι | οὔςτινας ἅςτινας ἄτινα or ἅττα
Dual. N. A. drive, ürıve, G. Ὦ. οἴντινοιν, αἴντινοιν.
Rem. 2. The negative compounds of ric, viz. οὔτις, οὔτι, μήτις, μῆτι, NO ome,
npthing, are inflected like the simple τὶς ; e. g. οὔτινος, obruvec, ete.
XXXIV. Vocabulary.
Βασιλεύς, -ewg, 6, king. ἡμέρα, -ac, ἢ, a day. τηλικοῦτος, -abrn, -odTO,
ἕκαστος, -n, -ov, each. οἷος, -ü, -ov, qualıs. so large, so old.
ἐκεῖνος, -7, -0, that. ὅσος, -7, τον, quantus. τοῖος, -&, -0v, talts.
ἔνιοι, -at, -a, some. ὅστις, Aric, ὃ τι, whoever, τόσος, -n, -ov, tantus.
ἐξετάζω, to examine. whatever. τρόπος, -ov, ὁ, & way, ΟΥ̓
' ἐπιστολῇ, -ἧς, 7, epistola, ῥόδον, -ov, τό, A rose. manner, the mode of
aletter. —~ ctparnyéc,-o,6,a general. life, the character.
Ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος or οὗτος ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαϑός ἐστιν. Ἢ γνώμη αὕτη or αὕτη ἡ γνώ-
μη δικαία ἐστίν. Ἢ γυνὴ ἧδε or ἦδε ἡ γυνὴ καλή ἐστιν. Ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐκεῖνος or
ἐκεῖνος ὁ ἀνὴρ βασιλεύς ἐστιν. Ὁ βασιλεὺς αὐτός or αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεὺς στρατη-
γός ἐστιν. Φέρε, ὦ παῖ, αὑτῷ τὴν κλεῖν. "Ενισὶ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν τῆς αὐτῆς
ἡμέρας οὗ ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκουσιν. Τὸ λέγειν καὶ τό πράττειν οὐ ταὐτόν ἐστιν.
"Ταῦτα τὰ ῥόδα, ἃ ϑάλλει ἐν τῷ κῆπῳ, καλά ἐστιν. Σοφόν τι χρῆμα ὁ ἄνϑρωπός
ἔστιν. El φιλίαν του (τινὸς) διώκεις, αὐτοῦ τὸν τρόπον ἐξέταζε. τίς ypagec
my ἐπιστολήν; ‘Qv' ἔχεις, τούτων ἄλλοις παρέχου. "Ολβιος, ᾧ παῖδες φίλοε
1 By attraction for ü, see Syntax, $ 182, 6. 24158, 3. (b).
68 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. [$ 63.
εἰσίν. 'Exetvog ὀλβιώτατος, ὅτῳ (grivt) μηδὲν κακόν ἐστιν. Ti φροντίζεις ;
Οὐ λέγω, ὅ τι φροντίζω. Οἷον τὸ ἔϑος ἑκάστου, τοῖος ὁ βίος. Λέγε μοι, ἧτις
ἐστὶν ἐκείνη ἡ γυνή.
These men are good. These opinions are just. ‘The children of these women
are beautiful. That rose is beautiful. The father himself is writing the letter.
His (ejus) son is good. Her (ejus) daughter is beautiful. I admire the beauti-
ful rose; bring it to me. The children of the same parents often differ. That
rose which blooms in the garden is beautiful. ‘Virtue is something beautiful
What are you thinking about? I am thinking what (/em.) friendship is.
What is more beautiful than virtue? ὁ
§ 63. Correlative Pronouns. —
Under correlative pronouns are included all those which express a mutual
relation (correlation) to each other, and represent this relation by a correspond-
ing form.
(a) Adjective Correlatives.
Indefinite. Demonstrative. ela Fe
Interrogative.
ποσός, -ἤ, -όν, τόσος -7, τον, 80 great, so | ὅσος, -ἢ, -ov and
dad "ἢ, "ον;
much? eat ?-how | of acertain size, tantus ὁπόσος, -N, -0v,
much? quan- | or number, ali- cone e, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε | as greatas
quantus τοσοῦτος, -aurn,-oöro(v) | quantus
ποῖος, -d, -ov; | ποιός, -G, -ὄν, | τοῖος, -d, -ον, of such a | oloc, -d, -ov and
of what kind? | ofacertainkind| kind, talis ὁποῖος, -ἃ, -ov,
qualis ? roröcde, τοιάδε, τοιόνδε,}) of what kind,
τοιοῦτος, -αὕτη, -odTo(v) | qualis
τηλίκ ος, -ν͵ 80 great, so old ἡλίκος, "ον and
wanting τηλικόςδε, -nde, -όνδε ὁπηλίκος, “1, τον,
rnAkoürog,-aurn,-oüro(v)| as great, as old
“πηλίκος, -ἢ, τον;
how great? how
old?
(b) Adverbial Correlatives.
Interrogative. | Indefinite. | Demonstrative. | Relative. u
ποῦ; where?| πού, somewhere, wanting (hic, οὗ, where, | Sov,where,
ubi ? alicubi ibi) ubi ubi
πόϑεν ; whence? | ποϑέν, from some | wanting (hinc, | d0ev,whence, | ömöder,
unde ? place, alicunde | inde) unde whence,unde
ποῖ; whither ? | wol, to some place, | wanting (eo) | ol, whither, | ὅποι, whi-
quo ? aliquo quo ther, quo
πότε; when | ποτέ, some time, | röre,then,tum | dre, when, | ὁπότε,
quando ? aliquando quum
. quando
πηνίκα; quo wanting rnvi- Yhoc | ἡνίκα, when, | ὁπηνίκα,
temporis pun- xéde {ipso | quo ipso | when, quo
cto ? quota ho- Thvi- | tem- | tempore ipso tem-
ra? καῦτα ) pore pore
πῶς: Ἂν ΟΝ | πώς, some how ot ¢) gai tod eed ὡς, how ὅπως, how
an; whither ? | mn, to some place, | τῇδε ather | 9, wi ὅπη, where,
how? thither, in some way | ταύτῃ ὦ orhere! whither whither.
§§ 64, 65.] LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUNS.—NUMERALS. 69
Rewanx. The forms which are wanting in the Common language to denote
here, there (htc, ibi), are expressed by évratda, and those to denote hence (hinc,
inde), by ἐνθένδε, ἐντεῦϑεν.
§ 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns.
1. The enclitic γέ is joined to the personal pronouns of the first and second
person, in order to make the person emphatic. The pronoun ἐγώ then draws
back its accent in the Nom. and Dat.; e.g. ἔγωγε, ἐμοῦγε, ἔμοιγε, tuéye;
-stye. Moreover γέ can be joined with any other word, and also with any other
pronoun, but does not form one word with it; 6. g. οὗτός ye.
2. The particles ὁ 7, most commonly ὁήποτε, and 0% ν, are appended to rela-
tives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to ὅσος, in order to
make the relative relation general, i. 6. to extend it to everything embraced in
the object denoted by the pronoun; 6. g. dcricd7, ὁςτιςδήποτε, ὁςτιςοῦν, nrecoty,
ὁτιοῦν, quicunque (Gen. οὑτινοςοῦν or ὁτουοῦν, ἡςτινοςοῦν, Dat. ᾧτινιοῦν or
ὁτῳοῦν, etc.) ;---ὁποσοςδή, ὁποσοςοῦν, ὁσοςδήποτε, quantuscunque .---ὁπηλεκοςοῦν,
however great, how old soever.
3. The suffix de is appended to some demonstratives for the purpose of
stfengthening their demonstrative relation; 6. g. öde, Ade, röde; rotdcde; To-
abcde; τηλικόςδε, from τοῖος, τόσος, τηλίκος, which change their accent after
de is appended
4. The enclitic πέρ is appended to all relatives, in order to make the rela-
tive relation still more emphatic; hence it denotes, even who, which; 6. g. ὅςπερ,
ἥπερ, ὅπερ (Gen. obrrep, etc.); doocrep, οἱόςπερ (Gen. ὅσουπερ, olovmep, etc.) ;
ὄθιπερ, ὄϑενπερ.
5. The inseparable demonstrative f, is appended to demonstrative pronouns
end some demonstrative adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative
sense. It takes the acute accent and absorbs every short vowel immediately
preceding it, and also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs: *
obrool, this here (hicce, celui-ci), abrät, τουτί,
Gen. rovroüf, ταυτησΐ, Dat. τουτῷξ, ravryi, Pl. obroit, abratl, ταυτί;
ὁδί, 70%, τοδί from ὅδε; df from ὧδε ; obrwof from οὕτως ;
ἐντευϑενΐ from ἐντεῦϑεν ; ἐνϑαδί from ἐνθάδε ; νυνξ from viv; dsvpi from
δεῦρο.
« CHAPTER VII
THE NUMERALS.
§65. Nature and Division of the Numerals.
The numerals express the relation of number and quantity.
They are divided inte the following classes, according to their sig-
nification :
0 NUMERAL SIGNS.—NUMERALBS, - [8 66, 67,
(a) Cardinals, which answer the question, “How many?” The first four nu-
merals and the round numbers from 200 (διακόσιοι) to 10,000 (μύριοι), as well
as the compounds of μύριοι, are declined ; all the others are indeclinable. The
thousands are expressed by adverbial numerals; 6. g. τριςχίλιοι, 3000.
(b) Ordinals, which answer the question, “ Which one tn the series?” They all
have the three endings of adjectives -o¢, -7, -ov, except δεύτερος, which has -ος,
-@, -ov.
(c) Multiplieatives, which answer the question, “How many fold?” They are
all compounded of πλοῦς, and are adjectives of three endings, -οὖς, -7, -οῦν.
For the declension of these, see ὁ 29. Numeral adjectives in -@xıs, answer the
question, “How many times ?”
(d) Proportionals, which answer the question, “How many times more?” They
are all compounds of -πλάσιος, -id, -ἰον ; 6. g. διπλάσιος, two-fold, double.
(e) Substantive-numerals, which express the abstract idea of the number; e.g.
ἡ δυάς, -adoc, duality.
§ 66. Numeral Signs.
1. The numeral signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bai or the digamma F or
Στῖ, ¢, as the sign for 6;—Körna, 5, as the sign for 90 ;—Zaymi, My, as the
sign for 900.
‚2. The first eight letters, i. e. from a to ὃ with the Bad or ri, denote the
units ; the following eight, i. e. from ¢ to π with the Κόππα, the tens; the last
eight, i. 6. from p to w with the Σαμπῖ, the hundreds.
3. Up to 999, the letters, as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral signs,
only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but the let-
ters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a’= 1, ¢ = 1000, =
10, ,¢ = 10,000, εὐ u. f= 5742, aw u ß’= 1842, p’= 100, ‚p = 100,000.
§ 67. Summary of the Cardinals and Ordinals.
Cardinals. Ordinals.
1a’ εἷς, μία, Ev, one mpöTag, -ἢ, -0v, primus, -ἃ, -um
2 β΄ δύο or δύω, two δεύτερος, -d, -ov, secundus, -a, -um
8 γ΄ τρεῖς, τρία, three τρίτος, -ἢ, -ov, tertius, -8, -um
4 δ' τέτταρες, -a, or τέσσαρες τέταρτος, -ἢ, -ον
5 ε΄ πέντε πέμπτος, -7, -ον
6 ς΄ ἔξ ἕκτος, -ἢ, τον
ἢ ζ΄ ἑπτά ἕβδομος, -ἢ, -ον
8 η΄ ὀκτώ ὄγδοος, -ἢ, -ον
9% ἐννέα ἔνατος, -9, -ον
10 .ς δέκα δέκατος, -7, -ον
11 ια΄ ἔνδεκα ἑνδέκατος, -N, -ον
12 ιβ' δώδεκα δωδέκατος, -N, -ov .
18 ιγ΄ τριζςκαίδεκα : τριςκαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ον
14 ιδ΄ rerrapecuaidexa or τεσσαρεςκαίδεκα τετταρακαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ἂν
§ 67.] NUMERALS. 71
15 ce’ πεντεκαίδεκα πεντεκαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ον
16 tc ἑκκαΐδεκα ἑκκαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ον
17 ιζ΄ ἑπτακαΐδεκα ἑπτακαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ον
18 εη΄ ὀκτωκαίδεκα ὀκτωκαιδέκατος, N, -ον
19 «eh ἐννεακαίδεκα ἐννεακαιδέκατος, -ἢ, -ov
20 x’ εἴκοσι(ν) εἰκοστός, -ἦ, -6v
21 xa’ eixocıy, εἷς, μία, ἕν εἰκοστὸς, -N, -ὃν, πρῶτος, -ἢ, τον
80 λ΄ τριάκοντα τριᾶκοστός, -7, -dv
40 u’ τετταράκοντα or τεσσαράκοντα τετταρακοστός, -7, -Gv
50 ν΄ πεντήκοντα πεντηκοστός, 7, -όν
60 ξ΄ ἑξήκοντα ἑξηκοστός, -7, -0V
70 0° ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομηκοστός, -ἦ, «ὅν
80 x ὀγδοήκοντα ὀγδοηκοστός, -ἧ, -dv
90 5° ἐνενήκοντα ἐνενηκοστός, -ἤ, -ὅν
100 ρ΄ ἑκατόν ἑκατοστός, -7, -όν
200 σ΄ διᾶκόσιοι, -at, -α διᾶκοσιοστός, -7, «ὅν
800 τ΄ τριάκόσιοι, -at, -@ τριᾶκοσιοστός, -7, «ὅν
400 υ΄ τετρακόσιοι, -at, -@ τετρακοσιοστός, <4, -ὅν
500 φ΄ πεντακύσιοι, -at, -α πεντακοσιοστός, -ῆ, -όν
600 x ἑξακόσιοι, -αι, -α ἑξακοσιοστός, -ἦ, -όν
700 Ψ΄ ἑπτακόσιοι, -at, -@ ἑπτακοσιοστός, -ἦ, -dv
800 wo’ ὀκτακόσιοι, -at, -α ὀκτακοσιοστός, -7, -dv
900 chy ἐννακύσιοι, -at, -@
ἐννακοσιοστός, -7, -dv
1000 α χίλιοι, -at, -α χιλιοστός, -ἦ, -όν
2000 8 διρχίλιοι, -αι, -α διςχιλιοστός, -7, -6V
8000 γ τριςχίλιοι, -at, -α τριςχιλιοστός, -ἦ, -όν
4000 6 τετρακι(χίλιοι, -at, -α τετρακιςχιλιοστός, -ἦ, -όν
5000 ε πεντακιςχίλιοι, -al, -@ πεντακιςχιλιοστός, -M, -όν
6000 .¢ ἐἑξακιςχίλιοι, «αἱ, -α ἑξακιςχιλιοστός, -ἤ, -όν
7000 5 ἑπτακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -@ ἑπτακιςχιλιοστός, -7, -ὄν
8000 η ὀκτακιςχίλιοι, -at, -a ὀκτακιςχιλιοστός, -7, -όν
9000 ‚9 ἐννακιρχίλιοι, -at, -α ἐννακιςχιλιοστός, -ἥ, -όν
10,000 εὖ μύριοι, -at, -α μυριοστός, -, -όν
20,000 ‚x διςμύριοι, -αι, -α διςμυριοστός, -7, -ὅὄν
100,000 ρ δεκάκιςμύριοι, -αἱ -α, δεκακιςμνυριοστός, -7, -ὄν.
Rewarx. In compound numerals, the smaller number with καί is usually
placed before the larger, often also the larger without xai is placed first, some-
times with xai; e.g.
25: πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι, or εἴκοσι πέντε,
845: πέντε καὶ τετταράκοντα καὶ τριακόσιοι, OF τρίακ. τεττ. πεντε.
The same holds of the ordinals; 6. g.
πέμπτος καὶ εἰκοστός, or εἰκοστὸς πέμπτος.
72
NUMERALS.
[5 68.
§ 68. Declenston of the first four Numerals.
δύο and δύω
δυοῖν, Attic also δυεῖν
ὑνοῖν; more rarely ὀνσί(ν»ν)
0
τέτταρες οἱ τέασαρες
τεττάρων
τέτταρσι(ν
τέτταρας
Neut. τέτταρα
Neut: τέτταρα.
Rem. 1. The Gen. and Dat. of pia, viz. μιᾶς, μιᾷ, have the accentuation of
monosyllabic substantives of the third declension. See § 33, ΠῚ. (Ὁ). Like ele
are also declined οὐδείς and μηδείς, no one, which have the same irregular ac-
centuation, thus :
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, Gem. οὐδενός, οὐδεμιᾶς, Dat. οὐδενί, οὐδεμιᾷ, ete., but
in PL. οὐδένες (μηδένες) -ἔνων, -ἔσι, -ἕνας.
Rem. 2. Δύο is often used indeclinably for all the Cases. The numeral ἄμφω,
both, like 860, has -ofy in the Gen. and Dat. (ἀμφοῖν); the Acc. is like the Nom.
Like δύο, it is also sometimes used indeclinably.
"Audi, about.
ἀνά-βασις, -εως, 7, & 5ο-
ing up, an expedition
(from the sea inland).
ἀριϑμός, -o6, 6, number,
extent, length.
ἅρμα, -aror, τό, a chariot.
ἀσύνετος, «ον, senseless,
stupid.
β üpßapos,-ov, ὃ, barbarian,
(every one not a Greek).
βῆμα, -ατος, τό, a step, 8
pace.
δρεπανηφόῤος, -ov, scythe-
XXXV. Vocabulary.
bearing, farnished with
scythes. |
ἐνιαυτός, -oü, ὁ, a year.
εὖρος » τος = -οὐς, τό,
breadth.
κατά-βασις, -ewg, 9, 8 gO-
ing down (from inland
to the sea), retreat.
ὁπλίτης, -ov, 6, & heavy-
armed man.
πάρειμι, to be present.
πελταστής͵ οὔ, ὁ, a shields-
man.
πλῆϑος, -e0¢ = «ουὐς, TO,
& multitude, extent.
ποῦς, ποδός, ὁ, a foot,
pes, pedis.
σταϑμός, -ov, ὃ, a station, a
day’s journey, a march.
στράτευμα, -ατος, τό, an
army, an armament.
συγγράῴφω, conscribo, to en-
list, to describe.
συμπάᾶς, -Goa, -av, all to-
gether, in a body, whole.
συνετός, -%, -öv, sensible,
intelligent.
Ebdparne ποταμός tort τὸ εὖρος τεττάρων σταδίων. Td δὲ στάδιον ἔχει πέν-
τε καὶ εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν βήματα ἢ πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι καὶ ἑξακοσίους πόδας. Κύρῳ
παρῆσαν αἱ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου νῆες τριάκοντα πέντε. Τοῦ Σάρου Κιλικίας ποτα-
μοῦ τὸ εὗρος ἣν τρία πλέϑρα. Τὸ δὲ πλέϑρον ἔχέι τέτταρας καὶ ἑκατὸν πόδας.
Κύδνος Κιλικίας ποταμὸς eöpöc ἐστι δύο (δυεῖν) πλέϑρων. Tot Μαιάνδρου
Φρυγίας ποταμοῦ τὸ εὑρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι πέντε ποδῶν. Ὁ παρασάγγης, ἹΠερσικὸν
μέτρον, ἔχει τριάκοντα στάδια ἢ πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑπτακοσίους καὶ ὀκτακιςχιλίους
καὶ μυρίους πόδας. "Apıduöc συμπάσης τῆς ὁδοῦ τῆς ἀναβάσεως καὶ καταβάσεως,
ἢ ὑπὸ Ξενοφῶντος συγγράφεται, σταϑμοὶ διακόσιοι δέκα πέντε, παρασάγγαι χί-
λιοι ἑκατὸν πεντήκοντα πέντε, στάδια τριςμύρια τετρακιςχίλια ἑξακόσια πεντή-
κοντα, χρόνον πλῆϑος τῆς ἀναβάσεως καὶ καταβάσεως ἐνιαυτὸς καὶ τρεῖς μῆνες.
88 69— 71.) NUMERAL ÄDVERBS.—THE VERB. 78
"Evdc φιλία συνετοῦ κρείττων ἐστὶν ἀσυνέτων ἀπάντων. Τοῦ Κύρου στρατεύ-
ματος ἦν ἀριϑμὸς τῶν μὲν Ῥ λλήνων ὁπλῖται μύριοι καὶ τετρακόσιοι πελτασταὶ
δὲ διςχίλιοι καὶ πεντακόσιοι, τῶν δὲ μετὰ Κύρου βαρβάρων δέκα μυριάδες καὶ
ἅρματα δρεπανηφόρα ἀμφὲ τὰ εἴκοσιν. ᾿
It is better to have one sensible friend, than all senseless ones. Seventy
years afford about 25,555 days. The extent (number) of the way from the bat-
tle at (ἐν) Babylon to (εἰς) Cotyora on the retreat (gen.) which is described by
Xenophon, amounts to (is) 122 days’ journeys, 620 parasangs, 18,600 stadia;
the length (multitude) of the time eight months. The number of the armament
is 12,699,850. The generals of the armament are four, each of 300,000 (gen.).
In the battle were present 96,650 soldiers and 150 scythe-bearing chariots.
869. Numeral Adverbs.
1 ἅπαξ, once 18 ὀκτωκαιδεκάκις
2 dic, twice 19 ἐννεακαιδεκάκις
8 τρίς 20 εἰκοσάκις
4 τετράκις 80 τριακοντάκις
5 πεντάκις : ᾿ 40 τετταρακοντάκις or τεσσαρ.
6 ἑξάκις 50 πεντηκοντάκις
7 ἑπτάκις ες 60 ἑξηκοντάκις
8 ὀκτάκις 70 ἑβδομηκοντάκις
9 ἐννεάκες, ἐννάκις ᾿ 80 ὀγδοηκοντάκις
10 δεκάκις 90 ἐνενηκοντάκις
11 ἐνδεκάκις 100 ἑκατοντάκις
12 δωδεκάκις 200 διακοσιάκις
13 τριζκαιδεκάκις * 800 τριακοσιάκις
14 τετταρεςκαιδεκάκις or τεσσαρ. 1000 χελεάκις
15 πεντεκαιδεκάκες 2000 διςχιλιάκις
16 ἑκκαιδεκάκις 10,000 μυριάκις
17 ἑπτακαιδεκάκις 20,000 διςμυριάκις
CHAPTER VIII.
THE VERB.
§ 70. Nature of the Verb.
The verb expresses an action which is affirmed of a subject eg.
the father writes, the rose blooms, the boy sleeps, God is loved.
871. Classes of Verbs.
Verbs are divided, in relation to their ane and ages into the
following classes : ᾿
74 CLASSES OF VERBA.—THE TENSES AND MODES. [§§ 72, 78
1. Active verbs, i. e. such as express an action, that the subject
itself performs or manifests; 6. g. γράφω, J write, Θάλλω, I bloom;
2. Middle or Reflexive verbs, i. e. such as express an action,
that proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, i. e. an ac-
tion which the subject performs on itself; 6. g. βουλεύομαι, I ad-
vise myself, 1 deliberate ;
8. Passive verbs, i. e. such as express an action that the subject
receives from another subject; e. g. zurzoum ὑπό τινος, I am smit-
872. The Tenses.
1. The Greek language has the following Tenses:
L (1) Present, βουλεύω, I advise,
(2) Perfect, βεβούλευκα, 1 have advised ;
IL (3) Imperfect, &Bovdevor, 7 was advising,
(4) Pluperfect, ἐβεβονλεύκειν, 1 had advised,
(5) Aorist, ἐβούλευσα, I advised, (indefinite) ;
IIL (6) Future, βουλεύσω, I shall or will advise,
(7) Future Perfect (only in the Middle form), βεβουλεύσομαι,
I shall have advised myself, or I shall have been advised.
2. All the Tenses may be divided into,
a. Principal tenses, viz. Present, Perfect and Future;
Ὁ. Historical tenses, viz. Imperfect, Pluperfect and Aorist.
Rumarx. The Greek language has two forms for the Perf. and Pinperf. Act.,
two for the simple Fat. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass. and Mid. Aon;
these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses.
Still, few verbs have both forms; most verbs construct the above tenses with
one or the other form. No verb has all the tenses. Pure verbs form, with very
few exceptions, only the primary tenses. Mute and liquid verbs may form both
the primary and secondary tenses. The Fut. Perf, which is found in but few
verbs, is almost entirely wanting in liquid verbs.
873, The Modes.
The Greek has the following Modes :
L The Indicative, which expresses a phenomenon or reality ; 6. g.
the rone Sooms, bloomed, will bloom.
Il. The Sabjanctive, which denotes merely a representation or
conception of the mind. The Subjunctive of the historical tenses,
is called the Optative ; comp. γρώφοιμι, with soriberem.
: ‘Rxtwaee. How the Aor. can have both forms of the Subjunetive (i. 6. Subj.
‘and Opt.), and the Future an Optative, will be seen in the Syntax (4 152).
§§ 74—-77, | VERBS.— PARTICIPIALS, ETC. 75
IL The Imperative, which denotes a direct expression of one’s
will ; ©. g. Bovieve, advise.
ὃ 74. Participtals.—Infinttive and Participle.
In addition to the modes, the verb has two forms, which, from
their partaking both of the nature of the verb, and also of that of
the substantive and adjective, are called Participials, namely,
(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive-participial; 6. g.
él βουλεύειν, I wish to advise, and τὸ βουλεύειν, the
(Ὁ) The Participle, which is the adjective-participial ; 6. g. B ov-
λεύων ἀνήρ, an advising man, i. 6. a counsellor.
REMARK. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum; the re
maining forms of the verb, verbum finitum.
§ 75. Numbers and Persons of the Verb.
The personal-endings of the verb show whether the subject of
the verb be the speaker himself (J/, first person); or a person or
thing addressed (thou, second person) ; or a person or thing spoken
of (he, she, it, third person). They also show the relation of num-
ber, viz. Singular, Dual and Plural; 6. g. βουλεύω, J, the speaker,
advise; βουλεύεις, thou, the person addressed, advisest ; βουλεύει, he,
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; βουλεύετον, ye two,
the persons addressed, advise ; βουλεύουσι, they, the persons spoken
of, advise.
Remark. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual in the active
voice, and in the Pass. Auriste ; hence it is expressed by the form of the first Pers.
Plural.
§76. The Conjugation of the Verb.
The Greek has two forms for conjugation, that in -ο, which in-
cludes much the larger number of verbs, 6. g. βουλεύ-ο, to advise,
and the older conjugation in -w, 8. g. ἴστη-μι, to station.
§77. Stem, Augment and Reduplication.—Verb-
characteristic.
1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the ground-
form of the verb, and into the syllable of formation, by which the
relations of the action expressed by the verb, are denoted. See
44. 71—75. The stem is found in most verbs in -o by cutting off
the ending of the first Pers. Ind. Pres.; e. g. βουλεύ-ω, λέγ-ω, τρίβω.
76 VERBS.—INFLECTION-ENDINGS.—TENSE-ENDINGS. [§§ 78, 79.
2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings to
the stem, and are then called: inflection-endings, e. g. Bovlav-w, Bov-
320-000, βουλεύ-σομαι; or are prefixed to the stem, and are then
called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. ἐ-βούλευον, I was aan
ing, βε-βούλευκα, 1 have advised.
3. The Augment, which belongs to the Indicative of all the his-
torical tenses, i. e. the Imperfect, the Aorist and the Pluperfect, is
é prefixed to the stem of verbs which begin with a consonant; 6. g.
ἐ-βούλευσα, 1 advised ; but in verbs, which begin with a vowel, it
consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel, « and s being changed
into ἡ (and in some cases & into εἰ), ¢ and ὕ into ζ and ὕ, and 0 into om.
4. Reduplication, which belongs to the Perfect, Pluperfect and
Future Perfect, consists in repeating the first stem-consonant to-
gether with 2, in those verbs whose stem begins with a consonant;
but in verbs whose stem begins with a vowel, it is the same as the
Augment; 6. g. βε-βούλευκα, 1 have advised, 'insrevxa, I have sup-
plicated, from ‘ixetev-o. For a more full definition of the ee
ment and Reduplication, see § 85.
5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -ὦ is cut off, is
called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, because
according to this, verbs in - are divided into different classes; ac-
cording as the characteristic is a vowel, or a mute, or a liquid, verbs
are divided into pure, mute and liquid verbs; 6. g. βουλεύ-ο), to ad
wise, tıud-o, to honor, τρίβ- ὦ, to rub, φαίν-ω, to show.
§ 78. Inflectton-endtngs.
In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation of
tense, mode and person, there are three different elements, namely,
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal-ending ;
e. δ: βουλεύ-σ-ο-μαι. According to the three classes of verbs, they
are divided into the Active, Middle and Passive endings.
879. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings.
1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands next
after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark of the
tense. In pure verbs, x is the tense-characteristic of the Perf. and
Plup. Ind. Act.; e. g.
Be-BotAev-x-a &-Be-Boviret-x-e; -
that of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. and the Fut. Perf. is
0; 6. g.
§§ 79, 80.] VERBS.—PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 17
λεύ-σ Asl-o-opat λεύ-σ-ο
Are ee 3 ΣΝ δὰ
that of the first Aor. Pass. is δ; in addition to the tense-character-
istic o, the first Fut. Pass. has the ending -9 of the first Aor.
Pass., thus,
ἐ-βουλεύ-ϑ-ην βουλευ-ϑήσ-ομαι.
The primary tenses only, see ὃ 72, Rem., have a tense-character
istic.
2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending following,
is called the tense-ending. Thus, 6. g. in the form βουλεύσω, o is
the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable oo, the tense-
ending of the Future. The stem of the verb, together with the
tense-characteristic and the augment or reduplication, is called the
tense-stem. Thus, 6. g. in ἐβούλευσ-α, ἐβουλευσ is the tense-stem of
the first Aor. Active.
879 (b) Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.
The personal-ending takes a different form according to the dif-
ferent persons and numbers; and the mode-vowel takes a different
form according to the different modes; e. g.
1 Pers. Sing. Ind. age M. BovAeö-o-uaı Subj. βουλεύ-ω-μαι
3 “ ‘ Povdet-o-e-rat Opt. βουλεύ-σ-οι-το
1 * PL * Pres. “ Bovdev-d-peda Subj. Ag
2 “ une & Ms βουλεύ-ε-σϑε PovAev-n-ode
1 “ Sing “ 4.1. “ EBovdeu-o-üum “ βουλεύ-σ-ὠὡ-μαι
8% “ “« « © ἐβουλεύ-στατο Opt. βουλεύ-σ-αι-το.
Remark. In the above forms, ßovAev is the verb-stem, and βουλεν, BovAeve
and &ßovAevo are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut. and first Aor. Mid. ;
the endings -μαι, -ται, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels 0, ὦ, e, os,
n, a, αἱ, are the mode-vowels.
880. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mode-
vowels.
1. The personal-endings are appended directly to the mode-vowel,
and are often so closely united with it, that the two do not appear
as separate parts, but are united in one; 6. g. βουλεύσ-ῃς, instead of
βουλεύσ-η-ις, βουλεύ-ῃ, instead of Boviev-s-at,—the 8 and « coalescing
and forming ἡ, and ı being subscribed.
2. The difference between the principal and historical tenses is
here important. The principal tenses, viz. Pres., Perf. and Fut.
form the second and third person Dual with the same ending, -o#;
e. δ. βουλεύ-ε-τον Poviev-s-zoy, βουλεύ-8-σϑὸον Boviev-s-oFov; but
qe
18 VERBS.—PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [8 80.
the historical tenses form the second person Dual with the ending -0»,
the third with the ending -7 7; 6. g.
ἐβουλεύ-ε-τον EßovAev-E-Tnv, ἐβουλεύ-ε-σϑον ἐβουλευ-ἐ-σϑην.
3. The principal tenses form the third person plural active with
the ending -σ ı (») [arising from -» τ t, -y ot], the third person plu-
ral middle with -yz at, the historical active with -», and the mid-
dle with -»z0; 6. g.
βουλεύ-ο-νσι = βουλεύ-ουσι(ν) ἐβούλευ-ο-ν
βουλεύ-ο-νται ἐ-βουλεύ-ο-ντο.
4. The principal tenses in the singular middle end in -μαι, -σαι,
-tat; the historical, in -μῆν, -00, -z0; e. g.
o
PovAev-o-u at ἐβουλευ-ό-μην
βουλεύ-ε-σ αι = βουλεύ-ῃ ἐβουλεύ-ε-σ 0 = ἐβοὐλεύ-ου
βουλεύ-ε-ται ἐβουλεύ-ε-τ 0.
5. The personal endings of the subjunctive of the principal tenses,
are the same as those of the indicative of the same tenses; and the
endings of the optative are the same as those of the indicative of
the historical tenses ; 6. g.
2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. βουλεύε-τον Subj. βουλεύη-τον
βουλεύε-σϑον “4 βουλεύη-σϑον
3PL “ “ βουλείου-σιε(ν) 6 Bovaeiw-o t (v)
βουλεύονται “ βουλεύω-νται
13. * “ βουλείο-μαι “ ἔβουλεύω-μαι
2 “ ( “ βουλεύ-ῃ “ βουλεύ-ῃ
88“ % & βουλεύε-ται ς βουλεύη-ται
2 and 3 Du. “ Impf. ἐβουλεύε-τον, -ἔτην Opt. βουλεύοι-τον, -oi-rn v
ἐβουλεύε-σϑον,-ἐσϑην “ BovAevo-cHov,-oi-0dnv
SPL “ * ἐβούλευο-ν « βουλεύοι-εν
ἐβουλεύο-ν TO “ βουλεύοι-ν ὁ
195. “. «ἐβουλευόμην “ Bovievoi-u ny
2“ «Ὁ « (ἐβουλεύε-σ 0) ἐβουλεύ-ον “ (βουλεύοι-σ 0) βουλεύοι-ο
3 * [ΠῚ “ ἐβουλεύε-το 66 βουλεύοι-τ 0.
Remark. On v ἐφελκυστικόν, see $ 7, 1. (Ὁ).
6. The mode-vowel of the subjunctive of the historical tenses dif-
fers from that of the indicative, merely in being lengthened, viz. ὁ
into ὦ, ¢ and « into 7, and εἰ into y; 6. 3. -
Ind. βουλεύ-ο-μεν Subj. βουλεύ-ω-μεν ; Ind. βουλεύ-ε-σϑε Subj. βουλευ-η-σϑε.
Ind. βουλεῦ-εἰς Subj. βουλεύ-ης.
7. The mode-vowel of the optative is ἐ in connection with the
preceding mode-vowel of the first person singular indicative. (The
pluperfect is an exception, the optative of this taking the mode-
vowel of the present). Thus:
1. Sing. Ind. Imperf. Act.o Opt. oc ἐβούλευ-ο-ν “ βουλεύ-οι-μι
“ Plur. “ Aor.LActa “ αἱ ἐβουλεύσ-α-μεν βουλεῦσ-αι-μεν.
§ 81.} SONJÜGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -ο. 79
881. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -o, ex-
hibited inthe Pure Verb (§77,5) BovAsvo.
PRELIMINARY REMARKS. As pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses
(4 72, Rem.), these tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs
and a liquid verb (rpiß-w, Aein-w, stem AIIL, daiv-w, stem SAN), so as to ex-
hibit a fall conjugation.
In learning’ the table of conjugation, it is to be noted :
(1) That the meaning in English is opposite the Greek forms. All the par-
ticular shades of meaning, however, which belong to the different Modes and
Tenses in connected discourse, cannot be given in the table.
(2) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into their constituent
parts, viz. (a) Personal-ending, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d)
Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f) Augment or Reduplication.
(3) The spaced forms, 6. g. BovAev-erov, βουλεύ-ητον, 8d Pers. Du. Ind.
and Subj. Pres., may call the attention of the learner to the difference between
the historical tenses in the Ind. aud Opt. and the principal tenses.
(4) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are dis-
tinguished by a star (*). The learner should search these out and compare
them together; 6. g. βουλεύσω, 1. S. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. 8. Subj. Aor. I. Act.;
βούλευσαι, 2. 8. Imp. Aor. L Mid., βουλεύσαι, 8. S. Opt. Aor. L Act., βουλεῦ-
σαι, Inf. Aor. I. Act.
(5) The accentuation should be learned with the form. The following gene-
ral rule will suffice for beginners: The accent of the verb is as far from the end as
the final syllable will permit. 'Those forms, whose accentuation deviates from this
rule, are indicated by a cross (1).
(6) When the following paradigm has been EDEN learned in this way,
the pupil may first resolve the verbs occurring in the Greek exercises into their
elements, i. 6. into the personal-ending, mode-vowel, etc., observing the follow-
ing order, viz. βουλεύσω, is (1) of the first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Ἐπὶ,
(5) Act., (6) from the verb βουλεύω, to advise; then he may so translate into
Greek the verbs in the English exercises, as to exhibit the elements of which
the form of the Greek verb must be composed; these elements may be arranged
in the following order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment or Reduplication, (3)
Tense-characteristic, (4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with
Mode-vowel, (7) Personal-ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Perso.
nal-ending. Εἰ g. What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised
himself, using the Aor. of the Pres., BovAet-w, to advise? Answer: The verb-
stem is BovAev-, augment é, thus &ßovAev ; the tense-characteristic of the first
Aor. Mid. is o, thus tense-stem is é-BovAev-o ; the mode-vowel of the first Aor.
Ind. Mid. is a, thus é-BovAev-o-a; the personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing.
of an historical tense of the Mid. is ro, thus ἐ-βουλεύ-σ-α-το.
(7) In order that the memory of the pupil may not be tasked by too many
forms at once, it is best to commit the verb in parts, and in the order in which
the exercises in § 84 follow each other. He may at the same time translate the
exercises from Greek into English, and from English into Greek. After all the
forms have been thoroughly committed in this way, he may turn back to the
tables and repeat all the forms together.
80 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN-w. [§ 81.
ACT
Β καὶ THE
Sas
Tenses. | E48 en Subjunctive
5 ἃ Indicative. of the Principal tenses.
93. Booaes-ee,thow ad pret gy thee open aris
2.1 βουλεί-εις, visest, ουλεύ-ῃς, mayest adın
Present 3, βουλεύ-ει, he, she, it advises, |BovAet-y," he, she, τὲ may adv.
Tense- | Ὁ. 2. | βουλεύ-ετον, ye two advise, ουλεύ-η τον, ye two may ad.
stem : 3. | βουλεύ-ετον, they two advise, βουλεύ-η το v, they two may a.
BovAev- | P. 1. βουλεύ-ομεν, we advise, βουλεύ-ωμεν, we may advise,
2. βουλεύ-ετε," you advise, BovAet-nre, you may adviee,
8. | βουλεύ-ου σι (ν), they advise, ᾿βουλεύ-ωσι(ν), they may adv.
S. 1. | ἐ-βούλευ-ον," I was adussing,
2. | ἐβούλευ-ες, thou wast advising,
Imperfect] 8. | ἐ-βούλευ-ε(ν), he, she, was ad.
Tense- | Ὁ. 2. | 2-PovAev-erov, ye two were adv.
stem: 3.1 ἐ-βουλευ-ἔ τη v, they two were a.
&-BovAev-] P. 1. ἐ-βουλεύ-ομεν, we were advising,
2. ἐ-βουλεύ-ετε, you were advising,
3. ἐ-βούλευ-ον, ἦεν were advising, :
S. 1. | Be-BobAev-x-a, 1 have advised, |Be-BovAeb-x-w, I may have ad.
2. | βε-βούλευ-κ-ας, thou hast adv'd,|Be-BovAet-x-y¢, thou mayest
Perfect I.| 8. | Be-BobAev-x-e(v),"heshest hasal have advised, etc., declined
Tense- | Ὁ. 2. | βε-βουλεύ-κ-ατον, ye two havea.| like the Subj. Pres.
stem: 3. | Be-Bovaet-x-atov, they two
Be- have advised,
βουλευ-κΊ P. 1. | βε-βουλεύ-κ-αμεν, we have adv.
2. | βε-βουλεύ-κ-ατε, you have adv.
8. βε-βουλεύ-κ-ἃ σι (v),they havea
.1.} ἐ-βε-βουλεύ-κ-ειν, J had adv'd,
2. | ἐ-βε-βουλεύ-κ-εις, thou hadst a.
Pluper- 3. | 2-Be-BovAcd-x-et e,she,t had ad.
ect 1. 1 1). 3.} ξ-βε-βουλεύ-κ-ειτον, ye two had
ense- advised,
stem : 3. | ἐ-βε-βουλευ-κ-ε έτη v, they two
&-Be- had advi
BovAev-x-| P. 1. | ἐ-βε-βουλεύ-κ-ειμεν, we had ad.
2. | ἐ-βε-βουλεύ-κ-ειτε, you had ad.
u 3. | ἐ-βε-βουλεῦ-κ-ε o a v,they had a.
Perf. IT. ne-6nv-a,! 7 appear, πε-φήν-ω, ] may appear,
Pipf. II. ἐ-πε-φήν-ειν,53 7 appeared,
S. 1. | ἐ-βούλευ-σ-α, Jadvised, (indef.)|BovAev-o-w," I may advise,
Aor. I 2. | ἐ-βούλευ-σ-ας, thou advisedst, |BovAet-o-ys, thou mayest ad-
ee 3. ἐ-βούλευ-σ-ε(νῚ, he, she, it adv.| vise, etc., declined like the
Tense- ΄ 3 .
stem: | LD: 2 ἐ-βουλεύ-σ-ατον, ye two adırd, Subj. Pres.
Zu 5 3. rises την, they eae ad.
. 1. | ξιβουλεύ-σ-αμεν, we advised,
BOBREDEO: 2. ὁ Booleb-o-are, you advised,
8. [ἐ-βούλευ-σ-αν, they advised,
Aor. I. S. 1. | &-Ain-ov, 1 left, Ain-w, etc., declined like the
di 2.|2-Aım-ec, etc. declined like | Subj. Pres.
Impf. Ind.
Future. | S. 1. | βουλεύ-σ-ω," I shall advise,
BovAev-o- declined like the Indic. Pres.
1 Phe declension of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the let Perf.
2 § §1.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -0. §1
IVE. |
. Moves. _ Participials.
Optative : τῆς
> Le. Subj. of Historical tenses, | I™Perative. | Infn | Partieip.
βουλεύ-ων
9 βούλευ-ε, advise thou, ᾿βουλεύ- βουλεύ-ουσα
BovAev-Erw,lethima.| εἰν, |Bovded-ovt
βουλεύ-ετον, yetwoa] to | 6. βουλεύ-οντος
βουλευ-έτων, let them | advise, | βουλευ-ούσης,
both advise, advising,
βουλεύ-ετε," do ye ad.
BovAev-Erwoav usuallyBovAev-övrwv*, let them a
βουλεύ-οιμε, I might advise,
BovAed-orc, thou mightest advise,
βουλεύ-οι, he, she, τὸ might adv.
βουλεύ-οιτον, ye two might ad.
BovAev-oirnv, they two mug.a.
βουλεύ-οιμεν, we maght advise,
βουλεύ-οιτε, you might advise,
BovAet-o ı εν, they might advise,
βε-βουλευ-κο-ώςϊ
[βε-βούλευ-κ-ε,"} etc4 Be-Bov-|Be-BovAev-x-viat
declined like the] Aev- |Ge-BovAev-x-dct
Imp. Pres.; yet|x-évac,t| G. -«-6ro¢, -x-
only a few Per-|tohave| vias, having
fects, and such as [advised,| advised,
have the meaning
of the Pres., form
an Imperative.
βε-βουλεύ-κ-οιμι, 7 mig. have a.
Be-BovAet-x-o1c, thou maghtest
have advised, etc., declined
| like the Opt. Impf.
πέ-φην-ε, appear thou, | πε-φη- | we-gynv-Oct
we-önv-ouut, ] might appear, vé-vat,t
BovAed-o-atut, I might aduiee, BovAev-o-üc
βουλεύ-σ-αις or -εἰας BobAev-o-ov, advise, | βου- ἰβουλεύ-σ-ἅσα
BovAev-o-aı"t or -ece(v) βουλευ-σ-άτω λεῦ- ἰβουλεῦ-σ-ἄνϊ
βουλεύ-σ-αἰτον βουλεύ-σ-ατον σαι," Ι6.βουλεύ-σ-αντο
βουλευ-σκιαίτην βουλευ-σ-άτων to BovAev-o-aonc,
βουλεύ-σ-αιμεν advise, | having advised,
θουλεύ-σ-αιτε BovAet-o-are
BovAet-c-ateyv or -etay βουλευ-σ-άτωσαν, usually -savrwv"
λίποοιμι, ete., declined like the Ain-e, etc., declined | λὲπ- [λεπ-ών, oüca, övt
Opt. Impf. like the Imp. Pres.| eiv,t |G. ὄντος, οὔσης,
θουλεύ-σοοιμι, I would advise, ovAet-|BovAed-0-@v,
declined like the Opt. Impf. o-eiv, jetc., like Pr. Pt.
$ The deciension of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the Ist Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt,
82 CONSUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBIN -w. [§ 81.
MID
= THE
325 FREE
Tenses. FE Indicati Subjunctive
Ze BETCS ETS: of the Principal tenses.
S. 1.
PovAev-o wat, I deliberate, or βουλεύτωμαι, I may
2. | βουλεύ-η" [am advised, | BovAei-y* |
Present. 8.} Bovaet-e rae Bovaet-n Tat
D. 1. | βουλευ-όμεϑον BovAev-auedov
2. | βονλεύ-εσϑον BovAet-nodov
Tense-stem : 3. | BovAci-e a 3 ov Bovaet-n 09.09
BovAev- P. 1. | BovAev-dueda βουλευ-ώμεϑα
2. | BovAct-eode* βουλεύ-ησϑε
3. | BovAet-ov ras βουλεύωνται
ΓΒ.1. ἐ-βουλευ-όμη v, I nates
2. | ἐ-ςβουλεύ-ου rating,
Imperfect. 3. ἐ-βουλεύ-ετο
2 D. 1. | ἐ-βουλευ-όμεϑον
2. | ἐ-βουλεύ-εσϑον
Tense-stem : 8. | é-Povdev-éo 3 ny
&-BovAev- I Ῥ.Ὶ1.]} ἐ-βουλευ-όμεϑα
2. | ἐ-βουλεύ-εσϑε
3. | ἐ-βουλεύ-οντο
S. 1.] Be-BotAev-u at, I have delibe- | Be-BovAev-uevos ὦ, 1
2. | βε-βούλευ-δαι [rated,| may have deliberated,
Perfect. 8. | βε-βούλευ-ται
D. 1.1 βε-βουλεύ-μεϑον
2. βε-βούλευ-σϑον
Tense-stem: |, 3. | Ge-BotAcv-c 3 ov
Be-Bovdev- | P. 1.] βε-βουλεύ-μεϑα
2. | Be-BovAcv-oFe*
3.1 Be-BobAev-y rat
“8.1. | é-Be- ovAet-unv, I had de-
2. | &E-Be-BovAev-00 |liberated.
Pluperfect. 8. | ἐ-βε-βούλευ-τ o
D. 1. | é- ε-βουλεύ-μεϑον
2. | ἐ-βε-βούλευ-σϑον
Tense-stem : 38. | £-Be-Bovaci-o 3 nv
&-Be-BovAev- | P.1. | ἐ-βε-βυυλεύ-μεϑα
2. é-Je-Joi λευ- σε
3. | ἐ-Ξε-βούλευι Τὸ
5.1. EBouhev-o-d μην, I delibera- | Bovaci-c-w μαι, 7 may
dehberate,
2.1: -βουλεύ-σ-ω [ted,(indefinite) | BovAed-c-y* [
Aorist I. 5 3. | é- ee oe ann like
.1.] ἐ-ξβουλευ-σ-άμεϑον . Bubj.
2. ἐ-βουλεύ-σιασϑον
Tense-stem : 8. | ἐξβουλευ-σιάσϑην
&-BovAev-o- | P.1. | BovAev-o-aueda
2. | 2-BovAev-o-a0de ‘
3. 12-BovAev-o-avro
’ "8.1. ἐπλιπιόμην, I remained, decli- | λέστεωμαι, I may remain,
Aorist II. ned like Ind. Imperf declined like Pres. 8ubj
6. 1. βουλεύ-σεομαι, I shall delibe-
Future. rate, declined like Pres. Ind.
S. 1. βειβουλεύ-σ-ομαι, 7 shall delib-
Put. Perf: | erate, dectined like Pres. Ind.
ee Ύσνν
4812 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -©, as
DLE.
MopEs. Participials.
Optative
i.e.Subj. ofthe Hist. tease.
Imperative. Infin. Particip.
βουλεύ- ἰβουλευ-όμενος
BovAed-ov, deliberate thou, | εἐσϑαι͵) ἰβουλευ-ομένη
βουλευ-ἔσϑω to delibe- ᾿βουλευ-ὄμενον,
deliberati:
|Bovaet εσϑον = | ze
BouAev-ecdwv"
BouAeb-eode” |
BovAev-éoSucay, usually βονλεν éodur*
BovAev-oiunv, I might
Aeb-0 10 [deliderate,
Be-BobAev-co,dehberate t une to |BeBovAev-péve
βε-βουλεύ-σϑω de-|BeBovAev-pé-
la» βούλεν γον, having
βε-βουλεύ-σϑων" :
Be-Povaet-obe*
βε-βουλείεσϑωσαν, usually βε-βουλεύ-σϑων"
e-BovAev-uevog εἴην, I
2
βουλευ-σ-α i pn v,Im βουλεύ- λευσ-άμενο
βουλεύ-σ-α A A βούλευ. σαι" deliberate thou,| σ-ασ-ϑαι, BovAev-o-auevn
Ast-c-arto [rate βουλσυ-σνάσϑω to dekber- βουλευσ-ἄμενο
Boudev-o-aivedov ate, having dehb-
βουλεύ.σ-αἰσϑον βουλεύ-σιασϑον |
\BovAev-c-aiaday BovAev-c-ao8uv™
[Sovret-c-asode Ἱθονλεῦ.σ-ασϑε
1BovAei-o-aıvro βουλευ-σ-άσϑωσαν, usually βουλευ-σ-άσϑων"
λιπ-οίμην, ΤΠ mig’tremain, Aer-od,t -ἔσϑω, declined [Aum-Eodaıt Aum-öuevog, -0-
'| like Opt. Impf. like Pres. Imp. μένη, -όμενον
BovAev-o-olunv,Im. have Bovaev- | BovAev-o-öue-"
deliberated, likeO pt.Impf. σ-εσϑαι | νος, -n, ον
Be-BovAev-| βε-βουλευ-σ-ό-.
βε.βουλευ-σ-οίμην, δὴ α
\Beliberate like Opt. Impf. ὅ-εσϑαι | μενος, -n, -ov.'
$4 §$ REMARKS ON THE PARADIGM.—ATTIC FUTURE. [§§ 82, 88.
5
ned
Tenses. age
®
Zz Pa
eee En
PAS
: THs
: ; Subjunctive
Indicative. of the Principal tensos.
ἐ-βουλεύ-ϑ.ην, I was advised, | BovAev-d-6, 1 might have
ἐ-βουλεύ-ϑ-ης βουλευ-ϑ-ῇς [been advised,
&-BovAed-d-n βουλευ-ϑ-ῇ
ἐ-βουλεύ-ϑ-ητον βουλευ-ϑ-ῆτον
ἐ-βουλευ-ϑιήτην βουλευ-ϑ-ῆτον
&-BovAed-I-nuev BovAev-d-öuev
&-BovAsd-I-nr7e BovAev-I-nre#
&-BovAed-9-n 0av βουλευ-ϑ-ὦ σι (v)
βουλευ-ϑή-σ-ομαι, ἴ shall be adv.
βουλευ-ϑή-σ-ῃ, etc., declined
like the Ind. Pres. Mid.
é-rpiB-nv, I was rubbed, τριβ-ῶ, I may have been rub’d,
ἐτρίβ-ης, ete., declined like the | rpıß-äs,etc.‚declined like the
first Aor. Ind. Pass. first Aor. Suoj. Pass.
rpıß-n-0-n, etc., declined like
the first Fut. Ind. Pass.
Verbal Adjectives: βουλευ-τός, -7, -όν,
§82. Remarks on the Paradigm.
1. In the first person Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use besides the form in
«εἰν, a form in -7; 6. g. ἐβεβουλεύκ-η, instead of -«-eıw. The mode-vowel εἰ
in the third Pers. Pl. is commonly shortened into e; ἐθεβουλεύ-κ-ε-σαν, instead
of ἐβεβουλεύ-κ-ει-σαν.
2. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers
besides the form in -9, use another in -e:; 6. g. βουλεύ-ῃ and βουλεῦ-ει, Bav-
λεύσ-ῃ and -et, BeßovAevo-y and -et, βουλευϑήσ-ῃ and -eı, τριβῆσ-ῃ and -~et.
This last form in -eı is exclusively used in the following forms of the three
verbs, viz.
βούλομαι, I wish, βούλει, thou wishest (but Hat βούλῃ)
οἴομαι, I think, οἴει, thou thinkest (but Subj. eiy)
ὄψομαι, I shall see. ὄψ ει, thou wilt see.
3. The abbreviated forms of the third Pers. Pl. Imp. Act. have in all tenses
except the Perf., the same form as the Gen. Pl. of participles of the respective
tenses. The pupil should seek out these forms.
§83. Remarks on the Formation ofthe Attie Future.
1. When in the Fut. Act. and Mid. of verbs in -ow, -σομαι, from stems of two
or more syllables, the short vowels ä, e, i, precede o, certain verbs, instead of
the regular form, have another, which, after dropping o, takes the circumflexed
ending -@, -oüuaı, and because it was frequently used by the Attic writers, it is
called the Attic Future; 6. g. ἐλάω (usually ἐλαύνω)͵ to drive, ἐλά-σ-ω, Fat. Att.
ἐλῶ, -ᾧς, -G, -Grov, -Öuev, -Gte, -Got(v); τελέω, to finish, reAé-o-w, Fut Att
§ 84.] ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. 85
SIVE.
_Mopss. Participials.
Optative : ns
1. 8. Subj. of the Hist. tenses. Imperative. Infin. | Participle.
BovAsv-d-einv, I might be Bovdev-| BovAev-3-eict
BovAev-9-eing [advised, [βουλεύ-ϑ-ητι, be thou ad- | 9-7vat, |BovAev-d-eloat
BovAev-d-ein BovAev-3-7Tw [vised, | to bead-|BovAev-d-Evt
βουλευ-ϑ-είητον BovAet-3-nrov vised, Genitive :
BovaAev-0-e 19 Tq βουλευ-ϑ-ήτων βουλευ-ϑ-έντος
βουλευ-ϑ.-είημεν and -εῖμεν βουλευ-ϑ-είσης,
βουλευ-ϑ-είητε and -eire ἰβουλεύ-ϑ-ητεῖ having
BovAev-d-ciev βουλευ-ϑ-ήτωσαν advised,
βουλευ-ϑη-σ-οίμην, 7 should Bovaev-| βουλευ-ϑη-σ-ό-
be advised, etc., declined ϑή-σε-)] μενος, -n, τον
like the Impf. Opt. Mid. ovat
rpıß-einv, I might be rubbed, τριβ- | Tpıß-eis,t ete.,
τριβ-είης, etc. declined like |rpi8-79:,-77Tu,etc.,decl’d | vac | declined like L
the first Aor. Opt. Pass. | like first Aor.Imp.Pass. Aor.Part.Pass.
| τριβ-η-σ-οίμην, I should be TpiBn- Ἰτριβ-η-σ-όμενος
| rubbed, etc., declined like σεσϑαι τη, -ov
| the first Fut. Opt. Pass.
: βουλευ-τέος, -τέα, -TEov, to be advised.
τελῶ, -ei¢, -ei, -eiTov, -οὔμεν, -eire, -οὔσι(ν) ; τελέεσ-ομαι (τελέομαι), τελοῦμαι,
-ei, -eiTat, etc.; κομίζω, to carry, Fut. κομΐσω, Fut. Att. κομιῶ, -ἐεῖς, -εεῖ, -uelrov,
-Lodpey, -ιεἴτε, -ιοῦσι(ν) ; κομιοῦμαι, -ιεῖ, -cetrat, -«ιοὔμεϑον, ete.
2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf. and Part., never in the
‘Opt. thus τελῶ, τελεῖν, τελῶν ; but τελέσοιμι. The verbs which have this
form are the following: (a) 2A ἄ (éAatvw), to drive, rei é 0, to finish, κα λ ἕω,
to call, and, though seldom, 44é, to grind ;—(b) all polysyllables in -ἔζω ;—
(c) a few verbs in -ἀ ζω, very generally βιβάζω ;—(d) of verbs in -wı, all in
.«ἀννθμι and dugtévyvd pt, to clothe (ἀμφιέσω, ἀμφιῶ, -ıeic, etc.). Excep-
tions to this form of the Fut. are found but seldom in the Attic dialect.
§ 84. Accentuation of the Verb.
1. Parwany Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word towards
the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits; 6. g. BobAeve, Bov-
λεύομαι, παῦε, τύπτε, βούλευσον, παῦσον, τύψον, but βουλεύεις, βουλεύειν.
Rem. 1. The diphthong -«s at the end of a word, is considered short in re-
spect to accent; e.g. βουλεύομαι. The Opt. ending -az, however, is considered
long; 6. g. PovAevoaı, third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Active. The Opt. end-
ing -0: is also long; 6. g. ἐκλείποι.
| 2. The same law holds good in composition, yet with this limitation, that the
accent cannot go back beyond that syllable of the word prefixed, which before composi-
tion had the accent; nor beyond the first two words forming the compound, neither be-
yond an existing augment ; 6. g.
φέρε πρόςφερε λεῖπε ἀπόλειπε δῶμεν ἔνδωμεν
φεῦγε ἔκφευγε oida σύνοιδα ἦμαι κάϑημαι;
8
88 ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. [5 8%
but mpogeixov like εἶχον, παρέσχον like ἔσχον, ἐξῆγον like ἦγον, προζῆκον like
ἧκον, ἀπεῖργον like εἶργον (not πρόςειχον, πάρεσχον, etc.), but Imp. ἀπειργε.
Exceptions to the Primary Law.
3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms:
(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut.
Sing of the Part. of the same tense as acute; 6. g. λιπεῖν, λιπών, -öv, and in
the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, εἰπέ, ἐλϑέ, εὑρέ,
λαβέ and ἰδέ (but in composition, ἄπειπε, ἀπόλαβε, ἄπελϑε, eicıde).
- (b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex; 6. g. λαβοῦ, God, from
τίϑημι.
Rem. 2. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. Act.
draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law; 6. g. ἔκβαλε,
ἔξελϑε, Exdog, Exdore, ἀπόδος, ἀπόδοτε, μετάδος, μετάδοτε (but not ümodos, μέ-
ταδος, see No. 2), but ἐκβαλεῖν, ἐκβαλών, ἐκλιπεῖν, ἐξελϑών, etc. But in the
‚Imp. Sing. second Aor.. Mid. of verbs in -@, the circumflex remains on the ulti-
mate in compounds also; e. g. ἐκβαλοῦ, ἀφικοῦ, ἐκλεποῦ, ἐπιλαϑοῦ, ἀφελοῦ,
éveveyxod ; so in verbs in -μέ, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla-
bic preposition; 6. g. προδοῦ, ἐνθοῦ, ἀφοῦ ; yet the accent is drawn back, when
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition; 6. g. ἀπόδου, κατάϑου,
ἀπόϑου ; but in the Dual and Pi. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all
cases drawn back; 6. g. ἐκβάλεσϑε, ἀπολάβεσϑε, πρόδοσθϑε, ἔνϑεσϑε, ἄφεσϑε,
κατάϑεσθϑε.
(c) The acate stands on the ultimate in all participles in -¢ (Gen. -τος), con-
sequently in all active participles of verbs in -wı, as well as in those of the first
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass. of all verbs; 6. g. βεβου-
λευκώς, Gen. -ὅτος, πεφηνώς, Gen. -droc, βουλευϑεῖς, Gen. -Evroc, rureic, Gen.
«ὄντος, ἱστάς, Gen. -avroc, τιϑεῖίς, Gen. -évroc, διδούς, Gen. -Övroc, δεικνύς, Gen.
εὔντος, διαστάς, ἐκϑεῖς, προδούς, Gen. dtacravroc, ἐκϑέντος, προδόντος.
Rem. 3. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep-
tion ; 6. g. maudevodg, Gen. παιδεύσαντος.
(d) In the Sing. of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass. as circumflex; e. g.
βουλευϑῶ, τριβῶ.
4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms:
(a) In the Inf. Perf. Mid. or Pass., first Aor. Act. and second Aor. Mid.; also
in all infinitives in -ναί, hence in all active infinitives of verbs in -μέ, as well as
in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass. and of the Perf. Act. of all verbs; e. g.
τετύφϑαι, βεβουλεῦσϑαι, τετιμῆσϑαι, πεφιλῆσϑαι, μεμισϑῶσϑαι :---φυλάξαε,
"βουλεῦσαι, τιμῆσαι, φιλῆσαι, μισϑῶσαι :----λιπέσϑαι, ἐκϑέσϑαι, διαδόσϑαι .----σ-
τάναι, τιϑέναι, διδόναι, δεικνύναι, στῆναι, ἐκστῆναι, ϑεῖναι, ἐκϑεῖναι, δοῦναε,
μεταδοῦναι :---βουλευϑῆναι, τριβῆναι ;---βεβουλευκέναι, λελοιπέναι.
(Ὁ) In all Optatives in -o: and -α ἐ, see Rem. 1.
Rem. 4. The three similar forms, viz. the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. first Aor.
Mid. and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist of three
or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished from one
another by the accent, in the following manuer:
8.84.1 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 87
Inf. first Aor. Act. βουλεῦσαι, Imp. first Aor. Mid. βούλευσαι,
ποιῆσαι ποίησαι
Opt. first Aor. Act. βουλεύσαι
ποιῆσαι.
But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. first
Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act.; e. g. φυ-
λάξαι; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. φύλαξαι.
(c) In the Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass.; 6. g. βεβουλευμένος, «μένη, «μένον, -τε-
τιμημένος, πεφιλημένος.
XXXVI. Vocabulary.
(a) Present and Imperfect Active.
"Ayopevw, to say. ἕτερος, -ἃ, -ov, alter, the dre, when.
Gretpoc, -ov, (adv. drei- other (of two), opposite, οὕτως, (bef. cons. οὕτω,) so,
pwc), το. gen. unac- different. thus.
quainted with, unskill- ἵνα, in order that. παιδεία, -ac, ἡ, education,
ed in. κάλλος, -e0¢ = -ovc, τό, instruction.
ἀπο-τρέπω, to turn away, beauty. πλησιάζω, to approach.
avert. κεύϑω, to conceal. πρόνοια, -as, 7, foresight,
ἀπο-φεύγω, to flee away. μουσική (τέχνη understood) _ precaution.
ἄροτρον, -ov, τό, ἃ plough. -ἧς, ἦ, every art under προς-πίπτω, (in therd pers.
yevvaiws, nobly, bravely. the patronage of the sing.), it falls out, it oc-
δεινός, -7, -6v, fearful, ter- | Muses,especially music. curs, it presents itself.
rible, dangerous; τὸ ὅταν, w.subj., when, when- στασιάζω, to live at va-
δεινόν, the danger. ever. riance with.
Δύο ὁδοὶ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν Gyerov. Böe τὸ ἄροτρον dyerov. Xaipuuev, ὦ παῖ-
des. ‘Qe ἡδὺ κάλλος, ὅταν ἔχῃ νοῦν σώφρονα. Ol πολῖται τοὺς νόμους φνλατ-
τόντων. "Eraipos ἑταίρου φροντιζέτω. Πατήρ τε καὶ μήτηρ πρόνοιαν ἐχέτων
τῆς τῶν τέκνων παιδείας. Ὁ γραμμάτων ἄπειρος ob βλέπει βλέπων. Τὰς προς-
πιπτούσας τύχας γενναίως φέρε. ‘O παῖς τῷ πατρὲ ῥόδον φέρει, ἵνα χαίρῃ. Ὁ
παῖς τῷ πατρὶ ῥόδον ἔφερεν, Iva χαίροι. Σωκράτης ὥςπερ ἐγίγνωσκεν, οὕτως
ἔλεγεν. Ὅτε οἱ "EAAnvec ἐπλησίαζον, οἱ βάρβαροι ἀπέφευγον. Θεμιστοκλῆς
καὶ ᾿Αριστείδης ποτε ἐστασιαζέτην. Λακεδαιμόνιοι μουσικῆς ἀπείρως εἶχον.
᾿Αποτρέποιτε, ὦ ϑεοί, τὸ δεινὸν ag’ ἡμῶν. Μὴ ἕτερον κεύϑοις καρδίᾳ νοῦν,
ἄλλα ἀγυρεύων.
Two horses drawing (driving) the chariot, hasten. Two women sing. Let
us flee from vice. The boys study literature diligently, that their parents may
rejoice. The boys studied literature very diligently, that their parents might
rejoice. Let the citizen defend the laws. Let friends care for friends. Two
horses, drawing the chariot, hastened. Two women sang. Those who are un-
acquainted with literature do not see, when they see. Bear nobly the danger
which presents itself (part.), O citizens! You speak (so) as you think. We
Wore unarguainted with music. May the gods avert the danger from us!
88 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. [8 84,
XXXVIL Vocabulary.
(b) First Perfect and Pluperfect Active.
Γυναικεῖος, -ä, -ov, be- xata-Atw, to loosen, de- about to do, delay; τὸ -
longing to women, wo- stroy, dissolve, μέλλον, the future.
‘manly. κυριεύω, w. gen. to be or πολέμιος, -ü, -ov, hostile, ὁ
ἐν-δύω, to go into, put on. become master of, con- πολέμιος, the enemy.
ἐπι-διώκω, to pursue. quer, obtain. προφητεύω, to prophesy.
κατα-δύω, to dip, go down, μάντις, -ewg, ὁ, a seer, a φύω, to bring forth. Perf.
set, conceal oneself. prophet. to have become, be.
μέλλω, to intend or be
Οἱ πολέμιοι ἑκατὸν πολίτας πεφονεύκασιν. Φερεκύδης ἔλεγε, μηδενὶ Seo re-
ϑυκέναι. Νέος πεφυκὼς πολλὰ χρηστὰ μάνϑανε. Ὁ μάντις τὰ μέλλοντα κα-
Ade πεπροφήτευκεν. Ta τέκνα εὖ πεπαίδευκας. Μήδεια τὰ τέκνα πεφονευκυῖα
ἔχαιρεν. Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι Πλαταιὰς κατελελύκεσαν. Σαρδανάπᾶλος στολὴν
γυναικείαν ἐνεδεδύκει. “Ore ἥλιος κατεδεδύκει, οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπλησίαζον. ’ARE-
£avöpos ἐπιδιώκων Δαρεῖον, τὸν τῶν Περσῶν βασιλέα, πολλῶν χρημάτων ἐκεκυ-
ριεύκει.
The sun has gone down (is set). The Lacedaemonians have destroyed Pla-
taea. We admired the woman, who had put on (having put on) a purple robe.
Diodorus (Διόδωρος) says that Alexander (acc. τὸ. inf.), pursuing Darius, ob-
tained many treasures. The enemics had killed 400 soldiers. Thy friend
had brought up his (the) children well.
XXXVI. Vocabulary.
(e) First Future and Aorist Active.
᾿Αβλάβεια, -ac, 7, inno- ἔκγονος, -ov, descendant, κινδυνεύω, to incur dan-
cence. descended from. ger, run ἃ risk.
ἄμφω, both, ambo. ἐλπίζω, to hope, expect. μετά, w.gen., with; w. ace.,
ἄνϑω, to complete, finish. ἐπαγγέλλω, to announce. after.
δάκρῦον, -ov, τό, a tear. ἐπι-βουλεύω, w. dat., to μηνίω, w. dat. to be angry
δια-λύω, to dissolve, sepa- plot against. with.
rate. ἔσχατος, -n, -ov (superl of ὅτι, that, because.
δικάζω, to judge. ἐξ), outermost, utmost, πρὶν ἄν, w. subj., before,
δικαστής, -οὔ, ὁ, a judge, last. ere, until.
a magistrate. ἱκετεύω, to ask, suppli- φυτεύω, to plant.
elde, w. opt., O that. cate, entreat.
Ol στρατιῶται τὴν πόλιν ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων ἀπολύσουσιν. Ὁ χρηστὸς ἄν.-
ϑρωπος καὶ τοῖς ἐκγόνοις φυτεύσεις. "EAmilouev πάντα εὖ ἀνύσειν. Ὁ dyye
λος ἐπήγγελλε τοῖς πολίταις, ὅτι οἱ πολέμιοι τῷ στρατεύματι ἐπιβουλεύσοιεν.
᾿λχιλλεὺς ᾿Αγαμέμνονι ἐμῆνισεν. Οἱ Ἕλληνες ἀνδρείᾳ πολλὰ ἔσχυσαν. Ὁ Σω-
κράτης οὐχ ἱκέτευσε τοὺς δικαστὰς μετὰ πολλῶν δακρύων, ἀλλὰ πιστεύσας τῇ
ἑαυτοῦ ἀβλαβείᾳ ἐκινδύνευσε τὸν ἔσχατον κίνδυνον. Τὰς τῶν φαύλων συνηϑοΐας
1 also.
Pe ee ee ee.
8.84.1 OORSUGATION OF THE ¥ERB. 99.
ὀλίγος χρόνος διέλυσεν. TIpiv ἂν ἀμφοῖν μῦϑον ἀκούσφς," μὴ δίκαζε. Οἱ Λακε-
δαιμόνιοι Πλαταιὰς κατέλυσαν. Τίς ἂν πιστεῦσαι (πιστεύσειε) ψεύστῃ; Elde
πάντα καλῶς ἀνύσαιμε. ᾿Ακούσαις (ἀκούσειάς) μου, ὦ φίλε. Ὁ ἄγγελος ἐπήγο
γελλεν, ὅτι οἱ πολέμιοι τῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπιβουλεύσαιεν (ἐπιβουλεύσειαν). "Ακου-
σόν μου, ὦ φίλε. Ἕταϊρος ἑταίρῳ πιστευσάτω. Τὴν πόλιν λέγουσι μέγαν κίν-
δυνον κινδυνεῦσαι.
RuLE or Syntax. The particle dy denotes a condition either
expressed or to be supplied.
You will free the town from the enemies. Good men will plant also for
their descendants. He said, that the town would incur great danger. Achil-
les and Agamemnon were angry with (dual) one another. We entreated the
magistrates with many tears. Achilles killed Hector ("Extup, -opog). Judge
not (pl.) before you have heard the account of both. Thou canst not trust (opi.
w. ἄν) a liar. May we complete (merely the opt.) everything well. O that you,
would hear me, O friends! May the soldiers free us from the enemies. Hear
me, O friends! Friends should trust (imp.) friends. To command (aor.) is
easier than to do. Medea rejoiced in having murdered (aor. part.) her children.
XXXIX. Vocabulary.
(d) Present and Imperfect Middle or Passive.
᾿Αδελφός, -oü, 6,a brother. Epyalopac, to work. mEvouat, to be poor.
ἀκο-δέχομαι, to receive, ἔρχομαι, to go, come. πράττω, to do, to act; 10.
admit, approve of. ἥσυχος, quiet, quietly. adv., to fare.
αὐλός, -oü, ὁ, a fute. λανϑάνω, w. acc. to be στρατεύω, to make an ex-
ἐάν = ἦν, or ἄν, if, το. subj. concealed from, escape pedition; Mid. to make
ἐγχώριος, -ov, and ἐγχώς. το notice of ; lateo, Mid, war, march (in a hos-
ptos, -α, -ov, native, of to forget. [dle. tile manner).
the country. μέσος, middle, in the mid- ψεύδομαι, to lie.
Δύο ἄνδρε uaxeodov. Tevvalus payopeda® περὶ τῆς πατρίδος. ᾿Αναγκαῖόν
ἐστι τὸν υἱὸν πείϑεσϑαι τῷ πατρέ. Πολλοὶ dyadoi πένονται. Νόμοις τοῖς ἐγ-
χωρίοις ἔπεσϑαι καλόν ἐστιν. Μὴ ἀποδέχου τῶν φέλων τοὺς πρὸς τὰ φαῦλά σοι
χαριζομένους. Ἕκαστος hovxos μέσην τὴν ὁδὸν ἐρχέσϑω. Οἱ πολῖται τοῖς
νόμοις πειϑέσϑων. TO ἀδελφώ μοι Ereodov. El βούλει καλῶς πράττειν,
ἐργάζουι "Edw βούλῳ καλῶς πράττειν, ἐργάζον. Ψευδόμενος οὐδεὶς Aavdä-
ve. πολὺν χρόνον. Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι μετ᾽ αὐλῶν ἐστρατεύοντο. Eide πάντες
ἄνευ δργῆς βουλεύοιντο. Ato καλὼ ἵππω εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἠλαυνέσϑην. "Ἐὰν
πένῃ, ὀλίγοι φίλοι.
The magistrate should consult without anger. He who goes (part.) the mid-
die path, goes safest. Ἔπο beautiful horses are driven to the town. If (ἐάν)
warriors fight courageously, they are admired. We will not lie, but always
speak the truth. Sons should obey their fathers. With God and fate (aloa)
it is terrible to contend. Two men contended. The soldiers fonght courage
ously. © that every one would consult without anger! O that thou wouldat
always worship the Deity !
1 § 158, 5. (b). * § 183, (a), (1).
: 8*
90 COMJUGATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84.
XL. Vocabulary.
(e) Perfect and Piuperfect Middle or Passive.
*Axpa, -ας, 4, a summit, ἐμφυτεύω, to implant. Aéyouat, dicor, to be said.
a castle. löpvw, to build, found. λῃστής, -ov, ὁ, a robber.
αὑτονομία,-ας, ἡ, freedom, κατα-κλείω, to shut, lock συνθήκη, -ns, 7, & treaty.
independentlegislation. up:
Oi λῃσταὶ πεφόνευνται. Δύο ἀδελφὼ ὑπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ διδασκάλου menaidev-
odov. Ἢ βασιλεία ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου λέλυται. Τοῖς ϑεοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων
πολλοὶ ved ἴδρυνται. Ἢ ϑύρα κεκλείσϑω. Πρὸ τοῦ ἔργου εὖ βεβούλευσο.
Häow ἀνθρώποις ἐμπεφυτευμένη ἐστὶν ἐπιϑυμία τῆς αὐτονομίας. Οἱ λῃσταὶ
πεφονεύσϑων. Ol πολέμιοι εἰς τὴν ἄκραν κατακεκλεῖσϑαι λέγονται. Ἐενοφῶν-
τὸς υἱώ, Τρύλλος καὶ Διόδωρος, ἐπεπαιδεύσϑην ἐν Σπάρτῃ. Αἱ συνθῆκαι ὑπὸ
τῶν βαρβάρων ἐλέλυντο.
The robber has been murdered. The children of the friend have been well
brought up. The doors are said to have been shut. Before the work, you have
deliberated well. Good and bad desires have been implanted in men. The
treaties are said to have been violated by the barbarians. The two children
have been brought up by the same teacher. The royal authority had been abol-
tshed by the people.
XLL Vocabulary.
{f) Future and first Aor. Mid., and Fut. Perf. Mid. or Pass.
᾿Ανα-παύω, to cause to ἐπιτηδεύω, to manage, πορεύω, to lead forward;
rest; Mid. to rest, re- transact with diligence, Mid. to go, march, set
cover oneself. practise. out (w. pass. aorist).
γεύω (τινά τινος), to give πολιτεία, -ας, 7, the state, πύλη, -ης, 7, a gate (usw
any one a taste of any- the administration. ally in the plural).
thing; mid. w. gen., to
taste, enjoy.
Ol πολέμιοι ἐπὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν πόλεν στρατεύσονται. Περὶ τῆς τῶν πολιτῶν
σωτηρίας βουλευσόμεϑα. ὋὉ πατήρ μοι ἔλεγεν, ὅτι πορεύσοιτο. Οἱ Ἕλληνες
ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας ἐστρατεύσαντο. ᾿Αναπαυσώμεϑα;, ὦ φίλοι. Πρὸ τοῦ ἔργον
εὖ βούλευσαι. Πάντες τιμῆς γεύσασϑαι βούλονται. ‘O πατὴρ ἀναπαυσάμενος
πορεύσεται. Αἱ πύλαι τῆς νυκτὸς κεκλείσονται. "Edy τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ τὴν πὸ-
λιτείαν ἐπιτηδεύῃ, αὐτὴ εὖ βεβουλεύσεται.
You will deliberate about the safety of the citizens. The messenger an-
nounced (ἐπαγγέλλω), that the enemies would march against our town. The
general enjoyed a great honor. If (ἐάν, w. subj.) the enemies shall have been
led (xapetu, subj. aor.) against us, the gates of the town will remain (have been)
closed. Before the work, deliberate well (pl.). In (ἐν) such a danger it is not
easy to deliberate (aor.). If you have deliberated, (aor. particsp.) begin the work.
1 § 153, (a), (1). 2 § 158, δ. (a). 3 § 158, 4.
4. 88.] VERBS.-——-AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 94
ὅν ν XLIL Vocabulary.
(g) First Aorist and first Future Passive.
Δημοκρατία, -ac, ἡ, the μῇ after verbs of fear,w. in ne, to be translated
rule of the people, de- subj. if a pres. perf.or by ‘that’ or ‘lest.’
mocracy. fat. goes before; w. opt., πολέμιος, -G, «ον, hostile,
ἐπι-φέρω, to bring upon; if an historical tense of the enemy.
πόλεμόν τινι, bellum in- goes before; asthe Lat- τύραννος -ov, ὁ, 8 sove-
Sere. reign, a tyrant.
Ὁ Ἕκτωρ ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αχιλλέως ἐφονεύϑη. Τὼ ἀδελφὼ ὑπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ διδασκά-
λον ἐπαιδευϑήτην. Πολλαὶ δημοκρατίαι ὑπὸ τῶν τυράννων κατελύϑησαν. Μέ-
yas φόβος τοὺς πολίτας ἔχει, μὴ αἱ συνθῆκαι ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων λυϑῶσιν. Elde
πάντες νεανίαι καλῶς παιδευϑεῖεν. Φονεύϑητι, ὦ κακοῦργε. Οἱ στρατιῶται
εἰς τὴν πολεμίαν γῆν πορευϑῆναι λέγονται. Οἱ πολέμιοι, τῶν συνθηκῶν Av-
ϑεισῶν,1 ἡμῖν πόλεμον ἐπιφέρουσιν. Ὁ λφστὴς φονευϑήσεται.
You were both educated by the same teacher. We were freed (ἀπολύω) from
a great danger. I fear much (a great fear holds me), that the friend, who set
off (partictp.) six days ago, has been murdered by robbers. I feared much, thas
you had been murdered by robbers. The two robbers are said to be killed.
The youth is said to be well brought up. The treaties are said to have been
violated by the enemies. Well brought up youths are esteemed by all. The
robbers will be killed.
§ 85. A more particular view of the Augment and
Reduplication.
After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication ($ 77,
8 and 4), it is necessary to treat them more particularly.
As has been already seen, all the historical tenses, viz. the Impf.,
Plup. and Aor., take the augment, but retain it only in the Indica-
tive. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal.
(a) Syllabic Augment.
1. The syl/abic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem be-
gins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing & to the stem, in the
Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication, in the Pluperfect. In
this way, the verb is increased by one syllable; e. g. βουλεύω, Impf.
#-Bovievor, Aor. ἐ-βούλευσα, Plup. ἐ-βε-βουλεύκειφ.
2. If the stem begins with o, this letter is doubled when the aug-
ment is prefixed (8 8, 12); 6. g. dinzw, to throw, Impf. ἔῤῥιπτον,
Aor, ἔῤῥεψα.
! Gen. absolute, like the Abl. absolute in Latin.
92 VERBS.-—TENPORAL AUGEENT. [88 86, 87:
Rem. 1. The three verbs BosAouas, te will, δύναμαι, to be able, and
μέλλω, to be about to do, among the Attic writers take ἡ, instead of e, for the
augment; still this is found more with the later Attic writers, than with the
earlier; ὁ. g. Aor. ἐβουλήϑην and ἠβουλήϑην ; Impf. ἐδυνάμην and ἠδυνάμην,
Aor. ἐδυνήϑην and ὑδυνήϑην (but always ἐδυνάσϑην); Impf ἔμελλον and
ἤμελλον (the Aor. is very seldom ἠμέλλησα).
Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers the angment ¢ is often omitted in the Plup,
of compounds, for example, when the preposition ends with a vowel; in sim-
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided, precedes; e. g. ἀναβεβήκει, κατα-
dedpaunkeoav.
§ 86. (b) Temporal Augment.
The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins
with a vowel, and consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel; in
this way the quantity of the syllable is increased ;-
a becomes 7, 6. g. "ἄγω Impf. ἦγον Perf. ἦχα Plup. i has |
a, N, ἐλπίζω ἤλπιζον ἤλπικα “ ἠλπίκειν
Σ “ I, “ πκετείω ** ‘“Ixérevov “ ‘txérevxa “ "'"ἱκετεύκειν
o “& 0, * ὁμιλω * ὧμίῖλουν “ ὠμίληκα “ ὡὠμίληπκειν
δ “ 0, “ βρίω “ "Bol “ " a “ Ὡβρίκειν
αἱ “ % “ αἱρέω “ Gnovv és gonna 66 ῥρήκειν
αν “: qv, “ αὐλέω “. ηὔλουμν ηχηὔληκα “5 ηὐλήκειν
o “ ot οἰκτίζῳωαοω. “ ᾧκτιζον ““ ᾧκτια “ κτίκειν. -
Remarx. Verbs which begin with 7, J, 0, @, ov and εἰ, do not admit the aug-
ment; e.g.7 TT Gop" at, to be overcome, Impf. ἡττώμην, Perf. ἧττημαι, Plup. ἡττή-
μην ; 'Imöw, to press, Aor. "inwoa; ‘0 tv 6, to lull to sleep, Aor. “ὕπνωσα ; öde
λέω, to benefit, Impf. ὠφέλουν ; ob Tale, to wound, Impf. οὕταζον ; εἴκω, to
geld, Impf. εἶκον, Aor. elfa; ei xa ζω, to liken, is an exception, which among
the Attic writers, though seldom, is angmented ; 6. g. einalov, seldom ἤκαζον,
elxaca, seldom yxaca, elxacuat, seldom ἤκασμαι. Also those verbs whose stem
begins with ev, usually take no augment; 6. g. δὔχομαι, to supplicate, εὐχόμην,
more rarely ηὐχόμην, but Perf. ηὗγμαι, not ebypat; εὑρίσκω, to find, in good
prose, always omits the augment.
§87. Remarks on the Augment.
1. Verbs beginning with & followed by a vowel, have ἃ instead of 7; but
those beginning with 4, av and oc followed by a vowel, do not admit the aug-
ment; 6. g. ’étw, to perceive (poetic), Impf. "aiov; 'andilouaı, te be die
gusted with, Impf. ᾿δηδιζόμην; ataive, to dry, Impf. αὔαινον ; οἱακίζω, ὦ
steer, Impf. oiaxıLov ; also ἀνάλίσκω, to destroy, although no vowel follows ἃ, has
ἀνάλωσα, ἀνάλωκα, as well a8 ἀνήλωσα, ἀνήλωκα. But οἶομαι, to believe, always
takes the augment; 6. g. φόμην.
2. Some verbs, also, beginning with οἱ followed by a consonant, do not take
the augment; 6. g.olxoupé.w, to guard the house, Aor. olkovpnoa.
8. The eleven following verbs, beginning with e, have εἰ instead of 7, for the
augment, viz. 24, to permit, Impf. εἴων, Aor. elaca; §0i¢ a, to accustom, (to
which belongs also εἴωθα, to be accustomed); ε σά μην, Aor. (stem ‘EA), I es
§ 88.] VERBS.—-REDUPLICATION. 98
tablished, founded; ἑλίσσω, to wind; ἔλκω, to draw; Aor. elAxica (stem
‘EAKY); elAov, to take, Aor. (stem 'EA) of aipéw; Exopat, to follow; &p-
γάζομαι, to work; ἕρπω, ép wile, to creep, to go; ἑστιάω, to entertain;
ἔχω, to have.
4. The following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, augment :
&yv0 1, to break, Aor. Eaéga, etc.
ἁλίσκομαι, capior, Perf. ἑάλωκα and fAexa. -
59€ w, to push, ἐώϑουν, etc.
Ovéopat, to buy, Impf. ἐωνούμην, Perf. ἐώνημαι.
δ. The verb ἑορτά ζω, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second
syllable, Impf. &öprafuv. The same is true of the following forms of the Plu-
EIKQ, second Perf. ἔοικα, 7 am like, Plup. &öxeıv.
- ἔλπομαι, to hope, second Perf. ἔολπα, I hope, Plup. ἐώλπεεν.
EPTQ, to do, second Perf. opya, Plup. ἐώργε εν.
6. The three following verbs take the temporal and ie augment at the
same time:
ὁράω, to see, Impf. ἑώρων, Perf. ἑώρακα, éapapac.
ἀνοίγω, to open, Impf. ἀνέῳγον, Aor. ἀνέῳξα (Inf. ἀνοῖξαι), ete.
ἁλίσκομαι, to be taken, Aor. ἑἅλων (Inf. ἁλῶναι, &) and ἥλων.
§ 88. Reduplication.
1. Reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the
stem with 8. It denotes a completed action, and hence is prefixed
to the Perf., 6. g. A&-Avxa, I have loosed; to the Fut. Perf., e. g.
κε-κοσμήσομαι, 1 shall be adorned, from κοσμέω ; and to the Plup.,
@ Which as a historical tense, takes also the augment & before the re-
duplication ; 6. g. &-Be-BovAsvxew. It remains in all the modes, as
well as in the Inf. and Part. |
2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem begins
with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid; verbs beginning
with 9, yy, yA, PA, * (except βέβλαφα, βέβλαμμαι from βλάπτω, to
injure, βεβλασφήμηκα from βλασφημέω, to blaspheme, βεβλάστηκα
and ἐβλάστηκα from βλασεάνω, to sprout,) are exceptions, inasmuch
as they take only the simple augment; e. g.
Ava, to loose, | Perf. λέ-λυκα Plup. ἐ-λε-λύκειν
ϑύω, to sacri re-Iura ($ 8, 10.) 6 Σᾷἐ-τε-ϑύκειν
φυτεύω, to plant, a πε-φύτευκα ($ 8, 10.) ‘6 ἐἐ- πε-φυτεύκειν
χορεύω, to dance, “ xe-xöpevra ($ 8, 10.) 6 ἐ-κε-χορεύκειν
γράφω, to write, “ yé-ypaga “ὁ b-ye-ypagety
κλίνω, to bend, “ κέ-κλικα “ ἠ-κε-κλίκειν
'κρίνω, to judge, “ κέ-κρικα “4. ἐἠ-κε-κρίκειν
* Such verbs are excepted on account of the difficulty of repeating these
letters—Tr. .
94 VERBS.—ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [8 89.
πνέω, to breathe, Perf. πέ-πνευκα Plup. ἐ-πε-πνεύκειν
ϑλάω, to bruise, ré-Dlast (4 8, 10.) “ ἠ-τε-ϑλάκειν
Pinto, to throw, “ ἔῤῥιφα “ Ehhiderv
γνωρίζω, to make known, “ ἐ-γνώρικα “ ἐ-γνωρίκειν
.(βλακεύω, to be slothful, “ ἐ-βλάκευκα “4 ΣᾷἀΑ-βλακεύκειν
γλύφω, to carve, « EyAvda “4 ἀιγλύφειν.
8. The reduplication is not used (the above cases of verbs begin-
ning with 9, 79, BA, yA, excepted), when the stem of the verb begins
with a double consonant or two single consonants, which are not a
mute and liquid; e. g.
ζηλόω, to emulate, Perf. ἐ-ζήλωκα Plup. ἐ-ζηλώκειν
ξενόω, to entertain, “ b-Ebvoxa ἐ-ξενώκειν
ψάλλω, to sing, “ ξιψαλκα “ ἐ-ψάλκειν
oreipw, to sow, “ E-onapna “ E-omapkeıv
κτίζω, to build, “ E-krıca ᾷἐ-κτίκειν
πτύσσω, to fold, “ ἔςπτυχα ἐς ἐἘ-πτύχειν.
Ren. 1. The two verbs μὲμν ἤ σ κω (stem MNA), to remind, and κ τά ὁ μα ὃ,
to acquire, take the reduplication, although their stem begins with two conso-
nants, which are not a mute and ἃ liquid: μέ-μνημαι, κέςκτημαι, ἐ-με-μνήμην,
ἐ-κε-κτήμην.
4, Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this letter,
but take δὲ for the augment:
λαμβάνω, to take, Perf. εἴληφα Plup. εἰλῴφειν
λαγχάνω, to obtain, εἴληχα “ εἰλήχειν
λέγω, συλλέγω, to collect, ““ σνμείλοχα “ συνειλόχειν
‘PEQ, to say, “εἴρηκα “4. εἰρήκειν
μείρομαι, to obtain, « εἵμαρται (with rough Breathing), i it is fated.
Rem 2. Acadéyopat, to converse, has Perf. διείλεγμαι, though the
simple λέγω in the sense of to say, always takes the regular reduplication, A£Aey-
μαι, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting).
§ 89. Attic Reduplication.
Several verbs, beginning with a, e or 6, repeat, in the Perf,
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of the
stem. This augmentation is called the Attic Reduplication. The
Plup. then very rarely takes an additional augment; ἡκηκόθιν has
the regular Attic reduplication.
(a) Verbs whose second stem-syllable is short by nature:
ἀρόω, -ὥ, to plough, ὀλάω (ἐλαύνω), > drive,
ép-npoxa ἀρ-ἤρομαι ὁὀλεήλακα λεήλαμαι
ἀρ-ηρόκειν ἀρ-ηρόμην ἐλ-ηλώκειν en
ἐλέγχω, fo convence, ὀρύττω, to dig,
ἐλιήλεγχα ἐλεήλεγμαι ὀρ-ώρυχα ἀρ-ώρυγμαι.
ἀλ-ηλέγχειν ἐλεηλέγμην ἀρ ὡρύχειν ὀρ-ωρύγμην
(Ὁ) Verbs which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel long
8 90.] VERBS.—AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 95
by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication (except
ἐρείδω, to prop, ἐρήρεικα, ἐρήρεισμαι) :
ἀλείφω, to anoint, ἀκούω, to hear,
ἀλ-ἡλιφα we ἀκ-ἤκοα ὕκουσμαι
FE ἀλ-ηλίμμην ἠκ-ηκόειν ἠκούσμην
ἀγείρω, to collect, ἐγείρω, to
ἀγτήγερκα ἀγ-ήγερμαι ἐγ-ἤγερκα ἐγεήγερμαι
ἀγ-ηγέρκειν éy-nyépunv ἐγ-ηγέρκειν ἐγ-ηγέρμην.
Remaxzx. The verb ἄγω, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and
φέρω, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication, with this difference,
howerer, that the vowel of tbe reduplication takes the temporal augment only
in the Ind., and the vowel of the stem remains pure:
ἄγω, to lead, Aor. ΤΙ. 7y-ayov, Inf. ἀγαγεῖν, Δαν. II. Mid. ἠγαγόμην.
φέρω, to carry (stem ’ETK), Aor. II. ἤν-ἐγκον, Inf. &v-eyneiv, Aor. I. ἦν»
eyra, Inf. ἐν-ἔγκαι, Aor. Pans. ἠν-έχϑην, Inf. ἐν-εχϑῶμαι.
590. Augment and Reduplication in Compound
Words.
1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the aug-
ment and reduplication between the preposition and the verb; then
prepositions which end with a vowel, except asgi and πρό, suffer
Elision (§ 6, 3); πρό frequently combines with the augment by
means of Crasis (8 6, 2), and becomes gov, and ἐν and σύν resume
their y which had been assimilated, or äropped, or changed; 6. g.
ἀπο-βάλλω, to throw from, Im.dn-éBaddAov Ῥίἀπο-βέβληκα ῬῚρ.ἀπ-εβεβλήκειν
περε-βάλλω, to throw around, «ερι-ἐβαλλον περι-βέβληκα περι-εβεβλήκδιν
“προ-βάλλω, to throw before, πρρ-έβαλλον προ-βέβλῃκα προ-εβεβλήκειν
προὔβαλλον προὐβεβλήκειν
ἐμ-βάλλω, to throw in, éy-EBadAov ἐμ-βέβληκα ἐν-εβεβλῆκειν
ἐγ-γίγνομαι, to be in, ἐν-εγιγνόμην ἐγ-γέγονα ἐν-εγεγόνειν
συ-σκευάζω, to up, συν-ἐεσκεύαζον συν-εσκεύακα συν-εσκευάκειν
συῤ-ῥίπτω, to together, συν-ἔῤῥιπτον συν-ἔῤῥιφα συν-εῤῥίφειν
συλ-λέγω, to collect together, συν-ἔλεγον συν-είλοχα συν-ειλόχειν
2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with δὺς take the augment
and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem of the sim-
ple verb begins with a consonant or a vowel which does not admit
the temporal augment; (b) but in the middle, when the stem of the
simple verb begins with a vowel which admits the temporal aug-
ment; 6. g.
δυς-τυχέω, to be unfortunate, ἐ-δυςτύόχουον δε-δυςτύχηκα ἐ-δειδυςτυχήκειν
duc-wrew, to make ashamed, ἐ-δυςώπουν
dug-apeoréw, to be. displeased, ὄνς-ηρέστουν δυς-ηρέστῃηκα.
Verbs compounded with av may take the augment and reduplica-
tion at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit
them at the pest and εὐεργετέω Bay in the middle ; e. g.
96 VERBS.—AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. [$$ 91, 92.
εὐ-τυχέω, to be fortunate, ηὐ-τύχουν, commonly δὐ-τύχουν
εὐ-ωχέομαι, to feast well, εὐ-ωχούμην ᾿
eb-epyetéw, to do good, et-npyérovy, Perf. et-npyérnxa, commonly εὖ-
epyérovy, eb-epyéTyxa.
8. Third rule. All other compounds take the augment and re-
duplication at the beginning; e. g.
μυϑολογέω, to relate, ἐμνϑολόγουν - μεμνϑολόγηκα
οἰκοδομέω, to build, φκοδόμουν φκοδόμηκα.
891. Remarks.
1. The six following words compounded with prepositions, take the augment
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi-
tion:
ἀμπέχομαι, to clothe oneself, Impf. ἠμπειχόμην or äumeıx. Aor. ἠμπεσχόμην
“
ἀνέχομαι, to endure, _ ἠνειχόμην RN “ ἠνεσχόμην
᾿μφιγνοέω, to be uncertain, “ ἠμφεγνόουν and hupıyv. ,
ἀνορϑύω, to raise up, “ ἠνώρϑουν Perf. ἡνώρϑωκα “ ἠνώρϑωσα
ἐνοχλέω, to molest, “ φνώχλον “ ἠνώχληκα “ ἠνώχλησα
παροινέω, to riot, ‘6 ἐπαρῴνουν “ merapsunna“ ἐπαρῴνησα.
2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not com-
pounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, viz.
διαιτάω (from δίαιτα, food), (8) to feed, (Ὁ) to be a judge, Impf. ἐδιότων and
διήτων, Perf. δεδιήτηκα.
διακονέω, to serve (from διάκονος, servant), Impf. ἐδιηκόνουν and διηκόνουν,
Perf. δεδιηκόνηκα.
ἀμφισβητέω (from AM®IZBHTHE, to dispute), Impf. ἠμφεσβήτουν and ἡμ-
φισβήτουν. .
8. Exceptions to the first rule ($ 90,1). There are several verbs compound-
ed with prepositions, which take the augment before the preposition, since they
have nearly the same signification as the simple’ verbs; 6. g.
ἀμφιγνοέω (votw), to be uncertain, Impf. hupıyvöovv or ἠμφεγνόουν (No. 1)
ἀμφιέννυμι, to Aor. ἠμφέεσα, Perf. ἠμφίεσ
ἐπίσταμαι, to know, Impf. ἠπιστάμην =
καϑίζω, to cause to sit, “ ἐκάϑιζον, Perf. κεκάϑικα
καϑέζομαι, to sit, “4 ἐκαϑεζόμην and «adel. (without Aug.)
κάϑημαι, to sit, “ ἐκαϑήμην and καϑήμην (without Aug.)
καϑεύδω, to sleep, “ ἐξκάϑευδον, seldom καϑηῦδον.
4. Those verbs form an apparent exception to the first rule ($ 90, 1), which
are not formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by
derivation from a word already compounded {Comp. No. 2); e. g.
ἐναντιοῦμαι, to oppose oneself to, from ἐναντίος Impf. ἠναντιούμην
ἀντιδικέω, to defend at law, “ ἀγτίδικος “4. φντιδίκουν
ἐμπεδόω, to establish, “ ἔμπεδος, - “5 ἠμπέδουν.
8.92. Division of Verbs in -w according to the Characteristic, to-
gether with Remarks on the Formation of the Tenses.
Verbs in -ὦ are divided into two principal classes, according to
the different nature of the characteristic (§ 77, 5):
§93.] | FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 97
1. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel; these are again
divided into two classes :
A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, except
α, ὃ, 03; 8. g. παιδεύ-ω, to educate, Av-0, to loose ;
B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is either a, 8 or 0; 6. g-.
τιμά-ω, to honor, gidé-o, to love, μισϑό-ω, to let.
II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; these ara
again divided into two classes :
A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine mutes;
6. g. λείπ-ω, ta leave, πλέκ-ὠ, to twine, πείϑ-ω, to persuade ;
B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four kquids,
1, μι 9, 0; e. g. dyyell-m, to announce, véu-w, to divide,
gaiv-co, to show, φϑείρ-ω, to destroy.
Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. act all
verbs are divided into,
(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not acı
vented; ©. g. Ai-w, πλέκ-ω, etc. ;
(b) Perispomena, whose fmal syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers.; these
are consequently contract verbs; 6. g. τιμῶ, φιλῶ, μισϑῶ,
§ 98. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs,
1. In pure verbs, both Barytones and Perispomena, the tense-
endings are commonly appended to the unchanged characteristic ;
e. g. βουλεύ-σω, BeßovAswxa. Pure verbs do not form the Second-
ary tenses, but only the Primary tenses; the Perf. with x (xa), the
Fut. and Aor. with o (sw, σα). Pure verbs, however, are subject
to the following regular change in the stem:
2. The short characteristic-vowel of the Pres. and Impf., both in
Barytones and Perispomena, is lengthened in the other tenses. The
Barytones will first be considered, thus:
i into I, e.g. uam-lo, umvl-ow, &-unvI-oa, ete. ;
ὕ into 0, 6. g. kwAb-o, κωλύ-σω, Ke-KdA0-paL.
κωλύω, to hinder. ACTIVE.
Pres. | Ind. κωλύ-ω Subj. κωλύω Imp. cOAd-e Inf. xoAt-erv Part. κωλύτων
Impf. | Ind. &-xöAö-0v Opt. κωλύοι ὀ
Perf. | Ind. xe-xaA0-xa Inf. κε-κωλῦ-κέναι Part. κεικωλῦ-κώς
Plup. | Ind. &-xe-kwAd-xeıv
Ind. κωλύ-σω Opt. κωλύ-σοιμε Inf. κωλύ-σειν Part. κωλύ-σων
Ind. ἐ-κώλυ-σα Subj. κωλύ-σω Opt. κωλῦύ-σαιμε
Imp. xöA0-00v Inf. κωλῦ-σαι Part. κωλῦ-σας.
+
98 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [$ 94.
MIDDLE.
Pres. | Ind. κωλύ-ομαι Subj. κωλδιωμαι Imp. kwAt-ov Inf. kwAd-eodaı
Part. κωλῦ-ὄμενος
Impf. Ind. &-«wAö-öunv , Opt. κωλῦ-οίμην
Perf. | 8.1. | Ind. κε-κώλῦ-μαι Imperative Intinitive
: κε-κώλῦ-σαι κε-κώλῦ-σο κε-κωλῦ-σϑαι
; κε-κώλῦ-ται κε-κωλύ-σϑω
D.1. κε-κωλύ-μεϑον De
κε-κώλυ-σϑον κε-κώλυ-σϑον i ace aa et
: κε-κώλυ-σϑον κε-κωλύ-σϑων Subjunctive
P. 1. κε-κωλύ-μεϑα κε-κωλθ-μένος ὦ
κε-κώλυ-σϑε κε-κώλυ-σϑε
Ke-K@Av-vTat κε-κωλύ-σϑωσαν or κε-κωλύ-σϑων
8.1. Ἔπκε-κολξιμην Ὁ. ἐ-κε-κωλύ-μεϑον P. ἐ-κεοκωλύ-μεϑα Opt. κε-
: 2. ἐ-κε-κώλῦ-σο ἐ-κε-κώλυ-σϑον ἐ-κε-κώλυ-σϑε en
3. ἐ-κε-κώλθ-το ἐ-κε-κωλύ-σϑην ἐ-κε-κώλυ-ντο [voc εἴην
Ind. κωλύ-σομαι Opt. κωλύσοίμην Inf. κωλύ-σεσϑαι Part. κωλῦ-
Duni Subj. κωλῦ Op A
Ind. ἐ-κωλῦ-σάμην ubj. κωλῦ-σωμαι t. KwAd-caipyy Im
κώλῦ-σαι Inf. κωλύ-σασϑαι Part. κωλῦ-σάμενος. i
PASSIVE.
Ind. ἐκκωλύϑην Subj. κωλυ-ϑῶ Opt. cwAd-Seinv
Imp. κωλύ-ϑητι Inf. κωλυ-ϑῆνας Part. κωλῦ-ϑείς
Fut. | Ind. κω ρ-ϑήσομαι Opt. κωλυ-ϑησοίμην Inf. ae
Part. κωλῦ-ϑησόμενος.
694. Verbs which, contrary to the rule, retain the short Oharacter-
tstic-vowel in forming the Tenses.
1. Several pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 93, 2), retain the short charac-
teristic-vowel, either in all the tenses, or at least in some tenses. Most of these
verbs take a o in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the first Aor. Pass. This is
indicated by the phrase, Pass. with o (see ᾧ 95). Thus:
X pta, to prick, Fut. xplow, Aor. &xploa, Inf. χρίσαι. Pass. with o; (but xpio,
to anoint, Fut. xplow, Aor. Expica, Inf. χρῖσαι, Aor. Mid. ἐχρισάμην ; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. κέχρισμαι, xexpiodat; Aor. Pass. ἐχρίσϑην).
Ἂν ὕω, to complete, Fut. dviow; Aor. fvüca. Pass. with o.
ἄρδω, to draw water, Fut. dptow; Aor. fpica. Pass. with o.
pba, to close, 6. g. the eyes, Fut. μύσω, Aor. Euöca ; but Perf. μέμϑκα, I am shut,
am silent.
xT 6, to spit, Fut. rrbow; Aor. Enrüca. Pass. with o.
idpdw, to cause to sit, Fut. ἱδρύσω; Aor. ἰόρῦσα (later ἱδρύσω, Iöpüca) ; Aor.
Pass. ἱδρύϑην.
2. The following dissyllables in -6w lengthen the short characteristic-vowel
in the Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., and δύω also in the Perf. and Plup. Act,
but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup. Act. (except δύω), also
in the Mid. or Pass., and in the Aor. and Fut. Pass. :
δύω, to wrap up, Kut. ddow Aor. &ödca Perf. dédtxa δέδῦμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐδόϑην
86, tosacrifice, “ Bow “ ἔϑῦσα “ τέϑῦκα τέϑῦύμα “ “ ἐτύϑην
A$ w, to lose, «λύσω “ ἔλῦσα “ λέλῦκα λέλύμαι “ “4. ἐλύϑην.
΄
8 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 99
Remarx. When the vowel in the Fut. Act. is long, and short in the Perf.
Mid. or Pass., the Fut. Perf. resumes the long vowel, both in uncontracted verbs
and in contract pure verbs; 6. g. λύω, λελύσομαι.
§95. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and Perf. and Plup.
Mid. or Pass. with o.
1. Pure verbs which retain the short characteristic-vowel of the stem in form-
ing the tenses, insert o (Comp. ὁ 94) before the tense-ending -θην, -μαι, etc. in
the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass.; this o con
nects the endings to the tense-stem; 6. g.
τελέ-ω «τελέ-σ-ϑὴν τε-τέλε-σομαι
τελε-σ-ϑήσομαι ἐ-τε-τελό-σ-μην.
2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have a long character-
istic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen it in forming the tenses, take the same forma-
tion; 6. g. ἀκούω, to hear, Aor. ἠκού-σ-ϑην, Fut. ἀκου-σ-ϑήσομαι, Perf. Yxov-0-
pat, Plup. hrov-o-unv; ἐναύω, to kindle; κελεύω, to command; κυλζω, to roll;
λεύω, to stone; Ebw, to scrape; πρίω, to saw; σείω, to shake; xpiw, to anoint ($ 94);
yatw, to touch, etc.
κελεύω, to command. " ACTIVE.
Pres. xedet-o Perf. κε-κέλευ-κα Fut. κελεύ-σω
Impf. é-xéAev-ov Plup. é-xe-xeAeb-newy Aor. ἐ-κέλευ-σα.
MIDDLE.
κελεύ-ομαι Impf. ἐ-κελευ-όμην
κε-κέλευ-σομαι Imperative - Infinitive
κε-κέλευ-σαι KE-KEAEV-00 κε-κελεῦ-σϑαι
κε-κέλευ.σ-ται κε-κελεύ-σϑω Participl
κε-κελεύ-σ-μεϑον λ ΡΘΕ R
κε-κέλευ-σϑον κε-κέλευ-σϑον sr alga aac
κε-κέλευ-σϑον κε-κελεύ-σϑων Subjunctive
κε-κελεύ-σ-μεϑα κε-κελευ-σ-μένος ὦ
κε-κέλευ-σϑε κε-κέλευ-σϑε
. κε-κελευ-σιμένοι εἰσί κε-κελεύ-σϑωσαν or κε-κελεύ-σϑων
Plup. 8.1. ἐ-κε-κελεῦ-σιμην D. ἐ-κε-κελεύ-σιμεϑον P. Ὁ τε κε pa τς
Ind. 48. ἐ-κε-κέλευ-σο ἐ-κε-κέλευ-σϑον ἐ-κε-κέλευ-σϑε
8. ἐ-κε-κέλευ-στο Φθἐ -κε-κελεύ-σϑην κε-κελευ-σ-μένοι ἦσαν
Opt. κε-κελευ-σ-μένος εἴην
Future κελεύσομαια Fut. Perf. κε-κελεύςσομαι Aor. ἐ-κελευ-σάμην.
ı PASSIVE. |
ἐ-κελεύ-σ-ϑην Future κελευ.σοϑήσομαι.
2.
8.
.l.
2.
Io
wog
Rem. 1. Some vary between the regular formation and that with o.
ϑραύω, to break in pieces, τέϑραυσμαι and τέϑραυμαι, ἐϑραύσϑην
κλείω, to shut, κέκλεισμαε and Att. κέκλημαι; Aor. ἐκλείσϑην.
k pot, to strike upon, κέκρουμαι and Kéxpovoyat; Aor. ἐκρούσϑην.
Rem. 2. Some contrary to the rule, do not take σ, although they retain the
short characteristic-vowel; thus, 6. g. δύω, ϑύω, λύω, mentioned $ 94, 2.
100 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. ᾿ς [896.ψ
XLIIL Vorabulary. '
Αἰσϑάνομαι, w.gen.oracc., δρόμος, -ov, ὃ, a une, κατα-παύω, to put a stop
to perceive, observe. running. to.
ἀσπίς, -idoc, 7, a shield. δύναμις, -ewc, 4, strength, κρούω, to knock, beat.
δεινῶς, terribly, violently, power, might. σεισμός, -οὔ, 6, an earth-
extraordinarily. ϑραύω, to break, shatter, quake.
crush. σείω, to shake.
Ol στρατιῶται wpds τοὺς πολεμίους πορεύεσϑαι ἐκελεύσϑησαν. Σπάρτη wore
ὑπὸ σεισμοῦ δεινῶς ἐσείσϑη. Ἣ τῶν Περσῶν δύναμις ὑπὸ τῶν 'Ελλήνων τέϑ-
pavorat. Οἱ πολέμιοι εἰς τὴν ἄκραν κατέκλείσϑησαν. “Ore οἱ βάρβαροι τῶν
ἀσπίδων πρὸς τὰ δόρατα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑ) λλήνων κεκρουσμένων ἀσϑάνοντο, δρόμῳ
ἔφευγον. Ὁ πόλεμος κατεπαύσϑη.
The soldiers are ordered to march against the enemies. Our town has been
wiolently shaken by an earthquake. The might of the Persians was crushed by
the Hellenes. The enemies have been shut up in (into) the castle. The shields
were beaten-by the enemies against their spears. The war is ended, i. e. has
been put a stop to.
é
896. Contract Pure Verbs.
1. Contract pure verbs, as has been seen § 92, are such as have
for their characteristic a, 8 or a, which are contracted with the mode-
vowel following. Contraction takes place only in the Pres. and
Impf. Act. and Mid. or Pass., because, in these two tenses only, ®
the characteristic-vowel followed by another vowel.
2. The following are the contractions which occur here:
a + e becomes ἃ ᾿ξ = εἰ a = U
αἴ = ἃ : =n "ἢ ἢ τω
at = ᾳ. = oty -ῷ οἱ
ato = @o a = ov o+o = ov
ato = @ ἐτω =o ote =a
e= ᾳ ete = εἰ oa = ot (ov in Inf.)
οἱ = ῳ eto - οἱ oto -- οἱ
τ = 0 et ov = ov oT ov = ov.
8. The tenses of contract verbs, as has been seen § 93, are form-
ed like those of uncontracted pure verbs, i. e. the short characteris-
tic-vowel is usually lengthened, in forming the tenses, viz.
8 into 7, e. δ. φιλέ-ω, to love, φιλή-σω, πε-φίλη-κα, ete.
o into ὦ, 6. g. p10 80-0, to let out, μισϑώ-σω, με-μίσϑω-κα, etc.
ἃ into ἡ, 6. g. tyud-o, to honor, τιμή-σω, τε-τίμη-κα, etc.
a into &, 6. g. éa-w, to permit, Fut. ἐάσω. This lengthening
into ἃ occurs, when &, ı or @ precedes (Comp. § 26, 1); 6. g.
ia-o, 8-00 ; usidıd-o, to laugh, μειδιά-σομαι; φωρᾶ-ω, to catch
396] . CONTRACT PURE VERBS, 204
a thief, φωρά-σω (but éyyvd-w, to give as a pledge, ἐγγνήσω ;
Bo&-w, to cry out, βοήσομαι, like ὀγδόη). To these verbs be-
long the following:
ἀλοά-ω, to thresh, ἀλοά-σω,
ἀκροά-ομαι, to hear, ἀκροά-σομαι.
Remakx. The verbs 7 p & ὦ, to give an oracle, xp Go pat, to use, and τι τρά ὦ,
to-bore, although a p precedes, lengthen @ into 7; ©. g. χρήσομαι, τρήσω. The
exceptions to rule No. 3. will be stated in § 98.
9%
102
‘ CONTRACT PURE VERBS.
[$ 96.
PARADIGMS OF
ACTIVE.
εἰ
Ez .
3,3 ind Present
a @
a 5 z Δ] Characteristic a. | Characteristic e. | Characteristic o.
S. 1. | τιμ(ά-ω)ῶ, to honor, | φιλ(έ-ω)ῶ, to love, μεσϑ(ό-ωγῶ, to let,
2. | τιμ-(ἀ-εις)ᾷς φιλ(έ-εις)εῖς μισϑί(ό-εις)οῖς
Ξ 3. | τιμ(ἀ-ει)ᾷ φιλ(έ-ει)εῖ μισϑ(ό-ει)οῖ
; .l.
ante 2. | τιμ(ά-ε)ᾶ-τον φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-τον μισϑί(ό-εγοῦ-τον
ΤῸ 8. τιμίά-ε)ᾶ-τον φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-τον μισϑί(ό-ε)οῦ-τον
P. 1. | τιμ(ά-ο)ῶ-μεν φιλ(έ-ο)οῦ-μεν μισϑί(ό-ο)οῦ-μεν
2. | τιμ[ἀ-ε)ᾶ-τε φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-τε μισϑί(ό-ε)οῦ-τε
3. | τιμ(ἀ-ου)ῶ-σι(ν) φιλ(έ-ου)οῦ-σι(ν) | μισϑ(ό-ου)οῦ-σι(ν)
8.1. | τιμ(ἀ-ω)ῶ DI φιλ(έ-ω)ῶ μισϑ(ό-ω)ῶ
2. | τιμ(ἀ-ῃς)ᾷς ἃ φιλ(έ ῃρ)ῇς μισϑ(δ-ῃς)οῖς
ER > rıp(ü-y)@ ΒΞ φιλ(έ-ῃ)ῇ μισϑ(ό-ηγοῖ
u .l. a
janc- 2. τιμ(ά-ηγᾶ-τον ΒΕ φιλ(ξ-ηγῆ-τον μισϑ( -η)ῶ-τον
tive, 3. τιμίά-ηγᾶ-τον | S φιλ(έ-η)ῆ-τον pind 6-7 )G-Tov
P.1.| τιμ(ἀ-ωγῶ-μεν | * 3] φιλ(ἐ-ω)ῶ-μεν μισϑ(ὀ-ω)ῶ-μεν
2. | rıu(a-n)ä-re 5 φιλ(έ-η)ῆ-τε μισϑ(ὀ-η)ῶ-τε
8. τειμ[ἀ-ω)ῶ-σι(ν)} ΕἾ φιλ(έ-ω)ῶ-σι(ν) | μισϑ(δ-)ῶ-σι(ν)
5. 2. | τίμ(α-εγα φίλ(ε-ε)ει μίσϑ(ο-ε)ου
8. τιμία-ἐ)ά-τω ΤῊΣ ei-T@ pod (0-é ee
Imper- Ὁ. 2. | τιμί(ἀ-ε)ᾶ-τον SL Al E-e)ei-Tov μισϑί(ὀ-ε)οῦ-τον
ative, 3. τιμ[α-ἐ)ά-των PLA e-€) εἰ-των μισϑ(ο-ἐ)ού-των
P. 2.] rıu(a-e)ä-re φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-τε μισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-τε
8. τιμ(α-ἔγά-τωσαν or | φιλ(ε-ἐ)εί-τωσαν οτὶ μισϑίο-ἐ)ού-τωσαν
ect τιμ(α-ὀ)ώ-ντων PtA(e-6)ob-vrev ἰογμισϑ(ο-ὀ)ού-ντων
Infin. τιμ(ά-εινὴᾷν φιλ(έ-ειν)εῖν μισϑ(ό-ειν)οῦν
Nom.| τιμ(ά-ων)ῶν φιλ(έ-ων)ῶν μισϑ(ὀ-ων)ῶν
Parti- τιμ(ἀ-ου)ῶ-σα φιλ(έ-ου)οῦ-σα μισϑί(ό-ου)οῦ-σα
ciple τιμ(ἀ-ον)ῶν φιλ(έ-ον)οῦν μισϑί(ό-ον)οῦν
’ | Gen. } τιμ(ἀ-ογῶςντος φιλ(έ-ογοῦ-ντος μισϑ(ό-ογοῦ-ντος
τιμ(α-οὐ)ώ-σης φιλ(ε-οὐ)οῦ-σης | μισϑ(ο-οὐ)γού-σης.
Imperfect.
8. 1. | ἐτίμ(α-ον)ων ἐφίλ(ε-ον)ουν ἐμίσϑ(ο-ον)ουν
2. ἐτίμ(α-ες)ας EdiA(e-er)eug ἐμίσϑ(ο-ες)ους
5 τ ἐτίμ(α-ε)α ἐφίλ(ε-ε)ει ἐμίσϑ(ο-ε)ου
aoe 2. | ἐτιμί ἀ-ε)ᾶ-τον ἐφιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-τον ἐμισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-τον
8. ἐτιμ α-ἔ)ά-την ἐφιλ(ε-ἐ)εΐ- τὴν ἐμισϑ(ο-ἔ)ού-την
P. 1. | ἐτιμ a-0)ö-uev ἐφιλ(έ-ο)οῦ-μεν ἐμισϑ(ό-ο)οῦ-μεν
2. | ἐτιμ[ἀ-ε)ᾶ-τε ἐφιλ(έ-ε)εἴ-τε ἐμισϑ ee
3. ἐτίμ(α-ον)ων ἐφίλ(ε-ον)ουν ried een
§ 96.]
CONTRACT PURE VERBS
CONTRACT VERBS.
Characteristic a.
τιμί(ά .ογῶ-μαι
τιμ( ἃ -η)
τι (a-e)a-TaL
τιμ(α-)ῶ.μεϑον
rıu(a-e)a-0d0v
Tıu(a-e)ü-0dov
rıu(a-ö)@-ueda
τιμ(ά-ε)ᾶ-σϑε
τιμ(ά-ογῶ-νται
τιμ((κωγῶ-μαι
τιμ(ά-ῃγᾷ
τιμ(ά-η)ᾶ-ται
τιμ(α-ὠ)γώ-μεϑον
τιμ(ά-ηγᾶ-σϑον
τιμ(ά-ηγᾶ-σϑον
τιμ(α-ὠγώ-μεϑα
rıu(ü-n)ü-ode
τιμ(ἀ-ωγῶ-νται
τιμ(ά-ουγῶ
τιμ(α-ἐγά-σϑω
τιμ(ά-ε)ᾶ-σϑον
τιμ(α-ἐγά-σϑων
τιμ(ά-ε)ᾶ-σϑε
Tıu(a-E)a-o9woav or
τιμ(α-ἐγά-σϑων
τιμ(ά-εγᾶ-σϑαι
τιμ(α-ὀγώ-μενος
τιμ(α-ογω-μένη
rın(a-ö)@-uevov
τιμ(α-ογω-μένου
τιμ(α-ο)ω-μένης
ἐτιμ[α-ὁγώςμην
ériu(a-ov ia
ἐτιμ(ἃ-εγᾶ-το
ἐτιμ[α-δ)ώ-μεϑον
ἐτιμ(ἀ-εγᾶ-σϑον
ἐτιμία- ἐγ -σἥην
ἐτιμ[ α-ὐγῶ-μεϑα
ἐτιμ(ἀ-εἸᾶ-αϑε
ἐτιμ[ἃ-οὐῶςντο
MIDDLE.
Present.
Characteristic e.
φιλ(έ-ογοῦ-μαι
φιλ(έ-ῃηγῇ
Su A (E-E)ei-Taı
φιλ(ε-ὀγού-μεϑον
φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-σϑον
φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-σϑον
φιλ(ε-ὀ)γού-μεϑα
φιλ(έ-εγεῖ-σϑε
φιλ(έ-ογοῦ-νται
φιλ(έ-ωγῶ-μαι
Eel HıA(Ep)7
@| φιλ(έ-η)ῆ-ται
ΒΊ φιλ(ε-ὠγώ-μεϑον
5) φιλ(έ-ηγῆςσϑον
ΘΔΏΒΟΙΡ
en
φιλ(ε-ὠγώ-μεϑα
nleniide
"I φιλ(έ-ω)ῶ-νται
φιλ(έ-ουγοῦ
φιλ(ε- )εί-σϑω
φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-σϑον
φιλ(ε-) εἰςσϑων
φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-σϑε
φιλ(ε-ἐ)εξσϑωσαν or
φιλ(ε-ἐ)εί-σϑων
φιλ(έ-ε)εῖ-σϑαι
φιλ(ε-ὀ)ού-μενος
φιλ(ε-ογου-μένη
φιλ(ε-ὀγού-μενον
φιλ(ε-ο)γου-μένου
φιλ(ε:ογου-μένης
Imperfect.
EgiA(e-a)oi-uyy
ἐφιλί ἐ-ου)οῦ
ἐφιλ(ἐ.-εγεῖ-τὸ
ἐφιλί(ε- ὦ} ὑ-μεϑον
ἐφ: {ἐ-εἸεῖ αὖον
ἐφιλί(ε-ἐγεί-σθὴν
ἐφι A(e-0)0 ὑ-μεϑα
ed: [ἐ-ΕἾ Ἶ- mite
Edi (E-o)oü-vro
Characteristic o.
μισϑ(ό-ογοῦ-μαι
μισϑ(ό-ῃ)οῖ
ΤΣ
μισϑ(ο-ὀγού-μεϑον
μισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑον
μισϑί(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑον
μισϑ(ο-ὀ)γού-μεϑα
μισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑε
μισϑ(ό-ο)οῦ-νται
μισϑί(ό-ω)ῶ-μαι
μισϑί(ό-ῃγ)οῖ
μισϑ(ό-ηγῶ-ται
μισϑ(ο-ὠγώ-μεϑον
Ὁ ea
Ra ae
μισϑ(ο-ὠ)ώ-μεϑα
Ἡλι πρὶ ἔλα
μενα χρυ μρὶ
μισϑ(ό-ουγοῦ
μεσϑ(ο-ἐγού-σϑω
μεσϑί(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑον
μισϑ(ο-ἔ)ού-σϑων
μισϑί(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑε
μισϑί(ο-ἔ)δού-σϑωσαν or
μισϑ(ο-ἐγού-σϑων
μισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑαι
μισϑ(ο-ὀγού-μενος
Ne wre
μισϑ(ο-ὀ)ού-μενον
μισϑ(ο-ο)γου-μένου
μισϑί(ο-ο)ου-μένης.
ἐμισϑ(ο-ὀ)ού-μην
ἐμισϑ(ό-ου)γοῦ
ἐμισϑί(ό-εγοῦ-το
ἐμισϑ(ο-ὀγού-μεϑον
ἐμισϑ(ό-εγοῦ-σϑον
ἐμισϑ(ο-ξδού-σϑην
ἐμισϑί(ο-ὀγοῦ-μεϑα
ἐμισϑ(ό-ε)οῦ-σϑε
ἐμισθίό ογοῦνντο
108
104 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. . fg 97.
Imperfect.
Characteristic a. Characteristic e. | Characteristic 0.
. 1. τιμ(ά-οὐ)ῷ-με φιλ(έ-οι)οῖ-με μισϑ(ό-οε)οῖ-με
2.| τιμ(ά-οις)ῷς φιλ(έ-οις)οῖς μισϑ΄ό-οις)οῖς
τὸ 8. τιμ(ά-οιὐδῷ φιλ(έ-οι)οῖ μισϑί(ό-οι)οῖ
.l.
Ὅρος 2. | τιμ(άἀ-οι)ῷ-τον φιλ(ἐ-οι)οῖ-τὸν μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-τον
: 8. τιμ(α-οἰ)ῴ-την giA(e-ol)ot-ryy μισϑί(ο-οδοΐ-την
P.1. τιμ(ά-οι)γῷ-μεν φιλ(ἐ-οιγοῖ-μεν μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-μεν
2. | τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-τε pia é-o1)oi-re μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-τα
8. τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-εν φιλ(ἐ-οι)οῖ-εν ἱισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-εν
β
S.1. | τιμ(α-οἰγῴ-ην φιλ(ε-οἱγοί-ην μισϑί(ο-οἰγοί-ην
τιμ(α-οϑῴ-ης φιλ(ε-οῇοΐί-ης μισϑ(ο-οἱ)οί-ης
Attic τιμ(α-οἱγῴ-η a μισϑ(ο-οδοί-η
τιμ(α-οἰγῴ-ητον φιλ(ε-οἱ)οί-ητον pod (0-01) 0i-nTov
μισϑ(ο-οι)οι-ἥτην
pod (0-oL)oi-nuev
μισϑ(οι.οῇοί-.ητε ᾿
μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-εν
τιμ(α-οι)ῳ-ἤτην φιλ(ε-οι)οι-ἥτην
τιμ(α-ο)γῴ-ημεν φιλ(ε-οἱ)οί-ημεν
τιμ(α-οἰγῴ-ητε φιλ(ε-οἱ)οί-ητε
τιμ(ά-οιδῷ-εν φιλ(έ-οιλ)οῖ-εν
:
DB u
$0 NO rt 90 BO Go 9 τ
Perf. | reriunka πεφίληκα μεμίσϑωκα
πεφώρᾶκα
, |Plup.| ἐτετιμήκειν ἐπεφιλήκειν ἐμεμισϑώκειν
Indi- Eredwpükeıv |
catlve, | Fut. τιμήσω φωράσω | φιλήσω μισϑώσω
. | ἐτίμησα ἐφώρασα | ἐφίλησα ἐμίσϑωσα..
Aorist, | ἐτιμήθην ἐφωράϑην | ἐφιλήϑην | ἐμισϑώϑην |
erbal adjectives: τιμη-τέος, -TEa, -Téov, φωρᾶ-τέος, -Téa, -TEOV,
897. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract
Verbs.
1. Verbs in -éo with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. πλέω, to sail, πνέω, to breathe,
Bew, to run, are contracted only in εἰ (arising from éec or ee), but in all the
other forms, they are uncontracted ; e. g.
Act. Pr. Ind. πλέω, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέου σι (ν).
Subj. πλέω, πλέῃς, πλέῃ, πλέωμεν, πλέητε, πλέξωσιε(ν).
Imp. πλεῖ. Inf. πλεῖν. Part. πλέων, πλέουσα, πλέον.
Impf. Ind. ἔπλεον, ἔπλεις, ἔπλει, ἐπλέομεν, ἐπλεῖτε, ἔπλεον.
Opt. πλέοιμι, TAEOLS, etc.
Mid. Pr.Ind. πλέομαι, πλέῃ, πλεῖται, πλεόμεϑον, πλεῖσϑον, etc.
Inf. πλεῖσϑαι. Part. πλεόμενος. Impf.EmAeöunv.
4. The verb δέω, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu-
Jarly in compounds; 6. g. τὸ δοῦν, τοῦ doüvrog, διαδοῦμαι, κατέδουν.
8. Several verbs deviate from the general rules of contraction ; 6. g.
(a) -ae and -aeı are contracted into -7 and -y, instead of into -a and -¢; 6. g.
97) | CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 108
Imperfect..
Characteristic a. Characteristic e. Characteristic o.
. τιμ α-οὐῴ-μην φιλ{ε-οἱ)οϊ-μὴν μισϑ(ο-οἰ)οί-μην
τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-ο φιλ(ἐ-οι)οῖ-Ὁ μισϑί(δ-οι)οῖ-ο
τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-το φιλί ἐ-οἱ)οῖ- τὸ μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-το
τιμ(α-οἰγῴ-μεϑον φιλ{ε- οἱ γοῖ-μεϑον μισϑ(ο-οἰ)οί-μεϑον
τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-σϑον φιλ(ἐ-οι)οῖ- σον μισϑ(ό-οι)οῖ-σϑον
τιμ(α-οἰγῴ-σϑην φιλ(ε-οἱ)οί-σϑην μισϑ(ο-οἱ)οί-σϑην
τιμ α-οἱ) ¢-peva φιλ(ε-οἱ)οί-μεϑα plod 0-04 oi-peda
T ἀ-οι)ῷ-σϑε φιλ{έ-οι )oi-ove pod ὁ-οι)οῖ-σϑε
τιμ(ἀ-οι)ῷ-ντο φιλί ἐ-οι)οῖεντο μισϑί(ό-οι)οῖ-ντο
“τετημαι.͵.͵.͵.͵ἝἪ. ᾿πεφίλμι.ΟΘ-ςο. μεμίσϑωμαι
πεφώράμαι
ἐτετιμήμην ἐπεφιλήμην ἐμεμισϑώμην
ἐπεφωράμην
τιμήσομαι φωράσομαι | φιλήσομαι μισϑώσομαι
ἐτιμησάμην ἐφωράσάμημ)] ἐφιλησάμην ἐμισϑωσάμην
τετιμήσομαι Tepupdooual| πεφιλήσομαι μεμισϑώσομαι
SIVE.
φελη-τέος, -Téa, -Téov, μισϑω-τέος, -Téa, -τέον.
ζ(ά- ὦ) ὦ, to live, Lic, Hy -ῆτον, re, Inf. ζῇν, Imp. ζῆ, Impf. ἔζων, της,
“ἢ, «ἤτον, -ἤτην, “ἥτε; --πειν(ά -ὠ) ὥ, to hunger, Inf. πεινῷν, etc. 5
διψ(ά- ὦ) ὦ, to thiret, διψῆῇς, etc., Inf. διψῆν ;—« v (ἀ - ὡ) ὦ, to scrape,
Inf. κνῇν ;--ασ μ( ἀ- ὠ) ὥ, to smear, Inf. σμῇν ;—p (ἀ - ὠὡ ) ὦ, to rub, Inf.
piv ;—7 p (4-0) ῶ- μαι, to use, χρῇ, χρῆται, χρῆσϑαι; Β8ο ἀποχρῶμαιε,
to have enough, to abuse, ἀποχρῆσϑαι ;—d πόχρη (abridged from ἀποχρῇ),
it suffices, Inf. ἀποχρῇν, Impf. ἀπέχρη ;—x p ( - ὦ ) ὥ, to give an oracle, to
prophesy, xpüs, χρῇ, Inf. χρῇν.
(Ὁ) -00 and -oe are contracted into -w, instead of into -ov, and -öy into -ῷ, in-
stead of into -oi,in ῥιγ(6- ὦ ) ὥ, to freeze, Inf. ῥιγῶν and ῥιγοῦν, Part.
Gen. ῥιγῶντος and ῥιγούντος, Subj. ῥιγῷ, Opt. ῥιγῴην, ete.
4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the
Opt. in -7v, namely, in the Sing. of verbs in -éw and -6w, the form in -οΐην is
much more in use than the common form, and in verbs in -ἄω it is used almost
exclusively ; but in the Dual and Pl. of all three, the common form is more in
use; in the third person Pl., the Aitic form is always the same as the common
form ; 6. g. τιμῷεν. |
-
106 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 97,
5. The verb 10%, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., in the
ending of which there is -e or -0; 6. g. ἔλου instead of EAove, ἐλοῦμεν instead
of ἐλούομεν, Mid. λοῦμαι, (Adet,) λοῦται, ete. Imp. λοῦ, Inf. λοῦσϑαι, Impf.
ἐλούμην, ἐλοῦ, ἐλοῦτο, etc., as if from the stem AOEQ.
Remax. On the change of the accent in contraction, see $11, 2.
XLIV. Vocabulary.
(a) Contract Verbs in -ἄω in the Pres. and Impf. Act.
᾿Αγαπάω, to love. Cau, to live. πρίν, το. inf., before.
ἀϑάνατος, -ov, immortal. ἡλικία, -ac, 7, age, especial- πῶς ; how?
ἀϑλίως, miserably, unfor- ly youth or manhood. σιωπάω, to be silent.
tunately. ϑαῤῥαλέως, boldly, cdur- συγκυκάω, to move to-
ἀκμή, «ἧς, ἡ, point, height, ageously. gether, bring into con-
fall power, bloom. ἰδέα, -ac, #, an appear- fusion, confound.
ἀστράπτω, to lighten. ance, an outward figure. σύμμαχος, -ov, fighting
Bpovraw, to thunder. vıraw, to conquer, over- with; subst, a fellow-
διψάω, to thirst, or be come. combatant, or ally.
thirsty. ὀλοφύρομαι, το. acc.,to pity. TeAevraw, to finish, (βίον
dpaw, to do, act. ὁράω, to see. understood) to die.
té-araraw, to completely ὁρμάω, to rush, advance. τολμάω, to dare, venture,
deceive, or mislead. πεινάω, to hunger, or be _ prevail upon oneself.
ἐράω, το. gen. to love (ar- hungry.
dently). Ä
Πολλάκις γνώμην ἐξαπατῶσιν ἰδέαι. Μή σε νικάτω κέρδος. "Epü τῆς dpe-
τῆς. Πολλάκις νικᾷ καὶ κακὸς ἄνδρα ἀγαϑόν. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὲ ἐρῶσι τῶν καλῶν.
Πολλοὶ ἄνϑρωποι ἐν τῇ τῆς ἡλικίας ἀκμῇ τελευτῶσιν. Ἢ σιώπα, ἢ λέγε ἀμεί-
vova. ᾿Ανάγκη tor? πάντας ἀνθρώπους τελευτᾷν. Νοῦς ὁρᾷ καὶ νοῦς ἀκούει.
Θαῤῥαλέως, ὦ στρατιῶται, ὁρμῶμεν ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους. Ilptv μὲν πεινῇν, πολ
λοὲ ἐσϑίουσι, πρὶν δὲ διψῆν, πίνουσιν. Οὐκ ἔστι τοῖς μὴ δρῶσι σύμμαχος τύχη.
Περικλῆς ἤστραπτεν, ἐβρόντα, συνεκύκα τὴν λλάδα. Eide πάντες παῖδες
τοὺς γονέας ἀγαπῷεν. Πῶς ἂν τολμῴην τὸν φίλον βλάπτειν. Τὸ μὲν σῶμα
«ολλώκις καὶ πεινῇ καὶ διψῇ 7 δὲ ψυχὴ πῶς ἂν ἢ διψῴη ἢ πεινῴῃη; υχὴ ἀϑά-
ψατος καὶ ἄγηρως ζῇ διὰ παντός. Kpeirrov τὸ μὴ ζῇν ἐστιν ἢ ζῇν ἀϑλίως. Ὀλο-
φυρόμεϑα τὸν ἐν τῇ τῆς ἡλικίας ἀκμῇ τελευτῶντα.
Children love their (the) parents. Either be silent (pl.) or speak better.
With the mind (dat.) we see and hear. Youths should be silent (imp.). We
will love virtue. All citizens fear (fear holds all citizens) that (μή, το. subj.) the
enemies will advance against the town. It is well to love our parents. We
pity those who die (part.) in the bloom of youth (ἡλικία). The soldiers ad-
vanced courageously against the town. The army is often hungry and thirsty.
All the citizens feared, that the enemics would rush against the town. May
you always, O boy, love your parents !
$97.)
CONTRACT PURE VERBS.
XLV. Vocabulary.
107
(Ὁ) Contract Verbs in -éo in the Pres. and Impf. Act.
᾿Αϑυμέω, to be dispirited,
despair.
ἀμελέω, w. gen. to neg-
lect, not to care for.
ἄν (instead of ἐάν), w.
subj., if.
ἀποῤῥέω, to flow away, or
from.
ἀσκέω, to practise, adorn.
δέω, το. gen., to want; dei,
there is need, it is ne-
cessary, one must; w.
acc. and inf.
ϑυστυχέω, to be unfortu-
nate. [praise.
ἐπαινέω, to approve of,
εὐτυχέω, to be fortunate,
happy.
εὐχή, -ἧς, ἢ, ἃ request, a
prayer.
ϑέλω and ἐϑέλω, to will,
wish, be willing.
κἄν, w. subj. = καί and
the modal adverb ἄν, or
καὶ ἐάν, even if, al-
though; or xai and the
particle ἀν.
Kparéw, το. gen., to be mas-
ter of, have power over,
command.
λαλέω, to talk, prate.
μάλιστα, (superlative of
μάλα, very) most, es-
pecially.
μέλι, -ıros, τό, honey.
μῆτε---μήτε, neither—nor.
οὐδέποτε, never.
πλέω, to sail.
ποιέω, to make, do; εὖ
ποιεῖν, το. acc. to do
well to, to confer a fa-
vor on.
πονέω, laböro, to take trou-
ble, work, toil.
προσδοκάω, to expect, pre-
sume.
pir, ῥιπός, ὁ, ἡ, ἃ reed.
σιγάω, to be silent.
συλλαμβάνω, w. dat. to
take in common with,
help, assist.
συμπονέω, w. dat., to work
with, help, assist.
reA&w,to accomplish, fulfil.
ὑπέρ, το. gen., instead or in
behalf of, on account
of; w. acc., above, be-
yond.
φρονέω, to think; μέγα
φρονεῖν, to be haughty.
᾿Ανὴρ πονηρὸς δυςτυχεῖ, κἂν εὐτυχῇ. Bioc κράτιστος, ἂν Supod' κρατῇς. Li-
γᾷν μᾶλλον, ἢ λαλεῖν πρέπει. Ὃ τι ἂν ποιῆτε, νομίζετε ὁρᾷν ϑεόν. Φίλος
φίλῳ συμπονῶν αὑτῷ πονεῖ.
Ὁ μάλιστα εὐτυχῶν μὴ μέγα φρονείτω.
δεῖ, τὰ βελτίω δὲ προςδοκᾷν ἀεί.
ψην ἀσκεῖτε καὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ.
γος ἀπέῤῥει.
ἐπόνει.
oinre), ὦ φίλοι.
Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι ϑνητοὶ μὴ φρονούντων ὑπὲρ ϑεούς.
Οὐδέποτ᾽ ἀϑυμεῖν τὸν κακῶς πράττοντα
Τῷ πονοῦντι ϑεὸς συλλαμβάνει.
᾿Απὸ τῆς Νέστορος γλώττης, ὥςπερ μέλι, ὁ λό-
Ὁ Σωκράτης τοῦ σώματος οὐκ ἠμέλει, τοὺς δὲ ἀμελοῦντας οὐκ
Eide, ὦ ϑεός, τελοίης (τελοῖς) μοι τὴν εὐχήν. Etde εὐτυχοῖτε (ebru
Θεοῦ ϑέλοντος,3 κἂν (καὶ ἂν) ἐπὶ ῥιπὸς πλέοις.
Δικαιοσῦ-
Bad men are unfortunate, even if they are fortunate. If God were willing,
we could sail even on a reed. Whatever thou doest, believe, God sees it.
Friends, who work with friends, work for themselves. Practise justice in word
and deed. The Greeks neglected neither the body nor the mind. O that ye,
O gods, would fulfil my desire! O that thou wert happy, my (Ὁ) friend!
Friends should work with friends! It is well to practise virtue.
XLVI. Vocabulary.
(c) Contract Verbs in -6w in the Pres. and Impf. Act.
"Auavpöw, to darken, de- ἀμέλεια, -ac, 7, careless- ἀνθρώπινος, -7, “ον, hu-
stroy, weaken, blunt. ness. man.
1 § 158, 7. (a). 3416], 5. * Genitive Absolute.
108 CONTRACT PURE VERA: [6 97,
ἀποῤῥοή, -ἧς, 7, a flowing ζητέω, to seek, strive. ὄρεξις, -εως, ἡ, a striving
off, a source. ζωῇ, -ἧς, ἡ, life. gfter, a desire.
δολόω, to outwit, trick, Detar, -d, -ov, godlike, ὀρϑόω, to make straight,
deceive. divine. erect, raise up.
δουλόω, to enslave, sub- ἔνα, in order that, that, obre—otre, neither—nor.
jugate. (after a principal tense ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ, who-
ἐλευϑερόω, to set free,to with tlie subj.; aftera ever, whatever.
free. historical tense with the ovv-e£-onoröw, to make e-
ἐξισόω, to make equal. opt.). qual.
ζηλόω, to strive after, imi- κοινωνία, -ac, 7, commu- τυφλόω, to make blind; to
tate, value, think hap- πίοῃ, intercourse. blind.
py, admire. ες λιμός, -οὔ, 6, hunger. χαλεπῶς, with difficulty.
Τὸ ἀληϑὲς κάλλος, ὅπερ ἐκ ϑείας κοινωνίας ἔχει τὴν ἀποῤῥοῆν, obre πόνος ἣ
λιμὸς ἢ ἀμέλειά τις, οὔτε ὁ πολὺς χρόνος ἀμαυροῖ. Αἱ φιλίαι τὰ ἔϑη ζητοῦσε
avvefouowüv. Χαλεπῶς ἂν ταῖς τῶν ἀγαϑῶν ἀρεταῖς ἐξισοίης (ἐξισοίς) τοὺς
ἐπαίνους. Etvouia ἀμαυροῖ ὕβριν. Ζήλου, ὦ παῖ, τοὺς ἐσθλοὺς καί σώφρονας
ἄνδρας. Πολλοὺς κακῶς πράττοντας ὀρϑοῖ τύχη. ἸΠλῆϑος κακῶν τὴν ἀνϑρω»
πίνημ ζωὴν ἀμαυροῖ. Αἱ περί τι apadpal ὀρέξεις τυφλοῦσιν εἰς τἄλλα! τὴν ψν-
xiv. Τὴν ἀρετὴν καὶ τὴν σοφίαν ζηλῶμεν. Χρυσός ἐστιν ὁ δουλῶν ϑνητῶν
φρένας. Ol πολέμιοι τὸ στράτευμα ἡμῶν ἐδόλονυν. Οἱ νεανίαι τὴν σοφίαν ζῃ-
λοῖεν. Οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπλησίαζον, ἵνα τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους ἐλευϑεροῖεν.
The violent striving after anything makes the soul blind for everything else.
The enemies approach, in order that they may free the prisoners. Imitate, O
youths, noble and wise men! It is not easy to make praise equal ta the vir-
tunes of the good. We love youths who strive (particip.) after wisdom. The
enemies freed the prisoners. May violent desire not make your soul blind for
everything else. Youths should strive after virtue.
ΧΙ ΤΙ. Vocabulary.
(d) Contract Verbs in-awin the Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pasa.
᾿Αδυνατέω, to be unable. set my mind or heart μηχανάομαι, mdehinor, ta
ἀεικής, -éc, unseemly, dis-_ upon, desire. contrive.
graceful. εὐεργετέω, w. ace, to do ὁμοίως, in like manner,
ἀκροάομαι, w.gen„to hear, well to, benefit. alike.
listen to. ἤδομαι, w. pass. aor. and πειράομᾳι, 10, pass. aor., to
ἀξιόω (τινά tivoc),tothink fut., to rejoice. try.
deserving,considerwor- ἡμεροδρόμος, -ov, ὁ, (rnn- TIuaw, to esteem, honor.
thy, desire, wish. ning through the day,) ὑπόδημα,-ατος, τό, (bound
γάρ, for. a courier. under) a sandal, a shoe.
eire — εἶτε, sive — sive; ἰάομαι, to heal. χράομαι, w. dat., to use;
whether — or. _ μακάριος, -ü, -ov, blessed, _ utor.
ἐπιϑυμέω, w. gen. or inf,to happy. ὠφελέω, w. acc., to benefit,
Ὁμοίως ἀμφοῖν ἀκροᾶσϑαι dei. "Ὅταν ἀδυνατῇς τῷ πλούτῳ χρῇῴσαϑαι, Ti δια-
1 By Crasis instead of τὰ ἄλλα.
re iz
$ 97.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 109
ψέρεις τοῦ πένητος; Etvouc λόγος λύπην ἰᾶται. Τιμώμενοι πάντες ἤδονται
βροτοί. Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι πολλὰ μηχανῶνται. Μακάριος, ὃς οὐσίαν καὶ νοῦν ἔχει"
χρῆται γὰρ εἰς a! δεῖ καλῶς. Ὁ ἀγαϑὺς ὑπὸ πάντων τιμᾶται. Τλώττης πειρῶ
κρατεῖν. Περικλῆς ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων ἠγαπᾶτο καὶ ἐτιμᾶτο. Ol ἡμεροδρόμοε
οὐκ ἐχρῶντο ὑποδήμασιν ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς. Οὐκ ἀεικές, ἐάν τις ὑπ᾽ ἐχϑρῶν ἐξαπα-
τᾶται. Εἶϑε πάντες γονεῖς ὑπὸ τῶν τέκνων ἀγαπῷντο. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ ὑπὸ πάν-
τῶν ἀγαπάσϑων. Εἶτε ὑπὸ φίλων ἐϑέλεις ἀγαπῶσϑαι, τοὺς φίλους εὐεργέτει,
εἶτε ὑπό τινος πόλεως ἐπιϑυμεῖς τιμᾶσϑαι, τὴν πόλιν ὠφέλει, εἶτε ὑπὸ τῆς 'EA-
λάδος πάσης ἀξιοῖς ἐπ’ ἀρετῇ ϑαυμάζεσϑαι, τὴν Ἑλλάδα πειρῶ εὖ ποιεῖν.
Listen to both, in like manner, O judge! It is not disgraceful if we are de-
ceived by enemies. Kind words heal sorrow. Man rejoices in being (part.)
honored by others. We wish to be loved by our friends and honored by the
citizens. Among (παρά, w. dat.) the Lacedaemonians old men were extraordi-
narily honored. Let the good man always be loved and honored by all. The
judge should hear both.
XLVIIL Vocabulary.
(e) Contract Verbsin-£w in the Pres.and Impf Mid. or Pass.
"Adixéw, w. acc. to do Eros, -eo¢ = -ovc, TO, a tnd. fut. after verbs of
wrong to, injure, do in- year.. care.
Justice. ἰσχυρός, -&, «ὅν, strong, πλησίος, -4, -ov, near; of
αἰδέομαι, w. ace, to be powerful. πλησίον, those near,
ashamed beforeany one, κατα-φρονέω, τὸ. gen., to neighbors, fellow-men.
reverence, esteem, wor despise; pass.,katagpo- πολιορκέω, to besiege.
ship. véouat, to be despised. προς-ποιέω, to add; mid.,
ἀπιστέω, w. dat., to disbe- Aotdopéw, to scold, abuse. to acquire, claim, or
lieve ; pass., ἀπιστέομαι, ploéw, to hate. make for oneself.
to be disbelieved. ὅπως, how; in order that; φοβέω, to frighten; mid.
ἀπό-λῦσις, -εως, ἡ, deliv- w. subj. after a princi- τ. pass. aor., to be fright-
erance, liberation. pal tense; w. opt., after ened, fear.
δέομαι, w. pass. aor. and an historical tense; w.
gen., to want, need.
Aldot ϑεόν. Τὸν ἀγαϑὸν ἄνδρα ποιοῦ ἑταῖρον. Φιλοῦντες φιλοῦνται, μι-
σοῦντες μισοῦνται. Τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δεῖ πρᾶον" εἶναι, ὅπως οἱ πλησίον αἰδῶνταε
μᾶλλον, ἢ φοβῶνται. Αἰδεῖσϑαι δεῖ φίλους. ᾿Απιστοῦνται οἱ λάλοι, κἂν ἀλη-
ϑεύωσιν. Οἱ Πέρσαι ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐμισοῦντο καὶ κατεφρονοῦντου ‘O μη-
δὲν ἀδικῶν οὐδενὸς δεῖταιξ νόμου. Τροία δέκα ἔτη ὑπὸ τῶν “Ἔλλήνων ἐπολιορ-
κεῖτο. Οἱ πολῖται ἐφοβοῦντο, μὴ ἡ πόλις πολιορκοῖτο. Λοιδορούμενος φέρε" ὁ
γὰρ λοιδορῶν, ἐὰν ὁ λοιδορούμενος μὴ προςποιῆται, λοιδορεῖται λοιδορῶν. Μη-
δεὶς φοβείσϑω ϑάνατον, ἀπόλυσιν κακῶν.
Worship (pl.) God. One who loves (part.) is loved, one who hates (part.)
is hated. Those who do no (not) injustice (part.) need no law. The king of
the Persians was hated and despised by the Hellenes. The citizens fear, that
1 Instead of εἰς ταῦτα, εἰς 4. 3 See $ 48. 3 § 158, δ. (a).
10
110 CONTRAOT PURE VERBS. [§ 98.
the town will be besieged by the enemies. May you make (pl.) good men your
friends. Parents delight to be honored (part.) by their children. It is not
Gisgracefal to be hated by the bad.
XLIX. Vocabulary.
(f) Contract Verbs in-öo in the Pres.and Impf. Mid‘or Pass.
AAxh, ns, ἢ, strength. ἐξ-αμαυρόω, duavpow μερίζω, to part, divide.
γαυρόω, to make proud; strengthened by ἐξ, σάρξ, -ρκός, 7, flesh.
mid. το. pass. aor.to be page 107. rareıvöw, to bring low,
proud, pride oneself m. ξημιόω, to punish. humble.
ϑηλόω, to make known or ἦϑος, -coc = -ovg, τό, cus- ὑπερήφανος, -ov, haughty,
evident, show. tom, manner, the char- proud. .
ἐναντιόομαι, w. dat. ad- acter. χειρόομαι, to worst, sub-
versor, to oppose, resist, unre—unre, neither—nor. due, subjugate.
thwart.
Δουλούμεϑα τῇ σαρκὶ καὶ τοῖς πάϑεσιν. Ὑπὸ τῆς ἀνάγκης πάντα δουλοῦ-
ται ταχύ. Ἢ φιλία εἰς πολλοὺς μεριζομένη ἐξαμαυροῦται. Τοὺς φίλους éAev-
ϑερῶμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἐχϑροὺς χειρώμεϑα. Μὴ γαυροῦ σοφίᾳ," μήτ᾽ ἀλκῇ, μήτε πλού-
τῳ. Τὸ ἦϑος μάλιστα ἐκ τῶν ἔργων δηλοῦται. 'O ὑπερήφανος ταπεινοῖτο. Οὐ
καλόν tori, τῇ σοφίᾳ γαυροῦσϑαι. Οἱ τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς ἐναντιούμενοι ἄξιοί εἶσι ζη-
μιοῦσϑαι. Οἱ στρατιῶται ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἐδολοῦντο. Ἰίάντες xaxot ζη-
uLoivTo. ᾿
The immoderate are enslaved to the flesh and the passions. Be (pl.) not
proud of your wisdom (dat.). May the haughty be brought low. It is dis-
graceful to thwart the good. The citizens fear, that they may be subjugated by
(ὑπό, w. gen.) the enemies. Cowardly (bad) soldiers are punished by the gene-
ral. One who prides himself in (part.) his (the) wisdom (dat.) is not wise.
§98. Contract Verbs which, contrary to the rule, retain the short
Characteristic-vowel in forming the Tenses.
1. As in several uncontracted pure verbs, the short characteristic-vowel is re-
tained (4 94) contrary to the rule in forming the tenses; so also in several con-
tract verbs. Most of these verbs take a σ in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the
first Aor. Pass., and the tenses derived from both of these forms. This is indi-
cated by the phrase, Pass. with o (ᾳ 95). They are the following:
(a) -ἄω.
γελάω, to laugh, Fut. yeAdoouat; Aor. ἐγέλᾶάσα. Pass. with o.
Ado (usually ἐλαύνω)͵ to drive, Fut. ἐλάσω (Att. ἐλῶ, § 88), etc.
9 AG, to bruise, ϑλάσω, etc. Pass. with o.
κ λάω, to break, κλάσω, etc. Pass. with o.
χα λάω, to loosen, χαλάσω, etc. Pass. with o.
1 § 161, 2. (a), (δ). 516], 8.
§ 98.) CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 111
δαμάω (usually δαμάζω), to subdue, Aor. ἐδάμᾶσα. Pass. with σ.
«8p G4, to transport, to sell, Fut. περάσω; Aor. ἐπέρᾶσα; Perf. rexépdxa; but
περάω, to pass over (Intrans.), Fut. περάσω; Aor. évépdoa. (These seven
verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a).
σπάω, to draw, σπάσω, etc. Pass. with o.
© x 44a, to loose, to open, σχἅσω, ete.
: \
(Ὁ) -Ew.
&xéopat, to heal, ἀκέσομαι, ἠκεσάμην ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7xeouaı ; Aor. Pass,
ἠκέσϑην.
ἀλέω, to grind, to beat, Fut. ἀλῶ (§ 83); Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἀλήλεσμαι (§ 89).
ἀρκέω, to suffice, etc. Pass. with σ (also to be sufficient).
ἐμέω, to vomit, Fut. ἐμέσω, ete.; Perf. Act. ἐμήμεκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἐμή-
μέσμαι (§ 89).
ζέω, to boil, usually intrans., and ζέννυμε, usually trans. Pass. with o.
ξέω, to scrape. Pass. with o.—reAéw, to accomplish, Fut. τελῶ (§ 83). Pass.
with o.
τρέω, to tremble-—x é ὦ, to pour.
Remark. The following have in some tenses the long, in others, the short
vowel :
alvéu, to praise, Fut. αἰνέσω; Aor. fveoa; Perf. fvexa; Aor. Pass. ῥνέϑην ;
but Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἤνημαι.
alp£&w, to take, Aor. Pass. ῥρέϑην ; also 7; 6. g. αἱρήσω, Yona, ἥρημαι.
γαμέω, to marry, Fut. γαμῶ (§ 83); Aor. Eynua; Perf. yeyaunna ; Aor. Pass,
ἐγαμήϑην (I was taken to wife).
δέω, to bind, δήσω, Ednoa, ἐδησάμην ; but dédexa, dédepat, ἐδέϑην ; Fut. Perf.
δεδήσομαι, which takes the place of the Fat. Pass. δεϑήσομαι not used by
the Attic writers.
καλέω, to call, Fut. καλῶ (ἢ 88); Aor. ἐκάλεσα ; Perf. Act. κέκληκα ; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. κέκλημαι, 7) am called; Fut. Perf. κεκλήσομαι, I shall be called ; Aor.
Pass. &kAjdnv; Fut. Pass. κληϑήσομαι; Fut, Mid. καλοῦμαι; Aor. Mid.
éxadtoauny.
08 éw, to desire, old Attic Fut. ποϑέσομαι ; Aor. ἐπόϑεσα ; elsewhere ποϑήσω,
éroSnoa; Perf. Act. πεπόϑηκα ; πεπόϑημαι; Aor. Pass. ἐποϑέσϑην.
τον ἔω, laböro, Fut. πονήσω, etc. (to work) ; πονέσω (to be in pain); Perf. πεπό-
νῆκα in both senses.
(c) -όω.
ἀρόω, to plough, Fut. ἀρόσω, Aor. ἤροσα : Perf. Mid. or. Pass. ἀρήρομαι (4 89);
Aor. Pass. ἠρόϑην. ᾿ ᾿
112 TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS. [8 99.
§ 99. Para
ACTIVE.
Tenses. Characteristic a. Characteristic e. Characteristic 0.
Present on(ü-w)ö, to draw, | τελ(ἐ-ω )ῶ, to accom- | äp(ö-w)@, to plough,
Imperfect |£on{a-ov)wv br éA(e-ov ovr | plish,| np(o-ov)ovv
Perfect tordxa τετέλεκα üp-npora
Pluperfect | ἐσπάἄκειν ἐτετελέκειν ἀρ-ηρόκειν
Future σπάσω τελῶ ἀρόσω
ἔσπᾶσα ἐτέλεσα ἤροσα
PAS
Aorist [ἐσπά-σ-ϑην ἰἐτελέ-σ-ϑην | ἠρόϑην
Verbal adjectives: σπα-σ τέος, -τέα, -τέον
Rem. 1. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. with 0, see $ 95; and on the
Attic reduplication in ἀρ-ήρομαι, $ 89, (a).—The further inflection of ἔσπα-σ-
pat, ἐσπά-σ-μην, τετέλε-σ-μαι, ἐτετελέ-σ-μην is like that of κεκέλευ-σ-μαι, éxe-
κελεύ-σ-μην (§ 95).
Rem. 2. On the Attic Fat. (reAéow = ee τελεῖς, etc., τελέσομαιε = rehob-
pat, τελεῖ, etc.), see $ 83.
Rem. 3. Two contract verbs assume o in the Pass, although they lengthen
the characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. yOu, to heap, Fut. χώσω,
Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέχωσμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐχώσϑην, and 7p 4, to give an oracle,
Fut. χρήσω, Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέχρησμαι, Aor. &xphodnv.—X p dou at, to use,
Fat. χρήσομαι, has in the Perf. κέχρημαι, but in the Aor. ἐχρήσϑην. On the
contrary, ἐλάω, αἰνέω, alpéw, δέω and ἀρόω, do not assume o, although the char-
acteristic-vowel in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and in the Aor. Pass., remains short.
Comp. § 98. |
L. Vocabulary.
Formation ofthe Tenses of Contract Verbs.
’Aypöc, -οὔ, ὃ, ager, a field. &aw, to let, allow, permit, κτάομαι, to acquire, gain ;
ἀδαήμων, -ov, inexpe- leave. perf., to possess, have.
rienced, ignorant. ἕλκος, -eo¢ = -ους, τό, ul- λογίζομαι, to think, con-
ἀκέομαι, to heal. cus, a sore, an ulcer. sider, reflect.
ἀκολουϑέω, το. dat., to fol- ἰατρός, -οὔ, ὁ, a physician. λόγιος, -ἃ, -ov, eloquent,
low, go behind, imitate. xaipıog, -a, -ov, and καί. | intelligent.
ἀνελευϑερία, -ας, ἡ, tllibe- ριος, -ov, at the right μηδέποτε, το. imp. or subj.
ralitas, disgraceful ava-_ time, opportune, fitting. in an imp. sense, never.
rice. καρπόομαι, to enjoy the olxéw, to dwell, inhabit.
ἀτυχέω, to be unhappy. fruits of. olxodouéw, to build a
δῆλος, -n, -ov, evident. κοσμέω, to adorn. house, build.
§ 99. ] TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS. 118
digms.
MIDDLE.
Characteristic e. Characteristic ὁ.
on(a-o)ö-uar
torr(a-0)o-unv
ἔσπα-σ-μαι
ἐσπά-σ-μην
σπᾶσομαι
ἐσπασάμην
SIVE.
Future [σπα-σ-ϑήσομαιει [τελε-σ-ϑήσομαι | ἀροϑήσομαι
τελε-σ-τέος, -éa, -ἔον ἀρο-τέος, -éa, -Eov.
τελ(έ-ο)γοῦ-μαι
ἐτελ(ε-ὀ)ού-μην.
τετέλε-σεμαι
ἐτετελέ-σ- μην
τελοῦμαι
ἐτελεσάμην
ἀρ(ό-ο)οῦ-μαι
ἠρ(ο-ὀ)ού-μην
ἀρ-ῆηρομαι
πενιχρός, -ἄ, -όν, poor. σιωπηλός, -f, -ὄν, silent. ὑψόω, to elevate.
«λουτέω, to be or become σφάλλω, to shake, make χηρόω, to deprive, τοῦ,
rich. fall, deceive. \ bereave.
Ol rept τὸν Λεωνίδαν τριακόσιοι! γενναίως μαχόμενοι ἐτελεύτησαν. Nixy-
σὸν ὀργὴν τῷ λογίζεσϑαιδ καλῶς. Μακάριος, ὅςτις εὐτύχησεν εἰς τέκνα. 11ολ»
λοὺς κακῶς πράττοντας ὥρϑωσε τύχη. Σφάλλει ἐκείνους, οὖς ἂν ὑψώσῃ τύχη.
Ῥῴδια πάντα Seq τελέσαι. Μηδέποτε κρίνειν ἀδαήμονας ἄνδρας ἐάσῃς. Ἔν
οἷς ἂν τόποις τις ἀτυχήσῃ, τούτοις πλησιάζων οὐχ ἥδεται. Ὁ νεανίας ἀκολου-
“ϑησάτω τῇ σοφίᾳ. Ὁ ποιητὴς τὸν λογιώτατον Ὀδυσσέα σιωπηλότατον πεποίη-
κεν. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ πατρίδα κοσμήσουσιν. Πολλάκις πενιχρὸς ἀνὴρ αἶψα μάλ᾽
ἐπλούτησεν. Πολλοὶ κεκτημένοι μὲν πολλὰ οὐ χρῶνται δὲ di ἀνελευϑερίαν.
Aboavdpos, ὁ Σπαρτιάτης, μεγάλων tipi ἠξιώϑη. Ol ἡμεροδρόμοι οὐκ ἐχρή-
σαντο ὑποδήμασιν" ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς. Ἣ πόλις πολλῶν ἀνδρῶνδ ἐχηρώϑη. Οἱ ἰα-
τροὶ τὰ ἔλκη ἀκέσονται. ‘H γλῶττα σιγὴν καιρίαν κεκτημένη καὶ γέροντι καὶ
νέῳ τιμὴν φέρει. Οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον ἡδοναῖς ἐκτήσατο. Οὗτε τῷ καλῶς ἀγρὸν φυ-
τευσαμένῳ δῆλον, ὅςτις καρπώσεται, οὔτε τῷ καλῶς οἰκίαν οἰκοδομησαμένῳ δῆ.
λον, ὅςτις οἰκήσει.
The good will love (ἀγαπάω) and honor the good. Noble youths will follow
virtue. The citizens will think the brave warriors deserving of great honor.
Alexander, king of the Macedonians (ὁ Μακεδών, -övoc), conquered Darius
king of the Persians. Leonidas and his 300 warriors adorned their country by
their bravery. The citizens thought the brave warriors deserving of great honors.
Fulfil (aor.) for me, O Zeus, my prayer! The soldiers have conquered the ene-
mies. The war has robbed the town of many citizens. The enemies were con-
quered. The brave warriors will be thought by the citizens deserving of great
honors. The physicians healed the ulcer. No one will gain praise by pleasures.
The town has been robbed of many citizens. It has all (ptur.) been well fulfilled.
1j, e. Leonidas and his 300 warriors. *§161,3. 5516], 2. (a), (6).
4 § 158, 7. (y}. δ § 158, 5. (a).
10*
114 IMPURE VERBS.—STRENGTHENING THE stem. [88 100, 101.
§100. 2. Impure Verbs.
Pure and Impure Stem.—Theme.
1. Impure verbs, i. e. those whose characteristic is a consonant
(§ 92), undergo several changes in the stem, a part of which take
place in the formation of the tenses; these changes in the stem are
as follows :
(a) There is either a strengthening consonant added ; e. g. run-r-w,
stem TTII; κράζ-ω, stem KPAT;
(Ὁ) or the stem-vowel is lengthened ; 6. g. pevy-c, stem PIT;
170-0, stem 440; τήκ-ω, stem TAK;
(c) or there is a change of the stem-vowel in the tenses; this
change may be called variation, and the vowel subject to the change,
the variable vowel; 6. g. κλέπτ-ω, &-xlda-ny, xé-xdog-a; Comp.
English fly, flew, flown,—sing, sang, sung.
2. In verbs, whose stem is thus changed in the formation of the
tenses, the two different stems must be distinguished, viz. the origi-
nal, simple one, and the full, strengthened one; the former is called
the pure, the latter the impure, stem. The Pres. and Impf. of these
verbs contain the impure stem, the secondary tenses (when such are
formed), and especially the second Aor., the pure stem; but the
other tenses either the pure or impure; e. g.
Pres. rün-T-@, to strike, Aor. II. Pass. 2&-rör-nv Fat. τύψω (τύπ-σω)
᾿ς Aein-w, toleave, Aor. IL Act. ἐ-λίπεον λείψω (λείπ-σω)
8. For every form of a verb which cannot be derived from the
Pres. tense in use, another Pres. is assumed, mostly for the mere
purpose of formation ; this may be called the Theme (ϑέμα), and is
printed in capitals, so as to distinguish it from the form of the Pres.
in actual use; thus, 6. g. φεύγω is the Pres. form in use, DTI'R is
the assumed Pres. form, or the 7'heme, in order to construct the se-
cond Aor., é-qvy-ov.
§ 101. Strengthening of the Stem.
1. The strengthening of the stem by consonants consists in mere-
ly strengthening the simple characteristic consonant of the stem by
means of another consonant; e. g.
τύπτω, to strike, _ Aor. U. Pass. 2-rör-nv
τάττω, toarrange, “ “ E-räy-nv
κράζω, to cry out, “ Act. E-kpäy-ov.
2. Yet the stem, strengthened in this way, is found only in the
§ 102.) VERBS.—CHANGE OF THE BTEM-VOWEL. 113
Pres. and Impf. ; in the other tenses the strengthening letters are
omitted and the simple stem appears; e. g.
Pres. τύπτω Impf. ἔτυπτον Aor. U. Pass. ἐτύπην Fat. τύψω (τύπσω)Ὶ.
Remark. The characteristic of the pure stem, 6. g. 7 in TYTI-Q, is called the
pure characteristic; that of the impure stem, 6. g. tr in τύπτ-ω, the impure
characteristic.
8. The short stem-vowel of many verbs is lengthened in the Pres.
and Impf.; this short vowel reappears in ms second Aor., and in
the Fut. of liquid verbs. Thus;
ἃ is changed into 7 in mute verbs, e.g. (ἔ-λᾶϑ-ον) λήϑω
a ai“ liquid “ “« ({φἄν-ὦ ) φαίνω
e 6 es « “ἜΘ: (φϑερ-ὦ) φϑείρω
ξ " εἰ ““ mute “ “ (E-Ain-ov) λείπω
t as Eee 98 and liquid verbs, “ (E-rplß-nv) τρίβω
© “ gu 6 “ 6s (ἐ-φρύγ-ην) φρύγω
6 “ en “ mute ee “ (E-döy-ov) φεύγω.
8102. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel.
1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel, § 100, 1. (c), oc-
curs only in the Secondary tenses, except in a few first Perfects.
2. Most mute, as well as liquid, verbs, with a monosyllabic stem
and with 8 as a stem-vowel, take the variable vowel, namely, short
ὦ in the second Aor. instead of ¢; 6. g.
τρέπ-ω, to turn, Aor. Il. Act. &-rp dm - ov
τρέφ-ω, to nourish, “ Pass. E-rpüd-m
στέλλ-ω, to send, ων “ ἐ-στἄλ-ην
φϑείρ-ω, to destroy, “ “« ἐ-φϑἄρ-ην.
But not polysyllables; e. g. ἀγγέλλω, to announce, Aor. II. Pass. ἠγγέλην.
' ‘Bem. 1. This change of the stem-vowel does not occur in the second Aor.
Pass. of some verbs of this class (the second Aor. Act. not being used), because
the second Aor. Pass. cannot be mistaken for the Impf., see ὁ 103, Rem. 2; e.g.
βλέπω, to see, Impf. &-BAen-ov, second Aor. Pass. &-PAer-nv.
3. Liquid verbs with monosyllabic stems and with the stem-vowel
8, take the variable «, not only in the second Aor., but also in the
first Perf. and first Plup. Act. and the Perf. and sup: Mid. or
Pass. and the first Aor. Pass.; 6. g.
στέλλω, to send, Fut. oreA-& Perf. E-orai-ka ἔ-σταλ-μαι Aor. ἐ-στάλ-ϑην.
But not polysyllables; 6. g. ἤγγελκα, ἠγγέλϑην from ἀγγέλλω. Comp. No. 2.
4. Those mute and liquid verbs, which have 8 in the final stem-
syllable of the Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf.; but
those which have & in the final stem-syllable, take oz; liquid-verhs,
which have ὃ or δὲ in this syllable, take 0; 6. g.
116 REMARKS ON THE SECORDARY TENSES. [9 108.
τρέφω, to nourish, τέτροφα δέρω, to flay, dédopa
λείπω, to leave, λέλοιπα oreipw, to sow, ἔσπορα.
5. The ae | take the variable o, in the first Perf., contrary
to the rule in No. 1
κλέπτω, to steal, first Perf kéxAoga, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέκλεμμαι (xé-
κλαμμαι very rare and only poetic).
λέγω, to ole: first Perf. ξυνείλοχα, ἐξείλοχα; but Perf. Mid. or Pass.
συνείλεγμαι.
πέμπω, to send, first Perf. πέπομφα; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. πέπεμμαι.
τρέπω, to turn, first Perf. rerpoga, (in form like the second Perf. of τρέφω, to
nourish).
6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with
the stem-vowel 8, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the variable « in
the Perf. Mid. or Pass.; still the « is not found in the first Aor.
Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs; e. g.
στρέφω, to turn, Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἔστραμμαι, but first Aor. Pass. hr
τρέπω, to turn, τέτραμμαι, “ ἐξ ἐτρέφϑην
τρέφω, to nourish, ἔν τέϑραμμαι “ εἰ ἐϑρὲ
8108. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses.
The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting
the tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-
endings, -09, -όμην, -ην, τήσομαι, -α and -siv, to the pure character-
istic of the verb; 6. g. second: Aor. g-Aiz-ov, but first Aor. ἐ-παίδευ-
o-a; partly in being formed throughout from the unchanged pure
verb-stem, 6. g. λείπω 8-1 i 2-08, φεύγω ἔφυ ron; and partly in
having the variable vowel, e. g. στρέφω, ἐ-στρἄφ-ην, στραφτήσομαι: ;
but ἐ-στρέφ-ϑην.
Rem. 1. The second Perf. does not always retain the short stem-vowel, but it
either lengthens it in many verbs, viz. @ into 7, and after p and vowels into ἃ ;
6. δ:
κράζω, to ery out. second Aor. E-kpäy-ov second Perf. xé-xpday-a
φρίσσω, to shudder, stem : $PIK(?) “ πέ-φρῖκ-α
ϑάλλω, to bloom, Fat. 347-6 4 τέ-ϑηλ-α;
᾿ 80, πέφηνα, λέληϑα from $AN-w, AAO-w; or it retains the long vowel or diph- —
thong of the Pres.; 6. g. πέφευγα from φεύγω, but second Aor. Act. ἔφὔγον, ré-
τήκα from τήκω, but second Aor. Pass. ἐτάκην.
Rem. 2. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. would not be distinguished from
the Impf., at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no second Aor.
Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., because this has a different end-
ing from the Impf.; e. g.
γράφω Impf. Eypégov Aor. II. Act. wanting Aor. IL Pass. &ypägm.
65104, 105.] MUTE VERBS.— CHARACTERISTIC. 117
A. Mute VERBS.
§104. Introduction.
Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three classes; in
each of these classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres.
and Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure characteris-
tic (§ 100, 2).
1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (ß, 2, g pure char-
acteristic; πὶ impure characteristic) ; 6. g
(a) pure characteristic, πέμπ-ω, to send, τρίβ-ὠ, to rub, γράφ-ω,
to write ;
(Ὁ) impure characteristic, rvwz-0, to strike, (pure characteristic 2,
pure stem 7'TII), pee to injure, (8, BAAB), gint-o,
to hurl, (9, PI®).
2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (x, 7, x pure
characteristic; oo or Attic zz, impure characteristic) ; ‚eg
(a) pure characteristic, πλέκ-ω, to weave, ἄγτω, ἐς to lead, τεύχ-ω, to
prepare, .
(Ὁ) impure characteristic, φρίσσ-ω, Att. φρίττ-ο, to shudder, (pure
characteristic x, pure stem DPIK), r&oo-w, Att. τάτε-ω, to
arrange, (y, TAT), 700-0, Att. βήττ-ω, to cough, (y, BHX).
8. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (τ, δ, & pure char-
acteristic; ¢ impure characteristic) ; 6. g
(a) pure characteristic, ἀνύτ-, to complete, ἄδ-ω, to sing, 220-0,
to persuade ;
(Ὁ) impure characteristic, φράζ-ω, to say, (pure characteristic ὃ,
pure stem DP.AA).
8105. Remarks on the Oharacteristie.
1. Some verbs in -σσω, -rrw, have a Tau-mute—not a Kappa-mute—for
the pure characteristic: ἀρμόττω (ἁρμόζω), to fit, Fut. -όσω ;--ἐρέσσω, to
row, Fut. -éow ;—7 400 w, to scatter, Fut. -άσω ;—7 AG σ σω, to form, Fut. -ἄσω ;
-“-πτίσσοω, to pound, Fut. -iow.
The verb νάσσω, to press together, varies between the two formations, Fut.
νάξω, etc., Perf. Mid. or Pass. vévacuaz, verbal adjective ναστός.
2. The following verbs in -ζω, which for the most part express a call or sound,
have for their pure characteristic not a Tau but a Kappa-mute, usually y, viz
αἰάζω, to groan, Fut. αἰάξω; ἀλαλάζω, to shout; κοίζω, to squeak, to grunt
(like a swine); «p4&¢.w, to scream; κρώζω, to caw; μαστίζω, to whip; ὁ ὃ ἅ-
ζω, to bite; ol μώ ζω, to lament, Fut. οἰμώξομαι; ὁλολύ ζω, to howl; prvoréa-
ζω, to drag to and fro; στάζω and σταλάζω, to trickle; oreva ζω, to sigh;
118 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. ([§ 106.
στηρίζω, to make firm; στίζω, to prick; συρέζω, to whistle; σ φά ζω (Att
σφάττω)͵ to kill; σφ ύ ζω, to throb; tpi lw, to chirp (TErpiya); φ λ ὑ ζω, to bubble.
3. The following verbs in -¢w vary between the two modes of formation:
βαστάζω, to bear, Fut. -ἄσω, etc., Aor. ἐβαστάχϑην ;—vvaralw, to nod, to
sleep, Fut. -άσω and -άξω ;---π α ζω, to sport, Fut. παιξοῦμαι ($ 116, 3) and παί-
£ouaı, Aor. ἔπαισα, Perf. Mid. or Pass. πέπαισμαι.
4. The following verbs in -¢w have for a pure characteristic yy: κλάζ ji
to sound, to clang, Perf. xé-xAayy-a, Fut. κλάγξω, Aor. ἔκλαγξα ;--π λά ζω, to
cause to wander, Fut. πλάγξω, etc., Aor. Pass. ie ;-.σαλπίζω, to blow
a trumpet, Fut. -ἔγξω.
§ 106. Formation of the Tenses of Mute Verbs.
Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. with
the tense-characteristic o, and the first Perf. and first Plup. Act.
with the aspirated endings -& and -siv, when the characteristic is a
Pi or Kappa-mute ; but with the endings -x«, -xeıv, when it is a Tau-
mute. The Tau-mute, however, is omitted before x, and before p,
and z in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. is changed into o; but this o is
omitted before o of the personal-endings; 6. g. maida, to persuade,
πέπεισμαι, -σται; poate, to speak, πέφρασμαι, -crat; still, the se-
cond Pers. is πέπει-σαι. The vowels a, «, v in the verbs which
have a Tau-mute as a characteristic, are short before endings with
the tense-characteristic o and x (-xa, -xeır) ; 6. g. φράζω, φρᾶσω,
ἔφρᾶσα, wepgdxa; πλάσσω, to form, πλάσω ; νομίζω, to think, ἐνό-
pica; κλύζω, to wash, κλῦσω, etc.
Rem. 1. On the changes which the Mutes undergo ΕΣ the addition of the end-
ings beginning with o, J, μ or r, and before the aspirated endings -d, -elv, and
also on the lengthening of e into εἰ before o of verbs in -évdw or -ἔνϑω, 6. g.
σπένδ-ω, to make a libation, Fut. (orévd-cw) σπείσω, see § 8.
Rem. 2. When x precedes a Pi-mute, which serves as a characteristic, 6. g.
in πέμπ-ω, the u is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. before endings beginning
with 2; thus πέμπο:ω, to send, πέ-πεμ-μαι (instead of πέ-πεμπ-μαι, πέ-πεμμ-μαι),
κάμπτ-ω, to bend, κέ-καμ-μαι (instead of κέ-καμπ-μαι, κέ-καμμ-μαι). So also
when two y’s stand before x, one of them is omitted; 6. g. ofiyy-w, to bind,
ἔςσφιγ-μαι (instead of ἔ-σφιγγ-μαι).
Rem. 3. Verbs whose characteristic is a Tau-mute, do not form the second
Aor., in the Common Language.
Rem. 4. Endings beginning with o® drop the o after a mute, and the mute
is changed into an aspirate on account of the 3 following; 6. g. κεκρύφϑαε in-
stead of κεκρύψϑαι, πεπλέχϑαι instead of πεπλέξϑαι.
Rem. 5. The third person Pl. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., which, in pure
verbs, properly ends in -vra: and -vro, in impure verbs both mute and liquid,
cannot have these endings, on account of the accumulation of so many eonso-
nants. Hence this person is usually expressed by a periphrasis consisting of
§ 107.] MUTE VERBS. 119
the plural of the Perf. Part., and the third person Pi. Pres. and Impf. of εἶναι, to
be; sometimes however the v is dropped, and its place supplied by an 4, which is
aspirated before a Kappa and Pi-mute, but before a Tau-mute is unaspirated ;
6. g.
τρίβ-ω, to rub, TE-Tpıu-uat third Pers. Pl. rerpisära: (instead of τέτριβνται)
Plup. ἐτετρίφατο
πλέκ-ω, to twist, ne-nAey-uaı third Pers. Pl πεπλέχαται (instead of πέπλεκνται)
τάττ-ω, to arrange, Té-Tay-pat = reräxaras (instead of rerayvra:)
oxeval-w, to prepare, ἐ-σκεύασ-μαι “ ἐσκευάδαται (instead of ἐσκεύαδνται)
xopil-w, to separate, κε-χώρισ-μαι “ Kexwpidaraz( instead of κεχώριδνται).
PaRADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS.
8107. A. Verbs, whose Characterssticis a Pi-mute
(B, 2; 9).
(a) Pure Characteristic, B, x,.¢ (Fat po).
τρΐβοω, to rub.
ACTIVE.
Pres. | Ind. rpfß-o Subj. τρίβ-ω Imp. rpiß-e Inf. rplß-eıv Part. rplß-wv
Impf. | Ind. 2-rpiB-ov Opt. τρίβ-οιμι
Perf. | Ind. (τέ-τριβ-ἀ) ré-rpi¢-a Subj. τε-τρίφ-ω Imp. not used Inf. re-
rpld-Evaı Part. re-Tpid-O¢
Plup. | Ind. (é-re-rpi@-elv) ἐ-τε-τρῖφ-ειν Opt. τε-τρΐφ-οιμι
Fat. | Ind. (rpiB-ow) τρίψω Opt. τρίψοιμε Inf. rpipecv Part. τρίψων
Aor. 1. | Ind. &-rpıya Subj. rpiyo Opt. τρίψαιμι Imp. τρῖψον Inf. τρῖψαι
Part. τρίψας.
᾿ MIDDLE.
Pres. | Ind. rpfß-ouaı Subj. rpfß-wuat Imp. rpld-ov Inf. τρίβ-εσϑαι
Part. rpiß-Öuevoc
Impf. | Ind ἐ-τριβ-όμην Opt. rpiß-oiunmv
Perf. | Ind. | (τέ-τριβο-μαι) Imperative. Infinitive.
S. 1. | ré-rpep-pas (τέ-τριβ-σοὴ (τε-τρῖβ-ϑαι)
2. | τέ-τριψαι τέ-τριψο τε-τρίφ-ϑαι
8. | τέ-τριπ-ται τε-τρίφ-ϑω
D.1. | τε-τρίμ-μεϑον Participle.
2. | τέ-τριφ-ϑον τέ-τριφ-ϑοὸν τε-τριμ-μένος, -ἢ, -ον
3. | TE-Tpıd-dov τε-τρίφ᾽ϑων
P.1. | τε-τρίμ-μεϑα Subjunctive.
2. τέ-τριφ-ϑε ré-rpig-Se τε-τριμ-μένος ὦ
8. τε-τριμ-μένοι εἰσί(ν) | τε-τρίφ-ϑωσαν
or τε-τρίφ-ἅται or τε-τρίφ-ϑων
.| ἐ-τε-τρίμιμην DD. ἐ-τε-τρίμεμεϑον P. ἐ-τε-τρίμιμεϑα
8. ἐ-τέιτριψο b-ré-rpid-Bov b-ré-rpid-Ve
3. | é-ré-rper-To ἐ-τε-τρίφ-ϑην τε-τριμ-μένοι ἧσαν.
Opt. τε-τριμ-μένος εἴην
Fut. | Ind. τρίψομαι Opt. τριψοίμην Inf. τρίψεσϑαι Part. τριψόμενος
Aor.1. | Ind. &-rpıyaunv Subj. τρίψωμαι Opt. τριψαίμην Imp. τρῖψαι Inf.
τρίψασϑαι Part. τριψάμενος ;
F. Pf. | Ind. τε-τρίψομαι Opt. τε-τριψοίμην Inf. τε-τρίψεσϑαι Part. τε-τρι-
ψόμενος
120 MUTE VERBS. | [§ 106.
=
PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | Ind. (ἐ-τρίβ-ϑην) ἐ-τρίφ-ϑϑην Subj. τριφ-ϑῶ Opt. τριφ-ϑείην Inf.
τριφ-ϑῆναι Imp. τρίφ-ϑητι Part. τριφ-ϑείς
Fut. I. | Ind. τριφ-ϑήσομαι Opt. τριφ-ϑησοίμην Inf. τριφ-ϑήσεσϑαι Part.
τριφ-ϑησόμενος
ΑοΥ Π. | Ind. ἐ-τρίβεην Subj. rpiß-ö Opt. τρὶβ-εἰίην Imp. τρίβ-ηϑι Inf.
rpiß-nvaı Part. rpiß-eic
Fut.II. | Ind. rpiß-noouaı Opt. rpiß-noolunv Inf. rpiß-noeodaı Part. rpiß-
noopevoc.
Verbal adjective: (τριβ-τός) τριπ-τός, -H, -όν, τριπ-τέος, -éa, -Eov.
8108. (Ὁ) Impure Oharacteristic, nr in Pres. and
Impf. (Fut. -wo).
κόπτω, to cut.
ACTIVE. | MIDDLE.| PASSIVE.
Prea. KÖNT-W KÖTT-OuaL
Impf. ἔ-κοπτοον ἐ-κοπτ-όμην
Perf. I. |(κέ-κοπ-ἀ) κέ-κοφ- α κέ-κομ-μαι, like τέ-τριμμαι
Plup. I. ἐ-κε-κόφ-ειν ἐ-κε-κόμμην, like ἐ-τε-τρίμμην
Perf. II. κέ-κοπ-α (Hom.)
Plup. I. ἐ-κε-κόπ-ειν Aor. I. ἐ-κόφ-ϑην
Fut. (κόπ-σω)ὴ κόψω κόψομαι |Fut. 1. κοφ-ϑήσομαι
Aor. L ἔκοψα ἐ-κοψάμην | Aor. IL ἐ-κόπ-ην
Fut. Pf. κε-κόψομαι | Fut. II. κοπ-ήσομαι
Verbal adjective: κοπ-τός, -n, -ov, κοπ-τέος, -Téa, -τέον.
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
xapur-t- to bend (κέκαμ-μαι for κέκαμμεμαι § 106, Rem. 2).
Ind. |8.1.| κέκαμμαι Imperative. Infinitive.
2. κέκαμψαι on κεκάμφϑαι
8.) κέκαμπταε ᾿ κεκάμφϑω :
D.1.| κεκάμμεϑον . ie ne τῷ
2. | κέκαμφϑον κέκαμφϑον μένος, ἢ,
3. | κέκαμφϑον κεκάμφϑων Subjunctive.
P.1.| κεκάμμεϑα κεκαμμένος ὦ
2. | κέκαμφϑε κέκαμφϑε ᾿
3. | κεκαμμένοι εἰσί(ν) κεκάμφϑωσαν or κεκάμφϑων]
Verbal adjective: καμπτός, -7, -όν, καμπτέος, -τέα, -τέον.
LI. Vocabulary.
Alöv, -ὦνος, ὁ, aevum, du- βυσσόϑεν (fr. ὁ βυϑός, the κάμπτω, to bend.
ration of time, time, deep), from the depth, xara-Aeinw, to leave be-
lifetime. or the bottom. hind, desert.
ἀλείφω, to anoint. γυμνός, -ἢ, -6v, naked. κεχρημένος, (perf. part. of
ἀνα-τρέπω, to tum up, ἐξ-αλείφω, to wipe or rub σχράομαι, utor,) wanting,
overturn, destroy. off, obliterate. un. gen.
βίοτος, -ov, ὁ, life, liveli- Samra, to bury. κλέπτω, to steal.
hood, food. καλύπτω, to conceal. κόπτω, to cut, strike.
3 109.] MUTE VERBS. 121
κρύπτω, to hide, conceal. πρεσβευτής, -οὗ, 5,anam- τάξις, -εως, 4, order, ἃ
μέλος, -ξος = -ovc, τό, a bassador, pl.olapéoBecc. rank.
song, & melody. προ-λείπω, to forsake, de- τρΐβω, to rub. [phy.
pbxarog, -7, -ov, inmost, sert. τρόπαιον, -ου, τό, ἃ 2ο-
hidden. pintw,tothrow,throwout. φαίνω, to show; mud. tp
ναυμαχία, -ας, 7, ἃ sea- oxAnpoc,-d,-dy,dry,rough, appear.
fight. hard. φϑόνος, -ov, 6, Envy.
“περι-τρέπω, to turn round, συν-ϑάπτω, to bury to- φώρ, -wpöc, ὁ, a thief.
overturn. gether witb. xopevw, to dance.
Ὁ παῖς τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἐγὲγράφει. Ol πολέμιοι πρέσβεις εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἔπεμ-
ψαν. Οἷνος καὶ; τὰ κεκρυμμένα φαίνει βυσσόϑεν. Πᾶν ὕψος ἐν ϑνητῷ yéves
περιέτρεψεν ἢ χρόνος, ἢ φϑόνος. Tee τῶν σπουδαίων φιλίας οὐδ' ἂν ὁ πᾷς αἰὼν
ἐξαλείψειεν. Σοφοκλῆς μετὰ τὴν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίαν wept τρόπαιον γυμνὸς
ἀληλιμμένος ἐχόρευσεν. Μύρμηκες γῆς μυχάτους οἴκους προλελοιπότες ἔρχον-
ται βιότου κεχρημένοι. Πολλάκις ὀργὴ ἀνϑρώπων νοῦν ἐξεκάλυψεν. Τῷ ’Ene-
μεινώνδου σώματι συνέϑαψε τὴν δύναμιν τῶν Θηβαίων ὁ καιρός. Τῆς ἀρετῆς
τὸν πλοῦτον οὐ διαμειψόμεϑα τοῖς χρήμασιν. Ἑϊῤριπίδης ἐν Μακεδονίᾳ τέϑακπ-
ται. Θεὸς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὸ μέλλον κεκάλνφεν. Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐτράφησαν
ἐν σκληροῖς ἤϑεσιν. ᾿Ακούσας καλὸν μέλος τερφϑείης ἄν. Ῥῆμα παρὰ καιρὸν
ῥιφϑὲν ἀνέτρεψε πολλάκις βίον. Οἱ φῶρος ἡμῖν τὰ χρήματα κεκλόφασιν. Ol
πολέμιοι τὴν πόλιν ἀνατετρόφασιν. Οἱ στρατιῶται τὰς τάξεις κατέλιπον.δ
The letter is (i. 6. has been) written by the boy. Ambassadors were sent (aor.)
by enemies into the town. Wine often discovers what the man has concealed
(part. sing.) in his heart. With the body of Epaminondas the power of the The-
bans was buried (aor. 2). The future has been concealed by God from men.
The Lacedaemonians brought up (aor.) their children in rough manners. A
beautiful song delights (aor.) us. Many treasures have been stolen by the
thieves. The enemies destroyed (aor.) (overturned) the town. By the soldiers
the ranks were deserted
§109. B. Verbs, whose Characteristicis a Kappa-
mute (y, x, x)
(a) Pure Characteristic, y, x, x. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and
Impf., co, Att. Tr, rarer ¢.
πλέκοω, to weave. Fut. -f. = rücow, Att. τἥττω, to arrange.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. πλέκ-ω πλέκ-ομαι τάσσ-ω τάσσ-ομαι
Impf. ἔ-πλεκ-ον ἐ-πλεκ-όμην E-Ta00-09 ἐ-τασσ-όμην
Perf. (πέ-πλεκ-ἀ)} (πέ-πλεκ-μαι) | (TE-ray-&)
πέ-πλεχ-α | πέ-πλεγ-μαι τέ-ταχ-α τέ-ταγ-μαι
Plup. ἐ-πε-πλέχ-ειν] ἐ-πε-πλέγεμην | b-re-ray-ev |ἐ-τε-τάγομην
Fur |(πλέκ-σω) πλέξω πλέ (τάγ-σω) τάξω τάξομαι
Aor. E-nAeta ἐ-πλεξάμην ἔ-ταξα ἐ-ταξάμην
πε-πλέξομαι τε-τάξομαι
‘Even. * The Aor. expresses a custom. ?$89. ‘§102,5. δά 10], 8.
11 ᾿
Inf. τετάχϑαι
“Auapria, -ac, 7, an οὗ
fence, a fault.
ἀν-ἔλπιστος, -ov, unex-
pected.
ἀνορύττω, to dig up again.
ἀπο-κηρύττω, to cause to
be proclaimed, disin-
herit. | ness.
ἀσϑένεια, -ac, 7, weak-
ἄστεγος, -ov, without a
roof, houseless.
ἄφρων, -ov, foolish, brain-
less. [range.
δια-τάσσω, to order, ar-
διχόμῦϑος, -ov, double-
speaking, false.
εὔ-τακτος, -ov, well-or-
dered.
ἥπιος, «ον, and ἥπιος, -a,
“ον, mild.
or τετάχἄται
MUTE VERBS.
ἐ-πλέχ-ϑην
πλεχ-ϑήσομαι
ἐ-πλάκ-ην and ἐ-πλέκ-ηι
πλακ-ήσομαι
Verbal adjective: πλεκτός, -7, -όν ; πλεκ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον ; τακτός, τακτέος.
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
r&oow, to arrange, and oftyyw(§ 106, Rem. 2), to bind.
Ind. S. ı. | rerayuaı ἔσφιγμαι Imperative.
92. | rerafaı ἔσφιγξαι τέταξο ἔσφιγξο
8. τέτακται ἔσφιγκται τετάχϑω ἐσφίγχϑω
D. 1. | τετάγμεϑον ἐσφίγμεϑον
2. | τέταχϑον ἔσφιγχϑον τέταχϑον ||, ἔσφιγχϑον
8. τέταχϑον ἔσφιγχϑον τετάχϑων | ἐσφίγχϑων
P. 1. τετάγμεϑα ἐσφίγμεϑα
2. τέταχϑε ἔσφιγχϑε τέταχϑε ἔσφιγχϑε
3. | τεταγμένοι eloi(v) | ἐσφιγμένοι elai(v) | τετάχϑωσαν | ἐσφίγχϑωσαν
LU. Vocabulary.
ϑέλγω, to charm, soften,
soothe.
κατα-πλήττω, to strike
down, astonish, alarm.
xata-oAéyu, to burn down,
or totally consume.
κλόπιμος, -n, -ov, thievish,
stolen.
κλώψ, -ωπός, ὃ, a thief.
κράζω ($ 103, Rem. 1), to
cry, ery out.
λίαν, very, violently, over-
much.
μεταλλάττω, to change.
ξένος, -ov, ὁ, & stranger,
a guest. © [out.
ὀρέγω, to stretch the hand
παραϑήκη, -ἧς, 1; deposi-
tum, that which is laid
down by any one.
(é-ray-Onv) &-rax-Inv
or τετάχϑων! or ἐσφίγχϑων
todiyxdaı Part. τεταγμένος ἐσφιγμένος.
[8 109.
ταχ-ϑήσομαι
ἐ-τάγ-ην
ταγ-ήσομαι
παρα-πλάζω, to lead from
the right way, mislead.
πενητεύω, to be poor.
περι-ἄγω, to lead round.
πλέκω, to knit, weave.
συν-τάττω, to order, ar-
range systematically.
ogiyyw, to squeeze, or
draw together.
ταράττω, to throw into
confusion, disturb, ren-
der uneasy.
ταραχή, -N6, 1, confusion,
disturbance.
τάσσω, to arrange, order.
τύμβος, -ov, 6, a tomb.
φυλάττομαι, w. ace. to
guard oneself from, be
on one’s guard against,
take care.
Πολλάκις ἥπιος μῦϑος καὶ ἄφρονα ἄνδρα ἔϑελξεν. Μὴ τύμβον τεϑαμμένου
ἀνορύξης.' Al φρενῶν ταραχαὶ παρέπλαγξαν καὶ σοφόν.
περιήγαγεν εἰς ἀσϑένειαν.
Ὁ πλοῦτος πολλάκις
Θεμιστοκλέα, τὸν ᾿Αϑηναῖον, ὁ πατὴρ ἀπεκῆρυξε
διὰ τὰς ἐν τῇ νεότητι ἁμαρτίας. Θεὸς πάντα ἐν τῇ φύσει ἄριστα διατέταχεν.
Πλοῦτον ἔχων σὴν χεῖρα πενητεύουσιν ὄρεξον. ᾽Εὰν ἔχωμεν χρήματα, ἕξομενδ
18153, Rem. 3. 866 ὁ 89, Rem. 3: ἔχω has the rough breathing in the Fat.
~
§ 110.] MUTE VERBS. 128
φίλους. Ol πολέμιοι ele τὴν πόλιν πεφεύγασιν. Ξένον σιγᾷν κρεῖττον, ἢ κε-
κραγέναι. "Ἔλπιζε τιμῶν; τοὺς γονέας πράξειν καλῷς. Λίαν φιλῶν! σεαυτὸν
οὐχ ἕξεις φίλον. Ὧν ὁ τρόπος ἐστὶν εὔτακτος, τούτοις καὶ ὁ βίος συντέτακται.
Οἱ πολέμιοι ἐδιώχϑησαν. Πολλὰ μὲν ἀνέλπιστα πράττεται, πολλὰ δὲ πέπρακ-
Tat, πολλὰ δὲ πραχϑήσεται. El πολέμων καὶ πραγμάτων φροντίζεις, ὁ βίος σον
ταραχϑήσεται. Πεφύλαξο τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ol γλῶτταν διχόμυϑον ἔχουσιν.
ἤΑστεγον εἰς οἶκον δέξαι. Φωρῶν μὴ δέξῃ κλοπίμην ἀνδρῶν παραϑήκην - ἀμφό-
Tepot κλῶπες, καὶ ὁ δεξάμενος καὶ ὁ κλέψας. Πόνου μεταλλαχϑέντος,3 οἱ πόνοι
γλυκεῖς. ἫἪ πόλις ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων κατεφλέγη. Οἱ βάρβαροι καταπλαγέντες
ἀπέφυγον.
The barbarians, pursued by the Hellenes, fled into the town. Their charae-
ter is well-ordered, who have also their life well-ordered. The enemies burnt
down (aor.) the town. The barbarians alarmed the citizens. If thou troublest
thyself about war and exploits, thou wilt render thy life uneasy. Many and
splendid exploits have heen achieved (πράττω) by the Greeks. I will be on my
guard against men who have a double-speaking tongue. The women, alarmed
by the enemies, cried out.
8110.C. Verds, whose Oharacteristicis a Tau-
mute(d, τ, 9).
(a) Pure Characteristic, 6,7, 9. (Ὁ) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and
Impf., ζ, rarer σσ.--- πὶ. -σω.
ACTIVE.
Pres. petd-v,
to deca
Impf. | &-pevd-ov
Perf. | (&-yevd-xa)
MIDDLE.
φράζω, φράζοομαι,
ίο to think,
E.g ἜΗΝ ἐ-φραζιόμην
(πὲ φραόικα) {πέ φραῦ μαι)
E-npev-xa πές-φρᾶ-κα πέ-φρασ-μαι
Plup. | ἐ-ψεύ-κειν ἐ-πε-φράςκειν | ἐ-πε-φράσ-μην
Fut. (ψεύδ-σω) (φράδ.σω) (φράδ-σομαιὴ
ψεύ-σω φρά-σω φρώ-σομαι
ἔιφρᾶ-σα ἐ-φρα-σάμην..
Aor.I.| Z-yev-ca
πε-φρά-σομαι
PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | (éspetd-dyv) d-pevo-Inv (ἐ-φράδ-ϑην) ἐ-φράσ-ϑην
Fut. I. ψευσ-ϑήσομαι φρασ-ϑῆσομαι
Verbal adjective: (wevd-réoc) ψευσ-τέος, -réa, -τέον ; φρασ-τέος, -Téa, -Téov.
SEE REE BE NL EEE ET I SS TGR Se EE TEP II LA TEETER TIE TEE DY
Inflection of Perf. Mid. or Pass.
Ind. 8.1. ἔφευσοιμαι Imper. Infinitive.
2. | ἔψευ-σαι éWev-co é-Weta-Fas
3. | ἔψευσ-ται ἐψεύ-σϑω
D. 1. ἐψεύσοιμεϑον Participle.
2. | ἔψευ-σϑον Epev-cbov t-evo-pévoc, N, ον
3. | ἔψευ-σϑον ἐψεύ-σϑων
Ῥ 1. | ἑψεύσεμεϑα Subjunctive.
2. | ἔψευ-σϑε Epev-ode , ἐ-ψευσ.μένος ὦ.
8. ἐψευσ-μένοι εἰσί(ν) ἐψεύ-σϑωσαν or ἐψεύ-σϑων
1§ 176, 1. 3 Gen. absolute.
124
"Auaprüvo, to err, be mis-
taken, commit a fault.
äprälo, to plunder.
αὖϑις, again. [thirst.
δῖφος, -£0¢ = -ους, τό,
ἐγκώμιον, -ov, τό, culogy,
encomium.
ἔτι, still, besides. |
εὐφροσύνη, -ns, 9, mirth.
ἔφηβος, -ov, ὁ, a youth.
LUI. Vocabulary.
μετέπειτα, afterwards.
5A Boe, -ov, ὃ, riches, pros-
perity.
ὀπώζω, to let follow, be-
stow.
ὁρίζω, to fix, appoint.
παύω, to cause to cease;
τινά τινος, to free a
person from anything;
mid. to cease, w. part.
LIQUID VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. {§ 111.
to trust to, rely upon.
πληγῆ, -ἧς, 7, ἃ blow, a
. wound.
ῥῖγος, -eo¢=-ove, τό, cold.
σκεδάζω, to scatter, dissi-
pate.
oravilw, to be in want.
στρέφω, to turn.
συν-αρμόζω, to fit togeth-
_er, adjust, arrange.
ἤδη, already. πείϑω, w.acc.,to persuade; ὠράζω, to tell, express;
μαλακίζω, to soften, ren- perf. 2, πέποιϑα, w.dat. pronounce.
det effeminate.
Παῦσόν pe, ὦ φίλε, πόνων, σκέδασον δὲ μερίμνας, στρέψον δ᾽ αὖϑις εἷς εὐφρο-
σύνας. Σπανιοῦσιν) of τοῖς χρῆμασιν οὗ χρῶνται. Μιϑριδάτης ᾿Ασίαν ἥρπακεν.᾽
Δόγισαι πρὸ ἔργου. Οἱ ϑεοὶ τοῖς ϑνητοῖς ὄλβον ὥπασαν. Ὁ ϑεὸς ἅπαντα
συνήρμοκεν. "Ἐν σὺ κακῶς δικάσῃς, σὲ ϑεὸς μετέπειτα δικάσει. Τοὺς συνετοὺς
ἄν ric πείσειε τάχιστα εὖ λέγων. ‘Ey τοὶς Δράκοντος νόμοις μία Gracıv ὥρισ-
To τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσι ζημία, ϑάνατος. Πλούτῳ πεποιϑὼς ἄδικα μὴ πειρῶ ποιεῖν.
Ὑπὲρ σεαυτοῦ μὴ φράσῃς ἐγκώμια. Οἱ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἔφηβοι εἰϑίσϑησανϑδ φέ-
pew λιμόν τε καὶ δίψος καὶ ῥῖγος, ἔτι δὲ πληγὰς καὶ πόνους ἄλλους. El πολέ-
pov’ φροντιεῖς," ὁ βίος cov ταραχϑήσεται. Οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι ἀεὶ ϑαυμασϑήσονται.
Ἡλούτῳ" πολλοὶ ἤδη ἐμαλακίσϑησαν.
Cares are dissipated through (δεά, w. acc.) thee. He will be in want who does
Bot use his money. Success is bestowed on mortals by the gods. Everything
is arranged by God. The sensible can (ἄν, w. opt.) quickly be persuaded (aor. "
1 pass.). Draco fixed (aor.) for all offenders one punishment, death. Wealth
had already rendered (aor.) all effeminate. We shall always admire the Athe-
nians. The Athenians accustomed their youths to bear all hardships. Socrates
was admired for (ἐπί, w. dat.) his wisdom. It is not well to rely upon riches.
The song has dissipated the cares.
B. Liquip VERBS.
8111. Formation of the Tenses.
1. Liquid verbs, i. e. verbs whose characteristic is one of the li-
quids A, a, 9, 0, form the Fut. Act. and Mid. and the first Aor. Act.
and Mid. without the tense-characteristic σ, but the Perf. Act. with
the tense-characteristic x; e. g.
σφάλλω (stem ZGAA), Fut. σφαλ-ῶ, first Aor. ἔ-σφηλ-α, Perf. E-odaA-xa.
Rew. 1. The future-endings of liquid verbs, viz. - and -οὔμαι (arising from
16.88.
“6158, 6.1, (b).
#4176, 1. 8 On the Augment, see $ 87, 3.
*§ 161, 8.
$111.] LIQUID VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 125
«ἔσω, -ἔσομαι), are inflected like the Pres. Act. and Mid. of contracts im -ἔω;
6. δ. φιλ-ῶ, φιλεοῦμαι. The Fat. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs.
2. The Present tense of these verbs—with the exception of a few
whose stem-vowel is s—is strengthened, either by doubling the
characteristic A, or by inserting the liquid » after the characteristic,
or by either lengthening the short stem-vowel, as is the case with all
verbs in -ive, vv, veo, or by changing it into a diphthong; 6. g.
σφάλ-λ-ὦ, τέμ-»-ο, xQi 9-07, Auürv-o, κτείν-ο, Paiv-o, (stems SDAA,
TEM, KPIN(i), 4MTN (ὅ), ΚΤΕΝ, PAN); but μέν-ω, φνέμ-ω
with a pure stem.
8. All the tenses are formed from the pure stem, yet the vowel
in the final syllable of the stem in the first Aor. Act. and Mid., is
lengthened; e. g. σφάλλ-ὦ (2HAA), Fut. ogad-o, second
Aor. Pass. ἐ-σφᾶλ-ην, first Perf. Act. ἔνσφαλ-κα, first Aor. Act.
ἔ-σφηλ-α, first Aor. Mid. ἐ-σφηλ- μην.
4, Liquid verbs are divided into four classes, according as the
stem-vowel of the Fut. is ὦ, 4, ¢ or U before the ending -ὦ. In the
first Aor. Act. and Mid., a is lengthened into ἡ, 8 into δε, « into é,
¥ into v. Thus:
1. Class with din the Future.
Pres. Fut. Aor.
κάμν-ο, to labor, : Κα μ-οῦμαι wanting
τεκμαίρ-ω, to place a limit, τεκμᾶρ-ῶ ἐ-τέκμηρ-α
φαΐν-ω, to show, däv-ö ἔ-φην-α.
IL Class with e in the Future.
μέν-ω, to remain, kev-ö E-neiv-a
ἀγγέλλε-ω, to announce, ἀγγελ-ῶ ἤγγειλεα
repv-o, to cul, τεμ-ῶ wan
νέμεω, to divide, veu-ö b-yecu-a
lueip-w, to desire, ἱμερ-ῶ ἵμειρ-α.
UL Class with Zin the Future.
TidA-w, to pluck, τὶ λεῶ ἔντιλια
κρΐν-ω, to separate, κρὶν-ὥ ἔ-κρῖν-α.
IV. Class with 6 in the Future.
ofp-w, to draw, cip-d ἔ-σῦρ-α
ἀμύνοω, to defend, | dpküv-ö ἤμον-α.
Rex. 2. The following verbs in -acvw of the first class, take ἃ in the Aor. in-
stead of 7, namely, loyvaivw, to make emaciated, (ἰσχνᾶνα, ἰσχνᾶναι), kepdaivo,
to gain, (éxépddva, κερδᾶναι), κοιλαίνω, to hollow out, (éxoiAdva, xotAGvas), Aev-
καίνω, to whiten, dpyaiva, to enrage, menalvw, to ripen; also all verbs in -paive,
e. δ: repaivo, to accomplish, Fut. περανῶ, Aor. érépava, Inf. περᾶναι (except
terpaiva, to bore, ἐτέτρηνα, τετρῆναι), and all in -calvo, 6. g. πιαίνω, to make fat,
. ἐπίανα, πιᾶναι (except utaive, to stain, μεῆναι, rarely μιᾶναι).
11*
136 LIQUID VERBS. [8 112.
5. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic », ac-
cording to ὃ 8, 4, would end in -yxa, 6. g. μεμίαγ-κα (from μιαίνω
instead of ue-uiar-xa), πέφαγκα (from φαίψω), παρώξυγκα (from
παρωξύνω, to excite). But this form is found only ameng later wri-
ters. The best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by drop-
ping the », 6. g. xexéodaxa (from xegdaivn), or also, as in xzeiveo,
by using the form of the second Perf., e. g. ext ove, in the sense of
‚ the first Perf., or, as in the case of verbs in -évw, by not forming
any Perf., or, as 6. g. in μένω, by forming it from a new theme, as
μεμένηκα (from MENES).
6. The three following verbs drop the characteristic ν, not only
in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid.
or Pass. and in the first Aor. Pass. :
κρίνω, to separate, kéxpixa κέκρίμαι ἐκρίϑην
κλίνω, to bend, KéxAtka KéxAipat ἐκλίθην
πλύνω, to wash, πέπλῦκα πέπλῦμαι ἐπλύϑην.
7. On the formation of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. the oes
things should be noted:
(a) When o@ follows a liquid, the o is omitted (§ 106, Rem. 4);
6. g. ἠγγέλϑαι (instead of ἡγγέλ-σϑαι), πεφάνϑαι.
(Ὁ) Verbs in -atveo and -öso; usually drop the » before the end-
ings beginning with u, and insert δ to strengthen the syllable, 6. g.
Paiv-w, πέφα-σ-μαι, πε-φά-σ-μεϑα; but some verbs of this kind
assimilate the » to the following u, 6. g. παροξύνω, to excite, παρώ-
ξυμμαι; αἰσχύν-ὦ, to shame, ἤσχυμμαι, Inf. ἠσχύνϑαι. The Perf.
of zeiveo is ἐέταμαι.
8. In the second Perf., which, however, is formed only by a few
verbs, the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is lengthened, as
in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with e in the Fut., which take
the variable 0, § 102, 4; 6. g. mais-e, first Aor. ἔ-φην-α, second
Perf. ne-grv-a; but σπείρ-ω, Fut. σπερ-ὦ, second Perf. ὅ-σπορ-α.
8112. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs.
ἀγγέλλω, to announce.
ACTIVE.
Ind. dyyéAA-w Subj. dyyéAAw = Imp. ἄγγελλε Inf. ἀγγέλλειν
Part. ἀγγέλλων ne a
Ind. #yyeAA-ov Opt. ἀγγέλλοιμι
Ind. ἤγγελεκὰ Subj. ἠγγέλκω Imp. not in use Inf. ἠγγελκέναι
Part. ἠγγελκώς
Ind. ἠγγέλεκειν Opt. ἠγγέλ-κοιμι
ἔφϑορ-α, perdidi, from φϑείρ-ω, perdo; Plup. II. ἐ-φϑόρ-ειν
Present,
Ber
4112.7 LIQUID VERBS. 197
Fat. Ind. | S.1.} ἀγγελ-ῶ Opt. ἀγγελοίμι or ἀγγελοίην
2. | ἀγγελ-εῖς ἀγγελοῖς͵ ἡ ἀγγελοίης
3.| ἀγγελ-εἴ ἀγγελοῖ “ dyyedoin
D.2. | ἀγγελ-εῖτον ἀγγελοῖτον “ ἀγγελοίητον
3. üyyeA-eirov üyyeAoitnv “ ἀγγελοιήτην
P.1.| ἀγγελεοῦμεν ἀγγελοῖμεν “ dyyekoinnev
2. | ἀγγελ-εἶῖτε ἀγγελοῖτε - “ dyyedoinre
3. ale). Gyyekoiev “ ayyedoiev
Inf. ἀγγελεῖ Part. ἀγγελῶν, -οῦσα, -οὖν
Aor.L | Ind. ἤγγειλα Subj. ἀγγείλω Opt. ἀγγείλαιμε Imp. ἀγγείλον
Inf. ἀγγεῖλαι Part. ἀγγείλας
Aor. IL | Ind. ἤγγελτον Subj. ἀγγέλ:ω Opt. ἀγγέλοιμε Imp. ἄγγελε
Inf. ἀγγελεῖν Part. ἀγγελών, -oüca, -ὄν.
MIDDLE.
Pres. Ind. ayyeAr-ouaı = Subj. ἀγγέλλωμαι Imp. dyyéAdov Inf. ay-
γέλλεσϑαι Part. ἀγγελλόμενος
Impf. Ind. 7yyeAA-duny Opt. ἀγγελλοίμην
Pf. Ind. [8.1. ἤγγελεμαι Imperative. Infinitive.
2. | nyyer-caı Nyyel-co ἠγγέλ-ϑαι
N ἤγγελ-ται ἠγγέλ:ϑω Participle.
ἠγγέλεμεϑον ᾿ ἠγγελ-μένος
a ἤγγελ-ϑον ἤγγελ-ϑον Subjunctive.
ir ἤγγελτϑν ᾿ ἠγγέλεϑων hyyer-pévoc ὦ
ἠγγέλ-μεϑα
τ ΤΩΣ γγελεϑε
8. ἠγγελεμένοι εἰσί(ν) Πρ δε, or hyyei-dwv]
Pip. Ind. | hyyéa-uny, -00, -ΤΌ, -uedov, -ϑον, -ϑην, -ueda, -Be, ἡγγελμένοι ἧσαν
Fut. Ind. | 8. 1. | ἀγγελ-οῦμαι | Opt. dyyed-oieny Infinitive.
9, | ἀγγελ-ῇ or -e7 dyyeA-oio dyyea-etodat
3. | éyyed-eirac dyyed-oiro Participle.
D.1. | eyyer-ovuedov ἀγγελ-οίμεϑον | ἀγγελεούμενος
2. | ἀγγελ-εἶσϑον ἀγγελ-οἶσϑον
8. dyyed-eiotor ἀγγελ-οίσϑην
P. 1. | ἀγγελ-ούμεϑα ἀγγελεοίμεϑα
2 dyyed-ciode Gyyer-oiode
1 8.| ἀγγελ-οῦνται ἀγγελ-οῖντο
Aor. 1. | Ind. hyyetd-Gunv Subj. ih bir oe Opt. üyyeıh-alunv Imp.
GyyetA-at Inf. ayyeil-acdaı Part. ἀγγειλ-άμενος
Aor. II. | Ind. γγγελτόμην Subj. riers Opt. ἀγγελ-οίμην = Imp.
ἀγγελ-οῦ Inf. ayyeA-Eodaı Part. ἀγγελ-όμενος.
PASSIVE.
Aor. 1. {| Ind. a τ v Subj. ἀγγελ-ϑῶ οι. äyyeA-deinv Imp. üy-
yéA-Snre Inf. ἀγγελ-ϑῆναι Part. ἀγγελ-ϑεῖς
Fut. IL. | Ind. ἀγγελ-ϑήσομαι. Opt. ἀγγελ-ϑησοίμην Inf. ἀγγελ-ϑήσεσ-
ϑαι Part. ἀγγελ-ϑησόμενος
Aor. II. | Ind. ἠγγέλεην Subj. ἀγγελ-ῶ Opt. äyyer-einv Imp. ἀγγέλ-ηϑι
Inf. ἀγγελεῆναι Part. ἀγγελ-είς
Fut. I. | Ind. ἀγγελ-ήσομαι, etc., like the first Fut Pass.
Verbal adjective: ἀγγελ-τέος, -réa, «-τέον.
128 LIQUID VERDS. [$ 118.
$118. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according ta
the Stem-vowel of the Future.
(a) with din the Future, σφάλλω, to decetve; φαίνω, to show,
Mid. to appear.
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. σφώλλ-ὦ σφάλλ-:ομαι paiv-w φαίν-ομαι
Impf. E-odaAA-ov ἐ-σφαλλ-όμην ἔ-φαιν-ον ἐ-φαιν-όμην
Porf.L |.E-odaA-xa
ἔ-σφαλ-μαι (πέ-φαγ-καὶ πέ-φασ-μαι
Piup. I. | ἐ-σφάλεκειν
ἐ-σφάλεμην N (ἐ-πε-φάγ-κειν) | ἐ-πε-φάσ-μην
πέ-φην-α, I appear
ἐ-πε-φήν-ειν, I appeared,
obür-ö, eis,ei| wanting φᾶἄν-ὦ φαν-οῦμαι
Aor.L | ἔ-σφηλ-α wanting ἔ-φην-α ᾿ ξιφην-άμην.
PASSIVE.
Aor. I, | ἐ-σφάλ-ϑην ἐ-φών-ϑην, I appeared,
Fat. 1. σφαλ-ϑήσομαι ᾿ φαν-ϑήσομαι
Aor. II. | ἐ-σφάλ-ην . ἐ-φάν-ην, I appeared,
Fut. U. | σφᾶλεήσομαι $üv-hoouaı, I will appear.
Verbal adjective: σφαλ-τέος, -réa, -τέον, φαν-τέος.
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. of
¢aiv-w, to show, Enpaiv-w,todry, and reiv-w, to stretch,
Ind. 8. 1. | me-Hao-uaı ἐ-ξήραμ-μαι τέ-τἄ-μαι
2. | ne-dav-caL ἐ-ξήραν-σαι τέ-τἄ-σαι
8. πέ-φαν-ται ἐ-ξήραν-ται τέ-τἄ-ται
.1. | πε-φάσ-μεϑον ἐ-ξηράμ-μεϑον τε-τάἄ-μεϑον
2. | πέ-τφαν-ϑον E-Enpav-dov τέττα-σϑον
8. | m&-dav-dov ἐ-ξήραν-ϑον τέ-τα-σϑον f
.1. πε-φάσιμεϑα ἐ-ξηράμ-μεϑα re-Tä-ueda
2.| me-dav-de t-Enpav-de τέ-τα-σϑε
3. | πεοφασ-μένοι εἰσι(ν) | ἐ-ξηραμ-μένοι εἰσί(ν) | τέ-τα-νται
.2. | (πέ-φαν-σο) Ws npav-00) TE-TÄ-00
3. | me-dav-Iw -ξηράν-ϑω τε-τά-σϑω
.2. | πέτφαν-ϑον &-Enpav-dov τέ-τα-σϑον
3. | πε-φάν-ϑων ἐ-ξηράν-ϑων τε-τά-σϑων
.2. | πέεφαν.9ε ἐ-ξήραν.ϑε Té-Ta-008
8.| πε-φάν-ϑωσαν or | 2-Enpay-Swoay or τε-τώ-σϑωσαν 01
πε-φάν-ϑων E-Enpav-dwv τε-τά-σϑων
Inf. πε-φάν-ϑαι ἐ-ξηρών-ϑαι τε-τά-σϑαι
Part. πε-φασ-μένος | &-Enpau-uevog τε-τἄ-μένος.
$§ 114, 115.] LIQUID VERBS. 129
4114. (Ὁ) with e in the Future, Ἱμείρ-ω (Ion. and Poet.),
to desire, and στέλλω, to send.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
lueip-w RER OTEAA-w στέλλεομαι
ἵμειρ-ον μειρ-όμην ἔ-στελλ-ον ἐ-στελλ-όμην
ἵμερ-κα ἵμερ-μαι é-oraA-xa ἔ-σταλ-μαι
ἱμέρ-κειν ἱμέρ-μην ἐ-στάλ-κειν ἐ-στάλ-μην
ἔτφϑορ-α fr. φϑείρ-ω, I have perished,
ἐ-φϑόρ-ειν, I had perished,
Iuep-ö ἱμερ-οῦμαι στελ-ῶ στελ-οῦμαι
ἵμειρ-α ἱμειρ-άμην ἔ-στειλ-α ἐ-στειλ-άμην.
PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | ἐμέρ-ϑην b-oraA-Onv Aor. II. é-oriia-nv
Fut. I. | ἱμερ-ϑήσομαι Fut. I. orda-fooua
Remark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. is like 7
4116. (c) with Z and tin the Future.
(a) τίλλεω, to pluck, cipu, to draw, μολύν-ω, to defile.
TiAA-opat
Té-TLA-Ka
TE-TıA-ual
TIA-6
τὶλ-οῦ
E-TIA-a ἊΝ σῦρ-α ug ἐ-μόλῦν-α
ἐ-τιλεάμην a ἐ-μολυν-ἄμην
ἐ-τίλ-ϑην , ἐ-μολύν-ϑην
τιλ- ϑήσομαι μολυν-ϑήσομαε
Verbal adjective: reA-Tög, rtA-réoc, συρ-τός, συρ-τέος, μυλυν-τός, μνλυν-τέος.
ar 1. ΤῊ inflection of ne Perf. Mid. or Pass. en en
is like ἤγγελ-μαι, and pe-pdAvo-pat like πέ-φασ-μαι, and yorvu-uas, from
aloxöv-w, to shame, like ἔξηρα -μαι. |
(B) KAtv-w, to bend, πλύν-ω, to wash, with v dropped (§ 111, 6).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
| Pres. κλΐν-ω κλΐν-ομαι
πλύν-ω πλύν-ομαι
Perf. | xé-Ai-na κέ-κλί-μαι πέ-πλῦ-κα πέ-πλῦ-μαι
Fut. KAly-@ κλὶν-οῦμαι πλὺῦν-ῶ πλὺν-οῦμαι
Aor.L| &-«Aiv-a ἐ-κλιν-άμην ἔ-πλῦν-α ἐ-πλῦν-μην
PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | &xAl-Onv Fut.I. «Al-Inoouar | ἐ-πλῦϑην πλῦ-ϑήσομαι
Aor.Il. | ἐ-κλήν.ην ut. IE xAiv-fooat °
Verbal adjective: «Au-Tög, -7, -dv, κλι-τέος, -Téa, -TEOV, πλυ-τός, πλυ-τέος.
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. x&-«Al-uaı and πέ-
πλῦ-μαι is like ré-rd-uat, and corresponds with that of pure verbs.
180
᾿Αγγέλλω, to announce.
ἀδύνατος, -ov, impossible.
ἀμύνω, to keep off, repel ;
mid., to revenge oneself.
ἀπο-κτείνω, to kill.
ἀπο-στέλλω, to send, de-
spatch.
ἀσώματος, -ov, bodiless,
incorporeal.
αὔξησις, -ewc, 7, increase.
γύα, -ns, 7, & field.
δυσχεραίνω, w. dat. to be
displeased with.
&x-Haivo, to show forth,
make known, express.
&&-oxéAAw, to drive (pro-
perly a ship) away from
the right course, mis-
lead.
LIQUID VERBS,
LIV. Vocabulary.
&rret, when, since.
lueipw, to desire.
καϑαίρω, to purify, clear.
κάμνω, to labor, be weary.
κερδαίνω, to gain, get ad-
vantage.
κλίνω, ἴο bend. _[secret.
κρυπτός, -7, -6v, concealed,
μένω, to remain.
μετα-βάλλω, to alter,
change.
paiva, to pollate.
vavayoc, -ov, naufrägus,
ship-wrecked.
virn, «ἧς, ἢ, victory.
νοέω, to think.
Enpaivea, to dry.
οἰκτείρω, w. acc., to pity.
παραδόξως, unexpectedly.
[8 115,
πεδίον, -ov, τό, a plain.
πεπαίνω, to make ripe,
mitigate.
περιστέλλω, to clothe,
decorate.
πλύνω, to wash.
oneipw, to sow.
στέλλω, to send.
σύρω, to draw. .
reivo, to stretch.
τεκμαίρω, to limit.
τέμνω, to cut, lay waste,
τίλλω, to pull, pluck.
φϑείρω, to lay waste, de-
stroy.
χαίνω and χάσκω, to yawn;
perf. 2, κέχηνα, to gape,
wait with open mouth,
listen.
Kpivar φίλους ob ῥάδιον. Ἢ ἀδολεσχία πολλοὺς ἤδη διέφϑειρεν. Ὁ πλοῦτος
πολλάκις ἐξώκειλε τὸν κεκτημένον εἰς ἕτερον ἦϑος.
νίκην. Οἱ πολέμιοι τὴν χώραν διέφϑειραν.
ἐστιν ἄδηλος.
ϑεὸς αὔξησιν παρέξει.
λεῖν ob ῥᾳδιον.
Οἱ Πέρσαι πολλὰς ναῦς εἰς Ἑλλάδα ἀπεστάλκεσαν.
φράσαι δὲ, ἀδύνατον - τὸ γὰρ ἀσώματον σώματι σημῆναι, ἀδύνατον. Τὴν ψυχὴν
καλοῖς νοήμασι περίστειλον.
παῖ; Οἱ πολέμιοι τὰ πεδία διαφϑεροῦσιν.
ἐκέρδαᾶναν.
Ὁ ἄγγελος ἐπήγγειλε τὴν
Ναυαγοὺς οἴκτειρον, ἐπεὶ πλοῦς
"Hy ἀποκτείνῃς ἔχϑρον σου, χεῖρα μιανεῖς. Σπερῶ γύας" ὁ δὲ
Τὰ κρυπτὰ μὴ ἐκφήνῃς φίλουι Φύσιν πονηρὰν μεταβα-
Ἡ τύχη πολλάκις τοὺς μέγα φρονοῦντας παραδόξως ἔσφηλεν.
Θεὸν μὲν νοῆσαι, χαλεπόν,
Ὁ κῆπος καλοῖς ῥόδοις τέϑηλεν.ἱ Ti κέχηνας, ὦ
Οἱ σοφισταὶ ἐκ τῆς σοφίας πολλὰ
᾿Ἐκάϑηρε Θησεὺς τῶν κακούργων τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν εἰς ᾿Αϑῆνας ἐκ Tpot-
ζῆνος. Καλόν ἐστι τὴν ὀργὴν πεπᾶναι. Μὴ δυςχεράνῃς τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς.
The way to Athens from Troezen was cleared of evil-doers by Theseus. By
the Persians many ships had been sent to Hellas. The boys gaped. Already
many haughty persons had been greatly shaken (aor. 2 pass.) hy fortune. By
prating many have already been rnined. The victory was announced by the
messengers. ‘The country was laid waste (aor.) by the enemies. The good
(man) will pity the poor. The good will choose the good for friends (ace.).
Thou hast derived great gain (hast gained many things) from wisdom. One
friend (a friend) will not make known the secrets of another (of a friend). The
citizens sowed (aor.) the fields, but the enemies Inid them waste (aor.). Vice
will soon? show itself. The fields will soon be laid waste by the enemies (fia.
2 pass.).
1 τέϑηλα has a present signification. * quickly.
$115.]
᾿Αϑληεής, -οὔ, ὁ, & wrest-
ler.
αἴρω, to raise.
αἰσχύνω, to shame; mid.w.
pass. aor., be ashamed.
ἀπο-φαίνω, to show; mid.,
show of oneself, ex-
press, declare.
βασκαίνω, fasctno, to be-
witch.
δια-σπείρω, dissemino, to
scatter, spread.
ἐμπτίω, to spit into or on.
ἐν-τέλλω, -ομαι, to com-
mission, order, enjoin
upon.
ἧττα, -ns, h, ἃ defeat.
LIQUID VERBS.
LV. Vocabulary.
κοινός, -f, -6v, common,
public, general.
μακράν (sc. ὁδόν), far, at
a distance.
ὁμιλέω, w. dat., to asso-
ciate or have inter-
course with.
ὅρᾶσις, -εως, 9, sight.
ob-more, not once, never.
παιδίον, -ov, τό (diminu-
tive of παῖς), a little
child.
παρα-τείνω, to stretch out.
παροξύνω, to encourage.
mepaivo, to complete, ac-
complish.
πλήττω, to strike, wound.
181
πολιορκία, «ας, 7, ἃ siege.
σπουδάζω, to be in ear-
nest, zealous, active.
στάδιον, -ov, τό, the length
of one hundred and
twenty-five paces, a sta-
dium, a race course.
ταῦρος, -ov, ὁ, a bull.
τύχα, quickly, soon.
τέλος, -E0C = -ους, τό, an
end; dia TEAovs,through-
out, continually, to the
last.
τιϑήνη! ns, 7, & nurse.
τόξευμα, «ατος, τό, an Ar-
row.
Ol στρατιῶται ὑπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ εἰς τὴν μάχην παρωξύνϑησαν. Φίλιππος
ἐν τῇ πολιορκίᾳ τῆς Μεϑώνης εἰς τὸν ὀφϑαλμὸν πληγεὶς τοξεύματι διεφϑάρηϊ
τὴν ὅρασιν. Σοφίας ὁ καρπὸς οὔποτε φϑαρήσεται. Αἰσχυνϑείην ἄν, εἰ φανείην
μᾶλλον φροντίζειν τῆς ἐμαυτοῦ δόξης, ἢ τῆς κοινῆς σωτηρίας. Μίλων, ὁ ἐκ Κρό-
revoc ἀϑλητής, ταῦρον ἀράμενος ἔφερε διὰ τοῦ σταδίου μέσου. Ele τὴν πόλιν
διέσπαρτο ὁ λόγος, τοὺς πολεμίους νικηϑῆναι. Οἱ πολῖται τοὺς πολεμίους περὲ
τῆς ἥττης ἀμυνοῦνται. El σπουδάζετε, πάντα τάχα περανϑήσεται. Ἑὕβοια
μακρὰν παρατέταται. Ἑακὰ ἔργα εἰς τέλος ἐξεφάνη.Σ ὋὉ στρατηγὸς τοῖς στρα-
τιώταις ἐνετείλατο ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους ὁρμῆσαι. Al τιϑῆναι ἐμπτύουσι τοῖς παι-
diow, ὡς μὴ βασκανϑῶσιν. Οἱ πολέμιοι διεσπάρησαν. ᾿Ολόφυραι τοὺς πένητας.
Ὁ κριτὴς τὴν γνώμην ἀπεφήῆνατο. ᾿Αγαϑοῖς ἀνθρώποις ὁμιλῶν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν et-
φρανϑ είης.
The general encouraged (aor.) the soldiers to the battle. Battles will never
destroy the fruit of wisdom. The enemies have spread the report, that our ar- ®
my has been conquered. The citizens revenged themselves on the enemies for
the defeat. If you are zealous, you will accomplish everything quickly. The
scattered enemies appeared (plup. 2) again. If thou hast intercourse (part.)
with good men, thou wilt be much delighted. The good citizen will never ap
pear (as such), who cares (part.) more for his own reputation than for the gene-
ral welfare. If thou hast had pity (aor. mid. part.) on the unfortunate, thou also
wilt be pitied in misfortune (being unfortunate). All the citizens were rejoiced
by the victory. The town has been destroyed by the enemies.
1 Lost.
% The Aor. here denotes a custom.
182 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [8116
8110. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of
single Verbs, boih Pure and Impure.
1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle form ;
e. g. ἀκούω, to hear, Fut. ἀκούσομαι, J shall hear, Aor. ἤκουσα, I
heard; ἀπαντάω, to meet, Fut. ἀπαντήσομαι, I shall meet, Aor.
ἀπήντησα; ἀπολαύω, to enjoy, Fut. ἀπολαύσομαι, Aor. ἀπέλαυσα,
ete. Comp. § 144, ὁ.
2. The two following verbs in -do or -aiw, have «v* in the Fut.
and Aor. :
καΐω, Att. «do (without contraction), to burn, Fut. καύσω; Aor. &xavoa;
* Perf. xexavra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέκαυμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐκαύϑην ; Fat.
Pass. καυϑήσομαι ; verbal adjective, καυστέος, κανστός, navrög ; z
κλαίω, Att. κλάω (without contraction), fo weep. See No. 8.
8. The five following verbs in -2w, viz. ϑέω, νέω, πλέω, πνέω and
ῥέω, have ev* in the Fut, and Aor. Besides the common Fut. in
-copet, the first four have also one in -oovum. ‘This circumflexed
Fut. is called the Doric Future. Besides the four above-named,
the verbs κλαίω, παίζω, πίπτω and φεύγω, have the same Fut. form.
8 £0, to run, Fut. ϑεύσομαι or ϑευσοῦμαι.
v é a, to swim, Fat. vevoouas or vevooiuat, No. 3; Aor. Evevea.
«- λ: ἐω, to sail, Fut. πλεύσομαι, usually πλευσοῦμαι ; Aor. ἔπλευσα ; Perf. we
πλευκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. πέπλευσμαι ; Aor. Pass. ἐπλεύσϑην ; verbal
adjective, πλευστόος.
#véw, to blow, to breathe, Fut. rveboouat or πνευσοῦμαι ; Aor. Exvevoa; Aor.
Pass. ἐπνεύσϑην.
ῥέω, io flow, Fat. ῥεύσομαι ; Aor. ἔῤῥευσα ; instead of these forms the Attics
use, Fut. ῥνήσομαι ; Aor. ἐῤῥύην, and Perf. ἐῤῥύηκα.
χω, to pour out, differs from the preceding, Fut. yéw; Aor. yea; Perf. xé-
xixa; Fut. Mid. χέομαι ; Aor. Mid. ἐχεάμην ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέχῦμαι ;
Aor. Pass. ἐχύϑην.
κλαίω, Att. xAdo (without contraction), to weep, Fut. κλαυσοῦμαι and κλαῦ-
couat; Aor. ἔκλαυσα ; verbal adjective, κλαυστέος and KAavoréc. Comp.
4 125, 14. Ä
φεύγω, to fle, Fut. φευξοῦμαι and φεύξομαι ; Aor. ἔφυγον ; Perf. πέφευγα.
παΐζω, to sport, Fut. παιξοῦμαι and malfouaı ; Aor. ἔπαισα ; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. πέπαισμαι. Comp. $ 105, 3. '
πίπτω, to fall (stem IIET), Fut. πεσοῦμαι. See § 128.
* The v in the Fut. of these verbs, is oceasioned by the reappearance of the
Digamma (F), softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly stand
in the Pres. before the personal-ending -w, but is omitted where it would come
between two vowels. But it can appcar in the Fut., as it there stands before the
consonant o.—TR. :
y
$116.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS, 183
LVI. Vocabulary.
“Ἅμα, at the same time. κηρός, -οὔ, ὁ, wax. πτερόν, -οὔ, τό, ἃ Wing:
ἀναρπάζω, to‘seize, catch κλαίω, to weep, mourn στρατιά, -ὥς, 7, an army.
up quickly. for, deplore. συγχέω, te pour together,
ἀπαντάω, to meet. κόλπος, -ov, 6, a bosom,a confundo ; confuse, con-
ἀπολαύω, to enjoy. gulf. found, disturb.
αὔριον, to-morrow. viv, mınc, NOW. σφαῖρα, -ac, ἡ, & ball.
dx-véw, endto, to swim out. ὅπλον, ov, τό, ἃ, weapon. THK, to melt anything:
ἐκ-πλέω, to sgil out. πέλαγος, -εος = -οὺς, τό, mid. w. 2 aor. and 2 fig.
ἐμπίπτω; to fall into; w. the sea. pass., to melt (intrans.).
dat. or εἰς and acc. περιῤῥέω, to flow round; τιμωρία, -as, 7, punish-
ἐναντίος, -4, -ov, opposite. to fall down or away. ment.
ἡγέομαι, duco, to lead,con- πίστις, -εως, %, belief, χϑών, χϑονός, ἡ, theearth, |
sider. trust, confidenee. ‘the ground, the soil.
κατα-καίω, to burn down. πνέω, to breathe, blow.
Ἥ στρατιὰ αὔριον ἐκπλεύσεται (ἐκκλευσεῖται). "Άνεμος Βοῤῥᾶς tvavriog τῇ
στρατιᾷ Exwevoev. “Ev τῷ ναυμαχίᾳ τῇ ἐν κόλπῳ Kpeoaiy οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι ἄν-
ὅρας τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων ἀπέκτειναν, ὅσοι μὴ ἐξένευσαν αὐτῶν. Ὅταν οἱ πολέμιοι
τῇ πόλει; πλησιάσωσιν, οἱ στρατιῶται ἀναρπάσαντες τὰ ὅπλα ϑεύσονται «ρὸς
τὰς πύλας. Πολλοῖς καὶ σοφοῖς ἀνδράσιδ κέκλαυσται τἀνϑρώπινα, τιμωρίαν
ἡγουμένοις εἶναι τὸν βίον. Τίς οὐκ ἂν κλαύσειε τὸν φίλον ἀτυχῆ; Οἱ πολῖται
ἤλπισαν τοὺς πολεμίους φευξεῖσϑαι. Οἱ παῖδες σφαῖραν παιξοῦνται. Σωκρά-
της πολλάκις ἔπαισεν ἅμα σπουδάζων. Συγκέχυκε νῦν τὴν πίστιν 6 nad’ ἡμᾶς
θίος.Σ Ol πολέμιοι τὰς τῶν Ἑλλήνων τάξεις συνέχεαν. Ol νόμοε διὰ τὸν möie-
“ον συγκεχυμένοι eloiv. Ἴκαρος, ὁ τοῦ Δαιδάλου υἱός, τακόντος τοῦ κηροῦ sel
τῶν πτερῶν περιῤῥυέντων, εἰς τὸ πέλαγος ἐνέπιπτεν. Οἱ πολέμιοι τὴν πόλάν
κατέκαυσαν. Αἱ ἐν Avdia Σάρδεις ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων κατεκαύϑησαν.
The army sailed away. The north wind will blow against the army. The
soldiers hoped to swim (inf. fut.) through the river. The soldiers were going to
run to the gates (inf. fut.). You will mourn for the unfortunate. The enemies
will flee. The children were playing at ball If thou hast intercourse with
children (part., having intercourse with children), thou wilt play. The enemies
will disturb the ranks of the soldiers. Pour (aor.) O boy, the water on (elc) the
ground! The wax will melt, and the wings will fall away. The town is burnt
down by the enemies. The citizens expected that the enemies would burn
down the town (acc. w. inf.). .
4. The following pure verbs, and impure ones, but which by as-
suming an ¢ as their characteristic, are analogous to pure verbs, form
the Perf. Subj. and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass. withaut the aid of an
auxiliary verb:
κτά-ομαι, to obtain, Perf. κέκτημαι, I possess, Subj. κεκτῶμαε, «ἢ, -Aras;
“ Plup. ἐκεκτήμην, I possessed, Opt. κεκτήμην, κεκτῇο, κεκτῇτο or κεκτῴμην,
«ῷο, -WTO.
14 161,2. (a), (ß). * Dat. instead of ὑπό with Gen. ὃ ὁ καϑ' ἡμᾶς βίος, our age.
12
134 SYNCOPE AND METATHESIS.—VERBS IN -o. [§§ 117—11%.
μιμνήσκω (MNAQ), to remind. See § 122, 12.
καλέω, to name, Perf. κέκλημαι, [am named; Plup. ἐκεκλήμην, Opt. κεκλύ»
unv, -50, «ἦτο. i
$117. Syncope and Metathesis.
1. In certain forms, some few verbs omit the stem-vowel, wbich
stands. between two consonants. This omission of the vowel is call-
ed Syncope. Thus, ἐγείρω, to awaken, Aor. regularly ἤγειρα; first
Perf. ἐγήγερκα ; second Perf. ἐγρήγορα, I awake; second Plup.
ἐγρηγόρξειν, I awoke; Aor. Mid. ἠγρόμην, I awoke; πέτομαι,
to fly, Fut. πτήσομαι; Aor ἐπτόμην, πτέσϑαι.
. 2. Metathesis is the transposition of a vowel and aliquid. Thus:
βάλλω, to threw, Fut. Badd; Aor. EBüäAov; BAA, Perf. PeßAnxa; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. βέβλημαι; Aor. Pass. £81997 ».
δαμάω, usually δαμάζω, to tame, Fut. δαμάσω ; Aor. ἐδάμασα ; AMA, Perf. ὁ é d-
unxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. δέδμημαι; Aor. Pass. 2dundnv, ἐδάμην.
καλέω, to call, Perf. x éx An κα (ἢ 98, Rem.).—On κάμνω, see § 119.
σκέλλω, axedév, to make dry, Perf.EoxAnka; Fut.oxAnoouaı.
$118. Verbs in -o with the Stem of the Present
| strengthened.
It has been already seen ($ 101), that the Present tense of many
verbs is strengthened ; but this strengthening remains only in the
Pres. and Impf. Besides the modes of strengthening mentioned in
§ 101, by τ and o and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are
still others which will be specified in the following list.
‘Remark. All the forms assumed for the purpose of constructing the tenses
in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 100, 3) —The abbreviation, Mid., denotes
that the verb has its Fut. and Aor. in the middle form—D. M. (i. 6. Deponent
Mid.) and D. P. (Deponent Pass.) signify that a verb wants the active form;
such a verb is called deponent middle, when its Aor. has a middle form, and deponent
passive, when its Aor. has a passive form.—The μὲ in parenthesis shows that the
form standing before it, is analogous to the conjugation in -wı, which will be
treated more at large below.
8119. L Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting v before the ending.
PRELIMINARY Remark. Baivw has lengthened the stem-vowel α into at;
ἐλαύνω, a into av; δύνω and πΐνω, ὕ and i into 6 and I.
1. βαίνω, to go, (BA-), Fut. βήσομαι; Perf. βέβηκα ; second
Aor. ἔβην (μι, § 142); Pass. in compounds, 6. g. παραβέβαμαι:;
Aor. παρεβἄϑην. :
$ 120.] VERBS.—PURE, STEM STRENGTHENED. . 485
.2. save, to drive, Fut. ἐλᾶσω, Att. ἐλώ, -ᾧς, -@, Inf. ἐλᾷν, § 88;
Aor. flaca; Perf. ἐλήλάκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἐλήλάμαι; Inf.
ἐληλάσϑαι:; Aor. Pass. ἠλάϑην.---Οἡ ἃ in the tense-formation, see
$98, (a).—Mid. |
8. πίνω, to drink, Fut. πίομαι; Aor. ἔπιαν, Inf. πιεῖν, Part. πιών,
Imp. σῖθι (us, § 142), poet. mis; (IIO-) Perf. πέχωκα; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. πέπομαι; Aor. Pass. ἐπόϑην.
4. tive, to expiate, to satisfy, Fut. τέσω; Aor. ärioa; Perf. Act.
πέεικα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. τέσισμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐσίσϑην; Mid.
ziyouei, to avenge oneself, to punish, τέἔσομαι, ecioapnp.
5. φϑᾶνω, to anticipate, Fut. φϑήσομαι, more rarely φϑάσω;
first Aor. ἔφϑάσα; second Aor. ὄφϑην and an (μι, ὃ 142);
Perf. ἔφϑακα.
Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a con- |
sonant :
Sduvo, to bite, Aor. Eaxov; Fut. δήξομαι; Perf. Act. δέδηχα ;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. δέδηγμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐδήχϑην.
᾿κάμνω, laböro, to exert oneself, to weary oneself, to be weary, Aor.
ἐκᾶμον; Fut. καμοῦμαι; Perf. κέκμηκα ($ 117, 2).
zeuvo, to cut, Fut. τεμῶ; Aor. ἔτεμον; Perf. τέτμηκα; Port,
Mid. or Pass. τόσμημαι; Aor. Pass. ἐτμήϑην; τὰ Perf. τδεμήσο-
pou.— Mid.
$120. II. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and .
Impf. by inserting the syllable ve before the ending.
1, Bo-ve-o, to stop up, fill up, Fut. Bicw; Aor. Eßüca; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. βέβυσμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐβύσϑην (§ 95).
2. agın-vd-oueı, to come, Fut. ἀφίξομαι; Aor. ἀφϊκόμην; Inf
ἀφϊκέσϑαι; Perf. ἀφῖγμαι; Inf. ἀφῖχϑαι; ‚Plup. ἀφίγμην, ἀφῖκτο.
3. ὑπισχ: γέ-ομαι, to promise, ‘Aor. ὑπεσχ- μην, Imp. ὑπόσχου; but
ὑποσχήσομαι; Perf. ὑπέσχημαι. So ἀμπισχνοῦμαι or ἀμπέχομαι, to
put on, to wear, (from ἀμπέχω, to put round, Fut. ἀμφέξω: Aor.
ἤμπισχον, ἀμαισχεῖν); Fut. ἀμφέξομαι; Aor. ἠμπισχόμην and ἦμ-
πεσχύμῆν ($ 91, 1).
LVNH. Vocabulary.
"Axpoc, -G, -ov highest, at ἅπαξ, once. exclude. γέ (enclitic), a strengthen-
the point; τὸ ἄκρον, ἀπελαύνω, to drive away, ing particle, at least,certe.
_ the top, the point. ἀπο-τίνω, to compensate, δάκνω, to bite.
ἀμπισχνοῦμαι or ἀμπέχφ.ι pay; mid:, to punish, &x-Baivo, to walk or go
μαι, to put on, wear. avenge oneself. out, turn out, evado.
186
VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED.
ἐκ-“ πίνω, to drink ont, or ῥόπαλον, -ου, τό, a club.
up. [out. συμβαΐνω, to go with;
ἐξ-ελαύνω, expello, to drive
εὐδαιμονέω, to be happy,
or fortunate.
ἐφικνέομαι, το. gen., to ar-
- vive at, attain to, reäch.
éuérioy, -ov, TO, a Tobe, a
garment.
μεϑύω, to drink μέϑυ (un-
mixed wine); hence to
be drunk.
vhua, -aroc, τό, spinning
thread, yarn.
πολυτέλεια, -ac, ἡ, costli-
συμβαίνει, it happens,
occurs.
ovunivo, to drink with.
radapoc, -ov, ὁ, a little
basket.
iva, to expiate, pay.
τοί (enclitic), a strength-
ening particle, certain-
ly, indeed.
φϑάνω, to come before, an-
ticipate, w. the acc. of the
person who is antictpa-
ted, and the part. of the
[$ 120.
one is anticipated ; gen-
erally it may be trans-
lated by an adverb, as
before, or sommer than,
and the part. may be
expressed by the finite
verb, as οἱ πολῖται τοὺς
πολεμίους ἔφϑασαν εἷς
τὴν πόλιν φυγόντεξ,
“the citizens anticipar
ted the enemies in hav-
ing fled into the city ;”
that is, “the citizens
fled into the city soon-
er than the enemies.”
verb which expresses gopéw, to carry.
the action in which any
mess, splendor, sump-
tapusness.
Τοῖς στρατιώταις Ev τῇ στρατιᾷ πολλὰ κακὰ συνεβεβήκει. Zodoic ὁμελῶν
καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκβήσῃ σοφός. Λυκοῦργος πολυτέλειαν ἐξήλασε τῆς Σπάρτης. Tlep-
σῶν οὐδεὶς ἀπελήλαται νόμῳ! τιμῶν καὶ ἀρχῶν. Πολλοὶ συμπιόντες ἅπαξ yiy-
vovrat φίλοι. Ὁ μεϑύων δοῦλός ἐστι τοῦ πεπωκέναι. Οὐκ ἐκπίομαι τὸν olvoy.
Ὁ οἶνος ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἐξεπόϑη. Τοὺς κακούργους οἱ ϑεοὶ ἀποτίσαιντο.
Ol πολῖται τοὺς πολεμίους ἔφϑασαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν φυγόντες. Κύων" δήξεται τὸν
δακόντα. Ὁ λαγὼς" ὑπὸ τοῦ κυνὸς ἐδήχϑη. Οὐκ ἂν μὴ καμὼν εὐδαιμονοίης.
Οἱ κεκμηκότες στρατιῶται ἀνεπαύσαντο. ᾿Αττικὴ ὑπὸ τῶν ἸΠερδῶν ἐτμήϑῃ.
Ὃ Ἡρακλῆς τὸ ῥόπαλον, ὃ ἐφόρει, αὐτὸς ἔτεμεν ἐκ Νεμέας. 'O τάλαρος νήματος
βέβυσται. Οἱ πρέσβεις εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἀφίκοντο. Ob roi y' ἐφίξεε τῶν ἄκρων
ἄνευ πόνου. Ὁ φίλος ὑπέσχετό μοι ἀφίξεσϑαι. Al γυναῖκες ἠμπέσχοντο καλὰ
ἐμάτια.
The enemies will proceed into our country. The enemies were driven out
of the town by the citizens. The law will exclude (drive away) no citizen from
honor and offices of command. Lycurgus has driven sumptuousness ont of
Sparta. The wine has been drunk up by the soldiers. The laws will punish
evil-doers. The citizens will fiee into the town sooner than the enemies. The
dog has bitten the hare. The hare is (i.e. has been) bitten by the dog. If you
will work (part.), you will be happy. The enemies have laid waste the land.
‘Fhe country is (i. e. has been) laid waste by enemies. The enemies will lay
waste the land. The woman filled (aor.) the basket with yara. The father is
come. The friend will promise me, to come ( fit.) to-morrow. The boy has
promised the teacher to learn diligently. The women will put on beautiful
garments.
1161, 8.
24157. 34 47,6. “430.
§ 121.] VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED, 137
8121. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem ts strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by inserting the syllable ἄν, more rarely cus, la the
ending.
(a) ἄν or acy is inserted without any change.
All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a three-fold stem,
wiz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second
Aor. from the pure stem, the Fat. and Perf. from a third stem, oon-
sisting of a pure stem and an annexed ὃ, which is changed i in the
inflection into 7.—The @ in the ending -ἄψω is short.
1. αἰσϑ-ἄν-ομαι, to perceive, Aor. ἡσϑ-όμην, αἰσθέσθαι; Perf,
Todnuas; Fut. αἰσϑήσομαι.
2. ἁμαρτάνω, to miss, Aor. ἥμαρτον; Fut. ἁμαρτήσομαι; Perf.
ἡμάρτηκα; Perf. Pass. ἡμάρτημαι.
- 8. ἀπεχϑάνομαι, to be hated or odious, Aor. ἀπηχϑόμην; Fut.
dnsydnooua; Perf. ἀπήχϑημαι, I am hated.
4. αὐξάνω (and αὔξω), to cause to increase, to increase, Fut. av-
ξήσω; Aor. ηὔξησα; Perf. ηὔξηκα ; Mid. and Pass. to grow, Perf.
ηὔξημαι; Fut. αὐξήσομαι; Aor. ηὐξήϑην.
5. βλαστάνω, to sprout, spring, Aor. ἔβλαστον; ; Fut. βιαστήσω
Perf. ἐβλάστηκα and βεβλάστηκα (ὃ 88, 2).
ὃ. δαρϑάνω, to sleep, Aor. ἔδαρϑον; Fut. δαρϑήσομαι; Perf.
δεδάρϑηκα.
᾿ ἢ, ὀλισϑάνω, to slip, to glide, Aor. ὥλισϑον; Fut. ὀλισϑήσω;
Perf. ὠλίσϑηκα.
. 8, ὀσφραίνομαι, to smell, Aor. ὠσφρόμην ; Fut. ὀσφρήσομαι.
9. ὀφλισκάνω, to be liable to a fine, to incur punishment, to owe,—
the double strengthening tox and ay is to be noted—Aor. woop;
Fut. ὀφλήσω; Perf. wgiyxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ὥφλημαι.
(b) ἄν is inserted before the Tense-ending, and v is insert
ed before the Characteristic-consonant of the
Pure Stem.
The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem, is changed into
ἃ long one, in inflection. The » before a Pi-mute is changed into
μη before a Kappa-mute, into 7.
10. ϑιγγάνω, to touch. Aor. ἔϑιγον; Fut. ϑίξομαι.
11. λαγχάνω, to obtain by lot, to acquire, Aor. ἔλαχον; Fut. λή-
ξομαι; Perf. εἴληχα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. εἴληγμαι (8 88, 4); Aor.
Pass. ἐλήχϑην.
12. λαμβάνω, to a τις ἔλαβον, Imp. λαβέ; Fut. λήψομαι;
188
VERBS-— PURE STEM STRENGTHENED.
($ 121,
Perf. εἴληφα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. εἴλημμαι (§ 88, 4); Aor. Mid.
ἐλαβόμην; Aor. Pass.
ἐλήφϑην.
18. λανϑάνω, (seldom λήϑω), to be concealed, Aor. ἔλαϑον:; Fut.
1100; Perf. λέληθα, I am concealed, Mid. to forget, Fut. λήσομαι;
Perf. λέλησμαι; Aor. ἐλαθόμην.
14. μανθάνω, to learn, Aor. ἔμαϑον ; Fut. μαϑήσομαι; Perf. pe-
μώϑηκα --- The « remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are formed
from the stem M_AQE, according to No. a. 7
15. πυνθάνομαι, to inquire, to ask, to learn by asking, Aor. ἐπν-
ϑόμην; Perf. πέπυσμαι, πέπυσαι, etc.; Fut. πεύσομαι; verbal ad-
jective, mevozög, πευστέος.
16. τυγχάνω, to hit, to happen, to obtain (with Gen.), Aor. ἔεῦχον;
Fut. sevkoues (TETX-); Perf. τετύχηκα (TTXE- according to
No. a).
‘Ayyedia, -as, 9, a mes-
sage, news.
&ye, age! come now.
ἀνα-στρέφω. to turn round
(trans. and intrans.).
ἄνϑεμον, -ov, τό, a flower,
a: blossom.
βούλευμα, -ατος, τό, ad-.
vice, ἃ decision, ἃ reso-
lution.
βραχύς, -eia, -6, short.
γενναῖος, -@, -ov, of noble
birth, noble, brave.
δεῦρο, hither.
Anoceıv διὰ τέλους μὴ δοκείτω ὁ πονηρός.
LVIII. Vocabulary.
dic, bis, twice.
δοκέω, to think, appear,
seem.
ἔλπομαι, to hope.
éf-auaprave, ἁμαρτάνω
Strengthened by ἐξ.
(§ 121, 2).
érapxéw, w. dat., to help.
ἐπιβουλῆ, -ἧς, 9, ἃ plot.
ἐπι-ορκέω, to swear false-
ly; το. acc., to any one.
εὐεργεσία, -ac, ἡ, a favor,
beneficence.
κάμηλος ‚-ov, ὁ, 7, a camel.
xara-dapdävo, to fall a-
sleep, sleep.
Avypös, -&, -dv, sad.
ὀπίσω, behind, back.
προσ-ἤκων,͵ «ἥκουσα, -ἧκον͵
fitting, betoming.
πώ (enclitic), yet.
συμφορά, -dc, 7, an event,
especially a misfortune.
χρυσίον, -ov, TO (diminw-
tive of xpvooc), gold.
ὦς, as; ὡς τἄχιστα, as
SOON as.
Κέρδος πονηρὸν μὴ λαβεῖν
βούλου ποτέ. Δίκαια δράσας συμμάχου τεύξῃ ϑεοῦ. Τράμματα μαϑεῖν
δεῖ καὶ μαϑόντα νοῦν ἔχειν.
vate ἐπαρκῶνἢ τῶν ἴσων tet ξῃ ποτέ.
οὐκ ἤσϑετο.
Λαβὲ πρόνοιαν τοῦ προςήκοντος βίον. Bi
Ὁ βασιλεὺς τῆς πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλῆς
Οἱ Πέρσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἀπήχϑοντο.
Φίλιππος αὐτὸς
ἀπεφαίνετο διὰ χρυσίου μᾶλλον, ἢ διὰ τῶν ὅπλων ηὐ ink évac τὴν ἰδίαν βασι-
λείαν.
Οἱ στρατιῶται βραχὺν χρόνον κατέδαρϑον.
zıora τῶν καμήλων" οἱ ἵπποι, ὀπίσω ἀνέστρεφον.
Ὡς ὥσφροντο τά-
Μὴ ϑίγῃς τοῦ κυνός.5 "Aye
δεῦρο, iva πύ dy τῆς λυγρᾶς ἀγγελίας.2 Θεὸν ἐπιορκῶν μὴ δόκει λεληϑέναι.
᾿Αρχῆς τετυχηκὼς ἰσϑι ταύτης ἄξιος. Καλὸν, μηδὲν εἰς φίλους ἁμαρτεῖν.
Μοκάριος, ὅςτις ἔτυχε γενναίου gidov. Made φέρειν τὴν συμφοράν.
δείς πω ξένον ἐξαπατῇσας ἀϑανάτους ἔλαϑ εν.
14158, 8. (b).
4416], 3. (c).
Οὐ-
᾿Απ’ ἐσθλῶν ἐσθλὰ μα ϑ΄ή σφ.
* 4176, 1. δ § 158, 5. (b).
4158, 5. (a) 4 $158, 8. (b).
8 122.] VERBS-— PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 189
Kal κακὸς πολλάκις τεμῆς nal dbing ἔλαχεν. Tapa τῶν ϑεῶι πολλὰ mapeı-
λήφαμεν δῶρα. Οὐ λέληϑ εν, ὅςτις ἄδικα ἔργα πράττει. El ϑεὸν ἀνήρ τες
ἔλπεται Aadeiv, ἁμαρτάγει. Δὶς ἐξαμαρτεῖν rabröv! οὐκ dvdpd¢ σοφοῦ.
"EE ἀγαϑῆς χϑονός ἔ β λαστε καλὰ ἄνϑεμα, ἐκ δ᾽ ὀρϑῶν φρενῶν βουλεύματ’
ἐσϑλά. Τῆς εὐεργεσίας οὔποτε λήσομαι.
The king will not peroeive the plots against him. If thou drinkest (drink-
ing), talk not much (pl.) ; for thou wilt err. What man has not once erred ?
The bad (man) is hated by the good. Philip increased (aor.) his royal au-
thority more by money than by arms. From a correct understanding will al-
ways spring (GAacra»w) excellent resolutions. I have slept only a short time.
I will not touch the dog. Perieles has acquired great fame. The bad will
never acquire true fame. We shall take precaution for a becoming life (gen.).
The town was taken (aor.) by the enemy. The ungrateful (person) has for-
gotten the favor. The boy has studied literature well. Hast thou heard the
sad news?
8122. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and
Impf. by annexing the two consononts ox or the syllable tox.
<x is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and cox,
when it is a consonant. Most verbs, whose pure stem ends with a
consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of pure
verbs, e. g. eve-ioxo (from EYTPE-). Some of these verbs, in the
Pres. and Impf., take a reduplication also, which consists in re-
peating the first consonant of the stem with ı.
1. ἀλ-ίσκ-ομαι, to: be taken, to be conquered, Impf. ἡλισκόμην;
(AAO-) Fat. ἁλώσομαι ; second Aor. ἥλων, and ἑάλω» (με, § 142,
9), J was taken ; Perf. ἥλωκα, and ἑάλωκα, I have been taken (Aug,
$87,6). The Act. is supplied by αἱρϑῦν (§ 126, 1), signifying, to
take captive, to conquer.
2. ἀναλίσκω, to spend, to consume, Impf. ἀνήλισκον; Fut. ava-
λώσω; Aor. ἀνήλωσα and ἀγάλωσα, κατηνάλωσα; Perf. ἀνήλωκα
and ἀνάλωκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἀὠνήλωμαι and ἀνάλωμαι; Aor.
Pass. ἀνάλώϑην.
8. ἀρέσκω, to please, Fut. ἀρέσω; Aor. ἤρεσα; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. ἤρεσμαι; Aor. Pass. 70¢007v.—Mid.
4. γηράσκω or γηράωυ, to grow old, Fut. TierOne Aor. ἐγήρᾶ-
oa; Inf. γηρᾶσαι; Perf. γεγήρακα.
ὅ. γιγνώσκω, ἴο know, (TNO-) Fut. γνώσομαι; second Aor. &-
ψῶν (ut, ὃ 142); Perf. ἔγνωκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἔγρωσμαι ($ 95) ;
verbal adjective, 7900205, γνωστέος.
1460, Rem. On the Sing verb, see p. 27.
140 VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED, [$ 122.
6. διδράσκω, to run away (usually compounded, 6. g. anod.,
önd., διαδ.), Fut. δράσομαι; Perf. se aa second Aor. ééeay
(us, § 142, 1). Ä
7. εὑρίσκω, to Jind, | second Aor. εὗρον; aps εὑρέ; ; (EYPE-)
Fut. εὑρήσω; Perf. εὕρηκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. εὕρημαι; Aor.
Pass. εὐρέϑην; Aor. Mid. εὑρόμη»: verbal adjective, svgeruc.
8. ᾿ἡβάσκω, to come to one’s strength, to come to the state of man-
hood, Aor. ἤβησα (ἡβάω, to be young, but ἀνηβάω, to become young
again). ᾿
9. ϑνήσκο,, commonly PER VE πῶ; to. die, (QOAN-) Aor. ἀπέϑα-
vo»; Fut. ἀποϑανοῦμαι; Perf. τέϑνηκα, etc.; Fut. Perf. τεϑνήξω
old Att., and τεϑνήξομαι, I shall be dead.
10. ἱλάσκομαι, to propitiate, Fut. ἱλᾶσομαι; Aor. ἱλασάμην.
11. wurnoxo, to remind, (MN.A-) Fut. μνήσω; Aor. ἔμνησα;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. μέμνημαι, I remember, I am mindful (Redup.,
§ 88, Rem. 1), Subj. μεμνώμαι, -7, -yraı (§ 116, 4), Imp. μέμνησο;
Plup. ἐμεμνήμην, I remembered, Opt. μεμνήμην, -70, -ἧτο, or μεμνῷ-
μὴ»; -po, -ῷτο (8 116, 4); Fut. Perf. μεμνήσομαι, 1 shall be mindful ;
Aor. ἐμνήσθην, I remembered ; Fut. μνησθήσομαι, I shall remember.
12. πάσχω (arising from πάϑσκω, by transferring the aspiration
of the 9 to x), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. inadoy;
(HEN Q-) Fut. πείσομαι ($ 8, 7) ; Perf. πέπονθα. Verbal err
παϑητός..
18. πιπίσπω, to give to drink, Fut. moo ; Ἄδα Erica.
14. πιπράσκω, to sell (Fut. and Aor. in the Common language
expressed by ἀποδώσομαι, ἀπεδόμη») ; Perf. πέπράκα; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. πέπρᾶμαι (Inf. πεπρᾶσθαι!) ;; Aor. ἐπράϑην; Fut. Perf.
πεπράσομαι in the sense of the simple Fut. πραϑήσομαι. (not. used).
15. στερίσκω (seldom στερέω), to deprive of, Fut. στερήσω ; Aor.
80720100 ; ; Perf. soz ἔρηκα: Mid. and Pass. στερίσκομαι, στεροῦμαι,
Fut. στερήσομαι; ; Perf. ἐστέρημαι; Aor. ἐστερήϑην.
16. τιερώσκω, to wound, Fut. τρώσω ; Aor. ἔτρωσα; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. τέτρωμαι; Aor. ἐτρώϑην; Fut. τρωϑήσομαι and τρώσο-
μαι.
17. φάσκω, to think, to say, to affirm, assert (Ind. not used), Impf.
ἔφασκον; Fut. φήσω; Aor. ἔφησα.
18. χάσκω, to gape, (X_AN-) Aor. éyavov; Fut. χἀνοῦμαι; Perf.
κέχηνα, I stand open.
Reuark. Διδάσκω, to teach, retains the « in forming the tenses: Fut. διδάξω; :
Aor. ἐδίδαξα; Perf. δεσιθάκαι ; Aor. Pass. ἐδιδάχϑην.----Μιᾶ, |
5123.] VERBS.—PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 141
LIX. Vocabulary.
"AAdrog,-ov, without trou- ἐπαναφέρω, to bring back, παλαιός, -a, -6v, old, aged,
ble, free from sorrow. refero, to refer, impute. οἵ old time.
ἀμνημονέω, w. gen., to be εὐγενής, -éc, well-born, of πάσχω, to feel, suffer;
forgetful of. high birth, noble. with ed, receive a favor,
δεκάς, -adoc, 7, a decad, μοῖρα, -ας, 7, a share, a be well treated.
the number ten. lot, fate. πενϑέω, to grieve, moun
ἐφιευρίσκω, te find out μόρσιμος, -ov, fated. . fon
‚OAlyovs εὑρήσεις ἄνδρας ἑταίρους πιστοὺς ἐν χαλεποῖς πράγμασιν. Tae
σιν ἀνθρώποις μόρσιμόν ἐστιν ἀποϑανεῖν. Ἰενϑοῦμεν τοὺς τεϑνηκότας.
Ἡδέως τῶν παλαιῶν πράξεων: μέμνηνται οἱ ἄνϑρωποι. Οὐκ ἂν εὕροις
ἄνϑρωπον πάντα ὀλβιώτατον. Ἢ καλῶς ζῇν, ἢ καλῶς τεϑνηκέναι ὁ eb-
γενὴς βούλεται. EI δεινὰ δι’ ὑμετέραν κακότητα πεπόνϑατε, un tee ϑεοῖς
τούτων μοῖραν éxavagépere. Τὰ ἄλλα καὶ πόλεμος καὶ μεταβολὴ τύχης ἀν ά-
λωσεν"δ ἡ τέχνη δὲ σώζεται. Tlavr’ ἔστιν ἐξευρεῖν, ἐὰν μὴ τὸν πόνον
φεύγῃ rw. El τις γηρᾶσας ζῇν εὔχεται, ἀξιός ἐστι γηράσκειν πολλὰς εἰς trav
δεκάδας. Μέμνησο, ὅτι ϑνητὸς ὑπάρχεις. Torx τέχνην εὕρηκας, ob
τέχνῃ τύχην. Οὐκ ἔστι βίον εὑρεῖν ἄλυπον οὐδενί.5 ᾿Αχάριστος, ὅςτις ad
παϑὼν cuvnpovet. Δίκαιον εὖ πράττοντα μεμνῆσϑαι τῶν ἀτυχῶν.
The town has been taken by the enemies. The citizens expected, that the
town would be taken by the enemies. By the war (dat.) the whole wealth of
the town has been consumed. Seek to please (aor.) the good. The fame of
virtue will never grow old. The bad (man) will never perceive the beauty of
virtue. The slaves have ran away in the night. They say that (acc. w. inf.)
letters were invented (inf. aor.) by the Phoenicians. The brave warriors will
willingly die for their country. To mortals it is not permitted (οὐκ ἔστι, w. dat.y
to say, This I will not suffer. The prisoners were sold (aor.) by the enemies.
The soldiers robbed (aor.) the citizens of their property. Many soldiers were
wounded in the battle. Alexander was instructed (aor.) by Aristotle.
§ 123. V. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and:
Impf. by prefixing the Reduplication.
This reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the
stem with «. To this class belong:
γίγνομαι (instead of yıyevonas), to become, (T'EN-) Aor. ἐγενόμην;
Fut. γενήσομαι; Perf. γεγένημαι, I have become, or γέγονα with a
present signification, J am.
πίπτω (instead of πιπέτω), to fall, Imp. πῖπτε; (TIET-) Fut. e-
σοῦμαι (§ 116, 3); Aor. ἔπεσον; Perf. πέπτωκα with irregular
vowel of variation.
ReMARK. Several verbs of class IV, § 122, belong here, as γιγνώσκω.
δ 4. 158, 5. (Ὁ). 7 inevery respect. 497,8. (a). 4 μῆ τι, in no respect
5 The Aor. denotes a custom. δοὺκ lort—otdevi, no one ean. See § 177, 6.
142 VERBS TO WHOSE PURE STEM 8 18 ADDED. [9124
ον VI. Verbs, to whose Pure Stem 8 is added in the Pres. and
| τς dmpf.
1. γαμέω, to marry (of the man), Perf. γεγάμηκα, but Fut. yapos
($ 83); Aor. ἔγημα, γῆμαι; Mid. γαμοῦμαι (with the Dat.), to marry
(of the woman, nubo), Fut. γαμοῦμαι (8 83) ; Aor. ἐγημάμην ; Pass.
to be wedded, Aor. ἐγαμήϑην, ete. —
2. γηϑέω, usually Perf. γέγηϑα (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. yy
8700.
8. δοκέο, to seem, videor, to think, Fut. δόξω ; Aor. Soke; Perf.
Pass. δέδογμαι, visus sum ; Aor. Pass. ἐδύχϑην.
4, μαρτῦρέω, to witness, Fut. μαρτυρήσω, etc. But μαρτύρομαι,
Dep. Mid. to call to witness. |
5. ξυρέω, to shave, Mid. ξύρομαι; Aor. ἐξυράμην», but Perf. ἐξύ-
θρημαι..
6. ὠϑέω, to push, Impf. ἐώϑου»; Fut. aco and ὠϑήσω; Aor.
ἔωσα, ὦσαι; Perf. goxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἔωσμαι; Aor. Pass.
ἐώσϑην (Aug. § 87, 4).—Mid.
LX. Vocabulary.
»Απωϑέω, to push, or drive ἐμπέπτω, to fall on or into συμ-πίπτω, to to fall with;
away. something,tomeetwith. συμπίπτει, it happens.
ἄτη, -n¢, 7, infatuation, εὐδοκϊμέω, to beor.become συμ-φέρω, to carry with,
and consequent unhap- _ celebrated. conduce, to be of use.
piness, evil. mpo-voéw, to think or con- συν-δια-τρίβω, to spend
εἰς-ωϑέω, to push, ordrive _ sider beforehand. time with, to live with.
in. πώποτε, ever. φόνος, -ov, ὁ, murder.
Πολλάκις ἐκ κακοῦ ἐσθλὸν ἐγένετο, nal κακὸν ἐξ ἀγαϑοῦ. Xeipa πεσόντι
ὄρεξον. Ὁ ἀγαπῶν κίνδυνον. ἐμπεσεῖται αὐτῷ: Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι πρὸς ἀῤετὴν γε-
γόνασιν. Μή μοι γένοιϑ᾽ ἃ βούλομαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἃ συμφέρει. Μὴ σπεῦδε πλουτεῖν,
μὴ ταχὺ πένης γένῃ. Πολλάκις ὁ εὐδοκιμεῖν πειρώμενος, ob mpovonoas, εἰς με-
γάλην καὶ χαλεπὴν ürnv ἔπεσεν. Ὅταν ἀτυχεῖν σοι συμπέσῃ τι, Ἐϊριπίδου
μνήσϑητι" Οὐκ ἔστιν, ὅςτις πάντ᾽ ἀνὴρ εὐδαιμονεῖ. Μενέδημος πρὸς τὸν ἐρω-
τήσαντα, εἰ γῆμαι ὁ σπουδαῖος, ἔλεξεν - ’Eyo γεγάμηκα. ‘H τοῦ φίλου ϑυγατήρ,
ἐννάτην ἡμέραν γεγαμημένη, τέϑνηκεν. ᾿Αχιλλέως ϑυμὸς ἐγεγήϑει φόνον
᾿Αχαιῶν ὁρῶντος. "Edofe τῷ στρατηγῷ! ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους σστρατεύσασθαι.
Σωκράτης ἔλεξεν - Ὑπὸ πώντων μαρτυρήσεταί μοι, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἠδίκησα μὲν οὐδένα
κώποτε ἀνθρώπων, οὐδὲ χείρωξ ἐποίησα, βελτίους δὲ ποιεῖν ἐπειρώμην ἀεὶ τοὺς
ἐμοὶ συνδιατρίβοντας. Δημοσϑένης ἐξύρατο τὴν κεφαλήν. Οἱ στρατιῶται εἰς
τὴν πόλιν εἰςεωσϑησαν. Οἱ στρατιῶται ἀπεώσαντο τοὺς πολεμίους.
If thou actest so (so acting), thou wilt soon become poor. The soldiers have
fallen upon the enemies (ἐμπέπτω, w. dat.). The daughter of my friend will
1 The general determined. 2535, Rem. 4.
$125.] VERBS WHICH ASSUME & IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. 148
marry the son of my brother. The citizens will rejoice, if they hear (hearing)
the. defeat (gen.) of the enemies. It is determined (perf. pass. of δοκέω) that (ace.
w. inf.) the soldiers march against the enemies. All will bear testimony to
thee, that thou hast conferred many favors on the state. The slaves have had
their heads shaved. The enemies drove the soldiers into the town.
§ 125. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and Impf., but which
in the other Tenses assume a Stem with the Characteristic s.
The e is lengthened into 7 in inflection. Exceptions: ἄχϑομαι and μάχομαι.
1. ἀλέξα,, to ward off, Fut. ἀλεξήσω ; Mid. to ward off from one-
self, to defend, Fut. ἀλεξήσομαι (from AAEK-); Aor. ἠλεξαμην.
2. ἄχϑομαι, to be vexed, displeased, Fut. ἀχϑέσομαι; Aor. ἡχϑέσ-
Or ; Fut. ἀχϑεσϑήσομαι having the same signification as ἀχϑέσομαι.
8. Booxw, to feed, Fut. βοσχήσω; Aor. ἐβόσκησα; Mid. to feed
(intransitive).
4. βούλομαι, to wish, (second Pers. βούλει, § 82, 2), Fut. βουλή-
oouas; Perf. βεβούλημαι; Aor. ἐβουλήθην and ἡβουλ. (Aug. § 85,
Rem.).
5. δέω, to want, to need, usually Impers. dei, it is wanting, st is
necessary, Subj. δέῃ, Part. δέον, Inf. δεῖν; Impf. ἔδει, Opt. δέοι;
Fut. δεήσει; Aor. ἐδέησε(»); Mid. δέομαι, to need, Fut. δεήσομαι;
Aor. ἐδεήθην.
6. ἐθέλω and θέλο), to will, Impf. ἤϑελον and ἔϑελον; Fut. ios.
λήσω and ϑελήσω; Aor. ἠἡϑέλησα and ἐθέλησα ; Perf. only ἠθέληκα.
7. εἴλω, to press, to shut up, Fut. εἰλήσω ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. at-
λημαι; Aor. Pass. εἰλήϑην.
‚8 Ἐ IPOMAT, Aor. ἠρόμην, I inquired, ἐρέσϑαι, ἔρωμαι, ἐροί-
μην, ἐροῦ, ἐρόμενος ; Fut. ἐρήσυμαι. The other u are supplied
by & a
9. ἔῤῥω, | to go forth, Fut. &061700 ; Aor. ἤῤῥησα.
10. εὕδω, commonly καϑεύδω, to sleep, Fut. καϑευδήσω (Aug.,
891, 5).
11. &xo, to have, to ‚hold, Impf. εἶχον (§ 87, 3) ; Aor. ἔσχον, Inf.
σχεῖν», Imp. σχές, παράσχες (μι, § 142), Subj. σχῶ, -YS, παράσχω,
παράσχῃς, etc., Opt. σχοίην (μι), Part. σχών; Fut. ἔξω and σχήσω;
Perf. ἔσχηκα; Aor. Mid. ἐσχόμην, Subj. σχώμαι, Opt. σχοίμην, Imp.
σχοῦ, παράσχου, Inf. σχέσϑαι, παρασχέσϑαι, Part. σχόμενος ; Fut.
σχήσομαι; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἔσχημαι; Aor. Pass. ἐσχέϑην; ver-
bal adjective, ἑ ἕκτός and oyeros.
12. ἕψω, to botl, to cook, Fut. ἑψήσω ; verbal adjective, ἑφϑός or
Sypmrög, ἑψητέος.
144 VERBS WHICH ASSUME ὃ IN THE TENSE-SORMAION. [ὃ 125.
13. καϑῆζω, to seat, make to sit, Impf. ἐκάϑιζον, old Attic, sad
Cov; Fut. καϑιὼ (§ 83); Aor. ἐκάϑἔσα, old Attic, καϑῖσα; Perf.
κεκάθϊἴκα; Mid. I seat myself, Fut. καϑιζήσομαι; Aor. ἐκαϑισάμην,
I seated for myself, I caused to sit. But καϑέζομαι, I seat myself,
I sit, Impf. ἐκαϑεζόμην ; Fut. καϑεδοῦμαι (Aug. § 91, 3).
14. κλαίω, to weep, Att. χλάω without contraction, Fat. κλαύσο-
um and χλαυσοῦμαι (§ 116, 3), rarer κλαιήσω or κλαήσω; Aor.
ἔκλαυσα; Perf. κέκλαυμαι and κέκλαυσμαι; verbal adjective, κλαυσ-
τός and κλαντός, xAuvareog.—Mid.
15. μάχομαι, to fight, Fut. μαχοῦμαι (instead of μαχέσομαι) ; Aor.
ἐμαχεσάμην; Perf. μεμάχημαι; verbal adjective, μαχετέος and μα-
ἡτέος. |
; 16. μέλλω, to intend, to be about to do, henee to delay, Impf. ἔμελ-
λον and ἤμελλον; Fut. μελλήσω; Aor. ἐμέλλησα (Aug. § 85, Rem.).
17. μέλει pos, tt is a care, anxiety, interest to me, curae mthi est
(rarely personal μέλω), Fut. μελήσει; Aor. ἐμέλησε(») ; Perf. μεμέ-
Arxe(»); Mid. μέλομαι, commonly ärzıueloum (and ἐπιμελοῦμαιμλ) ;
Fut. ἐπιμελήσομαι (sometimes ἐπιμεληθϑήσομαι) ; Aor. ἐπεμελήϑην.
18. μύζω, to suck, Fut. μυζήσω, etc.
19. ὄζω, to smell, Fut. ὀζήσω; Aor. ὥζησα; Perf. ὄδωδα with
the meaning of the Pres. (Att. Redup., § 89).
20. οἴομαι and οἶμαι, to think, second Pers. oie: ($ 82, 2), Impf.
Φόμην and ᾧμην; Fut. oimooum; Aor. φήϑην, οἰηϑῆναι (Aug,
$ 87, 1).
21. οἴχομαι, to depart, to go, to have gone, alii, Impf. φχόμην, I
went away; Fut. οἰχήσομαι; Perf. @ynueı, in the Common lan-
guage only in composition, 6. g. σαρῴχημαι.
22. ὀφείλω, to owe, to be under obligation, debeo, Fut. ὀφειλήσω ;
Aor. ὠφείλησα ; second Aor. ὥφελον, -es, -e(v) (first and second
Pers. Pl. not used) in forms expressing wish, utinam.
23. πέτομαι, to fly, Fut. πτήσομαι; Aor. ἐπτόμην», πτέσϑαι (rarer
ἔπτην and ἐπτάμην, μι, § 142, 2); Perf. menornpos.—Syncope,
§ 117, 1.
24. χαίρω, to rejoice, Fut. yaıpyow; Aor. ἐχάρην (μι, § 142, 8);
Perf. κεχάρηκα, I have rejoiced, and κεχάρημαι, I am rejoiced.
Remark. With these verbs several liquid verbs may be classed ; still, these
form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly; 6. g. μένω, to remain, Perf. μεμένηκα, reg-
ular in the other tenses; νέμω, to divide, to distribute, Fut. νεμῶ and νεμοῦμαε ;
Aor. Eveıua; Perf. νενέμηκα; Aor. Pass. ἐνεμήϑην (rarer ἐνεμέϑην); Perf.
Mid. or Pass. vevéunuat.—Mid.
§125.] VERBS WHICH ASBUME 8 IN THE TENSE-FORMATIOY. 145
LXI. Vocabulary.
"Au Bpocia, -a, 4; the food τήδειος, -α, τον, fit, re- μεστός, -ῆ, -ὄν, 10. gen, fyll.
of the gods. quisite; τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, μύρον, -ov, τό, scented
ἀνα-πέτομαι, to fy up, or provisions. salve, perfumery.
away. . ἐρωτώω, to ask. νέμω, to divide, distribute,
ἀνέψω, to boil up. ἡμίϑεος, -ov, ὁ, a demi- ὄρνις, -Idog, ὁ, 7, a bird.
βασίλειας, -ov and Paci- god. ὄρος, -e0¢ = -oug, τό, A
Aetog, -a, -ov, royal, ϑρόνος, -ov, 6, ἃ seat, a mountain.
regal. throne. πώππος, -ov, ὁ, a grand-
δια-μένω, to remain. καλοκἀγαϑία, -ag, 7, rec- father.
el, if, in a question, whether. titude, virtue. πλήν, except, besides.
ἐλέγχω, το examine,search, λεία, -ac, #, booty, plun- τρίπους, -odoc, ὃ, three-
blame, convict. der. |part. footed, a tripod. '
ἐπιτήδειος, -ov and ini- μέρος, -e0¢ = -οῃς, τό, ἃ
Ol στροτιῶται rode ronepiong ἀλεξήσφομται. Μὴ ἀχϑεσϑῆτε ὑπὲρ ὧν! hung,
τάνετε ἐλεγχόμενοι. 'O ποιμὴν αἰγῶν rau ἀγέλην ἐμ τοῖς ὗρεσι βοσκήσει. Of
στρατιῶται ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους στρατεύεσϑαι ἐβουλήϑησαν. Τοῖς στρατιώγαρις
ἐν τῇ πολεμίᾳ γῇ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων δεήσει. Πλούσιός ἐστιν οὐχ ὁ πολλὰ κεκτη-
μένος, ἀλλ᾽ ὁ μικρῶν δεησόμενος. Ὃ Πολυδεύκης οὐδὲ Sede ἠϑέλησε μόνος, ἀλ-
Aa μᾶλλον ἡμίϑεος σὺν τῷ ἀδελφῷ γενέσϑαι. Οἱ βάρβαροι, ὑπὰ τῶν "Ἑλλήνων
διωχϑέντες, εἰς τὸν ποταμὸν εἰλήϑησαν. "Epod τὸν πατέρα, εἰ τὴν ἐπιατολὴῃ
γέγραφεν. Οὐ πρέπει τὸν στρατηγὸν ἐν κινδύμοις καϑευδῆσαι. Οὐδεὶς ἀυθρᾷ.
πὼν ἠξιώϑη τοῖς ϑεοῖς! ὁμιλεῖν, πλὴν ὅσοι μετεσχήκασι κάλλους " Πέλοψ γὰρ
τούτου ἕνεκα ἀμβροσίας" μετέσχε καὶ Τανυμήδης καὶ ἄλλοι τινές. Μήῤεια Al-
cova ἀνεψήσασα νέον ποιῆσαι λέγεται. Καϑιοῦμέν σε, ὦ στρατηγξέ, εἰς τὸν ϑρῥ-
vov τὸν βασίλειον. Ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπὶ τοῦ ϑρόνου καϑιζήδεται. Οἱ "EAAnves by
Σαλαμῖνι ϑαῤῥαλέως ἐμαχέσαντο. Κῦρος ὑπὸ Μανδάνης τῆς μητρὸς ἐρωτηϑ εἴς,
εἰ βούλοιτο μένειν παρὰ τῷ πάππῳ, οὐκ ἐμέλλησεν, ἀλλὰ ταχὺ ἔλεξεν, ὅτε pd
werv βούλοιτο. Τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς" τῆς ἀρετῆς μελῆσρι. Xpmorol νέοι ob μύρῳψ
ὀζήσουσιν," ἀλλὰ καλοκἀγαϑίας. Οἱ στρατιῶται οἰηϑέντες τοὺς πολεμίους ἀπο-
φυγεῖν ὥχοντο. ‘H ψυχή ἀναπτομένῃη οἰχήσεται ἀϑάνατος καὶ ἄγηρως. Οἱ κα-
κοῦργοι μεγάλην ζημίαν ὠφείλησαν. ἫἪ ὄρνις ἀναπεπότηται. Οἱ πολῖται der
vig ἐκεχαρήκεσαν ἐπὶ τῇ νίκῃ. Οἱ ϑηρευταὶ πᾶσαν τὴν νύκτα ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι ϑιε-
μεμενήκεσαν. Τῆς λείας μέρος ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν τῷ στρατηγῷ ἐνεμήϑη (ἔνε-
μέϑη). Tpimodes ἧσαν κρεῶν μεστοὶ νενεμημένων. |
The soldiers courageously kept off (aor. mid.) the enemies. Many herdsmen
tended (aor.) the herds of goats on the mountains. The father will wish to de-
-part to-morrow. A good general takes care, that (that not, ὅπως, un, w. ind. fut.)
the soldiers may not want provisions. The good will not wish to go about with
the bad. I will ask the father, whether he has written the letter. If thou art
weary (being weary, perf. part.), thou wilt sleep comfortably (ἡδέως) Those
who are held by evil desires are all slaves. Cowardly soldiers will not take
part im Gungers. son, having been boiled by Medea, is said to have become
lice. ὑπὲρ τούτων, a. 5 the soldiers will need. 34158, 5. (a).
4 § 161, 2 (a), (a). 54158,3.(b). *4161,5. 7§158, 6.1, (b).
4 ὄζειν τινός, to smell of something. owed, hadtosuffer. δ ὁ 39, Resp.
13
146 VERBS.—TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. [ἢ 126.
young again. The soldiers set their general upon the regal throne. Good
warriors will fight courageously for their country. I will not delay, but quickly
ask. The laws will care for the general welfare (gen... The flowers smell
(perf.) beautifully. The youths smelt of perfume. The citizens will not think,
that (acc. w. inf.) the enemies have already fled. I will go. The evil-doers will
have to suffer (will owe) a great punishment. The bird will fly away. I shall
rejoice to be honored (being honored) by the good. The soldiers have given
the general a share of the booty.
§ 126. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different Roots, and
which are classed together only in respect to Signification.
1. αἱρέω, to take, to capture, 6. g. a city, Fut. αἱρήσω ; Perf. ἥρη-
κα; Aor. (from E4) εἷλον, ἑλεῖν; Aor. Pass. ἠρέϑην; Fut. Pass.
αἱρεϑήσομαι (§ 98, Rem.); Mid. to choose, Fut. αἱρήσομαι; Aor.
silöunv ; verbal adjective, aigerds, -reog.—Aug., § 87, 3.
2. ἔρχομαι, to go, to come (the remaining modes and participials
are borrowed from eis [$ 137]; thus ἔρχομαι, ico, ἴϑι, ἰέναι, ἰών) ;
Impf. ἠρχόμην, commonly few or gu, Opt. toyu; Fut. εἶμι, I shall
go (ἥξω, I shall come) ;—-('EAETO-) Perf. ἐληλῦϑα ; Aor. ἦλϑον,
Ho, ἔλϑοιμι, ἐλθέ, ἐλθεῖν, ἐλϑὼν ; verbal adjective, ἐλευστέον.
8. ἐσθίω, to eat, Impf. ἤσϑιον; Fut. ἔδομαι; Perf. ἐδήδοκα;
(DAT) Aor. ἔφαγον, φαγεῖν; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἐδήδεσμαι ;
Aor. Pass. n8:0079 ; verbal adjective, &ös0z0g.
4. ὁράω, to see, Impf. ἑώρων ; Perf. ἑωρᾶκα (Aug., 8 87, 6);
(IA-) Aor. εἶδον, ἴδω, ἴδοιμι, ἰδέ, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών. On the second Perf.
οἶδα, I know, see $143. (OIT-) Fut. ὄψομαι (second Pers. ὄψει,
§ 82, 2); Mid. or Pass. ὁρῶμαι; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἑωώρᾶμαι or
ὦμμαι, ὦψαι, etc.; Inf. ὥφϑαι; Aor. Mid. εἰδόμην, ἰδέσϑαι, ἰδοῦ
(and with the meaning ecce, ἰδού), as a simple, only poetic; Aor.
Pass. ὄφϑην, ὀφϑῆναι; Fut. ὀφϑήσομαι ; verbal adjective, ὁρατός
and ὀπεύς. |
5. τρέχω, to run, (APEM-) Fut. δραμοῦμαι; ‘Aor. ἔδραμον ;
Perf. δεδράμηκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. δεδράμημαι.
6. φέρω, to bear, (OI-) Fut. οἴσω ;—(EI-K-) Aor. ἥνεγκον (rarer
ἤνεγκα), Opt. Eveyxoyu, -eıe(v), etc. (rarer -aum, etc.) ; Inf. ἐνεγκεῖν,
Part. éveyxeov, Imp. ἔνεγκε, -ἔτω, etc.; (ENEK-) Perf. ἐνήνοχα ;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἐρήφεγμαι, -γξαι, -γκται or ἐνήνεκται; Aor. Mid.
ἡνεγκάμην, ἔνεγκαι, -ασϑαι, -ἄμενος ; Aor. Pass. ἠνέχϑην ; Fut. évey-
ϑήσομαι; verbal adjective, οἰστός, oiozeos.—Mid.
7. φημί (§ 185, 8), to say, Impf. ἔφην with the meaning of the
Aor., also gavat and gas; (’EII-) first Aor. εἶπα, εἶπας, εἴπατε,
%
¢
$126.] VERBS.—TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. ΜΗ
Imp. εἶπον, εἰπάτω, Inf. εἶπαι; second Aor. εἶπον, εἴπω, εἴποιμι, eine
(compound πρόεεπε), εἰπεῖν, εἰπών. From the Epic Pres. εἴρω, come
Fut. ἐρῶ; Perf. εἴρηκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eipnum; Fut. Perf.
. εἰρήσομαι. From ‘PE- Aor. Pass. ἐῤῥήϑην, ῥηθῆναι, ῥηθείς ; Fut.
Pass. ῥηθήσομαι; verbal adjective, ῥητός, éytéoc.—Mid. only in
eompounds, Fut. ἀπεροῦμαι and first Aor. ἀπείπασθαι, to deny, to
despair, like ἀπειπεῖν.
"Ayavaxréw, to be dis-
pleased, or indignant.
ἀνα-κράζω, to cry out.
arpexéwe, exactly, surely.
βραδύς, -eia, -ὕ, slow.
γλαύξ, Attic γλαδξ, -Köc,
ἡ, an owl.
δείδω, to fear; perf. dé-
dorxa has ἃ present mean-
ing.
δῶμα, -arog, τό, ἃ house.
ἐνύπνιον, -ου, τό, ἃ dream,
ἃ vision.
LXII. Vocabulary.
ἐξ-ειπεῖν, to speak or say
out, utter. ly.
ἐῤῥωμένως, strongly, firm-
εὔβουλος, -ov, one who
consults well, clever,
sagacious.
λυπέω, to distress. [dious.
μακρός, -ü, «ὄν, long, te-
μήπω, not yet.
ὀργίζομαι (tw. pass. aor.),
to be angry.
παρακαταϑήκη, -ης. 7, &
thing deposited, a pledge.
παρα-τρέχω, w. aec., 10 rum
by, or past.
παρα-φέρω, to carry by or
past.
πέρας, -ατος, τό, the end,
a limit.
mept-opaw, to overlook,
neglect. ᾿
προ-έρχομαι, to go befnre.
πταίρω, to sneeze.
ῥεῦμα, -ατος, τό, a stream.
σφόδρα, very, violently,
very much.
Kat βραδὺς εὔβουλος εἶ} εἰ ταχὺν ἄνδρα διώκων. Οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι Θεμιστο-
κλέα στρατηγὸν elAovro ἐν τῷ Περσικῷ πολέμῳ.
ἸΟδυσσεὺς εἰς "Αἰδου μέγα
dopa ἤλϑεν. “Hy ἂν μοῖραν ἕλῃς, ταύτην φέρε καὶ μὴ ἀγανάκτει. Λυπού-
ped’, ἂν πτάρῃ tig: ἂν εἴπῃ κακῶς, ὀργιζόμεϑα, ἂν Idy τις ἐνύπνιον, σφόδρα
φοβούμεϑα- ἂν γλαὺξ ἀνακρώγῃ, δεδοίκαμεν. Μὴ πίστευε τάχιστα, πρὶν ἀτρε-
κέως πέρας ὄψει. Μετρίως φάγε. Οὐδὲ εἷς "Ὅμηρον εἴρηκε μακρόν. "Oc-
τις λόγους, ὧς παρακαταϑήκην, λαβὼν ἐξεῖπεν, ἄδικός ἐστιν, ἢ ἄγαν ἀκρατής.
Μὴ τοῦτο βλέψῃς, εἰ νεώτερος λέγω, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ φρονούντων τοὺς λόγους ἀνδρῶν
ἐρῶ. Πένϑει μετρίως τοὺς ἀποϑανόντας φίλους " οὐ γὰρ τεϑνήκασιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν
αὐτὴν ὁδόν, ἣν πᾶσιν ἐλϑεῖν ἔστ᾽ ἀνάγκη, προεληλύϑασιν, Ἐένους
πένητας un παραδράμῳῃς ἰδών. Ἱταμός τις καὶ ῥεῦμα βίαιόν ἐστιν ὁ
αἰών - ἅμα τε γὰρ ὥφϑη καὶ παρενήνεκται καὶ ἄλλο παραφέρεται, τὸ δὲ
ἐνεχϑήσεται. "ἔνεγκε λύπην καὶ βλάβην ἐῤῥωμένως. Φίλον δι᾽ ὀργὴν
ἐν κακοῖς μὴ περείδῃς. Μήπω μέγαν εἴπῃς, πρὶν τελευτήσανν᾽ ἴδῃ ς.
The enemies have taken the town. Themistocles was chosen general by the
Athenians. Come, (aor.) O friend, and see (aor.) the unhappy man. If thou
art hungry (being hungry), thou wilt eat with relish (ἡδέως). The boy has
eaten. The provisions are (i. e. have been) eaten. I have seen the unhappy
(man). The enemies were scen (aor.). If thou seest thy poor friends (part.
aor.), thou wilt not run past them. The boy has run very fast. The grief was
borne (uor.) by the father with firmness. What has been said to thee by thy
friend ?
I the Aor. is translated by is accustomed. 3 instead of ἀλλο dé.
148 VERBS IN -u.—CONJUGATION.— DIVISION. [§§ 127, 128.
VERBS IN -ut.
§ 127. Conjugation of Verbs in -ps.
1. The principal peculiarity of verbs in -με is, that, in the Pres.
cand Impf., and also in the second Abr. Act. and Mid. of several
verbs, they take personal-endings different from those in -ῶ, and
have no mode-vowel in the Ind. of these tenses. The formation of
all the other tenses of these verbs is like that of verbs in -«, with a
few exceptions. |
2. Several verbs in -μι, which have a monosyllabic stem, in the
Pres. and Impf. take a reduplication (§ 123), which consists in re-
peating the first consonant of the stem with ı, when the stem begins
with a simple consonant or with a mute and liquid; but, when the
stem begins with oz, zz, or with an aspirated vowel, ı with the rough
Breathing is placed before the stem. There are only a few verbs
of this kind; e. g.
AO- δί-δω-μι, to give, XPA- xi-xpn-uı, to lend,
ZTA- ἴ-στη-μι, to place, E- I-n-uı, to send.
8128. Division of Verbs in -μι.
Verbs in - are divided into two principal classes:
L Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. The
‘item of verbs of this class ends,
(a) 3 in a, 6. 8. l-orn-u, to station, Stem ZTA-
(Ὁ) “ e, τί-ϑη-μι, to place, ΘΕ-
(c) “0, “ ὁδί-δω-μι, to give, “« AO-
(ἃ) “u, “ εἶμι, to go “>.
(6) “o, “ εἰμί, instead of ἐσμί, tobe, “ ἜΣ-.
IL Such as annex to their stems the syllable »vv or vv, and then
append to this syllable the personal-engings. The stem of verbs of
this class ends,
A. In one of the four vowels, a, &, ı, 0, and assumes 999.
a in «, ©. g. σκεδά-ννθ-μι, to scatter, Stem ZKEAA-
(b) “ e, “ κορέ-ννῦ-μι, to satisfy, “ KOPE-
I “ 4 only ri-vvö-u, to atone, “ TI.
ἃ) “ 0, 6. g. στρώ-ννῦ-μι, to spread oul, * ZTPO-.
B. In a consonant, and assumes vv.
(a) in a mute, 6. g. δείκ-νῦ-μι, to show, Stem AEIK-
(b) * liquid, “ ὄμο-γνῦ-μι, to swear, “ ’OM-.
Rauınx. Of this second class, only the verb σβέ-ννυ-με, to quench, from the
stem ZBE-, forms a second Aor., vis. ἔσβην.
§§ 129, 130.] VERBS IN -u.—MODE-VOWELS.—ENDINGS, 149.
8129. Mode-vowels.
1. The Ind. Pres., Impf. and second Aor. do not take the mode-
vowel, and hence the personal-endings are annexed to the verb-
stem; 6. g.
ἴ-στα-μεν ἐ-τί-ϑὲε- μεν ἔ- δο- μεν
l-ordé-pedvea ἐ-τι- ϑέ-μεϑα ἐ- δό- peda.
2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels ὦ and ἡ, like verbs in -ὦ, but
these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel; hence the fol-
lowing deviations from the verbs in -o, in respect ta contraction, are
to be noted, namely,
än and Gy coalesce into 7 and ἢ (not, as in contracts in -ἄω, into ἃ and ¢),
öy coalesces into ᾧ (not, as in contracts in -dw, into oz); 6. g.
Lora-w = i-ord l-ord-y¢ = ἱ-στῇς ἱ-στά-η-ται = ἱ-στῆ-ται
στίνρω τ στῶ στά-ῃς = στῆς "
τι-ϑέ-ω = τι-ϑῶ τι-ϑέ-ης = τι-ϑῇς τι-ϑέ-τω-μαι = τι-ϑῶ-μαι
6t-dé- = δι-δῶ δι-δό-ῃς = δι- δῷς δι-δό-ῃ == δι-δῷ.
Rex. 1. This form of the Subj. of torque and τίϑημι is like the Subj. of the
two Aorists Pass. of all verbs; 6. g. τυφϑῶ, «ἧς, -ῦ, etc. τυπ-ῶ, -ἧς, -ῇ, from
τύπ-τω, στα-ϑῶ, -ἧς, -ἢ, from ἴστημι.
Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in εὑμὲ is like that of verbs in -vo; e. g. δεικνύω,
εὕῃς, etc. |
8. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel ı, which
is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms a diph-
thong; e. g.
Opt. Impf. A. l-ora-t-yv = l-orai-yv Aor. II. A. orai-nv Impf. M. l-orai-um
Ti-Se-l-ny = Ti-Sei-nv ϑεί-ην τι-ϑεί-μην
δι-δο-ι-ην = δι-δοί-ην δοί-ην δι-δοί- μην.
Rem. 3. The form of the Opt. of verbs in -ε (τίϑημι) is like the Opt. of the
Aorists Pass. of all verbs; 6. g. ora-dei-nv, τυφ-ϑεί-ην, τυπ-εί-ην.
Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -vyc, like the Subj. Pres., follows the
form in -w; 6. g. δεικνύοιμι.
§ 180. Personal-endings.
1. The personal-endings of the Act. are the following:
(a) Indicative Present,
Sing. 1. “μι l-orn-pt
2. -ς l-orn-¢
3. «σι(ν) ζοστη-σι(ν)
Dual 2. «τον l-oTü-Tov
3. -TOV l-or&-Tov
Plur. 1. «μεν l-ord-pev
2. -Te l-ord-re
3. [-vor(v)] (properly -vrı) [l-ora-vri ἱοστα-νσι(ν)}
18*
156 VERBS IN -W.—PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [8 180.
The ending of the third Pers. Pl. -νσι(») is changed into -@oı(v), and then is
contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dialect
admits contraction only in the stems ending in a, thus:
from i-ora-vou is formed !-oraoı (i-ora-dat)
“ τί-ϑε-νσι ss τι-ϑεῖσι Att. τι-ϑέ-ἃσι
«. di-do-vor 6s δι-δοῦσι “. δι-δό-ἀσι
“ δείκ-νυ-νσι, “ δεικ-νῦσι 4. δεικ-νύ-ασι.
(Ὁ) The personal-endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Subj. do
mot differ from those of verbs in -c.
Xe) The following are endings of the Impf. and second Aor. Ind.
Sing. 1. | » Impf. !-orn-v ἐ-τί-ϑη-ῦ
2. | -¢ l-orn-¢ ἐ-τί-ϑη-ς
3. | - l-orn ἐ-τί-ϑη
Dual 2. | -rov Aor. I. ἔσστη-τον &-Se-rov
3. | -τὴν ἐ-στή-τηι ἐ- ϑέ-την
Plur. 1. | -gev E-orn-uev ἔ-ϑε-μεν
2. | -re ἔ-στη-τε &-Ge-re
8. | -σαν ἔ-στη-σαν ἔ-ϑε.σαν.
‘So the Ind. of the two Aorists Pass. of all verbs is like the second Aor. ἔστην ;
«6, g. ἐτύπ-ην, t-ord-Syy, -ἧς, τη, τῆτον, -ἤτην, -NUEV, -NTE, -ησαν.
‘{d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor,
except in the first Pers. Sing., differ from those of the Opt. of the
‘fiistorical tenses of verbs in -c, only in being preceded by ἡ; 6. g.
orai-nv ἱ-σταί-ην Sei-nv Ti-dei-nv δοί-ην δι-δοί-ην.
Reuw.'1. In the Dual and Pl. Impf. Opt, the 7 is commonly rejected, and the
‘idiig of the third Pers. Pl. -70av is regularly shortened into -ev ; 6. g.
rıdei-nuev = τιϑεῖμεν lorai-nre = loraire
rıdel-noav = τιϑεῖεν 6:doi-yoay == διδοῖεν.
The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs; 6. g. τυφϑείημεν, rv-
πείημεν = τυφϑεῖμεν, τυπεῖμεν (wholly like rideinv).—On the contrary, in the
Opt. second Aor. Act. of ἴστημι, τίϑημι, δίδωμι, the shortened forms are very
rare, except the third Pers. Plural.
(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are:
Sing. 2. | -d (l-ora-dı) (τί.ϑε-8ι) (δΐ-δο-ϑι)
8. | -τω l-ora-Tw τι-ϑέ-τω δι-δό-τω
Dual 2. | -rov ‘l-ora-Tov τί.ϑε.τον di-do-Tov
8. | -Tav ἱ-στώ-των τι-ϑέςτων δι-δό-των
Plur. 2. | -re l-oTa-Te ri-de-re 0i-do-Te
3. | -τωσαν ἱ-στά-τωσαν τι-ϑέ-τωσαν 6t-d0-Twoav
or ἱ-στάντων τι-ϑέντων δι-δόντων.
Reu.'2. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. rejects the ending -:, and as a
compensation Icngthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 7, e into
et, o into ov, Ü into 0,
ζ-στα-ϑι becomes [-or7 ri-3e-3: becomes ri-deı
di-do-I “ di-dov deik-vü-dı * deinvd.
hs ending -3 in the Pres. is retained only in a very few verbs. In the
1817 | VERBS IN -W.—FORMATION OF THE TENBES. 151
second Aor. of τέϑημι, ἴημε and δίδωμε, the ending -dı is softened into -¢, thus
GE 8: becomes Yes, ἔ-ϑι = ἔς, δό-ϑι = δός ; but in the second Aor. of lorgus,
the ending -9ὲ is retained, thus στῆ-ϑε, also in the two Aorists Pass. of all verbe ;
6. g. τύπη-ϑι, παιδεύϑητι (instead of παιδεύϑη-ϑι, § 8, Rem. 8). In compounds
of στῆϑι, the ending -73 is often shortened into -@; 6. g. tapaord, ἀπόστα,
xpofda, κατάβα.
(f) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -v&ı. This
ending is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic-vowel ;
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel, a being lengthen-
ed into 7, € into &, ὁ into ov, thus,
Pres. l-orü-vaı τι-ϑένναι dt-dd-vae deik-vi-vaı
Second Aor. orn-vaı ϑεῖ.ναι δοῦναι.
The Inf. of Pass. Aorists of all verbs is κ΄ στῆναι; e.g. τυπῆ-ναι, βουλευ-
ϑῆ-ναι.
(g) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. participle are -vzg,
-+700, -vr, which are joined to the characteristic-vowel according to
the common rule, thus,
i-ora-vt¢ = l-ordc, ἱ-στᾶσα, l-orüv ordc, στᾶσα, στάν
ri-Gé-vT¢ = τι-ϑείς, -εἶσα, «ἔν θείς, ϑεῖσα, ϑέν
δι-δόεντς = δι-δούς, -οὔσα, «ὄν δούς, -οὔσα, «ὄν
δεικ-νύ-ντς == deix-vb0¢, «ὅσα, -ὕν.
The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the Part. τιϑείς
or ϑείς ; 6. g. τυπ-είς, -eica, -Ev, BovAevd-eig, -eica, -Ev.
2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs in
ὦ, except that in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Ind., and
in the Imp., the personal-endings retain their full form, -σαε and -ce,
almost throughout; see the Paradigms.
Rem. 3. The Sing. Impf. Act. of ridnuı and δίδωμι is generally formed from
TIGEQ and AIAOQ with the common contractions. In verbs in -ῦμε, the col-
lateral forms in -bw are usual for the entire Pres. and Impf., and exclusively
in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt.; 6. g. ἐνδεικνύω, ὀμνύω, συμμιγνύω, together
with ἐνδείκνυμι, ὄμνυμι, συμμίγννυμι.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
§ 131. I. First Class of Verbs in -pe.
1. In forming the tenses of the entire Act., as well as of the Fut.
and first Aor. Mid., the short eharacteristic-vowel is lengthened,
namely, « into 7, e into ἡ and (in the Perf. Act. of τίϑημι and tnt)
into et, and o into w; but in the remaining tenses of the Mid., and
throughout the Pass., the short characteristic-vowel is retained, with
the exception of the Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass. of τέϑημι and
152 VERBS IN -W.—TENSES AND PARADIGMS. [8 131.
ἴημι, where the & of the Perf. Act. (τόϑεικα, τέϑειμαι, eine, εἶμαι)»
is retained.
2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of τίθημι, ins and δίδωμι, has 5
for the characteristic of the tense, not ὅσ, thus:
ἔ-ϑη-κ-α, 7-K-a, ἔ-δω-κ-α.
The forms of the first Aor. Act. ἔϑηκα, ἧκα and ἔδωκα, are, how-
ever, used only in the Ind., and, for the most part, only in the Sing. ;
in the other Persons, as well as in the other Modes and Participials,
the forms of the second Aor. are regularly used. Also the forms of
the second Aor. Mid. of τίϑημι, ἵημι and δίδωμι, are used instead
of the first Aor.—On the contrary, the Sing. forms of the second
Aor. Ind. Act. of τίθημι, ἴημε and δίδωμι, namely, 897», ἦν, ἔδων,
are not in use.
8. The verb isrıuw forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like verbs
in -ῶ, with the tense-characteristic 0; e. g. ἔ-στη-σ-α, ἐστη-σ- cys.
The second Aor. Mid. ἐστάμην is not used. This tense is formed,
however, by some other verbs; e. g. ἐπτάμην, ἐπριάμην.
Rem. 1. The second Aor. Pass. and the second Fut. Pass. are wanting in these
verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in ἔστημι, the Fut. Perf. of which is ἐστήξω
(old Att.) and ἑστήξομαι.
§ 188. Paradigms of
ACTIVE.
ZTA- to place.| OE-to put. | AO- to give. | AEIK- to show.
“μὲ ὀί-ὄω-μι
5
£
ὡ
. 1,
2. | l-orn-¢ ri di-dw-f δείκονῦ-ς
= ζ-στη-σι(ν) |Ti-dn-oılv) | di-dw-or(v) | Seix-vd-o1(v)
2. | t-ord-roy ri-de-Tov di-do-Tov deik-vö-Tov
3. | i-ord-rov τί-ϑε-τον δί-δο-τον δείκ-νῦ-τον
. 1. | ξεστᾶ-μεν ri-de-uev di-do-uev δείκ-νῦ-μεν
2. | I-orü-re τί-ϑε-τε di-do-Te deik-vü-re
3. | -orä-oı(v) | τι-ϑέ-ἀσι(ν) | 61-d6-aor(v) | decx-vb-dor(v)
} (fromlorä-ası) and ri-Feior(v)'and de-dovor(v)| and δεικο-νῦσι(ν»ν)
S. 1. | Lora τι-ϑῶ δι-δῶ δεικενύτ-ω
2. | ἱ-στῇ-ς τι-ϑῇ-ς δι-δῷ-ς δεικενύ-ης,
N en ᾿ l-org τιϑῇ δι-δῷ etc.
3 2. | l-or}-rov τι-ϑῆ-τον δι-δῶ-τον
= 8. ἐ-στῆ-τον τι-ϑῆ.τον δι-δῶ-τον
Qi P. A ἱ-στῶ-μεν τι-ϑῶ-μεν δι-δῶ-μεν
ἰ-στῇῆ-τε τι-ϑῆ-τε δι-δῶ-τε
. | koro-oı( v) | τι-ϑῶ-σι(ν) | δι-δῶ.σι(ν)
I And wo «eis, etc., especially deuxvéovor(v). Also Impf. ἐδείκνῦον,
§§ 132, 188. VERBS IN -w.—TENSES AND PARADIGMS. 158
Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb ἴστημε, the following things are to be
noted: the Pres., Impf., Fut. and first Aor. Act. have a transitive meaning, to
place; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup. Act., and the Fut,
Perf., have a reflexive or intransitive meaning, to place one’s self, to stand, namely,
ἔστην, I placed myself, or I stood, ἔστηκα, I have placed myself, I stand, sto, ἑστή-
κείν, stabam, ἑστήξω, ἑστήξομαι, stato (ἀφεστήξω, I shall withdraw). The Mid.
denotes either to place for one’s self, to stand, consistere, or to let one's self be placed,
i. e. to be placed.
§ 182. II Second Class of Verbs in -uı.
There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the second
class (ὃ 128). All the tenses are formed from the stem, after the re-
jection of the ending -»vius or -γῦμι. Verbs in -o, which in the
Pres. have lengthened the o into o, retain the ὦ through all the
tenses; 6. g. στρώ-ν»ῦ-μι, ζώ-ννῦ-μι, ῥώ-ννῦ-μι, χώ-ννῦ-μι, Fut. στρώ-
ce, etc.—But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, take, in forming
some of the tenses, a Theme ending in a vowel; 6. g. ὄμ-νυ-μι, Aor.
ὦμ-ο-σα, from ’OMOR. The second Aor. and the second Fut.
Pass. occur only in a few verbs; 6. δ. Levy-vv-w, second Aor. Pass.
ἐζόγην ; second Fut. Pass. ζύγήσομαι.
Verbsin -μι.
MIDDLE.
ΣΤΑ- to place. ΘΕ- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.
μαι δείκ-νῦ-μαι
«στῶ-μαι τί-ϑε-μαι 1 δί
l-ord-cat ri-Fe-carand τί-θῃ) di-do-car δείκ-νῦ-σαι
l-ord-rat τί-ϑε-ται δί-δο-ται δείκ-νὕ-ται
l-orü-uedov τι-ϑέεμεϑον δι-δό-μεϑον δεικο-νύ-μεϑον
ἴ-στα-σϑον τί-ϑεισϑον δί-δο-σϑον δείκοινυ-σϑον
l-ora-cdov τί-ϑεισϑον δί-δο-σϑον deik-vv-0d0V .
l-oré-ueda . τι-ϑέεμεϑα dı-dö-ueda δεικο-νύ-μεϑα
ἴ-στα-σϑε τί-ϑε-σϑε di-do-aSe δείκ-νυ-σϑε
l-oTa-vraı ri-de-vraı di-do-vTat Ocik-vu-vTas
Lorö-naı τι-ϑῶ-μαι δι-δῶ-μαι ᾿δεικ-νύεωμαι
ἱ-στῇ τι-ϑῇ δι-δῷ " une
l-orn-Tat τι-θῆ-ται δι-δῶ-ται etc.
ἱ-στώ-μεϑον τι-ϑώ-μεϑον δι-δώ-μεϑον
ἱ-στῇῆ-σϑον τι-ϑῆ.σθϑον δι-δῶ-σϑον
ἑ-στῆ-σϑον τι-ϑῇ.σϑον δι-δῶ-σϑον
ἱ-στώ-μεϑα τι-ϑώ-μεϑα δι-δώ-μεϑα
ἐ-στῆ-σϑε τι-ϑῆ-.σϑε δι-δῶ-.σϑε
Lorö-vras τι-ϑῶ-νται 61-66-yrat
«ve, -te(v), and the Participle usually decxvé-wv, -odca, -ov, $ 180, Rem. 8.
154 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN «μὲ.
[5 188.
ACTIVE.
ω .
: : i23 ZTA-to place.| OE- to AO- to give. | AEIK- to show
- 2 ; - ve, - ow.
213/53: pw give
S. 2. | org τί-ϑει di-dov deix-vd
; (from fords) | (from rided:)| (from didod:)| (from δείκνῦϑι)
3 8. ἱ-στά-τω Ti-3é-tw δι-δό-τω Oetk-vb-Tw
D. 2. | i-ord-rov τί-ϑε-τον di-do-Tov δείκ-νῦ-τον
; 8. | l-orü-Twv τι-ϑέ-των δι-δό-των detx-vb-Twv
i | P. 2. | l-orü-re Ti-de-Te di-do-Te deik-vü-Te
x 3. | l-oré-rwoav | τι-ϑέςτωσαν |dı-do-Tweav | deix-vb-rwoay
et ἱ-στώντων | et τι-ϑέντων | et δι-δόντων | et deık-vivrwv
Infin. | l-orü-vaı τι-ϑέ-ναι δι-δή-ναι decx-vb-var
Part. Lorde, doa, ἄν τι-ϑείς, εἴσα,έν δι-δούς οὔσα,όν] δεικονῦς, ὕσα, ὅν
G. avroc G. évroc 6. όντος 6. ύντος
8. 1. |L-orn-v &-Ti-dovv &-di-dovy é-deix-viv
2. | -orn-¢ ἐ-τί-ϑεις ἐ-δί-δους ἐ-δείκενῦς
8. | l-orn ἐ-τί-ϑει &-di-dov ἐ-δείκενῦ
ΕἸΣῚ
ἕ 2. | l-orü-rov é-ri-3e-rov | &-di-do-Tov &-deik-vü-Tov
3 3. | l-arü-ryv ἐ-τι-ϑέ-την ἐ-δι-δό-την ἐ-δεικονύοτην
SI P. 1. | l-ord-pev &-Ti-de-uev | -di-do-uev | b-deix-vi-pev
z 2. | i-ord-re ἐ-τί-ϑε-τε ἐ-δί-ὅο-τε &-deik-vü-Te
S 3. | l-ord-cay é-ri-3e-cav | &-di-do-cav ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-σαν
: 8. 1. [ἑεσταί-ην τι-ϑεί-ην δι-δοί-ην δεικ-νὕ-οιμι
2. | ἱ-σταί-ης Ti-Veieng δι-δοί-ης derx-vb-orc,
8. | l-orai-n Tt-Gei-n δι-δοί-η etc.
3 | D.1.
2. | ἱ-σταῖ-τονὶ τι-ϑεῖ.τονὶ δι-δοϊοτονὶ
8. | l-orai-rnv ri-Bei-rnv δι-δοί-την
P. 1. | l-orai-uev τι-ϑεῖ-μεν δί-δοῖ-μεν
2. | l-orai-te τι-ϑεῖ-τε δι-δοῖ-τε
8, | l-orai-ev τι-ϑεῖ-εν dı-doi-ev
S. 1. | &-orn-v, I &-In-v) ( A.I.|(&-do-v) ( AL
2. | &-orn-¢ [stood, |(2-9n-¢) 2 used (é-dw-¢) 2 used
3. | ἔστη (2-97) Kforiti(&-do) C-forit
ΕἸΣῚ
: 2,|&-orn-rov | &Se-rov &-do-Tov
8.[ἐ-στῆ-την ἐ-ϑέ-την ἐ-δό-την
SIP.1|&-orn-uev | ἔςϑειμεν ἔ-ὄρ-μεν
x 2. | &-orn-re E-de-re &-do-TE
a 8.|2-orn-oav | &-Se-cay é-do-cay
2 8.1.| orüf da? δὼϊ
x 2.) στῇς dis δῷ-ς
gi 8.} στῇ ϑῇ δῷ
2.1.
FH 2.| στῆ-τον ϑῆ-τον δῶ-τον
S| 8.) στῆ-τον ϑῆ-τον δῶ-τον
MQ) P.l.| orö-uev ϑῶ-μεν δῶ-μεν
2.| στῆτε ϑῆ-τε δῶ-τε
8. στῶ.σι(ν) ϑῶ-σι(ν) δῶ-σι(ν)
1 See $ 130, Rem. 1.
The compounds, 6. g. droorö, ἐκϑῶ, διαδῶ, have the same accentuation
as the simples, 6. g. ἀποστῶσι, ἐκϑῆτον, διαδῶμεν,
155
MIDDLE.
ἴ-στἄ-σο and
l-orw
Lorü-00w
l-ora-odov
ἱ-στά-σϑων
l-ora-ode
l-ora-odwoav and
l-oru-09wv
ζεστα-σϑαι
l-orä-uevoc, ἡ, ον
ἱ-στά-μην
l-orü-00 and ἴ-στω
l-orü-To
l-orü-uedov
l-ora-000v
ἑιστά-σϑην
Lorü-ueda
l-ora-ode
l-ora-vro
l-oral-unv?
ἱ-σταῖ-ο
ἑ-σταῖ-το
ἱ-σταί-μεϑον
ἱ-σταῖ-σϑον
ἑ-σταί-σϑην
l-orai-ueda
ἱ-σταῖ-σϑε
ἱ-σταῖ-ντο
(ἐ-στώςμην does
not occur, but
ἐ-πτά-μην
ἐ-πριώ-μηνῚὴ
(στῶ-μαι does not
occur, but πρίω-
pat, -9, τῆται,
etc.)
8 On the accentuation in ἐπίσταιο, etc., see ὁ 134, 1.
τί-ϑε-σὸ and
ri-dov
τι-ϑέςσθω
τί-ϑε-σϑον
τι-ϑέ-σϑων
Ti-Be-oe
rt-9é-o8woay and
τι-ϑέ-σϑων
τί-ϑε-σϑαι
τι-ϑέ-μενος, ἢ, ον
δί-δο-σϑαι
δι-δό-μενος, ἡ, ον δεικο-νύ-μενος, ἢν
δί-δο-σο and δείκ-νῦ-σο
, δίεδου
δι-δό-σϑω δεικ-νύ-σϑω
δί-δο-σϑον δείκ-νυ-σϑον
δι-δό-σϑων δεικ-νύ-σϑων
δί-δο-σϑε δείκινυ-σϑε
δι-δό-σϑωσαν and | δεικ-νύ-σϑωσαν
δι-δό-σϑων and δεικ-νύ-σϑων
δείκ-νυ-σϑαι
ee ᾿............ .......ὄ............ ee
ἐ-τι- ϑέμην [Sov
ἐ-τί-ϑε-σὸ and ἐ-τί-
ἐ-τί-ϑε-τὸ
ἐ-τι-ϑέ-μεϑον
ἐ-τί-ϑε-σϑον
ἐ-τι-ϑέ-σϑην
é-ri-Fé-peda
é-ri-Fe-oSe
ἐ-τί-ϑειντο
rı-dolzunv*
τι-ϑοῖ-ο
τι-ϑοῖ-το
τι-ϑοί-μεϑον
τι-ϑοῖ-σϑον
τι-ϑοί-σϑην
τι-ϑοί-μεϑα
τι-ϑοῖ-σϑε
τι-ϑοῖ-ντο
ἐ- ϑέ-μην
E-dov(from ἔϑεσο)
ἔ-ϑε-τὸ
ἐ- ϑέ-μεϑον
ἔ-ϑε-σϑον
ἐ-ϑέισϑην
ἐ-ϑέμεϑα
ξ-ϑε-σϑὲ
ἔ-ϑε-ντο
ϑῶ-μαιδ
9 a
ϑῶ-νται
δι-δοί-μηνϑ
ἐ-δι- δό-μην wa &-detx-vb-unv
&-di-do-00 and é-di-| &-deix-vü-00
&-di-do-ro &-Ödeik-vü-To
ἐ-δι-δό-μεϑον ἐ-δεικ-νὅ-μεϑον
ἐ-δί-δο-σϑον ἐ-δείκενυ-σϑον
ἐ-δι-δό-σϑην ἐ-δεικ-νύ-σϑην
ἐ-δι-δό-μεϑα ἐ-δεικενὅ-μεϑα
ἐ-δί-δο-σϑε ἐ-δείκενυ-σϑε
ἐ-δί-δο-ντο ἐ-δείκοενυ-ντο
δεικ-νῦ-οἴμην
δεικ-νὕ-οιο,
ete.
δι-δοῖ-ο
δι-δοῖ-το
δι-δοί-μεϑον
δι δοῖ-σϑον
δι-δοί-σϑην
δι-δοί-μεϑα
δι-δοῖ-σϑε
δι-δοῖ-ντο
ἐ- δό-μην
ἔ-δου (from &dooo)
&-do-To
ἐ-δό-μεϑον
δῶ-νται
4 See § 134, 2.
δ Also in composition, by ϑῶμαι, τῇ, τῆται, etc. ἀποϑῶμαι, “J, Aral, etc. ἐκδῶ
μαι, -ᾧ, -ὦὥται, ete., ἀποδῶμαι, -ᾧ, -ὥται, etc.
156 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -W.—BEMARES,. {$ 184
ACTIVE.
ἕ e
ἕ ΣΤΑ- to place.| OE-to put. | AO-to give. | ABIK- to show,
fe
l.| σταί-ην ϑεί-ην ᾿ δοίην
2.| σταί-ης ϑεί-ης δοί-ης
3.| σταί.η ϑεί-ἡ doi-n
.1,
2.|. σταί-ητονὶ ϑεί-ητονὶ δοί-ητον)
3.| σται-ἤτην ϑει-ἧτην δοι-ἥτην
l. σταί-ημεν ϑεί-ημεν doi-nuev
; 2.| orai-nre Vei-nre doi-nre
N 3.| orai-ev Vei-ev doi-ev
ἢ 2.| στῆ -ϑιδ ϑές (ϑέϑι) | δός (dödı)?
< 3.| or7-w ϑέ-τω δό-τω
.2.| στῆ -Tov ϑέ-τον δό-τον ᾿
8.}] στή-των ϑέ-των δό-των
2.| στῆττε ϑέ-τε δό-τε
8.] στή-τωσαν)Ὶ ϑέ-τωσαν δό-τωσαν
διά στάντων! and ϑέντων] and δόντων
ory-val ϑεῖ-ναι δοῦ-ναι
ords, doa, ἄν) ϑείς͵ εἶσα, ἐν] doüs,oüca,öv|
Gen.orävrog| Gen. Hevroc Gen. dövroc
Future. στή-σω ϑή-σω 60-00 δείξω
Aorist I. &-ornoa, I ἔ-ϑη-κα ἔ-δω-κα ἔ-δειξα
Instead of these forms, the second
’ | Aor. is used in the Dual and Pi.
Ind. and in the other Modes and
Participials, $ 131, 2.
_ | Perfect. E-orn-na,'sto | τέ-ϑει-κα | δέ- δω -κα de-deıya
Pluperfect. | ἑ-στή-κειν and| é-re- ϑ ei-new| ἐ-δε- ὃ ὦ -neıw | ἐ-δε-δείχειν
el-oTn-Keıv
Fit. Perf. |t-orn£woldAtt.| wanting. wanting: wanting.
. PAS
Aorist I. |t-orüdmv |b-redm? φὝἐ-δό-ϑην | ἐ-δείχ-ϑην |
I See § 180, Rem. 1. * In composition, παράστηϑι, wapdora ; ἀπόστηϑι,
ἀπόστα, $180, Rem. 2. * In composition, wepidec, ἔνϑες ; ἀπόδος, Exdog ;
mepidere, Exdore, $ 84, Rem. 2. See $ 134, 3. ὃ érédnv and τεϑήσομαι
§ 134. Remarks on the Paradigms.
1. The verbs δύναμαι, to be able, ἐπίσταμαι, to know, κρέμαμαι, to
hang, and 7 piag dat, to buy, have a different accentuation from lorauaı, in the
Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., namely, Subj. δύνωμαι, ἐπίστωμαι, -y, -nraı, -nodov,
-node, -wvraı ; Opt. δυναίμην, ἐπισταίμην, -ato, -αἰτο, -αἰσϑον, -atode, -aLvTo;
so also ὀναίμην, -ato, -acto (ἢ 135).
2. The forms of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. Mid. with -σε, viz. τιϑοίμην,
Voiuny, are more common than those with -eı, viz. τεϑείμην, -εἴο, -eiTo, etc,
ϑείμην, -eio, -eiro, etc. In compounds the accent remains as in simples, thus,
§ 134. ] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN ~.—REMARKS. 187
MIDDLE.
---- eee ΦῬΦῬΦθΘΟΦὋΦὋῬ ᾽'ἙἩἩΘΘ Θ Θ Φ ΦΘ
ΣΤΑ- fo place. GE- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.
‚(orai-unvdoes not} ϑοί-μηνδ doi-unv®
oceur, but mpiai-| Boi-o doi-o
unv, -ato, -atro,| ϑοῖ-το doi-To |
etc.) ϑοί-μεϑον δοί-μεϑον
ϑοῖ-σϑον δοῖ-σϑον
ϑοί-σϑην δοί.σϑην
ϑοί-μεϑα δοί-μεϑα
Voi-ode δοῖ-σϑε
Voi-vro doi-vro
(ord-co or στῶ] od (ϑέσο) dod (doco)?
does not occur, 9έ-σϑω δό-σϑω
but πρία-σο or) ϑέ-σϑον δό-σϑον
πρίω) ϑέςσθων δό-σϑων
ϑέ-σϑε δό.σϑε
H-odwoav and | δό-σϑωσαν and
ϑέςσϑων δό-σϑων
(ora-odaı)mpiao.| ϑέ-σϑαι δό-σϑαι |
(orä-uevog) mpia-| ϑέςμενος, -n, -ov | dö-wevoc, -7, -ov
‘| μενος
στῆ-σομαι ϑή-σομαι δώ-σομαι δείξομαι
ἐ-στη-σάμην (ἐ-ϑη-κί-μην {ἐξδω-κά-μην) “ ἐδειξάμην
Instead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid.
is used by the Attic writers, $ 131, 2.
E-oräü-uaı ᾿ Té- Ve beat δέ-δο-μαι δέ-δειγοεμαι
ἑ-στά-μην ἐ-τε- ϑ εἴ -μην ἐ-δε-δό-μην &-de-deiy-unv
ἑ-στήξομαι wanting. wanting. wanting.
SIVE.
| Put. I. | στα-ϑήσομαι | τε-ϑήσομαιδ | δο-ϑήσομαι | δειχ-ϑήσομαι
instead of ἐϑέϑην and ϑεϑήσομαι ($ 8,10). 5 See $ 134,2. 7 In composi-
tion, karadov, ἀπόϑου.. mepidov, ἀπόδου ; karadeode, nepidoode ; ἔνϑεσθε,
πρόδοσϑε ; but ἐνθοῦ, εἰςϑοῦ: προδοῦ, ἐνδοῦ ($ 84, Rem. 2).
ἐνθοίμην (ἐνθείμην), ἐνθοῖο ( Evdeio), etc. The same is true of compounds of
δοίμην, 6. g. diadoiumv, διαδοῖο, ete. |
3. The Perf. and Plap. ἔστηκα, ἐστήκειν (not εἱστήκειν), form the Dual and
Pl. immediately from the stem, viz. Perf. é-ord-tov, E-oTü-uev, ξειστᾷ-τε, é-oTde
σι(ν) ; Plup. &-ord-rov, -ἄτην, ξιστᾶ-μεν, E-ord-re, &-orü-0av ; instead of ἐστη-
κέναι, ἑστάναι is regularly used. The Part. is ἑστώς, -Goa, -ώς, Gen. -ὥτος,
-wong, also ἑστηκώς, -via, -ός, Gen. -6T0¢, -viac. ΄ |
4. The forms of the Impf. ἐτέϑουν, -et¢, -Ei, ἐδίδουν, «ους, -ov, are constructed
according to the conjugation in -éw and -6w. The other forms, ἐτίϑην, -y¢, -n,
ἐδίδων, -ως, -w, are not used (§ 130, Rem. 3).
14
158
*Anp, -ἔρος, ὃ, ἡ, the air.
ἀνίστημι, to set up, raise,
awaken; mid., to raise
oneself, stand up, rise
ὠντι-τάττω, to set oppo-
site; mid., to set oneself
against, oppose.
Ψπο-σπάω, to draw away.
ἀπο-στρέφω, to turn away.
αὖος, “ἢ, “ον, Aitic αὖος,
-ov, dry, thirsty.
ἀφίστημι, to put away,
turn off, cause to re-
volt ; 2 aor., to fall away,
VERBS IN -pit.
LXIU. Vocabulary.
revolt; mid. to go or
stand apart.
διίστημι, to place apart,
separate, sever.
eviornut, to put into;
perf, to be present.
E£-opdöw,to make straight,
erect, set up, restore.
ἡνίοχος, -ου, ὁ, ἃ rein-
holder, guide.
ϑυσία, -ag, 7, a sacrifice.
ἵστημι, to place, make to
stand.
καϑίστημι, to lay down.
H πολυφιλία διίστησι Kal ἀποσπᾷ καὶ ἀποστρέφει.
εὔνουν νομίζει τὸν ϑεὸν καϑιστάναι, φρένας κούφας ἔχει.
[ξ184
establish, appoint, to
render, to make.
Auuun, 6, ἦν 8 marsh, a
pond, a lake.
λοιμος, -oö, ὁ, a plague, a
pestilence.
vegedn, «ἧς, 7, & Cloud, ἃ
net for birds.
rapiornut, to place be-
side, to help.
πῆ, where? whither ?
πολεμέω, w. dat., to carry
on war.
πολυφιλία, -ας, ἡ, ἃ mul-
titude of friends.
Ei τις ϑυσίαν προςφέρων
Οὐδὲ τὸν ἀέρα οἱ ἄν-
Opwro: τοῖς ὄρνισιν εἴων ἐλεύϑερον, παγίδας καὶ νεφέλας ἱστάντες. Φνλάττον,
μὴ τὸ κέρδος σε τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἀφιστῇ. Ἔν τῷ Πελοποννησιακῷ πολέμῳ εἷς
ἁνήρ, ὁ Περικλῆς, ἐξώρϑου τὴν πόλιν καὶ ἀνίστη καὶ ἀντετάττετο καὶ τῷ λοιμῷ
καὶ τῷ πολέμῳ: MY ἀφίστη τοὺς νέους τῆς ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρετὴν ὁδοῦν Θεμιστοκλῆς
Ἀέγεται εἰπεῖν, ὡς τὸ Μιλτιάδου τρόπαιον αὑτὸν ἐκ τῶν ὕπνων ἀνισταίη. Tav-
φαλος ἐν τῇ λίμνῃ αὖος εἱστῇκει. Td μὲν τοῦ χρόνου γεγονός, τὸ δὲ ἐνεστώς
ἐστι, τὸ δὲ μέλλον. Οἱ Κορίνϑιοι πολλοὺς συμμάχους ἀπέστησαν ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αϑη-
ψαίων. Οἱ Νάξιοι ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων ἀπέστησαν. Παράστὰ τοῖς ἀτυχέσεν.
I orö;, πῆ BS*; Οἱ’ Αϑηναῖοι τοῖς Ναξίοις ἀποστᾶσιν an’ αὐτῶν ἐπολέμη-
wav. Παρασταίητε τοῖς ἀτυχέσιν. Λόγος διεσπάρϑη, τοὺς συμμάχους ἀπὸ τῆς
πόλεως ἀποστῆναι. Ἥνίοχον γνώμην στήσεις ἀρίστην.
Sportsmen place snares and nets for the birds. The bad seek to sever the
friendship of the good. The trophies of Miltiades woke Themistocles from his
sleep. Let us not turn away youths from the way to virtue. Do not sever (pl.)
the friendship of the good. The citizens were afraid, that the enemies would
make their allies revolt from them. The bad rejoice, if they sever (part.) the
friendship of the good. Tantalus stands thirsty in the lake. The wise man
takes care not only for (gen.) the present, but also for the future. The soldiers
vaised (aor.) a trophy over (κατά, w. gen.) the enemies. The Naxians sought to
revolt from the Athenians. Assist (stand by) the unfortunate. Where shall we
stand? where shall we go? Thou shonldst assist the unfortanate. The sol-
diers will raise a trophy over the enemies.
LXIV. Vocabulary.
᾿Αχρόπολις, -εως, hi, a cit- ἀλλότριος, -a, -ov, anoth- ἀνα-τέϑημι, to pat up,
adel. er’s, foreign. offer.
44157. *§ 123. > § 153, 1. Ὁ, (a), (3). 4§119, 1. and § 142,
8124} VERRS IN -μι. 159
ἀργαλέος, -@, -ov, heavy, i.e. » staff of the Bac- προς-τίϑημι, to add.
troublesome, burden- chantes, wound round προ-τίϑημι, to set before,
some. with ivy and vineleaves. lay ont (for view), ach
διάδημα, -aroc, τό, a head- κιττός, -oö, 6, ivy. forth. [tre.
band, a diadem. μετα-τίϑημι, to change, ox#7Tpov, -ov, τό, & scepr
διαφορά, -üc, 7, a differ alter, remeve. τίϑημι, to place, arrange,
ence, ἃ quarrel, enmity. ptuéo:a1,w.cec.,to imitate. propose as a prize, give,
ἐν-τέϑημι, to pat in, instil. περι-τέϑημε, to put or set make; mid. place for
ϑύρσος, -ov, ὁ, 4. Thyrsus, round, oneself, take.
Τῷ καλῶς ποιοῦντι ϑεὸς πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ τίϑηαιν. Ὁ Πλοῦτος πολλάκις μετα-
τίϑησι τὸν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τρόπον. Πολλάκις οἱ ἄνθρωποι τοῖς ἰδίοις κακοῖς
ἀλλότρια προςτιϑέασιν. Eic τὸ βέλτεον rider τὸ μέλλον. ᾿Αντίγονος Διόνωυσων:
πάντα ἐμιμεῖτο, καὶ κιττὸν μὲν περιτιϑεὶς τῇ κεφαλῇ ἀντὶ διαδήματος Maxede-
νικοῦ, ϑύρσον δὲ ἀντὶ σκήπτρου φέρων. Oi σοφισταὶ τὴν ἀρετὴν προετίϑοσαν.
Evrıdöuev τοῖς νέοις τῆς σοφίας ἔρωτα. Ἢ τύχη πάντα ἂν μετατιϑείη. Οὗ
ῥάδιον τὴν φύσιν μετατιϑέναι. πολλάκις δοκοῦντες θήσειν κακὸν ἐσθλὸν. Ede.
κεν, καὶ δοκοῦντες ἐσθλὸν ἔϑεμεν κακόν. Τὰς διαφορὰς μεταϑῶμεν. '᾿Αργαλέοιν
γῆρας ἔϑηκε ϑεός. ᾿Αϑηναῖοι χαλκῆν ποιησάμενοι λέαιναν ἐν πύλαις τῆς dpe
πόλεως ἀνέϑεσαν. "Päov! ἐξ ἀγαϑοῦ ϑεῖναι κακόν, ἢ ἐκ κακοῦ ἐσϑλόμν. Τὸ κα»
κὸν οὐδεὶς χρηστὸν ἂν Sein. Μετάϑετε τὰς διαφοράς. Λυκοῦργον τὸν ϑέντα
Λακεδαιμονίοις νόμους, μάλιστα ϑαυμάζομεν. Ὁ πόλεμος πάντα μετατέϑεικεν.
Πρὸ τῆς ἀρετῆς ϑεοὶ ἱδρῶτα ἔϑεσαν.
To those who do well the gods give (== place) many good things. ‘We often
add others’ ifls to our own. We often see riches change (changing) the char-
acter of men. The war has changed everything. God gave (placed, aor.) to
men many good things. The war will change everything. Who would give
(place, opt. aor. τυ. Gv) laws to foolish men? It is not easy to change (aor.) na-
ture. The gods made (= rendered, placed) age burdensome. The bad we
cannot easily make good (opt. aor. το. dv). The general should instil (pres. or
gor.) courage into the soldiers. May riches never change (pres. or aor.) thy
character! We will instil (aor.) into the youths a love for virtue (gen.).
LXV. Vocabulary.
᾿Απο-δίδωμι, to give back, κέντρον, -ov, τό, a sting, äykäxog, -ov, thoroughly
repay; mid., to sell. a goad. bad.
δίδωμι, to give, grant. μάκαρ, -apos, happy, bless- πάλιν, again, on the con-
ἔμπεδος, -ov, firm, sure, . ed. trary.
lasting. μέλιττα, -ns, ἦν, a bee. προ-δίδωμι, prodo, to be
ἐπι-λανϑάνομαι, to forget. μετα-δίδωμί τινί τινος, to tray.
εὐθύς and εὐϑύ, imme- giveany one a share of χρήζω, w. gen., to be in
diately. anything. want.
Ol Beat πάντα διδόᾶσιν. Τυναικὶβδ ἄρχειν ob δίδωσιν ἡ φύσις. Χάριν λαβὼν
μέμχησο," καὶ δοὺς ἐπιλαϑοῦ. Λαβὼν ἀπόδος, καὶ λήψῃ πάλιν. ᾿Ὦ μάκαρες
ϑεοί, δότε μοι ὄλβον καὶ δόξαν ἀγαϑὴν ἔχειν. Ὃ πλοῦτος, ὃν ἂν δῶσι ϑεοῖ,
I See $ 52, 10. *§ 47, 2. 7 § 121, 12. 44. 129, 12
--ὦ τὰ ow
180 ᾿ VERBS IN -μι. [$ 184.
Sumedös ἐστιν. "Α ἡ φύσις δέδωκε. ταῦτ᾽ ἔχει μόνα ὁ ἄνϑρωπος. Ἢ φύσις Tad-
poıs ἔδωκε xépac,' κέντρα μελίτταις. Ὧνϑ σοι ϑεὸς ἔδωκε, τούτων χρῴζουσι di-
δου. ᾿Εσϑλῷ ἀνόρὶ καὶ ἐσϑλὰ δίδωσι ϑεός. Πτωχῷ εὐϑὺς δίδου. Χρήματα
δαίμων καὶ παγκάκῳ ἀνδρὶ δίδωσιν, ἀρετῆς δ' ὀλίγοις ἀνδράσι poip’ ἕπεται.
Θεός μοι δοίη φίλους πιστούς. Τοῖς πλουσίοις πρέπει τοῖς πτωχοῖς δοῦναι. Oi
στρατιῶται τὴν πόλιν τοῖς πολεμίοις προὐδίδοσαν. Ὁ ἀγαϑὸς χαίρει τοῖς wé-
ynoı χρημάτων" μεταδιδούς. Δεῖ τοὺς ἀγαϑοὺς ἄνδρας γενναίως φέρειν, ὃ τι ἂν
ὁ ϑεὸς διδῷ. Ὃς ἂν μέλλῃ τὴν πατρίδα προδιδόναι, μεγίστης" ζημίας ἀξιάρδ ἐσ-
τιν. Ol ϑεοῖ μοι ἀντὶ κακῶν ἀγαϑὰ διδοῖεν. Φίλος φίλον ob προδώσει.
᾿ God gives everything. If you (pl.) have received (aor. part.) a favor, remem-
ber it; and if you have granted a favor (aor. part.), forget (it). If you have re-
ceived (anything), give again (aor.).. Give me, Ὁ God, riches and reputation
to possess. The wealth which God has given (aor.) is lasting. The gods have
given men many good things. Give ye to the poor immediately. May the
gods give (aor.) me faithful friends! Thou must bear nobly, what (ὃς a», τ΄.
subj.) the gods assign (give) thee. Good citizens will never betray their coun-
try. God gave men many treasares. The soldiers intended to betray (aor.)
the town. It is well to give to the poor. Who would betray a friend (opt. w.
ἄν) Honor the gods, who give (part.) all good (pl.) to men.
LXVI. Vocabulary.
᾿Αϑέατος, -ov, not to be ἐμμένω, το. dat., to remain duvdu, to swear.
seen. with, abide by. 5pxoc, -ov, ὁ, an oath.
ἀπο-δείκνῦμι, το. 2 acc., to ἐντός, w. gen., within. πάντως, in every way,
show,represent,explain, é-opx6w,tocausetoswear, throughout, wholly.
declare any one asany- administer an oath to. παραγγέλλω, to order.
thing; mid., show of my- ἐπίορκον, -ov, τό, a false mAaorıxn (i. 6. τεχνή), mo-
self, express, declare, oath, perjury. |by. delling art, sculpture.
display, render. ἐπόμνῦμι, w. acc., to swear ῥώννῦμι, to strengthen.
deixvüuı, to show. μέτριος, -Q, -ov, Attic μέ- σπανίως, rarely, seldom.
δικαίως, justly, fairly. τριος, -ov, moderate. ψήφισμα, -ατος, τό, a de-
εἰκῆ, inconsiderately, un- μήποτε, never. [tor. cree, a resolution.
advisedly. μιμητῆς, -od, 6, an imita-
ὍὌρκον φεῦγε, κἂν δικαίως ὀμνύῃς. Μή τι Seode ἐπίορκον ἐπόμνθ. ὋὉ olvor
μέτριος ληφϑεὶςδ ῥώννυσιν. Οἱ διδάσκαλοι τοὺς μαϑητὰς μιμητὰς ἑαυτῶν ἀπο-
δεικνύᾶσιν. Πυϑαγόρας παρήγγειλε τοῖς μανϑάνουσι, σπανίως μὲν ὀμνύναι,
χρησαμένους δὲ τοῖς ὅρκοις πάντως ἐμμένειν. Ἢ πλαστικὴ δείκνυσι τὰ εἴδη τῶν
ϑεῶν, τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ ἐνιότε καὶ τῶν ϑηρῶν. Μὴ ἀϑέατα δείξῃς ἡλίῳ. "Avdpöc
νοῦν οἶνος ἔδειξεν. Φρύγες ὅρκοις οὐ χρῶνται obr’ ὀμνύντες, obr’ ἄλλους ἐξορ-
κοῦντες. ᾿Ὀλίγοις deixvd τὰ ἐντὸς φρενῶν. Οἱ κριταὶ τὰ ψηφίσματα ἀπεδείκνυ-
σαν. Μήποτε εἰκῇ ὀμνύοιτε. Ὁ βασιλεὺς τὸν αὑτοῦ vlöv στρατηγὸν ἀποδέδειχεν.
Avoid an oath, even if you swear justly. Do not swear a false oath. Those
who swear a false oath, are deserving of the greatest punishment. The Phry-
1439, Rem. 3 by attraction instead of &. 3 § 158, 3. (b).
4§ 52, 8. δὲ 158, 7. (y). © § 121, 12.
6184.
VERBS IN -μί.
161
gians did not swear. The judges declare their resolutions. May you never
swear unadvisedly !
It is not becoming to swear unadvisedly.
declared Alcibiades (᾿Αλκεβιώδης, -ov) general.
LXVII. Vocabulary.
The Athenians
’AfröAoyog,-ov;worthmen- μέϑη, -ns, 9, drunkenness. ὀλιγαρχία, -ας, ἡ, the rule
tioning, noticeable, me-
morable.
μωρός, -&, -öv, foolish; ὁ
μωρός, the fool.
of a few, oligarchy.
πρῶτος, τῇ, τον, first.
δεύτερος, -α, -ον, second. ναυτικός, -7, -6v, belong- ov»-iornut, to put togeth-
δύναμαι, w. pass.aor,tobe ing to ships, nautical;
ναυτικὴ δύναμις, naval bring together.
able, can, have power.
er; mid., assemble, unite,
ἐπίσταμαι, w. pass. aor, to power.
know, understand.
Ὁ πλοῦτος πολλὰ δύναται. Τίς ἂν μωρὸς δύναιτο bv οἴνῳ σιωπᾷν; ᾿Ανὴρ
δίκαιός ἐστιν, ὅςτις ἀδικεῖν δυνάμενος μὴ βούλεται. Πρᾶττε μηδὲν ov! μὴ ἐπίσ-
rasa. "Αριστόν ἐστι πάντ᾽ ἐπίστασϑαι καλά. Ζῶμενξ οὐχ ὡς ἐϑέλομεν, ἀλλ"
ὡς δυνάμεϑα. Πρὸ μέϑης ἀνίστασο. Τί συμφέρει ἐνίοις πλουτεῖν, ὅταν μὴ
ἐπίστωνται τῷ πλούτῳ χρῆσϑαιδ,; Karadvdévrog τοῦ Πελοποννησιακοῦ πολέ-
μου ὀλιγαρχίαν ἐν ταῖς πλείσταις πόλεσι καϑίσταντο. Οἱ πολέμιοι οὐκ ἀποστή-
σονται, πρὶν ἂν EAwort τὴν πόλιν. Μίνως, ὁ δεύτερος, πρῶτος Ἕ λλήνων ναν-
τικὴν δύναμιν ἀξιόλογον συνεστήσατο. Ὕπὸ Λυσάνδρου, τοῦ Σπαρτιάτου, ἐν
᾿Αϑήναις τριάκοντα τύραννοι κατεστάϑησαν. ¢
Men have much power through wealth. Rise up (pl.) before intoxication.
The enemies could not take (2 aor.) the town. Of what use is it to thee to be
rich, if thou understandest not how to use riches? What fools could (ἄν, το. opt.)
be silent over wine? No mortal is able to know everything. There are few
who understand (part.) how to use riches well. The magistrates who are ap-
pointed (aor. part. pass.) to rule over the town, must (dei, w. acc. of pers.) care
for ita prosperity.
LXVIIL. Vocabulary.
"AdAroc, -G, -ov, trouble-
some, pitiable,miserable.
ἀπο-τίϑημι, to put away;
mid., take away.
δια-τελέω, to complete;
w. part., it expresses the
continuance of the ac-
tion denoted by the par-
ticiple, as διατελῶ ypa-
gov, “I continue to
write,” or “ writing.”
ϑια-τίϑημι, to put in or-
der, manage; w. adv.,
put into a disposition,
dispose.
ἐπι-τίϑημι, to add, put up-
on; mid., put on one-
self; w. dat., apply to,
attack, set upon.
ἐγκράτεια, -ac, ἡ, self-con-
trol, continence.
ἐφόδιον, -ov, τό, viaticum,
travelling money.
ἧκω, ἧξω, I am come.
ϑησαυρός, -οὔ, ὁ, a trea-
sure.
κατα-τίϑημι, to lay down,
lay by; mid., lay down
for oneself.
κράνος, -eo¢ = -ovg, τό, &
helmet.
λόφος, -ov, 6, a crest.
στέφανος, -ov, ὁ, ἃ Crown.
φοινΐκεος, -éd, -e0v, COR-
tracted -ot¢, -ἥ, «οὖν,
purple.
1 by attraction instead of μηδὲν τούτων, &.
8 $161, 3.
145
2 see § 97, 8.
4 see § 126, 1.
162 VERBS IN -μι. [5 184
Ol Κελτίβηρες περὶ τὰς κεφαλὰς κράνη χαλκᾶ περιτίϑενται φοινικοῖς ἡσκὴν-
μένα' λόφοις. Οὐδένα ϑησαυρὸν παισὶ καταϑήσῃ ἀμείνωδ αἰδοῦς. Τίς ἂν ἑκὼν
φίλον ἄφρονα ϑοῖτο; Ξενοφῶντι ϑύοντι ἧκέ τις ἐκ Μαντινείας ἄγγελος λέγων,
τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν Τρύλλον τεϑνάναιϑ κἀκεῖνος ἀπέϑετο μὲν τὸν στέφανον,
διετέλει δὲ Hay: ἐπεὶ δὲ ὁ ἄγγελος προςέϑηκε kalt ἐκεῖνο, ὅτι νικῶν τέϑνηκε,
πάλιν ὁ Ἀενοφῶν ἐπέϑετο τὸν στέφανον. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἔφυγεν εἰς Σπάρτην καὶ
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους παρώξυνεν ἐπιϑέσϑαι τοῖς ᾿Αϑηναίοις. TH μὲν τὸ σῶμα
Διατεϑειμένῳ κακῶς χρεία ἐστὶν ἰατροῦ, τῷ δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν φίλου. "Epödıov εἰς
τὸ γῆρας κατατίϑου. Οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ τοῦ Πελοποννησιακοῦ πολέ-
μου ἔτει ὑπὸ τοῦ λοιμοῦ ἀϑλιώτατα διετέϑησαν. Κακὸν οὐδὲν φύεται ἐν ἀνδρὶ
ϑεμέλια ϑεμένῳ Tod βίου σωφροσύνην καὶ ἐγκράτειαν. Τοὺς πιστοὺς τίϑεσθαι
dei ἕκαστον ἑαυτῷ. Οἱ πολῖται φοβοῦνται, μὴ οἱ πολέμιοι τῇ πόλει ἐπιτιϑῶνται.
‘The citizens attack the enemies. We will take the good as our friends.
The citizens feared that the enemies might attack the town. Lay by travelling
money for old age. Put on (aor.) the crown. Take care that the enemies do
οὶ attack (subj. aor.) you. Croesus deposited many treasures of gold in his
house. The character of men is often changed by riches. Nature cannot easily
be changed. A golden crown was placed (aor.) by the Athenians on the gate
of the Acropolis. Everything has been changed by the war.
LXIX. Vocabulary.
"Αμοιβή, -ἧς, ἦν exchange, the same time; mid, συν-νέω, to spin, weave
recompense, return. give oneself up with together with.
στρατός, -οὔ, ὁ, an army. others to a thing.
συν-εἐπι- δίδωμι, to give at
Χάρις χάριτι ἀποδίδοται. To ev ποιοῦντι πολλάκις κακὴ ἀποδίδοται ἀμοιβή.
Tiarpider πολλάκις διὰ κέρδος προὐδόϑησαν. TloAAd δῶρα δέδοται τοῖς ἀνϑρώ-
ποις wape τῶν ϑεῶν. ‘Oe μέγα τὸ μικρόν ἐστιν ἐν καιρῷ δοϑέν. “Ore elAc® τὴν
Θηβαίων πόλιν ᾿Αλέξανδρος, ἀπέδοτο τοὺς ἐλευϑέρους πάντας. ‘Exdy σεαυτὸν
τῇ Κλωϑοῖῖ συνεπιδίδον, παρέχων συννῆσαι, οἷἱςτισίδ ποτε πράγμασι βούλεταε.
Ὁμοίως αἰσχρόν, ἀκούσαντα χρήσιμον λόγον μὴ μανϑάνειν, καὶ διδόμενόν τι
ἀγαϑὸν παρὰ τῶν φίλων μὴ λαμβάνειν. Οἱ πολῖται φοβοῦνται, μὴ ἡ πόλις προ-
διδῶται. Μήποτε ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων mpodidoio. ‘O στρατὸς ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ στρα-
τηγοῦ προὐδίδοτο. ᾿Απόδου τὸ κύπελλον.
Everything is given by God. The wealth which is given (aor.) by God is
lasting. The town was betrayed by the soldiers to the enemies. We must
bear nobly, what is sent (given) by God. The friend will not be betrayed by
the friend. Alexander is said, when he had taken (aor.) Thebes, to have sold
(aor.) all the free citizens. The army is said to have been betrayed (aor.) by
the general. The citizens feared, that the town might be betrayed. Let us
sell (aor.) the gobleta.
I from ἀσκέω, to adorn. 5 see ὁ 52, 1.
® sce $ 122, 9. τεϑνάναι instead of τεϑνηκέναι, Comp. § 134, 8.
4 also. δ § 159, (7). ¢§ 126, 1.
7 KAwdd, one of the Parcae, or goddesses of Fate.
® by attraction instead of πράγμασιν, ἃ βούλεται.
4185. SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μέ. 188
LXX. Vocabulary.
λληϑῶς, truly, in reality. émt-deixvopt,toshowbrag- πολυτελῆς, -é, costly,
Gudi-evvdut, to put on, gingly, make a boastful splendid.
dress in. display of; mid., show ῥήτωρ, -opor, ὁ, an orator.
ἀπόλλομι, to ruin; mid, of oneself boastfully. σβέννυμε, to quench, ex-
he ruined or lost, per- κεράννῦμε, to mix. tinguish.
ish. παῤῥησία, -ac, 1, free- συν-απόλλυμι, to ruin at
ἐν-δείκνυμι, toshow; mid, | dominspeaking,frank- the same time; mid., go
show of oneself. ness. to ruin at the same time.
Φίλοι φίλοις συναπόλλυνται δυςτυχοῦσιν. Οὐδέποτε κλέος ἐσθλὸν ἀπόλλυται.
᾿Ανδρὸς δικαίου καρπὸς οὐκ ἀπόλλυται. Al γυναῖκες χαίρουσιν ἀμφιεννύμεναι
καλὰς ἐσθῆτας. Οἱ ἀληϑῶς σοφοὶ ob σπεύδουσιν ἐπιδείκνυσϑαι τὴν αὑτῶν σο-
φίαν. Ὁ οἷνος, ἐὰν ὕδατι' κεραννύηται, τὸ σῶμα ῥώννυσιν.υ Ἢ ὀργὴ εὐϑὰς
‚sBevvborro. ᾿Αεὶ ἐν τῷ βίῳ ἀρετὴν καὶ σωφροσύνην ἐνδείκνυσο. Οἱ Πέρσαι
πολυτελεῖς στολὰς ἀμφιέννυντου Ὁ ῥήτωρ τὴν γνώμην μετὰ παῤῥησίας ἀπεδϑί-
ξατο. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων στρατηγὸς ἀπεδείχϑη.
The Persians put on splendid clothes. Always show in your life virtue and
soundmindedness. We admire the friends who accompany their unhappy friends
to ruin (going to ruin together with, etc.). Let us express our opinion with
frankness. The sophists made a boastful display of their wisdom. Women
put on splendid clothes. The orator should express (aor.) his opinion with
frankness.
SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -ut.
L Verbs in -μὲ which annex the Personal- "endings to the
Stem-vowel.
§ 185. Verbs in -a (i-orn-m, STA-):
1. xt-yoy-m, to lend (XPA-), Inf. xıyoasaı, Fut. χρησω, ete. ;
Mid. to borrow, Fut. χρήσομαι.---- ΑοΥ. ἐχρησάμην in this sense is not
used by the Attic writers. To the same stem belong:
2. χρή, oportet (stem XP.A- and XPE-), Subj. χρῇ, Inf. χρῆναι,
Part. (τὸ) χρεών ; Impf. ἐχρῆν or χρῆν, Opt. χρείη (from XPE-).
8. ἀπόχρη, tt suffices, sufficit ; there are also formed regularly from
, XPARQ, ἀποχρῶσιν, Inf. ἀποχρῇν; Impf. ἀπέχρη; Aor. ἀπέχρη-
σε(»), etc. Mid. ἀποχρώμαι, to have enough, to abuse, waste, ano-
χρῆσϑαι, inflected like χράομαι.
4. ὀνίνημι, to benefit (ONA-), Inf. ovıwaraı ; Impf. Act. wanting ;
Fut. 09700; Aor. ὥνησα. Mid. orivauaı, to have advantage, Fut.
ὀνήσομαι; second Aor. ὠνήμην, -700, -7ro, εἰς.) Imp. 09700, Part.
ὀνήμενος, Opt. ὀναίμην, -ato, -αἰτο (§ 134, 1), Inf. ὄνασϑαι; Aor.
1 § 47, 10. and § 161, 2. (a), (a).
164 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μὲ. [$ 135.
Pass. ὠνήθην instead of ὠνήμην. The remaining forms are sup-
plied by ὠφελεῖν.
5. πι-μ-πλη-μι, ο fill (ILAA-), Inf. πιμπλαναι; Impf. ἐπιμπλην;
Fut. πλησω; Aor. ἔπλησα; Mid. πίμπλαμαι, πίμπλασϑαι; Impf.
ἐπιμπλάμην; Perf. Mid. or Pass. πέπλησμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐπλήσθην.
— Mid.
The μ in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted
in composition, when a # precedes the reduplication; 6. g. ἐμπίπλαμαι, but éve-
πιμπλάμην.
6. πίμπρημι, to burn, Trans., in all respects like πίμπλημι.
7. TAH-MLI, to bear, endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting, (instead of
them ὑπομένω, ἀνέχομαι) ; Aor. ἔτλην, (τλῶ,) τλαίην, τλῆϑι, τλῆναι,
shag; Fut. τλήσομαι; Perf. τέτληκα (on the forms τέτλαμεν, etc,
comp. $ 134, 3).
8. gy-pi, to say (stem ©4-), has the following formation :
Present. ACTIVE. Imperf.
Indi- | S.1. | φημῖ Indi- | S.1.| ἔφην
cative 2.1 dic cative. 2. | ἔφης, usually ἔφησϑα
8. | φησί(ν) 3. | ἔφη
D. 2. | garév D. 2. | Eparov
8.] φᾶτόν _ 8. ἐφάτην
P. 1.| φᾶ P. 1. | paper
2.| φᾶτέ 2.| Epare
3. | φασί(ν) 3. | ἔφᾶσαν
Subj. | $0, φῇς, φῇ, φῆτον, φῶμεν, φῆ- | Opt.
Te, φῶσι(ν)
Imp. | φᾶϑί or padi, φάτω, Yärov,
φἄτων, düre, déTwoav and
φάντων.
Inf. | φάναι ee
Part. | dus, düca, φάν
G. φώντος, φάσης
φαίην, φαίης, φαίη, φαίητον
and φαῖτον, φαιήτην and
φαίτην, φαίημεν and φαῖ-
μεν, φαίητε and φαῖτε, -εν
φήσω :
ἔφησα.
MIDDLE.
Perf. Imp. πεφάσϑω, let it be said. Aor. Part. φάμενος, affirming.
Verbal adjective, φατός, φατέος.
Rem. 1. In the second person φῴς, both the accentuation and the Jota sub-
script is contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the Ind.
Pres. (except φής), see § 14.
Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm
(ato), to assert, maintain, etc. The Fut. φήσω, however, has only the latter sig-
nification ; the first is expressed by λέξω, tod. The Impf. ἔφην with φάναι and
φάς, is used also as an Aorist.
! In composition, ἀντίφημι, σύμφημι, ἀντίφης, σύ Burldnae Diudwal eles
but Subj. ἀντιφῶ, ἀντιφῇς, etc. np Pas; σύμφῃῳς, ἀντίφησι, σύμφησι, etc. 5
$.185.] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μί. 165
The following Deponents also belong here:
1. ἄγαμαι, to wonder, be astonished, admire, Impf. ἠγάμην ; Aor.
ἠγάσϑην; Fut. ἀγάσομαι.
2. δύναμαι, to be able, Subj. δύνωμαι ($ 134, 1), Imp. dvvaco, Inf.
δύνασϑαι, Part. δυνάμενος ; Impf. ἐδυνάμην and 7dvr.; second Pers.
ἐδύνω, Opt. δυναίμην, δύναιο ($134, 1); Fut. δυνήσομαι; Aor.
ἐδυνήϑην, nd. and ἐδυνάσϑην (§ 85, Rem.) ; Perf. δεδύνημαι; ver-
bal adjective, δυνατός, able and possible. .
3. ἐπίσταμαι, to know, second Pers. ἐπίστασαι, etc., Subj. ἐπίσ-
τωμαι (ὃ 134, 1), Imp. ἐπίστω, etc.; Impf. ἠπιστάμην, ἠπἴστω, etc.,
Opt. ἐπισταίμην, ἐπίσταιο (§ 134, 1); Fut. ἐπιστήσομαι; Aor. ἥπισ-
τήϑην (Aug., § 91, 3); verbal adjective, ἐπιστητός.
4. ἔραμαι, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. ἐράω is used instead of
it in prose) ; Aor. ἠράσϑην, amavi ; Fut. ἐρασϑήσομαι, amabo.
5. κρέμαμαι, to hang, pendeo, Subj. κρέμωμαι (ὃ 134, 1); Part.
κρεμάμενος ; Impf. ἐκρεμάμην, Opt. κρεμαίμην, -αιο, -aızo (§ 134, 1);
Aor. ἐχρεμάσϑην ; Fut. Mid. κρεμήσομαι, pendebo, I shall hang.
6. πρίασϑαι, to buy, a defective Aor. Mid., used by the Attic
writers instead of the Aor. Mid. of ὠνέομαι, viz. ἐωνησάμην (§ 87,
4), which is not used by them, Subj. πρίωμαι (§ 134, 1), Opt. πριαΐ-
μην, -αιο, -azo (§ 134, 1), Imp. πρίασο or πρίω, Part. πρίαμενος.
LXXI Vocabulary.
Δαιμόνιον, -ov, τό, the κώμη, -ns, ἡ, ἃ village. προ-σημαίνω, to indicate
. Deity. otxéri,no more,nolonger. beforehand, reveal.
ἐμπίπρημι, to set on fire, πολιτικός, -7, -όν, relating πρότερον, sooner, before.
burn up. to the state; τὰ moAı- σύν-ειμι, to be with.
εὔκλεια and εὐκλεία, -ας, τικά, politics. σωφρονέω, to be of sound
ἡ, fame. πότερος, -ü, -ov; Wer? mind, sensible or pru-
ἕως, as long as. which of two? πότερον, dent. [save.
icwc, perhaps. whether. 4 φείδομαι, w. gen., to spare,
Σωκράτης πρὸ πάντων gero! χρῆναι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους σωφροσύνην κτήσασϑαι.
Ev ἐλπίσι χρὴ τοὺς σοφοὺς ἔχειν βίον. Ἔργα καὶ πράξεις ἀρετῆς, οὐ λόγους
ζηλοῦν χρεῶν. Ἴσως εἴποι τις ἄν, ὅτι χρῆν τὸν Σωκράτη μὴ πρότερον τὰ πο-
λετικὰ διδάσκειν τοὺς ἑαυτῷ συνδιατρίβοντας ἢ σωφρονεῖν. Σωκράτης τὴν πό-
λιν πολλὰ ὥνησον. Οἱ πολόμεοι πολλὰς κώμας ἐνέπρησαν. Σωκράτης τὸ das-
μόνιον ἔφη προσημαίνειν ἑαυτῷ τὸ μέλλον. ἸΠόνος, φασίν, εὐκλείας πατήρ. Ob
«πολῖται τοῦς στρατιώτας τῆς ἀνδρείας ἠγάσϑησαν.38 ᾿Αλκιβιώδης, ἕως Σωκράτει
συνῆν, ἐδυνήϑη τῶν μὴ καλῶν ἐπιϑυμιῶν κρατεῖν. Ἰριαίμην πρὸ πάντων χρη-
μάτων τὸν σοφὸν ἄνδρα φίλον εἶναί por. Πολλοὶ χρημάτων δυνάμενοι φείδεσθαι,
«ρὶν ἐρᾷν, ἐρασϑέντες οὐκέτι δύνανται.
Socrates maintained (aor.), that the Deity revealed the future to him. I
16125,20. 34126, 7. 3. ἀγασϑαΐ τινά τινος, to admire one for something.
166 FBS IN -μί. [85 186, 182.
maintain, said the general, that (acc. w. inf.) you must attsck. the enemics.
‚ Virtue will always benefit man. Fill (aor.) the goblets with wine. The town
was set on fire (aor.). The moderate (man) will always be able to control evil
desires. The wise (man) will always love virtue. Socrates understood (aori)
how to turn the youths to virtue. We cannot purchase a faithful friend for
money.
8186. Verbs in -e (τίιϑη-μι, OE-):
1. i-7-uı (stem ‘E-), to send. Many forms of this verb are found
only in composition.
ACTIVE.
‘Pres. | Ind. Inut, ing, Inot(v); terov; leuev, lere, ἰᾶσι(ν) or leiaı(v).
Subj. lö, Ic, lg; Inrov; ἰῶμεν, lyre, ἰῶσι(ν) ; ἀφιῶ, ἀφιῇς, ἀφιῇ.
(ἀφίῃ in Xen.), etc.
Imp. (ζεϑι), tet, ἱέτω, ete. Inf. ἱέναι. Part. leic, ietoa, liv. |
Impf. | Ind. lovy (from ‘TEQ), dgiovy or ἠφίουν (θῦσαι tev), ἵεις, ἵει; ἴδ:
τον, ἱέτην ; leuev, lere, lecav. Opt. ἱείην.
Perf |eika. — Plup. εἴκειν. --- Fat. ἥσω. — Aor. 1. na ($ 131, 2).
| Aor. IT. Is Bon) 5 supplied by Aor. I. ($131, 2); Dual elrov, εἴτην 5.
εἶμεν, καϑεῖμεν, εἶτε, ἀνεῖτε, εἶσαν, ἀφεῖσαν.
Se ὦ, Yo, ἀφῶ, ἀφῇς, etc.
Opt. εἴην, εἴης, ein; elrov, εἴτην; εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἶεν. |
Imp. ἔς, ἄφες, rw; Erov, Erwv ; Ere, Erwoav and ἕντων.
Inf. εἶναι, ἀφεῖναι. — Part. εἴς, εἶσα, Ev, Gen. &vrog, εἴσης, ἜΣ
Remark. On the Aug. οὗ ἀφίημι, see ὁ 91, 8.
MIDDLE.
Ind. leuat, ἴεσαι, terat, etc. Subj. iönaı, ἀφιῶμαι, ἰῇ, ἀφιῇ, etc.
Imp. feoo or tov. Inf. ἔεσϑαι. Part. ἱέμεμος, -7, -ov
ἱέμην, leoo, etc. Opt. loiunv (leiumv), ἑοῖο, ἀφιοῖο, etc. -
‘Aor. II. | Ind. εἴμην Subj. ὦμαι, ἀφῶμαι, ᾧ, ἀφῇ, ἦτι ἧται, ἀφῆται
εἶσο, ἀφεῖσο Opt. προοίμην, -οἷο, -οἶτο, -oipeda, ete.
εἶτο, ἀφεῖτο DR ov, ἔσϑω, etc.
elueda, etc. . Eodaı. Part. Euevog, -n, -ov.
Perf. εἶμαι, μεϑεῖμαι, Inf. εἶσθαι, μεϑεῖσϑαι. — Plup. elunv, εἶσο, ἀφεῖσο, etc
— Fut. 7oouat. — Aor. I. ἡκάμην only in Ind. and seldom.
“PASSIVE.
Aor. L εἴϑην, Part. ἐϑ εἰς. ---. Fut. ἐϑήσομαι. ---- Verb. Adj. ἑτός, ἑτέος (ἄφετος
4187. Ε μέ (stem E2-), to be, and Εἶμι (stem J-), to ga
PRESENT.
. 1. εἰμί, tobe | Subj.w . | εἶμι, to go Subj. ζω
ἴῃς
tg
Inrov
inrov
ἴωμεν
Inte
ζωσι(ν)
§ 187.] WERDE IN “μι. 267
Imp. S$. 2. | te Inf. εἶναι Imp. | #01, xpocedc, | Inf. ἰέναι
3. fats Part. ὦν, οὖσα, seldom mpöse:| Part. ov, ἰοῦ»
D. 2. ἔστον by 8. | τω, προςίτω oa, lov
8. | dorwv 6. ὄντος, οὔσης | D. 2. | ἔτον Gen. lövrog,
P. 2. | ἔστε 8. | Irwv ἰούσης.
8. ! ἔστωσαν, seldom ἔστων P. 2. | tre
| (more seldom ὄντων) 3. | irwoay or ἰόντων
IMPERFECT.
Ind.
1. | ἦν, 7 was, .1. | geev or ga, 7 went
. | hoda 2. | des, usly ἤεισϑα
gee
ag rev) | ein 2 peirnv, a
| ῥειμεν, “
: ἔστε (ἦτε) gecre,
‚| geoav
Fut. Foner? T shall be, ἔσῃ or ἔσει, Borat, ete. — Opt. ἐσοίμην. — If ἔσεσ- '
Sat. — Part. ἐσόμενος.
D. es hrov) | .2. ἤειτον, us'ly ἦτον
r.
Rex. 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of elui, to be (except the second Per.
el), see § 14. In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back as the
general rules of accentuation permit; 6. g. πάρειμι, πάρει, πάρεστι, etc., Imp.
πάρισϑι but παρῆν on account of the temporal augment, παρέσται on account
of the omission of e (παρέσεται), παρεῖναι like infinitives with the ending -vas,
nape, -ὃς, -ἢ. etc., on account of the contraction; the accentuation of the Part.
in compound words ahould be particularly noted; 6. g. παρών, Gen. παρόντος,
80 also παριών, Gen. παριόντος.
Rex. 2. The compounds of εἶμι, to go, follow the same rules as those of elu,
to be; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds; e. g.
, πάρειμι, πάρει and πάρεισι (third Pers. Sing. of εἶμι and third Pers. Pl. of elyé);
but Inf. παριέναι, Part. raptor.
Rem. 3. The Pres. of εἶμε, to go, particularly the Ind., also the Inf. and Part.,
among the Attic prose-writers, has almost always a Future signification, 7 shall
or will go, or come. Hence the Pres. is supplied by ἔρχομαι (§ 126, 2).
LXXIL Vocabulary.
"Aretut, to be away, or dirder, namely, forsooth, ἐφέημε, to send up to;
absent. acilicet. mid. w. gen., send one-
ἄπειμι, to go away. elo-eıuı, to go, ar come self or one’s thoughts
ἀρκέομαι, το. pass. aor., to into. after anything; i. 6. de-
satisfy oneself, be con- ἐμβροχίζω, to drive into _ sire.
tented, tw. dat. the net or snare, en- καϑίημι, to let down, lay.
ἀφίημε, to let go, give up, snare. κάπρος, -ov, 6, ἃ wild boar?
neglect. &&-inut, to let or send out; καρτερός, -&, -öv, strong,
Bıöw, to live. of rivers, empty itself. large. -
δέον, -οντος (from dei), τό, ἔπειτα, afterwards, then, xpavyf, -7¢, 9, @ cry, &
that which is owed,duty. hereafter. shout.
168 VERBS IN “μὲ. [8 19%.
AiSoc, -ov, ὃ, a stone. πέδη, -ἧς, 7, a fetter. ace., to revenge oneself
pedinut, to let go, give πλεονώκις, oftener. on. [known.
up, neglect. πρός-ειμι, to go to, ap- φανερός, -G, -6v, evident,
παρασκευάζω, to prepare; proach. χιῶν, -όνος, 7, snow.
mid., to prepare oneself. oröua,-arog,rö,themouth. ὡς, Attic for εἰς (with per-
παρίημι, to let pass,loosen. τιμωρέω, to help; mid. w. sons).
Ol ἀγαϑοὶ οὐ διὰ τὸν ὕπνον μεϑιᾶσι τὰ δέοντα πράττειν. "Adels τὰ davepa
μὴ δίωκε τὰ ἀφανῆ. Πολλοὶ ἄνϑρωποι ἐφίενται πλούτου. Πέδας λέγουσιν εἰς
τὸν ᾿Ελλήςποντον καϑεῖναι Ξέρξην τιμωρούμενον δῆϑεν τὸν ᾿Ἑλλήςποντον.
Οὔτ’ ἐκ χειρὸς μεϑέντα καρτερὸν λίϑον ῥᾷον κατασχεῖν, οὔτ᾽ “ἀπὸ γλώττης λό-
γον. Ἡρακλῆς τὸν ᾿Ερνυμάνϑιον κάπρον διώξας μετὰ κραυγῆς εἰς χίονα πολλὴν
παρειμένον ἐνεβρόχισεν. Ὁ Νεῖλος ἐξίησιν εἰς τὴν ϑάλατταν ἑπτὰ στόμασιν.
*Arra® ἔπειτ᾽ ἔσται, ταῦτα ϑεοῖς μέλει. El ϑνητὸς εἶ, BéAriore,* ϑνητὰ καὶ
φρόνει. Μέμνησοδ νέος ὦν, ὡς γέρων ἔσῃ ποτέ. Δίκαιος ἴσϑ᾽, ἵνα καὶ δικαίων
τύχῃς. Βίας παρούσης οὐδὲν ἰσχύει νόμος. Ἑϊῤδαίμων εἴην καὶ ϑεοῖς φίλος.
ῬΑλέξανδρος εἶπεν El μὴ ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἦν, Διογένης ἂν ἦν. Biooy® ἀρκούμενος
ποῖς παροῦσι, τῶν ἀπόντων οὐκ ἐφιέμενος. Καὶ νεότης καὶ γῆρας ἄμφω καλά
ἐστον. Οἱ ἄνϑρωποι εὐδαιμονεῖν δύνανται, κἂν πένητες wow. ᾿Αλήϑειά 008
παρέστω. "Imuev, ὦ φίλοι. Φεῦγε διχοστασίας καὶ ἔριν, πολέμου προςιόντος.
Ἐπεὶ ἡ Μανδάνη παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἀπιοῦσα πάλιν πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα, ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης
Ἔλεγε πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον " "Q παῖ, ἢν μένῃς παρ᾽ ἐμοί, πρῶτον μέν, ὅταν βούλῃ εἰς-
ἐέναι ὡς ἐμέ, ἐπὶ σοὶ ἕσται,19 καὶ χάριν σοι μᾶλλον ἔξω, ὅσῳ ἂν πλεονάκις εἰςίῃς
ὡς ἐμέ. "Ἔπειτα δὲ ἵπποις τοῖς ἐμοῖς χρήσῃ, καί, ὅταν ἀπίῃς, ἔχων ἄπει οὖς ἂν
αὐτὸς ἐϑέλῃς ἵππους. :
_ The good (man) will never.omit to do his duty. Many strive after ( ἐφίεσϑαε,
w. gen.) the unknown, while they neglect (pert. aor.) the known. Xerxes laid
fetters on the Hellespont. Let not a man be a friend to me with the tongue
(dat.), but in reality. Be just, that you may also obtain justice. The friend
cares for the friend, even though he is absent When the enemies came into
the town, the citizens fled. Go in, O boy! The soldiers should all go away
from the town. Two armies came into the town.
1 § 158, 3. (b). * § 52, 10. 3 § 62. 4§ 52,1. 5 § 122, 12,
© § 121, 16. 7 § 126, 7. 8.142,10. 54 39, Rem.
10 εἶναι ἐπί revt, to be in the power of any one.
N
§ 138.] VERBS IN -με. 109.
v
"8138. II. Verds in -uı which annex the Syllable vv or vu to the
Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings.
Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem ends with
a,e, 0, or with a Consonant.
A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, ¢ or 9.
Voice. | Tenses.| a. Stem in a. Ὁ. Stem ine. c. Stem in o (ὦ).
σκεδά-ννῦ-μι! κορέ-ννῦ-μιὶ στρώ-ννθ-μιδ
ἐ-σκεδά-ννρ-ν! ἐ-κορέ-ννῦ-νὶ | ἐ-στρώ-ννυ-νὶ
ἐ-σκέδα-κα κε-κόρε-κα ἔ-στρω-κα
ἐ-σκεδά-κειν ἐ-κε-κορέ-κειν ἐ-στρώ-κειν
oxedd-ow, Kope-0@, στρώ-σω
Att. σκεδῶ, «ἄς, -@ | Att. κορῶ, -εἴς, -ei
8-oK&dü-oa ἐ-κόρε-σα &-oTpw-oa
σκεδά-ννῦ-μαι κορέ-ννῦ-μαι OTpG-vyd-pat
ἐ-σκεδα-ννύ- μην ἐ-κορε-ννῦ- μην | ἐ-στρω-ννό-μην
ἐ-σκέδα-σ-μαι κε-κόρε-σ-μαι ἔςστρω-μαι
ἐ-σκεδά-σ-μην &-ne-kope-0-unv | ἐ-στρῶ-μην
κορέ-σ-ομαι
ἐ-κορε-σ- μην
κε-κορέ-σ-ομαι
ἐ-σκεδώ-σ-ϑην ἐ-κορέ-σ-ϑην
σκεδα-σ-ϑήσομαι κορε-σ-ϑήσομαι
σκεδα-σ-τός κορε-σ-τός στρω-τός
σκεδα-σ-τέος κορε-σ-τέος στρω-τέος.
B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant.
OA-AD-uu,® δλ-λῦ-μαι, ὄμ-νϑ-μιῇ Öu-vö-uaı
ὁλιλυιν" Pe | Sata isis ou-vb-unv
ὀλ-ώλε-κα (ΔΕ), perdidi,. ὀμ-ὦμο-κα ὀμ-ὦμο-μαι
89. (OMOR),
. IL | 6A-wA-a, perii § 89.
Plup. L | ὀλεωλέ-κειν, perdideram ὀμ-ωμό-κειν | ὀμ-ωμό-μην
Plup. U. ὀλ-ώλ-ειν, perieram
Fut. ὀλ-ῶ, -Eic, -εἴ bA-oöuaı, -εἶ du-oönat, -εἴ
Aor.I. | ὦλε-σα A. IL 0%-öunv | ὦμο-σα Sa a4
A. I. P. ὠμό-σ-ϑην et au6dnv
I. F. P. ὁμο-σ-ϑήσομαι.
Remark. "OAAvut comes by assimilation from ὄλινυμε. For an example of
a stem-ending with a mute, see δείκνῦμε above, under the paradigms ($ 188).
The'Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass. of ὄμνυμι is ὀμωμοσμένος. The remaining forms
of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the o among the Attic writers; ὁ. g.
ὁμώμοται, ὀμώμοτο.
I And σκεδα-ννύω, ἐσκεδά-ννυον ---- κορε-ννύω, ἐ-κορέ-ννυον — στρω-ννύω,
ἐ-στρώ-ννυον (always ὕ).
® And ὀλλύ-ω, ὥλλυ-ον — ὀμνύ-ω, ὥμνυ-ον (always ὕ).
1ὅ
170 VERBS IN -μί. [$ 189.
SUMMARY OF THE VERBS BELONGING HERE.
The Stem ends:
$139. A. In a Vowel and assumes -99¢.
(2) Verbs whose Stem ends in a.
1. χερά-ν»νῦ-μι, to mix, Fut. κεράσω, Att. κερῶ; Aor. éxeodoa;
Perf. xéxeaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. κέκρώμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐκράθην,
also ἐκεράσϑη» .---Μἱά.
2. xgeud-vrü-u, to hang, Fut. xgeu&oo, Att. κρεμῶ ; Aor. &xge-
μᾶσα: ; Mid. or Pass. κρεμάννῦμαι, I hang myself or am hung (but
κρέμαμαι, to hang, Intrans., ὃ 185, 5); Fut. Pass. χρεμασϑήσομαι:
Aor. ἐχρεμάσϑην, Iwas hung, or I hung, Intrans.
8. πετα-νγῦ-μι, to spread out, expand, open, Fut. zer&oo, Att.
πετῶ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. σέπταμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐπετάσθην (Syn-
cope, $ 117, 1).
4, σκεδά-ννῦ-μι, to scatter, Fut. σκεδάσω, Att. oxedo; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. soxedacum ; Aor. Pass. ἐσκεδάσθην.
(Ὁ) Verbs whose Stem ends ine.
1. ξιννῦ-μι, to clothe, in prose dugıdrrüuı, Impf. ἀμφιέννυν with-
out Aug.; Fut. ἀμφιέσω, Att. ἀμφιῶ; Aor. yupiecas Perf. Mid.
or Pass. ἡμφίεσμαι, ἠμφίεσαι, ἠμφίεσται, ete., Inf. ἠμφιέσθαι; Fut.
Mid. ἀμφιέσομαι, Att. ἀμφιοῦμαι.---Αὐρ., § 91, 3.
2. Ce-vwü-w, to boil, Trans., Fut. Céom; Aor. seca; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. ἔζεσμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐζέσθην.----(ξέω, on the contraty, is
usually intransitive)..
8. xoge-mwö-u, to satisfy, satiate, Fut. κορέσω, Att. κορῶ ; Aor.
ἐκόρεσα; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xexopsouas ; Aor. Pass. ἐκορέσϑην. —
Mid.
4. oße-wö-u, to extinguish, Fut. σβέσω ; first Aor. ἔσβεσα, I ex-
tinguished ; second Aor. ἔσβην, I ceased to burn, went out; Perf.
ἔσβηκα, I have ceased to burn.—Mid. oßervüuaı, to cease to burn,
‘Perf. Mid. or Pass. ἔσβεσμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐσβέσϑην. 2 other
verb in μι has a second Aorist.
5. στορέ-»νῦ-μι, to spread out, abbreviated form σεόρνυμε, Fat. στο-
0200, Att. στορῶ; Aor. ἐστόρεσα. The other tenses are formed
from στρώγνυμι, viz. ἔστρωμαι, ἐστρώϑην, στρωτός. See § 138,
A, ας. j
6140.) VERBS IN “μι. Ww
(c) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into w.
1 ζω-ν»νῦ-μι, to gird, Fut. ζώσω; Aor. ἔζωσα; ; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. ἔζωσμαι (ὃ 95).—Mid.
2. ῥώ-ννῦ-με, to strengthen, Fut. ῥώσω ; Aor. ἔῤῥωσα; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. ἔῤῥωμαι, Imp. ἔῤῥωσο, farewell, Inf. ἐῤῥῶσθϑαι; Aor. Pass.
ἐῤῥώσθην (§ 95).
3. στρώ-ννῦ-μι, to spread out, Fut. στρώσω ; Aor. ἔστρωσα, etc. .
See στορέννδμι and $ 138, A, c.
4. χρώτφνντμι, to color, Fut. χρώσω ; Aor. ἔχρωσα ; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. κέχρωμαι.
8140. B. In a Consonant and assumes -v (see
‘Oeix-vv-pt, § 133).
1. &y-vü-un, to break, Fut. ἄξω; Aor. fafa, Inf. ἄξαι: second
Perf. & ἔᾶγα, I am broken; Aor. Pass. ἐἄγην (Aug., ὃ 87, 4).—Mid.
‘2. eigy-vi-ps (or sigyeo), to shut in, Fut. εἴρξω; Aor. εἶρξα. (But
εἴργω, εἴρξω, εἴρξα, to shut out, ete.). Ä
8. Levy-vö-w, to join, Fut. ζεύξω; Aor. itevta ; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. ἔζευγμαι; Aor. Pass. ἐζεύχϑην, more frequently ἐζύγην.
4. piy-vi-pt, to mix, Fut. pigo; Aor. ἔμιξα, μῖξαι; Perf. ueuiya;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. peueypas; Aor. Pass. ἐμίχθην, more frequently
dulym; Fut. Perf. μεμίξομαι.
5. οἵγονῦ-με or 0170, prose avoiyvips, ἀνοίγω, to open, Impf. ἀνέῳ-
γον; Fut. ἀνοίξω ; Aor. ἀνέφξα, ἀνοῖξαι; first Perf. ἀνέῳχα, I have
opened ; second Perf. ἀνέφγα, I stand open, instead of which Att.
ἀνέφγμαι: ; Aor. Pass. ἀνεῴχϑη», ἀνοιχϑῆναι (Aug., $ 87, 6).
6. önögy-Fü- μι, to wipe off, Fut. opoeko ; Aor. ὥμορξα. -- Mid.
7. 60-78 -Hi, to rouse, Fut. doc; Aor. ὦρσα: Mid. δρνῦμαι, to
rouse one’s self, Fut. ὀροῦμαι ; Aor. wgouny.
8. πηγ-νῦ-μι, to fiz, fasten, Fut. anf; Aor. ἔπηξα ; first Perf.
πέπηχα, I have fastened; second Perf. πέπηγα, I stand fast; Mid.
αήγνῦμαι, I stick fast ; Perf. πέπηγμαι, I stand fast ; Aor. Pass. ἐπ»
ynv.—Mid.
9. ῥηγ-νῦ-μι, to tear, break, Fut. ῥήξω ; Aor. ἔῤῥηξα ; second Perf.
ἔῤῥωγα, I am broken, rent; Aor. ἐῤῥάγην; Fut. Pass. ῥάγήσομαι.
LXXII. Vocabulary.
’Anöns, -&, unpleasant, join again; ofan army, ἀπο-σβέννθμι, to quench.
disgusting. set out again. βδελυγμία, -ag, ἡ, ΕΘ
ἀνα-ζεὐγνῦμι, to yoke, or ἀνα-καίω, to burn, kindle. disgust.
ive VERBS IN -μί. fs 141.
διαῤῥήγνομι, to break κωτίλλω, to chatter, prat- gether, make coagulate,
asunder, tear in pieces, _ tle. llight. compose.
tear away. λύχνος, -ov, 6, a lamp, a φύσημα, -aroc, τό, breath.
ἐγκαλλωπίζομαι, to be μαλϑακός, -7, -όν, soft, φῶς, φωτός, τό, light.
proud οὗ make a dis- rich, tender. χόλος, “οὐ, ὁ, ill-will, an-
play. ὅλλομε, to destroy. ger. [jury.
ἐξ-όλλυμι, to ruin utterly. orvyéw, to hate. ψευδόρκιον, -av, τό, per-
ζεύγνῦμι, to yoke, join. συμπήγνῦμε, to join to- ψεύδορκος, -ov, perjured.
Τῶν βρωμάτων τὰ hdıora,! ἐών τις προςφέρῳ, πρὶν ἐπιϑυμεῖν, ἀηδῆ φαίνεται,
κεκορεσμένοις δὲ καὶ βδελυγμίαν παρέχει. Τῷ αὐτῷ φυσήματι τὸ μὲν πῦρ ἀνα-
καύσειας ἄν, τὸ δὲ τοῦ λύχνου φῶς ἀποσβέσειας. Οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι μετὰ πάσης τῆς
ϑυνάμεως ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας ἀνέζευξαν. Μὴ δαιμόνων χόλον ὄρσῃης. Ἥ ὅβρις"
πολλὰ ἤδη τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπώλεσεν ἔργα. El μὴ φυλάξεις μίκρ᾽, ἀκολεῖς τὰ
μείζονα. Οἱ πολέμιοι ὥμοσαν τὰς συνθήκας φυλάξαι. Ξενοφάνης ἔλεγε, τὴν
γὴν ἐξ ἀέρος καὶ πυρὸς συμπαγῆναι. Σωκράτης, ἰδὼν" ᾿Αντισϑένῃ τὸ διεῤῥωγὸς
ἐματίου μέρος ἀεὶ ποιοῦντα φανερόν - Οὐ παύσῃ, ἔφη, ἐγκαλλωπιζόμενος ἡμῖν ;
“Ἑεύδορκον στυγεῖ ϑεὸς, ὅςτις ὀμεῖται. Ζεὺς ἄνδρ᾽ ἐξολέσειεν ᾽Ολύμπιος, ὅς τὸν
ἑταῖρον μαλϑακὰ κωτίλλων ἐξαπατᾷν ἐϑέλει.
Boil (aor.) the water, O boy! The garment is torn. The milk is curdled
(συμπήγνυμι, perf. 2). The doors are open. The wine was mixed (aor.) with
water (dat.). The goblet is broken to pieces. The light is extinguished. The
soldiers will again set out against the enemies. Swear (subj. aor.) not withont
reason. Haughtiness will ruin you all. Extinguish (aor.) the light. The wo-
men in sorrow (sorrowing) tore (aor. mid.) their garments. Ὁ
$141. Inflection of the two forms of the Perfect,
κεῖμαι and nuas.
(a) Κεῖμαι, to lie down.
Keiuaı, properly, I have laid myself down, I am lain down, hence,
Ilse down, is a Perf. form without reduplication.
Perf. | Ind. κεῖμαι, κεῖσαι, κεῖται, κείμεϑα, κεῖσϑε, κεῖνται;
Subj. κέωμαι, κέῃ, κέηται, etc. ;
Imp. κεῖσο, κείσϑω, ete.; Inf. xeiodas; Part. κείμενος.
Plup. | Ind. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο, third Pers. Pl. ἔκειντο ;
Opt. κεοίμην, κέοιο, κέοιτο, etc,
Fit. κείσομαι.
Compounds, ἀνάκειμαι, κατώκειμαι, κατάκεισαι, ete.; Inf. κατακεῖσϑαι ; Imp
κατάκεισο, ἔγκεισο.
(Ὁ) Ἧμαι, to sit.
1. Hucı, properly, I have seated myself, I have been seated, hence,
I sit, is a Perf. form of the Poet. Aor. Act. εἶσα, to set, to establish.
The stem is ‘H4- (comp. ἧἦσ-ται instead of ἦδ-ται [according to § 8,
1.] and the Lat. sed-eo).
1481, 1. 24126, 4.
$142.] VERBS OF -ὦ WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -μί. 178
Perf. | Ind. ἦμαι, ἦσαι, ἧσται, ἤμεϑα, node, ἦνται ;
Imp. 700, 709w, etc.; Inf. ἦσϑαι; Part. ἥμενος.
Plup. | inv, ἦσο, oto, queda, Node, ἦντο.
2. In prose, the compound κάϑημαι, is commonly used instead of
the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from that of
the simple, in never taking o in the third Pers. Sing. Perf., nor in
the Plup., except when it has the temporal Augment:
Perf. | κάϑημαι, κάϑησαι, κάϑηται, etc.; Subj. κάϑωμαι, κάϑῃ, κάϑηται,
etc.; Imp. xüdnoo, etc.; Inf. καϑῆσϑαι; Part. καϑήμενος.
Plup. | ἐκαϑήμην and καϑήμην, ἐκάϑησο and καϑῆσο, ἐκά ϑητο and κα-
| ϑῆστο, οἷς.; Opt. καϑοίμην, κάϑοιο, κάϑοιτο, ete.
» Reuark. The defective forms of ἦμαε are supplied by ἔζεσθαι or Keodas
(prose καϑέζεσθϑαι, καϑίζεσϑθαι). ᾿
§ 142. Verbs in -w, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -u, in
forming the second Aor. Act. and Mid.
1. Several verbs with the characteristic «, 2, 0, v, form a second
Aor. Act. and Mid., according to the analogy of verbs in -w, since,
in this tense, they omit the mode-vowel, and hence append the per-.
sonal-endings to the stem. But all the remaining forms of these
verbe are like verbs in -o.
2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the modes
and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of verbs in -με.
The characteristic-vowel is in most cases lengthened, as in ἔστην,
viz. ἃ and e into ἡ, 0 into ὦ, ἵ and v intot andv. This lengthened
vowel remains, as in ὅστην, throughout the Ind., Imp. and Inf.
The Imp. ending -7 in verbs whose characteristic-vowel is α, in
composition is abridged into &; 6. g. πρόβα instead of πρόβηϑι.
Modes | a. Characteris. a
and BA-Q, Paivo,
Persons.
8oßnv, I ceased | ἔγνων, I knew
Eoßns [io burn | ἔγνως
2.
3.| ἔβη Eoßn ἔγνω ἔδυ [under
D. 2.| ἔξβηττον ΄ ἔσβητον ἔγνωτον ἔδῦτον
8. ἐ-βή-την ἐσβήτην ἐγνώτην ἐδύὕτην
P. 1. ἔ-βη-μεν Eoßnuev ἔγνωμεν ἔδῦμεν
2.| ἔβη-τε ἔσβητε ἔγνωτε ἔδῦτε
83. | ἐ-βη-σαν ἔσβησαν ἔγνωσαν ἔδῦσαν
; (Poet. ἐβᾶν) (Poet. ἔγνων ee
Subj. S.. Ba, Bas, βῃ! σβῶ, “ὦ -7 γνῶ, γνῷς, γνῷ ὕω, “OS; -
D. | βῆτον σίβῆτον γνῶτον δύητον
P. | βῶμεν, -nre, σβῶμεν, «τε, γνῶμεν, -ὥτε, δύωμεν,
«ὥσι(ν) «ὥσι(ν) -ὥσι(ν) Are, -ωστ(ν)
! Compounds, 6. g. ἀναβῶ, ἀναβῇς, etc.; anooßü;, diayvd; ἀναδύω.
15*
174 __VERBS WITH A SEOOND AOR. LIKE VERBS IN -s. [8 142.
Opt. S. 1. βαίην oßeinv γνοίην '
2. | Bains oBeing γνοίης
8. βαίη σβείη γνοίη
D. 2. βαίητον οἱ -airov| σβείητον et-eirov| γνοίητον et-oirov
3. βαιήτην et-airnv| oßeınrnvet-eirnv| yvonrnvet-oirnv
P. 1. | Bainuev et -αἷμεν oßeinuevet-einev| γνοίημεν et -οἶμεν
2. | Bainre et -aire |oßeinre et -eire γνοίητε et -otre
3. | βαῖεν (seldom | σβεῖεν γνοῖεν (rarely
βαίησαν). γνοίησαν).
Imp. 8. | βῆϑι, -nrw σβῆϑι, -nru! γνῶϑι, -ὦτω" 6601, -ὑτω!
D. 1. [βῆτον, -ἥτων σβῆτον, «των |Yyvarov, -ὦὠτων | δῦτον, ὅτων
P. 2. Pare σβῆτε γνῶτε düre
3. | βήτωσαν and σβήτωσαν and | γνώτωσαν and ἰ δύτωσαν et
βάντων σβέντων γνόντων δύντων
Inf. βῆναι σβῆναι γνῶναι δῦναι
Part. Bag, -Goa, -av |oße.s, -eloa, -év | γνούς, -oüca, «ὧν | ddr, -ῦσα,
G. Büvrog G. σβέντος G. yvövrog G. δύντος.
RemakK. The Opt. form dönv, instead of dvinv, is not found in the Attic
dialect, but in the Epic. In the Common language, the second Aor. Mid. is
formed in only a very few verbs; 6. g. πέτομαι (§ 125, 23), mplaodaı, to buy
{4 135, p. 165).
Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like Vorbs in -pe.
Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form:
1. διδράσκω, to run away (§ 122, 6), Aor. (4P-A-) ἕδραν, -de,
-d, -ἄμεν, -ἅτε, -ἄσαν, Subj. δρῶ, δρᾷς, δρᾷ, δρᾶτον, δρῶμεν, δρᾶτε,
Seat(s), Opt. δραίην, Imp. deads, -aroo, Inf. δρᾶναι, Part. deck,
«ἄσα, -ἄν.
2. πέτομαι, to fly (§ 125, 23), Aor. (IITA-) ἕπτην, Inf. πτῆναε,
Part. nräg ; Aor. Mid. ἐπτάμην, πτάσϑαι.
8. σκέλλω or σκελέω, to dry, make dry, second Aor. (ZKA.A-)
ἔσκλην, to wither (Intrans.), Inf. axAnvau, Opt. σκλαίην ($ 117, 2).
4. φϑά-νω, to come before, anticipate (ἢ 119, 5), seoond Aer.
ἔφϑην, φϑῆναι, φϑάς, POO, φϑαίην.
5. καίω, to burn, Trans. (§ 116, 2), second Aor. (KAE-) ἐκάην,»
1 burned, Intrans. ; but first Aor. gxavoa, Trans.
6. ῥέω, to flow (§ 116, 3), Aor. (PTE-) ἐρόδην," I flowed.
7. χαίρω, to rejoice (§ 125, 24), Aor. (X A PE-) ἐχάρην."
8. αλίσκομαι, to be taken, Aor. (AAO-) ἥλων and ἑάλων (§ 122, 1).
9. Brow, to live, second Aor. ἐβίων, Subj. Bud, -ᾧς, -@, etc., Opt.
βιῴην (not βιοίην, as γνοίην, to distinguish it from Opt. Impf.
βιοιη»), Inf. βιῶναι, Part. βιούς ; but the Cases of the Part. βιωύς
are supplied by the first Aor. Part. βιώσας. Thus, ἀνεβίων, I came
* Compounds, ὁ. g. ἀνάβηϑι, ἀνάβᾶ, ἀνάβητε; ἀπόσβηϑι; dıayvadı ; ἀνάδοϑι.
* Zee are er Pass. Aorists, though they have an Act. Intrane. signi
§ 143.) THE IRREGULAR VERB οἶδα. 175
to life again, from ἀναβιώσκομαι.--- The Pres. and Impf. of Péow
are but little used by the Attic writers; instead of these, they em-
ploy the corresponding tenses of (a, which, on the contrary, bor-
rows its remaining tenses from Biow; thus, Pres. fo; Impf. ἔζων
(§ 97, 3); Fut. βιώσομαι; Aor. ἐβίων ; Perf. βεβίωκα ; Perf. Pass.
βεβίωται, Part. βεβιωμένος.
10 φύω, to bring forth, produce, second Aor. ἔφῦν, I was pro-
duced, born, I sprung up, arose, was, φῦναι, gus, Subj. gvo (Opt.
wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first Aor. épvca, J produced,
Fut. φύσω, [will produce. The Perf. πέφῦκα, also has an intran-
‚sitive sense, and also the Pres. Mid. φύομαι, and the Fut. φύσομαι.
§ 143. O73 a (stem ’EIA., to see), I know.
PERFECT.
Subj. εἰδῶ
εἰδῇς
εἰδῇ
εἰδῆτον, -ἦτον
εἰδῶμεν
εἰδῆτε ἶστε
εἰδῶσι(ν) ἴστωσαν
PLUPERFECT.
Dual
Inf.
3 loro eldévat
. 9. στον, lorov lorov, στῶν
‚1. σμεν
. | lore
loact(v)
art.
εἰδώς, -via, -d¢
Ind. S. 1. | gdew! PL ἤδειμεν
2. ἤδεις and -εἰσϑα ἤδειτον ἤδειτε
3. | ἦδει(ν) ἠδείτην ἥδεσαν
Opt. Sing. εἰδείην, -ns, -7; Dual εἰδείητον, -ἥτην ; Pl. eldeinuev (seldom
eldeiuev), eldeinre, εἰδεῖεν (seldom eldeincav).
Fut. εἴσομαι, 1 shall know-—Verbal adjective, ἰστέον.
Σύνοιδα, compounded of oida, I am conscious, Inf. συνειδέναι, Imp. σύνισϑι,
Subj. συνειδῶ, etc.
LXXIV. Vocabulary.
Αἷμα, -arog, τό, blood.
ἀκολάστως, with impa-
nity, extravagantly, li-
centiously.
ἀπο-βαΐνω, to go away.
ἀπο-γιγνώσκω, to reject;
ἀπο-κρύπτω, to conceal.
ἄχρηστος, -ov, uscless,
Bond Ev, to hasten to help,
assist.
δύω, to go or sink into,
put on.
w. ἐμαυτόν, give oneself ἐκ- πέτομαι, to fly away.
up, despair.
ἐμπίπλημί τί τινος, to fill.
- ἀπο-διδρώσκω, w. ace, to νεκρός, -d, -όν, dead; ὁ
ran away from.
νεκρός, & COTPSC.
παρα-πέτομαι, to fly away.
πρό-οιδα, to know before-
hand.
προσϑετός, -7, -dv, Or
mpooteroc, -n, -ov, add-
ed (by art), artificial.
πτέρυξ, -γος, 7, & wing.
συγγιγνώσκω, w. dat, to
pardon. [that.
Gore, w. inf. and ind., so
1 First Pers. 967, second ῥόησθα, third ἠδη, are considered as Attic formas.
176 VERBS.--DEPONENTS MIDDLE MOST In use. [§ 144.
Of ἄνϑρωποι τὴν ἀλήϑειαν γνῶναι σπεύδουσιν. Τνῶϑι σεαυτόν. Trives
χαλεπὸν μέτρον. ‘H πόλις ἐκινδύνευσεν ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων ἁλῶναι. Φεῦγε
τοὺς ἀκολάστως βιώσαντας. Σύγγνωθί μοι, ὦ πάτερ. Λιμὸς μέγιστον ἄλγος
ἀνϑρώποις ἔφν. ᾿Οξεῖα ἡδονὴ παραπτᾶσα φϑάνει. Ὁ δοῦλος ἔλαϑεν" ἀποδρὰς
τὸν δεσπότην. Οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἔγνωσαν τοῖς πολίταις βοηϑεῖν. Μήποτε σεαυτὸν
ἀπογνῷς. Δαίδαλος ποιῆσας πτέρυγας προςϑετὰς ἐξέπτη μετὰ τοῦ ᾿Ικάρου.
Σύλλας ἐνέπλησε τὴν πόλιν φόνου καὶ νεκρῶν, Scre τὸν Κεραμεικὸνδ αἵματι ῥυῆ-
ναι. Οἱ πολέμιοι τὴν γῆν τεμόντες" ἀπέβησαν. "Αχρηστον προειδέναι τὰ μέλ-
Aovra. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ πάντων μέτρον ἴσασιν (know how) ἔχειν. Πολλοὶ ἄνϑρωποε
obre δίκας ἤδεσαν, οὔτε νόμους.
Go away, O boy! The whole town flowed with blood. The bird flew away.
The general determined to assist the town. The father pardoned the son.
Mayest thou not live licentiousiy! Men rejoice to know (aor. part.) the truth,
The town was taken by the enemies. Let us not despair. The slave ran away
from his master. The boy rejoiced when he saw (aor. part.) the bird fly away
(aor. part.). It is well in everything to know (how) to observe moderation.
Never praise a man, before (πρὶν dv, w. subj.) thou knowest him well. (σαφῶς).
8144. Deponents ($118, Rem.), and Active Verbs whose
Future has a Middle form.
a. List of Deponents Middle mostin use.
᾿Αγωνίζομαι, to contend, δεξιόομαι, to greet, λωβάομαι, to insult,
alxifouat, to treat inju- δέχομαι, to receive, μαντεύομαι, to prophesy,
riously, διακελεύομαι, to exhort, μαρτύρομαι, to call to wit-
alvirrouat, to speak darldy, dwpéopat, to present, ness,
αἰσϑάνομαι, to perceive, ἐγκελεύομαι, to urge, Haxouat, to fight,
alrıaouat, to accuse, ἐντέλλομαι, to command, μέμφομαι, to ame,
axéopat, to heal, ἐπικελεύομαι, to urge, μηχανάομαι, to dense,
ἀκροάομαι, to hear, ἐργάζομαι, to work, μιμέομαιε, ta imitate,
ἀκροβολίζομαι, to throw εὔχομαι, to pray, μυϑέομαι, to speak,
Jrom afar, to skirmish, ἡγέομαι, to go before, pudodoyéopat, to relate,
ἅλλομαι, to leap, ϑεάομαι, to see, μνκάομαι, to low,
ἀναβιώσκομαι, to restore to ἰάομαι, to heal, ξυλεύομαι, to gather wood,
life, or to live again, ἰλάσκομαι, to propitiate, ξυλίζομαι, to gather wood,
ἀνακοινόομαι, to communi- ἱππάζομαι, to ride, ὀδύρομαι, to mourn,
cate with,
ἀπεχϑάνομαι, to be hated,
ἀπολογέομαι, to speak in
defence,
dpäouaı, to pray,
ἰσχυρίζομαι, to exert one’s
καυχάομαι, to boast,
κοινολογέομαι, to consult
οἰωνίζομαι, to take omens
by birds,
öAopüpouaı, to lament,
ὀρχέομαι, to dance,
ὀσφραίνομαι, to smell,
ἀσπάζομαι, to welcome, κτάομαι, to acquire, παραιτέομαι, to entreat,
ἀφικνέομαι, tocome, Anllopuat, to plunder, παρακελεύομαι, to urge,
βιάζομαι, to force, λογίζομαι, to consider, παραμυϑέομαι, to encour-
γίγνομαι, to become, λυμαίνομαι, to maltreat, age,
14121, 18. 3. determined. 7 a place in Athens. #§ 119.
»
6144.] DEPONENTS PASSIVE.—ACT. VERBS WITH MID. FUT. 177
πῳῤῥησιάζομαι, to speak σκέπτομαι, to consider, ὑπισχνέομαι, to premise,
freely, oraduüouaı, to estimate ὑποκρίνομαε, to answer,
πέτομαι, to fy, (distance), φείδομαι, to spare,
πραγματεύομαι, to be busy, στοχάζομαι, to aim at, φϑέγγομαι, to speak,
προοιμιώζομαι, to make a oTparevouat, to go to war, φιλοφρονέομαε, to treat
preamble, στρατοπεδεύομαι, to en- kindly,
προφασίζομαι, to offer as camp, χαρίζομαι, to show kindness,
an excuse, τεκμαίρομαι, to limit, χράομαι, to use,
πυνϑάνομαι, to inguire, τεκταίνομαι, to fabricate, ὀὠνέομαι, to buy.
σέθομαι, to reverence, Texvaopat, to build,
v
Ὁ, List of Deponents Passive most in use.
᾿Αλᾶομαι, to wander, ἐναντιόομαι, to resist, ἥδομαι, to rejoice,
ἄχϑομαι, to be displeased, ἐνϑυμέομαι, to reflect, κρέμαμαε, to hang,
βούλομαι, to wish, ἐννοέομαι, to consider well, μυσάττομαι, to loathe,
βρυχάομαι, to roar, ἐπιμέλομαι and -ἔομαι, to οἴομαι, to suppose,
δέομαι, to want, take care, προϑυμέομαι, to desire,
διανοέομαι, to think, ἐπίσταμαι, to know, σέβομαι, to reverence,
δύναμαι, to be able (Mid. εὐλαβέομαι, to be cautious,
Aor. only Epic),
Remark. “Ayayat, to wonder, αἰδέομαι, to reverence, ἀμείβομαι, to exchange,
ἁμιλλάομαι, to contend, ἀποκρίνομαι, to answer, ἀπολογέομαι, to apologize, ἀρνέο-
μαι, to deny, ἀυλίζομαι, to lodge, διαλέγομαι, to converse with, ἐπινόεομαι, to reflect
upon, λοιδορέομαι, to reproach, μέμφομαι, to blame, ὀρέγομαι, to desire, πειράομαι, to
try, προνοέομαι, to foresee, φιλοφρονέομαι, to treat kindly, and φιλοτιμέομαι, to be
ambitious, have both a Mid. and Pass. form for their Aorist. Of these, ἄγαμαι,
αἰδέομαι, ἁμιλλάομαε, ἀρνέομαι, διαλέγομαι and φιλοτιμέομαι, are more frequently
in the Pass. Aor.; on the contrary, ἀμείβομαι, ἀποκρίνομαι, ἀπολογέομαι, μέμ-
φομαι and φιλοφρονέομαι, more frequently in the Mid. Aor.
ec. List of Active Verbs mostin use with a Middle Future.
»Ayvocw,# not to know, Baive, to go, δεῖσαι, to fear,
döw,t to sing, _ βιόω, ἐφ live, διδράσκω, to run away,
éxotw,t to hear, βλέπω,Ἔ to see, διώκω,Ἐ to pursue,
éAahalw,* to cry out, Boaw,t to cry out, ἐγκωμιάζω, to praise,
ἁμαρτάνω, to miss, yeAau,t to laugh. εἰμί, to be,
éravrau,t to meet, γηράσκω, to grow old, ἐπαινέω, to praise,
éroAaiw,t to enjoy, γιγνώσκω, to know, ἐπιορκέω, to perjure one’s
dpmalw,t to seize, δάκνω, to bite, self,
βαδίζω, to go, δαρϑάνω, to sleep, ἐσϑίω, to eat,
* Also with Fut. Act., in writers of the best period —Tr.
t Also with Fut. Act., but only in the later writers.. Comp. Rost. Gr. Gram,
$82, VI. D,c). The forms of the Fut. Mid., however, are to be preferred-—Tr.
178
Vavualo,# to wonder,
Séw,® to run,
ϑηράω, Inpebw,* to hunt,
ϑιγγάνω, to touch,
ϑνήσκω, to die,
ϑρώσκω, to leap,
κάμνω, to labor,
κλαίω, to weep,
κλέπτω, to steal,
κολάζω, to punish,
κωμάζω,Ἔ to indulge in fes-
tivity, Ὁ
λαγχάνω, to obtain,
λαμβάνω, to take,
λεχμάω, to lick,
μανϑάνω, to learn,
ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. —
véw, to swim,
olda, to know,
οἰμώζω,Ἔ to lament,
bA0Ablw,® to howl,
ὄμνυμι, to swear,
ὁράω, to see,
παίζω, to sport,
πάσχω, to suffer,
πηδάω, to leap,
πίνω, to drink,
πίπτω, to fall,
πλέω, to sail,
᾿πνέω, to blow (bat συμ-
rd
πνεύσω),
nviyw,t to strangle,
ποϑέω,Ἔ to desire,
[3 144.
apocxuvéw,® to reverence,
péw, to flow,
σιγάω, to be silent,
owräw,t to be silent,
σκώπτω, to sport,
σπουδάζω, to be zealous,
σνρέττω, to pipe,
TixTw,* to produce,
τρέχω, to run, |
τρώγω, to gnaw,
τυγχάνω, to obtain,
τωϑάζω, te rai at,
φεύγω, to flee,
φϑάνω, 7 to come before,
χάσκω, to gape,
xapto,# to contain.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.
ELEMENTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE.
§ 145. Nature of a Sentence. —Subject.—Predicate.
1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the expression of
a thought in words; 6. g. τὸ ῥόδον θάλλει, the rose blossoms, ὁ ἄν-
ϑρωπος ϑνητός ἐστιν, τὸ καλὸν ῥόδον θάλλει ἐν τῷ τοῦ πατρὸς κήπφ.
Every thought must contain two parts or ideas related to each
other and combined into one whole, viz. the idea of an action and
of an object from which the action proceeds. The former is called
the predicate, the latter, the subject. The subject, therefore, is that
of which something is affirmed, the predicate, that which is affirmed
of the subject; e. g. in the sentences, τὸ ῥόδον Oddla, ὃ ἄνϑρω-
wog θνητός ἐστιν,---τὸ ῥόδον and ὁ ἄνθρωπος are the subjects, ϑάλ-
λοι and θνητός ἐστιν», the predicates.
2. The Greek language expresses the relation of ideas partly by
inflection ; 6. g. τὸ ῥόδον Padd-e1, ὁ στρατιώτης μάχ-δτ αι, οἱ στρα-
quotas μάχονται; partly by separate words; 6. g. the tree ts
green, ὁ ἄνϑρωπος θνητός ἐστιν. In this last example, the notion
or idea contained in ὥνθρωπος is connected by ἐστίν to that con-
tained in ϑνητός. |
8. The subject is either a substantive,—a substantive-pronoun or
numeral,—an adjective or participle used as a substantive,—an ad-
verb which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article,—a pre-
position with the Case it governs,—or an infinitive. Indeed, every
word, letter, syllable or combination of words may be considered as
a neuter substantive, and hence can become a subject, the neuter
article being usually prefixed. |
Τὸ ῥόδον ϑάύλλει, the rose blossoms. Ἐγὼ γράφων Τρεῖς ἦλϑον. Ὃ
σοφὸς εὐδαίμων ἐστίν, the wise man is happy. Οἱ πάλαι ἀνδρεῖοι ἧσαν, the an-
cients ware courageous. Οἱ περὶ Μιλτιάδην καλῶς ἐμαχέσαντο. Τὸ δι-
δάσκειν καλόν ἐστιν. Td el σύνδεσμός ἔστιν, the el is a conjunction.
180 SYNTAX.—SUBJECT.-—PREDICATE-—AGREEMENT. [§ 146.
4. The subject is in the nominative.
Rem. 1. The subject is in the Acc. in the construction of the Acc. with the
Inf., see § 172. In indefinite and distributive designations of number, the sub-
ject is expressed by a preposition and the Case it governs; e.g. εἰς τέτταρας
ἦλϑον, about four came; so καϑ' ἑκάστους, singuli, κατὰ ἔϑνη, singulae gentes.
Rem. 2. In the following cases, the subject is not expressed by a separate
word :
(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun, it is not expressed, unless it is
particularly emphatic; 6. g. γράφω, γράφεις, γράφει.
(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro-
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject being
in a measure contained in the predicate, or, at least, indicated by it and hence
readily known; 6. g. ἐπεὶ ol πολέμιοι ἀνῆλθον, ἐκῆρυ ξε (sc. ὁ κήρυξ, the her-
ald proclaimed) τοῖς "Ἔλλησι παρασκενάσασϑαι. 80. σημαίνει τῇ σώλπιγγι,
ἐσάλπιγξεν (sc. ὁ σαλπικτής, the trumpeter gives the signal with the trumpet). So
also ὕει, ἃ rains, vides, tt snows, βροντᾷ, ἃ thunders, ἀστράπτει, sc. ὁ
Ζεύς, it lightens, are to be explained.
(c) When the subject is easily supplied from the context; thus, ©. g. in ἘΠῚ
expressions as φασί, λέγουσι, etc., the subject ἄνϑρωποι is regularly omitted.
Rem. 3. The indefinite pronouns, one, they, are commonly expressed by τὶς,
or by the third Pers. Pl. Act., 6. g. λέγουσι, φασί, or by the third Pers. Sing.
Pass., e. g. λέγεται, or by the personal Pass., 6. g. φιλοῦμαι, φιλῇ, they love me,
you, εἴα.) or by the second Pers. Sing., particularly of the Opt. with dv, e.g
φαίης ἄν, dicas, you may say, one may, can say.
5. The predicate is either a verb, e. g. τό ῥόδον ὃ ἀλλ a4, or an
adjective, substantive, numeral or pronoun in connection with εἶναι.
In this relation εἶναι is called a copula, since it connects the adjec-
tive or substantive with the subject so as to form one thought ; δ g.
τὸ ῥόδον καλόν ἔστιν. Κῦρος ἣν βασιλεύς. Σὺ ned.
πάντων πρῶτος. Οἱ ἄνδρες ἧσαν τρεῖς. Τοῦτο τὸ πρᾶγμά
ἐστι τόδε. Without the copula εἶναι, these sentences would stand
τὸ ῥόδον --- καλόν. Κῦρος --- βασιλεύς, etc., and of course would
express no thought.
Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish the use of εἶναι, when it expresses a
distinct independent idea of itself, that of beng, existence, abiding, etc., ὁ. g. ἔστε
ϑεός, there is a God, God is, exists, from the use of the same word as a copula.
In the former sense it can be connected with an adverb; 6. g. Σωκράτης ἦν de?
σὺν τοῖς νέοις; καλῶς, κακῶς ἔστιν, tt is well, ill, etc.
§ 146. Agreement.
1. The finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in number
and person; the predicative* or attributive adjective, participle,
* When the adjective belongs to the predicate, and is used in describing what
is said of the subject, it is called predieatiwe ; but when it merely ascribes seme
§ 146. | SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT. 181
pronoun or numeral, and the predicative substantive, or the sub-
stantive in apposition (when it denotes a person), agree with the
subject in gender, number and Case (nominative).
’Eyo γράφω, σὺ γράφεις, οὗτος γράφει. Ὃ ἄνϑρωπος ϑνητός ἐστιν. ‘H ἀρετὴ
καλή ἐστιν. Τὸ πρᾶγμα αἰσχρόν ἐστιν. Οἱ "Ἕλληνες πολεμικώτατοι ἧσαν. Ὁ
καλὸς παῖς, ἡ σοφὴ γυνῆ, τὸ μικρὸν τέκνον. Κῦρος ἣν βασιλεύς ; here the pre-
dicate βασιλεύς is masculine, because the subject is masculine. Τύμῦρις ἦν
βασίλεια ; here the predicate is feminine, because the subject is feminine. Ké-
ρος, ὁ βασιλεύς, Τόμυρις, ἡ βασίλεια.
2. As εἶναι, when a copula, takes two nominatives, viz. one οὗ
the subject and one of the predicate, so also the following verbs,
which do not of themselves express a complete predicative idea,
take two nominatives: ὑπάρχειν, to be, γίγνεσθαι, to become, φῦναι, to
arise, spring from, to be, αὐξάγνεσϑαι, to grow, μένειν, to remain, κα-
ταστῆναι (from καϑίστημι), to stand, δοκεῖν, gorxévas and φαίνεσθαι,
to appear, önlovodas, to show one’s self, καλεῖσϑαι, ὀνομάζεσϑαι and
λέγεσθαι, to be named, a&xovew, to hear one’s self called, to be named —
(like Lat. audire), αἱρεῖσϑαι, ἀποδείκνυσϑαι and xgiveodas, to be
chosen something, νομίζεθαι, to be considered something, and other
. verbs of this nature.
Ὁ Κῦρος ἐγένετο βασιλεὺς τῶν Περσῶν, Cyrus became king of the Persians.
Διὰ τούτων ὁ Φίλιππος ηὐ ξή ϑη μέγας, by these means Philip grew great. ’AA-
κιβιάδης ἡιρέϑη στρατηγός. ᾿Αντὶ φίλων καὶ ξένων νῦν κόλακες καὶ ϑεοῖς
ἐχϑροὶ ἀκούουσιν (audiunt), instead of friends, etc., they (hear themselves called
.are called flatterers and enemies of the gods.
Remark. Instead of the second Nom., several of these verbs are also con-
nected with adverbs; then they express a complete predicative idea; ὁ. g. τὸ
ἄνϑος καλῶς αὐξάνεται, the flower grows beautifully. Thus, the verbs yiy-
veodac and φῦναι particularly, are connected with the adverbs diya, χωρίς,
"ἑκάς, ἐγγύς, ἅλις; e.g. τοῖς ᾿Αϑηναίων στρατηγοῖς ἐγίγνοντο δίχα al γνῶμαι,
the views of the Athenian commanders were divided; τὰ πράγματα οὕτω πέφυ-
κεν, the affairs were of such a nature.
LXXV. Zxercises for Translation from English into Greek.
(§§ 145 and 146).
Piety is the beginning of every virtue. To mortal men God is (a) refuge.
The wise strive after virtue. Learning (to learn) is agreeable both to the youth
and to the old man. Before the door stood about four thousand soldiers. The
(maxim), know (aor.) thyself, is everywhere useful. The general commanded
(aor.) (them) to hold (their) spears upon (elc) the right shoulder, till the trum-
uality to the substantive with which it agrees, it is called attributive ; ©. ξ in
6 expression 6 dyaduc ἀνῆρ (the good man), ἀγαϑός is attributive, but in ὁ ἀνήρ
ἐστι ἀγαϑός (the wan is good), it is predicative—Te.
16
482 SYNTAX.— AGREEMENT. -[§ 147.
peter should give a signal (with) the trumpet. The herald made (aor.) procla-
mation to the soldiers to prepare themselves for (eic) battle. We admire brave
soldiers. Without self-control we can practise (aor.) nothing goog. Semiramis
was queen of Assyria. Socrates always passed his time in public. After (μετά,
0. acc.) death, the soul separates from the irrational body. It is (= has itself‘)
difficult to understand (aor.) every man thoroughly. The Loves are perhaps
called archers on this account, because the beautiful wound even from a dis-
tance. Tyrtaeus, the poet, was given (aor.) by the Athenians to the Spartans
as a general. The Lacedaemonians were (καταστῆναι) the authors of many ad-
vantages to the Greeks. Minos, who (part.) had ruled very constitutionally and
had been careful to do justice, was appointed (aor.) judge in (κατά, w. gen.)
Hades. Virtue remains ever unchanged. If (ἐάν, w. subj.) one, chosen (to be) a
general, has subjected (aor.) an unjust and hostile city, shall we call him unjust ?
6147. Exceptions to the General Rules of Agree-
| | ment.
(a) The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree with
the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio x a a
σύνεσιν or ad intellectum).
Td πλῆϑος ἐπεβοήϑησαν, the multitude brought assistance ; the verb would reg-
ularly be singular here, but is put in the plural, because πλῆϑος being a collec-
tive substantive, includes many individuals. Ὃ στρατὸς ἀπέβαινον. Τὸ orpa-
rönedov ἀνεχώρουν. Τὸ μειράκιόν ἐστι καλός, the boy is beautiful; here the sub-
stantive is neuter, while the adjective is masculine, agreeing with the subject,
therefore, only in’ sense. Td γυναίκιόν ἐστι καλή.
(b) When the subject is not to be considered as something defi-
nite, but as a general idea or statement, the predicative adjective
is put in the neuter singular, without any reference to the gender
and number of the subject. In English we sometimes join the
word thing or something with the adjective, and sometimes translate
the adjective as if it agreed with the substantive.
Οὐκ ἀγαϑὸν moAvroıpavia" εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω, a plurality of rulers is
not a good thing, etc. Al μεταβολαὶ λυπηρόν, changes are troublesome. Ἢ
μοναρχία κράτιστον.
Rem. 1. When the predicate is a demonstrative pronoun, it agrees with the
subject in gender, number and Case, as in Latin; 6. g. Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀνήρ, this
is the man. Αὕτη ἐστὶ πηγὴ nal ἀρχὴ πάντων τῶν κακῶν. Τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ ἄν-
ϑος. Yet the Greeks very often put the demonstrative in the neuter singnlar,
both when it is a subject and predicate; e.g. Τοῦτό ἐστιν ἡ δικαιοσύνη,
this is justice. Τοῦτό ἐστι πηγὴ καὶ ἀρχὴ γενέσεως.
(c) Verbal adjectives in -τός and -τέος frequently stand in the
neuter plural instead of the singular, when they are used imperson-
ally like the Latin verbal in -dum.
ee .-(-..-. - ee Es
§ 147.] SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT, 188
-Theora ἐστι τοῖς φίλοις, we must trust friends, instead of πιστόν ἐστι. Bo
also, when the subject is contained in an infinitive or in a whole clause, where
in English we use the pronoun it; e. g. Τὴν πεπρωμένην μοῖραν ἀδθνατά
ἐστιν ἀποφυγεῖν καὶ Seq, it is impossible even for God to escape the destined fate.
AAG ἐστιν (it is evident) ὅτι dei Eva γέ τινα ἡμῶν βασιλέα γενέσϑαι.
(d) A subject in the neuter plural is connected with a verb in the
singular.
Ta ζῶα τρέχει. Τὰ πράγματά tore καλά. Kaxod ἀνδρὸς δῶρα
ὄνησιν οὐκ ἔχει.
Rem. 2. When the subject in the neuter plural denotes persons or living be-
ings, the verb is often put in the plurel, to render the personality more promi-
nent; 6. g. τὰ τέλη (magistracy, magistrates) τοὺς στρατιώτας ἐξέπεμψαν. This
is also the case, when the idea of individuality or plurality is to be made particu-
larly prominent; 6. g. davepa ἦσαν ὑποχωρούντων καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων
ἴχνη πολλά (many tracks appeared).
(e) A dual subject is very often connected with a plural predi-
cate.
Δύο ἄνδρε ἐμαχέσαντο. ᾿Αδελφὼ δύο ἧσαν καλοί.
Rem. 3. The dual is not always used, when two objects are spoken of, but
only when they are of the same kind, either naturally connected, e. g. möde,
χεῖρε, Gre, two feet, etc., or such as are considered as standing in a close and
mutual relation, e. g. ἀδελφώ, two brothers.
Rem. 4. A feminine substantive in the dual has its attributive in the mascu-
line dual; 6. g. ἄμφω τὼ πόλεε ; here τῶ (masculine) agrees with πόλεε (femi-
nine), and so in the other examples. To γυναῖκε. "Ἄμφω τούτω τὼ ἡμέρα.
Toiv yevectow. Τ᾽ ούτω τὼ τέχνα.
(f) When the predicate is a superlative, and stands in connection
with a genitive, the gender of the superlative is commonly like that
of the subject, as in Latin, more seldom like that of the genitive.
Φϑόνος χαλεπώτατός ἐστι τῶν νόσων. Ὁ ἥλιος πάντων λαμπρό-
τατός ἐστιν. Sol omnium rerum lucidissimus est.
LXXVI. Exerecises on § 147.
The army of the enemy retired. The people of the Athenians believe that
(acc. w. inf.) Hipparchus, the tyrant, was killed (aor.) by Harmodius and Aris-
togiton. Envy is something hateful. Drunkenness is something burdensome
tomen. Inactivity is indeed sweet, but inglorious and base. Beautiful indeed
is prudence and justice, but difficult and laborious. To learn from (παρά, w.
gen.) (our) ancestors, is the best instruction. Together with the power, the pride
of man also increases. Money procures men friends and honors. Afflictions
often become lessons to men. The misfortunes of neighbors serve (= become)
as (εἰς) a warning to men. The Athenian (of the Athenians) courts of justice,
misled by a plea, often put to death the innocent (= not doing wrong), while
(dé) they often acquitted the guilty (= wrong-doers), either moved to sympathy
184 SYNTAX.—AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. [§ 147%.
(sympathizing) by (ἐκ) the plea, or because the guilty had spoken (aor.) grace-
fully. The two long roads lead to (eig) the city. The Spartan youths, in the
streets, kept their hands within the mantle. The enemy possessed themselves of
two great and magnificent cities. The eagle is the swiftest of all birds. Virtue
is the fairest of all blessings.
$147. Agreement when there are several subjects.
1. Two or more subjects require the verb or copula to be plural.
When the subjects are of like gender, the adjective is of the same
gender, and in the plural; but when the subjects are of a different
gender, then, in case of persons, the masculine takes. precedence of
the feminine and neuter, and the feminine of the neuter; but in
case of things, the adjective is often in the neuter plural, without
reference to the gender of the substantives.
Ὁ Φίλιππος καὶ ὁ ᾿Αλέξανδρος πολλὰ καὶ ϑαυμαστὰ ἔργα ἀπεδεί-
ξαντο. Ὁ Σωκράτης καὶ ὁ Πλάτων ἧσαν σοφοί. Ἥ μήτηρ «az
ἢ ϑυγάτηρ hoav καλαΐ. ἫἪ ὀργὴ καὶ ἡ ἀσυνεσια εἰσὶ κακαΐ.
Ὁ ἀνὴρ καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἀγαϑοί εἰσιν. Ἢ γυνὴ καὶ τὰ τέκνα üyadai
εἶσιν. Ὥς εἶδε πατέρα τε καὶ μητέρα καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυ-
ναῖκα αἰχμαλώτους γεγενημένους, ἐδάκρυσεν. Ἢ ἀγορὰ καὶ τὸ πρυ-
τανεῖον Παρίῳ λίϑῳ ἠσκημένα ἦν. Λίϑοι τε καὶ πλίνϑοι καὶ ξύλα
καὶ κέραμος ἀτάκτως ἐῤῥιμμένα οὐδὲν χρῆσιμ ἃ ἐστιν.
Ren. 1. Sometimes the verb and adjective agree, in form, with the nearest
subject; this is particularly the case, when the predicate precedes the subjects ;
e. g. φιλεῖ oe ὁ πατὴρ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ and ἀγαϑός ἐστιν ὁ πατὴρ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ.
Sometimes where the verb follows different subjects, it agrees with the first, the
other subjects being thereby made subordinate; e.g. βασιλεὺς de καὶ οἱ συν
αὐτῷ διώκων εἰσπίπτει.
2. When several subjects of different persons are connected, the
first person takes precedence of the second and third, but the second
of the third; and the verb is put in the plural.
"Ey καὶ σὺ γράφομεν, ego et tu scribimus ; ἐγὼ καὶ ἐκεῖνος γράφομεν, ego et ille
scribimus ; ἐγὼ καὶ σὺ καὶ ἐκεῖνος γράφομεν, ego et tu et rlle scribimus ; σὺ nal ἐκεῖ-
νος ypagere, tu αἱ tlle scribitis ; ἐγὼ καὶ ἐκεῖνοι γράφομεν, σὺ Kal ἐκεῖνοι ypüdere,
ἡμεῖς καὶ ἐκεῖνοι γράφομεν, ὑμεῖς καὶ ἐκεῖνος γράφετε.
Rem. 2. In addition to a subject-nominative which expresses the idea of plu-
rality, there is often one or more denoting the parts of which the first is com-
posed (σχῆμα! καϑ᾽ ὅλον καὶ μέρος); e.g.ol στρατιῶται ol μὲν ἠναντιῶ-
ϑησαν τοῖς πολεμίοις, οἱ δὲ ἀπέφυγον, some of the soldiers withstood the enemy,
but the others fled; here στρατιῶται denoting the whole is in the Nom., instead of
being in the Gen. and governed by its parts ol μέν and οἱ dé.
* A construction by which the whole is named, and a part is put in wine
tion with the whole, instead of the whole being in the Gen. and governed by a
word denoting a part--TR. -
§ 146.] SYNTAX.—-THE ARTICLE. 185
LXXVIL Exercises on $ 147».
Socrates and Plato were very wise. Nisus and Euryalus were friends (in)
word and deed. Wisdom and health were always the greatest blessings of man
(plur.). The Spartan Cleonymus and Basias (an) Arcadian, two gallant men,
died in the battle fought against (πρός) the Carduchians. Shame and fear are
innate (in) man. I and my brother love thee. You and your friends have
done me many favors. The citizens ran in different directions, every one to
(ἐπί, το. acc.) his own. When (my) friends saw me, they embraced me, one on
one side, the other on the other.* (Of) the citizens, some rejoiced over (ἐπί, το.
dat.) the victory of Philip, others mourned.
§148. The Article.
1. The substantive as a subject, as well as in every other relation,.
takes the article ὁ, ἡ, τό, the, when the speaker wishes to represent
an object as a definite one, and to distinguish it from others of the
same kind. The substantive without the article represents the idea
in a merely general and indefinite manner, without any limitation ;
e. g. ἄνθρωπος, man, i. 6. an individual or some one of the race of
men ; but the subetantive with the article makes the object definite,
indicating that such was the view taken of it by the speaker; e. g.
ὁ ἄνθρωπος, i. e. the man whom I am considering, or have in view,
and whom I consider as a different individual from the rest of men.
So φιλοσοφία, philosophy in general, ἡ φιλοσοφία, philosophy as a
particular science, or a particular branch of philosophy.
Rem. 1. The article is also used, where one object is to be distinguished from
or contrasted with, another of a different kind; e. g. πόλεμος οὐκ ἔστιν dvev
κεμδύνων, war is not without danger; but ὁ πόλεμος οὐκ ἄνευ κινδύνων, ἡ δ᾽
εἰρήνη ἀκίνδυνος ; here πόλεμος takes the article because it is contrasted with
€, δ
τ 2. The substantive, as a predicate, usually omits the article, the idea
conveyed by it being mostly of a general nature; e.g. vd ἦ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο,
day became wiGut, ἐμπόριον & ἣν τὸ χωρίον, and the place was an EMPORIUM ;
—but if the predicate denotes something definite, before mentioned or well
known, it takes the article; e. g. συνεβάλλετο τὸν Ὀρέστην τοῦτον εἶναι,
he concluded that this was ORESTES (the one before mentioned).
2. Hence the article is also used to denote the whole compass of
the idea, since the speaker considers an object as the representative
of all others of the same class, and therefore as expressing a definite
whole; e.g.0 ἄνθρωπος ϑνητός ἐστιν, man (1. 6. all men) ts
mortal; ἡ ἀνδρεία καλή ἐστιν, i. 6. everything which is under-
* ἄλλος ἄλλοϑεν, aliue aliunde.
ki 16* Ξ
186 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [$ 148.
stood by the term ὠνδρδία ;-- ὁ γάλα ἐστὶν ἡδύ, milk is sweet, i.e.
milk in general, all milk.
‘Rem. 3. When the English indefinite article a or an, denotcs merely the class
‘to which a particular thing belongs, the Greek uses the substantive alone with-
out the article; 6. g. a man, ἄνϑρωπος.
Rem. 4. Comion nouns sometimes omit the article, where according to No.
1, it would be used. Such omission occurs, (a) with appellations denoting kin-
dred or relationship, and the like, where the definite relation is obvious without
the article; e.g. πατήρ, μήτηρ, υἱός, ἀδελφός, παῖδες, γονεῖς, ἀνήρ (husband),
γυνή (wife), etc.;—(b) when two or more independent substantives are united to
form one whole; 6. g. παῖδες καὶ γυναῖκες, πόλις καὶ οἰκίαι ;—(c) when common
nouns are used as, or instead of, proper nouns; 6. g. ἥλιος, οὐρανύς, ἄστυ, used
of Athens, πόλις, of a particular city, known from the context, γῇ, of a particular
country, βασιλεύς, of a particular king, commonly the king of Persia ;—(d) when
common nouns which are usually specific, and would take the article, are used
in an abstract sense; 6. g. ἡγεῖσϑαι ϑεούς, to believe in gods, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου ἰέναι, to
ride horse-back, ἐπὶ δεῖπνον ἐλϑεῖν, to come to supper, i. 6. to eat.
Rem. 5. Abstract nouns, the names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and
vices, generally omit the article, when they are taken in their abstract sense;
e. g. ἀλήϑεια, «σωτηρία, σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, ἐπιστήμη, εὐσέβεια, ἀσέβεια,
κακία; hut if one class of abstracts is to be distinguished from another, or the
whole compass of a science, etc. is intended, the article is used.
8. The article very often takes the place of the possessive pro-
noun, when it is connected with such substantives as naturally be-
long to a particular person mentioned in the sentence.
Ol γονεῖς τὰ τέκν α στέργουσιν, parents love THEIR children. Küpöc re xata-
πηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος τὸν ϑώρακα ἐνέδυ nal ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν Im-
πον τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε, C. having leaped down from HIS
chariot, put on 118 breast-plate, etc.
Ren. 6. The article is often used in a distributive sense; the article is here to
be explained by its giving individuality to the noun with which it is connected ;
8. g. ὁ Κῦρος ὑπισχνεῖται δώσειν τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ τοῦ μηνὸς τῷ στρατιεώ-
ty, C. promises to give three half-Darics, a (EACH) month to EACH soldier.
4. The article, being originally a demonstrative pronoun, is of-
ten used where an object, at first stated indefinitely, is named a
second time; for the same reason it is used, when the speaker pornis
to an object.
᾿ς Ὁ Κῦρος δίδωσιν αὐτῷ μυρίους δαρεικούς. 'O δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρυσίον, C.
gives him ten thousand Darics ; but he taking THE (THAT) money — , where χρυσίον
has the article, because it refers to the preceding δαρεικούς. Ξενίας ἀγῶνα ἔϑη-
we: ἐθεώρει δὲ τὸν ἀγῶνα Κῦρος. ‘Trip τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἣν, τῶν δὲ ix-
πέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσϑη, where λόφος is the same as the preceding γήλοφος.
Φέρε μοι, ὦ παῖ, τὸ βίβλιον, THE (THAT) book.
5. Proper names as such, i. e. so far as in themselves they denote
§ 148.] SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. 187
individuals, do not take the article; 6. g. Σωκράτης ἔφη. Ἐνίχησαν
Θηβαῖοι Auxedaınoviovg. Mn οἴεσϑε une Kepooßiin-
τὴν ὑπὲρ Χεῤῥονήσου, μήτε Φίλιππον ὑπὲρ Augıno-
λεω ς πολεμήσειν, ὅταν ἴδωσιν ἡμᾶς μηδενὸς τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ἐφιεμέ-
φους. They, however, take it, when they have been mentioned and
are afterwards referred to, or even when they have not been pre-
viously mentioned, if they are to be represented as well known;
e. g. Ano τοῦ Ἰλισσοῦ λέγεται ὁ Βορέας τὴν Rosidviay
ἁρπάσαι.
Rem. 7. Proper names, even when an adjective agrees with them, do not com-
monly have the article; 6. g. σοφὸς Σωκράτης, the wise Socrates. The article is
also omitted with a proper name, when a noun in apposition having the article,
follows it; e.g. Κροῖσος, ὁ τῶν Λυδῶν βασιλεύς. The names of rivers are
usually placed, as adjectives, between the article and the word ποταμός ; 6. g.
ὁ Πηνειὸς ποταμός, the river Peneus.
6. When adjectives and participles are used as substantives, they
regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The English, in
such a case, either employs an adjective, used substantively, e. g.
οἱ ἀγαϑοί, the good, or a substantive, 6. g. τὸ ἀγαϑόν, the advantage,
the good, 0 λέγων, the speaker, or resolves the participle, which is
equivalent to ἐκεῖνος ὅς (ἐδ, gut), by he, who, which, etc. In Greek,
this use of the participle, in all its tenses, is very frequent; e. g.
Ὁ πλεῖστα ὠφελῶν (== ἐκεῖνος ὅς ὠφελεῖ τὸ κοινὸν μεγίστων
ειμὼν ἀξιοῦται, he who (whoever) benefits the state most, is worthy of
the highest honors; ὁ πλεῖστα φὁλήσας (= ἐκεῖνος ὅς ὠφέλησε)
τὸ κοινὸν u. τ. ἠξιώσατο; 6 ml. ὠφδλήσων τ. x. μ. τ. ἀξιωϑή-
σεται. Πολλοὺς ἕξομεν τοὺς ἑτοίμως συναγωνιζομένους. But if
the adjectives are to express only a part of the whole, the article is
omitted; 6. g. κακὰ καὶ αἰσχρὰ ἔπραξεν. The infinitive also has
the article, when it is to be considered as a substantive; 6. g. τὸ
γράφειν.
7. Aiiot signifies others, οἱ ἄλλοι, the others, the rest, i. 6. all
besides those who have been mentioned; ἡ ἄλλη Ἑλλάς, the rest of
Greece. Ἕτερος, alter, takes the article (ὁ @z29 09), to denote
one of two definitely; so 64 @7 289 01, the one of two parties. IIo}-
A 0: signifies many, οἱ πολλοί, the many, the multitude, the mass
(in distinction from the parts of the whole); οἱ πλείους, the
greater part (in distinction from the smaller part of the whole); ot
πλεῖστοι, the most (of a preponderance in number).
8. The Greek can change adverbs of place and time, more sel-
dom of quality, into adjectives or substantives, by prefixing the ar-
188 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. ~ [3 148.
ticle. In like manner, a préposition with its Case may be consid-
ered as an adjective.
H ἄνω πόλις, the upper city; ὁ μεταξὺ τόπος, the intervening place ; ol ἐνθάδε
ἄνϑρωποι or ol ἐνθάδε; ὁ viv βασιλεύς, ol πάλαι σοφοὶ ἄνδρες, ol τότε, ἡ al»
ρίον (sc. ἡμέρα), ὁ dei, the ever enduring; ol πάνυ τῶν στρατιωτῶν, the best of the
soldiers ; ἡ ἄγαν ἀμέλεια, the too great carelessness; ὁ πρὸς τοὺς Πέρσας πόλεμος,
the Persian war; 7) ἐν Χεῤῥονήσῳ τυραννίς.
9. When a substantive having the article has attributive exple-
tives connected with it, viz. an adjective, adjective pronoun or nu-
meral, a substantive in the genitive, an adverb, or a preposition
with its Case (No. 8), then in respect to the position of the article,
the two following cases must be distinguished :
(a) The attributive is connected with its substantive so as to ex-
press a single idea; e. g. the good man = the worthy ; the wise man
a=: the sage, and denotes an object which is contrasted with others
of the same kind, by means of the accompanying attributive. In
this case, the attributive stands either between the article and the
substantive, or is placed after the substantive with the article re-
peated.
O ἀγαϑὸς ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαϑός (in opposition to the bad man); of πλού-
σιοι πολῖται or οἱ πολῖται ol πλούσιοι (in opposition to the poor citizens); ὁ
τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων δῆμος or ὁ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων (in opposition to another peo-
ple) ; οἱ νῦν ἄνθρωποι or οἱ ἄνϑρωποι οἱ viv; ὁ πρὸς τοὺς Πέρσας πόλεμος or ὁ
πόλεμος ὁ πρὸς τοὺς Πέρσας (the Persian in opposition to other wars). In all
these examples the emphasis is on the attributive: the good man, the rich citizens,
the Athenian people, men of the present time, the Persian war.
(b) The attributive is not connected with its substantive to ex-
press a single idca, but is to be considered as the predicate of an
abridged subordinate clause; here the attributive is not contrasted.
with another object of the same kind, but with itself, inasmuch as it
is designed to show that an object is to be considered, in respect to
a certain property, by itself, without reference to another. ‘The
English in this case uses the indefinite article with a singular sub-
stantive, but with a plural substantive, omits it entirely. Here the
adjective without the article is placed either after the article and
substantive, or before the article and substantive.
Ὁ ἀνὴρ dyadic or ἀγαϑὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, a good man = ἀγαϑὸς ὦν, the man
who is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good. Ol ἄνϑρωποι μισοῦσι τὸν ἄνδρα
κακόν or κακὸν τὸν ἄνδρα, they hate a bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inas-
much as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, τὸν κακὸν ἄνδρα or τὸν ἄνδρα
τὸν κακόν, the bad man, in distinction from. the good; hence, τοὺς μὲν dya Pod,
2 δ we. un ws τ
§ 148.] SYNTAX.-—THE ARTICLE. 189
ἀνϑρώπους ἀγαπῶμεν, τοὺς δὲ κακοὺς μισοῦμεν). Ὁ βασιλεὺς ἡδέως χαρίζεται
τοῖς πολίταις ἀγαϑοῖς, good citizens, i. 6. if or because they are good; (on the
contrary, τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς πολίταις or τοῖς πολίταις τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς, good citizens, in
distinction from bad citizens). Ὃ ϑεὸς τὴν ψυχὴν κρατίστην τῷ ἀνϑρώπῳ
ἐνέφυσεν, God has implanted in man a soul, which is the most excellent or perfect.
Ol ὑπὸ τοῦ hAlov καταλαμπόμενοι τὰ χρώματα μελάντερα ἔχουσιν, have a Wacher
skin; the blackness of the skin is the consequence of the καταλάμπεσϑαι ὑπὸ
τοῦ ἡλίου.
Rem. 8. When a substantive with the article has a genitive connected with it,
the position under (a) occurs, only when the substantive with its genitive forms
@ contrast with another object of the same kind; 6. g. ὁ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων δῆμος or
ὁ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων (the Athenians, in contrast with another people); then
the emphasis is on the genitive. On the contrary, the genitive without the arti-
cle of the governing substantive is placed before or after that substantive, when
this latter substantive expresses a part of what is denoted by the substantive in
the genitive, the emphasis then being on the governing substantive; e. g. ὁ δῆ-
μος τῶν ’Adnvalwv or τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων ὁ δῆμος, the people, and not the nobility —
When the genitive of substantive-pronouns is used instead of the possessive pro-
nouns, the reflexives ἑαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, etc. are placed according to No. 9, (a);
e. g. ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ πατήρ or ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ, etc.; but the simple personal pro-
nouns μοῦ, σοῦ, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the substan-
tive which has the article; e.g. ὁ πατήρ μον or μοῦ ὁ πατήρ, ὁ πατήρ σου or σοῦ
6 πατήρ, ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ( αὐτῆς) or αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς) ὁ πατήρ, my, thy, his (ejus)
father, ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν or ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὑτῶν ὁ πατήρ, our, your, their
(eorum) father. In the Sing. and Dual, the enclitic forms are always used.
Rem. 9. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest
with the adjectives ἄκρος, μέσος, ἔσχατος. When the position mentioned
under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attribute forms a contrast with other
objects of the same kind ; 6. g. 7 μέση πόλις, the middle city, in contrast with other
cities; ἡ ἐσχάτη νῆσος, the most remote island, in contrast with other islands.
When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) occurs, the substantive
is contrasted with itself, since the attributive defines it more clearly. In this
last case, we usually translate these adjectives into English by substantives, and
the substantives with which they agree as though they were in the genitive; 6. g.
ἐπὶ τῷ ὄρει ἄκρῳ or én’ ἄκρῳ τῷ ὄρει, on the top of the mountain, properly on the
. Mountain where it is the highest; ἐν μέσῃ τῇ πόλει or ἐν τῇ πόλει μέσῃ, tn the
middle of the city; tv ἐσχάτῃ τῇ νήσῳ or ἐν νήσῳ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ, on the border or edge
of the island. _
Rem. 10. In like manner, the word μόνος has the position mentioned under
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive; e. g.
ὁ μόνος παῖς, the ONLY son; on the contrary, the position montioned under (b),
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate; 6. g. Ὁ mais μόνος or
μόνος ὁ παῖς παίζει, the boy plays alone (without company); whereas ὁ μόνος παῖς
would mean, the ONLY boy plays.
10. Further; on the use of the article with a substantive which has
an adjective agreeing with it, the following things are to be noted :
190 SYNTAX.—THE ARTICLE. [$ 148.
(a) The artiele is used with a substantive which has an adjective
pronoun connected with it, when the object is to be represented as
a definite one; the adjective pronoun is then placed between the
article and the substantive, e. g. ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ; on the contrary,
ἐμὸς ἀδελφός, a brother of mine (undetermined which), &uog παῖς, a
. child of mine, but ὁ ἐμὸς sais, my child, a definite one, or the only
one.
(Ὁ) The article is used with a substantive, with which τοιοῦτος,
«οιός δε, τοσοῦτος, τηλικοῦτος, agree, when the quality
or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as belonging to
a definite object, or to a whole class of objects previously named.
The article commonly stands before the pronoun and substantive;
e. δ. ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ ϑαυμαστός ἐστιν, τὰ τοιαῦτα πράγματα καλά
ἐστιν. On the contrary, the article must be omitted, when the ob-
ject is indefinite, any one of those who are of such a nature, or are
80 great ; 6. g. τοιοῦτον ἄνδρα οὐκ ἂν Enaivoing, you would not praise
such a man.
(ὁ) When πᾶς, πάντες belong to a substantive, the following
cases must be distinguished :
(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as
altogether a general one, the article is not used; 6. g. πᾶς ἄνϑρω-
‚105, every man, i. €. every one to whom the predicate man belongs,
πάντες ἄνϑρωποι, all men. Here, πᾶς in the singular, generally
signifies each, every.
(8) When the substantive to which πᾶς, πάντες belong, is to be
considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes the arti-
cle,. which is placed according to No. 9, (a); 6. g. 7 πᾶσα γῆ, the
whole earth, oi πάντερ πολῖται, all the citizens without exception, the
citizens as a whole or body. This usage is more seldom than that
under (a). The same construction oecurs also with ὅλος, but it
is still more rare than with πᾶς. Here the singular wag always has
the sense of the whole, all.
(y) When πὰς is joined with a definite object having the article,
merely for the purpose of a more full explanation, but withont any
special emphasis, its position is according to No. 9, (b); 6. g. οἱ
στρατιῶται εἷλον TO στρατόπεδον ἅπανον ἅπαν τὸ OF OE
τόπεδον; οἱ στρατιῶται πάντες or πάντες οἱ στρα-
sıozaı καλῶς ἐμαχέσαντο. This is by far the most frequent use
of πᾶς, πάντες. The word ὅλος also is usually eonstructed in the
same manner, when connected with a substantive having the arti-
8. 148. ] SINLAX.—- THE ARTICLE. 191
cle; 6. g. διὰ τὴν πολιν ὅλην or διὰ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν, through the whole
eity, i. e. simply through the city (not διὰ τὴν ὅλην πόλιν, which
would signify through the WHOLE city).
(d) When ἕκαστο ς, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the
article is omitted, as with πᾶς in the sense of each, every, when the
idea expressed by the substantive is considered as altogether gene-
ral; 6. 5. x00° ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, every day, on all days; when, on
the contrary, the idea contained in the substantive is to be made
prominent, then the article is joined with it, and is always placed
according to No. 9, (b); 6. g. xaek τὴν ἡμέραν ἑκάστην, or
usually xa? ἑκάστην tH» ἡμέραν, every single, individual day.
(e) When äxa&zegos, each of two, ἄμφω and ἀμφότερος,
both, belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here
only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken of. The
article is here placed according to No. 9, (b); e.g. ἐπὶ «ὧν πλευ-
ρῶν ἑκατέρων or ini ἑκατέρων τῶν πλευρῶν, τὰ ὦτα
ἀμφότεραοι ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα, ἀμφοῖν τοῖν χεροῖν
or τοῖν» χεροῖν» ἀμφοῖν.
(f) When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the article
is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is indefinite; 6. g.
«ρεῖς ἄνδρες ἦλϑον ; the substantive, on the contrary, takes the ar-
ticle which is placed,—(a) according to No. 9, (a), when the sub-
stantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea of a unt-
ted whole; 6. g. οἱ τῶν βασιλέων οἰνοχόοι διδόασι τοῖς τρισὶ
δακτύλοις ὀχοῦντες τὴν φιάλην, i.e. with the three fingers (the
three generally used) ; indeed the article is very frequently used,
when a preeeding substantive without the article, but with a cardi-
nal agreeing with it, is afterwards referred to ;—(f) according to
No, 9, (b), when the numeral is joined with a definite object merely
to define it more explicitly, without any special emphasis ; eg.
ἐμαχέσαντο οἱ peta, Περικλέους ὁπλῖταε χίλιοι or χίλιοι οἱ μετὰ Π.
ὁπλῖται.
(5) Further; substantives to which the demonstratives οὗ τος,
ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος and « ὑτός, tpse, belong, also regularly take the
article ; ; but the article has only the position of No. 9, (Ὁ); 6. g.
οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or 6 ἀνὴρ οὗτος, not ὁ οὗτος ἀνήρ,
ἥδε ἡ γνώμη or ἡ γνώμη ἥδε,
ἐχεῖνος ὁ ἀνήρ OT ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐκεῖνος,
αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεύς or ὁ βασιλεὺς αὐτός, but ὁ αὐτὸς βασιλεύς sig-
nifies the same king.
192 SYNTAX. —THE ARTICLE. [$ 148.
Rex. 11. Tho article is omitted,—{a) when the pronoun is the subject, but
the substantive the predicate; 6. g. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἀνδρὸς ἀρετῆ, this is the virtue of
the man ; so there is a difference between τούτῳ τῷ διδασκάλῳ χρῶνται, they have
this teacher, and τούτῳ did. xp., they have this man as or for a teacher ;—(b) when
the substantive is a proper name; 6. g. οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, αὐτὸς Σωκράτης.
LXXVIII. Exercises on § 148.
Avarice is (the) root of every vice. Good education is (the) source and root
of excellence. Wisdom is worthy of all diligence. Man has understanding.
Strive, O young man, after wisdom. A kid, standing upon (ἐπί, w. gen.) a house,
‘reviled, when he saw a wolf passing by, and railed at him. But the wolf said:
Ho there,* you do not revile me, but the place. An honorable war is better
(more desirable) than a shameful peace. Too great ease is sometimes injurious.
In the war against (πρός) the Persians, the Greeks showed themselves very
brave. The Athenians, persuaded by Alcibiades to strive (aor.) for power upon
(κατά, το. acc.) the sea, lost (aor.) even their dominion upon the land. The
wealth of Tantalus and the dominion of Pelops.and the power of Eurystheus
are celebrated by the ancient poets. The halcyon, a sea-bird, utters a mournfal
cry. Those who were born of the same parents and have grown up in the same
house and have been beloved by the same parents, those indeed (δή) are of all the
most intimate. Thy mind directs thy body, as it chooses. I saw thy friend.
Through the park in Celaenae flows the river Maeander. On the top of the tree
sits a bird. On (xara, το. acc.) Caucasus is a rock, that has (part.) cireamference
of ten stadia. The city lies on (ἐν) the edge of the island. The words of those,
who (οἱ ἄν, το. subj.) practise truth, often avail more than the violence of others.
If (ἐάν, w. subj.) such men promise one anything, they perform nothing less than
others who immediately give. The earth bears and nourishes everything fair
and everything good. Among all men it is an established custom, that (acc. w.
inf.) the elder begin every word and work. The generals resolved to put to
death (aor.) not only those (the) present, but all the Mytilenaeans. Most of the
cities sent, every year, (as) a memorial of former kindness, the first fruits of
their grain to the Athenians. Every day, deserters came to Cyrus. Mysus
came in, holding iu each of his two hands a small shield. The peltastae ran
(aor.) to (ἐπί, w. acc.) each of the two wings. When Darius was sick and ex-
pecting the end of (his) life, he desired that (acc. w. inf.) both his sons might be
present before him (sibi). Both the ears of the slave were bored through. Both
the cities were destroyed by the enemy. These works are very agreeable to me.
That man is very wise. Dionysius, the tyrant of Syracuse, founded in Sicily a
city directly (αὐτός) under the mountain of Aetna, and named it Adranum. Ac-
cording to these laws the judge decides. This is a sufficient defence. This is
true justice. Not only the soldiers, but the king himself fought very bravely.
This they employ (as) a mere pretence. This Charmides recently met me,
dancing. Cyrus sent to Cilicia the soldiers, that Menon had, and Menon, the
Thessalian, himself. The time of maturity for (dat.) woman is twenty years,
for man, thirty years. The three cities lying on (παρά, w. ace.) the sea were
destroyed by the enemy.
* *Q οὗτος.
§§ 149, 150.] SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. 198
§ 149. Classes of Verbs.
The predicate or verb, in reference to the subject, can be express-
ed in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, which
are indicated by different forms.
1. The subject appears as active; 6. g.0 παῖς γράφει, τὸ ün-
Gos Baijeu—The active form, however, has a two-fold signifi-
cation :
(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is directed,.
is in the accusative, and therefore receives the action; e. g.
τύπτω τὸν παῖδα, γράφω τὴν émotolny.——Transitive verb.
(8) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the subject,
e. g. τὸ ἄνϑος θαάλλδι, or when the verb has an object in the
Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a preposition; e. g. &mı-
ϑυμῶ τῆς ἀρετῆς, χαίρω τῇ σοφίᾳ, ἔρχομαι εἰς τὴν öl. —
Intransitive verb.
2. Again, the subject performs an action whieh is reflected on it-
self; hence the subject is at the same time the object of the action,
i. 6. the actor and the receiver of the action are the same; 6. g. zum-
rouo, I strike myself, Bovievoucs, I advise myself.—Middle or re-
flexive verb.
Rem. 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects oh
each other, 6. g. τύπτονται, they strike each other, dtaxedevovrat, they encosrage
each other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb ἃ reciprocal verb.
8. Lastly, the subject appears as receiving the action; e. g. of
στρατιῶται ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων ἐδιώχϑησαν, the soldiers were pursued.
—Passive verb. _
Rew. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the Greek
has only two tenses, viz. the Fut. and Aor. All. the other forms are indicatetl
by the Mid., inasmuch as the passive action was considered as a reflexive one.
§ 150. Remarks on the Olasses of Verbs.
1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, besides
a transitive signification, have also an intransitive or reflexive sense.
(Comp. the English expressions, J move [Intrans. ] and I move the book
F Trans. ], the tree breaks [Intrans. ] and the ice breaks the trees [ Trans. ],
and the Latin vertere, mutare, declinare) ; thus, 6. g. ἀνάγειν, to draw
back, regredi, διάγειν, to continue, perstare, ἐλαύνειν, to ride, ἐμβάλ-
Lew and εἰςβάλλειν, to fail into or upon, ἐκβάλλειν, to spring forth,
ünoxlivew, declinare, τρέπειν, like vertere, στρέφειν, like mutare,
17
194 SYNTAX.—CLASSES OF VERBS. [§ 150.
ἔχειν in connection with adverbs, e. g. εὖ, κακῶς ἔχειν, bene, male
se habere, τελευτᾷν, to end, to die, and many others.
2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form
both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive signification, but in
the second Aor. an intransitive:
δύω, to wrap up, first Aor. Eöüca, I wra pe up, second Aor. ἔδῦν, 7 went in, ER
Ἰστημι, to place, “ ἔστησα, I “ ἔστην, I stood,
φύω, to produce, -“ ἔφῦσα, {proc ε ἐφῦν, I was produosd,
σκέλλω, tomakedry,* (Eoxnda, I made dry), “ ἔσκλην, 7 withered.
So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form
both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive signification, but
in the second an intransitive :
ἐγείρω, to awake, first Pf. ἐγήγερκα, I have awakened, second Pf. &ypryopa, Tam awake,
GAA DL, to destroy, “ ῥλώλεκα, ] have destroyed, ὄλωλα͵ I have perished,
πείϑω, to persuade, ‘“ πέπεικα, Ihave persuaded, “ πέποιϑα, I trust.
Moreover, some second Perfects of transitive verbs which do not
form a first Perf., have an intransitive signification; e. g. ἄγνυμι, to
break, second Perf. ἔζγα, Jam broken, πήγνυμι, to fasten, πέπηγα, I
am fastened or stand fast, ῥήγνυμε, to rend, ἔῤῥωγα, I am rent, σήπω,
to make rotten, σέσηπα, I am rotten, τήκω, to smelt, e. g. iron, τέτηκα,
Lam smelted, paive, to show, πέφηνα, I appear.
3. On the signification and use of the middle form, the following
are to be noted:
(a) The middie denotes first, an action witch the subject per-
forms directly upon itself, where in English we use the active verb
and the accusative of the reflexive pronoun; 6. g. τύπτομαι, 7 strike
myself, ἐτυψάμην, I struck myself, τύψομαι, I shall strike myself.
This use of the middle is rare. Here belong the following verbs
which are presented in the aorist-form: ἀπέχω, to keep from, ἀποσ-
χέσϑαι, to keep one’s self from, to abstain from; ἀπάγξαι τινά, to
strangle, to hang some one, ἀπάγξασθαι, to strangle or hang one’s self;
τύψασϑαι, κόψασϑαι, to strike one’s self; ἐπιβαλέσϑαι τινί, to throw
or place one’s self upon something, to apply one’s self to something;
σαύσασϑαι, to cease (from παύω, to cause to cease); δείξασϑαι, to
show one’s self; particularly verbs which express an action per-
formed by the subject on his own body: λούσασϑαι (to wash one's
self), νίψασϑαι, ἀλείψασϑαι, χρίσασϑαι, γυμνάσθϑαι, καλύψασϑαι,
κοσμήσασϑαι, ἐνδύσασϑαι, ἐκδύσασϑαι, κείρασϑαι, στεφανώσασθαι,
and the like. With the exception of the above verbs and some
others, this reflexive relation is commonly expressed by the active
form with the accusative of the reflexive pronoun; e. g. ἀπαινοὶν
$150.] SYNTAX.—-CLASSES OF VERBS. 198
ἑαντόν, ἀναρτῷν ἑαυτόν, to make himself dependent on, ἀποκρύα-
Tey δαυτόν, ἐθίζειν ἑαυτόν, παρέχειν ἑαυτόν, ἀπολύειν ἑαυτόν, to free
himself, ἀποσφάττει ἑαυτόν, anoxteisew ἑαυτόν. Then the middle
form has the signification of the passive, thus, ἐπαινεῖσθαι, ἀποκεεί-
ψεσϑαι, ἀποσφάττεσθϑαι, laudart, interfici, juguları ab alio, and al-
so has a passive form for its Aorist and Future.
Rem. 1. In all the middle verbs mentioned above, the action is such as does.
not necessarily refer to the subject; for I can, 6. g. as well wash another as my-
self. But the action may be such as necessarily refers to the subject, inasmuch
as the subject which performs the action, must be considered the same as the
object which receives the action; then the middle form expresses the simple
idea of an intransitive action; this is a frequent use of the middle. Here be-
long particularly very many verbs which express an act or perception of the
mind. Only a very few verbs of this kind have their Aor. with a middle form;
e. g. φυλάξασϑαι, to guard one’s self, to beware (φυλάξαι τινώ, to guard any one),
βουλεύσασθαι, to advise one’s self (βουλεῦσαί τινι, to advise any one), γεύσασϑαι,
to taste (Act., to cause to taste); on the contrary, most verbs of this kind have
their Aor. with a passive form, but have the future in the middle form; e. g.
ἀναμνησϑῆναι, ἀναμνήσεσθαι, to remind one’s self, to remember, recordari (ἀναμνῆ-
gai τινα, to remind any one), αἰσχυνϑῆναι, alcxuveiodat, to be ashamed (aicyivat
τινα, to make ashamed), φοβηϑῆναι, doßnoeodaı, to fear (φοβῆσαΐ τινα, to make
afraid, terrere), πορευϑῆναι, πορεύσεσϑαι, to go, proficisci (πορεῦσαΐ τινα, to cause
one to go, to convey one), περαιωϑῆναι, περαιώσεσϑαι (ποταμόν), to pass over, (me-
ραιῶσαί τινα, to cause to pass over, trajicere), πλαγχϑῆναι, πλάγξεσθϑαι, to wander
about, circumvagari (πλάγξαι τινά, to cause to wander), ἀνιαϑῆναι, ἀνιάσεσθαι, to
afflict one’s self, to be grieved [ἀνιᾶσαΐ τινα, to affitct any one); also διαλυϑῆναι,
διακριϑῆναι, to separate one's self, discedere, ἀπαλλαγῆναι, abire, κοιμηϑῆναι, to
sleep, φανῆναι, apparere, παγῆναι, to congeal, ἐπαρϑῆναι, to raise one’s self, and
many others.
(b) In the second place, the middle form denotes an action which
the subject performs on an object belonging to itself, on one con-
nected with itself or standing in an intimate relation with it. In
English, we commonly use here either a possessive pronoun or a
preposition with a personal pronoun; 6. g. τύπτομαι, ἐετυψάμην τὴν
κεφαλήν, I strike, struck my head (τύπτειν x., to strike the head of
another), λούσασϑαι τοὺς πόδας, to wash one’s own feet (λούειν τ. π.»
to wash the feat of another), ἀποκρύψασϑαι τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, to conceal
one’s own affairs; καταστρέψασθαι γῆν, sibi subjicere terram, to sub-
jugate land for one’s self, ἀναρτήσασϑαί tive, sits devincire, to make
dependent on one’s self, ἀπολύσασϑαί τινα, to loosen for one’s self, to
redeem, πορίσασϑαί τι, siti aliquid comparare, to procure for one’s
self (πορίζειν τί τινι, alit aliquid comparare, to procure something
for another), κετήσασϑαί τι, παρασκευάσασθϑ αἱ τι, sibi comparare, to
196 SENTAX.--OLASSES OF VERBS. - [8 150.
aequire, prepare for one’s self ;. ἀμύνασθαι τοὺς πολεμίους, propul-
sare a se hostes, to keep off the enemy from one's self, ἀπώσασϑαι
κακά, a se propulsare mala. This use of the middle is much the
most frequent.
Rem. 2. As the active can be used, when the subject does not itself perform
an action, but causes it tp be done by another, 6. g. ᾿Αλέξανδρος τὴν πόλιν xa-
πέσκαψεν, caused the city to be destroyed, so also can the middle be used to express
the same idea, yet with this difference, that with the middle the action always
refers in some way to the subject; 6. g. ὁ πατὴρ τοὺς παῖδας édidugaro, which
either signifies, the father educated his own children, or, if it is clear from the con-
text, he caused them to be educated ; keipaodaı, to shave one’s self or to get one's self”
shaved; ᾿Αργεῖοι ἑαυτῶν εἰκόνας ποιησώμενοι ἀνέϑεσαν εἰς Δελφούς. Πα-
ραϑέσϑαι τράπεζαν, to set a table before one's self, or have it set before one’s self.
Rem. 3. The middle form is often used to express reciprocal actions (see § 149,
Rem. I). This is particularly the case with verbs signifying to contend, vie with,
converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or compact ; 6. g. μάχεσθϑαι, to
fight with, ἁμιλλᾶσϑαι, to contend with, ἀγωνίζεσϑαι, to strive, διαλέγεσϑαι, to con-
verse with, ἀσπάζεσϑαι, to salute, ταῦτα συντίϑεσθϑαι, mutually to agree on these
points, σπονδὰς σπένδεσϑαι or ποιεῖσϑαι, to make a treaty (σπονδὰς ποιεῖν signi-
fying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not strictly reciprocal, but
where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily supposes two persons or two
parties, as in questions and answers; e.g. πυνϑάνεσϑαι and Epeodat, to inquire,
ἀποκρίνεσϑαι and ümaueißeodat, to answer, συμβουλεύεσθϑαι, to consult with one,
ask his advice, and ἀνακοινοῦσϑαι, to consult one (ἀνακοινοῦν being especially used
of consulting oracles).
4. From the reflexive signification of the middle, the passive is
derived. Here the subject permits the action to be performed by
another upon itself. Hence the subject of a passive verb always
appears as the receiver of an action; 6. g. μασειγοῦμαι, ζημιοῦμαι
(ὑπό τινος), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be struck, pun-
ished = I am struck, punished (by some one) ; βλάπτομαι, ἀδικοῦμαι,
I suffer injury, injustice ; διδάσκομαι, 1 let myself be instructed, I
receive instruction, I learn, hence ὑπό τινος, from some one == do-
coor ab aliquo ; πείθομαι, I persuade myself, or I permit myself to
be persuaded, ὑπό τινος, by some one == I am persuaded.
5. For two tenses, however, viz. the Fut. and Aor., there are
* separate forms to express ἃ passive action; yet the Aor. Pass. (see
Rem. 2,) of many reflexive and intransitive verbs, ia used instead
of the middie; all the other tenses are expressed by the middle
form. Hence the rule: te Fut. and Aor. Mid. have a reflexive or
intransitive signification, not passive, inasmuch as there are sepa-
rate forms for the Fut. and Aor. Pass.; all the other tenses of the
middle are used at the same time to denote the passive also.
§ 150. ] SYNTAZ.-—OLASSES OF VERBS. 197
Rex. 4. The cause or author of the passive condition or state, is expressed by-
the preposition ὑπό with the Gen.; 6. g. Ol στρατιῶται ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων
ἐδιώχϑησαν, the soldiers were pursued by the enemy. Instead of ὑπό, πὶρός with
the Gen. is used, when at the same time the strong and direct influence of a
person, is to be denoted; e. g. ἀτιμάζεσϑαι, ἀδικεῖσϑαι πρός τινος; also παρά
with the Gen..is used, when the author is, at the same time, to be represented as
the person from whose vicinity or neighborhood, or threugh whose means in-
ternal or external the action has come; hence especially with πέμπεσθαι, dido-
oa, ὠφελεῖσϑαι, συλλέγεσθαι, λέγεσϑαι, onpaiverdat, ἐπιδείκνυσϑαι (demon-
strari); 6. g. Ὁ ἄγγελος ἐπέμφϑη παρὰ βασιλέως, was sent from being near the
king, by the king. Ἥ μεγίστη εὐτυχία τούτῳ τῷ ἀνδρὶ παρὰ ϑεῶν δέδοται. ToA-
λὰ χρήματα Κύρῳ παρὰ τῶν φίλων συνειλεγμένα ἦν.
6. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that not merely the active of
transitive verbs governing an accusative, may be changed into the
personal passive, but also the active of intransitive verbs governing
the Dat. or Gen.
Φϑονοῦμαι ὑπό τινος, Tam envied by some one, invidetur mihi ab aliquo (from
φϑονεῖν τινι, invidere alien). Πιστεύομαι, ἀπιστοῦμαι ὑπό τινος, credi-'
tur, non creditur mihi ab aliquo (from πιστεύειν, ἀπιστεῖν τινι). Kal ἐπιβουλεύ-
οντες, καὶ ἐπιβουλευόμενοι διώξουσι πάντα τὸν χρόνον (from ἐπιβουλεύειν
τινί). ᾿Ασκεῖται τὸ ἀεὶ τιμώμενον, ἀμελεῖται δὲ τὸ ἀτιμαζόμενον (from ἀμε-
λεῖν τινος) So ἄρχομαι, κρατοῦμαι, καταφρονοῦμαι ὑπό τινος
(from ἄρχειν, κρατεῖν, καταφρονεῖν τινος).
Rem. 5. Deponents ($ 118, Rem.) are merely verbs, which have only the’
middle form, and a reflexive or intransitive signification.
LXXIX. Zxereises on §§ 149, 150.
Cyrus, (as he was) riding by, cried out to Clearchus, to lead the army against
(κατά, w.ace.) the centre of the enemy. The river Acheron, which (part.) flows
through Thesprotia, falls into the Acherusian lake. Cyrus died fighting very
bravely (aor.). The general commanded the soldiers to go forward, until they
should engage (opt. aor.) with Cyrus. In the third year of the Peloponnesian
war, Lesbos revolted from the. Athenians. The Athenians say that (acc. w. inf.)
the first men were born in (= out of) Attica. When the soldiers slept, the
general was awake. Nothing among men, neither good nor evil, has a (§ 148,
9, b) steadfast order. The wicked are pale from anxiety, and lean (= dried up)
in body. Antisthenes prided himself, that (part.) he always showed his garment
torn. Troy was taken by the Grecks. Some came, after (aor. part.) they had
exercised and anointed themselves, others, after they had bathed. Beware of
the flatterer. Abstain from intercourse with bad men. The youths had adorn-
ed themselves with garlands. The Sphinx flung herself from the height. Ajax
killed himself in a fit of madness (aor. part.). Those whom (οἱ ἄν, w. subj.) men
fear (aor.) very much, they cannot look in the face, even if they encourage
(them).* Xerxes, after the sea-fight at (epi, το. acc.) Salamis, departed (aor.)
#* οὐδὲ παραμνθουμένοις ἀντιβλέπειν.
175
198. “ SYNTAX.-TENeRe AND MOoDEs [§§ 151, 152.
with a part of his force from Europe. The soldiers seperated. Agesilaus tra-
velled (aor.) from Sparta into Asia. Ulysses wandered about (aor.), ten years.
Ninus, the king of the Assyrians, collected (aor.) a respectable army, and made
{for himself) an alliance with (πρός, τυ. acc.) Ariseus, the king of the Arabians.
The combatants anointed (aor.) their bodies with oil. What thou hast not (μή)
laid up (aor. mid.), take not. When Alexander took (aor.) the city of the The-
bans, he sold (aor.) all the freemen. The Plataeans repelled the attacks of the
Thebans, wherever they met (opt.) (them). Fair is the man, who (part.) has
adorned his mind with culture. Beside necessary evils, men themselves provide
themselves yet others. The soldiers held (aor.) their shields before them. Al-
ways lay up for thyself travelling-money for (eis) old age. If (part.) thou hast
acquired reflection, thou wilt neither strive after riches, nor reproach poverty.
Intelligent parents have their children educated. Darius caused a stone monu-
ment to be made (part. aor.), and erected it (aor.). If we keep off (part.) the
enemy, we shall possess the city free and little exposed (pres.) to stratagems.
A government that (part.) has been neglected (aor.) and begun to degenerate
(taken a transition to [ἐπέ, w. acc.] the bad), is hard to restore again. Hate
flatterers (part.) as deceivers (part.) ; for both injure those who trust them (oor.).
It is burdensome to be governed by a bad man.
8151. Tenses and Modes.
1. Tenses denote the time of the predicate, which is represented
either as present, future or past; e. g. the rose blooms, will bloom,
bloomed.
2. Modes denote the manner of representing the affirmation con-
tained in the predicate; i. e. the relation of the subject to the pre-
dicate is represented either as an actual fact, as a conception, or as
a direct expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact,
e. g. the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a
conception, e. g. the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive; the mode
which denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, e. g.
give.
§152. A. More Particular View of the Tenses.
1. The tenses may be divided, in accordance with their form and
meaning, into two classes, namely, (a) into Principal tenses, which,
both in the Ind. and Subj., always indicate something present or fu-
ture ;—(b) into Historical tenses, which, in the Ind. always denote
something past, in the Subj. (Optative), sometimes that which is
past, and sometimes that which is present or future.
2. The Principal tenses are the following:
(a) The Present, (a) Indicative, e. g. γράφομεν, scribimus; (P) Subjunctive,
6. g. γράφωμεν, scritamus ;
§ 152.] STNTAX.-—TENEES, 198:
fb) The Perfect, («) Indioative, ©. g. γεγράφαμεν, serigeimus; (8) Subjunetive,
e. g. γεγράφωμεν, scripscrimus ;
(c) The Future, Indicative, e. g. γράψομεν, scribemus, we shall write;
(d) The Future Perfect, Indicative, e. g. βεβουλεύσομαι, I shall ἊΝ advised
myself, I shall deliberate, I shall be advised.
8. The Historical tenses are the following:
(a) The Aorist, (a) Indicative, e. g. ἔγραψα, I wrote; (β) Optative, o g. yp&-
ψαιμι, I might. write, or I might have written ;
(b) The Imperfect, (4) Indicative, e. g. ἔγραφον, saribebam ; (β) Optative, 6. g..
γράφοιμι, scriberem ;
(c) The Pluperfect, (a) Indicative, 6. g. ἐγεγράφειν, scripseram ; (β) Optative,
6. g. γεγράφοιμε, scripsissem ;
. (d) The Optative of the simple Future, 6. g. γράψοιμι, Z would write, and of
the Fut. Perf., 6. g. βεβουλευσοίμην, I should have deliberated, or have been
advised ; e.g. ὁ ἄγγελος ἔλεγεν, ὅτι ol πολέμιηι νικήσοιεν, the messen-
ger said, that the enemy would conquer; ἔλεγεν, ὅτι πάντα ὑπὸ τοῦ στρατη-
γοῦ εὖ βεβουλεύσοιτο, een well planned by
the general.
4. The present indicative represents the action in the time pre-
sent to the speaker. The present is often used in the narration of
past events, since in a vivid representation, what is past is viewed as
present. This is called the Historical Present.
Ταύτην τὴν τάφρον βασιλεὺς μέγας ποιεῖ ἀντὶ ἐρύματος, ἐπειδὴ muy d ἅ-
νεται Κῦρον προςελαύνοντα. "Hv τις Πριαμιδῶν νεώτατος Πολύδωρος, "Ἑκά-
Bag παῖς, ὃν ἐκ Τροίας ἐμοὶ πατὴρ δίδωσι Πρίαμος ἐν δόμοις τρέφειν.
Rem. 1. The present el: (to go) with its compounds, has a future signifi-
cation, in the Ind. and Subj., / shall go; the Inf. and present Part. have both a
present and future signification; 6. δ. οὐκ εὐθὺς ἀφήσω αὐτὸν old’ ἄπειμι
(abebo), ἀλλ’ ἐρήσομαι αὐτὸν καὶ ἐξετάσω καὶ ἐλέγξω. Comp. $ 137,
Rem. 83--Οἔχομαι and ἥκω with present forms, are often translated in
English by perfects, namely, οἴχομαι, I have departed, and i) κω, I have come ;
yet οἴχομαι, properly means, J am gone, and ἧ κω, I am here (adsum); 6. g.
Mn λυποῦ, ὅτι ’Apaonas οἴχεται εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους, that A. is gone (= trans-
fugit) to the enemy. "Hkw νεκρῶν κευϑμῶνα καὶ σκότου πύλας λιπών. Ὑμεῖς
μόλις ἀφικνεῖσϑε, ὅποι ἡμεῖς πάλαι ἢ κο μἔεὲν (have come).
5. The perfect indicative represents a past action in time present
to the speaker. The action appears as one completed in time pre-
sent to the speaker.
Téypaga τὴν &nıoroAnv, I have written a letter, the letter is now written, it being
immaterial whether it was written just now or a long time ago; ἦ πόλις Exrıo-
ται, the city is now built, now stands there built.
Rem. 2. Many Greek perfects are translated into English by the present
tense ; in this case a condition or state occasioned by the completion of the action
is denoted ; 6. g. δέδεμαε (7 have been bound), I an now in a bound state, am-Loundy
260 SYNTAX. TENGES, [$ 192.
τόθνηκα (7 have died), I am dead; πέφηνα (I have shown myself), I appear, oldu,
novi (I have seen), I know, τέϑηλα (I have bloomed), I am blooming, πέποιϑα (I have
convinced or persuaded myself), I trust, βέβηκα (I have stepped out), I go, μέμνημαι,
memini (I have reminded myself), Iam mindful, κέκτημαι (I have acquired for my-
self), I possess, κέκλημαι (I have been called), I am called, and many others.
Where the perfect is translated by a present, the Plup. is translated by an Imp.;
6. g. ἐπεφήνειν, I appeared.
6. The future indicative denotes ar. action as future in relation to
the present time of the speaker. ‘The Greeks very often use the
Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an Historical tense, to _
express that which should, must or may be, where the Latin employs
the Subj.; the other forms of the Fut., particularly the Part., are
also so used.
Νόμους ὑπάρξαι dei τοιούτους, δι᾽ ὧν τοῖς μὲν ἀγαϑοῖς ἔντιμος καὶ ἐλεύϑερος
ὁ βίος παρασκευασϑήσεται (might be obtained), τοῖς δὲ κακοῖς ταπεινός Te
καὶ ἀλγεινὸς καὶ ἀβίωτος ὁ αἰὼν ἐπανακείσεται. ἩἩγεμόνας ἔλαβον οἱ
στρατιῶται, of αὐτοὺς ἄξουσιν (should lead), ἔνϑεν ἔξου σι (might obtain) τὰ
ἐπιτήδεια.
7. The future perfeet indicative represents the action as past
(eompleted) in the future, in relation to the present time of the
speaker.
Καὶ τοῖς κακοῖς μεμίξεται ἐσϑλά, the good shall have been mixed with evil.
Ἢ πολιτεία τελέως nenoounaeraı, ἐὰν ὁ τοιοῦτος αὐτὴν ἐπισκοπῇ φύλαξ ὁ
τούτων ἐπιστήμων. The Fut. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated
by the present (see Rem. 2), must then be translated by the simple future; 6. g.
μεμνήσομαι, meminero (I shall have reminded myself‘), I shall be mindful.
Rew. 3. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek, only in principal clauses, and in
subordinate clauses introduced by ὅτε and ὡς (that). In all other subordinate
clauses, the Subj. Aor. (more seldom the Perf.) in connection with a conjunc-
tion compounded of ἄν, 6. g. ἐάν, ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, mplv ἄν, Ecr’ av, ὃς ἄν,
etc., is used instead of the Fat. Perf.; e.g. ἐὰν τοῦτο λέξῃῳς, si hoc dizeris, if
you shall have said thus. \
8. The aorist indicative expresses past time, in a wholly indefi-
nite manner, without any additional relation; e. g. ἔγραψα, I wrote,
Κῦρος πολλὰ ἔϑνη ἐνίκησεν. It thus stands in contrast with the
other tenses which express past time; still, since it indicates past
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these tenses.
9. The imperfect indicative represents an action as past, but al-
ways in relation to another past time.
Ἔν ᾧ od ἔπαιζες, ἐγὼ ἔγραφον, while you were playing, I was writing.
Ὅτε ἐγγὺς ἦσαν ol βάρβαροι, ol "Ἕλληνες ἐμάχοντο, when the barbarians
were near, the G. fought. “Ore οἱ βάρβαροι ἐκεληλύθεσαν (or ἐπῆλϑον), ef Ἔλ»
§ 153.] SYNTAX. —LENSBS. 2901
Agvec ἐμάχοντο. Tére lor ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ μόχῃυ) οἱ “BAAgver ϑαῤῥα-
λεώτατα ἐμάχοντο.
Rem. 4. The Impf. Ind. is also used to denote,—(a) the beginning of an ac-
tion, 6. g. ἐπεὶ ἐγγὺς ἐγένοντο ἐξαπίνης, ol μὲν αὐτῶν ἐτόξευον, some of them
began to shoot their arrows ;—(b) the continuance, e. gol μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, of
δ' elmovro, one party continued their march, the other continued to pursue ;—(c)
habit or custom, 6. g. αὐτὸν olmep npösdev προςεκύνουν, καὶ τότε προςεκύ-
γησαν, those who were before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did i then also ;—
(d) endeavor or attempt, 6. g. πρῶτος Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο
lEvaı, Clearchus endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance.
10. Hence the Aor. Ind. is used in historical narration, in order
to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. is used to denote
the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. narrates, the Impf. de-
scribes and paints ; the Aor. denotes a single, momentary action, the
Impf. a continued action.
Τοὺς πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο ol βάρβαροι καὶ ἐμάχοντο" ἐπεὶ δ' ἐγγὺς
ἧσαν οἱ ὁπλῖται, ἐτράποντο" καὶ οἱ πελτασταὶ εὐϑὺς εἴποντο. Ὁ δὲ
Κλέαρχος ἐταράχϑη καὶ ἐφοβεῖτο, and C. was terrified (a single, momen-
tary act) and feared (continued act).
Ren. 5. The Aor. Ind. is often used in general propositions, which express a
fact borrowed from experience; the verb is then translated by an English Pres,
or by is wont or is accustomed, with the Inf. ; e. g. Κάλλος ἢ χρύνος ἀνάλωσεν, ἢ
νόσος ἐμάρᾶνεν, either time destroys (is wont to destroy) or disease impatrs beauty,
11. The pluperfect represents an action as completed before an-
other past action.
Ἐπειδὴ ol Ἔλληνες ἐπεληλύϑεσαν (had come), ol πολέμιοι dreredget-
yeaaw (had fled). “Ore ol σύμμαχοι ἐπλησίαζον, ol ᾿Αϑηναῖοε τοὺς Πέρσας
ἐνενικήκεσαν. "Eyeypagecy τὴν ἐπιστολήν (sc. when the friend came).
Rem. 6. It is to be noticed, that where the relation of one past time to another
is readily seen from the connection, and no special emphasis belongs to it, the
Greeks commonly use the Aor. instead of the Plup.; e. g. ἐπειδὴ of Ἕλληνες
ἐπῆλϑον, ol πολέμιοι ἀπεπεφεύγεσαν. Indeed, the Aor. is often used instead
of the Perf. even, when the relation of the past to the present does not require
to be particularly indicated.
12. As the Aor. Ind. expresses a past action as independent and
completed, and as the Impf. Ind., on the contrary, represents an ac-
tion in its duration and progress, (since it always refers to a past ag-
tion which is related to another past action, being used in descrip-
tion and delineation,) so the subordinate modes of the Aor., viz. the
Subj., Opt. and Imp., together with the Aor. Inf. and Part., are
used when the action is represented by itself, as completed; on the
contrary, the subordinate modes. of the Pres., together with the
202. SYNTAX TENSER [ 182.
Pres. Inf. and Part., and also the Opt. Impf., are used, when the
speaker would describe an action in its duration and progress. In
this manner the following forms stand contrasted :
(a) The Aor. Subj. and the Pres. Subj.; e.g. φύγωμεν and φεύγωμεν,
let us fly; λέγω, ἵνα padys and iva μαν ϑάνῃῳ ς, that you may learn;
(b) The Aor. Imp. and the Pres. Imp.; e.g. φύγε and φεῦγε, fly; δός
and δίδου μοι τὸ βιβλίον, give;
(c) The Aor. Inf. and the Pres. Inf.; 6. g. ἐϑέλω puyeiv and φεύγειν,
wish to fly; κελεύω ce δοῦναι and διδόναε μοι τὸ βιβλίον , but the
Aor. Inf. can also denote a past time and take the place of the Perf. Inf.,
when the relation to the finite verb does not require to be particularly in-
dicated ; 6. g. ἤγγειλε τοὺς πολεμίους ἀποφυγεῖν and ἀποπεφευ-
γέναι, nuntiavit hostes fugisse ;
(d) The Aor. Opt. and the Impf. Opt.; ὁ. g. ἔλεγον, ἵνα μάϑοις and wa
μανϑάνοις, that thou mayest learn, ut disceres; eide τοῦτο γένοιτο
and yiyvoıro, O that this might happen! The Aor. Opt. can also take
the place of the Plup. Opt., when the relation to another past action does
not require to be particularly indicated; 6. g. ἥγγειλεν, ὅτι, ἐπειδὴ of
Ἕλληνες ἐπέλϑοιεν (had come), ol βάρβαροι ἤδη ἀποφύγοιεν
(had already fled).
The Aor. Part. always denotes past time, and hence stands in contrast with
‘the Perf. Part., since the former describes an action as absolutely past, while
the latter, at the same time, represents it in relation to the finite verb; e. g. of
αὐτόμολοι ἤγγειλαν τοὺς πολεμίους ἀποφυγόντας διὰ ἀποπεφευγότας.
LXXX. Exercises on $ 152.
After Darius was dead and Artaxerxes had ascended (aor.) the throne, Tis-
sapherneg traduced Cyrus to (πρός, w. acc.) his brother, (asserting) that he was
plotting against him (opt.). The latter (6) credits it (= is persuaded) and ap-
prehends Cyrus, intending to put him to death (ὡς, w. fut. part.) ; but his mother
by entreaty gains his release (= having begged him off for herself, aor.) and
sends him again to his government. Hector, whither has gone the courage, that
thou once hadst? Be not troubled that Araspas has gone over to the enemy.
In good time* art thou come. Themistocles wrote: (I,) Themistocles, have
come to thee. If any one does not know himself, and believes he has come to
a knowledge of that which he does not traly know, he is a fool. The messen-
gers from Sinope said: We are come to (part. fut.) congratulate you, O war-
riors, that ye have been delivered, as we have heard, through (διά, το. gen.) many
dangers. Under (ἐπί, το. gen.) Cecrops and the first kings, until (εἰς) Thesens,
Attica was always inhabited by cities. God has carefully regulated everything
in the world. The dwellings in Memphis have remained until (μέχρι) modern
times. noe, which lies (= is) on the borders of Attica and Boeotia, had
been fortified. Zeno scourged a slave for (ἐπί, τυ. dat.) theft; upon his saying
# εἰς καλόν.
8. 1δ8.] SYNTAX.— MODES. 208
(gen. abs.) : “It was fated for me to steal,” Zeno said: “ To be fayed too (aor.).”
The world is a stage, life a passage across (that stage); thou camest, thou saw-
est, thou wentest away. Xerxes threw a bridge over the Hellespont and dug
through Athos. Destiny casts down what (οὗ ἄν, w. subj.) it has exalted (aor.).
Even the worst (man) acquires riches easily. Inactivity teaches a great deal of
vice. Commanding is easier than doing. Cyrus called (part.) Araspas, a Mede,
‘who had been a comrade of his (= to him) from youth (ἐκ παιδός), and bade
him guard for him the wife of Abradatas, the Susian, and the tent, until he him-
self should take (them) in charge. The people resolved to choose thirty men,
who should draw up the laws of the country, in accordance with which
(κατά, w. acc.) they should administer the government. Everywhere in Greece
‘the usage prevails, that the citizens swear (acc. w. inf.) to be united ( A#.). The
soldiers hoped to take the city. I believe, that those, who (§ 148, 6) practise
wisdom, and believe (themselves) to be competent to teach the citizens that
which is useful, by no means become vielent. Say what I must do, and it shall
be done. It (= this) is very beautifully said and ever will be (= remain) said,
that the useful is beautiful, the hurtful odious. Tyrants will acquire nothing
valuable. Noble men we shall ever remember.
8168. B. More Particular View of the Modes.
1. The three following modes are to be distinguished, viz. the
Indicative, Subjunctive (Optative) and Imperative (§ 151, 2).
a. The Indicative expresses a fact or phenomenon, asserts some-
thing directly; 8. δ. τὸ ῥόδον θάλλει --- ὁ πατὴρ γέγραφε τὴν
ἐπιστολήν — οἱ πολέμιοι ἀπέφυγον --- οἱ πολῖται τοὺς πολεμίους
ψικήσουσινγ..
Ὁ. The Subjunctive denotes a conception. The Subj. of the his-
torical tenses is called the Optative in Greek (§ 73, 11.).
(a) The Subj. of the principal tenses, i. 6. of the Pres. and Perf.,
and also the Subj. Aor., in Greek always represents the conception
as something future. The Subj. of the principal tenses is used in
principal clauses: (1) in the first Pers. Sing. and Pl. to express an
exhortation or admonition ; (2) in the second Pers. Sing. and PL
of the Aor. (not Pres.) with μή to express a prohibition ; (8) in
doubtful questions ; in principal clauses, however, almost exclusively
in the first Pers. Sing. and Pl., but in subordinate clauses, it may
be in any of the different persons.
Ἴωμεν, eamus, let us go. Μὴ ἴωμεν, let us not go. Μὴ φοβηϑῇς, ne metuas, do
not fear. Ti ποιῶμεν ; what shall we do? Im subordinate clauses, Οὐκ ἔχω, ὅποι
τράπωμαι, non habeo, quo me vertam, I do not know where to go. Οὐκ ἔχει, ὅποι
φράπηται, he does not know where to go.
(β) The Subj. of the historical tenses, viz. the Opt. of the Aor.
204 SYNTAX.—M@DES. [s 158.
Impf. and Plup. as well as the Opt. of the Fat. ($ 182, 3, d), repre-
sent what is conceived either as past, present or future. The Opt.
denotes a present or future, only in conditional clauses, and in such
elliptical clauses as arise from them; e.g. εἴ τὶ ἔχοις, δοίης ἄν,
if you had anything, you would give it. Both the condition ἐ ἔ rs
ἔχοις, and the consequence ὃ οέίη ς & 9, are here represented as a
present, mostly a future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a
mere supposition, admission or conjecture (Comp. § 185). This
form of the conditional clause, viz. e/ with the Opt., may express a
wish, the concluding clause connected with it, being understood ; e. g.
εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο! tf.this should happen (then I would be happy,
εὐτυχὴς ὧν εἴη»), == O that this might happen! Instead of the sim-
ple εἰ, the stronger ei @ 2, δὲ γάρ, O that, is then commonly used;
6. 5. the (εἰ γὰρ) ἐμοὶ θεοὶ ταύτην τὴν δύναμιν παραϑεῖεν
O that the gods would give me such power! Very frequently the
concluding clause is used elliptically, the condition connected with
it being understood; 6. g. ἡδέως ἂν ἀκούσαιμι, I would gladly
hear (if it were possible, ei d£ein). Comp. No. 2,c. With the
exception of the instances here mentioned, the Opt. generally refers
to the past.
Rem. 1. When a wish is to be represented as one which the speaker knows
cannot be realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used; e. g. ele τοῦτο
&yiyserol Ο that this might be (were) done ! εἶϑε τοῦτο ἐγ ἐν ενοι O that
this had been done !
c. The Imp. denotes the immediate expression of one's will; e.g.
δός and δέδον μοι τὸ βιβλίον, give; γραψάτω and γρκφέτω
τὴν ἐπιστολήν, scribito, let him write.
Rem. 2. The difference between the Pres. and Aor. Imp, is, that the Pres.
generally denotes a continued, oft-repeated action, while the Aor. denotes a single,
instantaneous action ; 6. g. teidov τοῖς σοφωτέροις, obey those wiser than yourself,
a direction to be observed at all times; dvarecvare τὴν χεῖρα, let him raies
kis hand, βλέψον εἰς τὰ ὄρη, look upon the mountains, single, instantancous
acts. So ἄκουσον, ἀκούσατε, λέξον, λέξατε. Comp. $ 152, 12, b—The Perf
Imp., which is of rare occurrence, is used to indicate that the consequences of
the action are to rematn or be permanent ; e. g. κεκλείσϑω ἡ ipa, let the door be
shet (and remain shat). It will be evident, therefore, that neither the Aor. nor
Perf. Imp., expresses any relation of past time, as the Ind. of these tenses does,
but only such modifications of action as are stated above.
Rem. 3. In negative or prohibitive expressions with μ 7 (ne), the Greek com-
monly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp., but instead of it, the Aor.
Subj.; 6. g. μὴ γράφε (but not μὴ γράφῃς) or μὴ γράψῃς, do not write (but not
μὴ γράψον).
$153.] SYNTAX.—MODAL ADVERB ἄν. 205°
e
REMARKS ON THE MODAL ADVERB ay.
2. The discussion of the modal adverb &» is intimately connected
with the treatment of the modes. This adverb is used to show the:
relation of the conditioned expression to the conditioning one, inas
much as it indicates that the predicate of the sentence to which'it’
belongs, is conditioned by another thought. A complete view of
the use of ἄν cannot be presented until conditional sentences are
treated of (ὃ 188); for the present, the following remarks on its
construction will be sufficient. It is connected :
a. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, viz. the Impf., Plap..
and Aor.,
(«) To indicate that something could take place under a certain:
condition, but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled..
Ei τοῦτο ἔλεγες, ἡμάρτανες ἄν, st hoc diceres, errares, if you said this, you were:
wrong (but now I know you did not say it, consequently you did not do wrong). El
τοῦτο ἔλεξας, ἥμαρτες ἄν, si hoc dixisses, errasses ; at hoc non dixisti, ergo non er-
rasti (the Aor. here takes the place of the Plup.); or without a protasis, e. g.
ἐχάρης ἄν, laetareris or laetatus fuisses (sc. si hoc vidisses).
(8) To indicate that an action took place (was repeated) in cer-
tain cases or under certain circumstances. The historical.
tense of the principal clause is then usually an Imperfect.
El τις τῷ Σωκράτει περί του ἀντιλέγοι, ἐπὶ τὴν ὑπόϑεσιν ἐπανῇγεν
ἄν πάντα τὸν λόγον, if any one contradicted Socrates, he would (he was aocus-
tomed to) carry back the whole argument to the original proposition (i. e. he would do.
this as often as any one contradicted ).
Rem. 3. "Av is not used with the Ind. of the principal tenses.
b. With the Subj., in order to represent the conceived future
event, which is naturally expressed by the Greek Subj. [No. 1, b.
(a) ], as conditional, and.dependent on circumstances. In the Com-
mon Language, this usage occurs only in subordinate clauses, the
modal adverb then standing in close connection with the conjunction
of the subordinate clause, or combining with it and forming one
word. In this manner originate ἐάν (from εἰ ἄν), ὅταν (from ὅτε
᾿ oe» er a , / a 4 t σ N Tt ¥
av), oxotay (from ὁπότε ay), πριν ἂν, 001 ἂν, OV ἂν, ὁποῦ ἂν, οἱ ἄν,
o Ei δ» σ ¥ Ο 4 ες», 9 a 4 .
ὅποι ἂν, ἢ ἂν, ony ἂν, Oey ἂν, ὁποϑεν ἂν, eto., OS ἂν (quecUM@ue or
δὲ quis), οἷος ἄν, ὁποῖος ἅν, ὅσος ὦν, ὁπόσος ἄν, and others.
c. With the Opt. (very seldom with the Fut. Opt.), to represent’
a present or future uncertainty, undetermined possibility, a mere
supposition, admission or conception, as conditional. The Opt. with
dy must always be considered as the principal clause of a conditional:
18
206 SYNTAX. —MODAL ADVERB Gy. [3 158.
proposition, even if tl condition belonging to it, is not expressed
[No. 1, Ὁ. (8)].
El τοῦτο λέγοις, ἁμαρτάνοις ἄν. Without a protasis, e. g. χαίροις ἄν, you
might, could, would rejoice (if you heard this). Τένοιτ' ἂν πᾶν ἐν τῷ μακρῷ χρόνῳ,
all might, could happen. Aéyotc ἄν, you might speak (sc. si tli placuerit). The
Opt. with ἄν is very frequently used, when the speaker wishes to state a strong
affirmation modestly. .
d. With the Inf. and Part. (very seldom with the Fat. Inf. and
Part.), when the finite verb, used in the place of the Inf. and Part.,
would be connected with ὧν.
Ei τι εἶχεν, ἔφη, δοῦναι ἄν, if he had anything, he said he would give it
(oratio recta, el τε εἶχον, ἔδωκα ὦν, if I had anything, I would give it). Ei τι ἔχοι,
ἔφη, δοῦναι ἄν (oratio recta, εἴ τε ἔχοιμι, δοίην dv). Δῆλος ed ἁμαρτάνων
ἄν, εἰ τοῦτο λέγοις (== δῆλόν ἐστιν, ὅτι duaprüuvpıs av, εἰ τοῦτο λέγοις).
Rem. 4. As ἄν represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be
joined with the predicate, e. g. λέγοιμι dv, ἔλεγον dv; yet it commonly follows
that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, 6. g. καὶ οὐκ οἴει ἄ σ-
xnpov ἂν φανεῖσϑαι τὸ τοῦ Σωκράτους πρᾶγμα. Hence it is regularly joined
to such words as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to negative adverbs and
interrogatives ; 6. g. οὐκ ἄν, οὐδ᾽ dv, obmor’ ἄν, οὐδέποτ᾽ ἄν, etc. — τίς ἄν, Ti ἄν,
τί & ἄν, τί δῆτ᾽ ἄν, πῶς ἄν, πῶς γὰρ ἄν, dp’ ἄν, ete.;—also to adverbs of place,
time, modality and other adverbs, which, in various ways modify the expréssion
contained in the predicate and define it more exactly ; 6. g. ἐνταῦϑα ἄν, τότ᾽ ἄν,
εἰκότως ἄν, ἴσως dv, Tax’ dv, μάλιστ' dv, fio’ ἄν, ῥᾳδίως ἄν, ἡδέως ἄν, ete,
Hence it happens that ἄν is sometimes repeated in the same sentence.
LXXXI Exercises on § 153.
Let us shun the unseemly, and aspire after the beautiful. Let us pray (avr.)
the Gods to guide the present (enterprise) to the most honorable issue. Let us
not yield to the enemy. How shall I, who am (part.) mortal, contend with di-
vine destiny? Tell me, whether-(mörepov) we shall say that Socrates in his
conversations speaks seriously or jests (= call S. speaking seriously or jesting).
When Hercules was at a loss, which of two (ὁπότερος, w. gen.) ways to (ἐπέ, ὦ.
acc.) life he should enter (= turn himself), there appeared two majestic women.
One, running to him (aor.), spoke thus: I see, Ὁ Hercules, thou art at a loss
(= thee at a loss) which way to life thou shouldst enter. If (ἐάν, w. subj.) there-
fore thou wilt make me a friend (_fem.), I will lead thee to the pleasantest and
easiest way. O Gods, that ye might avert danger from us. O that the triad
of the Graces (Χάριτες) might ever assist (aor.) me. O that I might ever asso-
ciate with the wise and good, and never have intercourse with (gen.) the bad.
O if I cauld have lived with you then, when you were still a youth. If I were
(but) able to make what is done (part.) undone! Fight bravely, soldiers. “Strive
after virtue, young men. The temple-robber ought to be torn in pieces by
wild beasts. Historians ought neither to éxtol anything in order to conciliate
(πρός, το. ace.) favor, nor omit (anything), if it is deserving of mention and re-
§ 154.] SYNTAX.—-ATTRIBUTIVES. 207
membrance. Judge (aor.) not contrary to (παρά, 0. anc.) the laws. O war
riors, despair (aor.) not of yourselves. He who ($ 148, 6) ventures to em-
ploy force, may need not a few allies; but he who can persuade, none. How
could those who do base (deeds), hecome friends to those who hate such (deeds) 1
Who without self-control could either learn or properly practise anything good?
With (μετά, το. gen.) a wise understanding, one may pass (aor.) life most pleas-
antly. The bad no one can make (= place, aor.) useful.
CHAPTER II.
8 154. Attributives.
1. Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea contained
in the substantive to which they belong; e. g. τὸ καλὸν» ῥόδον, ὃ
μέγας παῖς. The attributive may be:
a. An adjective or participle, 6. g. τὸ καλὸν ῥόδον, τὸ ὦνϑος
ϑάλλον;
Ὁ. A substantive in the genitive, e.g. οἱ τοῦ ὃ ἐν ὃ ρου καρποί; ;
e. A substantive governed by a preposition, 6. 5. 7 σρὸς τὴν
πόλιν ὀδός;
d. An adverb, 6. g. οἱ vi» ἄνθρωποι;
e. A substantive in apposition, 6. g. Κροῖσος, ὁ Ba σιλεύ ὃ,
Rem. 1. The genitive depending on substantives, receives different names ac-
cording to the relations it expresses: (a) subjective, when it takes the place of
the subject, c.g. οἱ τοῦ δέν δρου καρποί (arising from τὸ dévdpow φέρει
καρπούς), the fruits of the tree, i. 6. which the tree produces; τὰ τοῦ Ὁμήρου ποι
para, the poems of Homer, i. e. which he made j—(b) objective or causative, when it
takes the place of the object of an intransitive verb, 6. g.7 τῆς σοφίας ἐπι-
Dv pia, the desire for wisdom (ἐπιϑυμῶ τῆς σοφίας, the σοφίας being the cause
of the &rıdyula); εὔνοιά τινος, good-will towards one (εὔνους εἰμί τινι) —(c)
passive, when it takes the place of the object of an active verb, and thus denotes
the thing affected or caused by the transitive action,e. g.9 τῆς πόλεως κτί-
σις (from κτίζει τὴν πόλιν), the possession of the city (the city being the thing pos-
sessed); ὁ τῆς ἐπιστολῆς ypapeis, the writer of the letter ;—(d) of quality,
@.g.7d εὑρὸς τεττάρων σταδίων; ἀνὴρ μεγάλης üperns;—(e) of pos-
session, ©. g. τὸ τοῦ Μένωνος στράτευμα.
Rem. 2. When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the
attributive, contains a general idea or one which can be easily supplied from the
context; or, by frequent usage in a particular connection, may be supposed to
be known, then the substantive, as it is subordinate in the idea to be expressed,
is often omitted, and the adjective or participle commonly with the article, is
used as a substantive. Such substantives are, 6. g. ἄνϑρωπος, ἀνήρ (man, hus
band), γυνή (woman, wife), πατήρ, μήτηρ, υἱός, παῖς, ϑυγάτηρ, ἀδελφός, πρᾶγμα,
χρῆμα, ἔργον, χρόνος, ἡμέρα, χώρα, γῆ, ὁδός, οἰκία, οἶκος, and others.
208 BINTAX.—APPOSITION. [8 154.
Οἱ Yygroi (sc. ἄνϑρωποι), mortales. Τὰ ἡμέτερα (sc. χρήματα), res nostrae.
Ἢ borepaia (sc. ἡμέρα). ‘H πολεμία and ἡ φελία (sc. χώρα), a hostile and friend-
‘dy land. Ἢ οἰκουμένη (sc. γῆ), the inhabited earth. Τὴν ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν),
quam celerrime. Td κακόν, evil. Τὰ κακά, evils. ᾿Αλέξανδρος ὁ Φιλίππου (sc.
‚löc). "Ev δου (sc. οἴκῳ) εἶναι. Ele διδασκάλον, εἰς TlAérwvoc φοιτᾷν. Ta
nie τύχης, fortune and all which belongs to it; τὰ τῆς πόλεως, the affuirs of the city ;
τὰ τοῦ πολέμου, the whole extent of the war. Οἱ viv, ol τότε, ol πάλαι (sc. av-
ϑρωποι). Τὰ olxoı (πράγματα), res domesticae. Ol xa®’ ἡμᾶς, our contemporaries.
Ol ἀμφί or περί τινα, a person with his companions, followers or scholars; ol ἀμφὲ
Πεισίστρατον, Pisistratus and his troops ; oi ἀμφὶ Θαλῆν, Thales and his school.
2. When a substantive is put in the same case with another, for
the eake of a more exact definition, it is said to be in apposition
with that substantive. A word may be in apposition not merely
with a substantive, but also with a substantive pronoun; e. g. ἡμεῖς,
οἱ σοφοί ---- ἐκεῖνος, ὁ βασιλεύς, and even with a personal pronoun
contained in the verb.
Θεμιστοκλῆς ἢ κω παρὰ σέ, I, Themistocles, have come to you. Ὁ Maiag
τῆς “ArAavtoc διακονοῦμαι abrois (instead of ἐγὼ ὁ Μαίας sc. υἱός), I, the
son of Maia, the daughter of Ailas, etc.
.8. ‘When a word is in apposition with a possessive pronoun, that
word is put in the Gen., because the possessive then. takes the place
of the Gen. of the personal pronoun.
᾿Εμὸς τοῦ ἀϑλίου βίος, the life of me wretched; here ἀϑλίου is in apposition
with ἐμός, which is used instead of ἐμοῦ. τἀμὰ (= τὰ ἐμὰ) τοῦ δυστήνου κακά,
the evils of me, unhappy one! 2% τῆς καλλίστης εὐμορφία, thy gracefulness, O most
beautiful one! In English, as these examples show, we may often translate the
Gen. by an exclamation. On the expression ὁ ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος, σφέτερος
αὐτῶν πατήρ, see under $ 169, Rem. 2.
LXXXII. Zrercises on § 154.
In Hades dwell (= are) all the dead. Men send their children to school (to
the house of teachers), that they may learn (part. fut.) the sciences, music and
the (ra) (exercises) in the gymnasium. Alexander, the son of Philip, achieved
many and brilliant actions. Many, who (part.) neglect (aor.) domestic affairs,
attend to those of the state. Leonidas and the three hundred with him, fought
bravely at Thermopylae against (ἐπί) the Persians. Thales and his school and
almost all philosophers abstained from political affairs. The character of the
Deity we must reverence very highly. O fortunate (man), thy life’have the
Gods adorned with every blessing (Greck: thy life of the fortunate). Unhappy
men that we are, our (= the) enemies have ruined our native land. The cam-
panions of Ulysses perished (aor.) by their own crime. Our own citizens have
betrayed us. Your own brother deserts you.
88 155—157.] SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 209
CHAPTER 111.
8155. The Objective Construction. |
As the attributive construction ($ 154) serves to define the sub-
stantive more particularly, so the objective construction serves to de-
fine the predicate more particularly. By object, taken in its wider
sense, is to be understood everything by which the predicate is more
particularly defined, viz. (a) the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their
Cases, (c) the Infinitive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb.
Erıdvuo τῆς σοφίας. Tpagw τὴν ἐπιστολήν. Εὔχομαι τοῖς ϑεοῖς. "Eorn
παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ. ᾿Ἐπιϑυμῶ γράφειν. Τελῶν εἶπεν. Καλῶς ἐμαχέσατο. In
esch of these examples, it is evident that the verb is limited, defined or more
fully explained by the word or words connected with it.
Cases.
8156. I. Gentteve.
The Genitive Case primarily denotes the relation whence, and
therefore expresses,—(a) in a local relation, the out-goiny or removal
and separation from an object, since it designates the object or point
from which the action of the verb proceeds; 6. g. δίχειν ὁδοῦ, cedere
via, to withdraw from the way ;—(b) in a causal relation, it ex-
presses the cause, source, author, in general the object which calls
forth, produces (gignit), excites and occasions the action of the verb;
8. g. ἐπιθυμῶ τῆς ἀρετῆς ; here ἀρετῆς is the object which calls
forth, etc. the desire expressed by &nıdvuo.
§157. A. Local Relatton.
Genitive of Separation.
The Genitive, in a local relation, is used with expressions de-
noting removal, separation, being distant from, beginning, loosing,
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, missing, deviating from, dif-
fering from, depriving.
Such verbs are παραχωρεῖν, ὑποχωρεῖν, εἴκειν and ὑπείκειν, ὑπανίστασϑαι
and ἐξίστασϑαι, νοσφίζειν, χωρίζειν, διορίζειν, ἀφιέναι, ἀφίεσϑαι, ἀπέχειν, ἀπέ-
χεσϑαι, ἄρχειν, ἄρχεσϑαι, ὑπάρχειν, ἐξάρχειν, παύειν, παύεσθαι, λήγειν, κω-
λύειν, εἴργειν, λύειν, ἐλευϑεροῦν, ἀπαλλάττειν, στερεῖν, ἀποστερεῖν, χηροῦν,
ἐρημοῦν, διαφέρειν, ἁμαρτάνειν, σφάλλεσϑαι, ψεύδεσϑαι, etc.; διέχειν and ἀπέ-
xetv, to be distant ;—the adjectives ἐλεύϑερος, καϑαρός, κενός, ἔρημος, γυμνός,
18" :
810 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [ὃ 158.
ὀρφᾶνός, ψιλός, διάφορος, and many compounded with a privative ;—the adverbs
ἄνευ, χωρίς, πλήν, ἔξω, ἑκάς, δίχα, πέραν.
Οἱ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων νεώτεροι τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις συντυγχώνοντες εἴκουσι
τῆς ὁ δοῦ (withdraw from the road). ᾿Απέχει τῶν ἀργυρείων (is distant
rom the silver mines) ἡ ἐγγύτατα πόλις Μέγαρα κολὺ πλεῖον τῶν πεντακοσίων
σταδίων. Μήτηρπαιδὸς εἴργει μυῖαν (keeps the fly from her child). Παύ-
ou τῆς ὕβρεως (cease your insolence). ἭἫ πόλις ἡλευϑερώϑη τῶν rv-
ράννων (was freed from tyrants). Οἱ πολέμιοι rove πολίτας τῶν ἀγαϑῶν
ἀπεστέρησαν (deprived the citizens of their goods). Τῷ νῷ οἱ ἄνϑρωποι ὃ α-
φέρουσι τῶν ἄλλων ζώων (differ from other animals). ᾿Αρχεσϑαί Te
μος signifies to begin generally, without any reference to others; 6. g. σὺν ταῖς
ϑεοῖς ἄρχεσθαι χρὴ παντὸς ἔργου; butäpxeiv, ἐξάρχειν, trap
xeiv, κατάρχειν, signify to do something first (i. 6. before others), to begin, hence
also to be the author of, to originate; 6. g. Ol πολέμιοι ἤρξαν ἀδίκων ἔργων.
Ol ᾿Αϑηναῖοι καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑπῆρξαν τῆς ἐλευϑερίας ἁπάσῃ τῇ
᾿Ελλάδι, libertatis auctores fuerunt. Ἔ Δλεύϑερος φόβου, free from fear; κα-
ϑαρὸς ἀδικίας, free from injustice; ἅρματα κενὰ ἡνιόχων, chariots with-
out drivers; ἀπαίδευτος μουσικῆς, uneducated in music; χωρὶς τῶν
ἄλλων, apart from the others; πλὴν Néwvog, except Neon; πέραν τοῦ
ποταμοῦ, beyond the river; ἔξω βελῶν εἶναι, to be beyond the reach of the darts.
§158. B. Causal Relation of the Genitive.
The Gen., in the causal relation, signifies also an out-going, but
not as in the local relation, a mere external out-going, but an inter-
„al and active one, sinee it expresses the object, by whose inward
power, the action of the subject is called forth and produced (gig-
tur).
a The Genitive as an expression of Action* or the Active
Genitive.
1. In the first place, the active Gen. stands as the Gen. of origin
or author, and is. connected with verbs denoting to originate from,
to spring from, arise from, to produce from, to be produced from, to
be born from: γίγνεσϑαι, φύειν, φῦναι, εἶναι.
᾿Αρίστων ἀνδρῶν ἄριστα βουλεύματα γίγνεται, the best counsels origi-
nate from the best men. Πατρὸς μὲν δὴ λέγεται ὁ Κῦρος γενέσϑαι Kau-
βύσου, Περσῶν βασιλέως, Cyrus is satd to have been the son of (to have originated
from) his father Cambyses ; ὁ δὲ Καμβύσης οὗτος rod ἹΠερσειδῶὼν γένους ὧν,
but this Cambyses was a descendant of (of the race of‘) the Persians; μητρὸς δὲ
ὁμολογεῖται Μανδάνης γενέσθαι.
2. In the second place, the active Gen. stands as that object
* hoes this Gen. the subject appears as receiving the action denoted by the
ve.
§ 158.] SYNTAX. —GENITIVE. 211
which has acquired another, made it its own and possesses it,—hence
as Gen. of the owner or possessor. This Gen. stands with the verbs
εἶναι, γενέσϑαι; also with the adjectives ἴδιος, οὐκεῖος, ἱερός, κύριος.
Τῆς φύσεως μέγιστον κάλλος ἐστίν, nature possesses (has) the greatest
beauty. Τοῦ Σωκράτους πολλὴ ἦν ἀρετή, Socrates had much virtue. Hence
originates the Gen. of quality, with which in English we connect the substantives,
business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty, mark; e.g.’Avdpöc ἐστιν ἀγαϑοῦ
εὖ ποιεῖν τοὺς φίλους, it is the business, custom, peculiarity, duty, mark of a good
man to benefit his friends ; or it becomes, it hespcaks a good man, a good man is wont,
etc. Οἱ μὲν κίνδυνοι πολλάκις τῶν ἡγεμόνων ἴδιοι, μισϑὸς δ᾽ οὐκ ἔστιν,
dangers are often the lat of (peculiar to) commanders. Κῦρος ταύτης τῆς χώρας
κύριος ἐγένετο, Cyrus was the ruler of this place. “ἵππος ἱερὸς τοῦ Ἡλίου,
a horse sacred to the sun.
8. In the third place, the active Gen. stands as that object whieh
includes another or several other objects, as parts belonging to it;
the Gen. expresses the whole in relation to its parts, and is com-
monly called the partitive Genitive. This Gen. is used:
(a) With the verbs εἶναι and γίγνεσϑ αι, which then signify
to be among, to be numbered or considered among, to be of the num-
ber of, to be a part of, to be one of.
"Hy καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατευομένων, Socrates also
was among those who carried on war around Miletus ; στρατευομένων here denotes
the whole, of which Socrates is a part. Ἡ Ζέλειά ἐστι τῆς ᾿Ασίας, Zia
part (or a city) of Asia. Τὸν ϑάνατον ἡγοῦνται πάντες of ἄλλοι τῶν μεγίσ-
των κακῶν εἶναι, is among, or is one of, the greatest evils.
Rem. 1. The partitive Gen., denoting the whole of which a part is taken, is
very often used as an attributive :-—(a) with substantives, e. g. σταγόνες ὕδατος, drops
of water, (here ὕδατος is the whole, parts of which are expressed by σταγόνες, and
so in the other examples); σώματος μέρος, a part of the body ;—(b) with ‘neuter
adjectives and pronouns, 6. g. μέσον ἡμέρας, the middle of the day; ἐν μέσῳ τῆς
ὁδοῦ, in the middle of the way; ἐν τοιούτῳ τοῦ κινδύνου, in such circumstances of
danger ; εἰς τοῦτο ὀργῆς, to such a degree of anger; πλεῖστον τοῦ στρατεύματος,
most of the army ;—(c) with substantive-adjectives, particularly superlatives, with
participles, substantive-pronouns (interrogative and indefinite) and numerals, e. g.
οἱ χρηστοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the useful part of (the useful among) men; ol εὖ φρο-
voövrec τῶν avdparur, the wise among men; τῶν ὑποζυγίων τὰ ἀναγκαῖα καὶ τὰ
δυνατώτατα, the necessary and more able of the beasts of burden; τὸ ἡγούμενον τοῦ
στρατεύματος, that part of the army which lead = the van; ol διώξαντες τῶν Im-
πέων, those of the horsemen who pursued ; τίς τῶν στρατιωτῶν, who of the soldiers?
ol σοφώτατοι ἀνϑρώπων, the wisest of men.—TloAAol, ὀλίγοι, τινὲς τῶν ἀνθρώπων.
(On the contrary, οἱ ϑνητοὶ ἄνϑρωποι, because the property of mortality be-
longs to the whole class; πολλοὶ or ὀλίγοι ἄνϑρωποι, denotes a whole consisting
of many or few, but πολλοὶ or ὀλίγοι ἀνϑρώπων, represents the many or the few
as a part of the whole) ;—(d) with adverbs, (a) of place, e. g. Οὐδαμῇ Αἰγύπτου,
nowhere in Egypt ; οὐκ olda, ὅπου γῆς ἔστιν, I do not know where on earth he is;
212 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [8 +58.
πανταχοῦ τῆς γῆς, ubique terrarum, everywhere in the world; so also with πόϑεν,
πόῤῥω, πρόσω ; (β) of time, 6. δ. ὀψὲ τῆς ἡμέρας, τῆς ἡλικίας, τοῦ χρόνου, lute
in the day, late in life, ete. ; τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, thrice a day; πολλάκις τῆς ἡμέρας,
many times a day.
(b) With words which signify to participate, to share in, to tm-
part, to communicate ;—to touch, to take hold of, to be close to, to
border on ;—to acquire and obtain,-or to strive to acquire.
Here belong the verbs μετέχειν, μέτεστί μοι, μετα-, διαδιδόναι, κοινωνεῖν, Kot-
νοῦσϑαι (these often taking a Dat. besides the Gem), ἐπαρκεῖν (to impart a share
of), διδόναι, προςδιδόναι .-οϑιγγάνειν, ψαύειν, ἅπτεσϑαι, λαμβάνεσθαι, μετα-,
συλλαμβώνειν, ἐπι-. ἀντιλαμβώνεσθαι, συναίρεσθϑαι, ἔχεσϑαι (to adhere te, to bor-
der upon), üvr-, περιέχεσθαι, γλίχεσϑαι ;--τυγχάνειν (to acquire, to hit), λαγχά-
νειν, ἐφικνεῖσϑαι, κληρονομεῖν, προζήκει (μοί τινος, something belongs to me) 1---
ὀρέγεσϑαι, ἐφίεσϑαι, ἀντιποιεῖσϑαι, ἐντρέπεσϑαι, στοχάζεσθαι ;—the adjectives
κοινός, ἴσος, ὅμοιος, ἀντίος, ἐναντίος, παραπλήσιος (which however commouly
take the Dat.), ἐπιχώριος, φίλος, ἀδελφός, διάδοχος, also with Dat. ;—the adverbs
ἑξῆς, ἐφεξῆς, πρόσϑεν, Eumpoodev, ὄπισϑεν, μεταξύ, εὐϑύ, straight forward to, μέ-
xpt, up to, ἀντίον, πλησίον, etc.
Πολλάκις ol κακοὶ ἀρχῶν nal τιμῶν μετέχουσιν, evil men often par-
take of offices and honors. Θάλπους μὲν καὶ ψύχους καὶ σίτων καὶ πο-
τῶν καὶ ὕπνου ἀνάγκη καὶ τοῖς δούλοις μεταδιδόναι, πολεμικῆς δ'
ἐπιστήμης καὶ μελέτης οὐ peradoréoy, tis necessary to share heat and
cold, etc., with slaves, but we are not to share the knowledge of war, etc. 'O σοφὸς
τῆς ὕβρεως ἅμοιρός ἐστιν, is free from (does not partake of) insolence.
Ἄπτεσϑαι τῆς χειρός. λίμνη ἔχεται (borderson) τοῦ σήματος pe-
γάλη. Ἔργου éxope da, let us lay hold of, opus aggrediamur. ‘O στρατηγὸς
τῶν αὑτῶν τοῖς στρατιώταις συναίρεται κινδύνων, the general shares tn
the same dangers as the soldiers. Ἐπειδὴ ϑνητοῦ σώματος ἔτυχες, ἀϑ α-
varov δὲ ψυχῆς, πειρῶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀϑάνατον μνήμην καταλιπεῖν, since you
have obtained a mortal body, but an immortal spirit, etc. Τυγχάνειν, λαγχάνειν,
χρημάτων, εὐτυχίας. Tuxeiv τελευτῆς, ὀνόματος. 'Ορέγεσϑε or ἐφίεσϑε τῆς
ἀρετῆς, strive to obtain virtue, Ὅμοιος φυγῆς, ὁμοῖος τοῦ Ἡφαίστου, εὐθὺ Tv-
ϑείου, πλησίον Θηβῶν, ἑξῆς Πλούτωνος.
Rem. 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of, govern the Gen. of the part taken
hold of; 6. g. ἐλάβοντο τῆς ζώνης τὸν ᾿Ορόντην, they took Orontes by the girdle;
χειρὸς ἑλεῖν τινά, to take one by the hand. So any verb may govern the Gen,
when its action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part; 6. g. ἔταξε
Τλοῦν καὶ Πίγρητα, λαβόντας τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρατ οὔ, he commanded
G. and P., having taken a PART of the army; ἐδόκει, συγκαλέσαντας λοχαγοὺς καὶ
πελταστὰς καὶ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, they thought best, having called together the captains,
targetiers, and A PART of the heavy-armed, etc.
4. The active Gen., in the fourth place, denotes the place where,
and the time when, an action occurs. The action or event belongs,
as it were, to the place and time, and in a degree proceeds from
them, and is produced by them.
en ἐξ τυ. re
§ 158.) SYNTAX.-—GENITIVE. 213
The Gen. of place is rare in prose. Adverbs of place in the form of the
Gen. Sing. occur very frequently; 6. g. οὗ, where, αὐτοῦ (τόπου), there, at
that place, οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere, and others. "Avdn ϑάλλει τοῦ ἔαρος, blossoms
put forth in the spring, the spring being considered as the producer of the blos-
soms. So ϑέρους, in summer, χειμῶνος, in winter, ἡμέρας, by day, τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέ-
pac, νυκτός. The Gen. too denotes the time within which anything is done; 6. g.
Βασιλεὺς ob μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν, within ten days.
5. Finally, the active Gen. denotes the material of which any-
thing is made. This Gen. is used: |
(a) With verbs signifying to make or form from something ;—
with expressions denoting fulness and want ;—with verbs signifying
to eat, to drink, to taste, cause to taste, to enjoy ;-—to smell, and to
emit an odor of something.
Here belong the verbs ποιεῖν, πλήϑειν, πληροῦν, πιμπλάναι, γέμειν, carrey,
εὐπορεῖν, ἀπορεῖν, meveodaı, δεῖσϑαι, dei, σπανίζειν, χρή, ἐσϑίειν, φαγεῖν, ebw-
χεῖσϑαι, πίνειν, γεύειν, κορέσασϑαι, ἀπολαύειν, πνεῖν, ὄζειν, προςβώλλειν, ete.;
the adjectives πλέος, πλήρης, μεστός, πλούσιος, δασύς, πένης, ἐνδεής, etc. ;—ad-
verbs, as ἅλις.
Χάλκου πεποιημένα ἐστὶ τὰ ἀγάλματα, made of bronze. Ἔ στρωμ ἔ-
vn ἐστὶν ὁδὸς λίϑου, the way is paved with stone. (Hence the attributive rela-
tion, "Ἔκπωμα ξύλου, a cup [made] of wood. Τράπεζα ἀργυρίου. Στέφανος
Φακίνϑων). Ἢ ναῦς σεσαγμένη ἣν advdpornwy, the ship was loaded
with men. Τὰ ’Avafayöpov βιβλία γέμει σοφῶν λόγων, are full of wise say-
ings. ’Evraida ἧσαν κῶμαι πολλαὶ μεσταὶ oirov καὶ olvov, there many
villages abounded with food and wine. 'Anopeiv, πένεσθαι, σπανίζειν
τῶν χρημάτων, ἴο δὲ ἴῃ want of means. "Eadieryv κρεῶν, to eat of flesh.
Kopécaadat φορ βῆ ς, tobe filled with food. ΤΠ ίν εἰν olvov, todrink of wine.
"Απολαύειν πάντων τῶν dyad Gb», to enjoy all good things. Teteotac
τιμῆς, to taste honor. Tedeıvrıva τιμῇ ¢, to cause one to taste honor. ἴὌ ζειεν
ἴων, to smell violets, σύρου wv εἶν, to emit the smell of myrrh. Προςβάλλειν
μύρον. Πνεῖν τράγου. Ὄζειν κρομύων. ‘Qe ἡδύ μοι προς ἔ-
πνευσε χοιρείων κρεῶν, so sweet was the smell of swine’s flesh tome. Aa-
σὺς δένδρων, covered with trees; ϑηρίων πλήρης, full of animals.
Rem. 3. Verbs of eating and drinking, govern the Acc., (a) when the substance
is represented as consumed wholly or in a great measure; (b) when the sub-
stance is to be indicated as the common means of nutriment, which each one
takes; 6. g. Πένω τὸν olvov, πολὺν οἶνον, I drink the wine, much wine. Hence
sxivesy olvov is said of one whose usual drink is wine, but πένειν οἴνου is to
take ἃ drink of wine, to drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of
eating and drinking has a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or
drink of something. ᾿Απολαύειν τινός τι, signifies to receive good or evil
‚from some one.
Ren. 4. Δεῖ, as impersonal, may take the Dat. of the person, with the Gen.
of the thing or person needed ; ὁ. g. El μὲν ὑμῖν τινος ἄλλου dei, if you need any-
thing else. Δεῖ and χρή in the sense of necesse, opus est, are followed either by the
214 SYNTAX.— GENITIVE. [$ 158.
Inf. alone, or by the Acc. of the person with the Inf.; 6. g. dei (χρή) oe ταῦτα
ποιεῖν, you must do this. Δεὶ also, though more rarely, takes the Dat. of the per-
son with the Inf. ; 6. g. εἰ σοι δέοι διδάσκειν, if it were necessary for thee to teach.
(Ὁ) With verbs of sensation and perception ; e. g. ἀκούειν, ἀκροᾶ-
σϑαι, πυνθάνεσθαι, αἰσϑάνεσϑαι, ὀσφραίνεσϑαι, συνιέναι, to under-
stand; and with verbs of reminding, remembering and forgetting ;
6. g. μιμφήσκειν, μνημονεύειν, μέμφηαϑαι, ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι, and the
corresponding adverbs, 6. g. λάϑρα, κρύφα.
Καὶ κωφοῦ συνίημι, καὶ ob dwvoüvrds ἀκούω, I understand the
.dumb man, and hear him although he does not speak. Ὥς ὥσφροντο τάχιστα
τῶν καμήλων ol ἵπποι, as soon as the horses smelt the camels. Οὐκ ἀκροώ-
μένοι τοῦ ἄδοντος, not hearing the singer. ᾿Ακούειν δίκης, to hear a suit;
αἰσϑάνεσθϑαι κραυγῆς, ϑορύβου, ἐπιβουλῆς, to perceive a cry, te-
mult, plot. These verbs often govern the Acc. of the thing; often also they gov-
ern the Acc. of the thing in addition to the Gen. of the person; 6. g. Ὁ ’Appé-
νίος, ὡς ἤκουε τοῦ ἀγγέλου τὰ παρὰ τοῦ Κύρου, ἐξεπλάγη, but as soon as
the Armenian heard from the messenger the communication of Cyrus —. Οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ
καὶ ἀπόντων τῶν φίλων μέμνηνται, the good remember even absent
friends. Μὴ EmıAavdäavov τῶν εὐεργεσιῶν, do not forget acts of kind-
ness. Λάϑρα τῶν στρατηγῶν, without the knowledge of the soldiers.
(c) With expressions of being acquainted and unacquatnted with,
of experience and inexperience, of knowledge and tgnorance, of
making trial of something, and with those of ability, dexterity and
skill in anything. .
Here belong the words ἔμπειρος, ἄπειρος, ἐπιστήμων, ἐπιστώμενος, ἀνεπιστή-
μων, συγγνώμων, ἀδαῆς, ἀπαίδευτος, ἰδιώτης, πειρᾶσϑαι, ἀπείρως and ξένως ἔχειν,
and adjectives in -ἰκός (derived from transitive verbs) which express the idea of
dexterity. =
Ἔμπειρος οΥ ἐπιστήμων εἰμὶ τῆς τέχνης, I am acquainted with the
art. ᾿Απαίδευτος ἀρετῆς, μουσικῆς, ignorant of virtue, music; ov γ-
γνώμων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων πραγμάτων, pardoning (not knowing) hu-
man errors. ᾿Απείρως ἔχειν τῶν νομῶν, to be unacquainted with, ignorant
of, the laws; ἀποπειρᾶσθαι γνώ μη ς, to venture, to try un opinion. Ἐει-
ρώμενος τοῦ βάϑους, trying (making trial of) the depth; πειρώμενοι
ταύτης τῆς τάξεως, making trial of this arrangement. Kal rapaoxeve
στικὸν τῶν ele τὸν πόλεμον τὸν στρατηγὸν εἶναι χρὴ Kal ποριστεκὸν
τῶν ἐπιτηδείων τοῖς στρατιώταις, it is necessary for the general to be capable
of providing what pertains to the war, and of furnisking what is necessary for the sol-
diers. Διδασκαλικὸς τῆς σοφίας, skilled in teaching philosophy.
(d) Finally, with verbs signifying to see, to observe, to yudge, to
examine something, some action, external indication or single cir-
oumstance in one (os), particularly with verbs signifying to ad-
mire, to praise and blame.—The person in whom one sees, etc.
something, is put in the Gen., and that whieh is seen, etc., in the
$158.] SYNTAX.—-GENITIVE. 215 .
Acc., or in an aceessary clause, or in the Gen. of the Part. which
then agrees with the person.
Such verbs are ὁρᾷν, ϑεᾶσθϑαι, σκοπεῖν, ὑπονοεῖν, ἐννοεῖν, γιγνώσκειν, ἐπίσ-
τασϑαι, εἰδέναι, ἐνθυμεῖσϑαι, πυνϑάνεσθαι, alodaveodat, μανϑώνειν, κρίνειν,
ἐξετάζειν, λέγειν, δηλοῦν, ἄγασϑαι, ϑαυμάζειν, ἐπαινεῖν, μέμφεσϑαι, ψέγειν.
Πρῶτον μὲν αὐτῶν ἐσκόπει, he first considered in respect to them. "Hodncas
τοὐμοῦ βίου, thou hast observed in my way of life. "Ἔγνω ἐμοῦ ποιοῦντος, he per-
ceived that I was doing. Τὸ βραδὺ καὶ μέλλον, ὃ μέμφονται μάλιστα ἡμῶν
(which is the chief complaint they make against us), μὴ αἰσχύνεσϑε. Ei ἄγασαι
τοῦ πατρὸς, ὅσα πέπραχε, if you admire my father for what he has done. "Eya
καὶ τοῦτο ἐπαινῶ ᾿Αγησιλάου, 7 praise Agesilaus for this also. Topyiov
μάλιστα ταῦτα ἄγαμαι, 7 admire these things especially in Gorgias. Ὃ Sav-
μάζω τοῦ ἑταίρου, τόδε ἐστίν, what I admire in a companion is this. TloAAa
Ὁμήρου ἐπαινοῦμεν, we praise many things in Homer.
Rem. 5. When the above words refer merely to a thing which one admires,
blames or loves, they govern the Acc., sometimes also the Acc. of the person
alone; e. g.. ἐπαινεῖν, ψέγειν, μέμφεσϑαί τινα ; so also, üyaodaı, ϑαυμάζειν
τινά, to look with wonder at one, either at the person himself, or the whole nature of the
person.
b The Genitive as the expression of Cause.
6. The second division of the causal Gen. includes the Gen. which
expresses cause; i. e. the Gen. denotes the object which calls forth
and occasions the action of the subject. This Gen. stands:
I. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the mind,
viz. (a) with verbs signifying to desire, to long for ;—(b) to care for,
to be concerned for ;—(c) to be patned, to be grieved, to pity ;—(d)
to be angry and indignant ;—(e) with φϑονεῖν, to envy (zwi τινος,
Dat. of. person and Gen. of thing) ;—(f) to admire, praise and
blame (τινά τινος, Acc. of person and Gen. of thing).
Such verbs are, (a) éxcduueiv, ἐρᾷν, ἐρωτικῶς ἔχειν or dıaneiodar, διψῇν,
weg ;—(b) bxipedeiodats φροντίζειν, κήδεσϑαι, περιορᾶσϑαι, mpoopgy, ὑπερο-
ρᾷν, προνοεῖν, μέλει, μεταμέλει, ἀμελεῖν, ὀλιγωρεῖν, φείδεσϑαι ;—(c) ὀλοφύρε-
σϑαι, πενϑικῶς ἔχειν, ἐλεεῖν and οἰκτείρειν (with Acc. of person and Gen. of
thing) ;—(d) ὀργίζεσϑαι (with Dat. of person), χαλεπῶς φέρειν ;—(f) ϑαυμάζειν,
ἀγᾶσϑθϑαι, ζηλοῦν, ἐνδαιμονίζειν, ae μέμφεσθαι (all with Acc. of person and
Gen. of thing).
Οὐδεὶς ποτοῦ ἐπιϑυμεῖ, ἀλλὰ χρηστοῦ πατοῦ, καὶ οὐ σίτον, ἀλλὰ
χρηστοῦ σίτου" πάντες γὰρ ἄρα τῶν ἀγαϑῶν Ernıdvuoücıy,noone
desires drink, but wholesome drink, etc.; for all desire what is good. Τὸ ἀνόμοιον
ἀνομοίων ἐπιϑυμεῖ καὶ ἐρᾷ, desires and loves the unlike. Πεινῇν τῶν
σίτων, τῶν ποτῶν, τοῦ &raivov, to long for food, drink, praise. Ol νό-
po τοῦ κοινοῦ ἀγαϑοῦ ἐπιμέλονται, the laws care for, have a regard for
the public good. Ol γονεῖς πενϑικῶς εἶχον τοῦ παιδὸς τεϑνηκότος,
216 SYNTAZ.—GENITIVE. [8 156.
the parents grieved for their dead child. Ποσειδῶν Κύκλωπος ἐκεχάλωτο,
Neptune had been angry with the Cyclops. Ol κακοὶ φϑονοῦσι τοῖς ayadoic
τῆς σοφίας, the evil envy the good on account of their wisdom. "Ayapai σε
τῆς ἀνδρείας, I admire you on account of your bravery. Θαυμάζομεν τὸν
Σωκράτη τῆς σοφίας, we admire Socrates for his wisdom. Ζηλῶ oe rod
πλούτου, Ladmire you for your richs. Evdaruovilw oe τῶν ἀγαϑῶν,
7 consider you happy on account of your blessings, Alvö oe τῆς rpodupiac,
I praise you for your readiness.
Rem. 6. The verbs ἀγαπᾷν, φιλεῖν, στέργειν, to love, and ποϑεῖν,
to long for, do not govern the Gen., but the Acc. —M ἐλ εἰ, as impersonal, takes
the Dat. of the person carin g,and the Gen. of the person or thing cared for;
6. g. Μέλει μοί τινος, 7 care Ἣν some one. If the thing cared for is expressed by
& neuter pronoun, it may stand in the Nom. as the subject of the verb, which
then becomes personal; 6. g. Ταῦτα Yep μελήσει, God will take care of these things.
—The verbs Yavualeıv and ἄγασθαι have the following constructions:
(a) the Acc. of the person or the Acc. of the thing alone, when the wonder or
admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole nature of a
person or thing; 6. g. ϑαυμάζω (ἄγαμαι) τὸν στρατηγόν — ϑαυμάζω τὴν σοφίαν ;
—(b) the Gen. of the person and the Acc. of the thing, when we admire some
action, external manifestation, or single circumstance in a person; 6. g. τοῦτο
ϑαυμάζω cov — ϑαυμάζω (ἄγαμαι) cov, διότι οὐκ ἀργυρίου καὶ χρυσίου προείλον
ϑησαυροὺς κεκτῆσϑαι μᾶλλον ἢ σοφίας. Comp: 5, (d) ;—(c) the Ace. of the per-
agn and the Gen. of the thing, when we admire a person on account of some
quality; e.g. ϑαυμάζω (ἄγαμαι) τὸν Σωκράτη τῆς σοφίας. Comp. 6, I. Instead
of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition can be used here, commonly ἐπί with the
Dat.; e.g. ϑαυμάζω τὸν Σωκράτη ἐπὶ τῇ codia.—It will be seen that the relation
of the Gen. with verbs of praising, admiring and the like, i is expressed by the
prepositions for, on account of.
II. With verbs which signify to requite, to revenge, to punish, to
accuse and condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as
the cause of the requital, revenge, etc.
Here belong the verbs τιμωρεῖσϑαι, τίνεσϑαι, αἰτιᾶσϑαι, ἐπαιτιᾶσϑαι, διώ-
necv, εἰςάγειν, ὑπάγειν, γράφεσϑαι, προςκαλεῖσθαι, δικάζειν, κρίνειν, αἱρεῖν, to
convict (all with Acc. of person and Gen. of thing), ἐπεξιέναι, ἐγκαλεῖν, ἐπισκή.-
πτεσϑαι (all with Dat. of person and Gen. of thing), φεύγειν, to be accused, dAG-
vat, to be convicted.
᾿Οδυσσεὺς Eriaaro τοὺς μνηστῆρας τῆς ὑπερβασίας, Ulysses puntahed
the suitors for their wickedness. Τιμωρεῖσθϑαί τινα φόνσυ, to punish one, or
take vengeance upon one for murder. Ἔ Ππαιτιᾶσϑαί τινα φόνου, to accuse one
of murder, ᾿Επισκήπτεσθαί τινι τῶν ψευδομαρτυριῶν, to prosecute one
Jor false witness. Μιλτιάδην οἱ ἐχϑροὶ ἐδίωξαν τυραννίδος τῆς ἐν Χεῤ-
ῥονήσῳ, prosecuted (pursued judicially) Miltiades for his tyranny in Chersonesus.
Τράφεσϑ αἵ τινα παρανόμων, to indict or accuse one for unconstitutional measures.
Φεύγειν (to be accused) κλοπῆς, φόνον, ἀσεβείας. Κρίνεσθϑ αι (tobe accused)
ἀσεβείας. Δικάζουσιν οἱ Πέρσαι καὶ ἐγκλήματος,... . ἀχαριστέας,
the Persians condemn as a crime, ingratitude, etc. ‘AAGvat κλοπῆς, to be com
4
§ 158} SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. 217
victed of theft. Also the punishment of the guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen.
is to be considered as the Gen. of price, $ 158, 7. (y); 6. g. ϑανώτου, κρίνειν,
κρίνεσθαι, to condemn, to be condemned, to death.
Rem. 7. "EyxuAciv besides the above, has the following constructions: (a) the
Dat. of person and Acc. of thing, to charge something upon some one ;—(b) the Dat.
of person followed by a clause with örı or by the Inf. ;—(c) the Dat. of person
alone, to accuse (§ 161, 2. c) ;—(d) the Acc. of thing alone, to bring as a charge.
Karnyopeiv, to accuse, is construed, (a) with Gen. of person, sometimes with
κατά and Gen. ;—(b) with Gen. of person and Acc. of thing, to lay something ta
one’s charge ;—(c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, sometimes with περ
and Gen. of thing ;—(d) with Acc. of thing alone —Tiugy, rıuäcdaı, to fine or
punish one with, take the Dat. of person with Gen. of punishment; e. g. Τιμᾷν
τίνι δέκα ταλάντων, τοῦ Yavarov, to ‚fine one ten talents, sentence one to death.
Rem. 8. The causal Gen. is used with the adverbs ed, καλῶς, μετρίως
and some others, connected with the verbs ἔχειν, ἥκειν, and sometimes elvas,
to denote the object by which a particular condition is caused; e.g. εὖ τοῦ
βίου ἥκειν, to be well off as to the means of living; οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις,
you are thus in respect to circumstances = you are in such circumstances; wg T&-
xovg ἕκαστος εἶχεν, as quick as each one could.
© The Genitive denoting certain Mutual Relations.
7. The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by
which certain mutual relations are expressed. In these mutual re-
lations, one idea (e. g. that of superiority or inferiority) necessarily
supposes the other, and thus in a measure calls it forth and occa-
sions it. Hence the Gen. is used:
(a) With expressions of ruling, preéminence, excelling, promé-
nence, and the contrary, viz. those denoting subjection, yielding to,
and tnfertority.
Here belong the verbs ἄρχειν, κρατεῖν, δεσπόζειν, τυραννεῖν, τυραννεύειν,
στρατηγεῖν, ἐπιτροπεύειν, ἐπιστατεῖν, βασιλεύειν, ἡγεμονεύειν, ἡγεῖσϑαι, προέ-
yer, περιεῖναι, περιγίγνεσθαι, προςτατεῖν, ὑπερβάλλειν, ὑπερφέρειν, διαφέρειν,
πρωτεύειν, πρεσβεύειν, προκρίνειν, προτιμᾷν, πλεονεκτεῖν, ἡττᾶσϑαι, ὑστερεῖν,
«ἴζειν, λείπεσθαι, ἀπολείπεσϑαι, ἐλαττοῦσϑαι, μειοῦσϑαι, μειονεκτεῖν, ὕστερον
εἶναι, ἥττονα εἶναι ; the adjectives ἀκρατής, ἐγκρατῆς.
Ὁ λόγος τοῦ ἔργου ἐκράτει, thereport exceeded the thing itself. Τὰ μοχϑη-
pa ἀνθϑοώπια πασῶν, οἶμαι, τῶν ἐπιϑυμιῶν ἀκρατῆ ἐστιν, depraved men
‘are subject to (not able to control) all their passions. Πολλάκις λύπῃ ὑπερβάλλει
τὸ ἀδικεῖν τοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι, the doing an injury often exceeds in grief the being
injured. Ol πονηροὶ ἡττῶνται τῶν ἐπιϑυμιῶν, wicked men are slaves te
(inferior to) their passions.
Rem. 9. Hyepovevewv and ἡγεῖσϑαι in the sense of to go before, with ὁδόν ex-
pressed or understood, to show the way? govern the Dat.; κρατεῖν in the sense of
to conquer, regularly governs the Acc., but in the sense of to rule, the Gen.
19
218 SYNTAX.—GENITIVE. [8 158.
(8) With the comparative and with adjectives in the positive,
which have the force of the comparative, 6. g. numerals in -aotog
and -πλοῦς, etc., the object by which the comparison is made, is put
in the Gen.
Ὁ υἱὸς μείζων ἐστὶ rod marpöc, greater than his father. Χρυσὸς κρείττων
μυρίων λόγων βροτοῖς, gold is better for men than a myriad of words. Τὸ
“Ἑλληνικὸν στράτευμα φαίνεται πολλαπλάσιον ἔσεσϑαι τοῦ ἡμετέρου,
many times larger than ours. Οὐδενὸς δεύτερος, ὕστερος, inferior to no one,
Τῶν ἀρκούντων περιττὰ κτήσασϑαι, to acquire more than enough.
(y) With verbs signifying to buy and sell, exchange and barter,
and with expressions of valuing (ἀξιοῦν, ἄξιος), of being worthy or
unworthy ; and generally, the price of a thing stands in the Gen.
Such verbs are ὠνεῖσϑαι, ἀγοράζειν, mpiaodaı, κτᾶσϑαι, παραλαμβάνειν, πω-
λεῖν, ἀπο-, περιδίδοσϑαι, διδόναι, ἀλλάττειν, -εσϑαι, διαμείβεσϑαι, λύειν, τιμᾷν,
τιμᾶσϑαι, ποιεῖσϑαι.
Οἱ Θρᾶκες ὠνοῦνται τὰς γυναῖκας παρὰ τῶν γονέων χρημάτων μεγάλων,
buy their wives from their parents at a great price. Τῶν πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν
πάντα τἀγάϑ᾽ ol Seoi, the gods sell all good things to us for toils. Ol ἀγαϑοὶ οὐδενὸς
ἂν κέρδους τὴν τῆς πατρίδος ἐλευϑερίαν ἀνταλλάξαιεν το, the good would
exchange the freedom of their country for πο gain. Ἰατρὸς πολλῶν ἄλλων ἀντά-
ξιεός ἐστιν, a physician is worth as much as many others. "Eywye οὐδὲν ἀνισώτερον
νομίζω τῶν ἐν ἀνϑρώποις εἶναι τοῦ τῶν ἴσων τόν τε κακὸν καὶ ἀγαϑὸν a ξιο ὕ:
σϑαι, I think there is nothing more unequal among men than that the evil and the good
should be honored equally. "AEtoc τιμῆ ¢, worthy of honor. Πόσου dıdao-
wet; πέντε μνῶν, for how much does he teach? For five minae; ἀργυρίον,
utav0ot ἐργάζεσθαι, to work for money, for hire.
LXXXIII. Evercises on 88 157, 158.
The soul must be restrained from evil desires. It is mournful and grievous
to be deprived of the good-will of men. The soul, if (ἐάν, w. subj.) it depart
from the body polluted and impure, is not immediately with God. As the body,
bereft of the soul, sinks away (= falls), so also a state, bereft of laws, will be
dissolved. He who (ὅςτις) does not consider the highest good (= the best),
but in (ἐκ) every way seeks to do that which is (= the) most agreeable, how
can ($ 158, 2. 6) (he) differ from the irrational brutes? The battle has deliver-
ed us from shameful slavery. We esteem the old man happy, because he is
free from passions. Epaminondas sprang (== was) from an obscure father.
From Telamon sprang (yiyveodaı) Ajax and Teucer, from Peleus, Achilles,
It is the business of the general to command, but the duty of the soldiers, to
obey. Stags were sacred to Artemis. Of all friends, the first and truest isa
brother. Socrates generously proffered what was his to all. The hired labor-
ers, who (ὅςτις) for the sake of a subsistence performed slave-labors and parti-
Cipated in no office, were the poorest of the Athenians. A good king allows the
Citizens to enjoy ( = participate in) a just freedom of speech and action. The
word takes hold upon the spirit. Hold fast, young men, to instruction, and di-
8. 158.) S¥NTAX.—GENITIVE. 219
rect yourselves to (πρός, w. acc.) that which is ( = the) more excellent (plur.).
The virtues of good men obtain honor and fame even with enemies. The young
{comp.) must (xp7, το. acc. and inf.) aspire after the good (plur.) and abstain
from evil actions. The pains of the sick are more violent at night than by day.
In winter, men desire summer, but in summer, winter. Hercules cleared (==
tamed out) Lybia, which was (part.) fall of wild beasts. The good lack not
praise. Those ( = the) natures, that seem (part.) to be the best, most need ed-
ucation. The earth is full of injustice. Virtue leads us (in) a rugged and
toilsome (= full of sweat) path. Aetna is filled (yées) with valuable firs and
pines. We contrive much, whereby (δι᾽ ὧν) to (= we may) enjoy the good
(plur.) and avert the evil. Milo, the Crotonian, ate twenty minae of flesh (plur.)
and as much bread (plur.), and (dé) drank three flagons of wine. Men derive
many advantages from sheep, horses, cows and the other animals. It is writ-
ten in the laws, that both the plaintiff and the defendant should be heard alike
(= to hear alike both, etc.). It is fair and right, to be mindful of the good (plur.)
rather than of the evil. It is pleasant to the unhappy to forget, even for a short
time, present evils. Since (part.) thon art young, be willing to hear thine (=
the) elders. He who is unacquainted with the sciences, though he sees, sees
not ( = the unacquainted — seeing, sees not). Hermes had great experience
in the medical science. It is better to die (aer.) than to exercise ( = make trial
of) violence. Socrates considered with respect to philosophers,—whether (76-
repa) they devoted ( = turned) themselves to (ἐπέ, w. acc.) reflection (τὸ ¢pov-
τίζειν, το. gen.) upon the celestial, from the opinion (part. aor.) that they already
sufficiently understood (inf. pres.) the human (plur.), or (whether they) supposed.
that they did what was befitting in neglecting (aer.) the human and (= but)
eontemplating the divine. This we admire in Socrates, that even while banter-
ing, he could instruct the young men, who (part.) associated with him. Socrates
exhorted young men to aspire after the fairest and choicest virtue, by (dat.)
which both states and households are wisely (= well) directed. Piuto, who
(part.) loved (aor.) Proserpine, stole her away secretly with the coöperation of
Jupiter. That is a poor president, who (ὅςτις) cares for the present time, but
is not (47) also provident for the future. Do not neglect ‘even absent friends.
Be sparing of time. The good (man) is more concerned for the common weal,
than for his (own) fame. Many care more for the acquisition of money than
for that of friends. The Athenian state (of the A.) often repented (aor.) of sen-
tences passed ( = which happened, aor. part.) in (werd, w. gen.) anger and with-
out (= not [μή] with) examination. I pity thee for thy mournful fate. Envy
(aor.) me not the memorial. Demosthenes we admire for his (= the)
greatness of nature and self-command in action ( = practice), and for his dig.
nity (= gravity), promptitude, boldness of speech and firmness. Anaxa-
goras is said to have been condemned (aor.) for impiety, because he called the
sun a red-hot mass. Melitus accused (aor.) Socrates of impiety. Themistocles
was accused, in his absence (ἀποδημῶν), of treason and condemned to death.
All (things) everywhere are subject to the gods, and the gods rule alike.over
all. Apollo led the nine Muses, whence he was also called the Muse-leader.
Why are the educated prominent above the uneducated? Cadmus of Sidon
(= the Sidonian) reigned (aor.) over Thebes, but over the whole of Peloponne-
220 SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE. [$ 159.
sus reigned Pclops, the (son) of Tantalus. Many are slaves (7rrovec) to money.
Govern appetite, sleep and anger. The bravery of the Greeks triumphed over
(mepiyiyveodaı, aor.) the power of the king of the Persians. Nothing is more
valuable to men, than the cultivation of the mind. No teacher of hunger, thirst
and cold is better than necessity. Thou canst (ὁ 158, 3. c) not purchase virtue
and nobleness of mind for money. Diphridas took Tigranes with his wife, and
released them for a large sum (== much) of money. The Chaidacans enlisted
for pay, because they were very warlike and poor. They only who (§ 148, 6)
practise virtue, are worthy of honor. The benefactors of men are deemed
{aor.) worthy of immortal honors.
8159. I. Accusative.
1. The Accusative Case expresses the relation whither, and de-
notes, (a) in a local relation, the limit or point to which the action
of the verb is directed ; in prose, however, a preposition is regularly
used here; 6. g. eis ἄστυ ἐλϑεῖν ;—(b) in the causal relation, it de-
notes the effect, consequence, result, of the action of the verb, as well
as the object on which the action is performed. In this latter rela-
tion, the object in the Acc. receives the action performed by the
subject, i. 6. is in a passive or suffering condition; whereas, with
the Gen., the subject is represented as receiving the action. Comp.
§ 158, a. et seq. The Acc. also differs from the Dat. in being the
smmediate or direct object of the verb, while the Dat. is the remote
or tndtrect object. Comp. § 161, 2.
(a) Accusative denoting Effect.
2. The Accusative of effect is used as in other languages ; 6. g.
γράφω ἐπιστολήν (ἐπιστολήν being the effect of the action of the
verb). In respect to the Greek, it is to be observed, that a verb
either transitive or intransitive very frequently governs the Acc. of
a substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pronoun
eommonly belongs to the Acc. This is commonly called the Acc.
of a kindred or cognate signification. |
Ἐπιμελοῦνται πᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν, they take care with all diligence.
Δέομαι ὑμῶν δικαίαν δέησιν, Task of youa just request. So καλὰς πράξεις
πράττειν,---ἐργάζεσϑαι ἔργον καλόν,---ἄρχειν ἀρχήν,---δουλείαν δουλεύεεν,---πό-
λεμον πολεμεῖν͵---νόσον νοσεῖν. "Opkovs ὀμνύναι, to swear oaths ; ἀσϑενεῖν vo
σον, to be sick of a disease ; Civ βίον, to live a life.
§ 109.) SYNTAX.—-ACCUSATIVE. 321
(b) Accusative ofthe Objecton which the actionis
performed,i.e.the suffering Object.
3. Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin,
take some other Case than the Acc., or are constructed with prepo-
sitions. They are:
(1) The verbs ὠφελεῖν, orıwavaı, ὀνίρασθϑαι (λυσιτελεῖν, however,
with Dat.), to be useful; βλάπτειν, ἀδικεῖν, ὑβρίζειν, λυμαίνεσϑαι,
λωβᾶσϑαι; εὐσεβεῖν, ἀσεβεῖν ; λοχᾷν, ἐνεδρεύειν, insidtari; τιμω.-
ρεῖσϑαι; ϑεραπεύειν, δορυφορεῖν, ἐπιτροπεύειν, to be a σιαγάϊαπ;
κολαχεύειν, θωπεύειν, ϑώπτειν, προςκυνεῖν ; πείθειν ; ἀμείβεσθαι,
respondere and remunerari ; φυλάττεσθαι, εὐλαβεῖσθαι; μιμεῖσθαι,
ζηλοῦν.
Θεράπευε τοὺς ἀϑανάτους, serve the gods. ᾿Αλκιβιάδῃης ἔπειϑε τὸ
πλῆϑος, Al. persuaded the multitude. Πλείσταρχον, τὸν Λεωνέδου, ὄντα βα-
σιλέα καὶ νέον ἔτι, ἐπετρόπενεν ὁ Ilavoavias, Pausanias was the guardian of
Plistarchus, ete. Μὴ noAaneve τοὺς φίλους, donot flatter friends. ᾿Ὦ ὁ ἔ-
“λει τοὺς φίλους, καὶ μὴ βλάπτε τοὺς ἐχϑροῦύς, assist friends, and do
not injure enemies. Μὴ ἀδίκει τοὺς φίλους. Μὴ ὕβριζε τοὺς παῖ-
dag. Πολλάκις καὶ δοῦλοι τιμωροῦνται τοὺς ἀδίκους δεσπότας,
often even slaves take vengeance on ther unjust masters. ᾿Αμείβεσθϑαί rıya
μόϑοις, λόγοις, to answer one; ἀμείβεσθαι χάριν, ebepyeoiavordusi-
βεσϑαί τινα xüpırı, to return a favor to one.
(2) Verbs which signify to do good or evil to any one, by word
or deed. Such are εὐεργετεῖν, κακουργεῖν, κακοποιεῖν, εὐλογεῖν, κα-
κολογεῖν, εὖ, καλῶς, κακῶς λέγειν, εἰπεῖν, ἀπαγορεύειν.
ἤΑάνϑρωπε, μὴ δρᾶ τοὺς τεϑνηκότας κακῶς, do not injure the dead.
Μὴ κακούργει τοὺς φίλους, do not harm your friends. Ebepy£rei
τὴν πατρίδα, do good to your country, Et ποίει τοὺς φίλου ς, confer
favors on your friends. EV λέγε τὸν ed λέγοντα, καὶ εὖ ποίει τὸν εὖ
moLoövra, speak well of him who speaks well, and do well to him who does well.
Instead of the adverbs ed and κακῶς with ποιεῖν, etc., the Greek also uses the
corresponding adjectives: καλὰ, κακὰ woteiv, λέγεεν Tıva,iodoor say
good or ill to one. See under double Accusative (§ 160, 2).
(8) Verbs of persevering, awatting, watting for, and the con-
trary; 6. g. μένειν, θαῤῥεῖν; φεύγειν, ἀποδιδράσκειν, Spanerevas.
Μὴ φεῦγε τὸν κίνδυνον, do not flee from danger. Χρὴ ϑαῤῥεῖν 06-
yarov, it is necessary to meet death bravely = not to fear death. ὋὉ δοῦλος ἀπά
dpa τὸν δεσπότην, the slave ran away from his master. Ol τῶν πραγμάτων
καιροὶ οὐ μένουσι τὴν ἡμετέραν βραδυτῆτα, the favorable opportunities
for action do not wait for our slothfulness.
(4) Verbs of concealing and being concealed, viz. λανϑάνειν,
κρύπεϑιν Se) κρύπτεσθαι;---οαἶϑο the verbs PO avec (to am-
199
383 SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE. [9 159.
ticipate), Asimsıy, ἐπιλείπειν, to fail ;—verbs of swearing and
the like. With verbs of swearing, the object sworn by is put in the
Acc. Hence also adverbs of swearing are followed by the Ace;
. g. ud, οὐ μά, ναὶ ud, 97.
Θεοὺς οὔτε λανϑάνειν, οὔτε βιάσασϑαι δυνατὸν, it is not possible to be
concealed from, to escape.the natice of the gods, etc. Ol πολέμιοι EGU yaa τοὺς
᾿ϑηναίου ς ἀφικόμενοι εἰς τὸ ἄστυ, anticipated the Athenians in coming into the
city, i. 6. reached the city before them. "Emtdeinet με ὁ χρόνος, ἡ ἡμέρα, the
time, the day fails me. "Opvupe πάντας τοὺς ϑεούς, I swear by all the gods.
Nai μὰ Aia, yes, by Jupiter! Ma τοὺς deotec, by the gods.
+ (δ) Very many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the
mind ; e.g. φοβεῖσθαι, δεῖσαι; αἰσχύνεσθαι, αἰδεῖσθαι; ἄχϑεσθαι;
δυςχεραίνειν; ἐκπλήττεσθαι, καταπλήτεεσθαι; οἰκτείρειν, ἐλεεῖν,
ὀλοφύρεσϑαι, etc.
Χρὴ αἰδεῖσϑαι τοὺς ϑεούς, it is necessary to reverence the gods. Alo-
χύνομαι τὸν ϑεόν, Tam ashamed before the god. ᾿Ολοφύρου τοὺς πὸ
νητας, pity the poor.
(6) With verbs of motion, the space or way is put in the Acc,
these being the objects on which the action of the verb is perform-
ed; so also the time during which an action takes place, in answer
to the question, How long? so too measure and weight, in answer to
the question, How much?
Baiveıv, περᾷν, ἕρπειν, πορεύεσθαι 6864, to goa way, like itqus
reditque viam. Χρόνον, τὸν χρόνον, a long time, νύκτα, ἡμέραν, dur
ang the night, day. Ἢ Σύβαρις ἤκμαζε τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον μάλιστα, was
flourishing during this time. ᾿Ισχυσάν τι καὶ Θηβαῖοι τοὺς τελευταίους
τουτουσὶ χρόνους μετὰ τὴν ἐν Λεύκτροις μάχην, during these last time.
Μιλτιάδης ἀπέπλει Πάρον πολιορκήσας &§ καὶ εἴκοσιν ἡ μέρα ς, having besieged P.
twenty-siz days. Td Βαβυλώνιον τάλαντον δύναται Εὐβοΐδας Eßdounxon
τα μνᾶς, the Babylonian talent is worth (weighs as much as, amounts to) seventy
Euboean minae. So δύναμαι, signifying to be worth, regularly takes the Acc.
(7) Finally, the Acc. is used with intransitive or passive verbs
and intransitive adjectives of all kinds, to explain them more fully.
Here, also, the Acc. represents the object as acted upon or suffering,
since it denotes the object to which the intransitive action of the
verb or adjective refers or is directed. This is the Acc. of more
definite limitation, or, as it is often called, the Ace. of synecdoche.
Κάμνειν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοῦς, to be pained in or in respect to the eyes; τὰς
φρένας ὑγιαίνειν, to be sound in mind; ἀλγεῖν τοὺς πόδας, τὰ σώματα,
to have pain in the feet, body. Διαφέρει γυνὴ ἀνδρὸς τὴν φύσιν, woman diffes
in ‘(in respect to) her nuture from man. ‘O ἄνθρωπος τὸν δάκτυλον ἀλγεῖ, the
man has a pain in his finger (is pained in respect to). ᾿Αγαϑὸς τέχνην τινά,
$159. ] SIWTAX.——ACCUSATIVE. 228
ekstinguiahed in some art. Διεφϑαρμένος τὴν ψυ χήν, corrupt in spiri. Φάνης
καὶ γνώμην ἱκανός, καὶ τὰ κολέμια ἄλκιμος ἣν, Phanes was competent im
counsel, and brave in battle. ‘Avéorn Φεραύλας τὸ σῶμα οὐκ ἀφυὴς καὶ τὴν
ψυχὴν οὐκ ἀγεννεῖ ἀνδρὶ ἐοικῶς. The English commonly uses prepositions
to express the force of this Acc., viz. ir, in respect to, of; or when it stands with
an adjective, the English sometimes changes the Acc. of the thing into a perse-
nal substantive and makes the adjective agree with it; 6. g. ἀγαϑὸς τέχνην, a
good artist, or the prepositions of or with are placed before the substantive denot-
ing the thing, and the attributive adjective is made to agree with that substan-
tive; 6. g. νεανίας καλὸς τὴν ψυχήν, a youth of or with a lovely spirit.
Remark. In this way many adverbial expressions are to be explained, as,
εὖρος, ὕψος, μέγεϑος, βάϑος, μῆκος, πλῆϑος, ἀριϑμόν, γένος, ὄνομα, μέρος , also
rl, τοσοῦτον, μέγα, πᾶν, πάντα, τὸ λοιπόν, etc.; e.g. Κλέανδρος γένος ἦν Φι-
γαλεὺς ἀπ᾽ ᾿Αρκαδίας, a Phigalian by descent. Μετὰ ταῦτα ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν
Ζάβατον ποταμὸν τὸ εὗρος τεττάρων πλέϑρων, four hundred feet in width.
LXXXIV. Exercises on $ 159.
He who is enslaved (part.) to pleasures, submits to (= serves) the most shame-
fal servitude. The laws not orily punish the wrong-doers, but also benefit the
virtuous. If thou wishest to be beloved by friends, benefit (thy) friends; if thou
deeirest to be honored by a state, be useful to and benefit the state. Riches of-
ten injure both the body (plur.) and the mind (plur.). He who ($ 148, 6) flatters
friends, does them much (πολλά) wrong. ‚Revenge not thyself upon thine ene-
mies. Those who (part.) injure a benefactor, are punished by God. We wor-
ship no man as lord, but the gods. Sedentary trades injure the body (plur.) and
enfeeble the mind (plur.). The hunter lays snares for the hares. Endeavor to
repay benefactors with gratitude. Beware most of all of meetings for (év) ca-
rousal. Imitate wise men. Prudent men (sing.) take heed to the danger, from
which they have once been rescued (aor.). We must (χρεών) emulate works
and acts, not words of virtue. It is said, that (acc. w. inf.) Xerxes threw down
(aor.) fetters into the Hellespont in order to revenge (part. fut.) himself upon
the Hellespont. A slave, who has run away (aor. part.) from his master, de-
serves stripes. Shun a pleasure that afterward brings pain. The general must
(xp, το. acc. and inf.) demean himself kindly towards (πρός, τσ. acc.) his soldiers,
that they may have confidence (ϑαῤῥεῖν) in him. Tell me, what (ὁποῖος) pun-
ishment the betrayer of his country will expect after ἱμετά, w.acc.) death. Con-
ceal (aor. mid.) from me nothing, (my) friend. To deceive (aor.) men is easy;
but to remain concealed from God (is) impossible. Provision (βίος) failed the
army. I swear to you by all the gods and all the goddesses, that I have never
injured any one of the citizens (= to have injured no one, etc.). Young men
must (dei, w. acc. and inf.) have respect, in (ἐπέ, το. gen.) the house, to parents,
in (ἐν) the ways, to those who meet (part.) them, in solitude (plur.), to themselves.
The beginning of wisdom is to fear God. Have compassion (aor.) upon me,
who (part.) am unfortunate beyond desert. The Lacedaemonians had not less
reverence for old men than for (their) fathers. Shrink not from going (inf.) a
long way to (πρός, τ΄. acc.) those who ($ 148, 6) profess to teach anything useful.
For a long time the Lacedaemonians had (aor.) the supremacy of Greece by
224 SYNTAX.—DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [9 160.
(κατά, το. ace.) land and by sea. Theophrastus died (aor.) after (part.) he
had lived (aor.) eighty-five years. Phanes was of sufficient prudence (= sufi-
cient in prudence), and brave in battle. Men seem to be well in body (plu)
after (4x6) many labors. Cyrus was very beautiful in person, of a humane
heart, (and) very fond of learning and very eager for honor. Larissa was built
of (dat.) earthen tiles; underneath was a stone foundation of twenty feet m
height.
§160. Double Accusative.
In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the Acc.
with one verb.
1. In the construction mentioned above, § 159, 2, when the verb
has a transitive signification, 6. g. φιλίαν φιλφὲν ; then the idea of
activity consisting of the verb and substantive, with which an ad-
jective usually agrees, being blended into one, may at the same time
be extended to a personal object; e.g. po μεγάλην φιλίαν
(== μέγα φιλῶ) cov παῖδα, Tlove the boy with great love (greatly);
καλῶ os τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα, J call you this name or by this name.
Here φιλίαν and ὄνομα are Accusatives of cognate signification,
having a sense similar to their respective verbs.
2. Expressions of doing or saying good or evil, which may contain
an Acc. of the thing said or done, take the object to which the good
or evil is done in the Acc. The Acc. here also, denotes the object
acted upon; e. g. ποιεῖν, πράττειν, ἐργάζεσθαι, etc., λέγειν, εἰπεῖν,
etc., ἀγαϑά, κακά τινα, to do good or evil to any one, to say
good or evil of any one.
Τότε δὴ ὁ Θεμιστοκλῆς ἐκεῖνόν τε καὶ τοὺς Kopıvdiovg πολλά te
καὶ κακὰ ἔλεγεν, Themistocles said much evil of him and the Corinthians. Οὐ-
δεπώποτε ἐπαύοντο πολλὰ ἡμᾶς ποιοῦντες κακά, never ceased to ὦ
much evil to us.
Rem. 1. Instead of the Acc. of the object acted upon, the Dat. is sometimes
used, which is to be considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage ; 6. 8.
προςκόπει, Ti σοι ποιήσουσιν ol ἀρχόμενοι, consider what your subjects shall do
FOR you; but with σέ, what they will do TO you.
8. Moreover, verbs take two Accusatives, which signify to make,
to choose, to appoint, to nominate, to consider as anything, to de
clare, to represent, to regard, to know, to say, to name, to call; e. g.
ποιεῖν, τιϑέναι (to appoint), καϑιστάναι, αἱρεῖσθαι, νομίζειν, ἡγεῖσϑαι,
λέγειν, ὀνομάζειν, καλεῖν, etc.—One of these Accusatives is the ob-
ject acted upon, or the suffering object, the other is the predicate,
and hence may often be an adjective.
5
§ 160.] SYNTAX.—DQUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 235
Ὃ Κῦρος τοὺς φίλους ἐποίησε πλουσίους, made his friends rich.
Παιδεύειν τινὰ σοφόν, to educate one wise, i. 6. make wiss by education.
Alpeıv τινὰ μέγαν, to make one great. Νομίζειν, ἡγεῖσϑαί τινα
ἄνδρα dyad éy», to think, to consider some one a good man. ’'Ovopa tery τινὰ
σοφιστῆν, to call onea sophist. Alpeiodai τινα orparn y 6», tochoose one
acommander. Τὸν Γωβρύαν σύνδειπνον παρέλαβεν, hemade Gobryas
his companion at supper. Πόλεως πλοῦτον ἡγοῦμαι συμμάχους, πίσ-
τιν, εὔνοιαν.
Rem. 2. In the passive construction, this explanatory Acc. is changed into
the Nom. and agrees with the subject; ὁ. g. Παιδεύειν τινὰ σοφόν, but Pass. τὶς
ἐπαιδεύϑη σοφός; αἱρεῖσϑαί τινα στρατηγόν, but Pass. ric ὄρεϑη arpa-
τηγός.
4. With verbs, (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquiring,
asking, 6. g. αἰτεῖν, πράττειν (to demand), πράττεσθαι, ἐρωτᾷν,
ἐξετάζειν, ἱστορεῖν ; (β) of teaching, 6. g. διδάσκειν, παιδεύξιν ; (y)
of dividing, cutting in pieces, 6. g. διαιρεῖν, τέμνειν, διανέμειν ; (8)
of depriving, taking away, 6. g. ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, στερεῖν, ἀποστερεῖν,
συλᾷν, etc.; (8) of concealing or hiding from, e. g. κρύπτειν; (Ὁ of
putting on and off, 6. g. évdvew, ἐκδύειν, ἀμφιεννύναι.
Πέμψας Καμβύσης εἰς Αἴγυπτον κήρυκα, $ret μασιν Suyarépa, asked
Amasis for his daughter. Αὐτοὺς ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἔπραξαν, demanded of
them a hundred talents. 'Apytptov πράττειν rıvä, to exact money from one.
Πολλὰ διδάσκει με ὁ πολὺς βίοτος, teaches me many things. Παιδεύον-
σι τοὺς παῖδας τρία μόνα, they teach the boys three things only. Τ' λ ὦ τ.
τάν τε τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν καὶ τρόπους τῶν ᾿Αϑηναίων ἐδίδασκον τοὺς παῖ-
δας, they taught the boys the Attic tongue and the Athenian customs. Τρεῖς μοί-
ρας ὁ Ἐέρξης ἐδάσατο πάντα τὸν πεζὸν στρατόν, divided all the
land-army into three divisions. Τέμνειν, διαιρεῖν τι μέρη, μοίρας, to ἀϊ-
vide anything into parts. ‘O Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα
μέρη, divided the army into twelve parts. Τὸν μόνον μοι καὶ φίλον παῖδα
ἀφείλετο τὴν ψυχῆν, deprived my only child of life. Τὴν τιμὴν ἀποσ-
τερεῖ με, he robs me of honor. Ta ἡμέτερα ἡμᾶς ἀποστερεῖ ὁ bi.
Anno. Κρύπτω σε τὸ ἀτύχη μα, 7 conceal the misfortune from you. Παῖς
μέγας ἕτερον παῖδα μικρὸν μέγαν χιτῶνα ἐξέδυσε, καὶ τὸν χι-
τῶνα μὲν ἑαυτοῦ ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε, a large boy stripped another small boy of
his large tunic, and put his own tuntc on him.
Rem. 8. ’Amoorepeiv and ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, to deprive, to take away, are construed (a)
with Acc. of thing alone ;—(b) with Acc. of person alone, but rarely ;—(c) with
Acc. both of person and of thing, very often ;—(d) with Gen. of person and Ace.
of thing, less often ;—(e) ἀποστερεῖν with Acc. of person and Gen. of thing, very
often (4 157.), d¢a:peioSar very seldom, and then means to prevent; στερεῖν
is construed both as in (c) and (e).
Rem. 4. When the active verbs mentioned under No. 4, are changed into the
passive, the Acc. of the object receiving the action, becomes the Nom., but the
Ace. of the thing remains (according to § 150, 4); 6.5. Ῥρωτῶμαι τὴν γνώ.
276 SYNTAX.—DATIVE. [§ 161.
env, I am asked my opinion. Wardebopar, διδάσκομαι kovsınhv, I
am taught, I learn music. Γῇ δὲ καὶ οἰκήσεις τὰ αὐτὰ μέρη διανεμηϑήτοω,
let the land and sis habitations be divided into the same number of parts. ᾿Αφαιρε
Oval ἀποστερηϑῆναι τὴν ἀρχῆν, to be deprived of office. Kptrro
μαι τοῦτο τὸ πρᾶγμα, this thing ts concealed from me. ᾿Αμφιέννυμαι
χιτῶνα, 7 am clothed with, or I put on a tunic.
Rex. 5. Even some verbs, which in the active are constructed with the Dat
of the person and the Acc. of the thing, in the passive change this Dat. of the
person into the Nem., while the Acc. of the thing remains. The follewing are
regularly so constructed: ἐπιτάττειν, Erırpenew, ἐπιστέλλειν τενί rt, to com
mit, to entrust something to some one, 6. g. "Exitpéxopat, ἐπιτάττομαι, ἐπιστέλλομαι
τὴν φυλακῶν, Lam entrusted with the guard, or the quard is entrusted to me.
Rem. 6. The σχῆμα xa’ ὅλον καὶ μέρος occurs with the Acc. as well as with
the Nom. ($ 147b, Rem. 2); e. g. Ol πολέμιοι rode πολίτας rode μὲν
ἀπέκτειναν, τοὺς δὲ ἐδουλώσαντο, as for the citizens, the enemy killed some, and
enslaved others, or the enemy killed some of the citizens, etc.
LXXXV. Exereises on § 160.
When Pyrrhus had twice conquered (aor.) in engagements (συμβάλλειν, aor
part.) with the Romans, having lost (aor.) many of his friends and leaders, he
said: Although (ἐάν, w. subj.) we have conquered (aor.) the Romans in battle,
we are ruined. Critias and Alcibiades occasioned (aor.) very many evils to the
state. The gods have conferred (aor.) many blessings upon human life. Esteem
labor as the guide to (gen.) pleasant life. Plato called (aor.) philosophy a
preparation for (gen.) death. Misfortune makes men more thoughtful. Socrates
did not exact from those who (§ 148, 6) had intercourse with him, (any) money
for (gen.) his conversation. Apollo, who was (γίγνεσθαι, aor. part.) the inven-
tor of the bow, taught men archery. The Greeks, in the Median (wars), took
(aor. part.) the supremacy from the Lacedaemonians and gave it to the Athe
nians. The public square of the Persians surrounding (= around) the gover-
nor’s residence, is divided into four parts; of these, one is for boys, another for
youths, another for adult men, another for those who (§ 148, 6) are (yiyveoVa,
perf.) past (= over, beyond) military years. Many, who (part.) have meas
minds, are adorned (= invested) with fine persons and fine lineage (plur.) and
wealth (plur.). Wisdom was taught to many young men by Socrates. After
(part.) the power was taken from (aor.) Croesus, he lived with Cyrus. The sol
diers, to whom (part.) the guard had been intrusted, had fled.
§ 161. IIL Dative.
1. The Dative Case expresses the relation where, and snes is
used, first, to denote, (a) the place in which an action is performed ;
in prose, however, prepositions are commonly joined with substan-
tives expressing this relation, 6. g. ἐν dgat, in monte;—(b) the
time when or in which an action is performed, e. g. ravey τῇ
$161.] SINTAK.—BATIVE 227
ἡμέρᾳ, this day; τῇ αὐτῇ νυκτί the same night; πολλοῖς
stacey, many years; τρίτῳ μηνί; τῇ αὐτῇ ὥρᾳ; here also
the preposition ἐν is often used ;—(c) the being with, associating,
accompanying, (a) the Dat. singular of collective nouns, or the Dat.
plural of common nouns, connected with a verb of going or coming,
6. g. Adıraioı ἦλθον aly Oat οὐκ ὀλίγῳ, πολλαῖς ναυσίν,
στρατῷ, σερατιώταις, etc., came with a large number, with
many ships, with an army, with soldiers, etc.; (ß) the Dat. connect-
ed with αὐτός which agrees with the substantive in the Dat., to
express the idea, at the same time with, together with, 6. g. Oi πολέ-
μίοι ἐνεπίμπρασαν τὴν πόλιν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἱεροῖς, burnt the city
together with the sanctuaries.
2. The Dat. is used, in the second place, to denote an object,
which is indeed aimed at by the action of the subject, but which is
not, as with the Acc., attained, reached or accomplished, but only
participates and is interested in it. Hence the Dat. is used:
(a) With expressions of association and unton ; here belong, (a)
expressions denoting intercourse, associating with, mixing with,
communication, participation ;—(B) verbs and expressions signify-
‘ing to go against, to encounter, to meet, to approach, to be near to,
and their opposites, e. g. to yield to, to submit ;—(y) to fight, to quar-
rel, to contend, to vie with ;—(3) to follow, to serve, to obey, to trust
and to accompany ;—(s) to counsel, to incite, to encourage.
Here belong, (a) the verbs διδόναι, παρέχειν, ὁμιλεῖν, μιγνύναι, -vodas, Kor-
νοῦν, -«οὔσϑαι, κοινωνεῖν, di-, καταλλάττειν, -eodaı, ξενοῦσϑαι, σπένδεσθαι or
σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι, πράττειν, ὑπισχνεῖσϑαι, εἰπεῖν, λέγειν, “διαλέγεσθαι, eb-
χεσϑαι, καταρᾶσϑαι, also adjectives and adverbs and even substantives, as Kot-
vic, σύντροφος, σύμφωνος, συγγενής, μεταίτισς and others compounded with σύν
and μετά ;—(ß) the verbs. ὑποστῆναι, ὑφίστασϑαι, ἀπαντᾷν, ὑπαντᾷν, bravrıa-
ζειν, πλησιάζειν, πελάζειν, ἐγγίζειν, εἴκειν, ὑπείκειν, χωρεῖν, the adjectives πλη-
σίος, ἐναντίος, the adverbs ἐγγύς, πέλας ;—(y) the verbs ἐρέζειν, μάχεσθαι, πολε-
μεῖν, ἀγωνίζεσθαι, δικάζεσϑαι, ἀμφισβητεῖν ;--(δ) the verbs ἔπεσϑαι, ἀκολου-
ϑεῖν, διαδέχεσϑαι (to succeed), πείϑεσϑαι, ὑπακούειν, ἀπειϑεῖν, πιστεύειν, πε-
«ποιϑέναι, the adjectives and adverbs ἀκόλουθος, -ws, διάδοχος, ἑξῆς, ἐφεξῆς ;——
(e) the verbs mpog-, ἐπιτάττειν, παραινεῖν, παρακελεύεσθαι.
‘Opiaer τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς ἀνϑρώποις, asweiate with good men. Et-
χεσϑε τοῖς θεοῖς, pray tothe gods. ᾿Απαντᾷν, πλησιάζειν, tyyi-
ζειν τινΐ, to meet, approach, come near to one. Μὴ εἴκετε τοῖς πολε-
μίοις, do not yield to the enemy. Ol “Ἕλληνες καλῶς ἐμαχέσαντο τοῖς
Ἱέρσαις, fought with the Persians. Ol στρατιῶται ἀνηκούστησαν τοῖς
στρατηγοῖς, disobeyed the commanders, Weidov τοῖς νόμοις, obey the
laws. TH ἀρετῇ ἀκολουϑ εἴ δόξα, gory follows virtue. Πεποιϑέναι rivet,
to trust ome. Ὕ δατι μεμιγμένος τὴν μάζαν, having mized the maize with water.
228 SYNTAX.—DATIVE. [8 161.
(b) With expressions of “similarity and dissimilarity, of likenen
and unlikeness, of agreement and difference. Under those of like
ness is included ὁ αὐτός, signifying the same. |
Such are ἐοικέναι, ὁμοιοῦν, -οὔσϑαι, ὅμοιος, -we, Toe, -ως, ἐμφερής (similar),
παραπλήσιος, -ὡς, ἅμα, διάφορος, διάφωνος, and very many words compounded
with ὁμοῦ, σύν, μετά ; 6. g. ὁμονοεῖν, ὁμόγλωττος, συμφωνεῖν, etc.
Οἱ παῖδες ἐμφερέστατοι ἦσαν τῷ πατρί, the children were very much
like their father. 'Ὡπλισμένοι πάντες ἦσαν οἱ περὶ τὸν Κῦρον τοῖς αὐτοῖς τῷ
Κύρῳ ὅπλοις, all Cyrus’ soldiers were provided with the same arms as Cyrus.
(c) With verbs and expressions signifying, (a) to assent to, to
agree with, etc. ;—(ß) to upbraid, to reproach, to be angry, to envy;
—(y) to help, to be useful to, to avert from, and verbs compounded
with σύν, expressing this idea ;—(8) to be becoming, to be suitable,
to be fit, to please, and with many others, the personal object is put
in the Dat. In addition to the Dat. of the person, these verbs fre-
quently govern the Acc. of the thing. ‘The Dat. is also used with
verbs signifying to rejoice at, to be pleased with, and the like. In
many cases, however, the Dat. with such verbs may be regarded 88
the Dat. of cause. Comp. ὃ 161, 8.—In general, the Dat. is used,
when the action takes place for the benefit or injury of a person or
thing. This is called the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage, and
often includes what is termed the limiting Dat., or the Dat. express-
ing the relation of to or for.
Here belong, (a) ὁμολογεῖν ;—(B) μέμφεσϑαι (with Acc. it means to blame),
λοιδορεῖσϑαι, ἐπιτιμᾷν, ἐγκαλεῖν ($ 158, Rem. 7) and ἐπικαλεῖν (revi re), ext
πλήττειν, ὀνειδίζειν, ἐνοχλεῖν, ϑυμοῦσϑαι, βριμοῦσϑαι, χαλεπαίνειν, φϑονεῖν,
βασκαίνειν (to envy) ——(y) ἀρήγειν, ἀμύνειν, ἀλέξειν, τιμωρεῖν, βοηϑεῖν, ἔπικον-
ρεῖν, ἀπολογεῖσϑαι, λυσιτελεῖν, ἐπαρκεῖν, χραισμεῖν, συμφέρειν, συμπράττειν,
συνεργεῖν, and adjectives of similar signification, 6. g. χρήσιμος, φίλος ; and those
of an opposite signification, e. g. &xdpöc, BAaßepös, ete.;—(d) πρέπειν, ἁρμότ-
τειν, mpochrew (with Inf. following), εἰκός ἐστι, ἀρέσκειν, the adverbs mperév-
τως, ἀπρεπῶς, εἰκότως.
Ποσειδῶν σφόδρα ἐμενέαιεν εν 'Odvocel, was very angry with Ulysses, Ἔπι
πλήττειν, ὀνειδίζειν, ἐγκαλεῖν revi tt, to reproach one for something,
- to charge something on one. Ob τοῖς ἄρχειν βουλομένοις μέμφομαι,
ἀλλὰ τοὶς ὑπακούειν ἑτοιμοτέροις otory, 7 do not reproach those wishing
to rule, but those, cte. "Hy @yaee ὁ Φίλιππος τοῖς ᾿Αϑηναίοις, Philip gave
trouble to the Athenians. Φϑονεῖν τινι, to ewy one. ᾿Αμννῶ τῷ νόμῳ,
I will defend (the idea of aiding) the law, etc. Ὀρεστὴς 7OéAnoe τεμωρεῖν
watpt, Orestes wished to help his father, etc. ᾿Αχιλλεὺς ἐτιμώρησε Πατρό-
χλῳ τῷ ἑταίρῳ τὸν φόνον, avenged the murder of ( for) his friend Patroclus.
Ἢ ἀρετὴ ἀρέσκει τοῖς ἀγαϑοὶς, virtue pleases the good. Elxéruc cot
χαίρουσιν ol Λακεδαιμόνιοι, rejoice in, are pleased with you. Ἤ δεσϑαί
Ttvt, to be pleased with a thing.
$ 161.] SYNTAX.——DATIVE. 229
(d) Finally, the Dat. is used to denote the possessor with the
verbs εἶναι, ὑπάρχειν and yiyvecdaı, these verbs then be-
ing translated by the verb to have, and the Dat. as the Nom.; e. g.
Κύρῳ ἦν μεγάλη βασιλεία, Cyrus had a great kingdom; and in
general, the Dat. is used, where an action takes place in respect to,
in relation to a person, or an object considered as a person; 6. g.
Σωκράτης τοιοῦτος ὧν τιμῆς ἄξιος ἦν τῇ πόλει μᾶλλον, ἢ θανά-
του, Socrates being such, deserved honor in respect to the city rather
than death. Hence the Dat. is also frequently used with the pas-
Bive, and regularly with verbal adjectives in -τέος and -τός, instead
of ὑπό with the Gen.; 6. g- ὡς μοι πρότερον δεδήλωται, as has
been before shown by me. Aoxmea ἐστί σοι ἡ ἀρδτή, virtue must
be practised by you. On the construction with the verbal adjective,
see ὃ 168, 1, 2. .
8. In the third place, the Dat. is used like the Latin Ablative
(Abl. of instrument), to denote the cause, means and instrument
(hence with χρῆσθαι), the manner and way, the measure (by which
the action is limited, particularly with comparatives and superla-
tives), conformity (according to, tn accordance ai often also,
the material.
Ol πολέμιοι φό βῳ ἀπῆλϑον, went back through, on account of fear (the fear be-
ing the cause of the action). ᾿Αγάλλομαι τῇ νιεκῇ, I exult on account of victory.
Στέργω, ἀγαπῶ τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν ayadoig, 7 am pleased with those who
are good. ᾿Οφϑαλμοῖς ὁρῶμεν, ὠσὶν ἀκούομεν, we see -with our eyes, we hear
with our ears. "loxbew τῷ σώματι, to be strong in body. Ol στρατιῶται ov μ-
φορᾷ μεγάλῃ ἐχρήσαντο, experienced (used) great misfortune. ᾿Αλέξανδρος
διδασκάλῳ ἐχρήσατὸ ᾿Αριστοτέλει. Οἱ πολέμιοι Big εἰς τὴν πόλιν elegecay,
entered the city by force. Οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι τὸν Μιλτιάδην πεντήκοντα ταλάντοις
ἐζημίωσαν, fined Miltiades fifty talents. Ἢ ἀγορὰ ΤΠ αρίῳ Aid» ἠσκημένη by,
the Agora was adorned with Parian marble. Πολλῷ, ὀλέγῳ μείζων, greater by
much, little (the Dat. measuring the degree of difference between the things com-
pared). Τῇ ἀληϑ eig κρίνειν, to judge according to truth.
4. The Dat. of the thing often stands with verbs, substantives
and adjectives, to denote in what respect their signification is to be
taken; 6. g. ὑπερβάλλειν To A un, to excel in or in respect to boldness ;
Κύδνος ὀνόματι, Cydnus by name; ταχὺς ποσί, swift of foot. This
Dat., however, is often the same as the Dat. of means or instrument.
5. The Dat. stands as the indirect object or complement of very
many verbs, to denote the relation expressed in English by to or
for ; ὁ. g. δίδωμί σοι τὸ βιβλίον, 1 give a book to you; Κῦρος ave g
εἶπον, Cyrus said to kim ; ov ὡς φίλοι προρεφέρονεο ἡ piv, they did
20
Φ
230 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS. F§ 162.
not conduct towards us us friends ; στράτευμα συνελέγετο Kv 0 g, an
army was collected for Cyrus.
5. (a) The Dat. is also put after adjectives to denote the object to
which their quality is directed. The relation of this Dat. is usually
expressed by to or for, 6. ἃ. πᾶσι δῆλον Eysvaro, it became evident
to all; αὐτῷ οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ εὖνοι ἧσαν, the good were well disposed to-
wards kim; ἐχϑρὸς ἀνθρώποις, hateful to men.
Remark. The rules 5 and 5, (a) are mainly included in 2, (a), (b), (c), but are
stated here in a more specific form, for the benefit of beginners.
LXXXVI. Exercises on ὃ 161.
Cyrus resolved (aor.) on this day to engage with the enemy; after the battle
he marched (aor.) the same day twenty stadia. The Athenians made an expe-
dition (στρατεύειν) with thirty ships against the islands of Aeolus. When the
Persians came (aor.) with (their) entire (παμπληϑῆς) force (στόλος), the Athe-
sians dared (aor. part.) to encounter (aer.) them, and conquered them. The
Athenians conquered the enemy and took their ships together with the men.
Associate not with bad men, bnt cleave ever to the good. Thamyris, who was
distinguished (aor. part.) for beauty and for (skill in) harp-playing, contended
{aor.) with the Muses for (the superiority in) (περί, w. gen.) music. Human na
ture is mingled with a divine energy. Truth discourses with boldness (era,
w. gen.), and therefore men are displeased with it. It is easy to advise (aor.)
another (ἕτερος). The general exhorted the soldiers to fight bravely. Life is
like a theatre. Most of the Roman women were accustomed to wear (= to
have) the same shoes as the men. Actions are not always like words. Homer
compares the race of men to leaves. The mind ruined by wine is in the same
case 88 (= suffers the same as) chariots, that have lost (part. pres.) their
charioteers. Some object to the laws of Lycurgus, that they are indeed sufii-
cient to call forth (πρός, w. acc.) bravery, but are insufficient to maintain (=
for) justice. To please the multitude is to displease the wise. Esteem those as
true friends, who ($ 148, 6) censure faults. Quails have a pleasant song. Hu-
man destinies (= the human, plur.) have been deplored by many wise men, who
believed (part.) that life is (inf.) a punishment. The gods rejoice in the virtue
of men. The bull wounds with the horn, the horse with the hoof, the dog with
the mouth, the boar with the tusk. The Thessalians practised (χρῆσϑαι) law-
lessness more than justice. Helen was very (= much) distinguished (aor.), 85
well by birth as for beauty and fame. Wisdom is far (by much) better than
riches. One can (= it is possible) neither safely use a horse without bridle,
nor riches without consideration.
§162. Prepositions.
1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whither and
where, so the prepositions denote other local relations, which desig-
§ 163. ] SYNTAX.—-PREPOSITIONS.—deti, πρό. 261
nate the extension (dimension) of things in space, viz. the justa-
position of things (near to, before, by, around, with), and the local
opposites, above and below, within and without, before and behind,
etc.
2. The Case connected with the preposition shows in which of
the three above-named relations—thence, whither, where—the local
relation expressed by the preposition, must be considered.
Thus, e. g. the preposition παρά denotes merely the local relation of vicinity,
the near or by; but in connection with the Gen.,e.g. 7A de παρὰ τοῦ Bact
Aéwe, it denotes the direction whence (he came from near the king, de chez le roi) ;
in connection with the Acc.,e. g. fet παρὰ τὸν βασιλέα, the direction
whither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the king); and in connection with
the Dat.,e.g. ἔστη παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ, the where (he stood near the king).
8. The prepositions are divided according to their construction :
(a) Into prepositions with the Gen.: ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ, πρό, ἕνεκα;
(b) Into those with the Dat.: ἐν and σύν ;
(c) Into those with the Acc.: avd, εἰς, ὡς;
(d) Into those with the Gen. and Acc.: διά, κατά, ὑπέρ ;
- (6) Into these with the Gen., Dat. and Acc.: dust, περί, ἐπί, μετά, παρᾶ,
πρός and ὑπό.
4. The local relation expressed by prepositions is transferred to
the relations of time and causality (cause, effect, etc.) ; e.g. ὑπὸ
«ῆς γῆς εἶναι and ὑπὸ φόβου φεύγειν, to be under the earth, to
flee for, on account of, fear; ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἀπελθεῖν and
ἐξ ἡμέρας ἀπελϑεῖν, to depart out of the city, to depart imme-
diately after daybreak.
A. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE.
8168. I. Preposttions with the Gen. alone.
1. Avi, Lat. ante, original signification, over against, before,
opposite ; then for, instead of, in the place of, 6. g. στῆναι ἀντί
τινος, ἰο stand before one; δοῦλος avrı βασιλέω ς, a slave in-
stead of king; ἀντὶ ἡμέρας νὺξ ἐγένετο, instead of day there was
night; ἀν θ᾽ ov, wherefore, because.
2. Πρό, pro, prae, before, for, agrees with ari in all its rela-
tions, but is used in a much greater variety of relations; 6. g. or7-
ψαι πρὸ πυλῶν, to stand before the gates; πρὸ ἡμέρα ς, before
day (ἀντὶ is not used of time); μάχεσϑαι, ἀποθανεῖν πρὸ τῆς
πατρίδος, to fight, to die for one’s country; δοῦλος πρὸ δεσπότου,
@ slave instead of master; πρὸ τῶν ὃ, for these things, therefore.
283 SINTAX.—-PREPOSITIONS.— ἀπό, ἐκ, ἔγεχα. [§ 168.
8. Axo, ab, original signification, from, 6. 5. ἀπο τῆς πό-
λεως ἦλθεν; τοῦ time: from, since, after, e. g. ἀπὸ δείπνον
ἐμαχέσαντο, after the meal ;—elvas, yiyveodaı ἀπὸ £1906, to be de-
scended from some one ;—1@ ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων Posy, on ac-
‘count of fear of (from) the enemy, like metus ab aliguo ;—of the
means: by, with, 6. g. τρέφειν τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀπὸ προφόδων, to
support the fleet by revenues ——ano τινος καλεῖσϑαι, to be called
by something.
4. Ἐκ, ἐξ, ex, original signification, out of, e.g. ἐκ τῆς πόλεως
ἀπῆλϑεν ;—of time immediately following: after, e.g. ἐξ ἡμέρας,
ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as tt was day; ἐκ παίδων, from
childhood; ἐξ αἰϑρίας τε καὶ νηνεμίας συνέδραμεν ἐξαπίνης
seyn, after the clear weather clouds suddenly collected.—O σὸς πα-
τὴρ ἐν τῇδε τῇ μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξ ἄφρονος σώφρων γεγένηται, your
father in this one day, from a senseless man has become discreet ;—
εἶναι; γίγνεσϑαι ἔκ τι» ς, to be descended From some one j—accord-
ing to, by virtue of, after or for, 6. g. ἐκ τῆς ὄψεως τοῦ ὀνείρου,
according to the appearance of the dream.— Ovopalecdas ix τινος,
to be named after or for some one.
5. Ἕνεκα (placed before or after the Gen.), on account of, for
the sake of ;—by means of.
Remark. Also some adverbs and substantives are very often used as prepo-
sitions, and are therefore called improper prepositions (see, however, § 157, et
seq.); 6. g. πρόσϑεν and ἔμπροσϑεν, before, ὄπισϑεν, behind, ἄν εν
and χωρίς, without, πλήν, except, μετα ξύ, between, μέχρι, until, χάριν
(usually placed after the Gen.), gratia, for the sake of. Instead of the Gen. of the
personal pronouns, χάριν regularly takes the possessive pronouns agreeing with
it in gender, number and case; 6. g. ἐμὴν, σὴν χάριν, mea, tua gratia.
LXXXVII. Evercises on § 163.
No one would ($ 153, 2. c) take (aor.) a blind leader in place of one who could
see (= a seeing one). It is beautiful to exchange (aor. mid.) a mortal body for
immortal fame. Those who (§ 148, 6) have made proficiency (aor.) in philoso
phy, become free instead of slaves; truly rich instead of poor; considerate (e-
τριώτεροι) instead of unintelligent and stupid. Before action deliberate. A
(art.) friend often does for his (art.) friend, that (plur.) which he did not do (aor.)
for himself. Ephesus is distant a three days’ journey from Sardis. The Helle-
spont was named from Helle, who there lost her life (== who died [part.] in it).
When (part.) Socrates brought (= offered) small offerings from (his) small
(means), he believed (himself) to be no less meritorious {(μειοῦσϑαι) than those
who (§ 148, 6) from (their) many and great (means) bring many and great (of-
ferings). Socrates lived very contentedly with very little property. We may
uot judge the best (men) by (= from) (their) exterior, but by (their) morals. Itis
85 164, 165.] SYNTAX—PREPOBITIONS.— Er, σύν, ἀνά. 388
easier to make (== place, aor.) evil ont of good, than good out of evil. The
oharacter reveals itself especially in (== out of) the actions. From the fruit
I know the tree. After the war came peace. Men plot against each other
for the sake of gold, fame (plur.) and pleasures. Semiramis reigned until
old age over the Assyrians. A beautiful action is not performed without
virtue. The gods bestow upon men nothing good (plur. gen.) and beautiful,
without labor and care. Tempe lies between Olympus and Ossa. Conceal
good fortune, lest it excite envy (= on secount of envy).
8164. 2. Prepositions with the Dat. alone.
1. Ἐν denotes that one thing is in, upon, by or near another; it
indicates an actual union or contact of the two objects spoken of,
and hence is the opposite of ἐκ, e.g. ἐν v709, ἐν γῇ, ἐν Σπάρ-
τη:--δλῪΡ ὅπλοις, ἐν τόξοις διαγωνίζεσθαι; ἐν προμάχοις,
ἔν τε ϑεοῖς καὶ ἀνθρώποις (among); hence, before, coram ;
upon, ἐν ὄρεσιν, ἐν ἵπποις, ἐν ϑρόνοις;--αἱ, by, near to,
so especially of the names of cities, and particularly in describing
battles; e.g.7 ἐν Μαντινείᾳ μάχη, the battle near Mant.—Of
time, ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, ἐν ᾧ, in or within this time, while,
during the time that, ἐν πέντε nu&gwıs.—Of the means and in-
strument with the expressions δηλοῦν, δῆλον εἶναι, onual.
yer ἔν τινι, to show by something ; 6. g. ὅτι οἱ θεοί σε theq τὰ
Xu εὐμενεῖς πέμπουσι, καὶ ἐν ἱεροῖς δῆλον καὶ ἐν oVpani-
oıs σημείοις, tt is evident both by the victims and the signs from
heaven, that, etc.
Rem. 1. With several verbs of motion, the Greek commonly uses & with the
Dat., instead of eig with the Acc.; 6. g. τεϑέναι, κατατιϑέναι, ἀνατιϑέναε (®
consecrate) and the like.
2. Zu» (ξύν, mostly old Attic). The original signification of
σύν corresponds almost entirely with the Latin eum and the English
with, 6. g. ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς arpgarınraıs;—of assistance
or help, e.g. σὺν Beg, by the help of Θοά;---σὺν τάχει, σὺν
βίᾳ ποιεῖν τι. ᾿ :
Rem. 2. Here belongs ἅμα, at the same time with, with, one of the adverbs
used as improper prepositions.
§165. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. alone.
1. Ava. Original signification, up, on, upon. It forms the
strongest contrast to κατά with the Acc. As κατά is used to de-
note motion from a higher to a lower place, so «va to denote motion
from a lower to a higher place; 6. 5. dsa τὸν ποταμόν, GPE
20*
284 SINTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.—2i¢, 06. [$ 165.
ῥόον πλεῖν, to sail up the stream (the opposite being χατὰ wot a
μόν, down the stream). It commonly serves to denote local exten-
sion from a lower to a higher place, from bottom to top: throughout,
through; ἀνὰ τὴ» Ἑλλάδα--- ἀνὰ τὸν πόλεμον τοῦτον,
(per, during). Thus ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, through the
aohole day, ἀν ἃ πᾶν τὸ ἔτος, during the whole year ; hence
without the article, ava πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, ἀνὰ πᾶ» ἔε OS
every day, every year, daily, yearly, ἀνὰ νύκτα, per noctem, ἃ ν ἃ
χρόνον, in course of time ;—to denote the manner and way; 6. g.
ava κράτος, up to the full strength, vigorously, ἀνὰ μέρος,
by turns ;—in a distributive sense with numerals; e.g. ava πέντε
παρασάγγας τῆς ἡμέρας, five parasangs daily ; also with
numerals; like the English about (Lat. circa); e.g. ἀνὰ δι ακ ὅσια
στάδι a, about two hundred stadia.
2. Eig (ἐς, old Attic), corresponds almost entirely with the Lat.
in with the Acc.; 6. g. ievaı eis τὴν πόλιν, into the eity ;—in a
hostile sense: contra, e. g- ἐστράτευσαν εἰς τὴ » Atrix 7% into,
against Attica ;—with numerals: about, 6. g. vats eig τὰς Te
τρακοσίας, about four hundred ships ;—in a distributive sense
with numerals; 6. g. εἰς ἑκατόν, centent, by hundreds, each hun-
dred, eig δύο, bint, two by two, two deep ;—in the presence of, co-
ram, yet with the collateral idea of the direction whither ; 6. g. Ao-
yous ποιεῖσθαι εἰς τὸν δῆμον, to speak to or before the people. —
Of time: until, towards, upon, eis ἑσπέραν, towards evening,
εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίαν, upon the following day, eis τρίτην ἡ μ ἕ-
@ ay, to or on the third day.—To denote purpose, object, respect; 6. g.
ἐχρήσατο τοῖς χρήμασιν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, he used the money for the
eity; εἰς κέρδος τι δρᾷν, to do something for gain; διαφέρειν zı-
vos εἰς ἀρετήν, to differ from one in respect to virtue; εἰς mar
τα, in every respect.
8. Ὡς, ad, to, is used only with persons, or objects considered as
persons, to denote direction towards them; 6. g. ἰέναι, πέμπειν ag
βασιλέα, ἥκειν ὡς τὴν Μίλητον (to the Milesians).
LXXXVIIL Zxercises on §§ 164, 165.
(He) is the best (man), who (ὄςτις) is nurtured amid the greatest necessities
(τὰ ἀναγκαιότατα). Said Diogenes: A friend is one soul, that (part.) dwells
(= lies) in two bodies. My sons, do not deposit (aor.) my body either in gold
or in silver, but restore it as quickly as possible to the earth. The Grecian ar-
mament conquered the barbarians at Salamis. With the help of the gods let
ws go against the unjust. The acquisition of true friends is by no means
§ 166.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— Ota, κατά. 285
made by (= with) violence, but rather by beneficence. At daybreak (= with
the day) the soldiers began their march (= marched out, off). The Car-
duchians dwell on the mountains and are warlike. The vessels could not
sail up the river. The deeds of Alcibiades were celebrated throughout all
Greece. During the whole war the greatest harmony prevailed (= was)
among the generals. The three daughters of Phorcus, having (but) one eye,
made use of it alternately. The enemy pressed into the middle of the city.
Apollo was sent (aor.) out of heaven to the earth. Time, revealing everything,
brings (it) to the light. The Athenians performed (= displayed, aor.) many
beautiful actions before all men, as well in a private as in a public capacity.
The Lacedaemonians made an expedition against Attica. Employ the leisure
of (= in) life in listening (inf.) to beautiful discourses. God brings like to
like. Agesilaus sent ambassadors to the king of the Persians.
§166. B. Prepositions with the Gen. and Ace.
1. Δία, original signification, through. A. With the Gen. through
and out again, e. g. ἐξήλαυνε τὸν στρατὸν διὰ τῆς Θράκης ἐπὶ
τὴν Ἑλλάδα, through Thrace;—through, e.g. διὰ πεδίον, per
campum, διὰ πολεμίας πορεύεσϑαι, to march through a hostile
country.— Of time to denote extension through a period: through,
after, properly, to the end of the period, through and out, 6. g. 80
ἔτους, through the year; διὰ πολλοῦ, μακροῦ, ὀλίγου yob-
vou, after (through) a long, short time; διὰ παντὸς τοῦ γρό-
you τοιαῦτα οὐκ ἐγένετο, throughout the whole time. So also of an
action repeated at successive intervals, e.g. dca τρίτου grove
συνήεσαν, every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three
years; διὰ πέμπτου ἔτους, διὰ πέντε ἐτῶν, Quinto quoque
anno; διὰ τρίτης ἡμέρας, every third day—To denote the
means, 6. 5. δ ὀφϑαλμῶν ὁρᾷν, to see with, by means of, the
eyes ;—the manner and way, 6. g. διὰ σπσὺ δῆ ς, with earnestness,
earnestly; διὰ tayous, with speed, speedily—B. With the Acc.,
of time, e. g. διὰ νύκτα, per noctem ;—to denote the cause, means,
e. δ: διὰ τοῦτο, ταῦτα, therefore, because of this; διὰ βουλάς,
by means of counsels; διὰ μῆνιν.
2. Κατα, original signification, from above down (desuper).
A. With the Gen., 6. g. ἐῤῥίπτουν ἑαυτοὺς κατὰ τοῦ τείχους
κάτω, threw themselves down from the wall ;—down into, 6. g. κατα-
δεδυκέναι κατὰ τῆς θαλάττης, to go down into the sea ;—un-
der, 6. 5. κατὰ γῆ ς.---ἰτἰῖο denote the cause, author: de, concerning,
e. g. λέγειν κατά τινος, dicere de aliqua re, especially in a hos-
tile sense, 6. g. λέγειν κατά τινος, against one; ψεύδεσϑαι κατὰ
gon ϑεοῦ, to hie against God.—B. With the Acc., κατά forms a
“
\
236 SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— vg. [Ὁ 166,
strong contrast with avd, in respect to the point where the motion
of the action begins, but. agrees with ava in denoting the direction
to an object and the extension over it, the one being down through,
the other up through. The use of ἀνά in prose is not so frequent
as that of xara.—To denote local extension from above downwards:
throughout, through, over, e. g. xa® Ἑλλάδα, κατὰ πᾶσαν
τὴν γῆν; it often signifies, over against, opposite to, 6. g. κεῖται ἡ
Κεφαλληνία κατὰ Axagvaviar, opposite to Acar.—Of time, to
denote its extension or duration: during, through, 6. g. κατὰ τὸν
αὐτὸν χρόνον, during, or in the course of the same time; κατὰ
τὸν πρότερον πόλεμον.--- Το denote purpose, object, e. g. XH
τὰ ϑέαν ἥκειν, spectatum venisse ; conformity (secundum), respect,
reason, &. g. κατὰ νόμον, according to, agreeable to law; κατὰ
λόγον, ad rationem, pro ratione, agreeable to reason; κατὰ yya-
μην τὴν ἐμήν; κατὰ τοῦτο, hoc respectu, hence propter hoe,
κατὰ φύσι», secundum naturam; κατὰ δύναμιν, to the best of
one’s ability; κατὰ κράτος, with all one’s might; κατὰ pix
00», nearly, by degrees; κατ᾽ ἄνϑρωπον, according to the man-
ner or standard of man;—to denote an indefinite measure, 6. g.
xa ἑξήκοντα ἔτη, about sixty years ;—to denote manner and
way, e.g. κατὰ τάχος, swiftly, κατὰ συντυχίαν, by chance;
—in a distributive sense, e.g. κατὰ κώμας, vicalim; κατὰ μῆ-
ya, monthly, κα ϑ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, κατ᾿ ἔτος, yearly, κα ϑ᾽ ἐπ’
τά, septeni, by sevens.
3. Ὑπέρ, super, wer. A. With the Gen. e.g. ὑπέρ γῆς.--
To denote the cause: for, for the good of, in behalf of, e. g. μά-
χεσϑαι ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος, to fight for one’s country, as it were
to fight standing over it; ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ϑάνατος, death
in behalf of Greece.—B. With the Acc.: over, beyond, e. g. ῥίστειν
ὑπὲρ τὸν δόμον, to throw over the house; ὑπὲρ Ἑλλήςπον
τον οἰκεῖν, beyond, i. e. on the opposite side of; ὑπὲρ τὴν ἡλι
xiav, ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, ὑπὲρ ἄνϑρωπον, beyond the nature or
strength of man, ὑπὲρ τὰ τετταράκοντα dry.
LXXXIX. Zxereises on § 166.
There is a middle path that leads neither through dominion nor through sla-
very, but through freedom. Socrates conferred the greatest benefits (τὰ μέγεστα
ὠφελεῖν) upon men, by teaching wisdom to all who wished (it) ($ 148, 6).
The river Euphrates flows through the middle of Babylon. The presidents of
the cities come together every three years. Those who (§ 148, 6) learn every-
thing by their own efforts (= by themselves), are called self-taught. Apollo
§ 167.] SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— dug, περί. 287
benefitted the human race by oracles and other services. He who (§ 148, 6)
is indolent for the sake of pleasure, may (§ 153, 2. c.) very soon be deprived (aor.)
of that charm of inactivity, for the sake of which he is indolent. Praise not a
worthless man because of (his) wealth. Some rivers penetrate into the earth
and flow (= are borne) a long way, concealed under the earth. The island At-
lantis sank (part. aor.) under the earth and disappeared (aor.). He who (ὁ 148,
6) contrives a snare against another, turns (περιτρέπειν) it often against him-
self. During the period of the holy war, great (= much) disorder and dissen-
sion prevailed (= was) over all Greece. Do not impose upon others a greater
(charge) than their abilities permit (= than according to ability). It is neces-
sary that (acc. w. inf.) men live according to laws. The city was in danger of
being (= to be) taken (aor.) by force. A bad man who (part.) obtains (aor.)
power, is not wont to bear good fortune as man ought (= suitably to man).
The Athenians. annually sent to Crete seven boys and seven maidens (as) food
for the Minotaur (= to the M. as food). God has given (aor.) us the powers,
by which we are to bear ( fit.) all the events of destiny. The sun passes‘over
the earth. Overhanging (= over) the city is a hill. Arsamus governed the
Arabians and Aethiopians dwelling over Egypt. Alcestis, the daughter of Pe-
Has, was desirous (aor.) to die (aor.) for her husband. It is very dishonorable te
shun (aor.) death for (one’s) country. Clearchus waged war with the Thracians
dwelling beyond the Hellespont. It is folly to attempt (= to do) something
above (one’s) capacity. Numa Pompilius, the most fortunate of the Roman
kings, is said to have lived above eighty years. ”
8167. C. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat. and Aec.
1. Aug denotes that one thing is around another (on both sides),
‚near, close to, another. A. With the Gen. seldom used of place, e. g.
ἀμφὶ τῆς πόλεος οἰκεῖν, to dwell around the city.—Of cause:
about, for, for the sake of, e. g. μάχεσϑαι ἀμφί τινος, to fight
about, for something.—B. With the Dat., as with the Gen.—C. With
the Acc, e.g. ἀμφὶ τὴν πόλιν.-ῖο denote time and number
indefinitely, 6. g. ἀμφὶ ἑσπέραν, about evening; ἀμφὶ τοὺς
μυρίους, about ten thousand.
2. Περί signifies all around, round, containing the idea of a cir-
cuit or circumference, and in this respect differing from ἀμφί, which
signifies properly on both sides.. A. With the Gen.—In a local re-
lation it is not used in prose, but the more frequently in a causal
sense: concerning, for, about, on account of, e. g. μάχεσϑαι, ano-
θανεῖν περὶ τῆς πατρίδος, to fight, die for one’s country; 18-
yew περί τινος, to sneak about something; φοβεῖσϑαι περὶ πα-
toidog;—to denote value, in the phrases πϑρὶ πολλοῦ, περὶ
πλείονος, περὶ πλείστου, περὶ ὀλίγου, περὶ οὐδενὸς
ποιεῖσθαι or ἡγεῖσθαί τι, to value high, higher, etc—B. With the
238 SYNTAX. —PREPOBITIONS.—ERI. [§ 167.
Dat.: around, on, near, e.g. περὶ ταῖς κεφαλαῖς εἶχον τιάρας,
around, on their heads; περὶ τῇ χειρὶ χρυσοῦν δακτύλιον φέρειν;
—in a causal sense: about, for, on account of, 6. g. δεδιέναι περί
“ weve, to fear for, about one.—C. With the Ace.: about, near, by,
throughout, e. g. ὥκουν Φοίφικες περὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Σικελίαν
(about, throughout).— To denote time and number indefinitely, 6. g.
περὶ τούτους τοὺς χρόνους, about these times; περὶ μυ-
eiovs στρατιώτας.---1ὰ a causal sense to denote respect, 6. g.
σωφρονεῖν περὶ τοὺς θεούς, in respect to the gods.
3. Ἐπί signifies primarily, upon, at, near. A. With the Gen.,
9. g. τὰ ἄχϑη οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ἐπὶ τῶν κεφαλῶ» φοροῦσιν, ai δὲ
γυναῖκες ἐπὶ τῶν μων, the men carry burdens on their heads, the
women on their shoulders; μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἐπὶ τῆς γνώ-
μῆς, to remain in; οἱ ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων, those tntrusted
with business ;—towards, if the idea is that one is striving to reach
a place, 6. g. πλεῖν ἐπὶ Σάμου [according to § 158, 3. (b) ].—In
relation to time, to denote the time tn or during which something
takes place, 6. g. ἐπὶ Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, during, in, under
the reign of Oyrus—Tg denote the occasion, the author, 6. g. xa-
λεῖσϑαι ἐπί τινος, to be named after, for one; conformity, e. g.
κρίνειν τι ἐπί τινος, to judge according to something.—B. With
the Dat.: upon, at, by,e.g. ἐπὶ τοῖς δόρασι ῥοιὰς εἶχον χρυσᾶο,
upon the spears; οἰκεῖν ἐπὶ ϑαλάττῃ, by the sea, upon the sea-
coast.—To denote dependence, e. g. ἐπί τινι εἶναι, to be in the
power of any one; γίγνεσθαι ἐπί τινι, to come into the power of
any one ;—condition, purpose, object, motive, 6. g. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, hae
conditione, on this condition; ἐπὶ κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύ-
ρήται, in perniciem hominis ;—cause, occasion, 6. g. χαίρειν ἐπέ
τινι, to rejoice at something —C. With the Acc.: upon, on, over,
towards (different from ἐπί with the Gen., since with the Acc. mere-
ly the direction to a place is denoted), to, 6. g. ἀναβαίνειν Ep in-
πον; ἐπὶ ἀνθρώπους (among). —Of time: until, ἐφ᾽ soxé-
ραν; for, during, per, ἐπὶ πολλὰς nusgag.—To denote pur-
‘pose, olject,e.g. ἐπὶ ϑήραν ἰέναι, venatum tre; in a hostile sense:
against, 6. g. στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ Πέρσας, to make an expedition
against the Persians.
XC. Exercises on § 167, 1, 2, 8.
The poets have uttered such language (= words) about the gods themselves,
as no one would dare (aor., § 153, 2, c) to utter about (his) enemies. Consider
first, how (ὅπως) the adviser has managed (aor.) his own (affairs); for he who
§ 167.] SYNFAX.—PREPOSITIONS.— peta. 239
({ 148, 6) has not (47) reflected (aor.) upon his own (concerns), will never de-
cide well upon another's. Carthage waged war with Rome for Sicily, twenty-
four years. All men value (their) kindred more than strangers. With reason
dost thou esteem the soul more highly than the body. Gyges found a corpse
that had on the hand a golden ring. Some of the Persians had both necklaces
about the neck, and bracelets about the hands. The motion of the earth around
the sun makes the year (év:avréc), but the motion of the moon around the earth,
᾿ the months. The Spartan boys (= of the 8.) as (part.) they went round the
altar of Orthia, were scourged by law. Be (γίγνομαι) such towards thy parents,
as (οἷος) thou wouldst (§ 153, 2,c) wish (aer.) thy children to be (acc. τσ. inf.)
towards thee. No human pleasure seems to lie (= εἶναι) closer at hand (éyyv-
τέρω, w. gen.), than joy on account of honors. The enemy, despairing of (aor.)
their cause, about (ἀμφέ) midnight abandoned the city. There are said to be
about one hundred and twenty thousand Persians. Each of the Cyclops had
one eye in the forehead. In Egypt, the men carry burdens on their (= the)
bead, but the women on their shoulders. The soldiers returned home. After
the battle Croesus fled to Sardis. Under Cecrops and the first kings until The-
seus, Attica was inhabited in cities. All the children of the better (sup.) Per-
sians were educated at the court (al ϑύραι) of {the) king. Strive not after that
which ($ 148, 6) is not (a7) in thy power. Macedonia was in the power of
the Athenians, aad brought tribute. Dost thou consider that which (74, w. part.)
happens for thy (== the) advantage, as the work (plur.) of chance or of intelli-
gence? For epic poetry we most admire Homer, for tragedy, Sophocles, for
statuary, Polyclétus, for painting, Zeuxis. We ought (xp7) not to be displeased
at (the) good fortune of others, but rejoice for the sake of (διά) our (= the)
common origin. The Nile flows (= is borne) from south to north. Xerxes
collected (part. aor.) an innumerable army and marched against Greece. So-
erates not only exhorted men to virtue, but also led them onward (προάγειν, aor.)
to it. Jupiter permitted (aor.) Sarpedon, the king of (the) Lycians, to live for
three generations.
4. Μετά (from μέσος) denotes the being in the midst of some-
thing. A. With the Gen. to denote association, connection, and
participation with; e.g. μετ ἀνϑρώπων εἶναι, to be among men.
Elva μετά τινος, to be with, on the side of one. Ὑμῖν οἱ πρόγο-
vot τοῦτο τὸ γέρας ἐκτήσαντο καὶ κατέλιπον μετὰ πολλῶν καὶ
μεγάλω κινδύνων, with many and great dangers ;—to denote
conformity: μετὰ τῶν νόμων, μετὰ τοῦ λόγου, in confor-
mity with the laws, with reason.—B. With the Dat., only poetic:
among, e. g. per ἀϑανάτοις.---Ο, With the Acc., in prose it is used
almost exclusively to denote that one thing follows another in space,
time and order ; e.g. ἔπεσϑαι peta tiva,after; μετὰ τὸν βίον,
after life; ποταμὸς μέγιστος ner a Io 2009, the greatest after the
Ister, and in the phrase μϑεὼ χεῖρας £yaw τι, to hold sila
between, ἡ in the hands.
240 SYNTAX.-—PREPOSITIONS.-—#0p0. [9 167.
5. Taga signifies the being near something: by, near, by the side
of. A. With the Gen. to denote a removal from near, from beside
a person: from, 6. g. ἐλϑεῖν παρά τινος, to come from some one.
—To denote the author, 6. g. πεμφϑῆναι παρά τινος, to be sent
by some one (8 150, Rem. 4), ἄγγελοι, πρέσβεις παρά τινος, m
voys from any one; ἀγγέλλειν παρά τινος, τὰ παρά τινος,
commissions, commands, etc. of any one ;---μανθάγειν παρά τινος,
ἀκούειν παρά τινος, to learn, to hear from.—B. With the Dat. to
denote rest near a place or object, 6. δ. ἔστη παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ.
—C. With the Acc. to denote direction or motion so as to come
near a person or thing, 6. g. ἀφικέσθαι παρὰ Κροῖσον, to Cro
sus „direction or motion along by a place: along near, by, beyond,
eg. παρὰ τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι, to go by Babylon. Hence,
παρὰ δόξαν, practer opinionem; nag ἐλπίδα, contrary to
hope; παρὰ φύσιν, παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον, παρὰ τοὺς ὅς
κους, παρὰ δύναμιν, beyond one’s power ; also, besides, praeter,
παρὰ ταῦτα, praeter haec, besides these things ;—to denote local
extension near an object: along, e.g. παρὰ τὸν Acoawndy, along
the A.—To denote the extension of time, 6. (. map ἡμέραν, πα:
oa τὸν πόλεμον, during the day, the war; παρὰ τὴν πόσιν,
tnter potandum, while drinking. So also of particular, important
points of time, during which something takes place, 6, g. παρ᾽ at-
τὸν τὸν κίνδυνον, in ipso discrimine, in the very moment of dan-
ger.—In a causal relation to denote a comparison, 6. g. ἡλίου ἐκλεί-
WRG πυκνότεραι ἦσαν παρὰ τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου myn HO-
ψευόμενα, eclipses of the sun were more frequent compared with
(than) those mentioned in former time.
XCL Exercises on ὃ 167, 4, 5.
Strive (pursue) after reputable pleasures. No one deliberates safely in (=
with) anger. It is noble to fight with many and brave allies. The good after
death (= dead) lie not in (== with) oblivion, but ever bloom in memory. The
Athenians, amid very many hardships and very famous contests, and dangers
very honorable, liberated Greece, and highly exalted (μεγίστην ἀποδεικνύναι,
aor.) their native country. The judge ought to render judgment conformably
to the laws. After life the wicked await their punishment (plur.), but the τὴν
tuous are forever happy (= abide in happiness). After the sea-fight at Sale
mis, Sophocles, who (part.) was still a boy, having been anointed, danced naked.
The Chians, first of the Greeks after the Thessalians and Lacedaemonians, made
use of slaves. Of all things (κτῆμα) in life, after the gods, the soul is most di-
vine. A messenger came from Cyaxares, who (part.) said that an embassy of
Jews had arrived (= was present), and brought a very beautiful dress from him
§ 167.] SYNTAX. —PREPOSITIONS. — 2002. 9341
to Cyrus. Prometheus stole (part. aor.) fire from the gods and brought (aor.}
it in a reed to men. The praises of good men are very pleasant. The gods
rejoice most in honors from the most pious men. What is not (47) manifest to
men, it is allowable (for them) to ascertain from the gods by divination. It is
said, that (acc. w. inf.) the invention of the sciences was given (aor.) by Jupiter
to the Muses. In (κατά) the war against the Messenians, the Pythia gave as a
response (χράω, aor.) to the Spartans, that they should ask (== to ask, aor.) a
general from the Athenians. Minos pretended to have learned his (= the) laws
from Jupiter himself. The Persian boys (= of the Persians) are educated not
with (the) mother but with a (= the) teacher. The good are honored among gods
and men. Cyrus sent ambassadors to the«king of the Persians. Osiris is said
to have travelled from Egypt through Arabia to the Red Sea. The river Seli-
nus flows by the temple of Diana in Ephesus. The Amazons dwelt (aor.) om
the river Thermodon. A word unseasonably (= against season) thrown out,
often destroys (= subverts) life. Paris, contrary to all justice (dixacov, plur.),
carried off (aor.) the wife of his (= the) host Menelaus to Troy. The Roman
lawgiver (= of the Romans) gave (aor.) to (art.) fathers full power over (κατά,
w. gen.) their (= the) sons during their (= the) whole life-time (= time of life).
No man (= no one of men) will be fortunate during his (= the) whole life.
In comparison with (art.) other creatures, men live as gods, since (part.) by (their)
natare, body and mind, they are superior (xparıoreiw).
6. Πρός {arising from πρό) signifies before (im the presence of).
A. With the Gen. to denote direction or motion from the presence
of an object, especially in reference to the situation of a place, e. g.
οἰκεῖν πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου, towards the south, like ab oriente.
Sometimes it is to be translated by in the view of, in the eyes of, ete.
(properly before one), 6. g. 0 τι δικαιότατον καὶ πρὸς Peay καὶ
πρὸς ἀνθρώπω», τοῦτο πράξω, in the eyes of, in the judgment
of gods and men ;—also, for the advantage of any one, on the side of,
‚for some one, e. g. δοκεῖς μοι τὸν λόγον πρὸς ἐμοῦ λέγειν, to.speak
Sor me.—To denote the cause, occasion and author, hence with pas-
sive and intransitive verbs, 6. g. ἀτιμάζεσϑαι πρὸς Πεισιστρά-
τοῦ, to be dishonored by Pisistratus ;—in oaths, 6. g. πρὸς Beas,
per deos, by the gods, properly before the gods.—B. With the Dat. to
denote local rest before, near or by an object, e.g. πρὸς τῇ πόλδε,
before, by the city, πρὸς τοῖς κριταῖς, before the judges, sivas,
γίγνεσϑαι πρὸς τινι, to be earnestly engaged in something, e. g.
πρὸς πράγμασι, πρὸς TH λόγῳ, in business, tn conversation.
Then, in addition to, besides, 6. 5. πρὸς τούτῳ, πρὸς τούτοις,
praeter ea.—C. With the Acc. to denote the local limit, direction ‚pr
motion before an object, both in a friendly and hostile sense, e. g.
ἐλθεῖν πρός Tıva,to, ἀποβλέπειν πρός τινα, upon, λέγειν πρός
Tıra, to, συμμαχία» ποιεῖσϑαι πρός τινας, with, μάχεσθαι, we
21
“442 ΘΥΝΊΑΧ.--- ῬΒΕΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝΒ.--πό. ὀ [S167
λεμεῖν πρός τινα, against, πρὸς μεσημβρίαν, towards, ἄδειν
πρὸς αὐλόν, to sing to the flute, i. 6. to the flate’s accompaniment.
— To denote indefinite time, e. g. πρὸς ἡμέραν, towards day-
break. Also in reference to indefinite number.—In a causal sense
to denote purpose, 6. g. παντοδαπὰ εὑρημένα ταῖς πόλεσι πρὸς
φυλακὴν» καὶ σωτηρίαν, various schemes were devised to guard
and save the cities j—conformity, conformable, according to, 6. g
πρὸς τὴν ὄψιν ταύτην τὸν γάμον τοῦτον ἔσπευσα, according
to this view. So κρίνειν τι πρός τι, to judge according to some-
thing. ΑἸβο, πρὸς βίαν, by force, against one’s will, nous ἀν ἀγ-
an», necessarily, forcibly ;—hence, on account of, propter, e. g. πρὸς
φαῦτα, properly, in conformity with these things, hence, on thts ac-
count, therefore ;—hence to denote a comparison, usually with the idea
of superiority ( prae) : in relation to, in comparison with, before, 6. δ.
λῆρύς ἐστι πρὸς Κινησίαν, he ts mere talk, nonsense, compared
with Cinesias ;—in general to denote a respect, 6. g. σκοπεῖν, βλέπει;
πρός τι, διαφέρειν πρὸς ἀρετήν, to differ in. respect to virtue
7. Ὑπό, sub, original signification, under. A. With the Gen. to
denote motion from a depth out: out from under, forth from, e. g.
ὑπὶ ἀπήνης λύειν ἵππους, to loose the horses from the chariot ;—to
denote rest under an object, 6. g. ὑπὸ γῆς oixew.—To denote the
author, with passive and intransitive verbs, 6. g. κτείρεσϑαι ὑπό
τινος, ἀποθανεῖν ὑπό τινος, to be put to death by some one ;—
the cause, occasion, active influence, e.g. ὑπὸ καύματος, for, OR
account of, because of the heat, vn’ 00775, from, out of anger ;—to
denote the means and instrument, particularly with reference to the
accompaniment of musical instruments, 6. g. ἐστρατεύοντο ὑπὸ σαλ-
πίγγων, they marched by the sound of trumpets; vn αὐλοῦ 10
gevery, to dance by the music of the flute.—B. With the Dat., e. g.
ὑπὸ γῇ εἶναι, etc. as with the Gen.—C. With the Acc. to denote
direction or motion towards and under, e. g. ἰέναι ὑπὸ γῇ; exter
sion under an object, 6. g. ὕπεστιν οἰκήματα ὑπὸ γῆ», are under the
earth.—To denote time approximately, e.g. ὑπὸ νύκτα, sub noe
tem, towards night ;—to denote extension of time, e. g. ὑπὸ τὴν
ψύκτα, during.
Remark. When the article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with
8 preposition, expresses a substantive-idea, and the preposition ἐν ought to be
used, then this preposition is attracted by the verb denoting the direction whence,
and is changed into ἀπό or ἐκ; e.g. Ol ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἄνϑρωποι ἀπέφν-
you, the men belonging w the market-place fled, instead of ol ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ &
ὕρωποι ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἀπέφυγον. -
§ 168.] SYNTAX.—-VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN «dog. 248
XCII.. Hwercises on § 167, 6, 7.
Rhampsinitus, a king of Egypt, erected (= placed, aor.) two statues, of which
the Egyptians call the (one) standing (perf) towards (the) north, summer, the
(one) towards (the) south, winter. Arabia is the most remote of the inhabited
countries towards the south. (It ie) time for us to deliberate about ourselves,
that we may not (that not = #7), in the judgment both of gods and of men, ap-
pear (ἀπσφαίνεσθαι) very mean and dishonorable. The Persians were deprived
aor.) by the Lacedaemonians of the supremacy of Asia. It is not for the ad-
vantage of your reputation, to sin against the public (= common) laws and
against our (= the) ancestors. By the gods, abstain from injustice. Stesicho-
rus, the poet, was magnificently interred (aor.) in Catana, near the gate ealled
from him (the) Stesichorean. Near the dwelling of the king, a lake affords an
abundance of water. Socrates was zealously employed in discourse. Alcibia-
‘des was beautiful, and more than this, also very brave. Aristippus, the Thes-
salian, comes to Cyrus, and asks of him about two hundred mercenaries.
The Megareans buried their (= the) dead, turning them towards the east, but
the Athenians towards the west. Nicocles demeaned himself (aor.) towards the
citizens with (μετά) very great (= much) lenity. The Greeks fought (aor.)
against the Persians. Towards evening the enemy retreated. Socrates was
very much hardened (= very enduring) against winter and summer and all
hardships. (All) estimable men have the same disposition towards their (==
the) inferiors as their (= the) superiors have towards them. The Thracians
danced to the flute with their (= the) arms. The exercise (plur.) of the body
is useful for the health. Let us not judge happiness by (= according to) money,
bat by virtue and wisdom. Socrates despised everything human, in comparison
with (art.) counsel from the gods. A very beautiful fountain flows under the
plane-tree. Hector was slain by Achilles. Already many masters had been
violently (= with violence) put to death (ἀποϑνήσκειν, aor.) by the slaves. Ar-
chestratus travelled over (aor.) all lands and seas from a love of pleasure. The
rich often do not enjoy their (== the) prosperity from its (=the) unvarying
pleasure. The soldiers go to the battle to the sound of trumpets. All (the)
gold upon earth and under earth (acc.) is not equivalent to virtue. Dionysius
founded a city in Sicily just (αὐτός) at the foot of mount Aetna, and ealled Jt
Adranum. Towards night the enemy retreated. Towards the end of the war
there arose a violent famine.
§ 168. Remarks on the construction of Verbal Adjectives in -τέος,
Tea, -τόον, and on the construction of the Comparative and Su-
perlative Ὁ |
1. Verbal adjectives derived from transitive verbs, i. e. from such
as govern the Acc., are used either like the Lat. verbal in -dum,
impersonally in the neuter, -τέοφ or -τέα [8 147, (c)], or personally,
like the Lat. participle in -dus; but verbal adjectives derived from
intransitive verbs, can be used only impersonally.
244 SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS. —[§ 169.
2. The verbal adjective when used impersonally takes its object
in the same Case as the verb from which it is derived. The per-
son acting stands in the Dat., called the Dat. of the agent [$ 161,
2, (d)].
᾿Ασκητέον (or -τέα) ἐστί σοι THY Gpeeyy or ἀσκητέα ἐστί σοι ἡ ἀρετῆ,
you must practise virtue, or virtue must be practised by you. ᾿Ἐπιϑυμητέον tori
σοι τῆς ἀρετῆς, you must desire virtue. ᾿Ἐπιχειρητέον ἐστί σοι τῷ ἔργῳ,
you must attempt the work. Κολαστέον (or -τέα) ἐστί cot τὸν ἄνϑρωπον or
κολαστέος ἐστί σοι ὁ ἄνϑρωπος, you must punish the man. So with deponent
verbs; e. g. Μιμητέον (or -τέα) ἐστί σοι τοὺς ἀγαϑούς (from μεμεῖσϑαί
τινα) or μιμητέοι εἰσί σοι οἱ üyadoi, you must imitate the good.
8. When two objects are compared, the one by which the com-
parison is made, is put either in the Gen. [§ 158, 7, (8) ], or is con-
nected by the conjunction 7 (than); 8. g. ὁ πατὴρ μείζων ἐσεὶ τε οὗ
_ viod or 0.7. μ. ἐστὶν, ἢ ὁ υἱός, ts greater than the son.
Remark. When two qualities belonging to an object are compared with each
other, both are expressed by the comparative adjective and are connected by ἢ;
e. g. ϑάττων, ἢ σοφώτερός ἐστιν, celerior, quam prudentior, he is more swift than
prudent. So also with adverbs; 6. g. τοῦτο Yärrov, ἢ σοφώτερον ἐποίησας, eeie-
rius, quam prudentius, you did this with more dispatch than prudence.
XCIII. Exercises on § 168.
We must shun a (= the) dissolute friend. The citizens must obey the laws.
We must attempt noble actions. We must despise dangers for the sake of vir-
tue. We must avoid (= keep ourselves from) him who (part. pres.) is governed
by (art.) evil passions. We must put the hand even to difficult undertakings.
8169, Remarks on the use of the Pronouns.
1. The subject, predicate, attribute and object are expressed by
pronouns, when the parts of the sentence containing the pronouns,
are not to represent the ideas of objects or qualities, but when it is
merely to be shown, that an object or quality refers either to the
speaker himself or to another (second or third) person or thing (§ 55).
2. All the rules which have been given on the substantive and
adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective pronouns; still, a
few remarks are here necessary on the use of the personal pronouns.
8. The substantive personal pronouns in the Nom., viz. éyo), ov,
αὐτός, -7, -0, ἡμεῖς, etc., and the adjective (possessive) pronouns as
attributives, e. g. 21.06 πατήρ, are, in Greek, as in Latin, expressed
- only when they are specially emphatic, hence particularly in anti-
theses; e.g. καὶ ov ταῦτα ἔπραξας, καὶ ὁὸ ς πατὴρ ἀπέθανεν ;--
§ 169.] SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS, 26
ἐγὼ μὲν ἄποιμι, ov δὲ μένε. But where this is not the case, they
are omitted, the substantive pronouns being supplied by the endings
of the verb, and the adjective pronouns by the article prefixed to
the substantive; 6. g. γράφω, γράφεις, yoapa—y μήτηρ εἶπέ nos
(my mother) — οἱ γονεῖς στέργουσι τὰ τέκνα (love their children).
See above, § 56 and § 59, also § 148, 3.
Rem. 1. Αὐτός in the Nom. is not generally used as the subject of the verb,
but for the most part as an intensive pronoun (self, very), agreeing with another
Pronoun expressed or understood, or with a substantive. In some instances,
however, it seems to be used as the simple subject of the verb, though even then
retaining something of its intensive force; e.g. ὁ πατὴρ αὐτὸς ἐφοβήθη" σὺ
αὐτὸς ἔτυψάς με; αὐτὸς ἔφη. It has its intensive force also, when it agrees
with a pronoun or substantive in any other Case than the Nom.—The demon-
strative οὗτος (hic) and öde, usually refer to what is near, he, this man, this
thing ; the demonstrative ἐκεῖν ο (tlle), on the contrary, properly refers to what
is more remote, the person or thing there, that person or thing, but sometimes to what
immediately precedes. Hence when ἐκεῖνος and οὗτος are used in opposition
to each other, the latter refers to what is nearer, the former, to what is more re-
mote, though the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Lat. Aic and tle.
Rem. 2. The difference between the accented and enclitic forms of the perso-
nal pronouns, 6. g. ἐμοῦ and μον, lies in the greater or less emphasis with which
they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented forms are always used,
©. g. in antitheses; 6. g. ἐμοῦ μὲν κατεγέλασε, σὲ δὲ ἐπῴνεσεν, he derided me,
bet praised you.—On the use of the Gen. of substantive, instead of adjective (poe-
sessive) pronouns, see $ 148, Rem. 8 and § 59.—On the possessive pronouns
taking the word in apposition, in the Gen., 6. g. ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν πατήρ, see Rem.
4, below.
4. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something before
named, this being opposed to itself as an object (in the Gen., Dat.
Acc., or in connection with a preposition) or as an attribute.
Ὁ σοφὸς ἑαυτοῦ κρατεῖ, the wise man rules hamself. Σὺ ceavt@ ἀρέσκεις,
you are pleased with yourself. 'O mais ἑαυτὸν ἐπαινεῖ, the boy praises himself.
Ol γονεῖς ἀγαπῶσε τοὺς ἑαυτῶν παῖδας. Τνῶϑι σεαυτόν. Οὗτος ὁ ἀνὴρ
πάντα di’ ἑαυτοῦ μεμάϑηκεν. Ὁ στρατηγὸς ὑκὸ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ στρατιωτῶν
ἀπέϑανεν, was killed by his own soldiers.
5. The object before named, to which the reflexive pronouns re-
fer, is:
(a) The subject of the sentence, as in the examples of No. 4;
(Ὁ) An object of the sentence, e. g. Κῦρος διήνεγκδ τῶν ἄλλων
βασιλέων, τῶν ἀρχὰς di ἑαυτῶν κτησαμένων, O. differed
from other kings, who acquired sovereignty by themselves. Mı-
σοῦμεν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τοὺς φϑονοῦντας ἑαυτοῖς, we hate
205"
246 SYNTAX.—USE OF THE PRONOUNS. [8 169.
men who bear ill-will towards themselves. ἀπὸ σαὺ τοῦ ἐγώ
σε διδάξω. |
6. In Greek, as in Latin, the reflexive pronoun may be used in
the relations above named, with the construction of the Acc. and
the Inf., or of the Part., and even when it stands in a subordinate
clause. In this case, the English language often uses the personal
pronouns him, her, tt, instead of the reflexive pronouns.
Ὁ τύραννος νομίζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν ἑαυ τῷ, the tyrant thinks that
the citizens are subject to him. Πολλῶν ἐϑνῶν hpfev ὁ Κῦρος ot ἑαυτῷ
ὁμογλώττων ὄντων, οὔτε ἀλλήλοις, Cyrus governed many nations, not speaking the
‚same language with him nor with each other. ‘O κατήγορος ἔφη τὸν Σωκράτην
évareiQovra τοὺς νέους, ὡς αὐτὸς ein σοφώτατός τε nal ἄλλους ἱκανώτατος ποιῆ-
σαι σοφούς, οὕτω διατιϑέναι τοὺς αὑτῷ συνόντας, ὥςτε μηδαμοῦ nap’ αὐτοῖς
τοὺς ἄλλους εἶναι πρὸς ἑαυτόν, the accuser said that Socrates, by persuading
the youth that he himself was the wisest of men, and most capable of making others
wise, 80 influenced the minds of those who associated with him, that others were of w
“account, in comparison unth him.
7. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun αὐτός͵
“4, -0: VIZ. αὐτοῦ, -79, αὐτῷ, -ῇ, αὐτόν, -79, -ὁ, αὐ τ ὦ ν, ele,
or of a demonstrative, are universally used, when an object is not
opposed to itself, but to another object; e. g. Ὁ πατὴρ αὖ τ ᾧ sux
τὸ βιβλίον, gave the book to him (the son). Zrégyo αὐτόν (him).
Αἰπέχομαι αὐτοῦ, I abstain from him. The pronoun αὐτοῦ, ete.
is here nothing else than the pronoun of the third person.
Rem. 3. The personal pronoun ot, ol, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense in
the Attic writers. But in this case, it is regularly employed, only when tho re
dexive relation has respect, not to the nearest, but to the more remote subject;
6. g. Ὁ τύραννος νομίζει rode πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν οἱ (but not τύραννος χαρίζεται
ol).
8. In the instance mentioned under No. 6, the corresponding
forms of αὐτός are very frequently used instead of the reflexive
pronoun ; and this is always the case, where a member of. a sen-
tence or a subordinate clause, is not the expression or sentiment of
the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the expression of the
speaker (writer).
Κῦρος ἐδεῖτο. τοῦ Σάκα πάντως σημαίνειν αὐτῷ, ὁπότε ἐγχωροίη εἰςιέναι
πρὸς τὸν πάππον, O. rogabat Sacam, μὲ indicaret BIBI, quando tempestivum esse.
Ol πολέμιοι εὐθὺς ἀφήσουσι τὴν λείαν, ἐπειδὰν idwoi τινας im αὐτοὺς tar
φψοντας, the enemy will stop plundering, as soon as they see any coming against them.
Τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γνώμην ἀπεφαίνετο Σωκράτης πρὸς τοὺς ὁμιλοῦντας αὖ τῷ, Socrates
expressed his views to those who associated with him. Σωκράτης ἔγνω τοῦ ἔτι ζῇν τὸ
τεϑνάναι αὖ τῷ κρεῖττον εἶναι, S. knew that death was better for him than a longer
period of life. |
& 169. SYNTAX.—-USE OF THE PRONOUNS. 247
9. In the compound reflexive pronouns, av τ ό either retains its
exclusive force or it does not, i. e. it is sometimes emphatic, and
sometimes not.
(a) Δίκαιόν ἐστι φίλους μὲν ποιεῖσϑαι τοὺς ὁμοίως αὑτοῖς re (or σφίσι
τε αὐτοῖς) καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις χρωμένους, φοβεῖσϑαι δὲ καὶ δεδιέναι τοὺς πρὸς
σφᾶς μὲν αὐτοὺς (or ἑαυτού ς) οἰκειότατα διακειμένους, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς ἄλ-
λους ἀλλοτρίως, it is proper to make friends of those who treat themselves and others
alike, but to fear those who are very friendly to themselves, but hostile to others ; here
the reflexives αὑτοῖς and σφᾶς αὐτοὺς, each being compounded of αὐτός, are em-
phatic = se ipsis and se ipsos—(b) Ol στρατιῶται παρεῖχον ἑαυτοὺς (or σφᾶς
atrovdc) ἀνδρειοτάτους (se), showed themselves very brave. Ol πολέμιοι napédo-
σαν ἑαυτοὺς (oragade abrodg) τοῖς “Ἕλλησιν (se), delivered themselves to the
Greeks ; in these two examples, the αὐτός contained in the reflexives is not em-
phatic.
Rem. 4. The reflexive possessive pronouns are either used alone, e. g. μεταδί-
Capi σοι τῶν ἐμῶν χρημάτων, I share with you my effects; δικαιότερόν ἐστι
τὰ ἡμέτερα ἡμᾶς ἔχειν ἢ τούτους, it is more just that we should have our own
than that they should have it ; ὑμεῖς ἅπαντες τοὺς ὑμετέρους παῖδας ἀγαπᾶτε;
oi πολῖται τὰ σφέτερα σώζειν ἐπειρῶντο; or with the addition of the Gen.
of αὐτός (according to § 154, 3); or instead of the possessives, the Gen. of the
compound substantive-reflexives is employed; and indeed in the common lan-
guage, the last form is always used with the singular pronoun, and more fre-
quently than the possessives with the third Pers. Pl., but the Gen. of αὐτός is
usually employed with the plural of the possessives (except the third person).
Thus: ;
8.6 ἐμαυτοῦ (σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ) πατήρ not ὁ ἐμὸς (σὸς, ὃς) αὐτοῦ m.
τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ (σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ) μητέρα ποῖ τὴν ἐμὴν (σὴν, ἣν) αὐτοῦ μ.
τοῖς ἐμαυτοῦ (σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ) λόγοις ποὶ τοῖς ἐμοὶς (σοῖς, οἷς) αὐτοῦ A.
P.5 ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν πατήρ extremely rare ὁ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν m.
τὴν ὑμετέραν αὐτῶν μητέρα extremely rare τὴν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν u.
τὰ ἡμέτερα αὐτῶν ἁμαρτήματα extremely rare τὰ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἁ.
ὁ σφέτερος αὐτῶν πατήρ more frequent ὁ ἑαυτῶν πατήρ, but not
ὁ σφῶν αὐτῶν m.
Here also, ab röc is sometimes emphatic, sometimes not: (a) Ὁ παῖς ὑβρίζει
τὸν ἑαυτοῦ πατέρα, suum ipsius patrem, his own father, ὑμεῖς ὑβρίζετε τοὺς
ὑμετέρους αὐτῶν πατέρας, vestros ipsorum patres, your own parents, ol mai-
deg ὑβρίζουσι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν πατέρας, suos ipsorum patres; (Ὁ) Στρατονίκην, τὴν
ἑαυτοῦ ἀδελφήν, δίδωσι Σεύϑῃ, suam sororem, his sister ;—in the examples un-
der (a), αὐτός retains its emphatic force, in the one under (b), it does not.
Rem. 5. Αὐτός with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after the substan-
tive and adjective pronouns; 6. g. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, ὁ ὑμέτερος αὐτῶν
πατήρ, ete. But when the personal pronoun is used with the reflcxive sense,
δον, αὐτός, used in its exclusive sense, may precede or follow the personal pro-
noun; e. g. αὐτοῦ ἐμοῦ (μου), αὐτῷ ἐμοί (μοι), αὐτὸν ἐμέ (ue), or ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ,
ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc. , :
Rem. 6. For the sake of perspicuity, or rhetorical emphasis, a demonstrative
pronoun, particularly αὐτός, is frequently put in the same sentence after a pre-
e
248 SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. [§ 170,
& ‘
ceding substantive or pronoun, when a long intermediate clause separates the
Case from the verb which governs it. This pronoun again resumes the preced-
ing substantive or pronoun; e. g. Κλέαρχος δὲ ToAnidnv ᾿Ηλεῖον, ὃν
ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων map’ ἑαυτῷ κήρυκα ἄριστον τῶν Tore, τοῦτον ἀνειπεῖν ἐκέ-
λευσε, Clearchus commanded Tolmides of Elis, whom he happened to have with him,
and who was the most distinguished herald of his time, that he should make prodama-
tion. ᾿Ἐγὼ piv οὖν βασιλέα, ᾧ πολλὰ οὕτως ἐστὶ τὰ συμμαχα, elmep προϑυ-
μεῖται ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι, οὐκ οἶδα, 5 τι δεῖ α ὁ τὸ ν ὀμόσαι καὶ δεξιὰν δοῦναι.
XCIV. Ezercises on § 169.
The dissolute (man) makes himself the slave of himself. Care for all, bat
most for thyself. The passions (ἡδοναί), implanted in the soul, do not persuade
it to be considerate, but forthwith to render service both to themselves and to
the body. I should (ὁ 153, 2, c) be ashamed (aor.) if I cared more for my re
putation than for the common welfare. (Those) whom (od¢ ἄν, w. subj.) we
esteem (aor.) as better than ourselves, those we are willing to obey and (that)
without compulsion. To those who ($ 148, 6) do not (47) command them-
selves to do right (= the good), God assigns others (as) masters (= comman-
ders). The Chaldaeans came and prayed (part.) Cyrus to make (aor.) peace
with them. The Athenians thought they ought (inf) not to thank others (ée-
ρος) for (art.) deliverance, but the other Greeks them. In the Peloponnesian
war, Grecian cities were destroyed (aor.), some by (the) Barbarians, others by
themselves. Enrich thy (= the) friends; then thou wilt enrich thyself. Phrixus,
as soon as (part.) he learned (aor.) that his father was about (μέλλειν, opt.) to
sacrifice him, took (part. aor.) his sister, and mounting (aor.) a ram with her, '
came (aor.) through the sea into the Pontus Euxinus. The Persians went
through the whole country of the Eretrians, binding (aor.) their (= the) hands,
that they might be able (ἔχειν) to tell (aor.) the king, that no one had escaped
them.
8170. The Infinitive.
The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract sub-
stantive-idea; but it differs from the substantive, in retaining 6
much of the nature of the verb, as that, on the one hand, it exhr
bits the nature or quality of the action, viz. duration, completion
and futurity, e. g. γράφειν, γεγραφέναι, γράψαι, γράψειν, while on
the other, it has the same construction as the verb, i. e. it governs
the same Cases as the. verb; 6. g. γράφειν ἐπιστολήν, Ernıdvui
τῆς ἀρετῆς, ἐναντιοῦσϑαι τοῖς πολεμίοις. The attributive
qualification of the Inf. is an adverb, and not, as in the case of an
actual substantive, an adjective; e.g. καλῶς ἀποθανεῖν (but καλὸς
©avaros). The Inf. will first be considered without the article,
and then with it.
.Φ
$$ 171, 172.] SYNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. 249
8171. A. Infinitive without the Article.
1. The Inf. without the article is used, in the first place, as the
subject. Ä |
Οὐ κακὸν βασιλεύειν, to be a king is not evil. ᾿Αεὶ ἡβᾷ τοῖς γέρουσιν εὖ
μαϑεῖν, the ability to learn always remains young even to the old. Μόχϑος μέ-
γιστος yng πατρίας στέρεσϑαι. ᾿
2. In the second place, the Inf. is used as the odject in the Acc.,
to express something effected, wished, aimed at, the purpose, object
or result, with the following classes of verbs* and adjectives :
(a) With verbs which denote an act or expression of the will;
e. g. to wish, to desire, to long for, to dare, to ask, to command, to
counsel, to permit, to fear, to delay, to prevent ;—(b) with verbs which
denote the exercise of the intellectual powers or their manifestation ;
e. g. to think, to intend, to hope, to seem, to learn, to say, to deny ;—
(ce) with verbs which contain the idea of being able, effecting, of
power or capacity ;—-(d) with many other verbs and adjectives to
express a purpose or object, a consequence or result.
Βούλομαι, μέλλω γράφειν. Ἐπιϑυμῶ πορεύεσϑαι. Τολμὼ
ὑπομένειν τὸν κίνδυνον. Παραινῶ σοι γράφειν. Οὗτος τοὺς δούλους
ἔπεισεν ἐπιϑέσϑαι τοῖς δεσπόταις. Τῇ ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ ἅμα wapeckevéa-
ζετο βοηϑεῖν tr αὐτούς. Κωλύω σε ταῦτα ποιεῖν. Φοβοῦμαι διε-
λέγχειν oe. Νομίζω ἁμαρτεῖν. "EArilo εὐτυχήσειν. H πό-
As ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφϑαρῆναι. Ἔφη εἶναι στρατηγός. Ab
yo εἰδέναι ταῦτας, Μανθϑάνω ἱππεύειν. Διδάσκω σε γράφειν.
Δύναμαι ποιεῖν ταῦτα. Ποιῶ σε γελᾷν. "Αξιός ἐστι ϑαυμάζε-
σϑαι. Ἤκομεν μανϑάνειν.
REMARK. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that with these adjectives, it com-
monly uses the Inf., Act. or Mid., instead of the passive Inf. Such Infinitives
may be translated both actively and passively into English; 6. g. καλός ἐστιν
ἰδεῖν, he is beautiful to see, or to be seen, ἄξιός ἐστι ϑαυμάσαι, worthy to be admired,
λόγος δυνατός ἐστι κατανοῆσαι, able to be understood.
8172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with the Infini-
tive.
1. Most verbs which take an Inf., have, in addition to this object,
also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the principal
* The verbs which take an Inf. after them, are usually such as do not express
a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other construction,
to complete the idea. The Inf. therefore, is the complement of the verb on
which it ern Comp: what is said on the Part. as a complement of the verb,
4 175.— Tr.
250 ’ SYNTAX.—=-THE INFINITIVE. [$ 172.
verb requires; e. g. δέομαί cov ἐλϑεῖν, I beg you to come.
Συμβουλεύω σοι σωφρονεῖν, Judvise you to be discreet. ’E rn o-
τρύνω os μάχεσθαι, 7 urge you to fight. Kelevo os γράφειν.
2. But when the principal verb is a verbum sentiendi* or decla-
randi, governing the Acc., and the subject of the principal verb is at
the same time its object (or in English, when the subject of the
principal verb is the same as the subject of the dependent clause,
6. g. I think that I have erred), then the Acc. of a personal pronoun
is not joined with the Inf., as in Latin, but is wholly omitted.
Olouaı ἁμαρτεῖν (instead of οἴομαι ἐμαυτὸν ἁμαρτεῖν), I think that I have
erred, credo ΜῈ errasse; oleı ἁμαρτεῖν (instead of οἴει σεαυτὸν ἁμαρτεῖν), you
think that you have erred, credis TE errasse; oleraı ἁμαρτεῖν (instead of oleras
ὀκυτὸν ἁμαρτεῖν), he thinks that he has erred, credit sn errasse.
8. When adjectives or substantives are joined with the Inf., as
explanations of the predicate, they are put, by attraction, in the
same Case as the object of the principal verb, viz. in the Gen.,
Dat. or Acc.; and when the subject of a verbum sentiendi or decla-
randt is also its object, i. 6. when the subject of the principal verb
and of the Inf. is the same, the explanatory word is put in the Nom.
by attraction.
Nom. with Inf. Ὁ στρατηγὸς ἔφη πρόϑυμος εἶναι ἐπιβοηθεῖν, the comman-
der said that he was zealous to render aid.
Gen. with Inf. Δέομαί cov προϑύμον εἶναι, I wish you to be zealous.
Dat. with Inf. Συμβουλεύω cor προϑύμῳ εἶναι.
Acc. with Inf. ’Erorpivo oe πρόϑυμον εἶναι. Ἔφη ce evdaipove
εἶναι.
Rem. }. When the subject of the principal verb and of the Inf. is the same, and
the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is the case particularly in
* antitheses, then the subject of the Inf. is expressed in the Acc.; e. g. Κροῖσος
ἐνόμιζε ἑαυτὸν εἶναι πάντων ὀλβιώτατον, Croesus thought that he was the most
happy of all men.
Rem. 2. Very frequently the predicative explanations which are joined with
the Inf., and refer to the object of the principal verb, are not put in the same
Case as this object, but in the Acc.; this is explained by considering the object
of the principal verb, at the same time as the subject of the Inf.; 6. g. δέομαι
ὑμῶν (ὑμᾶς) Bondode γενέσϑαι. ᾿Αϑηναίων ἐδεήϑησαν σφίσι Bon Vode
yev£odaı,'they requested the Athenians to assist them; here the word ᾿Αϑηναΐων
stands in a two-fold relation, first as the object of ἐδεήϑησαν, in the Gen, and
second, as the suhject of yevéoda:, in the Acc.; Zevlg ἥκειν παρήγγειλε Aa
Bövra τοὺς ἄνδρας; ἕξεστι & ὑμῖν, el βούλεσϑε λαβόντας ὅπλα εἰς kin
ὄννον ἐμβαΐνειν.
* Verba sentiendi are such as signify to believe, think, see, } hear, and
the like ;—werba declarand:, such as signify to say, affirm, show, Asche, ete.—TR,
§ 173] SYNTAX.—THE INPINITIVE. 851
Rem. 3. When the Inf. is used as the subject (§ 171, 1), and has a subject of
its own or predicative explanations, connected with it, both the subject of the
Inf. and the predicative explanations are put in the Acc.; e. g. Ὑπὲρ τῆς πα-
τρίδος μαχομένους ümodaveiv καλόν ἐστιν, it is honorable to die fighting for
our country; here ἀποθανεῖν which is the subject of ἐστί, has for its own sub-
ject the Ace. τενάς or ἡμᾶς understood, and for its predicative explanation, μα»
χομένους, also in the Acc.
XCV. Exercises on §§ 171, 172.
Critias and Alcibiades believed that, if they should associate (aor. opt.) with
(art.) Socrates, they might (§ 153, 2, d.) become very competent both to speak
and to act (= in speaking and in acting). Endeavor to be a lover of labor with
thy (=the) hody, a lover of wisdom with thy mind, that (iva, w. subj.) τος
mayest execute thy (= the) purposes (τὰ δόξαντα) with the one, foresee that
which is for thy advantage (= the advantageous) with the other. The Persians
thought they were invincible by (κατά) sea. Thou wilt find many tyrants who-
(part.) have been destroyed by those who ($ 148, 6) seemed most to be (their)
friends. Socrates said, that those who ($ 148, 6) consult an (== the) oracle
(for that) which the gods have given (aor.) men (the ability) to learn. (part. aor.)
. and to decide, were insane. It becomes every ruler to be discreet. I believe
that men have (art.) riches and (art.) poverty not in their houses (sing.).
but in their minds. Their (= the) common dangers made the allies kindly.
disposed towards each other. Some philosophers (= of the philosophers) be-
lieve (doxei, w. dat.) that everything (plur.) is in motion (= moving itself),
but others that nothing can ever move ($ 153, 2, d.), and some, that everything
is coming into existence (== becoming) and perishing, but others that nothing
can ever either (= neither) come into being (aor.) or (= nor) perish (aor.).
Men, when they are sick (part.), submit (= present) their bodies both to be am-
putated (act.) and cauterised (act.) amid (μετά) sufferings and pains. Cyrus
ordered the enemy to deliver up (aor.) their arms. It is better to learn late
than to be ignorant.
8173. B. Infinitive with the Article.
1. The Inf. with the article (<0) is treated in all respects as a
substantive, and is such, since by means of the article, it can be de-
clined, and is capable of expressing all those relations, which are
indicated by the Cases of the substantive. On the contrary, it here
also, as in the Inf. without the article, retains the nature of a verb;
6. 8. τὸ ἐπιστολὴν γράφειν, τὸ καλῶς γράφειν, etc., τὸ καλῶς
ἀποθνήσκειν, an honorable death, τὸ ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος ἀποϑανεῖν,
death for one’s country.
2. When the Inf., whether used as a subject or object, has a sub-
jeet and predicative explanations belonging to it, then both these,
as in case of the Inf. without the article (§ 172, A.), are put in the
252 SYNTAX.—THE PARTICIPLE. ($174.
Acc. When, however, the subject of the Inf. is the same as that
of the principal verb, it is not expressed, and the predicative expla
nations are put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of
the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (§ 172, 2 and 3).
Τὸ ἀποθανεῖν τινα ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος καλή τις τύχη, that one should die
for his country is a happy lot. Τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους ὄντας οὐ-
dev, οἶμαι, ϑαυμαστόν, that those who are men should err, I think, is not surprising,
or it is not surprising that, etc. Κλέαρχος μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε τοῦ Karanerpu
ϑῆναι, Οἱ barely escaped being stoned to death. Σωκράτης παρεκάλει ἐπιμελεῖ-
oda τοῦ ὡς φρονιμώτατον εἶναι καὶ ὠφελιμώτατον, Socrates em
horted each one to make tt his object to be (to have a care for being) as wise and as
useful as possible ; here φρονιμώτατον, etc. agrees with ἕκαστον understood, which
is the subject of the Inf. el vac, while the whole clause is used as ἃ substantive.
(Very often τοῦ or τοῦ μή with the Inf. is used to denote a purpose or object;
e. g. Δύναμιν παρασκευάζεται τοῦ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι, he is preparing a force in
‘order that he may not be injured). Ol ἄνϑρωποι πάντα μηχανῶνται ἐπὶ τῷ ehr»
xeiv, use every expedient tn order to be prosperous. ‘O Κῦρος διὰ τὸ φιλο
μαϑὴς εἶναι πολλὰ τοὺς παρύντας ἀνηρώτα, καὶ ὅσα αὐτὸς Im’ ἄλλων (sc
ἀνηρωτᾶτο), διὰ τὸ ἀγχίνους εἶναι ταχὺ ἀπεκρίνετο, on account of his
fondness for learning, Cyrus was in the habit of proposing many questions to those '
about kim, and whatever he himself was asked by others, he readily answered, on ac
count of his quickness of perception ; in this sentence, the subject of the Infinitive
being the same as that of the principal verb, the predicative explanations φίλο’
μαϑής and ἀγχίνους, are put in the Nom. by attraction, agreeing with the im-
plied subject-of the Infinitives. So in τοῦτο ἐποίει ἐκ τοῦ χαλεπὸς εἶναι;
this he effected by being severe. |
XCVL Exercises on § 173.
The huntsmen cheerfully toil in hope of game (λαμβάνειν, fid.). Prome
theus was bound in Scythia, because (διά) he had stolen fire. The Spartans
are proud of (ἐπί) showing (= offering) themselves submissive and obedient to
magistrates. Avarice, besides (πρός) conferring no advantage (= benefiting
nothing), often deprives even of present possessions. In order that the hares
may not escape from the nets, the hunters station scouts. So far from (ἀντί)
corrupting young men, Socrates incited them, in (ἐκ) every way to practise vit
tue.
§174. The Participle.
1. The Participle is used, in the first place, as the complement of
verbs and adjectives, 6. g. χαίρω τὸν φίλον ὠφελήσας, I rejoice that
I have assisted a friend, where the Part. ὠφελήσας explains or com-
pletes the idea of the verb, which is imperfectly expressed without
it; in the second place, the Part. serves not merely to denote an
immediate attributive qualification of a substantive, 6. g. τὸ dal
$175.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 238:
λον ῥόδον or τὸ ῥόδον τὸ ὃ ἀλλο ν, the blooming rose, but it can
also express the adverbial relations of time, causality, manner and
way, and, in general, every explanatory circumstance, as well es 8.
more remote attributive of a substantive.
2. The Part. represents the idea of the verb as that of .an:adjex-
tive, and is like the adjective both in its form and in its attributive-
use; but, in the same manner as the Inf. (δ 170),.it exhibits the:
nature or quality of the action (γράφων, γεγραφώς, γράψας, γρά-
or), and retains the construction of the verb (γράφων éato¢e-
λήν, καλῶς γράφων). As the Part. has an attributive form
and signification, it can never be used independently, but always.
depends on a substantive, agreeing with it in gender, number and
Case.
8175. The Partictple as the complement of the Ver,
1. As the Part. is an attributive, and therefore represents the ac-
‘tion as already belonging te an object, only such verbs can have a
Part. for their complement, as require for a complement an ‘action
which, in the character of an aitribute, belongs to an ebject,—the
object being in some ‘state of action, or in some condition. Henee
the following classes of verbs have a Part. for their complement,
(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the senses
or by the mind, e. g. to hear, to see, to observe, to know, to perceive,
to remember, to forget ;—(b) Verba declarandi, e. g. to declare, to
show, to make ‘manifest, to appear, to be known, to be evident ;—~—
(c) Verba affectuum, i. e. such as denote an affection of the. mind,
8. g. to rejoice, to grieve, to be contented, happy, to be displeased, to
be ashamed, to regret ;—(d) Verbs signifying to permit, to endure, to
persevere, to continue, to be weary (περιορᾷν, ἐπιτρέπειν, ἀνέχεσθας,
καρτερεῖν, κάμνειν, etc.; but ἐᾷ» always with the Inf.) ;—(e) Verbs
signifying to begin and cease, to cause to cease, to omit, to be remiss.
in something ;—(f) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish
one’s self, to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, to do wrong, to
enjoy, to be full of something.
Rem. }. The Part. used with the preeeding classes of verbs, is often equiva-
lent to a subordinate clanse introdaced by ὅτε or δἰ, and in English, must often
Be transhated by that. or if, or by the Inf. |
2. The construction is here evident. The Part. agrees in Case
with the substantive-object of the principal verb, this object being
in the Case which the principal verb requires. But when the sub-
22
251 SYNTAX. —THRB PARTICIPLE, [9 125.
ject of the principal verb is, at the same time, ita object, as οἶδα
(ἐγώ) ἐμαυτὸν θνητὸν Grea, then the personal pronoun which rep-
resents the subject as an object, is not expressed, and the Part. is
put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of the principal
verb, i. e. in the Nom. (comp. § 172, 2).
Ὁρῶ τὸν ἄνϑρωπον τρέχοντα, I see the man running. Olda dv
ϑρωπον ϑνητὸν ὄντα, ] know that man is mortal. Olda ϑνητὸς ὧν,
I know that I am mortal. ᾿Ακούω αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, 7 hear him say. Οἱ
᾿Αϑηναῖοι ἐφαίνοντο ὑπεραχϑεσθϑέντες τῇ Μιλήτου ἁλώσει, the Athe
nians seemed to have been exceedingly grieved at the capture of M. ‘Padiuc ἐλ εγχ-
ϑήσῃ ψευδόμενος, you will easily be confuted if you falsify. Ol Beol xai-
ρουσι τιμώμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the gods rejoice, if they are honored,
at being honored. Xaipw σοι ἐλϑόντι, I rejoice that you have come. Ol
πολῖται περιεῖδον τὴν γῆν ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων τμηϑεῖσαν, the citizens per-
mitted the country to be laid waste by the enemy. Παύω σε ἀδικοῦντα, I make
you cease to do wrong, or doing wrong. Παύομαί σε ἀδικῶν, I cease to injure
you. ἼἌρχομαι λέγων, I begin to speak. Ev ἐποίησας ἀφικόμενος,
you have done well that you have come. ‘Auapräveıs ταῦτα ποιῶν, you err in
doing these things. ΤΠ λήρης εἰμὶ ταῦτα nn with seeing
these things.
Rem. 2. Yet attraction is omitted, and the Acc. of the eee pronoun, as
the object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is
emphatic; 6. g. περιεῖδον αὑτοὺς γήρᾳ ἀδυνάτους γενομένου ς, they permit-
bed themselves to become enfeebled by old age.
Rem. 3. With σύνοιδα, συγγιγνώσκω ἐμαυτῷ, the Part. can either
refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun which
stands with the verb; if it refers to the subject, it is put in the Nom., if to the
pronoun, in the Dat.; 6. g. σύνοιδα (συγγιγνώσκω) ἐμαυτῷ eb ποιῆσας or σύνοε-
da ἐμαυτῷ εὖ ποιήσαντι, Tam conscious that I have done well. But when the sub-
ject is not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the
abject with its Part. is either put in the Dat., σύνοιδά σοι εὖ ποιήσαντι, I am com-
scious that you have done well; or (though more seldom) the substantive is pnt in
the Dat., but the Part. in the Acc.; e. g. ἐγώ σοι σύνοιδα ed ποιήσαντα.
Rem. 4. Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with
the Inf., yet with a different meaning.
(a) ἀκούειν, with the Part. implies an immediate perception by one’s own
senses; with the Inf., one not immediate, but obtained by hear-say; 6. σ΄.
ἀκούω αὐτοῦ διαλεγομένον, i. 6. ejus sermones auribus meis perci-
go; but ἰδεῖν ἐπεϑύμει ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης τὸν Κῦρον, ὅτι ἥκονε (ex alts am
diverat) καλὸν κἀγαϑὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι; :
(Ὁ) εἰδέναι, ἐκίστασθϑαι, with a Part. to know; with the Inf, to know
how to do something (to be able); e.g. olda (ἐπίσταμαι) ϑεοὺς σε β ὅ-
μένος, I know that I reverence the gods, but σέβεσϑαι, I know how to
reverence the gods ;
(c) μανϑάνειν, with the Part. to perceive; with the Inf, te learn; e. g-
$175.) SYNTAX.—THE PARTIOIPLE. 255
μανϑάνω σοφὸς ὧν, I percave that Iam τοϑα, σοφὸς εἶναι, I lam
to be wise ;
(d) γεγνώσκειν, with the Part., to know, to perceive; with the Inf., to learn,
to judge, to conclude; e.g. γιγνώσκω ἀγαϑοὺς ὄντας τοῖς orparia-
ταις τοὺς ἀγῶνας, I know that the prize-fights are useful; but dyadod¢
εἶναι, I judge that, etc. ; ;
(e) μεμνῆσϑαι, with the Part., to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf., ss
contemplate doing something, to intend, to endeavor; 6. δ. μέμνηται εὖ
ποιῇσας τοὺς πολίτας, he remembers that he did good to the citizens; et
ποιῆσαι, he strives (wishes) to do good ;
(f) φαίνεσθαι, with the Part., io appear, apparere, to show one's self; with
the Inf., to seem, videri; e.g. ἐφαίνετο κλαίων and κλαίειν;
(g) ἀγγέλλειν, with the Part., denotes the annunciation of actual events;
with the Inf., the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed ; e. g.
ὁ ᾿Ασσύριος εἰς τὴν χώραν ἐμβάλλων ἀγγέλλεται, it is announced
that the Assyrian has made an irruption into the country (a fact); but ἐ μ-
βάλλειν ἀγγέλλεται (whether he has made an actual irruption or
not, is not certain);
(8) δεικνύναι or ἀποφαίνειν, with the Part., to show, to prove; with
the Inf., to teach; e.g. ἔδειξέ oe ἀδικήσαντα, I proved that you had
done wrong ; but ἡ βουλὴ Αἰσχίνην καὶ προδότην εἶναι καὶ κακό-
νουν ὑμῖν ἀπέφαιν'εν (docuit) ;
(i) ποιεῖν, with the Part, to represent; with the Inf, to cause, to suppose ;
e.g.rorö σε γελῶντα, I represent you laughing; but ποιῶ oe ye-
Adv, I cause you to laugh, or I will suppose that you laugh ;
(k) αἰσχύνεσθαι and αἰδεῖσθαι, with the Part., to be ashamed om ac-
count of something which one does ; with the Inf., to be ashamed or afraid to
do something, to omit something from shame; e. g. αἰσχύναομαι κακὰ
πράττων τὸν φίλον, I am ashamed of doing evil to a friend; but aic x d-
νομαι κακὰ πράττειν τὸν φίλον, Jam ashamed to do evil to a friend;
(1) ἄρχεσθαι, with the Part., to be in the beginning of an action; with the
Inf., to begin to do something (something intended); 6. g. 7pgavro ra
τείχη οἰκοδομοῦντες and οἰκοδομεῖν.
Rem. 5. Instead of the impersonal phrases, φῆλόν ἐστι, φανερόν ἐστι, φαίνεται,
tt appears, it is evident, the Greek uses the personal construction, and makes the
Part. agree with the subject; such phrases, however, are generally rendered in-
to English as if they were impersonal; e. g. δῆλός εἰμι, φανερός εἶμι, φαίνομαι
τὴν πατρίδα εὖ ποιῆσας, it is evident that I have done well for my country.
3. Finally, the Part. is used as a complement with the following
verbs: (a) τυγχάνω, to happen; (b) 1490 ἀν ὦ, to be concealed,
unobserved ; (c) διατελῶ, διαγίγνομαι, dıayw, which ex-
press a continuance ; (ἃ) pO avo, to come before, to anticipate ;
(e) οἴχομαι, to go away, to depart. With these verbs, the English
often changes the construction, the verbs being frequently rendered
by an adverb, and the Part. connected with them by a finite verb.
„0 SYNTAX. —THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 175,
Kpaioor φονέα τοῦ παιδὸς LA av Gave βόσκων, Croesus nourished the mur-
derer of his son UNWITTINGLY (without knowing it), Acayo, dıarekö, die
γέγνομαι καλὰ ποιῶν, 7 ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is honorable. "Ot
RETO φεύγων, went away QUICKLY, or flew away, öxovro ἀποπλέοντες,
said away, οἴχομαι φέρων, celeriter abstuli. "Ervxov ὁπλῖται ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ
καϑεύδοντες ὡς πεντήκοντα, about fifty heavy armed soldiers were then, just
thea, by chance, sleeping in the market-place. {Τυγχώνω is always used, where an
event has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental co-
“peration of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things; it may
eometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance, but often cannot be
wanslated at all into English). Χαλεπὸν ἦν ἄλλον φϑάσαι τοῦτο TOL}
σαντα, it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him in ἀν.
ing it. 7
XCVH. Zxerecises on 8$ 174, 175.
I hear (w. gen.) that some are commended, because they are men observant
of law. It is pleasant to learn (w. acc.) that & friend is prosperous. I once
heard Socrates discoursing upon friendship. No one repents (aor.) of having
deen silent (aor.), very many of having talked. Remember that thon art a man.
(They) will fight more boldly against the enemy, who (οὗ ἄν) are conscious
that they are well trained. Socrates was well known to be humane. The man
had been convicted of having deceived (aor.) us. It is evident that the enemy
will besiege the city, at the same time, by sea and by land. Industrious pupils
rejoice to be commended. Xerxes repented of having scourged (aor.) the Helle
spont. The citizens repented that they betrayed the city. It is hard to suffer
friends to be ruined. Be not weary (aor., § 153, Rem. 3) of benefiting a friend.
Socrates never ceased both to seek for and to learn the good. The enemy left
off (aor.) besieging the city. Endeavor to surpass thy friends in kindness. I
‘was conscious of having done no wrong (aor.) to my friend. The Persians learn
betimes, while (part.) they are still children, both to govern and to obey (= to
be governed). A kindly-disposed friend understands (how) to alleviate (the)
grief of a friend. If (part.) thou art rich, remember to do good to the poor.
Let us not be ashamed that we learn that which is useful from a stranger. The
Lacedaemonians, believing {aor.) that war would benefit them, resolved (aor.) to
render aid to Cyrus. Philip seems to have enlarged his dominion by gold ra-
ther than by arms. Death is (the) greatest of all blessings to man. The sol
diers were at this very time drawn up (in order of battle). Canst thou tell me
what thou thinkest? He who (ὄςτις) fears others (érepoc) is, without knowing
it, himself a slave. Callixenus, the Athenian, who (part.) had been confined
(aor.) in the prison (of the state), secretly dug through (aor.) it and escaped to
the enemy. Socrates did good continually ({part.). Benefactors are always be
loved. If (2%v,.w. subj. aor.) we first kill (aor.) the enemy, no one of us will die.
After death the body indeed will he dead, but the soul immortal and never
growing old, will soar swiftly upward (aor.). The prisoners dug through (part.
or.) the prison and speedily escaped.
§ 176.] SYNTAX. "TER PARTICIPLE. 281
»
8176. B. The Participle used to express Adverbial Relations and
Subordinate Explanatory Circumstances.
1. In the second place, the Part. denotes the adverbial relations
(a) of time: when, after, while ;—(b) cause: since, because, as, inas-
much as ;—(c) conditionality and concession: if, although ;—(d)
manner and way ;—(e) purpose, object : to, in order to, for the pur-
pose of ;—(f) and, in general, both every explanatory circumstance
which we translate by who, which, and a more remote attributive of
“& substantive.
(a) Ἦν δὲ ὁπότε καὶ αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀναβᾶσι πολλὰ πράγματα παρεῖχον ol
βάρβαροι πάλιν καταβαίνουσιν, sometimes also after they had ascended, the
barbarians again annoyed them much, while descending; ἀκούσασι ταῦτα τοῖς
στρατηγοῖς τὸ ἐνθύμημα χαρίεν ἐδόκει εἶναι, when the generals heard this, they
thought the device ingenious ;—(b) ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς βεβηκότες πολὺ ἰσχυ-
ρότερον παίσομεν, δεῖ we, inasmuch as we stand upon the ground, will be able to strike
a more severe blow; Ἱερώνυμος, πρεσβύτατος ὧν τῶν λοχαγῶν, ἤρχετο λέγειν,
Because he was the oldest of the captains; τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἔχοιεν ἐκ τῆς χώρας, πολ-
λῆς καὶ ἀγαϑῆς oboncs, they might obtain supphes from the place, because it was ex-
tensive and fertile ;—(c) φοβούμενοι τὴν ὁδὸν ὅμως ol πολλοὶ συνηκολούϑη-
σαν, although they feared the journey, yet many followed; τοὺς φίλους ebepye-
τοῦντες ἐχϑροὺς δυνήσεσϑε κολάζειν, if you confer benefits on friends, you will
be able to punish your enemies ;—(d) γελῶν εἶπεν, he spoke laughing; τί οὐκ
ἐποίησε πρέσβεις πέμπων, Kal παρέχων ra ἐπιτήδεια ἔςτε σπονδῶν Erv-
xev, what did he not do, by sending envoys and by furnishing supplies, until he obtain-
ed a truce t—(e) τοῦτο ἔρχομαι φράσων, I come to (in order to) say this; otpa-
Tidy πολλὴν ἄγων ὡς βοη ϑήσων βασιλεῖ, leading a large army to assist the king ;
—(f) λέξω τοὺς πρὸς ἐμὲ λέγοντας we, etc., I will mention those who say to me,
that.
2. Here two different constructions of the Part. must be distin-
guished. The Part., like the attributive Part., either agrees with
its subject (i. 6. the word to which it belongs) in gender, number
and Case; e.g.0 Κῦρος γελῶν εἶπεν; τοῖς Πέρσαις εἰς τὴν γῆν
εἰςβαλοῦσιν οἱ Ἕλληνες ἡναντιώϑησαν, etc.; or the Part. and
its subject are put in the Gen., called the Genttive Absolute ; e. g.
τοῦ παιδὸς yel@szos, ὁ Κῦρος εἶπεν, the child laughing, ΟἹ
said. ”
Rem. 1. In English, the explanatory Part. is more seldom used, than in
Greek, the place of it being supplied either by subordinate clauses introduced by
the conjunctions when, since, after, because, inasmuch as, if, although, etc.; or by a
substantive with a preposition; e.g. ἀποϑανόντος τοῦ Κύρου, after the death
of C, φεύγων, in flight; or by an adverb, e.g. ταῦτα ποιή σὰ ¢, thereupon, then.
Very often also, we use the finite verb, where the Greek uses a Part.; 6. g. οἱ
22°
2358. SYETAX.-— TEE FARTICIPLE. [8 176.
«πολέμιοι φυγόντες ἐδιώχϑησαν. FLED and were pursued. But, where several
actions are combined into one whole, the Greek very carefully distinguishes the
principal action from the accompanying subordinate circumstances, by express-
ing the former by means of the finite verb, but the latter by the Part.
Πολλοὶ τὰ χρήματα ἀναλώσαντες, ὧν πρόσϑεν ἀπείχοντο κερδῶν, αἰσχρὰ
“ομίζοντες εἶναι, τούτων οὐκ ἀπέχονται, many after having squandered ther
avealth, have recourse to those means of gain, which before they did not resort to, because
ithey thought them dishonorable. Tov ἔαρος ἐλϑόντος, τὰ ἄνϑη ϑάλλει, when
the spring comes, the flowers blossom. Δηϊζόμενοι ζῶσιν, raptu vivunt, live by
Prindering, Πολλῇ τέχνῃ χρώμενος τοὺς πολεμίους ἐνίκησεν, he conquered the
enemy by using much stratugem. Bic Δελφοὺς πορεύεται χρησόμενος TH XPT
ornpip, oraculum consultwrus. ᾿Αδύνατον πολλὰ τεχνώμενον ἄνϑρωκον nür-
ra καλῶς ποιεῖν, it is impossible for a man who devises many things, to do all wel.
‘The particles μετα ξύ (during, while), ὦ μα (at the same time), wai, καίπερ
(although), are sometimes joined with the Part. to express its force more fully.
8. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Acc. also is used, but for the
most part, only when the Part. has no definite subject, consequently,
where the verb from which the Part. comes is impersonal, 6. 8.
ἐξόν (from ἔξεστι, it is lawful, possible), or with impersonal phrases,
6, 4. αἰσχρὸν ow (from αἰσχρόν ἐστιν, it is shameful). The eub-
ject. is. sometimes expressed by a neuter pronoun.
Παρὸν αὑτῷ βασιλέα γενέσϑαι, ἄλλῳ περιέϑηκε τὸ κράτος, SINCE Ü is por
sible for him to be a king, etc. ᾿Αδελφοκτόνος, οὐδὲν ὃ ἔο ν (quum fas non essel, fie
non deberet), γέγονα, I slew my brother, although it ought not to have been done. 80,
δόξαν ταῦτα, when these things had been agreed upon; δόξαν αὐτοῖς (quum us
visum sit, esset) when, because they thought best; ὃ ο κοῦ ν (quum videatur, videreur)
ἀναχωρεῖν; προςῆκον, quum deceat, deceret, since, when it is fit, proper ; ἐ ξύν,
‚quum liceat, liceret, since, when it is in one’s power, when he can. Also passive par-
ticiples: δεδογμένον, quum decretum sit, esset; εἰρημένον, quum dictum st,
.esset. In the third place, adjectives with ὅν ; e.g. αἰσχρὸν ὄν, quum turpe sl,
eagel, since it is shameful ; ἅ δη λον dv, since (as, when) it is uncertain; δυνατὸν
by, ἀδύνατον dv.
Rem, 2. The particle of comparison, ὡς, is joined with the simple Part., sad
‚also where it stands in the Gen. or Acc. absolute, when the idea expressed by the
Part. is to be indicated as something merely supposed, as the subjective view of te
-agent ; hence where the view expressed is that of the agent, and not that of the
writer or speaker. In English the force of the Part. with ὡς can be translated
by as tf, as thaugh, since forsooth, because, thinking, intending, etc. The particle ör&
.on the contrary, is used when a cause or reason is to be represented as an obje*
tive one, i. 6. really existing, in opposition to what is merely supposed.
8. Simple Participle. Οἱ ἄρχοντες, κἂν ὁποσονοῦν χρόνον ἄρχοντες διαγένων-
ται, ϑαυμάζονται, ὦ σοφοί τε καὶ εὐτυχεῖς γεγενημένοι, are admired, beng
thought to have been wise and fortunate = νομιζόμενοι σοφοί τε καὶ εὐτυχεῖς
γεγενῆσϑαι. "Ayavarroücıy, ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν dmeortepn μένοι (ie. ἡγοῦ-
'μενοι pey. τ. ἀπεστερῆσϑαι), they are displeased, thinking that they have been de
8177.] SERTAX.-—THE ADVERR, 209
pomved of some great things. Ol πολέμιοι ἃ τε ἐξαίφνης ἐπιπεσόντες ἀνδρί.
woda πολλὰ ἔλαβον, took many slaves, because they fell upon them suddenly.
b. Genitive Absolute, Παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς παρασκευάζεσθαι, ὡς μάχης &00-
μένης (i.e. νομίζων μάχην ἔσεσϑαι), he ordered them to get in readiness, as (in
his opinion), thinking that, there would be a battle. ᾿Ἑκήρυττον ἐξιέναι πάντας On-
Baious, ὡς τῶν τυράννων τεϑνεώτων, they announced that all the Thebans
should come out, because (a9 .they. thought) the tyrants were dead. "Are πυκνοῦ 6%
τος TOV. ἄλσους, οὐχ ἑώρων ol ἐντὸς τοὺς ἐκτός, because the grove was thick, those.
within did not see those without (a fact).
Rem. 3. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with ὦ ς, occurs.
with the verbs εἰδέναι, Enioraodaı, νοεῖν, ἔχειν γνώμην, dra-
κεῖσϑαι τὴν γνώμην, φροντίζεῖν, also sometimes with λ ἐγ εἰν, and
the like verbs, where, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Acc. of the substantive
with a Part. or the Acc. with an Inf., should stand as the object. The result of
tke. action. of the Gen. is.commonly denoted by οὕτω joined to the predicate; e.g.
ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν löyrog, ὅπη ἂν nal ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε, be
assured that I will go wherever you decide to go; here ὡς ἐμοῦ ἰόντος stands instead.
of ἐμὲ ἱέναι.
XCVIIE. Zxereises on § 176.
The enemy burned {aor.) the city and immediately sailed to (ἐπί) the islands.
M the body (plur.) is-rendered effernimate, the mind (plur.) also becomes far
weaker. If agriculture prospers, the other arts also flourish. Should we say of
all unintelligent men that they were insane, we should ($ 153, 2, c.) speak (=.
say) correctly. Be assured (= believe) that you would ($ 153, 2, c.) be able to.
live more securely, if there were peace, than if you. were waging war. If thou
dost not labor (aor.), thou canst not be happy. All things (sing.) may ($ 153,
2, c.) happen (aor.), if God (so) disposes. Tyyrtaeus, the poet, was given by the
Athenians to the Spartans at their request (as) a leader. Alexander killed Cli-
tus while supping, because he had ventured (aor.) to praise the deeds of Philip.
The soldiers break up their encampment in order to march against the enemy.
‘These seem to be the actions of a man fond of war, who (ὅςτις) while it is in
his power to have peace without injury or (= and) disgrace, prefers to carry on
war. While it was in his power to become (aor.) king himself, he gave the _
sovereignty to another. Although it was possible to have taken (aor.) the city,
the enemy retreated. When the generals had resolved (δοκεῖ, το. dat., aor.) ‘to
fight, the enemy hastily fled. The Athenians sent out colonies to Ionia, be-
cause Attica was not sufficiently spacious (= sufficient). Socrates enjoined on
men to endeavor to begin every action with the (approbation of the) gods, since
the gods controlled all actions, Endeavor so to live as if thou wert to live a
short as well as a long (= much) time.
8177. The Adverd.
1. The objective relation, finally, is expressed by adverbs. Ad-
verbs denote the relation of place, time, manner and way of a predi-
260 SYNTAX.—THE ADVERB. [§ 177.
cate or attribnte; 6. g. ἐγγύϑεν ἦλθεν, χϑὲς ἀπέβη, καλὼς
ἀπέϑανεν.
2. Besides adverbs of place, time, manner and way, there are
still other adverbs, which do not, ‚like those above-named, define the
predicate more precisely, but they point out the relation of the pre-
dicate to the subject. These are called modal adverbs. They de-
note certainty or uncertatnty, affirmation or negation. Only those
expressing negation will be treated here, viz. οὐ and un. On ay
see § 153, 2.
8. Ov (as well as its compounds, 6. g. οὐδέ, οὔτε, ovdels,
etc.), is used when something is denied absolutely, by ütself; μή
(and its compounds), on the contrary, when something is denied in
reference to the conception or will of the speaker or some one else.
Both are commonly placed before the word which is to be made
negative.
4. Hence ov is used in all sentences containing a direct assertion,
whether these are expressed by the Ind. or Opt.e. g: ov γίγνεται,
οὐκ ἐγένετο, οὐ γενήσεται τοῦτο ---οὐ κ ἂν γίγνοιτο ταῦτα ; also
in subordinate clauses with ὅτι, @g, that, 6. g. οἶδα, ὅτε ταῦτα
ovx éyévero; in clauses denoting time, with ὅτε, ἐπειδή, ete., and
ground or reason, with oct, διότι, etc., and consequence, with acre
and the Ind., 6. g. ὅτε οὐκ ἦλϑεν ---- ἐπεὶ ταῦτα οὐκ ἐγένετο;
finally, when the idea of α single word in the sentence is to be ne-
gatived absolutely, 6. g.ovx ἀγαϑός, οὐ xaxog; in this last case,
ov remains even when the relation of the sentence would otherwise
require μή, 6. g. εἰ ov δώσει (recusabit).
5. Μή, on the contrary, is used with the Jmp. and with the Imp.
. Subj., e.g. μὴ γράφε, μὴ γράψῃς (comp. 8. 153, Rem. 3); with
wishes and exhortations, e. δ: μὴ γράφοις, may you not write ; μὴ
γράφωμεν, let us not write ; in all clauses denoting purpose, with iva,
ete.; in conditional clauses, with ei, ἐάν, ὅταν, ἐπάν, ἕως ἄν, etc,
e. g. λέγω, ἵνα μὴ yougys — εἰ μὴ γράφεις ; in clauses denoting
effect or consequence, with ὥςτε and the Inf., 6. g. of πολῖται ar-
dosing ἐμαχέσαντο, ὥςτε μὴ τοὺς πολεμίους εἰς τὴν πόλιν εἰςβαλεῖν,
so that the enemy did not fall upon the city; in all relative clauses,
which imply a condition or purpose, 6. 5. ὃς μὴ ἀγαϑὸς ἐστι, τοῦ-
τον οὐ φιλοῦμεν (i. 6. ei τις μὴ ay. ἐ.), whoever is not good, sf any
one is not, etc.; in interrogative clauses, which express anziety on
the part of the i inquirer, and hence demand a negative answer, 6. g-
μὴ νοσεῖς ; ἄρα μὴ νοσεῖς ; you are not sick, are you? (in other in-
§ 177.) SYNTAE.-—- TEE ADVERR, 361:
terrogative elauses ov is used, and an affirmative answer expected) ;
usually with the /nf. also; and finally with participles and adjec-
tives, which may be resolved by a conditional clause; 6. g.6 μὴ
πιστεύων, εἰ quis non credit, If any one does not believe (but ὁ οὐ
πιστεύων == 35, qui non eredit, or guia non credit, he who does not
belteve (absolute), or because he, ete.
6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or ad-
verbs, 6. g. any one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc.,
these are all expressed negatively. The negatives must all be of
the same kind, i. 6. all compounded of οὐκ or μή; 6. g. μιχρὰ φύσις
οὐδὲν μέγα οὐδέποτε οὐδέμα οὔτε ἰδιώτην οὔτε πόλιν
δρᾷ, a mean nature never does ANYTHING either for ANY private in-
dividual or for the Stats ; nusig οὐ δ᾽ ἐπινοοῦμεν οὐδὲν τοεοϑτοι,
we do not intend ANY such thing; ἄνεν γὰρ ἀρχόντων οὐδὲν ἂν
οὔτε καλόν, οὔτε ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο οὐ δαμοῦ, for without leaders,
nothing great or advantageous could ANY WHERE be accomplished.
7. After expressions of fear, timidity, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt,
distrust—denying—hindering—forbidding, prohibiting, the Inf, usu-
ally follows with μή, instead of the Inf. without μή. This μή is.
not expressed in English; 6. g. κωλύω oe un ταῦτα ποιεῖν, ἢ
prevent you from doing this. Annydgevoy Σκύϑαις μὴ ἐπιβαίνειν
τῶν» σφετέρων οὔρων, they forbade the Scythians to pass their boun-
daries.
Remark. When expressions. of fear; anxiety, doubt and the like, are.followed
by μή with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt), ##. must be considered as an interrogative,
numne, whether not, and may often be translated. by that; 6. g. δέδοικα, μὴ. mon
Savy, metuo, ne mariatur, I fear whether he will not die =. that he will die; &öedoi-
πεῖν, μὴ ἀποϑάνοι, metucbam, ne moreretur ; δέδοικα, μὴ τέϑνηκεν, ne mortuus sit,
I fear whether he has not died, is.nct dead = I fear that he has died, is dead. On
the contrary, μὴ οὐ with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after the above ex-
pressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will nat take place, or
has not taken place; 6. g. δέδοικα μὴ οὐ κ ἀποϑάνῃ, ne non moriatur, I fear that
he will not die; ἐδεδοίκειν μὴ οὖ κ ἀποϑάνοι, ne non moreretur, I feared that he
would not die; δέδοικα, μὴ οὐ τέϑνηκεν, ne non mortaus sit, that he is not dead.
8. Mn ov with the Inf. is used instead of the Inf. without nega-
tion, with expressions of hindering, denying, ceasing, abstaining,
distrusting and the like, when the negative ou, and in general, any.
negative expression precedes μῇ ov.
Οὐδὲν κωλύει oe μὴ οὐ κ ἀποθανεῖν, nothing prevents you from dying; obdele
ἀρνεῖται, τὴν ἀρετὴν μὴ ob καλὴν εἶναι, no one denies that virtue is lovely ; οὐκ
ἀπεσχόμην μὴ ob ταῦτα λέγειν, I did not refrain from saying this—Also after
the expressions δεινὸν εἶναι, αἰσχρόν, αἰσχύνην εἶναι, aloyüve-
200 SENZAX-- TER ADVERSE. ($177.
oda, which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with μὴ 06, when it is to
be made negative; 6. ζ. ὥςτε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι, μὴ οὐ χὶ συσπουδά-
ζειν, so that all were ashamed KOT to be busy.
9. Ov μή with the Subj. or Fut. Ind., is elliptical, since with
ovx a verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also ex-
pressed, must be supplied, and μή must be referred to this verb
Hence οὐ yy is used, when the idea to be expressed is, tt ts not
(ov) to be feared that (μ ἡ) something will happen; 6. g. οὐ μὴ γὲ
ψηται τοῦτο, non vereor, ne hoc fiat, this CERTAINLY will not happen.
XCIX. Zeereises on $ 177.
The truly wise will never be the slaves of base desires. What might ($ 159,
9, 6.) not happen in a long period? What evidence did they employ (to prove]
that Socrates did not believe (in) the gods, (in) which the state believed As
(ἐπεί) the Persians did not hold out, the Greeks took the city. If (da,
w. subj.) thou hast not heard (aor.) from thyself, that what is right (= the right)
is useful, then trust (aor.) not another, who so says. Let us not flee before the
enemy. He who (ὅςτις) does not believe a man on his oath (= trusts [reide
σϑαι] nothing to one swearing), can (ἐπίστασϑαι) easily swear falsely himself. It
is a great misfortune not to be able to endure misfortune. No one is free, who
(part.) does not control himself. Give (aor.) to friends, even if (part.) they do
not ask. The Sophists were not willing (ἐθέλειν) to converse with those who
(§ 148, 6) had no money to give. What is not manifest to men, they endeavor
to ascertain from the gods by the art of divination. What one neither
earned (== wrought out) nor saw, nor heard, nor executed for himself, friend
often furnished (aor.) friend. I might (§ 153, 2, c.) affirm that no one gains
(elvat, w. dat.) any cultivation from one who (§ 148, 6) does not please
You affirm that you need no man for (eis) any purpose (= thing). If
(part.) thou doest (aor.) anything shameful, never hope to remain concealed
(fut.). No envy at anything ever arises in (== to) a good (man). What is
beautiful never anywhere appears to any one as deformed. The Thirty Ty-
rants forbade Socrates to converse with the young men. Prexaspes denied thet
he killed (aor.) Smerdis. Clearchus then scarcely escaped being stoned (=
be stoned, aor.). All laws probibit inscribing (the name of) any liar in the pub
lic decrees. I fear that the city is already taken by the enemy. I am doubtful
(= fearful) whether it is not best for me to be silent. Neither snow-storms
(sing.), nor rain, nor heat, nor darkness (= night) hinder the Persian oourier
from most rapidly accomplishing (aor.) the journey (= course) before (= Iying
before) them. No fear shall prevent me from saying what I think. Be of good
courage; surely nothing unjust will be done (= happen, aor.), if there is justice
at heart (= if justice is present). The bad you will certainly never make bet-
ter. If (ἐάν) we conquer (aor.), the Peloponnesians will certainly never enter
(aor.) the country. Socrates said: As long as (ἕωςπερ ἄν, w. subj.) I breathe
and am able, I surely shall not cease (aor.) to philosophize.
8 178.] SENTAX.—COGRDINATION. 388
SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES, OR THE CONNEC-
TION OF SENTENCES.
CHAPTER I. /
$ 178. A. COORDINATION.
1. When two or more sentences stand in an intimate connection
with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distinguished.
They are either related to each other in such a manner as to form
one thought, each, however, being in a measure independent of
the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise, Plato also was very wise ;
or they are wholly united, inasmuch as the one defines and explains
the other, or appears as the dependent member of the other, e. g.
When the spring comes, the flowers blossom. The first kind of con-
nection is called Codrdination, the last, Subordination, and the sen-
tences, Coérdinate and Subordinate.
I came, I saw, I conquered.—Coordinate.
When I came, I conquered.—Subordinate.
2. Coördination consists either in expanding or restricting the
thought. The former is called copwative coordination, the latter,
adversative. Copulative coordination is either a simple succession of
words, or it is an enhancing or strengthening of the thought.
8. A simple succession of words is made,—(a) by «ai, et, and,
more seldom in prose by z ¢ (enclitic), que, and, e. g. Σωκράτης καὶ
Πλάτων ;—(b) by xai—xai, et—et, both — and, more seldom,
τ έ--- τέ, 6. 5. καὶ ἀγαϑοὶ καὶ κακοί, both good and bad ;—(c) by
ri—xai, both — and, as well so —as so, not only — but also, e. g,
καλός τε καὶ ἀγαθός, χρηστοί τὸ καὶ πονηροί.
Rem. 1. Καί also signifies even, etiam, with which the negative odö£, not
even, ne— quidem, corresponds ; 6. g. καὶ σὺ ταῦτα ἔλεξας (etiam tu), even you said
tis; οὐδὲ σὺ ταῦτα ἔλεξας (ne tu quidem), not even you, etc.
4, The enhancing or strengthening of the idea is expressed by
the simple καί, but still more definitely by,—(a) ov pov097—aA-
λὰ καί (ἀλλ o884);—~(b) οὐχ ὅτι (ὅπως) or μὴ ὅτι
(ὅπω 9) [᾿. 6. οὐκ ἐρῶ, ὅτι, μὴ λέγε, ὅτ ἢ -- ἀλλὰ καί (ἀλλ
ὅδε ΘΥΚΊΑΣ.-- ΟΣ ΒΩΟΙΕΔΈΎΡΟΙ, ($178.
οὐ ὃ ἔ), not only — but also (but not even), when either the more im-
portant member precedes the less important, or when two strongly
antithetic clauses are opposed to each other.
Σωκράτης ob μόνον σοφὸς ἣν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀγαϑός, not only wise, but alm
good. Καὶ μὴν ὑπεραποϑνήσκειν γε μόνοι ἐϑέλουσιν οἱ ἐρῶντες, οὐ μόνον
ὅτι ἄνδρες, ἀλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκες (non modo ---- sed etiam), indeed, only lovers are
ready to die for each other, not only men, but also women. Οὐχ ὅπως τοὺς Toke
μίους ἐτρέψαντο οἱ "EAAnves, ἀλλὰ Kat τὴν χώραν αὐτῶν ἐκάκωσαν, I ὦ mi
say that the Greeks == the Greeks not only put the enemy to flight, but even destroyed
their country. Αἰσχίνης οὐχ ὅπως χάριν τοῖς ᾿Αϑηναίοις εἶχεν, GAAG μισϑύ-
σας ἑαυτὸν κατὰ τουτωνὶ ἐπολιτεύετο (non modo non — sed diam). Μὴ ὅπως
ὀρχεῖσϑαι ἐν ῥυθμῷ, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ δ' ἀρϑοῦσϑαι ἐδύναντο (non modo non), they were
not only not able to dance to the tune, but not even to stand erect.
5. Adversatwe coördindtion consists in restricting or in entire abro-
gation ; 6. g. he ὃς indeed poor, but ‘brave—he 18. not brave, but cow-
ardly; (here the clause but brave restricts the one preveding, axl
but cowardly wholly denies the idea-of brave). Restriction is mos
generally expressed by ὅ 2, autem. With this ὃ ¢ there usually cor
responds the connective μέν, standing in the preceding contrasted
sentence. [έν primarily signifies, #n truth, truly, indeed, yet cotr
monly its force is so slight that it-cannot be translated at all ine
English. M έν ---ὖ é is particularly used in divisions, e. g. οἱ ur-
οἱ δέ, some — others, τὸ μόν --- τὸ δέ, on this side—on that, party
— partly ; also where the same word is repeated in two different
sentences, 6. g. ἐγὼ σύνειμε μὲν ϑεοῖς, σύνειμι δ᾽ asOgahmoıs τοὶ
ἀγαϑοῖς.
6. The following words also are to be noticed, viz. α v, commonly
in connection with d¢ (3° av) rureus, on the contrary; κα iron από
yet, yet, verum, sed tamen; μέντοι, yet, however ; 6 u wc, although
nevertheless ; finally ἀλλά, but, which according to the nature αἱ
the preceding member, denotes either the oppostte of that which
is expressed in the first member, so that the first member is abte
gated by the last, and one cannot exist at the same time with th
other, e. g. οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι evdaipoves siow, AX οἱ ἀγαϑοί, not th
rich are happy, but the good ; or it merely denotes something differ
ont from what is contained in the first member, so that the first mem
ber is only abrogated i in part, i. 6. it is only restricted (st¥2l, yet, but),
e. g. τοῦτο τὸ πρᾶγμα ὠφέλεμον μέν ἐστιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ παλόν.
7. The succession of negative sentences is made by οὔ ce --- οὔτι
(μήτε -- μή τ λν Nec —nec, neither — nor, ἃ. g. οὔτε Peni, οὔτε
ἄνθρωποι, neither gods nor mern. Οὐ ἐ expresses either contra
8179.] SINTAX.— SUBORDINATION. 265
(ded not), or it serves to annex a new additional clause (and not,
also not).
Rem. 2. When a negative sentence follows a positive one, it is regularly
formed in prose by καὶ ov or καὶ μῆ; 6. g. Φαίνομαι χώριτος τετυχηκώς,
καὶ οὐ μέμψεως, οὐ δὲ τιμωρίας, I seem to have met with favor, and not blame
nor punishment.
8. Disjunctive coordination consists in combining into one whole,
sentences, the one of which excludes the other, so that the one can
be considered as existing, only when the other does not. This re-
lation (disjunction) is expressed by the disjunctive conjunctions, viz.
7 — 7, aut — aut or vel — vel, either —or ; ett e—eize (with Ind.),
ἐάντε---ἐάντεϑ OF ἤντε. --ἤντε (with Subj.), sive — sive, whether
— or, either—or; 6. 5. ἢ ὁ πατὴρ ἢ ἢ ὁ υἱὸς ἀπέϑανεν, either the
father or son died (the first a can also be omitted, 6. g. ὁ πατὴρ
ἢ ὁ υἱὸς ἀπ); εἴτε καινὰ size παλαιὰ ταῦτά ἐστιν, whether these
are new or old; ἐάν τε πατὴρ γράψῃ, ἐάν Te μήτηρ, whether
father or mother will write.
9. Finally, those sentences also can be coördinate with each
other, the last of which denotes either the cause of the preceding
sentence, or the conclusion, inference from it. The clause denoting
the cause is expressed by γάρ, for, enim, nam, and that denoting
the conclusion, by ov», consequently, therefore, ἄρ a, then, there-
fore, τοίνυν, then, so then, t0ty «0, ergo, therefore, τοίγαρτοι,
for that very reason and no other, therefore, τοιγαροῦ » for that
reason then, wherefore ; 8. Θαυμάζομεν τὸν Σωκράτη" ἀνὴρ γὰρ
ἦν καλὸς καὶ ἀγαϑός. Σ. ἀνὴρ ἣν καλὸς καὶ ἀγαϑός " ϑαυμάζομεν
ἄρα αὐτόν.
CHAPTER II.
B. SUBORDINATION.
8179. Principaland Subordinate Clause.
1. When sentences, which together present one united thought,
are so related, as to their import, that the one appears as a depen-
dent and merely completing member of the other, then their con-
mection may be expressed either by eoördinate conjunctions, as xi,
δέ, γάρ, ἄρα, etc.,e. g. τὸ ἔαρ ἤλϑε, τὰ δὲ ῥόδα ἀνθεῖ, the spring has
come, and the roses blossom ; or in such a manner that the sentence,
28
266 SYNTAX.—SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [$ 180.
which, as to its import merely completes the other, is manifestly in
its outward form, a dependent, or a simply completing member of
the other; e.g. ὅτε τὸ ἔαρ ἤλ 6, τὰ ῥόδα ἀνθεῖ, when the spring
has come, the roses blossom. This mode of connection is called Sub-
ordination.
2. The clause to which the other as a complementary member
belongs, is called the principal clause; but the completing one, the
subordinate clause, and the two together, a compound sentence; 6. g.
in the compound sentence, ὅτε τὸ ἔαρ ἦλϑε, τὰ δένδρα ϑάλλει, the
clause za δένδρα ϑάλλει, is the principal clause, and ὅτε τὸ ἔαρ ἢ):
Os, the subordinate clause.
8. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of the subject, the atin-
bute, or the object of a whole sentence, and hence must be regarded
as substantives, adjectives or adverbs expanded into a sentence.
Accordingly there are three classes of subordinate clauses: sudstan-
tive, adjective and adverbial clauses.
Thus, 6. g.in the sentence, “ The victory of Cyrus over the enemy was ar-
nounced,” the subject may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, viz. “ That
Oyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ;” further, in the sentence, “Sing
to me, O Muse, the far-wandering man,” the attributive fer-wandering, may bt
expanded into a subordinate sentence, whe has wandered far. Comp., “He at
nounced the victory of Cyrus aver the enemy,” with “He announced that Cys
had conquered the enemy ;” “In the spring the roses bloom,” with en
has come, the roses bloom.”
8180. I. Substanttve-Sentences.
1. Substantive-sentences are substantives or infinitives expanded
into a sentence, and, like substantives, constitute the subject, as
well as the attribute and object of a sentence.
A. Substantive-Sentences introduced by ὅτι or ὡς, that.
2. Substantive-sentences introdueed by the conjunctions ὅτι
and os, that, express the object (Acc.) of verba sentierdi and de
elarandi (p. 250), i. 6. of such verbs as express either a sensation or
perception ; 6. g. ὁρᾷν, ἀκούειν, νοεῖν, μανθάνειν, γιγνώσκευν, ett. οἵ
such as denote an expression of a sensation and perception; 6. g.
λήγειν, Saixveve, ἀγγέλλειν, δῆλον εἶναι, etc.
8. The predicate of this substantive-sentence may be expressed,
(a) in the Ind., (Ὁ) in the way (c) in the Der (d) in the
Tod. of historical tenses with dw
| § 180. ] S¥NRAK.—-SUBSTANTIVEGENTENCES. 267
4. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when what is affirmed is to
be represented as a fact or phenomenon, something certatn or actual.
In perticular the Ind. is used regularly, when the verb of the prin-
cipal sentence is a principal tense, viz. the Pres., Perf. or Fut.
5. Τῆς Opt., on the contrary, is used, when what is affirmed, is
to be represented as a mere coneepiian or supposition, hence, par-
ticularly, when what is stated as. the sentiment of another, is to be
indicated as such.
Ἔλεγον, ὅτι ἄρκτοι πολλοὺς ἤδη πλησιάσαντας διέφϑειραν, they said that
bears had already destroyed many. “Ore δὴ ταῦτα ἐνεθυμούμεϑα, οὕτως ἐγιγνώ.
σκομεν περὶ αὐτῶν, ὡς ἀνϑρώπῳ πεφυκότι πάντων τῶν ἄλλων ῥᾷον ely ζώων
ἢ ἀνϑρώπων ἄρχειν, when we were reflecting upon these things, we concluded that it
was easier for man, as he is, to rule all other animals than men.
6. The Opt. with &» is used, when the affirmation is to be indi-
cated as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, or a8 an
undetermined possihility (§ 153, 2, ¢.).°
Aéyw, ὅτι, el ταῦτα λέγοις, duapravoıs ἄν, I say that if you say these
things, you would err. Μέμνημαι ἀκούσας ποτέ σου, ὅτι εἰκότως ἂν καὶ παρὰ
ϑεῶν πρακτικώτερος εἴη, ὥςπερ καὶ παρὰ ἀνϑρώπων, ὅςτις un (= el τις μῆ),
ὁπότε ἐν ἀπόροις εἴη, τότε κολακεύοι, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε τὰ ἄριστα πράττοι, τότε μάλιστα
τῶν ϑεῶν μεμνῷτο, I remember once to have heard you remark, that he would reason-
ably be most likely to obtain what he wished from gods, as well as from men, who
should, etc.
7. The Ind. of the historical tenses with ἄν is used, when the
affirmation is to be represented as conditional, as one whose exist-
ence or possibility is denied [§ 153, 2, a. (@)]; 6. g. δῆλόν ἐστιν,
Ott, ei ταῦτα ἔλεγες, ἡμάρτανες ὧν, tt is evident that if you said this.
you erred, but you did not say it, hence you did not err.
RemaRx. Impersonal forms of expression are often changed into those which
are personal; e.g. δῆλός εἶμι (φανερός εἰμι), ὅτι ταῦτα ed ἔπραξα, it
is εὐἰάεη! that ------ δῆλοΐ εἰσιν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἔλεξαν, it is evident that they
said this. Comp. § 175, Rem. 5.
C. Esxercises on § 180.
We know, that the kings of the Lacedasmonians are descendants from Her-
cules. The Athenians fortified the city in a short (= little) time, and it is even
now evident, that the construction was done (== took plaee, aor.) in (κατά) haste.
I have often wondered (aor.) by what (ὅςτις) arguments the accusers of Socrates
convinced (aor.) the Athenians, that he was deserving (ἀξιον εἶναι) of death from
(dat.) the State. Tissaphernes traduced Cyrus to (πρός, w. acc.) his brother.
(saying) that he was plotting against him. Brasidss not only (τέ) showed him-
self prudent (= moderate) in other (respects), but (καί) in his speeches also he
268 SYNTAX.— FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [ὃ 181.
manifested that he was sent forth to liberate (part. fat.) Greece.
Many of those who ($ 148, 6) pretend to philosophize, might (§ 153, 2, c.) per
hape say (aor.) that the jast (man) could never become (aor.) unjust, nor the
sober-minded arrogant. It is evident that we may be delivered (aor.) far more
speedily, if (part.) we say (aor.) nothing, than if we defend ourselves poorly. I
pray you to observe beforehand that, if (part.) Aeschines had not brought for-
ward (κατηγορεῖν, aor.) something foreign to (= besides) the indictment, neither
would I (= I also would not) say (toteio@a:) a single (== any) word.
$181. B. Final Substantive-Sentences introduced by
ὡς, iva, etc.
1. The second kind of substantive-sentences, are the final sen-
tences, i. e. those which denote a purpose, intention, end. These
sentences are introduced by the following conjunctions, ὦ ¢, 6205,
ἔγα, ὡς HY, OMS BH, iva un.
2. The mode used in final sentences is commonly the Subj. or
Opt. When the verb of the principal sentence is a principal tense
—Pres., Perf. or Fut., or an Aor. with the signification of the
Pres. (§ 152, 12.)—the final conjunctions are followed by the Subj.
mode; but when the verb of the principal sentence is an historical
tense—Impf., Plup. or Aor.—the final conjunctions are followed by
the Opt. (but never by the Opt. Fut.).
Ταῦτα γράφω, γέγραφα, γράψω, lv EAD y¢, ut ventas, that you may come; λέ:
£ov, iv’ εἰ δῶ, dic, ut sciam, say, that I may know ;—taira ἔγραφον, ἐγεγράφειν,
ἔγραψα, lv’ ἔλϑοις, ut venires, that you might come. "Ex τῆς τῶν Περσῶν EAev-
ϑέρας ἀγορᾶς καλουμένης τὰ μὲν Ovia καὶ ol üyopaioı ἀπελήλανται εἰς bh
λον τόπον, ὡς μὴ μιγνύηται h τούτων τύρβη τῇ τῶν πεπαιδευμένων εὐκο-
σμία, traffickers and their goods have been removed from the public forum of the Pe-
sians, that the disorder of these may not mingle with the correct deportment of the edw
cated. ἵνα σαφέστερον dn λωϑ ἢ πᾶσα ἡ Περσῶν πολιτεία, μικρὸν ἐπάνεν
με (paucis repetam), in order that the entire polity of the Persians may be more clearly
understood, I will recapitulate briefly. Καμβύσης τὸν Κῦρον ἀπεκάλει, ὅπως
τὰ ἐν Πέρσαις ἐπιχώρια ἐπιτελοίη.
Remark. Hence what in Latin is the sequence or dependence of tenses, in Greek
is the saquence of modes. For example; if in Latin the principal verb is in the
Pres. the verb of the subordinate clause is generally in the Pres. also; and if
the principal verb is a past tense, so is the verb of the subordinate clause
Bat in Greek, if the principal verb is a Pres., Perf. or Fut., the Sabj. is used m
the subordinate clause; and if the principal verb is a past tense, the Opt. is
generally used in the subordinate clause ; 6. g. ταῦτα γράφω, yéypada, ete,
ἵν EA Sy¢, haec scribe, scripsi, ut venias;—raira ἔγραφον, tyey pager
IV ἔλϑοις, scribebam, seripseram, ut venires—On the Subj. after an historical
tense, 806 4 188, 5.
$181.] SYNTAX—FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTANCES. 269
8. With the final eonjunctions ὡς and ὅ “ ὦ ς, also i» a, the mo-
dal adverb a» is sometimes joined, which refers to a conditional
sentence, commonly not expressed, but to be supplied; 6. g. διὰ τῆς
σῆς χώρας ἄξεις ἡμᾶς, ὅπως ἂν εἰδῶμεν, & re δεῖ φίλια καὶ
πολέμια νομίζειν, you will lead us through your territory in order that
(when we set our foot on it) we may know, both what tt ts necessary
to regard as friendly and what hostile.
4. Verbs of care, anxiety, considering, endeavoring; striving, ef-
feeting and admonishing, ı e. g. émieleiob au, φρονείζειν, φυλάττειν,
σκοπεῖν, βουλεύεσθαι, ὁρᾷν, ποιεῖν, πράετειν, curare, μηχανᾶσθαι,
παρακαλεῖν, παραγγέλλειν, προειπεῖν, αἰτεῖσθαι, ἄγε, and the like,
are followed by the conjunction ὅπως (ὅπως μη) either with
the Subj. and Opt. (aecording to No. 2.), or, what is more usual,
with the Ind. Fut., not only after a principal tense, but very often
also after an historical tense; in the latter case, the accomplishment
of the purpose is represented as really ocourring and continuing.
Οἱ Περσικοὶ νόμοι ἐπιμέλονται, ὅκως τὴν ἀρχὴν μὴ τοιοῦτοι ἔσονται
οἱ πολῖται, οἷοι πονηροῦ ἢ αἰσχροῦ ἔργου ἐφίεσϑαι, the Persian laws take care,
that the citizens shall by no means be such as to desire any wicked or shameful act ;
Exomeiode τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αϑηναῖοι, ὅπως μὴ λόγους ἐροῦσι μόνον of
map’ ἡμῶν πρέσβεις, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔργου τι δεικνύειν ἔξου σιν, consider this, that
our envoys will not speak only, but they will be able, ete.
5. The final conjunctions fy « and οὗ ς (more seldom 6 σ ¢), are
followed by the Ind. of the: historical tenses, when a purpose is to be
expressed, which has not been accomplished or which cannot be ac-
complished.
Ἐχρῆν ce Unydoov ζεῦξαι πτερόν, ὅπως ἐφαίνου τοῖς ϑεοῖς τραγικώ-
repog, tt would be necessary for you to mount your Pegasus, that you might appea?
more majestic to the gods ; ἐβουλόμην δ᾽ ἄν, Σίμωνα τὴν αὑτὴν γνώμην ἐμοὶ
ἔχειν, ἵν’ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν ἀκούσαντες τἀληθῆ ῥᾳδίως ἔγνωτε τὰ δίκαια, ἢ
would that Simon were of the same opinion as I am, that having heard both of us, you
might easily judge what is just.
CI Exercises on § 181.
Contemplate thine actions as in a mirror, that thou mayest adorn the beauti-
ful, hide the unseemly. The Lacedaemonians were not permitted (impers. το. dat.)
to travel abroad, lest the citizens should be filled with frivolity by (ἀπό) for-
eigners. Remember absent as well as (== besides, πρός, w. acc.) present friends,
lest it may seem that you would neglect the latter also in their absence (pert.).
Agesilaus took care that the soldiers should be able to endure hardships. The
president of the city must (7p7, w. acc. and inf.) see to it, that the best (men)
have the greatest honors. Noble (= honor-loving) and high-souled men (= of
men) do everything, that they may leave behind an immortal remembrance ef
28*
270 SYNTAX.— ADJECTIVE-SUNTENCES. [$ 182.
themselves. Endeavor to fight with all ardor, that you may surpasa your fore-
fathers in renown. Would that (ei γὰρ OgeAcy) the multitude (οἱ πολλοί) were
able to effect the greatest evils, that they might also be able (to effect) the great-
est good (plur.); then (= and) it would be well (= have itself well, $ 153, 2,2).
Why (ri) didst thou not seize (part. aor.) and slay me, that I might never show
(aor.) myself to men ἢ
$182. II. Adjective-Sentences.
1. Adjective-sentences are adjectives or participles expanded in-
to a sentence, and, like adjectives, define more fully a substantive
or substantive-pronoun ; 6. g. οἱ πολέμιοι, οἱ ἐκ τῆς πόλδως ἀπέφυ-
yor = οἱ πολέμιοι ἐκ τ. 1. ἀποφυγόντες; τὰ πράγματα, ἃ Alls
ανδρος ἔπραξεν = τὰ ὑπὸ ᾿λεξάνδρον πραχϑέντα πράγματα.
These sentences are introduced by the relative pronouns 0¢, 7, 6,
ὅςτις, ἥτις, ö gt, olos, etc.
2. The relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with the
substantive (standing in the principal sentence) to which it refers,
“in the same manner as the attributive adjective with its substantive;
but its Case is determined by the predicate standing in the subordi-
nate sentence ; 6. g. ὁ ἀνὴρ ὃ ν εἶδες --- ἡ ἀρδτὴ, ἧς πάντες οἱ ἀγαϑοὶ
ἐπιϑυμοῦσιν — οἱ στρατιῶται, οἷς μαχόμεϑα, etc.
Rem. 1. When a predicative substantive stands in an adjective-sentence, very
frequently the relative does not agree, in gender and number, with the substar-
tive to which it refers, but, by means of a kind of attraction, with the predica
tive substantive. The verb of the adjective-sentence is usually a verb signify-
ing to be, to name, to call; e.g. Ἢ ὁ δὸς πρὸς ἕω τρέπεται, ὃ καλεῖται IlnAor-
gov στόμα, the course turns to the east, which is called the Pelusian mouth ; here
takes the gender of the predicative στόμα, instead of that of its antecedent ὀόύς.
"Axpa,al καλοῦνταε κλεῖδες τῆς Κύπρου. Ἱερσικὸν ξίφος, ὃν dxive
xnv καλοῦσιν. Λόγοι μήν elow ἐν ἑκάστοις ἡμῶν, ἃς ἐλπίδας ὀνομάζο
Rem. 2. There is an exception in respect to number in the formula ἔστιν ol,
6. g. λέγουσι, sunt, qui dicant. This formula is treated in all respects as a sub
stantive-pronoun, inasmuch as neither the number of the relative has any influ-
ence on that of the verb ἔστιν, nor is the tense changed, when the discourse re-
lates to past or future time.
Nom. | ἔστιν of (= &veor) ἀπέφυγον.
Gen. | ἔστιν ὧν (-- ἐνίων) ἀπέσχετο.
Dat. | ἔστιν οἷς (τε ἐνίοις) οὐχ οὕτως ἔδοξεν.
Acc. ἔστιν otc (= éviove) ἀπέκτεινεν.
8. The person of the verb in the adjective-sentence, is deter-
mined by the substantive or pronoun (expressed or understood), to
which the relative refers. Ἐγώ, ὃς γράφω--- σύ, ὃς γράφεις ---
§ 182.) SENTAK-—ADIECTIVE-SENTENCERS. 271
ὁ ἀνήρ or ἐκεῖνος, ὃς γράφει. Hence after a Vocative Case, the
second person is commonly used; 6. g. ὦν 0 ow πε, ὃ ς ἡμᾶς τοιαῦτα
κακὰ ἐποίησα ς, O man, who inflicted such evils on us.
4. The relative is plural, when it refers to two or more objects;
and when the gender of the substantives is the same, the relative
agrees with these in gender; often, however, it is neuter, when the
substantives denote inanimate objects.
"Ev ἐκείνῃ τῇ φωνῇ Te καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ ἔλεγον, ἐν οἷςπερ ἐτεϑράμμην. ‘Opa
αὐτὸν κεκοσμημένον καὶ ὀφθαλμῶν ὑπογραφῇ, καὶ χρώματος ἐντρίψει, καὶ κόμαις
προςϑέτοις, ἃ δὴ νόμιμα ἣν ἐν Μήδοις.
5. When the substantives are of different gender, the relative,
when persons are spoken of, agrees with the masculine rather than
the feminine; but when things are spoken of, it is usually neuter.
Ὁ ἀνὴρ καὶ ἡ γυνῆ, of παρὰ σὲ hAdov. Ἥκομεν ἐκκλησιάζοντες περί τε
πολέμου καὶ εἰρήνης, ἃ μεγίστην ἔχει δύναμιν ἐν τῷ τῶν ἀνϑρώπων βίῳ.
6. When the relative should be in the Acc., and refers to a sub-
stantive in the Gen. or Dat., it is commonly put in the same Case
as its substantive, when the adjective-sentence has nearly the force
of an attributive adjective or participle. This construction is called
attraction of the relative. The substantive frequently stands in the
relative sentence.
᾿Αρίων διϑύραμβον πρῶτος ἀνθρώπων ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴσμεν ἐποίησεν (in-
stead of. οὖς ἔσμεν), Arion was the first among men known to us, to invent the dithy-
ramb. Ὁ στρατηγὸς ἦγε τὴν στρατιὰν ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων ὧν (instead of ἄς)
ἔπεισεν (= τῶν πεισϑεισῶν)͵ the general led the army from the cities, which he
had persuaded. Σὺν τοῖς ϑησαυροῖς οἷς (instead of οὖς) ὁ πατὴρ Kar éAL-
πεν (= τοῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς καταλειφϑεῖσιν), with the treasures which his father
left. Κῦρος προςῆλϑε σὺν ἢ εἶχε δυνάμει, Cyrus came with the force which
he had. ᾿Εγὼ σοὶ ὑπισχνοῦμαι, ἢν ὁ Sede εὖ διδῷ, dy ϑ' ὦ ν (= ἀντὶ τούτων, ἃ)
ἂν ἐμοὶ δανείσῃς, ἄλλα πλείονος ἄξια εὐεργετῆσειν.
7. The relatives οἷος, ὅσος, ögrıgov», ἡλίκος, both as
Accusatives and Nominatives, are attracted, when the verb εἶναι
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause; 6. g.
οἷος σὺ el, οἷος Exeivos or ὁ Σωκράτης Eori. This attraction is
made in the following manner. The demonstrative in. the Gen.,
Dat. or Acc. to which the relative refers, is omitted, but the relative
is put in the Case of the preceding substantive or of the (omitted)
substantive demonstrative, and the verb εἶναι of the adjective-clause
is also omitted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the
Case of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause,
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the connec-
2 SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVE-GENTENCES. (6 182.
tien of the adjective-clause with its substantive is ‚still mere com
plete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in the adjective-
clause; e. 9. in the full and natural form of the sentence χαρίζομαι
ἀνδρὶ τοιούτῳ, οἷος σὺ si, by omitting the demonstrative τοιούτῳ, to
which the relative οἷος refers, by attracting οἷος into the Case of the
preceding substantive dvögi, and by omitting ei of the relative sen-
tence, and attracting the subject ov into the Case of the relative,
we have the common form χαρίζομαι ὠνδρί οἵῳ σοί, or by transpo-
sition χαρίζομαι οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρί. In English the above relatives may
be translated by as or such as.
Gen. | ἐρῶ olov σοῦ ἀνδρός. ἐρῶ olov σοῦ.
Dat. | χαρίζομαε oly σοὶ avdpi. χαρίζομαι οἴῳ σοί.
Ace. ἐπαινῶ οἷον σὲ avdpa. ἐπαινῶ οἷον σέ.
Gen. | ἐρῶ οἴων ὑμῶν ἀνδρῶν. ἐρῶ olwv ὑμῶν.
Dat. | χαρίζομαι οἷοις ὑμῖν ἀνδράσιν. | χαρίζομαι oloıg ὑμῖν.
Acc. | ἐπαινῶ οἵους ὑμᾶς ἄνδρας. ἐπαινῶ οἵους ὑμᾶς.
Rew. 3, Attraction also takes place, when οἷος or οἷός Te is used instead
οἵ ὥςτε with the Inf, signifying 7 am of such a nature, character that (is sum qu,
with the Subj.), hence, 7 can; 6. g. Διελέχϑην Στωϊκῷ τοιούτῳ οἵῳ pate Aw
πεῖσϑαι, μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεσθαι, I conversed with such a Stoic as could neither be
grieved nor trritated. The demonstrative is commonly omitted ; 6. g. Μόνην τὴν
τῶν ἀνθρώπων γλῶτταν ἐποίησαν ol Geol olay ἀρϑροῦν τὴν φωνήν, the gods
made the human tongue only, capable of uttering articulate sounds; here the demon-
strative τοιούτην, to which olay refers, is omitted.
Rem. 4. Sometimes an attraction takes place directly the opposite of that
mentioned in the adjective-clause, since the relative does not take the Case of
its substantive, but the substantive, the Case of the relative which refers to it
This may be called inverted attraction; e.g. Τὴν οὐσίαν (instead of οὐσία)
ἣν κατέλιπε τῷ υἱῷ, ob πλείονος ἀξία ἐστίν, the property which he left to his son ts
worth no more. This inverted attraction is very common with otdei¢ dS¢ris
οὗ (no one, who not = every one), after an omitted ἐστί.
Nom. | οὐδεὶς ὅςτις οὐκ ἂν ταῦτα ποιῆσειεν.
Gen. | οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ κατεγέλασεν.
Dat. | οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο.
Acc. | οὐδένα ὄντινα οὐ κατέκλαυσεν.
8. On the use of the modes in adjective-sentences, the following
is to be observed:
(a) The Ind. is used, when the attributive qualification (i. e the
idea contained in the predicate) is represented as something actual
or real; e.g.7 πόλις, ἢ κείζεται, 7 ἐκείσϑη, ἢ κτισϑήσεταιε. The
Ind. Fut. is very frequently used, even after an historical tens
(§ 188, 5), to denote what should be done, or the purpose (§ 152, 6);
8. g. στρατηγοὺς αἱροῦνται, οἱ τῷ Φιλίππῳ wolepynoovass, wh
, should fight, or to fight with P. Also after negations the Greek
4
$:182.] BSYNTAX.-—ADJECTIVE-SENFENCES. 278
uses the Ind., where the Latin has the Subj.; e. g. παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ 0v-
δεὶς, ὅςτις μὴ ἱκανός ἐστιν ἴσα ποιεῖν ἐμοί, nemo, qui non pos-
set.
(Ὁ) The relative with ἄν, 6. g. ὃς ἄν, 7 ἄν, ὃ ἄν, ὅστις ἄν, etc,
is followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is
one of the principal tenses (Pres., Perf. or Fut.), if the attributive
qualification is to be represented as merely conceived or assumed.
Hence it is also used to designate quality and size indefinitely, and
also to express indefinite frequency (as often as). The adjective-
sentence can commonly be considered as a conditional sentence,
and the relative with ἄν can be resolved into the conjunction ἐάν
With zig or any other pronoun and the Subj.
Odc ἂν (= ἐάν τινὰς) βελτίους τινὲς ἑαυτῶν ἡγήσωνται, τούτοις πολ-
λάκις καὶ ἄνευ ἀνάγκης ἐϑέλουσι πείϑεσθϑαι, whomsoever any persons think (if any
persons think any) superior to themselves, these they, etc. "Avdpwroe ἐπ᾽ οὐδένας
μᾶλλον συνίστανται, ἢ ἐπὶ τούτους, ob¢ Av (= ἐών τινὰς) aiodwv ται ἄρ-
χεῖν αὐτῶν ἐπιχειροῦντας, men combine against none more than against. those whom
they see endeavoring to rule them.
(c) The relative (without cv) is used with the Opt., in the first
place, with the same signification as with the Subj. and ἄν, but re-
ferring to an historical tense. Hence, it is used in general and in-
definite statements; so also in expressing indefinite frequency,—in
which case the verb of the principal sentence is commonly in the
Impf. Here also the adjective-sentence may be resolved by si with
the Opt. ΝΕ
Οἱ πολέμιοι πάντας ἑξῆς, ὅτῳ (= εἰ tii) ἐντύχοιεν, καὶ παῖδας καὶ γυ-
ναῖκας ἔκτεινον, the enemy killed all, one after another, both children and women,
whomsoever they fell in with (= if they fell in with any). Φίλους, ὅσους ποιή-
σαιτο καὶ εὔνους γνοίη ὄντας, καὶ ἱκανοὺς Kpivece συνεργοὺς εἶναι, ὅ τι
τυγχάνοι βουλόμενος κατεργάζεσθαι, ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς πώντων κράτιστος δὴ
γενέσϑαι ϑεραπεύειν.
(4) In the second place, the Opt. is used, when a present or fu-
ture uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a mere supposition,
conjecture, assumption, is to be denoted. The adjective-sentence
is then considered as an uncertain or doubtful condition [§ 158, 1,
b, (β)] or forms a part of a sentence expressing a wish.
Tod αὐτὸν λέγειν, ἃ μὴ σαφῶς eldein, φείδεσϑαι dei, he must avoid saying,
what he does not fully know (= if he does not fully know). "Epdoe τις, ἣν Exa-
στος εἰδείη τέχνην, any one can practise thé art with which he is acquainted (=
sf he is acquainted with it).
(e) The Opt. with ὧν is used, when the attributive qualification
274 BYNTAX.—ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [$182.
is to be represented as a conditional supposition, conjecture, assump-
tion, an undetermined possibility (ἢ 153, 2, c.).
Τοὺς λαμβάνοντας τῆς ὁμιλίας μισϑὸν ἀνδραποδιστὰς ἑαυτῶν ἀπεκάλει Le
κράτης, διὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον αὐτοῖς εἶναι διαλέγεσϑαι, παρ’ ὧν ἂν λάβοιεν
τὸν μισϑόν, Socrates satd that those who receive a reward for their instruction, bar-
tered their own freedom, because it was necessary for them to converse with those from
whom they might receive a reward. Οὐκ ἔστιν 5 τι ἄν τις μεῖζον τούτον κακὸν
πκάϑοι, there is no evil which any one can experience, greater than this.
(f) The Ind. of the historical tenses (Impf., Plup., Aor.) is used
with a», when it is indicated that the attributive qualification could
take place only under a certain condition, but did not take place,
because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 153, 2, a, («)]; 6. 2. i
πόλις, ἣν οἱ πολέμιοι οὐκ dy ἐπόρϑησαν, εἰ οἱ στρατιῶται éBor
θησαν, quam hostes non diruissent, si milites auxilio ventssent.
CIL Exercises on ὃ 182.
. Many acts have become (the) oecasions of very great advantages, which #
first (= at the beginning), all supposed (aor.) to be calamities (sing.). Who
would (ὁ 153, 2, c.) not praise you (aor.), who have fought (aor.) boldly for the
freedom of your native land? The ungrateful (men) forgot us, who conferred
on them great benefits. There are men who (or some) are esteemed happy by
all more than by themselves. Cannot thy brother, Ὁ Chaerecrates, said So
erates, please (aor.) arty one, or doth he please some very highly? Cleopompss
ravaged some (tracts, neut. plur.) of sea-coast. In the young man there dwells
& fear which we call shame. For the acquisition of a friend, which we say 3%
very great blessing, we see that the multitude care little. There arose confused
noises, cries and shoutings, which is (a) common (thing) to all who ($ 148,6)
engage in a naval battle. Of the nations with which we are acquainted 2
Asia, the Persians rule, but the Syrians, Phrygians and Lydians are depen
dent (= are ruled). I have never yet esteemed a rich man happy (aor.), who
(part.) enjoys nothing of that which he possesses. We must remember not only
the death of the departed, but also the virtue, which they have left behind. Many
indeed commend fair words, but nevertheless do otherwise (another, nevi.) and
opposite to that which they have commended (aor.). Do nothing which thn
dost not understand. A rational man, if (part.) he has lost (aor.) a son or any-
thing else which he prizes very highly, will bear (it) more easily than others.
I have sent (aor.) thee this wine, said Cyrus, and I pray thee to drink it (aor)
to-day with those whom thou most lovest. The tyrant has given sufficient sat-
isfaction for what he has done (aer.). The general led (aor.) the army away
from the cities, which he had subjected (aor.) to himself. The Persians were
not able to fight (aor.) courageously against men so brave as were the Athe
nians and Lacedaemonians. In a man such as thon art, the citizens of the
State will cheerfully confide. It is no trivial matter to engage in single combat
(aor.) with a man like thee. Socrates was one of those who listen only to ret
son (== was such as to listen, eta). The barbarians had dwellings (so bailt)
§ 183.) SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES, 878
as to be fitted to shelter (them) both in winter and in summer. There was no
peril which our forefathers did not undergo for the freedom of their native land,
‘There was no one present (= of the present) except Socrates, whom Apollodo-
rus did not move (aor.) by his weeping (part.) and complaining (ἀγανακτεῖν).
What one does not (μή) possess, he cannot ($ 153, 2, c.) give (aor.) another.
(It is) not the golden sceptre (that) preserves royal dominion, but faithful
friends, that are the truest and surest sceptre for kings. The Phaeacians gave
Ulysses treasures, more than he would ever (= so many as he would never)
have gained (aor.) from Troy, if (el, w. ind. aor.) he had come unharmed to his
native land. There was then not a Spartan (gen. plur.), who, if the country
had been in danger, would not have been ready to die for it. States are called
very fortunate, that continue mast of the time in peace. It is a great mark of
a sovereign, if the citizens voluntarily obey him and are ready to abide by (him)
in dangers. A man is truly great, who can accomplish (aor.) a great (object)
by intellect (γνώμη) rather than by strength of body. He, at sight (part. aor.)
of whom men are stirred (aor.) and ardor and emulation seize (dumiwreiv τινέ,
aor. sing.) every one, he I might assert has something of a kingly nature. The
Assyrians prayed all whom (é¢ris, sing.) they might meet, that they would not
flee and leave them behind (part. aor.), but succor (aor.) them. We cannot
(§ 153, 2, c.) enjoy (aor.) a man, who delights in dainty food and wine more
than in friends. Who could hate (one), whom he knew to be considered noble ?
Socrates always said, that there was no (οὐ) better way to a (= the) good repu-
tation, than (that) by which one should become (aor.) versed (== good) in (ace.)
that in which he wished to appear so. Those who (§ 148, 6) took pay for their
instruction, Socrates called man-sellers of themselves, because (διὰ τό) they
were obliged to converse with those from whom they could. receive pay. ‘Phere
was no (οὐ) city there, by which they could defend themselves.
§183. II. Adverbial Sentences.
Adverbial sentences are adverbs, or participles used adverbially
($ 176, 1), formed into a sentence, and, like adverbs, denote an δᾶ"
verbial object, i. 6. such an object as merely defines the predicate,
but does not, like the object expressed by the substantive-sentence,
complete it; 8. g. ὅτε τὸ dag ἦλϑε, τὰ ἄνϑη ϑάλλει (= τοῦ
ἔαρος ἐλϑ ὄντος). é
A. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES OF PLACE AND TIME.
1. Adverbial sentences of place are introduced by the relative
adverbs of place, οὗ, 7, Day, ὅπου, Erde, iva (ult); oder, Erden
(unde) ; οἷ, ὅποι, 7, ὅπῃ (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express
the three relations, where, whence, whither. The use of the modes
in adverbial sentences of place, is in all respects, like that in adjec-
tive-sentences.
276 SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENORS. [$ 183,
2. Adverbial sentences of time are introduced by the following
conjunctions: .
a. To denote that one action is contemporary with another, by ὅτε, ὁπότε, oc,
ἡνίκα, which designate a point of time, and ἐν ¢, ἕως, while, which designate a
space of time.
b. To denote that one action is prior to another, by mee ἐπειδῆ, postquam, ἐξ
οὗ, ἐξ ὅτου, ex quo, and ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since.
c. To denote that one action succeeds another, by πρίν, priusquam, ἕως, ἕως οὖ,
ele 5, Ecre, μέχρι ob, μέχρι ὅτου, μέχρι.
3. On the use of the modes, the following is to be observed:
(a) The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented a
a fact ; hence in mentioning actual events or occurrences.
‘Qe ἡμέρα τάχιστα ἐγεγόνει, ἀπῆλϑον (ὡς τάχιστα, quum primum, αἱ
soon as it was day, they departed). Οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο, πρὲν τόν τε πατέρα
ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδον μετεπέμψαντο, καὶ τῶν φίλων αὐτοῦ τοὺς μὲν ἀπέκ-
recvay, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἐξέβαλον, they did not cease, before they seat
for their father from the camp, and put to death some of his friends and banished οἶσε
’Epäzxovro, μέχρι ol ᾿Αϑηναῖοι ἀνέπλευσαν.
(Ὁ) The Subj. is used, when the statement of time or the asser-
tion of the predicate, is represented as something conceived and
general, and refers to a predicate of the principal sentence, the verb
of which is in one of the principal tenses. The modal adverb ay
is united with the conjunctions; 6. g. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἡνίχ᾽ ὧν, ἐπᾶν
(ἐπήν), ἐπειδάν, πρὶν ἄν, ἕως ὧν, μέχρι ἄν, ἔςτ᾽ ἄν. Accordingly,
the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions from ora» to πρὶν
ἄν, when the statement of time is also to be represented as the
condition, under which the predicate of the principal sentence wil
take place. But with the conjunctions, which signify lJ, the Subj.
expresses an object expected and aimed at. In like manner also,
the Subj. is used to denote indefinite frequency ; the conjunctions
are then translated by as often as. |
Ἐπειδὰν od βούλῃ διαλέγεσϑαι, ὡς ἐγὼ δύναμαι ἔπεσϑαι, τότε σοι dr
λέξομαι, whenever you (if you) wish to discourse so that I can follow, then I will dis
course with you. Ob πρότερον παύσομαι, πρὶν ἂν ἔλω τε καὶ πυρώσω τὸς
᾿Αϑήνας, I will not cease, before I take and burn Athens (unless I take, etc.). “Eos
ἂν σώζηται τὸ σκάφος, τότε χρὴ καὶ ναύτην nal κυβερνήτην προϑύμους εἶναι
(dum servarı possit), while the ship can be saved, the sailor and the pilot should be ar-
tive (if the ship, etc.). Ὁπόταν στρατοπεδεύωνται ol βάρβαροι βασι-
Aeic, τάφρον περιβάλλονται εὐπετῶς διὰ τὴν πολυχειρίαν, as often as the barbı-
rian langs make an a a a Ann of the great
number of workmen.
(c) The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time,—(«) when the
§ 183.) SYNTAX.—ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. | 1
statement refers to an historical tense in the prinaipal clause. Wihem
the Opt. is used to denote indefinite frequency [as often as, comp.
(b) }; the Impf. generally stands in the principal sentence; (8) whew
the statement of time is to be considered also as a condition of the
principal sentence, and such a condition as appears as a present or
future uncertainty, as a mere supposition, conjecture, assumption or
undetermined possibility [§ 153, 1, Ὁ. PB). With the Opt. the con--
junctions are used without ἄν; 6. δ. ὅτε, ἐπεί, ete. (not ὅταν, stay,
-etc.).
Ob πρότερον ἐπαύσατο, πρὶν ἔλοι re nal πυρώσειε τὰς ᾿Αϑήνμαν.
Ὁπότε (as often as, whenever, if ever) στρατοπεδεύοιντο οἱ βώρβαροι
βασιλεῖς, τάφρον περιεβάλλοντο εὐπετῶς διὰ τὴν πολυχειρίαν. Ὁ πότε
τὸ φιλοσοφεῖν αἰσχρὸν ἡ γησαίμη ν εἶναι, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἄνϑρωπον νομίσαιμι ἐμαυτὸν
εἶναι (if I believed it disgraceful to be a philosopher, I would net think myself a man).
So also, ὅτε μή with Opt., nist.
Remark. In addition to the constructions already mentioned, the conjunc-
tion πρίν is constructed with the Inf, especially after affirmative sentences,
containing one of the principal tenses, when the action is to be represented us
an incidental or casual designation of the point of tine. The subject of the Inf.
is put in the Acc.; on attraction, see $ 172,3. Δαρεῖος, πρὶν αἰχμαλώτοις
γενέσϑαι τοὺς Ἐρετριέας, ἐνεῖχεν αὐτοῖς δεινὸν χόλον, before the Ere-
trians were taken captive, Darius cherished bitter hatred towards them. ‘Hoav Aa-
peiy, πρὶν βασιλεῦσαι, γεγονότες τρεῖς παῖδες, three children were born to
Darius before he was king. So πρότερον 7 and the Epic πάρος, are followed by
the Inf
CIII. Exercises on § 183.
The soul is freest when it leaves the body. Agesilaus offered sacrifice and
waited until the fugitives had brought (aor.) a sucrifice to Neptune. The Athé-
nians did not cease to be angry (ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν) with Pericles, until they had
punished (avr.) him by a fine. If men have robbed (aor.) or stolen, they
are punished. Do mot decide (aor.) before thou hast heatd (aor.) both parties
(== the plea of both). We must (dei, w. acc. and inf.) resolutely perform (ἀνύ-
εἰν) the journey, till we have reached (aor.) the goal. What does it profit some
to be rich, who do not ($ 177, 5.) understand how to use riches? Those who
($ 148, 6) have received favors (εὖ πάσχειν, aor.) we call ungratefal, if (when)
able to requite (aor.) they do not. No one was permitted (= it was nét
permitted) to go (εἰςέρχεσθαι, aor.) to the general, ff he was mot ($ 177,
&) at leisure. The Chalcidians gave way (ivd:dévec), as often as the enemy
charged, and as they fell back (ἀποχωρεῖν, port. pres.) the enemy presaed
on and threw javelins. Whenever young men associated with Socrates,
they made progress in virtue. He who (§.148, 6) is voluntarily hungry, can
(§ 168, 2, c.) eat (aor.) when he will, and he who js voluntarily thirsty, ean drink
(aor.) when he will; but he who suffers this by necessity, has not the power
(ἔξεστι, το. dat.) to cease to hunger and thirst, when he will ‘hat not, befese
24
278 sYNTAX.—CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENOES. [88 184, 185.
thou art hungry, and drink not, before thou art thirsty. That (= the) death is
without pain, which (part.) happens (aor.) ere (one could) think (δοκεῖν, aor.)
of (it). The tradition is, that the island (of) Delos, before Apollo appeared
(aor.) to men, was concealed by the sea (τὸ πέλαγος).
B. CausaL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES.
§184. a. Adverbial Sentences denoting Cause.
1. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions of time, 67a,
ὁπότε, ὡς, ἐπεί, quoniam, since, ἐπ ει ὃη, guoniam, since the
cause is considered contemporary (ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὡς), with the predicate
of the principal sentence, or prior (drei, ἐπειδή) to it. The Ind
is the prevailing mode in these adverbial sentences; e. g. My
pe κτεῖν᾽, ἐπ εὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός ei ut, quoniam — non sum,
do not slay me, since I am not a brother of Hector. Ὃ τ ε τοίνυν
cave οὕτως ἔχει, προρήκδι προϑύμως ἐθέλειν ἀκούειν, since these
things are so, etc.
2. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions orı and dor,
because. With these also, the Ind. is the prevailing mode; e. g.
"Agu τὸ ὅσιον, ὅτι ὅσιόν ἐστι, φιλεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν ϑεῶν, ἢ, ὅτι
φιλεῖται, ὅσιόν ἐστιν, is what is holy, loved by the gods because
it ts holy, or is it holy because tt is loved?
§185. ἢ. Conditional Adverbial Sentences.
1. The second kind of causal adverbial sentences, are those which
express a condition, and are introduced by the conjunctions 2¢ and
ἐάν (79, ἄν, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb
av, see ὃ 153, 2). The principal clause expresses that which is
conditioned by the subordinate clause. As the conditioning clause
precedes the conditioned, the former is called the Protasis, the lat-
ter, the Apodosis.
2. The Greek language has four different ways of expressing
conditionality :
(1) The protasis has ei with the Ind., and the apodosis likewise
the Ind. (sometimes also the Imp.). Then both the condition and
that which is subject to the condition, are represented as a readéty or
fact, and hence as certain.
El τοῦτο λέγεις, ἁμαρτάνεις, if you say this (admitted or assumed as a
fact), youerr. El εἰ σὲ βωμοί, ei ot καὶ Seoi, if there are altars (an admitted fact),
there are aleo gods. El ἔστι ϑεός, σοφός tariv. El ταῦτα nemoimxac,
9185.) SYNTAX.-—CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 278
brawetoGac ἄξιος el. El ri εἶχε, καὶ ἐδίδου. Bl ἐβρόντησε, καὶ ἦ σ-
τραψεν. Ἐϊταῦτα ἐπεποιήκει, ἡμαρτήἥκει. Ἐὺΐτοῦτο λέξεις, ἁμαρ-
τήσῃ. Εἶτιἔχεεις, δός. '
(2) The protasis has ei with the Ind. of an historical tense, and
the apodosis also the Ind. of an historical tense with ὧν. This
form is used, when the reality of the condition and of that which is
subject to the condition, is to be dented. It is asserted that some-
thing could take place under a certain condition, but did not take
place, because the condition was not fulfilled.
El re εἶχεν, ἐδίδον ἄν, si quid haberet, daret (nunc autem nihil habet ; ergo
nihil dare potest), if he had anything, he would give it (but he has nothing, conse-
quently he can give nothing). Ei τοῦτο ἔλεγες (ἔλεξας), ἡμάρτανες (huap-
rec) ἄν, st hoc diceres, errares. Ei τοῦτο ἔλεξας, ἥμαρτες ἄν (Aor. instead
of the Plup.), si hoc dizisses, errasses, if you had said this, you would have erred (but
you have not said it, consequently you cannot have erred). Ei &meiodn»,
οὐκ ἂν ἠῤῥώστουν, si obedissem, non aegrotarem,
(3) The protasis has ἐάν with the Subj., and the apodosis the
Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fut. (also the Imp.). The
condition is then represented as a supposition, the accomplishment
of which is, however, expected ; that which results from the princi-
pal clause is represented by the Ind. as certain or necessary.
Ἐὰν (fv, ἂν) τοῦτο λέγῃς, ἁμαρτήσῃ, if you say thes (shall say), you will
err. (Whether you will actually say this I do not yet know; but I expect, I as-
sume, that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.)
"Edy τιἔχωμεν, δώσομεν, if we have anything (which we expect is the case,
or which depends on circumstances) we will give. ’Edv τοῦτο λέξῃς, duap-
PH 07, st hoc dixeris, errabis.
(4) The protasis has ei with the Opt., and the apodosis the Opt.
with a». (The Opt. Fut. is not then used). By this form, both
the condition, and that which is subject to the condition, is repre-
sented as a present, mostly a future uncertainty, as an undetermined
possibility, a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption, without
any reference to the thing supposed, being real or not real, possible
or impossible.
Ei re ἔχοις, doing ἄν, tf you have anything (it neither being assumed nor de-
nied that you have), you would give. El τοῦτο λέγοις, ἁμαρτάνοις ἄν. Οὐκ
ἂν ὑπενέγκαιμεν οὔτε τὸ καῦμα, οὔτε τὸ ψῦχος, el ἐξαπίνης yiyvoıro. El
ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσϑαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσϑαι, ἢ ἀδικεῖν.
Ren. 1. Ei with the Ind. or ἐάν with the Subj. is frequently followed by
the Opt. with dv; e.g. el τοῦτο λέγεις, duapravore ἄν, if you (really) say this,
you would err; ἐὰν τοῦτο λέγῃς, ἁμαρτάνοις ἄν, if you say this (as I expect), you
soould err ; on the contrary, el with the Opt. is sometimes followed by the Ind.;
6. g. el τοῦτο λέγοις, ἁμαρτάνεις, if you should say this, you certainly err.
200 SINTAX.-—GAUSAL ADVERBIAL sentences. [8 185.
Bus. 2. E with the Opt. is.frequently used instead of a conjunction of time
[6 183, 3, (c)] to denote indefinite frequency in relation to what is past. Then’
εἰ is translated by as often as, and the principal clause has the Ind. of an histori-
nl tense, usually the Impf., with and Withont ἄν; e.g. Ei tic αὐτῷ δοκοίη
τῶν πρὸς τοῦτο τεταγμένων βλακεύειν, ἕπαιεν ἄν, as often as any one of thos,
<appotnied to this work, seemed to him to be indolent, he would beat him. ἘΠῚ τις Σωκρά-
Fo περίτου ἀντιλέγοι, ἐπὲ τὴν ὑπόθεσιν braviyev ἂν πάντα τὸν λόγον.
Bau. 8. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, ὧν is commonly omitted in
the conclusion with expressions which denote the idea of necesnity, duty, justiee,
possibility, freedom, inclination, thus, e. g. with χρῆν, ἔδει, Gpedov, with verbal ad-
jectives in -r&og, προςῆκε(ν), καιρὸς hv, εἰκὸς ἦν, καλὸν ἦν, αἰσχρὸν ἣν, καλῶς
alye(v), ἐξῆν, ἐβουλόμην ; 6. g. El αἰσχρόν τι ἔμελλον ἐργώσασϑαι, ϑάναταν ἀντ᾽
αὐτοῦ προαιρετέον ἦν, mors praeferenda erat. What is here expressed αὖ-
sohstely by the Greek, is expressed with an implied condition in English, e. g. εἰκὸς
ἥν, αὶ would be just, αἰσχρὸν ἦν, it would be shameful.
Rem. 4. The protasis is often omitted, and then the Opt. with dv stands with-
out any conditional clause; yet the protasis is contained in an adjective-sen-
tence, or in a participle, or in some word of the sentence which may be expand-
ed inte a conditional protasis, e. g. im the adverb οὔτως, in a preposition, or it
is indicated in what precedes or follows. "Os ταῦτα λέγοι (= εἴ τις ταῦτα
λέγοι), ἁμαρτάνοι ἄν, whoever (if any one) should say this, would err, Ταῦτα
λέξας (= el σὺ Agate), duapravoıs ἄν. Οὕτω (= εἰ οὕτω ποεῆσαμ)
γ᾽ ἂν ἁμαρτάνοις. Very often, however, the protasis is actually wanting,
particularty where it can be easily supplied, e. g. by such phrases as, when one
wishes, if it is allowed, if I can, if circumstances favor; e.g. BovAolunv ἄν
(acil. εἰ δυναίμην). | ,
CIV. Exercises on $185.
If we strive after virtue, we are happy. If thou wilt follow me, said Virtue
to Hercules, thou wilt become a good artificer of noble (deeds). If thou wish-
est the gods to be gracious to thee, thou must honor them. If thou art eager
te learn, thou wilt learn much (πολυμαϑῆ εἶναι). For all men death is (the)
boundary of life, even though one shut (aor. part.) himself in a cell and keep
watch. That which is (= the) unexpected, if it be good, delights men the more,
but if it be fearful, it terrifies the more. If thou callest to mind the past, thou
wilt. decide better upon the future. If we have moncy, we shall have friends.
The possession is nothing, if it is not used (= if there is not using therewith).
If men supposed (aor.) that thou wert ungrateful towanis thy (= the) parents,
no one would believe that he would be repaid (== receive back a favor), if ( past.)
he did thee a favor (aor.). The whole time would fail (aor.) us, if we should
examerate all the deeds of Hercules. If we should banish (aor.) from life the
fove of fame, what then would become (aor.) of virtue (= what would the good
become to us), or who would strive to dp (aer.) anything illustrious? If thou
shouldst be ready to take hold (aor.) of philosophy, thou wilt shortly see how
much thou wilt be distinguished from others. Wisdom would awaken (= af-
ford) a vehement love (plur.), if it were seen by the eyes. Said Alexander: If
I were not Alexander, I would be Diogenes. If Socrates had not himself been
4186. ΒΥΝΤΑΣ. -ΑΟΥΧΒΝΙΔΙ, SENTENCES. 281
(imp/:) very temperate, how would he have made (aor.) others temperate ἢ If
ever Astyages demanded anything, Cyrus observed it first. If ever any one.
served (aor.) Cyrus, when (part.) he had given a command (xpocrarrecy, aor.),-
in no case (= to no one) did he ever leave (aor.) his readiness unrewarded. It
would not be (= have itself) well, if the gods delighted more in great offerings,
than in small Ifa greater danger were to (μέλλω) threaten (= be to) us there
than here, then we must perhaps prefer the greatest security (= the most se-
care, neut.).
8186. Adverbial Sentences denoting Consequence
or Effect.
1. Adverbial sentences of consequence or effect, are introduced
by the conjunction ὦ ς τ 8 (more seldom αἷς). On the use of the:
modes the following is to be observed :
(a) The Ind. is used, when the consequence or effect is to be
represented as a fact, something actually accomplished; the Inf,
on the contrary, is used, when the consequence or effect is to be
represented as merely conceived, not actually accomplished, but
merely as possible or aimed at, or as the condition of the affirmation
in the principal clause (on condition that, supposing that).
"Apyoc ἀνδρῶν ἐχηρώϑη οὕτως, ὥςτε ol δοῦλοι αὐτῶν ἔσχον πάντα τὰ
πράγματα, Argos was left so destitute of men, that the slaves had all their effects.
Σωκράτης πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσϑαι πεπαιδευμένος ἣν οὕτως, ὥςτε πάνυ μι-
κρὰ κεκτημένος πάνυ ῥᾳδίως ἔχειν ἀρκοῦντα, Socrates was so educated to have
moderate desires, that although he possessed very little, he very easily had a sufficiency
(here the consequence is not carried into effect, but is founded only on the na-
tare of Socrates).
Rem. 1. If the Inf. after ὥςτε has a special subject, different from that of the
principal sentence, this is put in the Acc., but if the subjects of both sentences
are the same, then attraction takes place (§ 172, 3).
Rem. 2. Instead of ὥςτε with an Inf., a relative, particularly οἷος, ὅσος, is of-
ten used in connection with an Inf.; this relative corresponds to a demonstra-
tive in the preceding clause, thongh sometimes the demonstrative is to be sup-
plied; e. g. τοιοῦτος ὁ Στάσιππος hy, οἷος un βούλεσθαι πολλοὺς
ἀποκτιννύναι τῶν πολιτῶν, Stasippus was such, as not to desire to put many of the
citizens to death.
(b) The Opt. with a» is used, when the consequence or effect is
to be represented as a contingent conjecture, supposition or assump-
. tion (8 153, 2, c.).
(c) Finally, the Ind. of the historical tenses with ἄν, or the Inf.
with ἄν is used, when it is to be indicated, that the consequence or
effect would take place only under a certain condition [ὃ 153, 2, a
(a) and d.].
24*
208 SENTAX.—ADTERBIAL BENTENCES. [8 186.
Tote καὶ ἱαγριωὴν καὶ μαντεκὴν ᾿Απόλλων ἀνεῦρεν, ἐκιϑυμίας καὶ ἔρωτος
ἡγεμονεύσαντος, ὥςτε καὶ οὗτος Ἔρωτος ἂν εἴη μαϑητῆς, Apollo discovered
archery, medicine and the prophetic art, under the instruction of desire and love, so that
he was a disesple of Eros. Πάντες of πολῖται πολεμικὰ ὅπλα κατεσκεύαζον, ὦ ς-
Te τὴν πόλεν ὄντως ἡγήσω ἂν πολέμου ἐργαστήριον εἶναι (se. εἰ εἶδες), all the
Ciiinens were preparing weapons of war, eo that you would think that the city was ac-
tually a manufactory for war. Οἱ Geol οὕτω μοι ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς ἐσήμηναν, Score
καὶ ἰδιώτην ἂν γνῶναι, ὅτι τῆς μοναρχίας amexeodai με dei, so that even α pri-
vate man (if he had been present) might have perceived.
Rem. 3. Instead of ὥςτε with the Inf, signifying ἘΠΕ ΕΝ
(on the condition that), ἐ φ᾽ ᾧτε also, either with the Ind. Fut or with the Inf., is
used; e.g. Ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὑπεξίσταμαι τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἐφ᾽ Gre ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ὑμῶν
ἄρξομαι, I will give up all claim to the government on this condition, that I shall be
ridal by no one of you.
Rem. 4. Ὡς is used with the Inf. in independent or parenthetic clauses; 6. g,
ὡς εἰπεῖν, so to speak; ὡς γέ μοι doxeiv,as it seems to me; ὡς is also often
omitted in such clauses; e.g.0% πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly.
ἃ. Adverbial Sentences denoting Comparison.
2. Comparative adverbial sentences of manner and way, are in-
troduced by the relative adverbs, wc, oor, ὥςπερ, ὅπως, as.
The use of the modes in these sentences corresponds with that in
adjective-sentences (§ 182, 8).
8. Comparative adverbial sentences of quantity or degree, are in-
troduced by the relative ὅσῳ (0c0¥»), and with this the demon-
strative τοσούτῳ (τοσοῦτον) in the principal clause corres-
ponds; these are translated so much — as, but with a comparative
or superlative, by the — the.
Τοσοῦτον διαφέρειν ἡμᾶς dei τῶν δούλων, ὅσον ol μὲν δοῦλοι ἄκοντες τοῖς
δεσπόταις ὑπηῤετοῦσιν, we ought to differ so far from slaves, as slaves unwillingly
obey their masters. “Oow (ὅσον) σοφώτερός τίς ἐστι, το σ οὗ τῳ (τοσοῦτον)
o@dpov£orepäc ἔστεν, the wiser any one ia, the more discreet will he be. "Ogg
(ὅσον) σοφώτατός τίς ἐστι, τοσούτῳ (τοσοῦτον) σΘωφρονέστατός
ἐστιν. ;
CV. Exercises on ὃ 186.
Cyrus had soon killed off (ἀναλίσκω) the beasts in the park, so that Astyages
gould ne longer collect others for him. The Greeks were obliged (dei, w. acc.
and inf.) to go back so far while fighting, that (during) the whole day they went
(διέρχεσϑαι) not more than twenty-five stadia, and (ἀλλά) came into the villages
in the evening. In process of time (ὡς προῆγεν ὁ χρόνος), Cyrus became (so)
filled with modesty, that he even blushed, if he met his parents. God provided
for men eyes that they (might) see the visible, and ears that they (might) hear
the audible. What law is full of 60 gross injustice, as to deprive him of recom-
pense who (§ 148, 6) gives away (aor.) something from his own (store, plar.)
$.187.] SYNTAX.—~-INTERROGANVE SENTENCES. 288
and does {aor.) a humane deed? The Athenians were permitted to rule over
the rest of the Greeks, provided that they themsetves obeyed the Persian king.
Cyrus was very eager for honor, so that he underwent everything for the sake
of being praiesd. The generals stood firm, that the enemy might not throw the
wings into disorder. There are vessels at your command, so that you can sail
wherever (ὅπη ἄν) you will. The excellence of Nestor is well known to all the
Greeks, so that, if I should speak of (Aéyeev) it, I should speak to (those) ae-
qmainted (with it). The cup was so strong, that it could not be broken. The
barbarians had invested (aor.) the city so that the Greeks eould not eacape from
it unobserved (λανϑάγνειν, aor.). The intestines of the sick burned (xaierde:)
so, that they would very gladly have plunged themselves in cold water.
§ 187. Interrogative Sentences.
1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence or
dependent upon it; 6. g. Js the friend come? and I do not know
whether the friend has come, The first is called a direct question,
the last, an indıreai. Both may consist either of one member, or
of two or more members ; 6. g. Is the friend come, or ts he not come?
Knowest thou not whether he is coming, or whether he is not coming ὃ
According as the question refers to an object (person or thing) or to
a predicate, the questions are divided into nominal and into predi-
cative questions; e. g. who has done this? (nominal question), and
hast thou written the letter ? (predicative question).
2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the in-.
quirer wishes to receive an answer on a single point, are introduced
by substantive or adjective interrogative pronouns, τίς, ποῖος, πόσος,
or such interrogative adverbs as πότερος, πῶς, πῇ, ποῦ, πόϑι, πόϑεν;
e. g. τίς ταῦτα ἐποίησεν ;——the predicative questions, i. e. those
where the inquirer desires only an affirmation or denial of his in-
quiry, are introduced by adverbial interrogatives, as, aga; 6. δ. & @ &
ξαῦτα ἐποίησας ;
Ren. 1. Predicative questions are frequently indicated by the mere fone and
by the position of the words, the predicate, or that word on which the force of
the question rests, standing first in the sentence. Thus particularly in the case
of negatives; 6. 5. οὐκ ἐϑέλεις ἱέναι, do you not wish to go?
8. On the use of the: interrogatives, the ee is to be ab-
served :.
(1) "H, commonly in connection with other particles, implies an assertion, as-
severation, since it supposes that that in regard to which the question is asked,
actually existe, 6. g. 7 οὗτοι πολέμιοί εἰσιν, are these enemies? ἢ mov, num
forte, truly? indeed? when the inquirer expects a negative answer; e.g. ποῦ
τετόλμηκ᾽ ἔργου alexıorov τόδε, has Jason .indeed dared this thing? ἢ y&p, te τ
284 SYNTAX.--INTERBOGATIVE SENTENCES. [$ 187.
net so, is it not true? e.g. yap, ὦ Ἱππία, ἐάν τι ἐρωτᾷ σε Σωκρώτης, ὀκοκρε-
vel, will you not answer, if Socrates asks you ?
(2) "A pais properly used with questions of dowlt, uncertainty and wonder, but
often, also, with a degree of modesty with questions wholly definite; 6. g. ἀρ
οἶσϑά τινας, of ἀνωφελεῖς ὄντες ὠφελίμους δύνανται φίλους ποιεῖσθαι, do you
know any persons destitute of all recommendation, who are able to acquire valuable
friends ? (to which a negative answer is expected ).
(3) Οὐ or un is joined with dpa, according as the inquirer expects either an
affirmative or negative answer; e.g. "Ap’ οὐ κ ἔστιν ἀσθενής ; manne acgrotat ? (he
is not sick, is he?) Ans. Aegrotat. "Ape μὴ ἔστιν ἀσϑενῆς ; numnam acgretat ἢ
(Ae is not sick, is he?) Ans. Non aegrotat.
(4) Μή always expresses apprehension or anxiety on the part of the inquirer,
and hence expects a negative answer; e.g. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ἀρχιτέκτων βούλει yevé-
oda; Οὐκ οὖν ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη, do you not wish to become an architect ? by no means,
said he. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ γεωμέτρης ἐπιϑυμεῖς, ἔφη, γενέσϑαι dyadic; Οὐδὲ yeo-
μέτρης, ἔφη, x. τ. A.
(5) Μῶν (arising from the interrogative μή and οὖν), corresponds in all re-
spects with the Lat. num, and hence always requires a negative answer; 6. g.
μῶν τετόλμηκας ταῦτα δρᾶσαι, you have not dared to do these things, have you?
_ For the sake of perspicuity, the particles οὖν and μλ--μῶν οὖν, μῶν ug-—are
often joined with it; ὁ. g. μῶν οὖν τετόλμηκας --- τοῦ μῶν μὴ τετόλμηκας
-ἰ πο but when the negative οὐ is joined with μῶν, the question is affirmative
(nonne) ; 6. g. μῶν οὗ rerölunnas—; nonne ausus 68 ---
(6) O 8, non, nonne? and οὐ κοῦν, non or nonne ergo? with the collateral idea
of conclusion from what precedes, always denote affirmative questions; 6. g. σ ὑ-
κοῦν γέλως ἥδιστος εἰς ἐχϑροὺς γελᾷν, is tt not then the sweetest laughter to laugh:
at one’s enemies ἢ
(7) Eira and ἔπειτα are used in questions expressing indignation, astontsh-
ment and irony, and denote opposition or contrast, and yet, since an unexpected
conclusion has been drawn from what precedes; e.g. ἔπειτ᾽ οὐκ olet φροντί-
ζειν ϑεοὺς ἀνθρώπων, and yet do you not suppose that the gods care for men ?
(8) Direct double questions are introduced :
a. By πότερον (mTörepa) — 7, utrum—an; e. g. πότερον οὗτοι ὑβρισταί
εἰσιν, ἢ φιλόξενοι, are they insolent, or hospitable? (πότερον in the first member is
sometimes omitted); Ὁ. by "Apa— 7, ne—an; c. by M7 —%, whether not —or;
ἃ, by "AAA re # (instead of ἄλλο τι γένοιτ᾽ ἄν, 7) and dAAoT tL, nonne; 6. ᾷ.
ἄλλο τι ἢ λεΐπεται τὸ ἐντεῦϑεν ἐμοὶ κινδύνων ὁ μέγιστος, nonne relinguitur
mihi—? is not the greatest of the dangers left iome® "AAAorı οὖν olye φιλοκερ-
δεῖς φιλοῦσι τὸ κέρδος, therefore, do not those fond of gain, love gain?
(9) Single indirect questions are introduced :
8. By the interrogative pronouns ὅςτις, ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος, ὁπότερος, ὅπως, ὅπου,
ὅπη, ὁπότε, etc. ($ 62, Rem. 1.); 6. g. οὐκ οἶδα, ὅςτις ἐστίν --- οὐκ olda, ὅπως τὸ
πρᾶγμα ἔπραξεν."
Rex. 2. But often the direct interrogatives τίς, ποῖος, πῶς, etc., take the place
of the indirect question, the indirect question then assuming the character of the
direct; 6. g. οὐκ οἶδα, τίς ταῦτα ἔπραξεν (instead of ὅςτις).
hk. El, whether, like 7, is properly used only in double questions, and denetes
§ 188.] SYNTAK.—INDIRECT DISCOURSE. - 285
a wavering between two possibilities ; but often only ene member is expressed,
while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. Hence εἰ is used after
verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquiring, asking, trying, knowing, sayiny: ὁρᾷν, oxo-
πεῖν, σκοπεῖσϑαι, εἰδέναι, φοβεῖσϑαι, εἰς.---πειρᾶσϑαι, ἐπινοεῖν, ἐρωτᾷν---λέγειν,
φράζειν, ete.; 6. g. σκέψαι, εἰ ὁ Ἑλλήνων νόμος κάλλιον ἔχει, consider whether the
Greek custom is not better. Also ἐών with the Subj. is used in such questions,
when things expected and yet to be proved, are spoken of; 6. g. σκέψαι, ἐὰν
τόδε σοι μᾶλλον ἀρέσκῃ, consider whether this would please you better.
c. M#, as in direct questions, whether not, is used after expressions of reflecting,
considering, inquiring, asking, as well as after those of anxiety and fear, which alse
have the idea of reflection. In English, this μή after verbs of fear and anxiety
is translated by that; 6. g. dpa, μὴ τοῦτο οὕτως ἔχει, see, whether this is not so.
Φροντίζω, μὴ κράτιστον ἡ oe σιγᾷν, 1 am considering whether it is not best for me
to be silent.
(10) An indirect double question is introduced by, (a) πότερον (πότερα) ----ἥ ;
e. g. οὐκ olda, πότερον ζῇ ἢ τέϑνηκεν ; (Ὁ) ei —7, the same 35 mörepov —7, yer
with this difference, that el —% expresses uncertainty and choice; (c) eire—
efre, in the same signification as ei —7, except that by eire— eire, the cor-
responding relation of the two members is denoted, and the indecision of the
speaker between two possibilities is made more prominent; e. g. καὶ dalfeic τά-
χα, elt’ εὐγενὴς κέφνκας, cir ἐσϑλῶν κακή.
Rex. 8. On the use of the modes the following is to be observed: The Ind.
ig used in direct and indirect questions; the Subj. and Opt. are used in doyhtfd
questions, and differ only as they are affected by the tense of the verb in tha
principal sentence; 6. g. οὐκ ἔχω, ὅποι τράπωμαι and οὐκ εἶχον, ὅποι τραποίμην
[$ 153, 1, b. (a)]. On the Ind. and Opt. of the historical tenses with ἄν, see $ 153,
2, a. (a) and c.
Rem. 4. The answer is expreseed :
a. By the repetition of the interrogative word; e.g. Ὁρᾷς us, δέσποιν᾽, ὡς
ἔχω, τὸν ἄϑλιον; Ans.'Opo. Ina negative anawer, a negative is joined with
the interrogative word; e.g. Ola οὖν βροτοῖς ὃς καϑέστηκεν νόμος ; Ans,
Οὐκ olda. .
b. By φημί, φήμ' ἐγώ, ἔγωγε; negative, ob φημί, οὐκ ἔγωγε, οὗ.
c. Very frequently by yé, quidem, utique, assuredly, certainly, which denotes
that the answer completes the thought contained in the question, extends it fur-
ther, continues and strengthens it, or by an additional clause, limits and cor-
rects it. Also by yap, though still stronger.
ἃ, By vai,vq τὸν Aia, πάνυ, κάρτα, ev ye, and the like.
9 188. Oblique or Indirect Discourse.
1. The words or thoughts of a person,—whether this be a third
or second person, or the speaker himself—may be repeated again,
either without change, in precisely the same form as they were at
first stated by the person who uttered them,—then the discourse oF
thought quoted is independent of the representation of the narrator,
386 - SYNTAX.—INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 188.
and is’ called direct (oratio recta); e. g. I thought, “ all men are mor-
tal,”—he announced to me, “peace has been concluded,” —and with-
out a preceding verb, all men are mortal ;—or, in the second place,
the discourse is made to refer to the representation of the speaker
or some one else, and thus depends on a verb of perception or com-
munication (verbum sentiendi or declarand:) in the principal sen-
tence. The statement is then quoted as the sentiment of the per-
son spoken of, i. e. of the person by whom it was originally uttered.
This is called indirect or oblique discourse (oratio obliqua) ; e. g.
he announced, that peace was concluded.
I will make peace with the enemy.—Oratio recta.
He said that he would make peace with the enemy.—Oratio obliqua.
2. The principal sentences of direct discourse, and also sentences
introduced by the coördinate conjunctions, e. g. γάρ, οὖν, καίτοι,
etc., are expressed, in oblique discourse, when they contain a simple
affirmation, and denote something which happens, has happened, or
will happen, (a) either by the Acc. with Inf. (§ 172, 1), or by ὅτι
and ὡς with the finite verb (§ 180, 2), or by the participial con-
struction (§ 175, 1); 6. g. ἐπήγγειλεεοὺς πολεμίους ἀποφυ-
yeiv—orı οἱ πολέμιοι ἀποφύγοιεν or ἀπέφυγο»---.τοὺς.
πολεμίους ἀποφυγόντας --τ οὐ, (Ὁ), when they express a
command, wish or desire, by the Inf. (ὃ 171, 2), 6. g. ἔλεξε τοῖς
σερατιώταις ἐπιϑέσϑαι τοῖς πολεμίοις, he commanded the sol-
diers to attack the enemy ; in oratio recta this would be expressed by
the Imp. ἐπίϑεσϑε.
ἬἭδομαι, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἀκούων cov φρονίμους λόγους (oratio recta), Z am pleased,
Glearchus, to hear you make these sensible remarks. Τισσαφέρνης ἔλεξεν, ὅτι ἤδοιτο
ἀκούων Κλεάρχου φρονίμους λόγους, Tissaphernes said that he was pleased to hear
Clearchus, etc.
8. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse are not changed in
indirect discourse, except that, after an historical tense in the prin-
cipal sentence, they take the Opt., in the place of the Ind. and Subj.
when the indirect discourse is to be represented as such, i. e. when
the statement contained in the subordinate clause is to be viewed as
the opinion or sentiment of the person spoken of.
Thus, 6. g. ἐὰν τοῦτο λέγῃς, ἁμαρτήσῃ, in oratio obliqua becomes ἔλεξέ σε,
el τοῦτο λέγοις, ἁμαρτήσεσθαι. Τελευτῶν ἔλεγεν, ὅσα ἀγαϑὰ Κῦρος ἸΤέρσας
πεποιῆκοι (fecisset), he finally mentioned what advanlages C. had conferred on
the Persians. Τισσαφέρνης Guocev ᾿Αγησιλάῳ, el σπείσαιτο, Fug FAD oıe»,
ob πέμψειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, διαπράξεσθαι αὐτῷ, ἀφεϑῆναι atrové-
μοὺς τὰς ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεις ᾿Ελλονίδος, pe
§ 189. } HOMERIC DIALECT.—HEXAMETER. 287
he would make a treaty, until the messengers, whom he had sent to the king should re-
turn, that he would effect that the Grecian cities in Asia should be independent.
4. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes the
form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in the prin-
cipal clause, the verb of the subordinate clause is in the Ind. of one
of the principal tenses, and in the Subj., as in direct discourse.
Here, although the actions and representations contained in the sub-
ordinate clauses, belong to the past, they are transferred to the time
present to the speaker. The use of the Ind. is regular, when the
statement in the principal sentence, is present to the time of the
speaker; 6. g. λέγω, ὅτε ὁ ἄνϑρωπος ϑνητός ἐστιν, or instead of
ὅτι with the finite verb, the Acc. with the Inf. is used; e. g. λέγω,
τὸν ἄνϑρωπον ϑνητὸν» εἶναι.
᾿Αεὶ ἐπεμέλειτο ὁ Κῦρος, ὁπότε συσκηνοῖεν, ὅπω ς εὐχαριστότατοι λόγοε
ἐμβληϑήσονται, Cyrus always took care, whenever they were with him in his
tent, that the most pleasant subjects of conversation should be presented. "Edoée τῷ
δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἐλέσϑαι, of τοὺς πατρίους νόμους συγγράψουσι, nad οὖς
κολιτεύσαυσειν, the people resolved to choose thirty men, who should draw up
lawe for the state, in accordance with which they should administer the government.
‘Opxiote μεγάλοις κατείχοντο ᾿Αϑηναῖοι, δέκα ἔτη χρήσεσϑαι νόμοις, ob¢
ἂν αὐτοῖς Σόλων ϑῆται. Τοὺς ἱππέας ἐκέλευσε Κῦρος φυλάττειν τοὺς ἀγα-
* γόντας, Ewe ἄν τις σημήνῃ.
5. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf., instead of the
finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. |
Σκύϑας φασὶ rode νομάδας, ἐπεὶ αὐτοῖς Δαρεῖον eleBareiv εἰς rw
: χώραν, μετὰ ταῦτα μεμονέναι αὐτὸν τίσασϑαι, they say that the Scythian nomads,
afler Darius had made an irruption into their country, eagerly desired to take vengeance
on him.
APPENDIX.
HOMERIC DIALECT.
§189. Introductory Remarks on the Hexameter.
1. The measure of the Homeric verse is Hexameter, which consists of six por-
tions, called fee. Each of these feet is a Dactyl or Spondee. A dactyl consists
of one long and two short syllables ( ~ ++ ), a spondee of two long ( — - ).
The first four feet of an Hexameter verse may be either dactyls or spondees;
„the fifth is usually a dactyl, and the sixth a spondee or troehes (—»). The
following is the scheme :.
906 MOMERIC DIALECT.~- HEXAMBTER. (6189.
—
"Avdpa pot ἔννεπε, | Μοῦσα, mo | λύτροπον, | öc μάλα | πολλὰ
πλάγχϑη, & | wet Tpoi | ns le | ρὸν mroAi | edpov é | περσεν.
2. The first syllable of the dactyl and also of the spondee, is pronounced with
a stress or elevation of voice, which is called the Arsis; the short syllables follow.
ing the Arsis, or the long one, if the foot be a spondee, are pronounced witha
‘depression of voice, which is calted the Thesis. The Arsis is marked in the
scheme by the sign ( = ).
Remarx. The fifth foot is comionly a dactyl, but sometimes a spondee;
then the verse is called a spondaic verse. A succession of dactyls indicates ἃ
quick and lively motion, while a succession n of spondees, a slow and heavy mo
tion.
3. In every well constructed Hexameter, there is at least one Caesura, which
is occasioned by the ending of a word in the middle of a foot. -But as the bar
mony of the verse requires that the ending of the foot and of the word shoud
generally not coincide, several words of an Hexameter verse may end in the mid
‘tle of Β foot, and hence there may be several caesuras in an Hexameter.
χωόμενον | κατὰ ϑυμόν | ἐὐζώνοιο | γυναικός.
In this line the ending of the foot and of the word coincide any in the wi
κατά. Inadactyl the word may end with a lang syllable in the arsis ( — |»)
or with the first short in the thesis ( + |~). In the former case, the caesun
is called masculine, in the latter, feminine. The principal cagsuras are. the ssi
lowing :
(a) The most usual and most emphatic caesura is the masculine after the a
816 of the third foot; 6. g.
Br nu uw ar we uw u „|.
; ἀλλ᾽ ὁ μὲν Aldiowag || μετεκίαϑε τηλόϑ' ἐόντας.
(8) Often also a less eıhphatic feminine eacsura occhts in the thesis of te
Sied foot; ὃ. x.
[4 ce ’ co
ἄνδρα μοι ἔννεπε, Μοῦσα, || πολύτροπον, ὃς μάλα πολλά.
(c) A third caesura is the masculine after the arsis of the fourth foot; this’
usually preceded by a masculine caesura in the second foot; 6. g.
a [4 ° [4 ’
m vw — Lo; —_ {m | m on = ἍΜ --- oa
ἀρνύμενος || ἦν τε ψυχὴν || καὶ vöorev ἑταίρων.
4. Beside these principal caesuras there are still other subordinate ones.
᾿ δ. Beside the caesura, the Diaeresis [διαίρεσες) also is of frequent occurrent,
i. e. a separation of the verse, occasioned by the ending of the word and of the
foot coinciding. The following-are the. principal diaereses: (a) after the im
foot; (Ὁ) after the second foot; (c) after the third be (d) after the foarth
foot; e. g.
(a) ἤσϑιον - | αὐτὰρ ὁ τοῖσιν ἀφείλετο νόστιμον map
(b) ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δὴ ἔτος | ἦλϑε, περιπλομένων ἐνιαυτῶν
(c) ἐννῆμαρ μὲν ἀνὰ στρατὸν | dyero κῆλα ϑεοῖο
(d) dvdpa μοι ἔννεπε, Μοῦσα, πολύτροπον, | ὃς μάλα πολλά.
[4 [4 .
— ww on Ww
§ 190.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—QUANTITY. 280
§190. Quantity (Comp. § 9).
PRELIMINARY Remakk. Only a few general rules will be given here; the
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned by
observation. ;
1. A syllable which has the vowels ¢ or 0, followed by another vowel or a
single consonant, is short by nature; 6. g. τέκός, ϑέός, Bön.
2. A syllable which has the vowel 7 or ὠ, or a diphthong, is long by nature;
so all contracted and circumflexed syllables are long by nature; 6. g. Zpüg,
οὐρανός ; ἄκων {instead of ἀέκων), ἐτίμα (from ἐτίμᾶε), πᾶς, σῖτος, ψῦχος, νῦν.
3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel, α, ¢, v, followed by another vowel
or ἃ single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position; 8. g. dei-
dovrec, δαιμονΐη, gon, μἄχη, φίλος, ἀργύρεος. ᾿
4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two conso-
nants or a double consonant, is long by position; e. g. ix&odaı, ἐκατόμβη, δέξα-
oda, ἔχϑιστος, φύλλον.
Exceptions to No.3.
- (a) a of nouns of the first Dec., which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the
Cases in which it occurs; 6. g. ἡμέρα, φιλία, -Gc, -ᾧ, -ἂν, etc.
(b) α in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec., is long; 6. g. Nom. Sing.
λέαινᾶ, Dual Aeaiva.
(c) a is long in the Gen. Sing. in «o and Gen. Pl. in -ἄων ; 6. g. ᾿Ατρείδᾶο,
ayopdwy.
(ἃ) the ending -ας of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing.,
and in the Acc. Pl.; 6. g. Nom. rapide, Gen. oxide, Acc. Pl. δόξας.
(e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -a¢ is long; so also other words
in -a¢ where vr or v have been dropped; 6. g. ἀκούσᾶς (ἀκουσαντς), ἀκού-
σᾶσα, lords, Bac; γίγας (yıyavrs), μέλᾶς (μελανς).
(f) a in the third Pers. Pl. Perf. Ind. Act.; e. g. τετύφασι.
(g) v is long in the Sing. of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs i in -vuu,
also in the masculine and feminine Sing. of the participle; e. g. δεικνῦμε,
ἐδείκνυν, decxvic, decnvica.—Other exceptions may be learned by obser- _
vation.
5. In Homer, a mute and liquid commonly make a syllable long by position.
6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a)
when it ends with a consonant, and the next word begins with a consonant;
6. g. καὶ κάϑι | σὸν Tpö | ας ; also (Ὁ) when the final syllable ends with a short
vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with two sin-
gle consonants, which are not a mute and liquid; 6. g. ἀδμή | την, ἣν | οὕπω
ὁ | πὸ ζυγὸν | ἤγαγεν | ἀνήρ. A mute and liquid, in this case, always makes the
syllable in the arsis long, while the syllable in the thesis may be either long or
short, according to the necessities of the verse; 6. δ. μή nor | δῶρ᾽ Epa | τὰ πρό-
«ge | ρὲ χρυ | σέης ’Adgpo | δίτης ; on the contrary, in the thesis, αὐτὰρ 5 (5) | mAy-
σίον | éorn | κει.
7. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a word, is usually made short in
25
290 HOMERIO DIALEO?T. —HIATUS. [δὲ 191, 192.
Homer, before a word beginning with a vowel, but it remains long when it is in
the arsis, or when the following word has the digamma ($ 193) ; 6. g. ἡμένῇ | ἐν
Bév | ϑεσσιν ; ;— vles, ὁ | μὲν Kreä | τοῦ, ὁ & dp’ | Ebpüroö | ’Axropi | wvoc ;—
αὐτὰρ ὁ | ἔγνω | ἦσιν & | vi φρεσὶ | φώνη | av τε (ἦσιν = Εῇσιν).
8. A long vowel or diphthong in the middle of a word, before a following
vowel, is but seldom shortened ; ©. g. &wei7 (~~ — ), ἔμπαίος (~~~ ), οἷος (vv),
| θεβλῆαι.
9. The arsis can make a ΓΝ syHable long, both at the beginning of a word,
Φ. g. ἀσπίδος | ἀκάμα | τον πῦρ, and also at the end,—in which case it is gene
rally followed by a liquid, or a σ or 6, the sound of which is easily doubled m
pronunciation, or by a word with the digamma; e. g. xa? sedi | ἃ Aw | τεῦντα;
=~ Ovyaré | pa ἦν (= Fav).
10. Not unfrequently in Homer, merely from the necessities of the verse,s
short vowel in the thesis is measured as long, when it stands between two long
vowels ; 6. g. ὑπο | δέξὲε | η.
: $191. Hiatus.
Hiatus, i. e. a harshness in the pronunciation, arising from the concurrents
ef two vowels, one of which ends a word, and the other begins the following
word, is generally avoided by the Greeks, but especially in verve. In the Ho
meric Hexameter, however, it is admitted in the following cases :.
(4) With long vowels or diphthongs, either in the arsis, 6. g. ἄντεϑέ | ῳ ’Odr|
ont, or in the thesis, in which case the long vowel or diphthong is short;
e. δ. οἴκοι & | σαν ;
(Ὁ) When the vowel does not admit elision, or but seldom ; e. g. παιδὶ dur
vev;
(c) When two words are separated by a panctuation-mark; 6. g. ἀλλ᾽ dvs, εἰ
utuoväc γε;
(d) In the feminine caesura ($ 189, 8), after the first short syllable in: ‘the third
foot of the verse; 6. g. κεινὴ | δὲ τρυφᾶά Ι λεια ἢ Gp’ | ἔσπετο | χειρὶ ae |
xein;
te) In the diaeresis (§ 189, 5) after the first and fourth foot of the verse; 6. ἢ.
ἔγχεϊ | "Idouevnos ; — πέμψαι én’ ’Arpeidn 'Ayaykuvovi | οὗλον "Oveupe
(f) When the first word has the apostrophe; e. g. dévdpe’ ἔϑαλλεν ;
{g) Words which have the digamma occasion no hiatus ($ 198, 3).
8192. The Homeric Dialect.
The language of Homer and his school is the older Ionic; these poets, how-
ever, were not satisfied with their own dialect merely, but selected from all the
dialects, in accordance with the true principles of art, those forms which wae
adapted to the nature of their poetry; the regular laws of versification, alsa,
had much influence in forming the language. Thus they produced a peculisr
and definite poetic language, called the Epic or Homeric.
95199, 194] HONERIC DIALEC?.—DIGAMMA.— VOWELS. 2
§ 1938. Digamma or Labial Breathing F.
1. The Greek language had originally a special labial breathing, the sound
of which corresponds nearly to the English f From its form F, which re-
sembles one gamma standing upon another, it is called Digamma (double "
gamma).
2. The Aeolians retained this character the longest; among the other Gre-
cian tribes it disappeared very early; its sound, however, was in some instances
changed into the smooth labial β, e. g. Gia, arising from Fic (later ic), vis; in
ome instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and after other vowels coal-
esced with these and formed the diphthongs av, ev, 77, ov, wv, 6. g. ναῦς instead —
of va‘ ¢, navis, βοῦς (B6/¢), bus, bös, Gen. bö-vis; in others still, it was merely
changed into a smooth breathing, which, at the beginning of the word, is indica-
ted by the Spiritus lenis, but in the middle of a word and before p, it was-not
indicated by any character; 6. g. Fic, vis, Ic; elAéw, volvo, 5F tc, ovis, Fpddov, ῥό-
δον ; finally, it was also changed, at the beginning of some words, into a rough
breathing, which was indicated by a Spiritus asper ; 6. g. ἕσπερος, vesperus, Ev-
Pout, vestio,
8. In the Homeric poems, the character denoting the breathing F, no longer
exists; but it is very clear that in the time of Homer, many words were pro-
nounced with the digamma:; ; 6. g. ἀγνῦμι, évdave, ἔαρ (ver), the forms of ’EIAD ἢ
(video), ἔοικα, elua (vestimentum), Evvdus (vestio), εἰπεῖν, ἔκηλος, tog and ὅς (suus),
οὗ (sui), Eomepog (vesperus), alxog (vicus), οἷνος (vinum); this is obvious from
several facts: (4) words that have the digamma cause no hiatus; 6. g. xpd ἔϑεν
(== πρὸ FéSev); (Ὁ) henee also a vowel capable of elision, when placed before
such a word, cannot be elided; 6. g. λέπεν dé é (= dé Fe), instead of δ᾽ E; (c)
the » ἐφελκυστικόν is wanting before words which have the digamma; 6. g. daié
ol (= daié For), instead of daiév of ; (ἃ) ob instead of οὐκ is found before the
digamma; e.g. ἐπεὶ οὔ δ ϑ ἐν ἐστι χερείων (= οὔ Fever), instead of oby Eder ;
(6) in compounds neither &lision nor crasis takes place; 6. g. dıaeımäuev (=
δια ειπέμεν), instead of διειπέμεν, dayne, instead of ἀνζαγῆς ; (f) long vowels
are not shortened (4 190, 3) before words that have the digamma; e. g. κάλλεΐ
τε oTiABwy καὶ eluacı (= καὶ Γείμασι).
8 194. Change of Vowels.
Contraction.—Diaeresis.—Crasis.—Synizesis.—Apocope.
1. The Homeric language often varies in the use of contracted and uncon-
tracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse; e. g. ἀέκων and ἄκων.
The particular instances of contraction will be seen below, under the contract
declensions and conjagations. The contraction of 07 into takes place in the
verbs Body, to cry, and νοεῖν, to think; e. g. Bocas, instead of Bohcas, ἀγνώσα-
oxev, instead of ἀγνοήσασκεν ; 86 also, ὀγδώκοντα, instead of ὀγδοήκοντα.
2. Diaeresis is the separation of a diphthong into its vowels. The use of this
is not rare in Homer; it occurs most frequently in those words where the two
.
3
292 HOMERIC DIALECT.——CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [§ 195.
vowcls are separated by the digamma; 6. g. πάϊς, üürun, breath (from du),
ἐΐσκω, bixriuevoc, dic (6/ tg, ovis), ὀΐομαι (comp. opinor).
8. The use of crasis is limited to a fow cases, particularly: κἀγώ, τἄλλα, ob-
μός, οὔνεκα, ὥριστος, whTdc, instead of καὶ ἐγώ, τὰ ἄλλα, 6 ἐμός, ὁ ἄριστος, ὁ
αὐτός.
4. Synizesis, i. 6. the contraction of two vowels into one, which is perceptible
only in the pronunciation, but is not indicated by the form of the word, is of
very frequent occurrence:
(4) In the middle of words, most frequently in the following combination of
vowels: ea, eg, €Qt, Ef; £0, EOL, EOV; eu, ey ; e. g. στήϑεα͵ ἡμέας, Seo,
χρυσέοις, τεϑνεῶτι ; much more seldom in ae, ca, tat, ım, ty, 10; 6. g. aed
λεύων, πόλιας, πόλιος; 00 only in ὄγδοον ; vot only in daxpéece ; pri m
δηίοιο, δηΐων, δηίοισι, ἤια ;
{b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels: 7 a, 9 Ts
Seen SEE ee
ἢ ἢ, ἢ εἰ, ἢ OV, ἢ γοι; et OV; @ a, w Ov; the first word is one of the follow-
ing: m, ἢ, δή, un and ἐπεί, or a word with the inflection-endings ἢ, φὶ
e.g.7 ob, δὴ ἀφνειότατος, μὴ ἄλλοι, εἰλαπίνη ἠὲ γάμος, ἀσβέστῳ odd υἱόν.
δ. Elision ($ 6, 3) occurs very frequently, namely:
(a) The a in the Neut. Pl. and in the Acc. Sing. of the third Dec.; seldom
in the Aorist-ending -ca; 6. g. ἀλειψ᾽ ἐμέ; usually in the particle ἄρα;
(Ὁ) The e in the personal pronouns ἐμέ, με, σέ, etc.; in the Voc. of the second
Dec.; in the Dual of the third Dec.; in endings of the verb, and in par
ticles, 6. g. dé, τέ, τότε, etc. (but never in ἰδέ) ;
(c) The : in the Dat. PL of the third Dec. much more seldom in the Dat
Sing., and indeed only when the connection is such, that it could not be
mistaken for the Acc.; 6. g. χαῖρε δὲ τῷ ὄρνιϑ᾽ ᾿Οὐυσεύς ; im ἄμμι, bys
and σφι; in adverbs of place in “ϑι, except those derived from substan-
tives; in εἴκοσι; finally, in all the endings of the verb;
(d) The o in ἀπό and ὑπό (but never in πρό), in δύο, in Neut. pronouns (ex-
cept τύ), and in all endings of the verb;
. (e) ac in the endings of the verb, at, rat, σϑαε;
(f) o¢ in μοι, to me, and in the particle τοι.
6. Apocope (ἀποκοπῇ), i. e. the rejection of a short final vowel before a word
beginning with a consonant, occurs in the prepositions ἀνά, κατά, παρά, seldom
in ἀπό and ὑπό, and in the conjunction dpa.—'Ay before ß, m, 9, u, is changed
into du (ὁ 8,4); 6. g. ἂμ βωμοῖσι, ἂμ πέλαγος, ἂμ φόνον, ἀμμένω ; «x ar assimi-
lates its r to the following consonant, except that the rough mute is preceded
by the corresponding smooth; 6. g. κὰδ δύναμιν, κὰκ κεφαλῆς, κὰγ γόνυ, κὰκ
φάλαρα; examples οὗ ἀπό and ὑπό are ἀππέμψει, ὑββάλλειν, instead of ἀπο:
πόμψει, ὑποβάλλειν.
$195. Change of Consonants.
1. A and & remain before u (contrary to § 8, 2); e. g. Iduev, κεκορυϑμένοι,
imatead of ἔσμεν, κεκορυσμένος -
58.196, 197.] HOMERIC DIALECT.— FIRST DECLENSION. 398
. & The metathesis of p with a preceding vowel; occurs not unfrequently; e.g,
κραδίη, instead of καρδία, heart, κάρτερος and κράτερος, βάρδιστος (from βραδύς),
also in the second Aor.: ἔπραϑον, ἔδραϑον, ἔδρακον (from πέρϑω, capes
δέρκομαι).
3. In Homer consonants can be doubled, after short vowels, rg to the
necessities of the verse, in the following cases:
*(a) The liquids and o om the addition of the augment, when there are three
successive short syllables; 6. g. ἔλλαβον, ἔμμαϑον, ἔννεον, ἔσσευα; .
(0) In composition, also, the liquids and co are doubled; 6. g. νεόλλουτος (from
νέος and λούω);
(6) The σ in the inflection of the Dat. in σι, and of the Fut. and Aor. ; ; 9.8
ψέκυσσιν, φράσσομαι, κάλεσσα ; i
(ἃ) The o in the middle of several words; 6. g. ὅσσον, τόσσον, ὀπίσσω, eta,
Of the mutes, is doubled in the interrogatives which begin with ὁπ; ©. g.
ὅππως, ete.;—a in πέλεκκον, πελεκκάω ;—r in brri, érreo, Srrev;—é in éd-
δεισε, ἀδδεές, ἄδδην.
Remare. The doubling οὗ p, when the augment is prefixed and in composi-
tion ($ 8, 12), can be omitted, if the verse requires it; 6. g. ἔρεζον (from ῥέζω),
xpvaoöpvrog. For the same reason, though but seldom, one of the consonants,
which otherwise usually occur doubled, is omitted; e. g. Ὀδυσεύς, ᾿Αχιλεύς, φά-
ρυγος, instead of ᾽Οδυσσεύς, ᾿Αχιλλεύς, φάρυγγος.
DECLENSIONS.
§ 196. Suffixz me(s).
In addition to the marks for the Cases, the Homeric dialect has the sufüx
¢¢(v), which expresses the relation of the Dat, and in connection with prepo-
sitions, that of the Gen. This suffix i is always appended to the unchanged stem
of the word; e. g.
I. Dec. only in the Sing.: ἀγέληφι, ἀπὸ νευρῆφιν ;
IL Dec. in Sing. and Pl.; all these forms, without respect to the accentuation
of the Nom., are paroxytones (-6¢c): ϑεόφιν (for θεῶν), of the gods, dw’
ὀστεόφιν (for ὀστέων), of bones.
ΠῚ. Dec. almost exclusively in the Pl.: ὄρεσφι(ν), upon the mountains, ἐκ ork-
Seqge (comp. § 44), ναῦφι.
§197. First Declension.
1. Instead of the long a, 7 is used through all the Cases of the Sing.; 6. g.
Ilnveroneing, Πηνελοπείῃ from Πηνελόπεια, φρῃτρή, Bopenc, Βορέῃ, Βορέην.
Exceptions: Sed, goddess, -äs, -G, -dv; Ναυσικάα, Φεία; Αἰνείας, Αὐγείᾶς,
Ἑρμείας, and some other proper names in -ας pure. The Voc. of νύμφη is
vipga,
2. Substantives in -eıa and -o4a, derived from adjectives in -y¢ and -ovg,
and also some other feminines, change short a of the Attic dialect into 9; eg.
25*
994 HOMERIC DIALECT.—SECOND AND THIRD DEC. [§§ 198, 199.
ἀληθείη, avadein, εὐπλοίη, κνίσση, instead of ἀλήϑεια, ἀναίδεια, εὔπλοια,
aviood.
8. The Nom. Sing. of masculines, in a great number of words, have the end-
ing -& (like the Lat.), instead of -y¢, according to the necessities of the verte;
8. g.irréra, αἰχμητᾶ, μητίετα, εὐρύοπα. The Voc. retains in all these the
ending -d.
4. The Gen. Sing. of masculines has the following endings: - do, - (cot
tracted from -co) and - ew; the last ending -ew is always pronounced with syni-
wesis, and in relation to the accent, ὦ is considered short (ὁ 30, Rem. 2); ὃ ἢ.
Ἕρμείας, Gen. ‘Epueido and 'Epueiw ; Βορέης, Gen. Βορέαο and Bopéw; ’Arper
Onc, Gen. ’Arpeidao and ᾿Ατρείδεω.
δ. The Gen. Pl. of masculines and feminines, has the endings: - aw, - ὧν
and -£ov (έων is regularly pronounced with syrlizesis) ; 6. g. κλεσιάων, κλισιῶν,
+ αυλάων, πυλέων.
6. The Dat. PL: -yoı(v),-ns, -aeoc, and - αἱ ς (only in ϑεαῖς and ἀκταῖ();
©. δ. κλισίῃσι(ν), merpys πρὸς μεγάλῃσι.
8198. Second Declension.
1. Gen. Sing.: -ov and -οἱο; e.g. Guov, ὦ μοι ο from ὦμος, -6, shoulder.
‘9. Gen. and Dat. Dual: - 022» (instead of -o1v); e.g. ὥμοειν.
8. Dat. PL: -ocor(v) and-ot¢; e.g. ὥμοισεν, ὦμοις.
4. Attic Declension. Gen. Sing.: - Go, instead of -w; 6. g. Πηνελεῶο, from
Πηνέλεως. In γάλως, sister-in-law, "Adws and Kéc, the -w¢ produced by cor
traction, is resolved by 0; 6. g. γαλόως, ᾿Αϑόως, Köwg.
δ. Contracted forms of the second Dec., occur but seldom, viz. ν od ¢, usually
»voog, χειμάῤῥους and χειμάῤῥοος, Πάνϑους, Ilavdov, Πάνϑῳ. With those ἃ
-eoc, -eov, Homer either lengthens the e into εἰ, or employs synizesis, as the ἣν
ture of the verse requires; e. g. χρύσειος.
8199. Third Declension.
1. Dat. PL: -oı(v),-ocı({v),-eoı(v) and-ecor(v). The endings -e¢
and -εσσι; like the other Case-endings, are always appended to the pure stem;
e. g. κύν-εσσι (from κυών, Gen. κυν-ός), νεκύ-εσσε (from νέκυς, v-o¢), zeip-en.
ἄπ neuters, which have a radical o in the Nom. ($ 42, 1. and ὁ 44), this os
Gropped ; e. g. ἐπέ-εσσι (instead of ἐπέσ-εσσι, from τὸ ἔπος, instead of ἔπε)
δεπά-εσσιν (from τὸ δέπας) ; v is dropped in stems ending in av, ev, ov (§ 41);
6. g. βό-εσσι (instead of BoF-eoot, bov-ibus), imm7-ecot.—The ending -σσι 3
appended almost exclusively to stems, which end in a vowel; 6. g. νέκυ-σοι
Afrom νέκυς, v-o¢).
2. Gen. and Dat. Dual: - 922 (as in Dec. IL); 6. g. ποδοῖιν.
8. The Acc. Sing. of those in -vs, sometimes has the ending -a; 6. g. εὐρέε
πόντον, lydia, νέα, instead of εὑρύν, ly div, ναῦν.
4. The words γέλως, laughter, ἱδρώς, sweat, and ἔρως, love, which properly be
long to the third Dec., in particular Cases in Homer, are declined like the Attic
second Dec.: yéAw and γέλων, instead of γέλωτα, yéAy, instead of γέλωτι;
ἑδρῶ, ἱδρῷ, instead of ἱδρῶτα, ἱδρῶτι ; Ep, instead of ἔρωτι.
$199.] HOMERIC DIALEOT.— THIRD DECLENBION. 295
δ. Those in - ἐς, Gen. -ı doc, especially proper names, often have the inflee
tion - ἐος, etc., and in the Dat. always; e. g. unvıos, Θέτιος, Θέτι.
6. The neuter οὖς, ὠτός, ear ($ 39), in Homer has the form odag, οὔατος, PL
obara ; the neuters στέαρ, fat, ovdap, breast, and meipap, issue, have -ürog in the
Gen.: στέατος, οὔϑατα, πείρατα, πείρασι. In the neuters τέρας, κέρας and κρέας
($ 39), the r is dropped; 6. g. τέραα, -ἄων, -ἄεσσι ; Dat. κέρᾳ, PL κέρα, κεράων,
κεράεσσε and κέρασι ; Pl. κρέα, κρεάων, κρεῶν and κρειῶν, κρέασιν.
7. In the words mentioned under § 36, Homer can either retain or omit e, ag
fhe verse may require; 6. g. ἀνήρ, ἀνέρος and ἀνδρός, ἀνέρι and dvdpi, etc. (bus
only ἀνδρῶν, ἀνδράσι and ἀνδρέσσι) ; γαστήρ, -époc, -épe and γαστρός, yaorpi,
γαστέρα, γαστέρες ; Δημῆτηρ, -ητέρος and -nrpog, Δημητέρα ; Suyarnp, Svyaré-
ρος and θύγατρος, ete., ϑυγατέρεσσι, but ϑυγατρῶν; πατήρ and μήτηρ, -τέρος
and -τρος, etc.
8. The word ἰχώρ, blood of the gods, in the Acc. hia ἰχῶ, instead of ἰχῶρα, and
κυκεών, 6, mixed drink, in the Acc. has κυκεῶ or κυκειῶ.
9. To § 41* belong -avc, -εὖυς, τους. Of ypate, there occur in Homer only
Nom. γρηῦς, yontc, Dat. ypnt, and the Voc. γρηῦ and γρηύ. The word βοῦς
does not admit contraction, thus: βόες, βόας ; Dat. Pl. βό-εσσι, see No. 1.
10. § 43. In common nouns in - εὖ ς and in the proper name ᾿Αχιλλεύς, ἡ is
used instead of e, in all the forms in which v (F) of the stem is dropped; e. g.
βασιλεύς, Voc. -εὖ, Dat. PL -εῦσι (except ἀριστήεσσιν for ἀριστεύς), but Baor-
λῆος, ni, -ha, -ῆες, τῆας (a in the Acc. Sing. and PL is short). Among the
proper names, the following are to be specially noticed: ’Odvocetc, ᾿δυσσῆος
and Ὀδυσῆος and ᾿Οδυσσέος, also ’Odvocet¢ (contracted), Ὀδυσῆξ and ᾿Οδυσεὶῖ,
’Odvoona and ᾽Οδυσσέα, also ’Odvon ; Πηλεύς, Πηλῆος and -éoc, -ἣϊ and -&, Fa;
the others, as ᾿Ατρεύς, Τυδεύς, generally retain e, and contract -eo¢ in the Gen.
by synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Acc. into -7, thus: Τυδέος, -éi, -ξα and
“jj.
11. $42. -ncand-eg, Gen.-eoc. The Gen. Sing. remains uncontracted ;
the Nom. PL is -eec and -eıc ; the Gen. Pl. remains uncontracted (except when
the ending -ewv is preceded by a vowel, in which case contraction takes place;
e. g. ζαχρηῶν from ζαχρηέων, which is from ζαχρηῆς, impetuous), also the Acc.
Pl-eac. ‘Apne is thus declined: "Ἄρηος and -eoc, Dat. ᾿Αρηΐ, "Apy, "Apel, Ace.
"Apn and "Ἄρην ; Voc. "Ape and “Apes.
12. ὁ 42. Proper names in - «47 ¢ contract ee into 7; 6. δ. Ἡρακλέης, -κλῆος,
«ni, -3a, Voc. Ἡράκλεις ; but adjectives in -é7¢, have both εἰ and 7; eg.
ἀκλεής, ἀκληεῖς, ἀγακλῆος, but &ürAeiag (Acc. Pl.) from eixrene, &übßenc, Gen.
ἐνῤῥεῖος from ἐὐῤῥεῆς. So the forms duckAtä, ὑπερδέα, instead of -eéa, occur.
13. § 48. -o¢, Gen.-wog. In Homer the contracted forms fp» Dat., and
Μίνω Acc., occur. Of the words in -ὡς and -w, Gen. -do¢, only χρώς and its
compounds, are uncontracted : χροός, χροΐ, χρόα.
14. $44. (a) -ας, Gen. -αος; the Dat. Sing. is uncontracted or contracted,
according to the necessities of the verse; 6. g. γήραϊ and γήρᾳ. But the Nom.
and Acc. PL, are always contracted; 6. g. dera.—(b) -o¢, Gen. - eos; accord-
ing to the necessities of the verse, both the uncontracted and contracted forms
* These numbers refer to the sections in the first part of the Grammar. — Te.
%
266 HOMEBIO DIALEO?T.— ANOMALOUS WoRDs. [§ 260.
are used, {except in the Gen. Pl. which always remains uncontracied, also in
the Gen. Sing., except in some substantives, which contract -eo¢ into -εὺς ; e.g,
Epeßevs, ϑάρσευς,) Dat. ϑέρεϊ and ϑέρει, κάλλεϊ and κάλλει ; Nom. and Acc.
plurals in -ea, commonly remain unconsracted, but must be pronounced wih
synizesis; e. g. νείκεα, PédAea-—Im σπέος, κλέος, δέος, χρέος, ε is sometimes
Jengthened into εἰ, sometimes into 7, thus: Gen, σπείους, Dat. σπῆϊ, Acc. σπέος
and oreios, Gen. Pl. σπείων, Dual σπέσσε and σπήεσσι; χρέος and χρεῖος;
κλέὰ and κλεῖα.
15. $45. -ἰς, Gen. -ζος; -ῦς, Gen. -ὕος. The Dat. Sing. is contracted;
6. g. dilvi, mAndvi, véxve; the Acc. Pl, as the verse may require, is sometimes
uncontracted, sometimes, and indeed more commonly, contracted; 6. g. Ixdis,
instead of ἰχϑύας, δρῦς ; the Nom. Pl. never suffers contraction, but is pre
nounced with synizesis; 6. g. ἰχϑύες (dissyllable). The Dat. Pi. ends in -ten
and -veoo: (dissyllable) ; 6. g. ἰχϑύσσιν and ἰχϑύεσσιν.
16. 446. -i¢ and -i, Gen. -Zog (Att. -ews); - ὕς and - ὕ, Gen. -vog (At
~ewc). (a) Words in - ἐς retain the ¢ of the stem through all the Cases, and
are always contracted in the Dat. Sing.; and sometimes in the Acc. Pl; eg
πόλις, -ἰος, -I, Pl. -ceg, -ἰων, -ıcı, -tcag and -ἰς. The Dat. Sing. has also the
endings -ei and -e:; 6. g. πόσεϊ and πόσει, from πόσις ; in some words the οἱ
the stem is changed into e in other Cases also; 6. g. ἐπάλξεις (Acc.), ἐπάλξε
σιν, especially in πόλις, which, moreover, as the verse requires, can lengthen!
into 7, thus: Gen. πόλίος, πόλεος and πόληος, etc, and in dic, ovis, Dat P
dlecaty, οἴεσιν, deotv.—(b) Words in -ög, which in the Attic Gen. end in -eug,
have -eo¢, and in the Dat. Sing. both the uncontracted and contracted forms;
e. g. εὑρέϊ, πήχει, πλατεῖ; in the other Cases, the uncontracted forms are com
monly used, though these are generally to be pronounced with synizesis.
§ 200. Anomalous Words (Comp. § 47).
1. Τόνυ (τὸ, knee) and döpv (rd, spear):
Sing. | γούνατος and γουνός _ δούρατος and δουρός, dobparı and δουρί
PLN. | γούνατα and γοῦνα dotpara and δοῦρα; Dual δοῦρε
6. | γούνων ᾿ δούρων
D. | γούνασι (-σσι) and γούνεσσι δοῦρασι and δούρεσσι.
2. Κάρα (τὸ, head).
Sing. N. κάρη Gen. κάρητος Kapharog κρατός κράατος
Dat. κάρητι καρήατι κρατί κράατι
Acc. κάρη (κρᾶτα, Mase, Od. 8, 92).
Plur. N. κάρα καρήατα (and κάρηνα)
G. κράτων ( “ καρήνων) ©
D. κρασί
A. κράατα ( “ κἀρηνα).
3. Ναῦς (7, ship): £
Sing. N. νηῦς Plur. νῆες and νέες
6. νηός and νεός νηῶν and νεῶν
Ὁ. νηΐ er νηυσί, νήεσσι, yeeros
A. νῆα and νέα νῆας and νέας.
4. Χείρ (ἡ, hand), Dat. χερί, Ace. χέρα, Dat. Pl. χοίρεσιν and χεέροσαιν.
§$ 201—208.] HOMERIC DIALECT.—ADJECTIVES.—PRONOUNS. 397
§ 201. Adjectives.
1. The adjectives βαϑύς and ὠκύς have sometimes the feminine form - 4
or -é9: Baden, βαϑέην, ὠκέα. Some adjectives in -ὕς are also of common
gender; 6. g. "Hoy ϑῆλυς ἐοῦσα, ἡδὺς ἀϑτμή.
2. Adjectives in -ἥἧεες, -feoea, as v chi beein In tha Aueh Finn:
“ὅς, -Gooa, -ἣν; 6. g. τιμῇς; those in -όεις, -ὄεσαα, -ὅεν contract 08
inte ev;-e. g. πεδία λωτεῦντα.
8. Πολύς (§ 48) is thus inflected:
Nom. Sing. πολύς and πουλύς; πολύ; and πολλός, πολλόν ; Gen. moAbog;
Ace. πολύν and πουλύν ; --- Nom. Pl. πολέες and πολεῖς; Gen. πολέων ;
Dat. πολέσι, πολέσσι and πολέεσσι; Acc. πολέας and πολεῖς.
8 202. Comparison.
1. The endings -ώτερος and -ὥτατος are sometimes used, although the vowel
of the preceding syllable is long [comp. $ 50, I. (a)]; 6. g. ὀϊζορώτατος, kaxofer-
varepoc. Adjectives im-f¢ and -pos, have the Comparative in -iwv and -corog,
though sometimes also the regular form; 6. g. γλυκύς, γλυκίων; βαϑύς, Ba
ϑιστος ; οἷκτρος οἴκτιστος and οἰκτρότατος.
2. Anomalous forms (ὁ 52).
ἀγαϑός, Com. ἀρείων, λωΐων and λωΐτερος, Sup. κάρτιστος
κακός, Com. κακώτερος, χειρότξρος, χερείων, χερειότερος, Sup. ἥἧκιστος
ὀλίγος, Com. ὀλέζων ;--ῥηΐδιος, Com. ῥηΐτερος, Sup. ῥήϊστος and ῥηΐτατος
βραδύς, Com. βράσσων, Sup. βάρδιστος ;---τΊ α κρό ς, Com. μάσσων
παχύς, Com. πάσσων. :
§ 203. Pronouns.
1. Sing. Nom. | ἐγώ, ees a vowel, ἐγών | σύ, τύνη
Gen. | ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, ped (μευ) σέο, σεῦ (σευ) | £0, εὖ (eb)
ἐμεῖο, ἐμέϑεν σεῖο, σέϑεν, τεοῖο | elo, ἔϑεν
Dat. | éuoi, μοι coi, Tot, Tety éoi, dl (ol)
Acc. | ἐμέ, με σέ (ce) Ee, E (£), μιν
Dual Nom. | vai σφῶϊν, σφῶϊ, σφώ
6. and D. | vöiv σφῶϊν, σφῷν σφωΐν (σφωϊν)
Acc. | vai and νώ σφῶϊ and σφῴ | σφωέ (σφωεὴ
Plur. Nom. | ἡμεῖς, ἄμμες ὑμεῖς, ὕμμες
Gen. | ἡμέων, ἡμείων ὑμέων, ὑμείων σφέων (σφεων), σφῶν
(odav), σφείων
Dat. | ἡμῖν, ἡμῖν, ἄμμι(ν) ὑμῖν, ὕμμι(ν) σφίσι(ν) ἜΝ v)],
σφί(ν N
Acc. | ἡμέας, quar, ἄμμε ὑμέας, ὄμμε σφέας ἰ σφεας), σφᾶς
(σφας), σφε.
2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ete,
never occur in Homer; instead.of thom, he nses the personal pronouns, and
the pronoun αὐτός separately; 6. g. Eu’ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, ἐμεῦ αὐτῆς, ὃ αὐτὴν,
οἱ αὐτῇ.
8. Possessive pronouns: τεός, -ἦ, -ὄν, instead of σός ; ἐός, -ἦ, -dv and ὅς, #,
298 HOMERIC DIALECT.--NUMERALS.-—VEnBS. [§§ 204, 205.
ὄν, suus, -a,-um; ἀμός, -7, -6v, instead of ἡμέτερος ; νωΐτερος, -4, -ον, of us both ;
ὑμός, -#, -όν, instead of ὑμέτερος; agutrepoc, = “ον, of you both ; σφός, 4, -@9,
instead of σφέτερος.
4. Demonstrative pronouns: τοῖο and rev, instead of rod; τοί and rai, in-
stead of of and al; τόων, instead of τῶν; τοῖσι, instead of τοῖς ; ταῖσι, τῦσι
and τῆς, instead of ταῖς ;—dde Dat. Pl. roicdeo: and roicdeco:, instead of TVicde.
5. Relative pronouns: 5, instead of ὅς; οἷο, ὅσυ instead of od, ἕης instead
of ἧς, Foe and gc instead of αἷς,
6. Indefinite and intcrrogative pronouns: (a) Gen. τέο, τεῦ, instead of τινός;
Dat. τέῳ, τῷ, instead of τινί; Pl. dooa, instead of rıv& ; Gen. τέων, instead of
τινῶν ; Dat. τέοισι, instead of τισί ;—(b) Gen. τέο, τεῦ, instead of τένος.
{c) ὄετις : Sing. Nom. ὅτις, Neut. ὅτι, ὅττι Plar. ὄὅτενα
Gen. ὄτευ, ὅτεο, ὅττεο, Srrev ὅτεων
Dat. ὅτεῳ, ὅτῳ : ᾿ς ῥτέόοισι
Acc. ὄτινα, Neut. ὅτι, ὅττι ὄτινας, ἅτινα and ἄσσε.
ὃ 204. Numerals.
The collateral form of μία is ia, Ins, ἴῃ, lav, and of évi, the form ἑῷ. Ate,
δύω are indeclinable ; collateral forms of these are δοιώ, dosoi, δοιαΐ, dora, ete.
Πίσυρες, -a, instead of τέσσαρες, -c. Avddexa and δυοκαίδεκα and δώδεκα.
"Eeixoot, instead οὗ εἴκοσι. ᾿Ογδώκοντα and ἐννήκοντα, instead of dydoge.,
ἐνενῆκ. '᾽Ἐννεάχιλοι and δεκάχιλοι, instead οὗ ἐννακιςχίλιοι and μύριοι. The
endings -ἄκοντα and -ακόσιοι become -ἤκοντα, -ηκόσιοι. Ordinals: rpirarer,
γέτρατος, ἐβδόματος, ὀγδόατος, ἕνατος and elvaroc.
Tax VERB.
§ 205. Augment.—Reduplication.
1. The augment is prefixed or omitted, as the verse requires; 6. g. λῦσε, H+
σαν, ὁρᾶτο, ἔλε. In the Perf. the temporal augment is omitted only in single
words; e. g. ἄνωγα.
2. Words which have the digamma, always take the syllabic angment; eg
dydavw, Eddov; εἴδομαι, ἐεισάμην, and also in the Part. ἐεισάμενος. Thee
seems to be lengthened‘on account of the verse, in εἰοικυῖα and sbade (ἢ abe
from üvdavo).
8. The verbs olvoyoéw and dvdava, take the syllabic and temporal augmest
at the same time, viz. ἐῳνοχόει, yet more frequently gvoy., ἑήνδανε and ἥνδανε.
4. The reduplication of p occurs in ῥερυπωμένος from ῥυπόω, to make Μὲ
On the contrary, the Perfects ἔμμορα from μείρομαι, and ἔσσυμαι from atte,
are formed according to the analogy of verbs beginning with p.—Krdopaz makes
ὄκτημαι in the Perf.
δ. The second Aor. Act. and Mid. also, frequently takes the reduplicatics;
this remains through jl the modes, also in the Inf. and Part. The simple au
ment e is but seldom prefixed to this in the Ind.; thus, 6. g. κάμνω, to becom
weary, second Aor. Subj. κεκάμω ; ¢éAopat, to mad. ide; λαγχάνυ,
$206.] HOMERIO DIALECT.—VERBS. 299
to obtain, λέλαχον; λαμβάνω, to receive, λελαβέσϑαι ; φράζω, to say, πέφραδον,
ἐπέφραδον.
6. The following are examples of the Homeric Perfects with the Attic redu-
plication ({ 89); e. g. ἀλάομαι, to wander, ἀλ-άλημαι ; ᾿ΑΧΩ (ἀκαχίζω)͵ to grieve,
ἀκ-ἤχεμαι, ἀκ-άχημαι ; ἐρείπω, to demolish, ip-épirro; ἐρίζω, to contend, ἐρ-ἦρισε
7. Homeric Aorists with the Attic reduplication ($ 89, Rem.): ἀλέξω, to ward
off, RA-aAxov, ἀλεαλκεῖν, ἀλαλκών ; ἐν-ίπτω, to chide, Ev-Evinov ; bp-vupt, to em
cite, Sp-ope ; and with the reduplication in the middle: épixw, to restrain, hpb-
wa-xoy, Inf. ἐρνκακέειν and ἐνέπτω, ἠνΐ-πα-πεν.
8206. Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.
1. First Pers. Sing. Act: Several subjunctives have the ending -w; e.g.
κτείνωμι, instead of xreivy, ἐϑέλωμι, ἴδωμι, τύχωμι, ἴκωμι, ἀγάγωμι.
2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. The ending -σϑα ($$ 187 and 148), occurs in
the second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -μὲ; 6. g. τέϑησϑα, διδοῖσϑα ; also fre-
quently in the Subj. of other verbs; e. g. ἐϑέλῳσϑα, Ange, more seldom in
the Opt.; 6. g. κλαίοισϑα, βάλοισϑα.
8. Third Pers. Sing. Act. The Subj. sometimes has the ending -oı{v); 6. g.
ξϑέλῃησι(ν), ἄγῃσι, ἀλάλκῃσι, δῴησι (instead of δῷ), weDiyor; the Opt. only in
παραφϑαίησι.
4. Personal-endings of the Plup. Active:
First Pers. Sing. -ea (so always); e. g. πεποίϑεα, ἐτεϑήπεα, ὕδεα, in-
stead of ἐπεποίϑειν, etc.
Second “ & -ea¢; eg ἐτεϑήπεας, instead of ἐτεϑήπεις
Third “ © -ee(v); e.g. ἐγεγόνεε, καταλελοίπεε, ἐβεβρώκεεν.
Rem. 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in εἰ, and also the same Pers. of
the Impf. in εἰ, occurs in Homer before a vowel, with » ἐφελκυστικόν ; ἑστή-
xeıv, βεβλήκειν, ἤσκειν, Impf. from doxéw. Comp. ὁ 143.
5. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses, Act. and Mid.
are sometimes exchanged for each other: -rov and -odo v, instead of -τὴν
and -σϑην ; 6. g. διώκετον, ϑωρήσσεσθϑον, instead of διωκέτην, ϑωρησσέσϑην.
6. The second Pers. Sing. Mid. appears either in the uncontracted form, -eas,
nat, -80, -a0; 6. g. λείπεαι, AcAaieat, ἀφίκηαι, ἐρύσσεαι, ἐπαύρηαι, ὑπελύσαο,
ἐγείναο, or in the contracted form - ἢ (from -eat, -ηαι), -ev (from -e0), - ὦ
(from -ao); 6. g. ἀφίκῃ, ἔπλευ, Epxeb, éxpéuw. The endings -eeaı and -co are
also lengthened into - εἰ α ἐ and - <0, or one e is dropped; 6. g. μυϑεῖαι, veias,
ἔρειο, σπεῖο ;—pvdéae (instead of μυϑέεαι), πωλέαι, ἔκλεο, ἐπώλεο.----Τὰ the
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., σ is sometimes dropped, viz. μέμναι (and μέμνῳ,
formed from pépve-c-ar), BeßAnaı, Eoovo.
ἢ. The first Pers. Dual and Pl. Mid. ends in -μεσϑὸν and -μεϑον, -ueoda
and -zeda; 6. g. φραζόμεσϑα and -ueda.
8. The third Pers. Pl. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., and Opt. Mid. has
the ending -araı, -aro, instead of -vraı, -vro; 6. g. ἀκηχέαται, πεφοβήατο,
ἐστάλατο, Terpädaraı, ἀρησαίατο, γενοίατο.
800 HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. [$ 207.
9. The third Pers. Pl. Aor. Pass. has the ending - ev (instead of -noav); e.g.
τράφεν, instead of ἐτράφησαν.
10. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. ὦ and 7, are frequently shorten-
ed into e and o, as the verse may require; 6. g. ἴομεν, instead of ἴωμεν, arp&
φεται, instead of στρέφηται.
11. The Inf. Act. has the endings -ἔμεναι, -ἐμεν and -eıv (e being the
mode-vowel and -weva: the ending); 6. g. τυπτέμεναι, τυπτέμεν, τύπτειν ; verbs
in -Gw and -&w have -ἥμεναι (the ἡ arising from the contraction of the mode
vowel e and the final vowel of the stem); 6. g. γοήμεναι (yoaw), φιλήμεναι (p-
λέω); with the ending -ἥμεναι, that of the Pass. Aorists corresponds; 6. g. ™
πήμεναι, instead of τυπῆναι. In the Pres. of verbs in -, the endings -peva:
and -μὲν are appended immediately to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in
the second Aor. to the pure stem; 9. g. τεϑέ-μεναι, τιϑέ-μεν ; ἱστά-μεναι; dr
δό-μεναι ; deixvb-pevar; ϑέ-μεν, 66-uevas; there is an exception in the case of
the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in a and v, which, as in the Ind., retain the
long vowel ; 6. g. στή-μεναι, Öb-uevar.
12. The Impf. and Aor. Ind. take the endings -oxov, -e¢, -e(v), in the Mid
«σκόμην, -ov (-e0, -ev), -ero, when a repeated action is to be denoted ; hence this
is called the Zerative form ; it regularly omits the augment; 6. g. dcveb-e-cxmy,
Boox-é-cxovro, vıra-anouev, καλέ-ε-σκε, ἐλάσ-α-σκεν, δό-σκε, δύ-σκε, στά-σκε.
Rem. 2. In verbs in -ὠ, the mode-vowel of the Ind. is used before these end
ings; in those in -ἄ , -ἄεσκον is abridged into -aoxov, which as the vers
may require, can be lengthened into -Gacxov ; e.g. ναιετάασκον ; those in -t#
have -£eoxov, seldom -εσκον (e.g. καλέσκετο), also -eieonov (e.g. vr
κείεσκον) ; in verbs in -μὲ the mode-vowel is omitted.
8207. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs.
1. A. Verbs in -@o. In these, the uncontracted form occurs only in single
words and forms; 6. g. mepaov, κατεσκίαον ; always in tAde and those vers
which have a long a for their charaeteristic; ce. g. διψάων, πεινἄάων, Expae (from
xpä-w, to attack). In some verbs, a is changed into e, viz. uevoiveoy, from μὲ
voivaw, ἤντεον, from ἀντάω, ὁμόκλεον, from ὁμοκλάω.
9. Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, there is a resolution d
the contracted syllable, by a similar vowel, ἃ (a) being resolved into de (4)
or aa (dg), and © into ow or ww; e. g. ὁράασϑαι (instead of ὁρᾶσϑαι) ; μενον
vde (instead of uevorvg); ὁρόω (instead of ὁρῶ) ; δρώωσι (instead of δρῶσι).
Remark. In the Dual-forms, προςαυδήτην, συλήτην, συναντήτην, φοιτήτην
(from verbs in -aw), ae is contracted into:7, and in ὁμαρτήτην and ἀπειλήτη
(from verbs in -éw), ee is contracted into 7, instead of into et.
3. When vr comes after a contracted syllable, the short vowel may follow
such contracted syllable; e. g. ἡβώοντο, instead of ἡβῶντα, yeAwevreg ; in the
Opt. also, the protracted w 0 4, instead of ῳ is found in ἡβώοιμι, instead of ἠβύ'
ope (= ἡβῷμι).
4. B. Verbs in -é. Contraction does not take place in all the forms it
which e is followed by the vowels o, w, 7, 7, οἱ and ov; e. g. φιλέωμεν, φιλέοιμ,
etc.; yet such forms must commonly be pronounced with synizesis. In others
§ 208. _ HOMERIC DIALECT.—VERBS. 801
contraction is omitted or takes place, as the verse may require; 6. g. φιλέει;
ἐρέω, ὀτρυνέουσα ; alpedunv, yévev. Sometimes € is lengthened into et; 6. g:
ἐτελείετο, μιγεΐῃ (instead of uty7, second Aor. Pass.).
5. C. Verbs in -öw. These follow either the common rules of contraction,
6. g. γουνοῦμαι, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into w, so that the
forms of verbs in -dw resemble those of verbs in -ἄω ; e. g. idpdovrat, idpaovea,
ὑπνώοντας (comp. ἡβώοντα) ; or they become wholly analogous to verbs in -ἄω,
since they resolve -οὔσι (third Pers. Pl. Pres.) into - ὅω σι, -oüvro into - ων το,
-oiev into - τόφεν; 6. g. (ἀρό-ουσι) ἀροῦσι ἀρόω σι (comp. opowot) ; (δηϊόοντο)
δηϊοῦντο δηϊόωντο (comp. ὁρόωντο); ( δηϊόοιεν) Önieiev δηϊόῳ εν (comp.
δρόφεν).
x
§ 208. Formation of the Tenses.
1. The Attic Fut. (§ 83) occurs in. verbs in -ἰζω ; e. g. χτεριοῦσι. In eee
in -éw, the ending -é« is often used instead of “ἔσω ; 6. g. κϑρέεις, instead of
κορέσεις, μαχέονται, instead of μαχέσονται ; in verbs in -ἄω, after dropping 0, a
corresponding short vowel is placed before the vowel formed by contraction ;
© g. ἀντιόω, ἐλόωσι, danäg; of verbs in “ὕω, ἐρύουσι and Tavbevas occur.
2. The following liquid verbs form the Fut. and first Aor. with the ending
-ow and-oa: xeipw, to shear off (xEpoa:), κέλλω, to land (xéAcat), εἴλω, te press
(ἐλσαι), κύρω, to fall upon (κύρσω), "APR (dpapiaru), to fit (peat), ὄρινυμε (ὄρ.
ou, pea), to excite, διαφϑείρω, to destroy (διαφϑέρσαι), φύρω, to mix (φύρσω).
8. The following verbs form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic 0: Béo-
μαι or Beioua: (second Pers. Béy), 1 shall live, δήω, I shall find, κείω or κέω, I
shall lie.down.
4. The following form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic o : ER
to pour out, Exeva; σεύω, to put in motion, ἔσσευα ; ἀλέομαι and ἀλεύομαι, to
avoid, ZAcvaro, ἀλευώμενος, ἀλέασϑαι ; καίω, to burn, ἔκηα and Execa.
5. The endings of the second Aor. are sometimes exchanged with those of
the first Aor.: βαίνω, to go, ἐβήσετο, Imp. βήσεο ; dbopat, to plunge into, ἐδύσετο,
Imp. δύσεο, Part. dvoöuevog ; üyw, to lead, üfere, ἀξέμεν ; lxvéouat, to come,
lEov ; ἐλέγμην, I laid myself down to sheep, Imp. λέξο, Aéfeo; Spvupt, to incite,
Imp. öpoeo(ev) ; φέρω, to bear, oloe, ologuevar; ἀείδω, to sing, Imp. deiceo.
6. In the first Aor. Pass. of some verbs, ν is prefixed before the ending -dy»,
as the verse may require, viz. diaxpivdjre, κρινϑείς, ἐκλίνϑη (§ 111, 6), ἱδρύν-
ϑην (from ἰδρύω),. ἀμπνύνϑη (from πνέω).
7. Several second Aorists, in order to make a dactyl, are formed by a trans-
position (metathests) of the consonants; 6. g. ἔδρακον, instead of ἔδαρκον (from
δέρκομαι), ἔπραϑον (from πέρϑω), Eöpador (from δαρϑάνω), ἤμβροτον, instead
of ἥμαρτον (from ἁμαρτάνω). In like manner, on account of the metre, a vowel
of the stem is dropped ; 6. g. ἀγρόμενος, from üyepöunv (üyeipw, to assemble); Ey-
pero, from éyepouny (Eyeipw, to awaken) ; πέφνον, ἔπεφνον (SENQ, to put to death).
8. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs as
assume e ($ 124) in forming the tenses, or are subject to metathesis; e. g. χαίρω
κεχάρηκα (from XAIPEQ); βάλλω βέβληκα (from BAA-). Besides these, he
forms only second Perfects; but even in pure verbs.and in the impure verbs
jast mentioned, he rejects the « in single persons and modes, and regularly in
26
802 HOMERIC DIALEOT.—— TERBR. [88 209, 210,
the Part.; thus these forms become analogous to those of the second Perf.; e.g.
κεκμηώς, from κώμνω ; κεχαρηῶς, from χαίρω, βεβάώς, from Baive (BAD).
§ 209. Conjugation in -pe.
1. Even in Homer, the forms of -é and -öw (§ 130, Rem. 3) occur in the
second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf.; e. g. ἐτίϑει, διδοῖς, dedot.—Also
a reduplicated Fut. of didwyt occurs: διδώσομεν and διδώσειν.
2. Verbs in -vyze form an Opt. both in the Act. and Mid.; 6. g. ἐκδῦμεν (in-
stead of ἐκδυίημεν), from ἐκδύω, φύη (instead of vin), from φύω ; δαινῦτο; so
also φϑῖο, φϑῖτο, Opt. of ἐφϑίμην, from φϑίω.
3. The third Pers. Pl. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-cav, -7-Fav, -ο-σαν, -w-647,
-v-cay, is shortened into -ev, -dy, -ov, -iv; e.g. Eridev, instead of ἐτίϑεσαν,
dev, instead of ἔϑεσαν , Eorüv, instead of ἔστησαν . ἔδιδον, instead of ἐδίόο.
ee» ; Sdov, instead of ἔδοσαν ; E¢iv, instead of ἐφῦσαν.
4. In the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. antl second Aor. Mid., Homer rejects
#, end uses the uncontracted form ; e. g. δαίνυρ (inatead of daivuco), μάρνω,
φάο, σύνϑεο, ἔνϑεο.
5. The short stera-vowel is lengthened before the personal-endings beginning
with g and v, as the varve may require; 6. g. τεϑήμενος, διδοῦναι (instead αἱ
ὁιδόναι), δίδῳθι, ἴληϑι.
6. In the ϑρορμὰ Aor. Bubj., the following forms gre used, as the verse ns]
require :
contracted: . resolved and lengthened forms:
Sing. 1. orö oréw, στείω
2. ori 7
9. στῇ orig, ἐμβήῃ, φήῃ, φϑήρ
Dual στῆτον i Se ns
Plar. 1. στῶμεν στέωμεν, στείομεν, καταβείομει
2. στῆτε ornere
3. στῶσι(ν)] “ στέωσι(ν), περιστηωσι(ν)
Sing. 1. ϑῶ ϑέω, ϑείω, δαμείω
2. tic ϑέῃς, ϑήῃς, dein
8. 9 dig, ϑήῃ, avin, medeig
Dual δϑϑῆτον ϑείετον
Plur. 1. ϑῶμεν ϑέωμεν, ϑείομεν
2. ϑῆτε δαμείετε
8. ϑῶσι(ν) ϑέωσι(ν), ϑείωσι(ν)
Bing. 3. δῷ δώῃσι(ν), δώῃ
Plur. 1. δῶμεν δώομεν
8. ὀῶσι(ν) δώῳσι(ν).
Remanx. Instead of ἔστησαν (Aor. I.), the shortened form ἔστασαν gost
and instead of fordre (Perf.), the lengthened form ἔστητε.
§ 210. Εἰμί (EZ-), to be.
Pres. Ind. | 2. foot. Pl. 1. εἰμέν. 8. Eaoıfv)
Subj. | 1. μετεΐω. 3. by, byor(y), ἡσι(ν), ely. Pl. 3. ἔωσι(ν)
Imp. | 2 2000. Inf. ἔμμεναι, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν. Part. ἐών, dodo.
Impf. Ind. | 1. ἔα, ha, Eov, ἔσκον. 2. Enoda. 3. ἔην, hev, ἤην. Dual 8. fore
PL 3. ἔσαν, elaro (instead of }vro, from Aumo).—Opt. 2 bot
8. fo. PL 2. elre. 8. elev.
. Fat. Ind. | 1. ἔσομοι (ἔσσομαι), ete. 3. ἔσεται and ἐσεῖται.
—
%
§§ 211, 212.) HOMERIC DIALEOT.——VERBS. 808
§ 211. Εἶμι (T-), to go.
Pres. Ind. | 2. eioda. Subj. 2. ἴγσϑα. Inf. ἴμεναι, I ἵμεν.
Impf. Ind. | 1. ia, ἤϊον. 2. Tee. 8. pe le(v). PL1.gopev. 8. ἤζσαν, ἦσαν,
ἤϊον, toav.—Opt. ἴοι, ein.
Fut. Ind. | 1. εἴσομαι. Aor. Ind. 3. eisaro and ἐείσατος Dual 3. ἐεισάσϑην.
‘VERBS IN -0, WHICH IN THE SECOND Aor. Act. ann MiD. ın THE Pkn#.
AND Pıur. Act., AND Pres. ann IMpr., BOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VERBB
IN «μι.
§ 212. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. (Comp. § 142).
A. The Characteristic is a Vowel: a, ¢, s; 6, wv.
βάλλω, to throw, second Aor. Act. (BAA-, ἔβλην) ξυμβλήτην, Inf. ξυμβλήμεναι
(instead of -ἤναι) ; second Aor. Mid. (ἐβλήμην) ἔβλητο, ξύμβληντο, Subj.
ξύμβληται, βλήεται, Opt. βλεῖο (from BAE-), Inf. βλῆσϑαι, Part. βλήμενος.
Hence the Fut. βλήσόμαι.
yupéw or γηράσκω, to grow old, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Bing. ἐγήρᾶ, Part.
ynpas.
κτείνω, to kill, second Aor. Act. ἔκτᾶν, Pl. Exräuev, third Pers. Pl. Exriv, Subj.
Pl. κτέωμεν, Inf. κτάμεναι, Kräner, Part. κτάς ; second Aor. Mid. with pas-
sive sense, ἀπέκτατο, κτάσϑαι, κτάμενος.
οὐτάω, to wound, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Sing. obra, Inf. ebrépevat, obré-
μὲν; second Aor. Mid. obräuzvog, wounded.
πελάζω, to approach, second Aor. Mid. ἐπλήμην, πλῆτο, πλῆντο.
πλήϑο (πίμπλημι), to fil, second Aor. Mid. ExAgro, Opt. πλείμην (from ITAE-),
Imp. ARCO.
πτήσσω, to skrink-with fear, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Dual xaramrpryy.
φθάνω, to anticipate, second Aor. Mid. φϑάμενος.
Remark. From ἔβην come the forms βάτην (third Pers. Dual), and ὑπέρ-
Bäsav (third Pers. Pl.), with a short stem-vowel.
AAQ, Epic stem of διδάσκω, to teach, second Aer. Act. (AAE-) ἐδάην, I learned,
Sabj. δαείω, Inf. δαήμεναι.
φϑί-νω, to destroy and vanish, second Aor. Mid. ἐφϑήμην, Opt. gbluny, φϑῖτο,
Imp. φϑίσϑω, Inf. φϑίσϑαι, Part. φϑίμενος.
βιβρώσκω, to eat, second Aor. Act. ὄβρων.
πλώω, to swim, second Aor. Act. ἔπλων, Part. πλώς, Gen. -ὥντος.
κλύω, to hear, second Aor. Act. Imp, «Aids, κλῦτε, κέκλῦϑι, κέκλῦτε.
Abo, to loose, second Aor. Mid. λύτο, λύντο.
avéw, to breathe, second Aor. Mid. (IINY-) ἄμπνῦτο, instead of ἀνέπνϑτο, he
took breath.
σεύω, to put in motion, second Aor. Mid. ἐσσύμην, I strove, ἔσσνο, ebro
xtw, to pour, second Aor. Mid. χύντο, χύμενος.
B. The Characteristic is a Consonant.
ὅλλομαι, to leap, second Aor. Mid. ἄλσο, dAro, ἑπάλμενος, ἐπιάλμενος, Subj.
ἄληται.
ἀραρίσκω (᾿ΑΡΏ), to fit, second Aor. Mid. ἄρμενος, fitted to.
γέντο, to seize, arising from F£Aro (from EAziv, second Aor. of alp&o).
804 HOMERIC DIALECT.— VERBS. [88 218, 214.
δέχομαι, to take, second Aor. Mid. ἔδεκτο, Imp. δέξο, Inf. döxda: ; the first Pen.
ἐδέγμην and the Part. δέγμενος, like the Perf. δέδεγμαι, signify to expect.
ἐλελίζω, to wharl, second Aor. Mid. ἐλέλεκτο.
ἐκνέομαι, to come, second Aor. Mid. ixro, Ixuevog and txpevoc, favorable.
Aéyopat, to lie dawn, select, to count over, second Aor. Mid. ἐλέγμην, ἔλεκτο, λέκτο,
μιαίνω, to soil, μιάνϑην (third Pers. Dual, instead of ἐμιών-σϑην).
μίγνομε, to mir, second Aor. Mid. μέκτο.
bpvijt, to excite, second Aor. Mid. ὦρτο, Imp. öpoo, ὄρσεο, Inf. 5pdaı, Part. ip
μενος.
wéAAw, to brandish, hurl, second Aor. Mid. πάλτο, he sprang.
wépOw,'to destroy, second Aor. Mid. πέρϑαι, instead of πέρϑ-σϑαι.
«ἡγνῦμι, to make firm, to fix, second Aor. Mid. πῆκτο, κατέπηκτο.
§ 218. (2) Perf. and Plup. Active.
(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel.
γίγνομαι, to become, Perf. Pl. γέγᾶμεν, -üre, «ἀἄσι(ν), Inf. yeyäpev, Part. yeyais;
Plup. éxyeyarny. |
Baivw, to go, Perf. Pl. βέβαμεν, etc.; Plup. βέβασαν.
δείδω, to fear, Inf, δειδίμεν, instead of δειδιέναι, Imp. δείδιϑι, δείδιτε; Plup.
ἐδείδιμεν, ἐδείδισαν.
ἔρχομαι, to come, εἰλήλουθμεν.
ϑνήσκω, to die, Perf. PL τέϑναμεν, Teivası, Imp. a Inf. τεϑνάμεν and
. τεϑνάμεναι, Part. τεϑνηώς, -ὥτος, τεϑνεῶτε ; Plup. Opt. redvainy.
TAAAQ, to dare, Perf. Pl. τέτλαμεν, Imp. τέτλαϑι, Inf. τετλάμεν, Part. τετληύς.
MAR, to desire, Perf. PL. μέματον, -äuev, -üre, «ἀἄσι, Imp. Ei Part. μεμαώᾳ
en and -ότος ; Piup. μέμασαν.
(Ὁ) The Stem ends in a Consonant.
PrzLısınanr Remark. The 7 of the inflection-ending, when it comes im
mediately after the stem-consonant, is changed into 9, in some Perfects.
ἄνωγα, to commend, üvwyuev, Imp. ἄνωχϑι, ἀνώχϑω, ἄνωχϑε.
ἐγρήγορα, I awoke (from ἐγείρω, I awaken), Imp. ἐγρήγορϑε, Inf. Eypryopda;
hence ἐγρηγόρϑασι, instead of ἐγρηγόρασι
πέποιϑα, 7 trust (from πείϑω, to persuade), Plup. ἐπέπιϑμεν.
οἶδα, 7 know (from ’EIAQ, video), idpev, instead of louev, Inf. téuevac.
ἔοικα, I am like (from "EIKQ), second and third Pers. Dual ἔικτον ; third Pes.
Plup. Dual ἐΐκτην ; hence, Perf. Mid. or Pass. &ixro.
φάσχω, to suffer, Perf. m&moode, instead of πεπόνϑατε.
§ 214. (8) Present and Imperfect.
ἀνύω, to accomplish, Opt. Impf. ἀνυτο(ὰ).
τανύω, to expand, to stretch, τάνῦται (instead of ravberat).
épbw and elpiw, to draw, εἰρύαται, instead of elpvyra:, Inf. ἔρυσϑαε, elpvoda,
in the sense of to protect, to guard.
ἔδω, to eat, Inf. ἔδμεναι.
φέρω, to bear, Imp. φέρτε, instead of φέρετε.
I. GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY,
WHICH ALSO
CONTAINS ALL THE ANOMALOUS VERBS AND ANOMALOUS
FORMS MENTIONED IN TREATING OF THE VERB.
τ
The numbers 1, 2,3, after an adjective, denote that it has one, two or three end-
ings — Other numbers placed after a definition, denote the page, where the word
is more fally defined.—Abbreviations: w. a. with the Accusative; w. d., with
the Dative; w. g., with the Genitive; Char,, Characteristic—-The numerals and
prepositions are not inserted here; the definitions of these may be found in the
sections where they are treated.
A.
᾿Αβίωτος 2, insupportable.
ἀβλάβεια, innocence, 88.
ἀγάλλω, to adorn, 56.
ἄγαλμα, τό, statue.
ἄγαμαι, to wonder [ὁ 135,
p 165}.
ἄγαν, too much, 36.
éyavaxriv, to be die
pleased, 147.
ἀγαπάω, to love; w. ἃ, to
be contented with.
ἀγγελία, 7, message, 138.
ἀγγέλλω, to announce.
ἄγγελος, ὃ, messenger.
ἄγε, age, come now.
Gyeipw, to colleet | Perf,
§ 89, (b)].
ἀγέλη, ἡ, herd, 86.
ἀγεννής, -é¢, ignoble.
ἄγηρως, -wv, not growing
old, 31.
ἄγκιστρον, τό, hook.
ἄγνυμι, to break [§ 140, 1].
ἀγὸρά, ἡ, market-place.
ἀγοραῖος, ὁ, trafficker.
ἀγαρεύῳ, to say.
ἀγρός, ὁ, a field.
üyxivove 2, shrewd.
ἄγω, to lead, 23 [Aor., § 89,
Rem.; Perf. sya, Perf.
Mid. or Pass. ἤγμαι}.
ἀγών, -ὥνος, ὁ, contests
ἀδαήμων, -ov, inexperi-
enced, 112.
ἀδελφή, ἡ, sister.
ἀδελφοκτόνος, 6, murder-
er of a brother.
ἀδελφός, ὁ, brother.
ἄδηλος 2, uncertain, 29.
¢énc, -ov, ὁ, the lower
world.
ἀδικέω,ϊο do wrong to, 106
ἀδικία, 4, injustice.
ἄδικος 2, unjust.
ἀδολέσχης, -ov, ὁ, prater.
ἀδολεσχία, prating, 22.
éduvaréw, to be unable.
ἀδύνατος 2, impossible.
26*
da, to sing, 34.
dei, always.
ἀεικῆς, "ἔς, anseemly, 100,
ἀετός, ὁ, eagle.
ἀηδής, -ἐς, unpleasant;? 78}.
ἀηδίζομαι, to be disgusted
with [4 87, ı];
ἀήρ, «ὅρος, ὁ, air,
ἀϑάνανος 2, immortal.
ἀϑέατος, not to be seen.
᾿Αϑῆναι, -öv, al, Athens.
ἀϑλητῆς, -od, 6, wrestlen
ἄϑλιος, troublesome, 16k,
ἀϑλίωσ, miserably, 106.
ἄϑλον, τό, prize, $7.
ἀϑυμέω, to be dispirited,
307.
"Adur, -ὦ, 6, Athos.
αἰάζω, tw groan [Chan,
4 105, 2].
Αἰακός, ὁ, Acces.
αἰδέομαι, t reveranse, 100,
αἰδώς, ἡ, shame, 47.
Αἴγυπτος, ἡ, Egypt.
ἀΐϑηρ, ἡ, ether, 86.
αἰϑρία, ἡ, pure air.
αἷμα, -ατος, τό, blood
αἰνέω, to praise [6 98, (b),
p- 111]
eig, «γός, ἡ, goat.
‚alperöc 3, chosen, 56.
αἱρέω. to take [4 126, 1].
αἴρω, to raise.
αἰσϑώνομαι, to perceive,
100 [§ 121, (a), 1].
αἰσχρός 3, disgraceful.
αἰσχρῶς, disgracefully.
αἰσχύνω, to shame, 131.
Aicwy, -ovoc, ὁ, Aesou.
αἰτέω τινά Tt, to ask.
Alryn, ἡ, Aetna.
αἰχμάλωτος, captured.
alıpa, quickly.
αἰών, ὁ, age, 84.
ἀκέομαι, to heal [$ 98, (b)].
ἀκινάκης, -ov, ὁ, a Per-
sian sword.
ἀκμάζω, to be at the prime.
ἀκμή, point, 106.
ἀμαλάστως, adv., with im-
punity, 175.
Pass. with o, § 95].
ἄκρα, ἡ, summit, 90.
ἀκρατής, «ἔς, immederate,
» 46.
ἄκρᾶτος, unmixed.
ἀπροάομαι ἰο hear [496,8].
ἀκροατῆς, -οὔ, 6, auditor.
ἀκρόπολις, ew, 7, citadel.
ἀκτίς, -ivoc, 7, beam, ray.
ἄκων͵ -ovea, -ov, unwilling.
ὀλαλάζω, to shout [§ 105,
2].
éAaéw, to make blind.
ἀλγεινός 3, painful.
éAyéw, to feel pain.
ἄλγος, -ovg, τό, pain.
ἀλείφω, to anoint [Pf,
4 89, (b)].
ἀλεκτρνών͵ -svog, ὁ, a cock.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
᾿Αλέξανδρος, 6, Alexander. ἄμπελος, ἡ, vine.
ἀλέξω, to ward off [ἡ 125, ἀμπέχομαι, to pat on, 185
1].
[4 190, 8]
ἁλέω, to grind [§ 98, (Ὁ), ἀμύνω, to keep off, 130.
p- 111].
ἀλήϑεια, ὁ, truth.
ἀληϑεύω, to speak the
truth.
ἀληϑής, -éc, true.
ἀληϑινός 8, trae.
ἀληϑῶς, traly, 166.
GAcc, enough.
ἁλίσκομαι, to be taken
[6 123, 1].
ἀλκή, m strength.
᾿ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης, -ov, ὁ, Alei-
biädes.
ἄλκιμος 3, strong.
ἀλλά, but.
ἀλλήλων, of one another
ἄλλος, -ἢ, -0, another,
ἀκολουϑέω, to follow, 112 -
ἀκούω, to hear [P£, § 89,
(b); Fut. ἀκούσομαι ;
alius, 58.
ἀλλότριος, another's, 158.
ἀλλοτρίως, adv., foreign.
ἀλοάω, to thresh [§ 96, 8].
ἄλσος, -ους, τό, grove.
ἄλυπος, without trouble,
141.
GAware, -εως, #, capture.
ἅμα, at the same time.
ἁμαρτάνω, to err, 124
[64 181,2].
ἁμάρτημα, τό, exror, 40.
ἁμαρτία, ἡ, offence, 122.
ἀμαυρόω, to darken, 107.
ἀμβροσία, ἡ, food of the
gods.
ἀμέλεια, %, carelessness.
ἀμελέω, to neglect.
duvnuoveo, to be forget-
fal of.
ἀμοιβή, exchange, 162.
ἅμοιρος 2, without a share
in.
ἀμφιγνφέω, to be uncer
tain [Ang., § 91, 3}.
Gugrévyvpe,to clothe |) 139,
(b), 1; Ang, § 91, 8].
ἀμφισβητέω, to dispute
[Aug., $ 91, 2].
ἄμφω, both [§ 68, Rem. 3)
ἄν, with Subj., instead αἱ
ἐάν, if.
ἀναβαίνω, to go up.
ἀνάβασις, a going up, 1%
ἀναγιγνώσκω, to read.
ἀναγκάζω, to compel.
ἀναγκαῖος, necessary.
ἀνάγκη, necessity, 59.
ἀναζεύγνυμι, to yoke
again, 171.
ἀνακαίω, to burn, 171.
ἀνακράζω, to cry out.
ἀνακύπτω, to peep up, 49.
ἀναλίσκω, to spend [§ 123,
2].
᾿Αναξαγόρας, -ov, ὁ, Anat:
agoras. IM.
ἀναπαύω, to cause to res,
ἀναπείϑω, to persuade.
évarérouat, to fly up, ot
away.
ἀναπλέω, to sail upon the
nn sea; (2) to sal
ra to seize, 133.
ἀναρχία, anarchy.
ἀναστρέφω, to turn round
ἀνατίϑημει, to put up, 158
évarpéra, to turn up, 130
ἀναχωρέω, to go back.
ἀνδραποδιστής, -οὔ, ὁ,
slave-dealer.
ἀνδράποδον, τό, slave.
ἀνδρεία, ἡ, bravery.
ἀνδρεῖος 3, brave, 31.
ἀνδρείως, adv., bravely.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
᾿Ανδρόγεως, «ὦ, ὁ, Am
drogeus.
ἀνελευϑερία, disgraceful
avarice, 112.
ἀνέλπιστος 2, unexpected.
ἄνεμος, ὁ, wind.
ἀνερωτάω, to ask. .
ἄνευ, w. g., without.
ἀνευρίσκω, to And.
ἀνέχομαι, to endure-[$ 91,
1}. ,
ἀνέψω, to boil up -
ἀνηκουστέω, w. d., to be
ἀνήρ, ὁ, man [ὁ 36].
ἄνϑεμον, τό, a flower.
ävdor, τό, a flower.
ἀνϑρώπινος, human. -
ἀνϑρώπιον, τό, man.
ἄνϑρωπος, 6, man.
ἄνισος 2, unequal,
ἀνίστημε, to set up, 158.
évoiyvupt, ἀνοίγω, to open
[§ 140, 5].
ἀνόμοιος 2 end 3, unlike.
ἄνομος. 2, lawless.
ἄνοος, -οον, imprudent, 29.
ἀνορϑόω, to raise up [§ 91,
1].
ἀνορύττω, to dig up again.
ἀνταλλάττω, to exchange.
ἀντάξιας 3, w. g., of equal
worth. .
*Avriyovec, ὁ, Antigonus.
ἀντιδικέω, to defend at
law [ὁ 91, 4].
ἀντιλέγω, to contradict.
᾿Αψντισϑένης, -ους, ὁ, An-
tisthenes.
ἀντιτάττω, to set oppo-
site, 156.
ἀνύω, complete [§ 94, 1].
ἄνω, above.
ἀνώγεων, τό, hall.
ἀνωφελής, «ἔς, useless.
ἀξιόλογος, worth mention-
ing, 161.
ἄξιος 3, w. g., worthy of,
28.
ἀξιόω, to think worthy,108.
down, song,
ἀπαγορεύω, to call.
ἀπάγω, to lead away.
ἀπαίδευτος 2, uneducated.
ἀπαλλάττω, to set
from.
ἀπαντάω, w. d., to meet.
ἅπαξ, once.
ἅπας, altogether, 43 [$ 40,
ἄπειμι, Inf. ἀπεῖναι, to be
absent, 167. ᾿
ἄπειμι, Inf. ἀπιέναι, to go
away.
ἄπειρος 2, w. g., UNAC-
quainted with, 87.
ἀκείρως, adv. inexperi-
enced.
ἀπελαύνω, to drive away,
185. ᾿
ἀπέρχομαι, to go away.
ἀπεχϑάνομαι, to be hated
[$ 121, 3].
ἀπέχομαι, w. g., to abstain
from ; from
ἀπέχω, to keep off; (2) to
be distant from.
ἀπήνη, %, wagon.
ἀπιστέω, to disbelieve.
ἄπιστος 2, unfaithful, 52.
ἁπλόος 8, simple.
ἀποβαίνω, to go away.
ἀποβλέπω, to look upon.
éroytyudonrw,to reject,175.
ἀποδείκνυμι, to show, 160.
ἀποδέχομαε, to receive, 89.
ἀποδημέω, to be from
home.
ἀποδιδράσκω, to run away
from.
ἀποδίδωμι, to give back,
159. -
ἀποκαλέῳ, to call back,
name.
807
ἀποκηρύττω, to cause te
be proclaimed, 122.
ἀποκρίνομαι, to answer.
ἀποκρύπτω, to conceal.
ἀποκτείνω, to kill.
ἀπολαύω, ν΄. g., to enjoy.
ἀπόλλυμι, to ruin, 168.
ἀπόλυσις, deliverance, 109.
᾿Απόλλων, -wvog, ὁ, Apol-
lo.
ἀποπειράομαι, w.g to try.
ἀπορέω, to be in want.
ἄπορος 2, difficult ; ἐν ἀπό»
poıs εἶναι, to be in a
strait.
ἀποῤῥέω, to flow from. .
aroppon, a flowing off.
ἀποσβέννυμι, to quench.
ἀποσπάω, to draw away.
ἀποστέλλω, to send, 180,
ἀποστερέω, to deprive of.
ἀποστρέφω, to tum away.
ἀποτίϑημι, to put away,
161. [138.
ἀποτίνω, to. compensate,
ἀποτρέπω, to turn away,
87.
ἀποφαίνω, to show, 181.
ἀποφεύγω, w. 8) to flee
away.
ἀπόχρη, it suffices [ὁ 185,
3}.
drroxpüuaı,to have enough
[Ὁ 97, 3, (a)].
ἅπτομαι, to touch, 40.
ἀπωϑθϑέω, to push away,
142.
dpa ; [interrogative, § 187].
ἄρα, igiter, therefore.
épyadéoc,troublesome,159.
ἀργύρεος, made of silver.
ἀργύριον, τό, silver.
ἄργυρας, ὁ, silver.
ἀρέσκω, to please [ὁ 122,3].
Gpern, ἡ, Virtue.
dpi pow, to articulate.
ἀριϑμός, 6, number, 72,
GREEK AND ENGLIGH VOORBULANT
a «οὐ, 6, Aris- dvpenéuradv.exactly,1¢?. βαΐνω, to go, 3 |) 116 1.
as to be the best,
16
ἀρκέω, to suffice; Mid. w.
ἃ. [4 98, (b)}.
ἄρκτος, 6, h, & bear.
ἅρμα, -arec, τό, chariot.
ἁρμόττω, to fit [§ 105, 1].
dpv£ouaı, Dep. Pasa; to
deny.
dporpoy, Τό, a plough.
ἀρόω, to plough [4 98, (e)
amd § 89, (s)}.
ἁρπάζω, to plunder.
ἅρπαξ, rapacious.
ἄρτος, 6; bread.
ἀρύω, to draw water [Ὁ 94,
1].
᾿Αττίκη, ἡ, Attica. βάλλω, to throw [4 137,9),
ἀτνχέω, to be unhappy. βάρβαρος, barbarian, 72.
ἀτύχημα, τό, misfortune. βαρύς, -eia, -6, heary, δ].
ἀτυχής, -éc, unfortanate. βασίλεια, ἡ, queen.
ἀτυχία, ἣν misfortıme: βασιλεία, #, royal autor
avaive, to dry [Aug., _ ity.
4 87, 1]. βασίλεια, ri, palsies
αὖϑις, again. βασίλειος 3, up
οὗλός, ὁ, fate. βασελαύς, «ἕως, ὁ, king.
αὐξάνω, to increase [4 12Σ, βασιλεύω, to be aking, (?.
4). βασκαίνω, to bewiteh.
αὔξησις, increase. βασνάζω, te carry [1088]
αὖος 3, dry, 158. βάτραχος, ὁ, frog.
αὔριον, to-mertow. βδελυγμία, %, dialike, 171.
αὐτόμολος, ὁ, deserter. βέβαιος 8 and 2, firm, 0.
ἀρχή, a begimning, 50; τὴν ἀφαιρέομαΐ τινά τε, wde- lence-ta
ἀρχήν, from the begin- prive of.
αὐτονομία, ἡ, freedom, 90. βῆμα, -erog, τό, step, 12
αὐνόνομος 2, free. Bia, ἡ, ἘΡΉΘΡΗ
αὐτός, self [ᾧ 807. βιαζόμκμ, w.:a., to do το;
βίαιος 8, vinlent.
ἀφανής, -éc, enknown, 46. βιβλίον, τό, book,
ning.
ἀρχιγέκτων, -evoc, ὁ, ar Rn ee βίος, ὁ, life, 28.
ehitect.
ἄρχομαι, w.g., to begin.
ἄρχω, w. g., to rule, 44.
ἀσέβεια, ἡ, impiety.
ἀσεβέω, w.a., to sin against.
ὠσέλγεια, I}, excess.
ἀσϑένεια, h, weakness.
ἀσϑενέω, to be weak.
ἀσϑενής, «ἔς, weak.
ἀσκέω, to practise, 107.
ἀσπίς, -idoc, ἡ, shield.
ἄστεγος ἢ, houseless, 192.
ἀστραπή, ἡ, lightning.
ἀστράπτω, to lighten.
ἄστυ, τό, city [§ 46].
ἀσυνεσία, ἡ, stupidity.
ἀσύνετος 2, stupid.
ἀσφαλής, -Ec, firm, 48.
ἀσώματος 2, bodiless, 130.
ἀτάκτως, adv., without or-
der.
ἄτη, infatuation, 142.
ἀτιμάζω, to despise, 44.
ἀτιμία, ἡ, dishonor.
βιοτεύω, to live.
Pe 2, unenvious, 64. βίοτος, livelihood, 120.
ἀφίημι, to let go, 167. βιόω, to live [§ 142, 9}.
ὀφιπνόσμαι, to come [§ 120, βλαβερός 3, injurious.
3]. βλάβη, 4, injury.
ἀφίστημε, to pat away,158. βλακεύω, to be lazy.
’"Adpodire, ἡ, Venus. βλάπτω, to injure (Pet,
ἄφρων, foolish. 4 88, 2}.
ἀφσής, -ἔς, without neta- ee (429),
ral talent.
᾿Αχαιός, 6, an Aehaian. ae to look at, 63 [st
ἀχαριστία, ἡ, ingratitade.. cond Aor. Pass. § I,
ἀχάριστος 2,ungrateful44. Rem. 1].
ἄχϑομαι, to be indignant βοήϑεια, ἡ, kelp.
[§ 125, 2]. βοηϑέω, w. d., to help, 175.
ἄχϑος, -ove, τό, burden. βοήϑημα, -arog, τό, help
᾿Αχιλλεύς. «ἕως, ὁ, Achil- βοηϑός, ὁ, helper.
les. Βοῤῥᾶς, -α, 6, Berens.
ἄχρηστος 2, useless. βόσκω, to feed [4 155, ὃ.
βότρος, -ὕος, ὁ, cluster d
Β. grapes.
Βαβυλωνία, ἡ, Babylonia. βούλευμα, advice, 138.
βάϑος, -ove, τό, depth. βσυλευω, to advise; Mi,
Batic, -eia, «Ὁ, deep. te advise one’s self
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
βουλῷ, ἡ, advios, 38.
βραδύς, -eia, -6, slow.
βραχύς, «εἴα, -ö, short.
βροντάω, to thunder.
βροντή, ἡ, thander.
βροτός 3, mortal.
βρῶμα, -aros, τό, food.
βρῶαις, “ἕως, ἧ, eating.
βυνέω, to stop up, [4 120,
TéAa, τό, milk [§ 39}.
γαμετή, h, wife
γαμέω, ey [§ 124, 1
γάμος, ὁ, marriage.
Τανυμήδης, -δος, 6, Gany-
mede.
γάρ, for (stands after the
first werd of the sen-
tence).
γαστήρ, ἡ, belly.
yavpou,to make proud,110.
γέ, at least, 135.
γείτων, -ovog, ὁ, neighbor.
γελάω, to laugh [4 98, (a)].
γέλως, "OTog, 6, laughter.
γέμω, w. g., to be full.
γένεσις, 720, ἡ, origin.
γενναῖος, of noble birth,
188.
γενναίως, nobly, 87. -
γέρας, τό, reward, 4 [4 89,
Rem.}.
γέρων, -ovroc, ὁ, old man.
yet, to cause to taste, 90.
γεωμέτρης, κου, ὁ, geome-
ter.
yi, ἡ. the garth.
γηϑέω, to rejoice [6 124, 2].
γψῦρας, τό, old age $ 39,
Rem.].
γηράσκω, γηράω, io grow
old [4 128, 4].
γίγας, -avroc, ὁ, giant.
γίγνομαι, to become, 33
[§ 133].
γιγνώσκω, to know,
ΠΕ 122, δ, and £ 142].
γλαύξ, «κός, 7; owl.
γλνκύς, «εἴα, εὖ, sweet.
γλῶττα, ἡ, tongue, 29.
γνώμη, ἡ, opinion.
γονεύς, ὁ, parent.
γόνυ, «ατος, τό, knee.
Γοργώ, -οῦς, ἡ, Gorgo.
γράμμα, τό, letter, 68.
γραῦς͵ ἡ, old woman [641].
γράφω, to write, 16.
Γρύλλος, ὁ, aye
yvia, ἡ, field.
γυμνάζω, to exercise.
γυμνός 8, naked.
γυναικεῖος, belonging to
women, 88.
γνυναίκιον, τό, little woman.
γυνή, ἡ, woman [$ 47, 2].
A.
Δαίδαλος, ὁ, Daedalus.
δαιμόνιον, τό, deity.
δαίμων, “ονος, ὁ ‚4,divinity.
δαίομαι, to distribute.
δάκνω, to bite [§ 119].
δάκρυον, τό, & tear.
δακρύω, to weep.
δακτύλιος, ὁ, ring.
δάκτυλος, ὁ, finger.
δαμάζω, -ἄω, to tame
[$ 117, 2].
δανείζω, to lend. .
dapdäva, to sleep [4121,6].
δέ, but (stands after the
first word of the sen-
tence).
δέησις, -ewg, 9, entreaty.
δεῖ, it is necessary, 107
[5 136, 6].
δείδω, to fear (Perf. dé
803
doıxa and δέδια. An.
ἔδεισα].
δείκνυμι, show [§ 133].
δείλη, ἡ, evening.
δειλός, timid,-32.
84 deivög, fearful, 87.
δεινῶς, terribly, 100.
δεκάς, decad, 141.
δελφίς, -ivoc, ὁ, dolphin. -
ὀένόρον, τό, tree.
δέομαι, w. g. to want
[§ 185, 5].
δέον, τό, duty. 167.
dépxopat, to seo [ Perf. dé.
dopxa, § 102, 4].
dépu, to flay [Perf., § 102,
4; second Aor. Pass,
ἐόᾷρην).
δέσποινα, ἡ, mistress &
the house.
δεσπότης, -ov, ὁ, τῶι:
δεῦρο, hither.
ϑέχρμαι, Dep. Mid, to τό»
ceive.
“δέω, to want, 107 [$ 126,
5]; (2) to bind [4 98,
(b) ; contracted, § 97, 2}.
᾿ diydev, namely, scilicet, 167.
δῆλος 3, evident. [110.
dnAöw, to make evident,
Δημητήρ, -τρος, ἡ, Deme.
ter or Ceres. [91.
δημοκρατία, 77, democracy,
δῆμος, ὁ, people, 86.
Δημοσϑένης, -ους, 6, De
mosthenes.
δῆτα, certainly.
διαβολῆ, 4, calumny.
διαγίγνομαι, to live.
διάγω, to carry through,
live. [tend,
διαγωνέζομαε, w.d., to com
διάδημα, τό. diadem, 159
διαιρέω, to divide.
δίαιτα, ἡ, mode of life.
διαιτάω, to feed [Ang,
491, 3].
810
διάκειμαι, to be in a state, διχοστισία, ἡ, quarrel.
to be disposed. διψάω, to thirst [oontreet-
διακονέω, to serve [Aug, ed, 4 97,3, (a)].
§ 91, 3]. Shee, -ους, τό, thirst.
διαλόω, to dissolve, $8. διώκω, to pursue, 16.
διαμείβομαι, to exchange. Succ, -wör, ὁ, slave.
διαμένω, to remain. δοκέω, to think, 138 [4 124,
διανέμω, to distribute. 8].
διαπράττω, to effect. δολόω, te deceive, 106.
διαῤῥήγνυμι, to break a δόξα, ἡ, report, 23.
sander, 172. δόρυ, τό, spear {§ 38].
dıaoreipw, to seatter, 131. ὀορυφορέω, w. &., to attend
διατάττω, to order, 122. as.a life-guard.
ϑιανελέω, to complete, 161. δουλεία, 9, servitade.
διατίϑημε, to put in or- δουλεύω, to be a slave, 37.
der, 161. δοῦλος, ὁ, slave.
διανροφή, ἡ, nourishment. δουλόω, to ensiave.
διαφέρω, to differ from, 63. Δράκων, -οντος, ὁ, Dirdoo.
διαφϑείρω, to destroy, 63. dpareretu, w. a. to ram
διαφορά, ἡ, difference, 159. away.
delegopec 2, different. dpaw, to do, weh,
Φιδϑακτός 3, tanght Ope itavypipec scythie-bear-
διϑάσκολος, ὁ, teacher. ing, 72.
διδάσκω, to teach. ϑρόμος, ὁ; running, 100;
διδῥάσκω, to run away δύναμαι, to be able, 162
[$ 133, 6}. 1$ 135}.
bon, give [4 188]. δύναμις, 4, power, 100.
διολέγχω, to cenmure, to δυνατός 3, possible, pow-
run ashamed, com erful.
Sbcxoioc hard to please,Al.
rer ὁ, sohg. - δύστηνος 2, anfertannte.
διίστημι, to separate, 168. δυςτυχέω, to be unforte-
διλάζω, to judge. nate.
δίκαιος ὃ, just. ϑυςχεραίνω, t be dis-
δικαιοσύνη, 7, justice. pleased with.
δικαίως, justly, 160. δῶμα, -erey, τό, hanes.
δικαστής, -οϑ, ὁ, judge. ῶρον, τὸ, gift.
δίκη, ἢ, justice, 22.
en «σους, 6, Diage- E.
Br, w. sudj., 2
Assdape, ὁ, Diodorns. ἕωρ, ἔαρος, τό, spring.
διόνι, because. spring.
δίς, bis, twice. téu, to permit, 113 [§ 96,
δίχα, w. g., apart from. 8; Aug. § 87, 3}.
διχόμϑϑος, double-spexk- ἐγγίζω, w. ἃ. te come near.
ing, 122. ἐγγύϑεν, from near, near.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULANT,
byeipe, tonwaken, 89 [| ,
(}}}.
ἐγκαλλωπίζσμαι, Ὁ lh
proud of, 172.
ἐγκλημά, τό, accusation
ἐγκράνεια, self-enntrol,i#l.
ἐγκρατής, «ἐς, continents,
ἐγκώμιον, τό, eulogy.
ἔγχϑλυς, «τος, ἡ, eel. |
ἐγχωρεῖ, it is possible, Ὁ
lowable
ἐγχώριος 2, native, 89.
ἐϑέλω, te wish, 107 [4 1%,
§ 87, 3].
Ed vor, -cur, τό, nation, %
ἔϑος, -ovs, τό, custom, 58
sl, if; in = question, We
$ 86, Rem.].
εἰκῇ, inconsiderately, 18
εἰκός ἐστι(ν), it is right
εἰκότως, ade., naturally.
εἷλον, sve αἱρέω.
εἴλω, to press, 48 [4 1%,
ΤΊ.
εἰμί, to be [$ 157].
εἶμι, to go [4 137].
"RIAD, soe φημί.
εἴργνυμι, to shut in ἢ MA,
a}.
elpyw, W. g., 16 shut out
"EIPOMAI, to ingsitt
[4 125, 8].
eloa, to establish [Auf
§ 87, 8].
Gira, to throw his;
(2) mtrans., to fall wt.
RRRBK AND ENGLISH VOOABULARE.
elceius, to go into, 167. ἁλέφας, ὁ, elephant, 48.
δἰςῳϑέω, to. push in, 142. ἑλίσσω, to wind [Azg.,
sirg, then. 487, 3; Perf. Mid. or
εἶτε ---- εἴτε, whether — or Pass. ἐλήλιγμα, and el-
εἴωθα, see ἐϑίζω. Asypaı, § 89).
ἑκάς, W. &. far. ἕλκος, τά, & sore, 112.
ἕκαστος, -n, τον, each. .
éxBaive, to go gat, 135.
ἐκβάλλω, to throw aut.
ἄμγφνας, ὁ, ἡ, desgendant.
ἐκδύω τινά τι, to strip off.
ἐκεῖνος, -n, -ο, thas, he
ἐκκρίω, to burs out.
ἐκκαλύπτω, to disclose.
ἐκκλααία, ἧ, ansembiy.
ἀκκλησιάζω, to hold an as
sembly.
δελῳψες (δὴ ἡλόου, eclipse
of the sun.
δανίω, to swien out
ἀκπέμπῳ, to send out
ἐκκέτομαι, to fly away:
ἀκπένω, to drink up, 136.
ἐκπλέω, to sail out.
ἐκπλήττῳ, to amace ; Mid.
Aor., to be amazed.
ἄρπωμᾳ, -ατος, τό, duink-
mg-cup.
ἐκτής, w. g., without.
"Extup, -opos, ὁ, Hector.
ἐκφαίνω, io make known,
130.
inpipo, to bring forth, 62.
ἐκφεύγω, w. a, to flee
from, escape.
ἑκών, -otoa, -dv, willing.
EAagnc, ἡ, stag.
ἐλαύνω, to drive [6 119,8).
ἐλδαίρω, w. 8.) t0 pity.
ἐλέγχω, te examine, 145
{Pert § 89, (a)].
ἐλεόω, w. a, to pity.
Ἑλένη, 9, Helen.
ἐλευϑερία, ἡ, freedom.
ἐλεύϑερος, free, 59.
‘EAKYQ and ἔλκω, to
draw [Fat. Age; Aor.
elänuse, ἐλεύσαι; Aor.
Pass, elAxtovyy ; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. elAuve-
pas; Ang, § 87, 8}.
Ἑλλάς, vides, ἡ, Hellas,
Greece.
Ἄλλην, var, ὁ, a Greek.
"EAAnvic, «δος, ἡ, Grecian.
"Ἑλλήσποντος, ὁ, the Hel-
Jespont.
fAgive, ““νϑος, ἡ, Worm.
ἐλπίζω, to hope, 88.
ἑλπίς, -idog, δ, hope.
ἔλσοομαι, te hope [Perf,
4 87, δ].
EAQ, see alpsu.
ἁλώδης, -üdes, marshy.
ἐμβάλλω, to throw in; (2)
$14
ἐνμαύω, to kindle [Pam.
with o, 4 95].
ἔνδειᾳ, ἡ, want.
ἐνδείκμυρμε, to show, 168.
ἐνδύω, to put on, 88.
éueyeipw, to awaken.
ἐνεδρεύω, w. a, to lie ia
wait for.
"ENEEAR, seo φέρω.
ἐνέχῳ, to havo, hold.
Ida, there.
tvBade, hither.
ἄμϑεν, whence.
ἐνθυμέομαι, Dep. Pass. to
consider.
ἐνιαυτός, ὁ, year.
ἔνιηε 3, some.
ἐνίστημι, to put inte, 168.
Evvarog 8, ninth.
ἕννυμι, 806 ἀμφεέννυμο.
ἐνοχλέω, w. d. to melest
[Δωρ 491,1].
ἐνταῦϑω, here.
ἐντέλλω, -ομαι, to com
mission, 131.
intzans, to fall in or évreidev, hence; τὸ de
upon.
ἐμβροχίζω, to ensnare, 167.
ἐμέῳ, to vomit [$ 98, (b)j.
ἐμμένω, to remain with,
160.
ἔμπεδος, Arm, 159.
ἔμπειρος ἢ, W. δ. expe
rienced in.
ἐμπίπλημε, to Gill.
ἐμπίπρημι, to set om fire,
165.
ἐμπέπτω, to fall into.
ἐμπτύω, to spit into or on.
ἐμφερής, -ἔς, w. d. simi-
lar to.
ἐμφυτεύω, to implant.
ἔμφυτος 2, implanted.
- ἐμφόω, to implant.
: reüdev, thereupon.
ἐννέϑημι, to put in, 188.
ἔντιμος 2, honored.
ἐντός, w. g, wathin.
ἔντριψις, eos, 7, coset,
ἐντυγχάνω, w. ἃ, to fall
in with.
ἐνύπνιον, τό, dream.
ἐξαίφνης, suddenly.
ἐξαμαρτάνω, to err greatly.
ἀφαμεανρόω, to obscure ur
terly.
ὀξαπατάω, to deceive COM
pletely, 106.
ἐξαπίνης, suddenly.
ἔξειμι, ἔξεστι, licet, it is
lawful, in one’s power.
ἀλευϑερόω, to make free. évayridauai,to oppose,110. ἔξειμι, ἐξιέναι, to go out.
"EAEYOQ, see ἔρχορμωι.
ἐνάντιος ἃ, opposite.
ἐξεϊπον( Aor.),to utter,147.
812
ἐξελαύνω, to drive out;
(2) to lead out.
ἐξετάζω, to examine.
ἐξευρίσκω, to find out.
ἑξῆς, in order.
&£inus, to send out, 167.
ἀξισόω, to make equal.
ἐξοκέλλω, to mislead, 130.
ἐξόλλυμι, to ruin utterly.
éop Seu, to make straight,
158. (160.
éfopxéw, to cause to swear,
ἔοικα, to be like [§ 87, δ].
beAxa, see ἔλπομαι.
Eopya, see ’"EPT RB.
ἑορτάζω, to celebrate 3
feast [Aug., § 87, 5].
ἐπαγγέλλω, to announce;
Mid. to promise.
ἐπάγω, to bring on.
ἐπαινέω, to praise, 107.
ἔπαινος, 6, praise.
ἐπαιτιάομαι, to accuse.
"Erauvavdar, του,
Epaminondas. |
ἐπάν (ἐπῆν), w. subj, if.
éxavayo, to lead back.
ἐπανάκειμαι, to lie upon.
ἐπαναφέρω, to bring back,
141.
ἐπαρκέωῳ, w. d., to help.
ἐπεί, when, since.
ἐπειδάν, w. subj., when.
ἐπειδή, since, because.
ἔπειτα, then, 167.
ἐπέρχομαι, to come to.
ἐπιβοηϑέω, w. a, to come
to the assistance of.
éx:BovAciu,to plotagainst.
ἐπιβουλή, ἡ, plot.
ἐπιδείκνυμε, ἴο show boast-
fully, 168,
ἐπιδιώκω, to pursue,
ἐπιϑυμέω, to desire, 108.
ἐπιϑυμία, 7, desire.
ἐπικίνδυνος 2, dangerous.
ἐπικουφίζω, to alleviate.
ὁ,
ἐπιλανϑάνομαι, to forget.
ἐπιμέλεια, 4, care.
ἐπιμέλομαι, -οὔμαι͵ to care
for, 25 [$ 124, 17].
ἐπινοέω, to think of.
ἐπιορκέω, to swear falsely,
138.
ἐπίορκος, ὁ, perjured.
ἐπικίπτω, to fall upon..
ἐπισκοπέω, to look upon.
ἐπίσταμαι, to know, 161
[$ 135, p. 165).
ἐπιστέλλῳ, to command.
ἐπιστήμη, ἡ, knowledge.
ἐπιστήμων 2, W. g, ac
quainted with.
&moroAN, ἡ, epistle.
ἐπιτάττω, to entrust to.
ἐπιτελέω, to accompliah.
ἐπιτήδειος, fit, 145.
ἐπιτηδεύω, to manage, 90.
&nıridnpi,to patupon,161.
ἐπιτρέπω, to entrust to;
(2) to permit.
. ἐπιτροπεύω, w. a. to be
guardian.
ἐπιφέρω, to bring apon, 91.
ἐπιχειρέω, w.d., to put the
hand to something.
ἐπιχώριος 3, of or belong:
ing to, the country.
ἕπομαι. Comp. ἔπω.
ἐπόμνυμι, to swear by.
ἔπος, τους, τό, word.
ἐποτρύνω, to urge on.
Era, to be busily engaged
in, occurs in prese in
comp. (περιέπω, διέπω,
etc.) [Aug., $87,3; Aor.
Act. ἔσπον not used in
Att. prose]; Mid. Eme-
μαι, to follow [Impf.
εἱπόμην ; Fat. ἔψομαι;
Aor. ἑσπόμην, ἐφεσπό-
μην; Inf. σκέσϑαι;
Imp. σποῦ, &rierov).
Epauautelove[$135,p.165)
GBRBEE AND ENGLISE VOCABULARY.
ἐραστής, ὁ, lover, 35.
Ἐρατώ, -οὖς, ἡ, Erato.
épaw,to love [§185, p.165].
ἐργάζομαι, to work [Aug,
§ 87, 3).
ἐργαστήριον, τό, work
shop. .
ἔργνυμει, see εἴργνυμι.
ἔργον, τό, work, 31.
ἜΡΓΩ, to do [Perf, | #,
δ].
ἔρδω, to do.
ἐρείδω, to prop [Per
689, (b)}-
épite, to eomtend with.
ἔρις, -ıdog, %, contention,
ἑἐρπύζω, ἕρπω, to creep
[Aug, § 87, 3].
ἔῤῥω, to go away [Ὁ 1%
9].
ἐῤῥωμένος ’ strong.
ἐῤῥωμένως, strongly.
ἔρυμα, -aroc, τό, defence
"Epepavd coc, Erymantina
ἔρχομαι, to go, com
[$ 126, 2].
ἔρως, -wrog, ὁ, love.
tpwraw, to ask.
ἐσϑίω, to eat, 16 [§ 126, 8}
ἐσϑλός 8, noble, 33.
ἑσπέρα, 7, evening.
Ecre, until.
ἑστιάω, to entertain [ Auf,
$ 87, 3].
ἔσχατος, last, 88.
ἑταῖρος, ὁ, companion, 3}.
ἕτερος 3, the other,alter, 87.
Erı, besides, 124
ἑτοῖμος 3, ready.
ἑτοίμως, adv., readily.
ἔτος, -οὐς, τό, year.
εὖ, well, εὖ πράττω, Ὁ ὦ
well to.
: GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Ἑύβοια, 4, Euboes.
εὔβουλος, ne well,
147.
εὐγενής, of high birch, 141.
εὐδαιμονέω, to be fortu-
mate, 136.
ebdauuoviiw, to account
happy.
εὐδαιμόνως, fortunately.
εὐδαίμων, -ovor, fortunate.
εὔδιος 2, serenc.
εὐδοκιμέω,ἴο be celebrated.
ebde, see xadeidu.
εὐεξία, ἡ, good condition.
εὐεργεσία, ἡ, beneficence,
188.
εὐεργετέω, to benefit, 108.
εὐσατώ, 4, prosperity, 47.
ebyapic, attractive.
εὐχάριστος 2, winning.
εὐχή, 7, request, 107.
εὔχομαι, w. d., to pray, 31.
ἔφηβος, ὁ, a youth.
ἐφίημι, to send up te, 167.
ἐφικνέομαι,ἴο arrive at,136.
ἐφόδιον, τό, travelling
money. [tes.
Eb¢parne, -ev, ὁ, Euphra-
ἐχϑαίρω, w. a, to hate.
ἐχϑάνομαι, see ἀπεχϑά-
vopas.
ἔχϑρος 3, hostile, 27, 58.
ἐχυρός, firm.
ἔχω, to have; w. adv., 16;
w. inf, to be able [4 125,
11].
etdivo,tomake straight,23 ἔψω, to bod [Ὁ 125, 12].
εὐϑύς, ado., immediately.
εὔκλεια, N, fame.
εὐκόλως. 3 adv., quickly. ‘
εὐκοσμία, ἡ, good order, 24.
εὐλαβέομαι, w. a, Dep.
Pass., to be cautions.
εὐμενής ἢ -ἔς, weil-die posed.
εὐμορφία ἡ, beauty of form.
οὐνομία, ἡ, good adminis-
tration.
ebvoog 2, well-disposed, 2 29.
εὐπετῶς, adv., easily.
εὔπορος, w. g., abounding
in. {des
Εὐριπίδης, -ovc, ὁ, Buripi-
δὑρίσκω, to-find [$ 129, 7).
ebpoc, -ovs, τό, breadth.
ebpöc, «εἴα, -#, broad.
εὐσεβέω, w. a. te rever-
ence.
εὐσεβής, -é¢, pious.
εὔτακτος 2, well-ordered.
εὐτυχέω, to be fortunate,
107.
εὐτυχῆς, -ὅς, fortanate.
εὐτυχία, #, good fortune.
sbppsive, te rejoice, 28.
εὐφροσύνη, ἡ, mirth.
ἕως, a8 long as.
ξως, -ὠ, ἡ, morning.
2.
Zée, to live [Con., § 97,
8, (a)]. Comp. βιόω.
ζέννυμε, ζέω, to boil [Ε189,
‘(b), 2]. ᾿
ζεύγνυμι, to yoke, 173
[ξ 140, 3}.
Ζεύςρὁ [$ 47, 3], Zeus or
Jupiter.
ζηλόω, to strive after, 108,
ζημία, ἡ, injury.
ζημεόω, to punish.
ζητέω, to seek, 108.
ζωή, ἢ, life.
Com, to gird [4 239,
{c), 1].
ζῶον, τό, animal, 58,
H.
"H, or; 7— 7, aut — aut,
ἢ, where.
ἡβάσκω, ἡβάω, to come to
manhood [§ 122, 8].
ἤβη, ἡ, youth. (way.
yyepovebo,to pointiout the
27
513
ἡγεμών, -dvec, ὃ, leader.
ἡγέομαι, to lead, 133.
40éw¢,-adv., pleasantly, k6.
ἤδη, already.
ἧδομαι, to rejoice.
ἡδονή, ἡ, pleasure.
ἡδύς, -eia, «ὕ, sweet.
ἢϑος, -ove, τό, custom, 110.
ἥκιστα, least of all
ἥκω, I am come.
ἡλικία, 9, age, 106.
ἡλίκος 3, as great as.
ἥλιος, 6, sun.
ἦμαι, to sit [ὁ 141, (b)].
ἡμέρα, ἡ, day.
Auspodpöuos,6,conrier,10&
ἡμέϑεος, ὁ, demigod.
ἦν, w. subj., if.
ἡνίκα, when.
ἡνίσχος, ὁ, guide, 188,
ἥπιος 8, mild.
Ἥρα, ἡ, Hera or June,
Ἡρακλῆς, -ἔσυς, ὁ, Her
cules.
ἥρως, -ὡος; ὁ, hero.
ἡσυχάζω, to be quiet, still;
ἡσυχία, ἢ, stillness, 2.
ἧσυχος 2, quiet.
qrra, ἡ, defeat.
ἡττάομαι, w. g., to be de
feated, inferior to.
®.
Θάλαττα, 7, sea.
Varia, ἡ, feast.
ϑάλλω, to bloom, 34.
ϑάλπος, -ovc, τό, heat.
Vavaroe, ὁ, death.
Barra, to bury. [106
ϑαῤῥαλέως, adv, boldly,
ϑαῤῥέω, to be of good
courage; ϑ. τινά, te
have confidence in; 9.
rt, to endare something,
ϑαυμάζω, w. g., to νοῦ!»
der, 16.
ϑαυμαστός 3, wonderful
314
ϑεάομαι, Dep. Mid., to see.
ϑεὰάτής. -od, ὁ, spectator.
ϑεῖον, τό, deity.
ϑεῖος 8, godlike.
ϑέλγω, to chann, 122.
ϑέλω, to wish, 107 [$ 125,
6].
ϑεμέλιον, τό, foundation.
Θεμιστοκλῆς, -ἕους, ὁ,
Themistocles.
ϑεός, ὁ, God.
ϑεράπαινα, ἡ, female ser-
vant.
ϑεραπεία, }, care.
ϑεραπεύω, to honor, 22.
ϑεράπων, --οντος, ὁ, ser-
vant.
ϑέρος, -ους, τό, summer.
do, to run [Fut., $ 116,
3; Con. $ 97,1]. The
other tenses from tpé-
χω, which see.
Θῆβαι, al, Thebes.
ϑήρ, -ός, ὃ, wild beast.
Önpevras,-vö,6,huntsman.
Önpevo, to hunt, 31.
Onptov, τό, wild beast.
ϑησαυρός, 6, treasure.
Θησεύς, -ἕως, ὁ, Theseus.
ϑιγγάνω, to touch [$ 121,
10].
θλάω, to bruise [Ὁ 98, (a)].
ϑνήσκω, to die [$ 122, 9].
ϑνήῆτος 8, mortal.
ϑόρυβος, ὃ, tumult.
ϑραύω, to break, 100
[$ 95, Rem. 1].
Opis, τριχός, 7, hair.
ϑρόνος, ὁ, throne, 145.
ϑρώσκω, to leap.
Ovyarnp, -poc, 7, daughter.
ϑυμός, ὁ, mind, 28.
Ofpa, 7, door.
ϑύρσος, ὁ, a thyrsus, 159.
ϑυσία, 4, sacrifice.
ϑύω, to sacrifice [$ 94, 2].
Dads, ϑωός ’ 6, N, jackall.
dureto and Sorry, W. a.,
to flatter.
Li.
Ἰάομαι͵, Dep. Mid., to heal.
ἰατρική, #, medicine.
ἰατρός, 6, physician.
Ἰβηρία, ἡ, Spain.
ἰδέα, 4, appearance, 106.
ἴδιος 3, own, peculiar.
ἰδιώτης, -ov, ὁ, private
man; (2) layman.
ἱδρύω, to build, 90 [§ 94, 1].
ἱδρώς, -Groc, 6, sweat.
ἱερεύς, -éwc, ὁ, priest.
ἱερόν, τό, victim.
ἱερός 8, w. g., sacred to.
wo, see καϑίζω.
Int, to send [$ 186].
ἰϑύνω, to set right, 52.
ἱκανός 3, sufficient, able.
"Ixapog, ὁ, Icarus.
ἱκετεύω, to supplicate, 88.
ἱκέτης, -ov, ὁ, suppliant.
Ikveouaı, see ἀφικνέϑμαι.
ἑἱλάσκομαι, to propitiate
[$ 122, 10].
ἴλεως, -wv, merciful.
Ἰλιάς, -δος, ἢ, the Dliad, 53.
ἱμάτιον, τό, garmenk
ἱμείρω, to desire.
ἵνα, that; (2) in order
that.
Ἰνδική, h, India. [dia.
"Iv doi, ot, inhabitants of In-
lov, τό, violet.
ἱππεύς, -Ewc, δ, horseman.
inreto, to ride.
Immoc, 6, horse.
ἶσος 3, equal, 49.
lornut,to place,158 [$133].
lotopéw τινά τι, to in-
quire of.
ἱστοριογράφος, 6, historian.
ἱστός, ὁ, loom.
loxvaivw, to make emacia-
ted [§ 111, Rem. 2].
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
ἰσχῦρός 3, strong.
ἰσχύω, to be strong, 59.
ἴσως, perhaps.
Ixvos, -ovc, τό, track.
ἰχϑύς, -doc, ὁ, fish.
1Q, see εἶμι, to go.
K.
Καϑαίρω, to purify, 150.
καϑέζομαι, to sit dom
[Aug., $ 91,3; Fut. κα’
ϑεδοῦμαι]. [10).
καϑεύδω, to sleep [4 125,
κάϑημαι, to sit [Aug,
§ 91, 3}.
καϑίζω, to set [Ὁ 125, 13).
καϑίημε, to let down, 161.
καϑίστημι, το establish, 158.
cai, and, even ; καί — καί,
both —and (et— et);
καινός 3, new.
xaiptoc, opportune, 112
καιρός, the right time, 58
καίω, to burn [$ 116, 3].
κακία, ἢ, vice.
κακόνοος 2, itl-disposed.
κακός 3, bad, wicked.
κακότης, 7, wickedness, 33.
Kaxovpyéw, w. &, Ὁ ὦ
evil to one.
κακοῦργος, 6, evil-doer.
κακύω, to treat ill, hurt.
κακῶς, adv., badly.
κάλαμος, 6, reed.
καλέω, to call, name [698
(b); Opt. Pinup. Mid α
Pass., § 116, 4].
Καλλίας, -ov, ὁ, Calliss
κάλλος, -ove, TO, beaaty.
καλοκἀγαϑία, 7, rectitude,
145.
καλός 3; beautiful, 27.
καλύπτω, to conceal.
καλῶς, adv.; well.
κάμηλος, ὁ, 4, camel
κάμνω, to labor (intrans),
190 {§ 119}.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
κἄν, even if, 107.
κάνεον, τό, basket.
κάπρος, ὁ, wild boar.
καρδία, 7, heart.
καρπόομαι, to enjoy the
fruits of.
καρπός, ὁ. fruit.
κάρτα, very.
καρτερέω, to be patient,
καρτερός 3, strong, 167.
Κάστωρ, -opos, ὁ, Castor.
κατάβασις, 7, retreat, 72.
καταγελάω, w. g., to laugh
at. [sleep, 138.
καταδαρϑάνω, to fall a-
καταδύω, to go down, 88.
κατακαίω, to burn down.
κατακλαίω, to bewail.
κατακλείω, to shut, 90.
κατακρύπτω, to hide.
καταλάμπω, shine upon.
καταλείπω, to leave be-
hind, 120.
καταλύω, to loosen, 88.
κατανέμω, to distribute.
καταπαΐω, to puta stop to.
καταπετρόω, to stone to
death. [122.
καταπλήττῳ, to astonish,
κατασκευώζω, to prepare.
κατατίϑημι, to lay down,
161. [122.
καταφλέγω, to burn down,
καταφρονέω, to despise.
καταφυγή, 7 refuge.
κατεργάζομαι, to accom-
plish.
κατέχω, to restrain, 23.
κατήγορος, ὁ, accuser.
κάτοπτρον, τό, mirror.
κάτω, below.
καῦμα, -ατος, τό, heat.
KGW, Bee καίω.
κεῖμαι, to lie down [$ 14},
(a)].
κελεύω,ἴο order, bid [$ 95].
KeAriGnpec, Celtiberians.
κέντρον, τό, sting, 159.
κέραμος, ὁ, clay.
κεράννυμι, to mix [§ 139,
(a), 1].
xepdaivo, to gain, 130
[$ 111, Aor. II; Perf.
xexépdaka |,
κέρδος, -ους, TO, gain.
κευϑμών, -ὥνος, ὁ, lair.
κεύϑω, to conceal. '
κεφαλῇ, 7, head.
κεχρημένος, wanting, 120.
κῆπος, ὁ, garden.
κῆρ, κῆρος, τό, heart.
κηρός, 6, Wax. ,
κήρυξ, -Dxog, ὁ, herald.
κηρύττω, to make known
(by a herald).
κιϑάρα, ἡ, lyre.
Κιλικία, 7, Cilicia.
κινδυνεύω, to incur dan-
ger, 88.
xivdbvog, ὁ, danger.
κῖς, acdc, ὁ, corn-worm.
κίστῃ, ἡ, chest.
κιττός, 6, ivy.
κίχρημε, to lend [$ 135, 1].
κλάζω, to sound [$ 105, 4;
Fat. Porf.nexAuyfo and
«γξομαι].
κλαίω, to weep, 133 [$ 125,
14].
κλάω, to break [ὁ 98, (a)].
κλείς, ἢ, key [§ 47, 5}.
Κλειώ, -oüg, ἡ, Clio.
κλείω, to shut, 28 | Pass.
with o, καὶ 95, Rem. 1].
κλέος, -ους, τό, fame, 48.
κλέπτης, -ov, ὁ, thief.
κλέπτω, to steal | Fut. κλέ-
youaı ; second Aor.
Pass. ἐκλάπην ; Perf,
§ 102, 5].
κλίνω, to bend [ὁ 111, 6].
κλοπή, 7, theft.
κλόπιμος, thievish, 122.
Κλωϑώ, «οὖς, ἡ, Clotho.
$15
κλώψ, -ωπός, 6, thief.
xvaw, to scrape [Cont,
4 97, 3}.
κοΐζω, to squeak [Char.,
§ 105, 2].
κοιλαίνω, to hollow out
[$ 111, Bem. 3].
κοινός, common, 131; τὸ
κοινόν, commonwealth.
κοινωνία, 7, communion,
108.
κοίρανος, ὁ, ruler.
κολάζω, to punish.
κολακεία, ἡ, flattery.
κολακεύω, W. &, to flatter.
κόλαξ, -axoc, ὁ, flatterer.
κολαστής, -ov, ὁ, punisber
κολούω, to curtail [Pass.
with o, § 95].
κόλπος, 6, bosom, 133.
κομίζω, to bring.
κόπτω, to cut, 120.
κόραξ, -ακος, ὁ, crow.
κορέννυμι, to satisfy [4 139,
(b), 3].
Κορίνϑιος, 6, Corinthian.
κόρυς, -υϑος, ἡ, helmet.
κοσμέω, to adorn.
κόσμος, ὃ, ornament, 51.
κοῦφος 3, light, 39.
κράζω, to cry out, 122
[$ 105, 2; Fut. xexpé-
ξομαι].
κρώνος, «ους, τό, helmet.
κρατέω, w. g. to have
power over, 107.
κρατήρ, -ipos,mixing bowl
κρώτος, -ους, τό, strength.
κραυγῇ, 7, shout, 167.
κρέας, τό, flesh, 41 [4 39,
Ren.].
κρέμαμαι and κρεμάννυμε,
to hang [§ 139, (a), 2].
κρίνω, to judge, 48 [§ 111,
6]. [sa.
Kpioaiog, belonging to Cr
κριτῆς, -ov, 6, judge.
616
Kpıriac, -vv, ὁ, Critias.
Kpoicoc, ὁ, Croesus.
κροκόδειλος, 6, crocodile.
κρόμνον, τό, onion.
Κρότων, -ωνος͵ ὁ, Crotona.
ἀρούω͵ to knock, 100 [ Pass.
with o, $ 95, Rem. 1].
ap6rroc 8, concealed, 130.
apérra, to conceal, 121.
piste, to croak [§ 105, 2}.
«τάομαι, to acquire, 112
[Redup., 4 88, Rem. 1;
Subj. Perf. and Opt.
Plup., $ 116, 4].
κτείνω, to kill, usuallydro-
κτείνω [Perf. Act., 3111,
$. Instead of ἔκταμαι
and ἐκτάϑην, τέϑνηκα
and ἀπέϑανον ὑπό τινος
are usenl].
«reis, -evöc, ὁ, comb.
κτενίζω, to comb.
ATHMA, -ατος, τό, posses-
sion.
κτῆσις, 7, possession, 51.
aria, to found, 31.
κυβερνήτης, 6, pilot.
κύβος, ὁ, a die, cube.
Κύδνος, ὁ, Cydnus.
κυλίω, to roll [Pass. with
σ, 4 95].
κύκελλον, τό, goblet.
xuptebu,to be master of 88.
κύριος, w. g., having pow-
er over. [clops.
Κύκλωψ, -wrog, ὁ, Cy-
Κῦρος, ὁ, Cyrus.
aber, κυνός, ὁ, ἡ, dog.
κωλύω, to hinder.
aGpn, 9 village.
κωτίλλω, to chatter, 172.
κωτΐλος 3, loquacious
κωφός 3, dumb.
A.
Asyrävo,to acquire [§121,
1].
Λακεδαιμόνιος, ὁ, Lace-
daemonian.
λαγώς, -ὦώ, ὁ, hare.
λαΐλαψ, -απος, 4, storm.
λαλέω, to talk.
λάλος 2, talkative.
λαμβάνω, to take, δι
[§ 221, 12).
λαμπρός 3, brilliant, 23.
λανϑάνω, to be concealed
from, 89 [Ὁ 121, 13].
λάρυγ ξ, τυγγος, ὁ, throat.
λέαινα, 7, lioness.
λεαίνω, to grind, 48.
λέγω, to say, name; λέγο-
μαι [§ 88, Rem. 2]; (2)
to collect [4 88, 4; Aor.
Pass. ἐλέχϑην and éAé-
yn).
Aeia, 7, booty, 145.
λειμών, -ὥνος, ὁ, meadow.
λείπω, to leave, leave be-
hind [Aor. ἔλιπον ; Pf.
λέλοιπα, § 102, 4).
Aewvidac, -ov, ὁ, Leonidas.
λεπτός 8, thin.
λευκαίνω, to whiten [8 111,
Rem 2].
Aetu, to stone [Pass. with
σ, $ 95].
λέων, -ovrog, ὃ, lion.
λεώς, ὃ, people.
λῆρος, ὁ, loquacity.
Ayoras, -οὔ, ὁ, robber.
λίαν, very, 122.
Λιβύη, ἡ, Lybia.
λέϑος, ὁ, stone.
λιμήν, -évoc, 6, harbor.
λίμνη, 7, marsh, 158.
λιμός, ὁ, hunger.
λογίζομαι, to think, 112.
λόγιος 8, eloquent, 112.
λόγος, ὃ, word, 27.
λοιδορέω, to scold, 109.
λοιμός, ὁ, pestilence, 158.
λοιπός 8,remaining. [5].
λούω, to wash [Cont., § 97,
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
λόφος, ὁ, crest.
λοχάω, W.8., to lie in wait
Avypoc 3, sad.
Avdia, 7, Lydia.
'Λυκοῦργος, ὁ, Lycurgus.
λυμαίνομαι, w.2.,to abuse,
maltreat.
λύμη, 7, disgrace.
λυπέω, to distress.
λύπη, 7, sorrow.
λυπηρός 8, sad, 41.
λύρα, ἡ, lyre.
λυρικός 3, lyric.
Λύσανδρος, ὁ, Lysander.
Λυσίας, -ov, 6, Lysias.
λυσιτελέω, w. ἃ. to be
useful to.
λύχνος, ὁ, lamp, 172.
λύω, to loose, 22 [§ 94, 2.
λωβάομαι, w. a., maltreat
M.
Μαϑητής, -0v, 6, & pupil, 28.
Μαίανδρος, ὁ, Maeander.
μάκαρ, -apoc, happy.
paxapilw,to esteem happy.
μακάριος 3, happy, 108.
Μακεδονία, ἡ, Macedonia
Maxedovixéc, Macedonia.
Μακεδών͵ -Svog, 6, a Mace
donian.
μακράν, far, 131.
μακρός 8, long.
μαλακίζω, to render εὖ
feminate, 124.
μαλακός 3, soft.
μαλϑακός 3, soft, 172.
μάλιστα, especially, 107.
μᾶλλον, rather, 64
Μανδάνη, 7, Mandane.
pavdave, to learn, ἢ
[§ 121, 14].
Mavriveıa, ἡ, Mantinéa
μάντις, -ewc, ö, prophet, 88
μαραίνω, to make wither.
μαρτυρξω, μαρτύρομαι, Ὁ
bear testimony [§134,4].
GREEE. AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
μαρτυρίᾳ, %, testimony.
puprug, -Tupoc, ὁ, witness.
μαστιγόω, to scourge.
μαστίζω, to whip [Char.,
§ 105, 2]. [38.
μάστιξ, -Iyog, %, scourge,
μάχη, ἡ, battle.
μάχομαι, to fight, 16 [§ 125,
15].
μέγας, -aAn,-a,great [448].
μέγεϑος, -ovc,To,greatness.
μέϑη, ἡ, drunkenness.
μεϑήμων, -ονος, negligent,
65.
μεϑίημι, to let go, 168.
μεϑύω, to be drunk, 136.
Μεϑώνη, 7, Methone.
μειράκιον, τό, young boy.
μέλας, -aıva, -ar, black.
μέλει, it concerns, 24
[$ 125, 17].
μελέτη, 4, care.
μέλε, -ἰτος, τό, honey.
μέλιττα, 9, ἃ bee..
μέλλω, to be about to, 88
[$ 125, 16].
μέλομαι, to have a care for
[§ 125, 17].
μέλος, -ovs, τό, song, 121.
μέμφομαι, w. a. to blame;
w. d., to reproach.
μέμψις, -εως, 7, reproach.
μέν ---- dé, truly — but, 38.
Mevédews, -ew, ὁ, Mene-
laus.
pevevaivu, w. d. to bear
ill-will towards.
μένω, to remain; w. a., to
await; second Perf. μέ-
μονα, to desire [$ 111,5].
μερίζω, to divide.
μέριμνα, 7, care.
μέρος, -oug, τό, part.
μεσημβρία, 7, mid-day.
μέσος 3, middle.
μεσότης, mediocrity, 57.
μεστός 3, w. g., full.
μεταβάλλω,ϊο change,130.
peraßoAn, ἡ, change.
μεταδίδωμι. to give a share
of, 159.
μεταλάττω, to change.
μεταξύ, τ. g., between.
μεταπέμπομαι, to send for.
μετατίϑημε,ιο change,159.
neradepw, to remove,
change.
μεταχειρίζομαι, to take in
hand, 65.
μετέπειτα, afterwards.
μετέχω, to take part in.
μέτριος 3, moderate.
μετρίως, adv., moderately.
μέτρον, τό, measure, 28.
μέχρι, until.
#7, not, 16; after expres-
sions of fear, 91.
μηδαμοῦ, nowhere; g. el-
vat, to be of no value.
Μήδεια, ἡ, Medea.
μηδείς, -εμία, -ἔν, DO one
[$ 68, Rem. 1].
μηδέποτε, never, 112.
Μῆδος, ὁ, a Mede.
μῆκος, τους, τό, length.
μήν, -νός, 6, month.
μῆνις, -ἰος or -ἰδος, ἦ, an-
ger. [with.
unvio, w. d, to be angry
μήποτε, never.
μήπω, not yet.
pate — μήτε, neither —
nor.
μήτηρ, -τρος, 7, mother.
unxavaouat, Dep. Mid,
to contrive.
μιαίνω, to pollute [Ὁ 111,
Rem. 2].
μίγνυμι, to mix [$ 140, 4].
Μιϑριδώτης, -ov, ὁ, Mith-
ridates.
μικρός 3, small [des.
Μιλτιάδης, -ov, ὁ, Miltia-
Μίλων, -wvog, ὁ, Milo.
27*
817
μεμέομαι, to imitate.
μιμητής, -od, ὁ, imitator.
Μίνως (Gen. Μένῳος and
Mivo), ὁ, Minos.
μιμνήσκω, to remind
[§ 122, 11].
μίσγω, w. g., to mix with.
μισέω, to hate.
μισϑός, ὁ, reward.
μισϑύόω, to let out.
μνᾶ, -üs, 7, mina [$ 26].
μνήμῃ, ἦν, memory.
μνημονεύω, to remember.
μνηστήρ, -7pos, ὃ, suitor.
pode, with difficulty.
μοναρχία, 7, monarchy.
μόνον, only, 64.
μόνος 3, alone.
μοῖρα, ἡ, fate, 141.
μόρσιμος 2, fated.
Μοῦσα, ἡ, a Muse.
μουσική, 7, music, 87.
Aoxdnpös3,miserable,base.
μόχϑος, ὁ, toil, distress.
μοχλός, ὁ, bolt, 28.
μύζω, to suck [§ 125, 18].
μῦϑος, ὁ, word, 40.
μυῖα, ἡ, fly.
μυρίος 3, innumerable.
μύρμηξ, -κος, ὃ, ant.
μύρον, Td, perfumery, 148.
μῦς, -Dög, ἡ, mouse.
μύχατος 3, inmost, 121.
μύω, to close [formation
of tense, $ 94, 1].
μωρός 8, foolish, a fool.
N.
Nai, truly.
vaiw, to dwell.
Na£ıog, ὁ, Naxian.
vacow, to press together
[Char., § 105, 1].
vavayia, 4, shipwreck.
vaväyög, ὃ, shipwrecked.
ναυμαχία, ἡ, sea-fight.
ναυτής, «οὔ, 6, sailor.
818
ψαυτικός 3, nautical, 161 ;
τὸ ναυτικόν, a fleet.
veaviac, -ov, 6, a youth.
Νεῖλος, ὁ, Nile.
wexpöc 3, dead, 175.
ψέκταρ, -apoc, τό, nectar.
ψέκυς, -voc, ὁ, eorpee, 49.
Nexéa, 4, Nemea.
ψέμω, to divide, 145 [Fat.
venö and νεμήσω ; Aor.
Everpa ; Perf. νενέμηκα;
Aor. Pass. ἐνεμήϑην
and -ἐϑην].
νέος 3, young, 28.
νεότης, -ητος, ἦ, youth.
Νέστωρ, -ορος, 6, Nestor.
νεφέλη, ἡ, clond, 158.
vigor, -ovc, τό, cloud.
ψόω; to swim [$ 116, 3].
weds, -ö, ὁ, temple.
vf, yes, truly.
νῆμα, -aroc, τό, yarn, 136.
νηνεμία, 4, a calm.
ψῆσος, ἡ, island.
vive, to wash.
νικάω, to eonquer, 106.
wmKG, 4, victory.
ψέπτω, to wash.
wiper, it snows.
νοέω, to think.
44.
φομή, ἡ, pasture.
ψομίζω, to think, 56.
φόμεμος 3, customary.
νόμος, ὃ, law.
νόος, ὁ, mind, 29.
νοσέω, to be sick.
νόσος, ἡ, disease, 28.
ψότος, 6, south-wind.
Νύμφη, ἡ, a Nymph.
νῦν, now.
νύξ, νυκτός, ἢ, night.
φυστάζω, to nod [Char.,
4 108, 3).
(87.
vonua, «ατος, τό, thought,
vonöc, -ἄδος, ὃ, 7, nomad.
φομεύς, «ἕως, 6, shepherd,
=.
Eevia, ἡ, hospitality,
ξένος, 6, guest, 122.
Ξενοφάνης, -ους, 6, Keno-
[phon.
BZevopüv, -ὥντος, ὁ, Xeno-
ξέω, to scrape [formation
phanes.
Enpaivw, to dry.
ξίφος, -οὐς, τό, sword.
ξύλον, τό, wood.
ξυῤέω and ξύρομαι toshave
[8 124, 5].
ξύω, to scrape [Pass. with
o, ᾧ 95].
0.
Ὀδάζω, to bite [Char,
§ 105, 2].
öde, this.
ὁδός, 4, way.
ὁδοῦς, -ὄντος, 5, tooth.
ὀδύρομαι, to mourn, 16.
᾿Οδυσσεύς, -ἕως, ὁ, Ulysses.
5c, to smell of [$ 125, 19].
ὅϑεν, whence.
ol, whither.
olaxi{w, to steer [Ang.,
$ 87, 1].
olda, I know [$ 143].
οἴγνυμι, olyw, see ἀνοΐγ.
οἰκεῖος 8, belonging to,
own, intimate.
οἰκέτης, -ov, ὁ, servant.
olxéw, to dwell, 112.
οἴκησις, -ewc, ἢ, dwelling.
οἰκία, ἢ, house. 112.
olxodousw, to build a house,
οἶκος, 6, house.
olxovpéw, to guard a house
[$ 87, 2].
οἰκτείρω, w. 8.) to pity.
οἶμαι, see οἴομαι.
οἰμώζω, to lament [Char.,
« 5105, 2].
οἰκτρός 3, pitiable, 58.
olvoc, 6, wine.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
οἰνοχόος, 6, cap-bearer.
olqpa:, to think [6 125,20).
elec, sach as; w. inf, i>
stead of ὥςτε, so that
5c, ὅϊος, ὁ, ἧ, sheep. [at].
οἴχομαι, to depart [4 1%,
’OIQ, see φέρω.
ὄλβιος 3, happy.
ὄλβος, ὁ, riches, 124.
ὀλιγαρχία, oligarchy, 16].
ὀλίγοι, few.
ὀλίγος 3, little, 58.
ὀλισϑάνω, to slip [§ 121,7}
SAAvpt,to destroy[§138,B}.
ὀλολύζω, to how! (Char,
§ 105, 2].
ὁμιλία, 9 intercourse with
ὄμνυμι. to swear [§ 138, 3}
ὀμνύω, to swear.
ὁμογάστριος, ὃ, brother.
ὁμόγλωττος 2, speaking
the same language.
ὁμοιότης, “Τῆτος, likeness.
ὁμοίως, in like manner,106
ὁμολογέω, to agree with
admit.
dudpyvout, to wipe ff
[$ 140, 6].
ὄνειρος, ὁ, dream.
ὄνησις "ἕως, ἡ, advantage
bvivnut, to benefit [4 135,
4].
ὄνομα, -ατος, τό, NAME.
ὀνομάζω, to name.
ὄντως, really.
ὀξύς, -eia, -0, sharp, sou
ὀπάζω, to bestow, 134.
ὅπη, whither, where.
ὀκίσω, back, 138.
ὁπλέζω, to arm.
ὁπλίτης, -ov, ὁ, heavy-ari-
ed man.
GREEK AND ENGLISH FOCABULARY,
ὅπλον, τὸ, weapon. \
ὅποι, whither.
ὁπόσος 3, quantus, as great
6rooogoüv 3, how great,
how long, soerer.
ὁπόταν, w. subj., when.
ὁπότε, when, since.
ὁπότερος 3, which of two.
ὅπου, where.
’OIITQ, see dpa.
ὅπως, how, 109. .
Spastic, -εως, 9, sight.
ὁράω, to see [Ὁ 126, 4].
bpyaive, to enrage {§ 111,
Rem. 2].
ὀργή, ἡ, anger.
ὀργίζομαι, Dep. Pass., to
be angry.
δρέγω, to stretch, 122.
ὄρεξις, a striving after,108.
dpdöc 8, straight, 57. [108.
ὀρϑόω, to make straight,
bps, peoe 3, early.
ὁρίζω, to fix, limit, 124.
ὄρκιον, τό, oath.
ὄρκος, 6, oath.
ὁρμάω, to rash, 106.
ὁρμή, ἡ, impulse, 57.
ὀρνιϑοϑήρας, -a, 6, bird-
catcher, 24.
ὄρνις, -Idoc, 6, ἡ, bird.
ὄρνθμι, to rouse.
ὄρος, -ους, τό, mountain.
ὄρτυξ, «γος, 6, quail.
ὀρύττω, to dig [Fut. ὀρύ-
fo; Pf. dpdpvya; Pf.
Mid. or Pass. ὀρώρυγ-
μαι, § 89, (a)].
ὀρχηϑμός, ὁ, dance.
ὅσιος 8, holy.
ὀσμῆ, ἢ, smell.
ὅσος, as great as, 67.
Screp, ἧπερ, ὅπερ, who-
ever, 108.
ὑστέον, -oüv, τό, bone.
ὅςτις, ἥτις, ὅ τι, whoever,
67 14 62].
ὀσφραίνομαι, w.g-, to smell
[6 123, 8].
ὅταν, w. subj., when, 87.
öre, when.
ὅτι, that, becanse.
ob, not, 17; οὗ, where.
οὐδαμῆ, nowhere.
οὐδέ, neither, 57.
οὐδείς, -eula, -év, no one
[$ 68, Rem. 1].
᾿ οὐδέποτε, never.
οὐκ, not, 16.
οὐκέτι, no longer, 165.
οὖν, therefore.
οὔποτε, never, 181.
Οὐρανίδαι, ol, gods, in-
habitants of Olympus.
οὐράνιος 8, heavenly.
οὗς, Gros, τό, ear [§ 39].
οὐσία, possession, 64.
otre—otre, neither—nor.
obra(s), thus, 87 [6 7].
obx, not, 28.
ὀφείλω, to owe [4 125, 22].
ὀφέλλω, to nourish, 58.
ὀφθαλμός, 6, eye.
ὄφις, -εως, 6,. snake.
ὀφλισκάνω, to owe [ς 121,
9}.
Fs to bear, endure.
ὄχλος, ὁ, the common peo-
ple (pleös).
by, ὀπός, 9, voice.
ὀψέ, late.
ὄψιος 3, late. [47.
ὄψες, -εως, ἡ, sight, visage,
ὀψοφάγος 2, dainty.
iI.
Παγίς, εἶδος, ἡ, trap, 49.
πάγκακος͵ thoroughly bad.
πάϑος, -ovc, suffering, 53.
παιάν, -Gvoc, 6, war-song.
παιδεΐα, ἡ, education, 87.
παιδεύω, to educate, 16.
819
wavdiov, τό, little child, 181.
παίζω, to play, 17 [ὃ 116,
8].
“ταῖς, -δός, ὁ, ἡ, child, 98.
παίω, to strike.
πάλαι, formerly, long age;
ol πάλαι, the ancients.
παλαίω, to wrestle [ Pass.
W. co, according to § 96}.
καλαιός 8, ancient.
πάλιν, again, 159.
«ανταχοῦ, everywhere, in
all respects. {kind.
παντοδαπός 3, of every
πάντως, wholly, 160.
πάνυ, altogether, very. ᾿
πάππος, 6, grand-father.
παραγγέλλω, to order.
καραδίδωμε, give over to,
commit. [edly.
παραδόξως, adv.,unexpect-
παραϑήκη, 7, something
entrusted, 122.
παραενόω, w.d., to advise,
to exhort.
παρακαλέω, to call to, to
exhort. {147.
παρακαταϑῆκη, ἡ, pledge,
παραλαμβάνω, to receive.
παράνομος 2, contrary to
‘law. |
παραπέτομαι, to fly away.
παραπλάζω, mislead, 128.
παραπλήσιος 3, like.
παρασκευάζω, to prepare,
168.
παρασκευαστικός 3,w.gen.,
skilled in preparing.
mapareivw, to stretch out.
παρατίϑημι, to place be-
side, provide.
παρατρέχω, to ran by or
past. (past.
παραφέρω, to carry by or
πάρειμι, inf.rapetvat, to be
present; πάρεστι(ν), it
is lawfal, in one’s power.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOOABULARY.
φάρειμι, inf παριέναι, te πέμπω, to send [§ 102,56}. πῇ; whither! where!
go by, near.
wapépxouat, to go by.
παρέχω, to offer, grant, 27 ;
Mid, 58.
παρίημι, to let pass, neg-
lect, 168. (158.
παρίστημε, to place beside,
παροινέω, to riot [Ang.,
491, 1].
παροξύνω, to encourage.
zappmoia,n,frankness,163.
πᾶς, every, all
πάσσω, to scatter [Char.,
§ 105, 1].
πάσχω, to suffer,
[$ 138, 12].
πατήρ, -pös, ὁ, father.
πάτριος 2, belonging to
the country.
πατρίς, «ἰδος, ἡ, native
country.
Πάτροκλος, ὁ, Patroclus.
«ἄτρως, -wog, ὁ, uncle, 47.
παύω, to cause to cease,
194 [Aor. Pass. éxat-
od» ; P£ Mid. or Pass.
πέπαυμαιε, to cease; Fut.
Perf. πεπαύσομαι, will
141
xeido, to persuade, 124;
Μιὰ. 22 [Aor.éreiodny,
I obeyed].
“πειϑώ, «οὖς, #7, persua-
siveness.
πεινάω, to hunger [Cont.,
4 97, 3]. [γ.
φειράομαι, Dep. Paas., to
πέλαγος, -ους, τό, BOB.
ΤΠ ελοποννησιακός, Pelo-
ponnesian.
Πελοπόννησος, ἡ, Pelo-
ponnesus.
Πέλοψ, -οπος, ὁ, Pelops.
πελταστής, ὁ, shieldsman.
πένης, τητος, ὁ, ᾧ, poor.
«ενητεύω, to be poor.
πενϑέω, to grieve.
κενϑικῶς ἔχω, w. g. to be
sad about something.
IIENOQ, see πάσχω.
πενία, 9, poverty.
πενιχρύς 3, poor.
πένομαε, te be poor.
ποπαένω, to make ripe, 130
[$ 111, Rem. 2].
πεπρωμένη, ἡ, fate,
πέπων, -ονος, ripe.
περαίνω, to complete, 131
[§ 111, Rem. 2].
mepaiog 3, beyond.
πέρας, -arog, τό, end, 147.
περάω, to transport [$ 98,
(a)].
περιάγω, to lead round.
περιβάλλω,νο throw round.
περίδρομος 2, running
round. [eles.
Περικλῆς, -ἔους, ὁ, Peri-
περιοράω, to overlook,
permit, 147.
περίπλοος, -ους, ὁ, voyage
round. _ [188.
wepippéw, to flow round,
meptotéAAw, to clothe, 130.
περιτίϑημι, to put or set
round. fı21.
περιτρέπω, to turn round,
περιττός 3, beyond the
usual number, more
than sufficient.
wepigépw, to carry about.
Περσεφόνῃ, 4, Proserpine.
Πέρσης, -ov, ὁ, a Persian.
Ilepoıxös, Persian.
πετώννυμι, to expand
[§ 139, (a), 3].
κπέτομαι, ta fly [$ 125,23].
πέτρα, 7, rock.
TIEYOOMAI, see πυνϑά-
vouat.
ug, ἡ, fountain.
πήγνυμι, to fix, make fina
[$ 140, 8).
πῆχυς, -εως, ὁ, cabit, 5].
«ικρός 3, bitter.
πιέζω, ta press.
πίμπλημε, to fill [$ 135,5]
πίμπρημεμιο burn {41356}
πίνω, to drink [$ 119, 3].
πιπίσκω, to give to drink
[$ 122, 13].
πιπράσκω,ϊο sell[$122,14]
πίπτω, to fall [ἡ 123].
«ιστεύω, to trust, 25.
πίστις, “«ἐωξς, ἧ, belief, 138.
πιστός 3, trustworthy, 27.
πίων, -Ὄνος, fat.
«λάζω, to cause to war
der [Char., $ 105, 4].
πλάσσω, to form [Char,
§ 105, 1].
wAaoreny,7, sculpture, 100
Πλάταια, ἧ, Plataes.
πλέϑρον, τό, measure of
100 feet.
πλεῖστος 3, most.
πλέκω, to knit, weare.
wAcovaxsc, oftener.
KALOVERTYC,-OV BVA
πλεονεξία, ἧ, avarice.
πλευρά, ἡ, side.
πλέω, to sail [$ 116, 3;
Cont, § 97, 1].
πλῃγή, 7, & blow, wound
πλῆϑος, -ouc, τό, mult
tude, 72.
πλήν, W. g., except, 145.
πλήρης, -ec, Ww. g- full,
satisfied with.
πλησιάζω, to approach.
πλησίος 3, near, 109.
πλήττω, to strike, 131 [Pf
πέπληγα, have struck;
Aor. Pass. ἐπλήγῇν;
but in composition, ἐκ-
λᾷγην, e.g. ἐξεπλάγην.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULART.
«λίνϑος, ἡ, brick.
πλόος = πλοῦς, 6, Voyage.
«λούσιος 8, rich.
«-λουτέω, to be or become
rich.
«Aourilo, to enrich, 64.
πλοῦτος, ὁ, riches, 89.
«λύνω, to wash [$ 111, 6}.
axvéw, to breathe, blow
{§ 116, 3; Cont., § 97,1].
wöder ; whence ἢ
ποϑέω͵ to desire [§ 98,(b)].
κυιέω, to make, do; εὖ
ποίέω, 107.
manric, «οὔ, ὃ, poet.
ποικίλος 3, variegated, 40.
ποιμήν, ~évoc, 6, shepherd.
woioc ; 3, of what kind 3
πολεμέω, W. d., to carry
On War.
πολέμιος 8, hostile, 88.
πολεμικός 3, warlike.
πόλεμος, ὁ, wer.
πολιορκέω, to besiege.
πόλιες, “φως, 7, city, 51.
“πολιτεία, ἡ, the state, civil
pelity, 90.
πολιτεύω, to govern the
state; Mid, to live as a
Citizen, to govern the
state.
πολέτης, -ov, ὁ, citizen.
πολιτικός 3, relating to
. the state, 165.
πολλάκις, often.
πολλαπλάσιος 3, many
tines more.
πολλοῖ, many. flux.
TloAvdeunnc; «ους, ὁ, Pol-
woAuropavia, ἡ, the rule
of many.
φολυλόγος 2, loquacious.
πολύπονος 2, laborions.
«ολύς, much, 58 [$ 48].
παπολυγέλεια, ἡ, costiiness,
138.
κολυτελής, «ἔς, costly, 168.
πολυφιλέα, ἡ, του! ναδο
of friends.
moAvxeipia, 7, multitude
of hands, of workmen.
rovéw,to toil,107 [$98,(b)].
πονηρός 3, wicked, 48.
πόνος, ὁ, tol, 28. [9%0.
πορεύω, to lead forward,
πορϑέω, te destroy.
πκοριστικός 3, w. g., skilled
in procuring.
πορφύρεος (otc) 3, purple.
Ilooeidwv, -wvoc, 6, Po-
seidon, Neptune.
πόσις, -eoc, ἡ, drinking, 51.
πόσος ; 8, how great?
ποταμός, 6, river.
ποτέ, once, 43.
πότερος, whith of two, 165.
«ποτόν, τό, drink. ΄
ποῦς, ποδός, ὁ, foot. ᾿
πρᾶγμα, -ατος, τό, an δὸ-
tion, 46.
πρακτικός 3, capable of ac-
complishing, obtaining.
πρᾶξις, -ewg, ἢ, an action.
πρᾶος 3, mild, 53.
πράττω, to do, act; πρᾶτ-
τω, πράττομαί Teva ἀρ-
γύριον, to demand of
one; w. adv., 69.
wpérret, it is becoming, 24.
πρέσβεις, oi, ambassadors.
πρεσβευτής, -οὔ, ὁ, ambas-
sador, 121.
πρέσβυς, eta, -v, old.
πρίασϑαι, to buy [§ 135,
p. 165].
πρίν, before; w. inf, 106;
πρὲν ἄν, w. subj., 88.
πρίω, to saw [Pass. with
a, § 93].
mpeaipéouat, to prefer.
πρόβατον, τό, sheep.
πρόγονος, 6, amcestor.
προδίδωμι, to betray.
s21
προδότης, οὔ, 6, betrayef.
προεῖπον (Adr.), to say
before, command.
rpoepxouat, to go before.
προϑυμία, ἡ, willingness.
σρόϑομος 2, willing.
προϑύμως, adv., willingly.
προλείπω, to forsake, 121.
πρόμαχος, ὁ, fighting in
front, champion.
mpovoéw, to consider be-
forehand, 142.
πρόνοια, 4, foresight, 87.
πρόοιδα, to know before-
hand.
xpecayopeta,to eall, name.
προρβάλλω, w. g., to smell
of something.
προςβλέπω, to lock at.
προςδοκάω, to expect, 107.
npösemu, inf, προςεῖναι, to
be present, 47.
πρόςειμι, inf. προςεέναι, to
go to, 168.
προςελαύνω, to advance
towards.
προζέρχομαι, to come to.
mpoc7xet,it ie becoming 24.
mpocnkwy, becoming, 188,
προσημαίνω͵ to reveal, 168.
πρόσϑεν, before; w. g.
[14 24].
npocderéc 8, artificial, 175.
προςκυνέω, w. a., to WOr-
ship, honor.
npöcodoc, 4, approach, 54.
προςπέπτω, to fall upon,
occur, 87.
npocrvéw,to breathe upon.
προςποιέω, to add to, 109.
προςτίϑημι, to add.
προςφέρω, to bring to, 30.
πρότερος 3, before, sooner.
προτίϑημι, to put before,
159.
προτρέπω, to turn to, 41.
προφητεύω, to prophesy.
φρυτανεῖον, τό, court of ῥόπαλον, τό, a club.
justice at Athens.
mpaiog 3, early.
πρῶτος 3, first.
πταίρω, te sneese.
«ταίω, to strike against
[Pass with o, $ 96].
πτερόν, τό, wing.
πτέρυξ, -γος, 7), wing.
πτίσσω, to pound [Char.,
4 105, 1].
πτωχός, very poor, 56.
Πυϑαγόρας, -vv, ὁ, Pytha-
goras.
πυκνός 3, numerous, COM-
πύλη, ἦ, gate.
πυνϑώνομαι, to inquire
[$ 121, 15].
πῦρ, πυρός, τό, fire,
πύργος, ὁ, tower.
πυρόω, to burn.
πώ (enclitic), yet.
πωλέω, to sell
wOrore, ever.
ac; how?
P.
Ῥάδιος 3, easy.
ῥφόδίως, adv , easily.
ῥεῦμα, -arog, τό, stream.
ῥέω, to flow [§ 116, 3].
'PEQ, see φημί.
ῥήγνυμε, to tear, break
{§ 140, 9].
ῥῆμα, -atoc, τό, word.
ῥήτωρ, -opas, 6, orator.
ῥῖγος, -ovs, τό, cold.
ptyow, to be cold [Cont.,
497, 8, (b)].
ῥιπτέω, to throw.
Pinto, to throw.
Bis, ῥινός, 7, Dose.
pip, ῥιπός, ἡ, reed.
ῥοδοδάκτυλος 2, rosy-fin-
gered.
ῥόδον, τό, TOSe.
ῥοιά, ἡ, pomegranate.
ῥυθμός, ὁ, rhythm.
ῥυστάζω, to drag [Char,
4 105, 3].
ῥώννυμε, to strengthen
[4 139, (6), 2].
2.
Σαλαμίς͵ -ives, 4, Salamis.
ouAnıyE,-syyos,h,trumpet.
σαλπίζω, to blow a trum-
. pet [Char., $ 1065, 4].
σαλπικιτῆς, «οὔ, ὁ, trum-
peter.
Σάμιος, ὁ, Samian.
Σαρδανάπᾶλος, ὁ, Sarda-
napalus.
Σάρδεις, -ewv, al, Sardia.
Σάρος, ὁ, the Sarus.
σάρξ, capxac, ἡ, flesh.
σάττω, to load.
σαφῆς, -&, clear.
σαφῶς, clearly.
σβέννυμι, to quench, 163
[$ 139, (b), 4; second
Aor, $ 142].
σέβας, τό, respect, 47.
σέβομαι, to honor, 81.
σεισμός, ὁ, earthquake.
σείω, to shake [| Pasa. with
0, § 95].
σέλας, -aog, τό, splendor.
σῆμα, TO, sign, Monument.
σημαίνω, to give a sign.
σημεῖον, τό, sign.
σιγάω, to be silent.
σιγή, 7, silence.
σίδηρος, ὁ, iron.
σίναπι, -20g, τό, mustard.
σῖτος, 6, corn.
σιωπάω, to be silent.
σιωπή, N, silence.
σιωπηλός 3, silent.
σκάφος, -ovg, TO, trench.
σκεδάζω, to scatter, 124.
σκεδώννυμι, to scatter
[§ 189, (a), 4].
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARX.
oxéAAw,te dry up |§1423}.
σηῶπτρον, τό, sceptre.
σκιά, ἡ, shadow.
σαληρός 3, dry, 121.
σκολιός 3, crooked, 238.
σκοπέω, -ἔομαι, to behold,
consider.
σκότος, ὁ and τό, darkness.
φκώπτω, to joke, 59.
σμάω, to smear | Cont,
$ 97,3; Aor. Pass. ἐσ
μήχϑην].
σοφία, 7, wisdom. [44
σοφιστής, -οὔ, ὁ, sophist,
Σοφοκλῆς, -éoug, ὁ, δορὶ»
ocles.
σοφός 3, wise.
σπανίζω, w. g., to be ia
want.
σπάνις, -εως, 7, need, 5].
σπανίως, adv., rarely, 100.
Σπάρτη, 2, Sparta.
Σπαρτιάτῃς, -ov, ὁ, Spar
tan.
Σπαρτιατικός, Spartan
σπείρω, to sow [Pf. toxe
pa; Aor.Pass.taxäpgv]
σπένδω, to pour libations;
Mid., to make a treaty.
σπεύδω, to hasten, 17.
σπουδάζω, to hasten, be
zealous, 131.
σπουδαῖος 3, zealous, 34.
σπουδαίως, adv., zealously,
63.
σπουδή, ἡ, zeal.
σταγῶν, -ὄνος, ἡ, drop, 53.
στάδιον, τό, stadiam, 13).
σταϑμός, ὁ, a station, 72.
στάζω, σταλάζω, to trickle
[Char., § 105, 2].
στασιάζω, to revolt, be δὶ
variance, 87.
στάσις, -εως, ἡ, faction, 5h.
ατάχυς, -ὕος, ὁ, ear of com.
στέγῃ, 7, roof, house.
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
σνέλλω, to send [second
Aor. Pass., ὁ 102, 2, and
§ 114].
στενάζω, to sigh [Char,
$ 108, 3].
στέργω, w. a., to love; w.
d., to be contented with.
etepéw τινά τι, to deprive
one of something [§ 122,
16]. {of.
arépount, to be deprived
στερίσκω, to deprive of
[§ 129, 15].
στέφανος, ὁ, crown.
στήλη, N, pillar.
ornpiio, to make firm
[Char., $ 105, 2].
στίζω, to prick {Char.,
$ 105, 2].
στολή, ἡ, robe.
στόμα, -aros, τό, mouth.
στορέννομι, στόρνυμι, to
- spread out [$139, (b), 5].
στράτευμα, -ατος, τό, ar-
my, 72.
στρατεύω, to make an ex-
pedition, 89.
στρατηγός, 6, a general.
στρατιά, #, army.
στρατιώτης, -ov, ὃ, soldier.
orparoredetouat, to en-
camp.
στρατόπεδον, τό, encamp-
ment, encamped army.
orparöc, 6, army.
στρεβλόω, to torture.
στρέφω, to turn | Aor. Pass.
ἐστράφην, ἐστρέφϑην ;
Perf. Mid. or Pass.
§ 102, 6].
στρώννυμι, to spread out
[$ 138, (e), 3].
orvyéw, to hate.
Συβαρΐτης, -ov, ὁ, Syba-
rite.
συγγιγνώσκω, to think
with, agree with; éxav-
τῷ, to be conscious; σ.
revi, to pardon.
συγγνώμων, -ον, W.f., par-
doning; (2) agreeing
with.
συγγράφω, to deseribe, 72.
ovyxuKaw,to confound,106
ovyxalpw, to rejoice with.
συγχέω, to pour together,
183.
συκῆ, ἡ, fig-tree.
σῦκον, τό, fig.
συλάω τινά τι, to deprive
one of something.
συλλαμθάνω, to take with,
seize, 107.
Σύλλας, -ov, ὁ, Sylla.
συλλέγω, to collect.
σύλλογος, ὁ, assembly. ©
ovußalvo, to go with, 136.
συμβουλεύω, to advise.
σύμβουλος, 6, adviser.
συμμαχία, ἡ, alliance, aid.
σύμμαχος, ὁ, ally, 106.
σύμπας, all together, 72.
συμπήγνυμι, to join to-
gether, 172.
ovurivo, to drink with.
ovunintw,to fall with, 142.
ovumov&o, to work with,
107. 1142.
συμφέρω, to carry with,
συμφορά, 7, an event, 138.
συναγωνίζομαι, to contend
with.
συναίρομαι, w. g., to. take
part in.
συναπύλλυμι, to destroy
together, 163. (124.
συναρμύζω, to fit together,
σύνδειπνος, ὃ, table-com-
panion.
σύνδεσμος, 6, band; con-
junction. 1142.
συνδιατρίβω, to live with,
σύνειμι, inf. συνεῖναι, to
be with.
σύνειμε, inf. συνιέναι, w.
d., to come or assemble
with. [qual.
συνεξομοιόω, to make e-
συνεπιδίδωμει, to give up,
162.
συνεργός, ὁ, helper.
σύνεσις, -εως, ἡ, under-
standing.
συνετός 3, sensible, 72.
ovriSera,7,intercourse, 22.
συνθάπτω, to bury with.
συνϑήκη, ἡ, treaty.
συνίστημι, to put together.
συννέω, to spin with, 162,
σύνοιδα, to know with;
ἐμαυτῷ, to be conscious,
συντάττω, to arrange, 122.
συντρέχω, to run with one.
συντυγχάνω, to meet with,
happen.
σῦριγξ, -tyyoc, ἡ, flute.
συρίζω (ovpirro), to whis-
tle [Char., ὁ 105, 2].
Σύρος, ὃ, a Syrian. «
σύρω, to draw.
σῦς, ovoc, 6, 7, boar, sow.
ovoxnvéw, to tent with,
eat with.
σφάζω, σφάττω, to kill
[Char., § 105, 2].
σφαῖρα, 7, ball.
σφώλλω, to deceive, 113.
σφόδρα, very, 147.
σφοδρός 3, violent.
σφύζω, to throb [Char.,
4 105, 2].
σφύρα, 7, hammer.
σχάω, to loose |} 98, (a)].
σχολαῖος 3, lazy.
σώζω, to save, 52 | Perf.
Mid. or Pass. σέσωσμαι;
Aor. Pass. ἐσώϑην].
Σωκρώτης, -ους, ὁ, So-
crates.
σῶμα, -arog, τό, the body.
σωτήρ, -ἦρος, δ, preserver.
334 GREEK AND BXGLIGH VOOABULART.
σωτηρία, }, preservation. τέττιξ, -Iyog, ὁ, geasshop-
Cugpovéw, to he of sound
mind, 165.
σῳφροσύνη, ἡ, Modesty, 59.
σώφρων, wise, 36.
T
TaAavrov, τό, talent (a
weight).
τάλαρος, ὁ, little basket.
τάλας, -αἰνᾳα,-αν͵ wretched.
Τάνταλος, ὁ, Tantalus.
τάξις, -εως, 9, order, 121.
ταπεινός 3, low, humble.
ταπειμόω, to humble.
ταράττω, to throw into
confusion, 122.
ταραχή, ἧ, confusion, 122.
τάττω, to arrange, 122.
ταῦρος, ὁ, bull. [40.
ταυτολογία, A, tantology
τάφρος, 4, grave.
τάχα, quiekly, 131.
ταχέως, quickly.
τάχος, -αυς, τό, quickness.
ταώς, ταώ, ὁ, peacock.
τέ--- καί, both-— and, 44.
Τεγέα, ἡ, Tegea.
τείνω, to stretch [Pf τέ-
taxa; Pf. Mid. or Pass.
§ 113}.
reipw, to wear aut, tire, 22.
τεῖχος, -ovc, τό, wall.
τεκμαίρω, to limit,
τέκνον, τό, child.
τελενταῖος 3, last.
τελευτάω, to end, die.
τελευτή, ἡ, end, death.
τελέω, to accomplish, 107
[§ 98, (b)]-
τέλος, -ovc, τό, end, 131.
reuvo, to cut, divide, 180
[6 119].
τέρας, -aroc, τό, wonder.
τέρπω, to delight, 34.
Terpaivo, te bore [$ 111,
Rem. 2].
per.
τεχνάομαι, Dep. Mid, to
τεχνίτῃς, «οὐ, ὁ, artist.
τήκω, te melt, 133.
Τηλέμαχος ὁ, Telemachus
τηλικοῦτος, so large, 67.
τιάρα, ἥ, turban.
τίϑημε, to place, 159; νό-
μους τίϑεσϑαι, to make
τυϑήνῃ, ἡ, BAree.
τίκτω, to beget [Fut τέ-
ξομαι; <Aos. Erexor ;
τιμάω, to honor.
τίμιος 3, honored, 56.
τιμωρέω, to help, 168.
τιμωρία, 7, punishment.
rivo, to expiate, pay
τιτρώσκω, to wound [$122,
τλῆναι, to bear [$ 185, 7].
τοί, indeed, 136.
τοίνυν, hence, therefore.
τοῖος 3, of such a nature.
τοιοῦτος 3, such [§ 60}.
τολμάω, to dare, 106.
τόξευμα, -ατος, τό, arrow.
τοξική, 7, archery.
τοσοῦτος 3, so great [§ 60].
τραγικός 3, tragic.
τραγῳδία, ἡ, tragedy.
τράπεζα, 7, table.
τρέπω, to turn; Mid, to
turn myself; (2) for
myself, i 6. to put to man.
fight [Aor. érpepa; ὑγιαίνω, to be im goed
Mid. «ἄμην ; Pass. érpé-
φϑην; ἐτράπον, -ὅμην,
ἐτράπην ; Pf. Act. τέ-
tpoge ; Pf. Mid. or Pass.
τέτραμμαι, 4 102, 5, 6).
τρέφω, to nourish, 25 [Fut.
ϑρέψω; Aor. pepe;
Pf. τέτροφα, § 105, 2;
Pf. Mid. or Pass. 720-
τρέχω, to ran [$ 126 5].
τρέω, to teenable [498,(b)}.
τρίβω, to rab.
τριήρης, -ἥρους, ἡ, trireme
τρίζω, to chirp (Char.
4 105, 2].
τρίπους, -odog, tripod, 145.
Τροιζήῆν, -ἥνος, ἡ, Troe
DERR-
τρόπαιον, τό, trophy.
τρόποι, ὁ, way, manner δ.
τρυφή, 4, laxury, 33.
τρυφητής, -οὔ, ὃ, luxe
τυγχάνω, to obtain [{ 13],
16].
τύμβος, ὁ, tomb.
τύπτω, to strike.
τυραννίς, -tdoc, 9, tyranny.
τύραννος, ὁ, tyrant, 91.
τύρβη, 7, erowd, bustle
τυφλόω, to make blind.
τύχη, ἡ, fortune, 28.
Y.
Ὑάκινϑος, ὁ, hyacinth.
ὑβρίζειν, w. a.to be Βαυρ-
ty towards one, to msl
treat. [51
ὕβρις, -εὡς, 4, insolence,
ὑβριστής, -od, 6, insolent
dREBE AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
ὅδωρ, τό, water [$ 47].
dei, it rains.
υἱός, 6, son.
ὑπακούειν, w. d., to obey.
ὑπάρχω, to be at hand, to
be, 41.
ὑπεξίστημι, to remove;
Mid, to go or come
out from.
ὑπεραποϑνήακω, W. gen.,
to die for one.
ὑπεράχϑομαι, to be much
grieved...
ὑπερβάλλω, to throw be-
yond, exceed.
ὑπερβασία, 7, trespass.
ὑπερήφανος, haughty,110.
Sorepopaw, to look over,
20 despise.
ἀκάρφρων, haughty, 36.
ὑπηῃρετέω, w. ἃ. to aid,
serve.
ὁπισχνέομαι, te promise
[§ 239, 3].
ὕπνος, ὁ, sleep.. jing.
ὑπογραφή, 9, paint, paint-
smödnua, -aToc, τό, san-
dal, 108.
ὑπόϑεσις, -ews, A, hypo-
thesis.
ὑπομένω, w. &, to await,
endure.
ὑποφέρω, to endure.
ὑποχωρέω, to go back.
ὑστεραῖος 8, following.
ὕστερος 3, later, following.
φφαίνω, to weave [Perf.
ὕφαγκα; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. ὕφασμαι].
ὕψος, -ovc, τό, height, 48.
isda, to elevate.
®.
ΦΑΤῺ, see Eodim.
¢aive, to show, 121.
φανερός, evident, 168.
φάρμακον», τό, remedy.
φάσκω,ἴο assert [§ 122, 17].
φαῦλος, bad, evil.
φείδομαι, Dep. Mid., w. g.,
to spare.
φέναξ, -ἄκος, ὁ, impostor.
Φερεκύδης, -ους, ὁ, Phe-
recydes.
φέρω, to bear, 2 [$ 126, 6).
φεύγω, to flee, 17 [$ 116,3].
φημί, to say [$ 126, 7; in-
flection, $ 135, 8].
φϑάνω, to anticipate, 136
[$ 119, 5].
φϑείρω, to destroy [$ 111,
Pf. Act. ἔφϑορα; Pf.
Mid. or Pass. ἔφϑαρ-
μαι; Hut. Pass. φϑαρή-
σομαι and second Aor.
Pass. ἐφθάρην, in the
sense of to perish].
φϑόνος, ὁ, envy.
φιάλη, 7, drinking-cap.
ῥιλάνϑρωπος 2, philan-
thropie, 43.
φιλέω, to love.
φιλία, ἡ, friendship.
φίλιος 3, friendly.
φιλοκερδῆς, -éc, fond of
gain.
φιλομαϑής, -és, fond of
learning.
φιλόξενος 2, hospitable.
φιλοσοφέω͵,ἴο philosophize.
φώλος, ὁ, a friend, dear.
φιλοχρημοσύνη, 7, avarice.
φλύζω, to bubble [Char.,
$105, 2).
φοβέω, to frighten, 109.
φόβος, ὁ, fear.
φοινίκεος (oös) 3, purple.
φοιτάω, to go to and fro.
φονεύς, -éwe, 6, murderer.
φονεύω, to murder.
φόνος, ὁ, murder.
φορβή, ἦ, pasture, food.
φαορέω, to carry.
ee -tyyo¢, ἦν harp.
825
φράζω, to say, tell, 194.
φρήν, -ενός, 9, mind, 86.
φρονέω, to think, 103.
φροντίζω, to care for, 27.
φροντίς, -idoc, ἡ, coneere,
39.
Φρύξ, -ὕγος, ὁ, a Phrygian.
φυλακή, 7), guard, watch,
φύλαξ, «κος, ὁ, ἃ guard, 51.
φυλάττω, to guard, 36;
Mid, w. a, te guand
against something, 122.
φύσημα, -aros, τό, breath.
. dag, -ewc, ἦ, mature.
φυτεύω, to plant.
giv, to bring forth, 88
[6 142, 10}.
φωνέω, to produces sound,
‘speak.
φώρ, φωρός, ὁ, thief.
φῶς, φωτός, τό, light.
Χ,
Χαίνω, to yawn, 130.
χαίρῳ, το rejoice, 17 {§ 123,
24].
χαλάω, to loosen [§ 98,
(4)}. [22.
χαλεπός 3, troublesome,
χαλεπῶς, adv., with diff-
culty.
χαλινός, ὁ, bridle.
χαλκός, 6, brass.
χάλκεος 3, brazen.
χαρίεις, graceful.
χαριέντως, gracefully.
χαρίζομαι, to gratify, 37.
χάρις, -ἴτος, 7, favor, 39.
χάσκω, to yawn [§ 122, 18].
χειμών, -ὥνος, 6, winter
xeip, -ρός, 2, hand [ὁ 35,
Rem. 2].
xetpoouat, to subdue, IM.
χελιδών, «νος, ἡ, swallony.
χέω, ta pour [§ 116,8].
826 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
xnpéw, to deprive of, 113. χρίω, to anoint [Pass. ψεύστης, -ov, ὁ, liar.
χϑές, yesterday. with o, 4 94, 1]. wiv, ψηνός, ὁ, wap.
χϑών, -dvoc, ἡ, the earth, χρόνος, ὁ, time. ψήφισμα, -aroc, τό, de-
188. χρυσίον, τό, gold. cree, 160.
χιτών, -«ὥνος, ὁ, coat. χρυσός, 6, gold. ψυχή, ἡ, the soul.
χιών, -dvoc, 4, snow. χρύσεος (dc), -é2 (ἢ), -εον ψῦχος, -ovc, τό, cold.
χοεύς, χοῶς, ö,measure,44. (οὖν), golden.
χοίρειος 8, of swine. χρῶμα, «ατος, τό, skin. Ώ.
Ζζολόομαι, to be angry at. χρώννυμι, to color [$ 139, ᾿Ωιδή (δῆ), ἡ, song.
χόλος, 6, anger, 172. (c)]. ὀϑέω, to push [§ 124, 6].
xopeiw, to dance. χώρα, 4, country, region. ὠκύς, -eia, -6, quick.
χορός, 6, dance. χωρίς, w. g., separately, ὦμος, 6, shoulder.
χόω, to heap up [Pass. apart from. évéouat, to buy [ Aug. 481,
with o, § 95]. χωρισμός, ὃ, separation. 4. Comp. πρίασϑαι].
zpäouaı, to use [$96, Rem.; ὥνιος 3, for sale; Τὰ ὦνια,
Cont., § 97, 3, (a)]. ¥. wares.
χράω, to give an oracle Yau, w.g., to touch [| Pass. -d¢, as, when, how, because;
[$ 96, Rem.; Cont,$97, with o, § 95]. . ὡς τάχιστα, as goon =
᾿ 8, (a)]. pau, to rub [Pass.witho; possible; with indef-
χρεία, ἡ, need, 22. [2]. Cont. § 97, 3, (a)]. nite numbers ;— that;
χρῆ, it is necessary [$ 135, ψέγω, to blame. in order that [§ 181].
χρήζω, w.g.,to bein want. pevdie, -éc, false. ὥςπερ, as, just as.
χρῆμα, -aroc, τό, & thing, ψεύδορκος 2, perjured; τό Sere, so that.
property, 41. ψεύδορκον, perjury. ὠφέλεια, 4, advantage.
χρήσιμος, useful, 56. ψεῦδος, -ove, τό, a lie. ὠφελέω, w. a., to benefit
χρησμοσύνη, poverty, 39. ψεύδω, to deceive, 47; ὠφέλιμος 2, useful
χρηστός 3, useful, 41. Mid., 89. bp, ὠπός, ἦ, eye, count
nance.
IT. ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
The numerals after a Greek word, denote the where the meaning of the
word is more fully given, or where another word of the same signification may
be found. For the proper use of the prepositions, the student will depend prin-
cipally upon the definitions given in $$ 168—167.
A. able, to be, δύναμαι, ἰσχύω, abroad, to travel, drodq-
Abandon, ἐκλείπω, xpe- οἷός τε εἰμί, ἔχω. μέω.
λείπω, καταλείπω, ἐπε- abolish, λύω. absence, in the, ἀπών.
λείπω, ἄφιημι. abounding in, εὔπορος 2. absent, ἀπών.
ability, δύναμις, -ews, 4. about, περί, ἀμφί. absent, to be, ἅπεεμε.
abide by, παραμένω, &u- Abradatas, ᾿Αβραδάτας, abstain from, ἀπέχομαι.
μένω. του, ὁ. abundance, ἀφϑονέα, ἡ.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
accompany, ἔπτομαι.
accomplish, ἐξεργάζομαι,
adorn, κοσμέω, ἀγώλλω,
ἀσκέω.
τελέω, διατ., περαίνω, adorn with (invest), ἀμ-
ἀνύω; to accomplish, as
φιέννυμί τινά τι.
a journey, κατανύω; = Adranum, "Adpavov, τό.
to effect, διαπράττομαι.
sccording to, in accord-
ance with, «ara.
account of, on, διά, ἐπί,
ἕνεκα, ὑπέρ.
account, on this, διά τοῦτο.
accuse of, γράφομαι, κατη-
yopéw, διώκω.
accuser, κατήγορος, ὁ.
accustom, ἐϑέζω.
Acheron, ᾿Αχέρων, -οντος,
ὁ :
Acherusian, ᾿Αχερούσιος.
achieve, ἐξεργάζομαι, δια-
‚ πράττομαι.
Achilles, ’AxıÄdevg,-2og, ὁ.
scquainted with, to be,
οἶδα, ἐπίσταμαι.
acquire, κτάομαι, προς-
ποιέω, λαγχάνω.
acquisition, κτῆσις, -ews, ἧ.
scquit, ἀπολύειν.
Acropolis, ᾿'ΑἈκρόπολις,
«εως, ἧ.
across, passage, πάροδος,
act, an, πρᾶξις, -ews, 9,
πρᾶγμα, TO; = work,
ἔργον, TO.
act, to, πράττω, dpaw.
action, see act.
add, mpocrotéw, προςτί-
ϑημι, ἐπιτέϑημι.
administer, δεοικέω, πολι-
τεύω ; to be an admin-
istrator, olxéw; to ad-
Minister the govern-
ment,dtoxéw τὴν πόλιν.
administration, good, εὖ-
vouia, 7.
admire, ϑαυμάζω, ἄγαμαι,
108.
adult, τέλειος 8.
advance, προβαίνω, ὁρμάω.
advantage, ὠφέλεια, ἡ, ὄν-
σις, -«εως, ἧ.
——, an, ἀγαϑόν, τό; ad-
vantages, τὰ ἀγαϑά.
——, for the, of, πρός.
advantageous, χρήσιμος 8,
χρηστός 3, ὠφέλιμος.
advice, βουλῇ, ἡ, βουλεύ-
μα, τό.
advise, βουλεύω, συμβου-
λεύω τινί.
adviser, σύμβουλος, ὁ.
Aeolus, AloAog, ὁ.
Aeschines,Aloxivng, -ov, ὁ.
Astna, Αἴτνῃ, 9.
Aeson, Alowv, -ovog, ὁ.
Aethiopian, an, Aldiop,
-lorog, ὁ.
affair, πρᾶγμα, τό; = 06-
cupation, πρᾶξις, 9.
affirm, φημί.
affliction, πάϑος, -ovg, τό.
afford, παρέχω, παρέχομαι.
afraid, to be, φοβέομαι.
after, μετά.
afterwards, ἔπειτα, peré-
TEILT.
again, αὖϑις, πάλιν.
against, ἀντί, πρός, ἐπί..
Agamemnon, Αγαμέμνων,
-ovoc, ὁ.
age, ἡλικία, 9, 106.
——, old, γῆρας, -aos, τό.
Agesilaus, ᾿Αγησίλαος,
-dov, ὁ.
agreeable, ἡδύς, -eia, -0.
agriculture, γεωργία, 7.
aid,to render, Bord eo, w.d.
Ajax, Alac, -avrog, ὁ.
alarm, to, καταπλήττω.
8237
Alcestis, "ἀλκήστις, -to¢
and -ἰόος, 9. _
Alcibiades, ᾿Αλκιβιάδης,
-ov, 6.
Alexander,’ AAéEavdpog, 6,
alike, ὁμοίως.
all, πᾶς, ἁπᾶς.
alleviate, ἐπικουφίζω; to
alleviate, as grief, Yepa-
πεύω.
alliance, συμμαχία, ἡ.
allow, ἐάω.
allowable, to be, éeors.
ally, an, σύμμαχος, ὁ.
almost, σχεδόν, ὀλίγον
deiv.
alone, μόνος ; adv., μόνον,
already, ἤδη.
also, «ai.
altar, βωμός, ὁ.
alternately, ἐν μέρει.
although, κἄν or καὶ ἐάν,
καιπέρ. ,
always, ἀεί.
am (to be), εἰμί, γίγνομαι,
ὑπάρχω, ἔχω w. adv.
Amazon, ᾿Αμαζών, -ὄνος,
ἡ. [-oö, 6.
ambassador, πρεσβευτής,
ambassadors, πρέσβεις, οἱ.
amid, ἐν.
among, ἐν, παρά.
amputate, ἀποτέμνω.
Anaxagoras,’Avafeyöpag,
-0v, ὁ. [ol.
ancestors, προγεγενημένοι,
ancient, παλαίος 3.
and, καί.
anger, ὀργῆ, 7, χόλος, 6.
angry, to be, ὀργίζομαι,
ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχω.
angry with, to be, ἄχϑο-
pat, 88. [τό.
animal, ζῶον, τό, ϑηρίον,
announce, ὠγγέλλω, 88.
annually, κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν.
anoint, ἀλείφω, χρίω.
another, ἄλλος
ant, μύρμηξ, -mnos, ὁ.
Antisthenes, 'Avriedévye,
-oug, ὁ.
aa one, τὶς.
‘any thing, rl.
any where, ποῦ ; in ἃ selt-
tence with a negative,
οὐδαμοῦ.
anxiety, see care.
Apollo, AnöAiuorv, -ωνος͵ ὁ.
appear, φαίνομαι, 188.
appetite, γαστήρ, -épog, ἧ.
appoint, ἀποδείκνυμε; =
appoint something te.
one, ὁρίζω, 124.
, ᾿Απολλύδω-
ρος, ὁ. ᾿
apprehend, συλλαμβώ»ω.
approach, to, πλησιάξω,
πρόρεεμι.
approbation, δοκιμασία, ἡ.
approve of, ἐπαινέω, 89.
Arabia, ’Apaßia; ἡ.
Arabians, "Apaßeg, οἱ.
Araspas, ’Apäaorag, -on, ὁ.
Aveadian, ᾿Αρκάς, dog, 6.
Archestratus, ’Apyéorpa-
Tog, ὁ.
archer, τοξότης, -ov, &.
archery, τοξικῇ, 7.
ardor, σπουδή, ἡ, ϑυμός, ὁ.
argument, λόγος, ὁ.
Arineus, ᾿Αριαῖος, ὁ.
arise (= to be), γίγνομαι.
Aristides, ᾿Αριστείδης, -ov,
ὁ
Aristippus, ᾿Αρίστιππος, ὁ.
Aristogiton, "Aptor oyei-
Fav, -ovoc, ὁ.
Aristotle, ᾿Αριστοτέλῃς,
-ονς, ὁ.
armament, στόλος, ὁ.
arms (weapons), 57/4, τά.
army, στρατιά, 7, oTpe-
Tog, ὁ.
around, περί, ἀμφί.
arrange, διατάττω, συν-
TuTTw, 124, 159.
arrogant, ὑβριστής, -οῦ,
ὑπέρφρων.
arrow, τόξευμα, τό.
Arsamus, ᾿άρσαμος, 6.
art, τέχνη, 7.
Artaxerxes, ᾿Αρταξέρξης,
-ov, ὁ.
Artemis, "Ἄρτεμις, -Tdog, ἡ.
artificer, ἐργάστης, -ov, ὁ,
ἐργ arg, τοὔ, ὁ.
artist, τεχνίτης, "οὐ, ὁ.
as, ὡς, ὥςπερ.
as long as, δως.
as much, τοσοῦτος.
aS s00N 89, ὡς τάχιστα.
as well as, καί --- xal.
ascend the throne,elc Baoı-
λείαν καταστῆναι.
ascertain, κυνϑάνομαι.
ashamed, to be, αἰδέομαι,
αἰσχύνομαι.
Asta, ᾿Ασία, ἡ.
ask, ἐρωτάω, alréw, 88.
aspire after, ὀρέγομαι, wg,
διώκειν, W. ἃ,
assert, φημί. |
assist, παραστῆναι, συμ-
wovéw, 175; ται 'ἴο de-
fend, ἀμύνω.
assign to, δίδωμι.
associate with, dusty,
σύνειμι.
assured, to be (think), vo-
pile, ἡγέομαι.
Assyria, ᾿Ασσυρία, ἡ.
Assyrian, ᾿Ασσύριος, 6.
astonish, καταπλήττω.
Astyages, ᾿Αστνάγης, -ους,
ὁ.
at, παρά.
Athenian, ᾿Αϑηναῖος, ὁ.
Athens, ᾿Αϑῆναι, αἱ.
Athos, "Adwg, -@, ὁ.
Atlantis, ’ArAavrig, -idog,
ἡ. |
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
attack, an, προςβολή, ἡ.
attack, to, ἐπετέθεμαι͵ 161.
attempt, to, πειρίομαι ;
᾿ς do, woréw.
attend to, ἐπιμελέομαι,
φροντίζω.
Attica, ᾿Αττέκη, 9.
attractive, εὔχαρις, -irer.
auditor, ἀκροατής, -vö, ὁ.
audible, ἀκσυστός 3.
author, alrıog, ὁ. ff.
authority, royal, βασιλεία,
avail, divaznaı, ἰσχύω.
avarice, πλεονεξία, ἡ, $+
λοχρημοσύνη, ἢ. ὦ
avaricious, τλδονέκτης, ον,
avert, ἀλέξω, ἀμύνω, ἀπο-
τρέπω.
avoid, φεύγω. ᾿
await, προςδοκάω, tropi-
vO, W. ἃ.
awake, to be, ἐγρηγορέναι.
awaken, &yeipw, ἀνίστημι;
= to afford, πσρέχω,
ὁπάζω.
away, to lead, ἀπάγο.
B.
Babylon, Βαβυλών, -dver,
9.
back, ὀπίσω; go beck,
bad, the (abstract), κακόν,
ball, σφαῖρα, ἡ. ᾿᾿
banish, ἐκβάλλω.
banter, παέζω.
barbarian, a, βάρβαρος, ὁ.
base, ταπεινός, κακός, πο’
νηρός.
Basias, Βασίας, -ου, 6.
basket, κάνεον, τό.
bathe oneself, λούομαι.
battle, μάχη, 9.
be, to, elui, γέγνομαι, iw
w. adj. or adv.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
be with, σύνειμι.
bear (carry), φέρω, φορέω,
βαστώζω; = endare,
TAgut; == bring forth,
produce, φύω,- ἀναφύω,
τίκτω.
beast (wild), ϑηρίον, τό.
beat, κρούω, 100.
beautiful, καλός 3; bean-
tiful persons, ol καλοί.
—-, the, καλόν, τό.
beautifully, καλῶς.
beauty, καλόν, τό, κάλλος,
“ους, TO.
because, ὅτι, διότι.
beeause of, διά.
become, yiyvouas.
becomes, it, προςήκει.
becoming, tpoc#Kev.
— it is, MPOCHREL.
befitting, προζήκων.
before, πρό.
—— (conj,), πρίν, πρότε-
ρον. .
beforehand, to observe
mpovotw.
beg off, ἐξαιτέομαι.
beget, τίκτω.
begin, ἄρχομαι.
beginning, ἀρχή, 7.
behalf of, in, ὑπέρ.
behind, ὀπίσω; to leave
behind, xaradeiru.
being, to come into, Yiy-
vonat. |
believe (trust), πείϑομαι ;
= think, ἡγέομαι, vo-
pile, δοκεῖ w.d. .
believe in gods, ϑεοὺς vo-
pigo. [μαι.
believed, to be, πιστεύο-
belly, γαστήρ, -epös, ἡ.
beloved, to be, see to love.
benefactor, εὐεργέτης, -w,
ὁ :
beneficenee, εὐεργεσία, 4.
benefit,to,@peA&w,övivgui.
benefit, εὐεργεσία, ἡ, x&-
pte, -ırog, 7; to confer
a, εὐεργετέω w. a.
bereave, orepéw, ünoor.
τινά τινος, ἀφαιρέομαι.
beside, πρός w. d.
besides, ἔτι, πλήν, 145.
besiege, πολιορκέω.
best, to be the, ἀριστεύω.
bestow, δίδωμι, ὀπάζω.
betimes, εὐθύς.
betray, προδέδωμι.
betrayer, προδότης, -ου, 6.
between, μεταξύ. - ,
beware of, Φυλάττομαι
w. a, εὐλαβέομαΐ τι.
beyond, prep., ὑπέρ.
beyond desert, παρ᾽ ἀξίαν.
. bid, κελεύω w. a. and inf.
bind, dew.
bird, ὄρνις, εἴϑος, ὁ, 9.
birth, γένος, -ovc, τό.
bite, δάκνω.
black, μέλας 8.
blame, to, ἐλέχχω, ψέγω.
blessing, a, ἀγαϑόν, τό,
εὐεργεσία, 9.
blind, adj., τυφλός 8.
——~, to make, τυφλόω.
blood, αἷμα, τό.
.bloom, ἀκμή, 9.
bloom, to, ϑάλλω.
blow, to, πνέω.
blow, a, πληγή, ἡ. 5
blush, to, ἐρυϑραίνομαι,
w. Aor. and Fut. Pass.
boar, κάπρος, ὁ.
boastful display of, to
make, ἐπιδείκνυμι.
body, the, σῶμα, τό.
— ins (= together),
σύμπας.
Boeotia, Βοιωτία, 4. .
boil, to, Epa, ζέννυμι.
boldly, ϑαῤῥαλέως.
boldness (of speech), παῤ-
ῥησία, ἡ.
285"
bolt, μοχλός, ὁ.
booty, Asia, ἡ.
bore through, τρυπόω.
borders, μεϑόρια, τά.
born, to θο φῦναι, γίγνομαι
both, ἄμφω.
both — and, καί --- xai, τέ
— καί.
boundary, πέρας, -ατος,
τό, μεϑύρια, τά.
bow, τόξον, τό. _
bowl, mixing, κρατήρ,
«ρος, ὁ.
boy, παῖς, ὁ.
bracelet, ψελλίον, τό.
Brasidas, Βρασΐδας, -ου, ὁ.
brass, χαλκός, ὁ. [4].
brave, ἀνδρεῖος, γενναῖος,
bravely, ἀνδρείως, γεν-
ναίως. [#.
bravery, ἀνόρία, ἡ, ἀρετή,
bread, ἄρτος, ὁ.
break, ῥήγνυμε, διαρή., κα-
τάγνυμε, 100.
— up an encampment,
ἀναζεύγνυμε, ὁρμάω.
in pieces, ὀιαῤῥῆγ-
ψυμι.
breathe, πνέω, ἐμπνέω.
bridge, to throw a, over,
ζεύγνυμε w. a.
bridle, xaAlvög, ὁ.
brilliant, λαμπρός 3.
bring, ἄγω, φέρω, κομίζω.
forward, as a charge,
κατηγορέω.
on, ἐπάγω.
—— to, προςφέρω..
up (= educate), mai-
δεύω, τρέφω.
brother, ἀδελφός, ὁ.
brute, βόσκημα, τό.
build, ἐδρύω, κτίζω, 112
bull, ταυρός, ὁ.
burden, ἄχϑος, -ους, τό.
burdensome, βαρύς, χαλε. ’
mög, ἀργαλέος, 22.
889. ENGLISH AND GREBK VOCABULARY.
burn, καίω, πίμπρημε, 171.
burn down, κατακαίω, ka»
ταφλέγω, ἐμπίπρημι.
bury, ϑάπτω.
business, ἔργον, τό, πρᾶγ-
μα, τό.
bat, 06, ἀλλά.
but also, ἀλλὰ xai.
by, ὑπό, διά, παρά, πρός.
©.
Cadmus, Κάόμος, ὁ.
calamity, ἀτυχία, ἡ, κα-
κόν, τό.
call, to, xa2su, ἀπαγσρϑύω,
29; = name, ὀνομάξω.
call to mind, μνημονσύω
τε.
Osdiixemus, Καλλίξενος, ὁ.
calumny, διαβολή, ἡ.
can (be able), divapas.
capacity, δύναμες, ἡ; in
® private, ἰδίᾳ; in a
public, δημοσίᾳ.
Carduchians, Kupdoi res,
ol, adj., -ἰος.
canse (= affairs), mpäy-
μα, τό.
cauterise, καίω, ἀποκ.
cease, παύομαι, διαλείπω.
Cecrops, Κέκροψ, -οπος, ὁ.
Celaenae, KeAuval, αἱ.
celebrate (== praise), érat-
γνέω.
- -- in song, du, ὑμνέω.
celestial, οὐράνιος 8.
cell, οἰκέδιον, τό.
censure, ψέγω, μέμφομαί
τι, ἐγκαλέω.
centre, μεσός 8, μεσότης,
“τος, fp.
certainly not, or never, οὐ
μὴ [§ 177, 9).
Chaerecrates, Ka:pexpé- ——
THC, τους, 6.
Chaldseans, XaAdaloı, οἱ.
chance, τύχη, ἡ.
change, to, μεταλλάττω,
μεταβώλλω, 58, 159.
character, τρόπος, ὁ, ἤϑος,
care, ἐπιμέλεια, 7, φρον- τους, τό.
τίς, -ἰδος, ἡ, μέριμνα, ἡ,
40.
care, to, care for, take
care for, ἐπιμέλομαι,
φροντίζω, 27.
careful, to be (w. inf),
φροντίζω w. g.
‘carefully, ἐπιμελῶς.
‘carousal, πόσις, -swg, 9.
‘carry, φέρω, βαστάζω.
------ about, περιφέρω.
en ON WEF, πολεμέω W.d.
—— off, ἀπάγω.
‘Carthage, Καρχηδών,
«ὄνος, 8.
-cast down, to, ῥίπτω.
castle, ἄκρα, %.
'Catana, Karavn, ἡ.
catch, ϑηρεύω, ἀγρεύω.
Caucämus, Καύκασος, ὁ.
character of Deity, τὰ τοῦ
ϑεοῦ. [νω.
charge, to take in, λαμβά-
charge, to (= attack), dmı-
rideuas ν΄. ἃ.
chariot, ἅρμα, τό.
charioteer, ἡνίοχος, ὁ.
charm, τερπόν, τό.
me Kapyidnc, -ov,
user, ἡδέως.
Chian, Xiog, ὁ,
child, παῖς, ὁ, #, τέκνον,
τό... - [-ée.
choice (adj.), πολυτελῆς,
choose, alpfouas ; == will,
βουλεύομαι, ἐϑέλω, 48.
Cilicia, Κιλικία, ἡ.
iz
citizen, moAlryg, ὁ.
city, πόλες, ἡ.
clear, to (= free from wild
beasts), ἐξημερόω; =
purify, καϑαίρω.
Clearchus, KAéapyor, ὁ.
cleave to, ἔχομαι w. g.
Cleonymus, Κλεώνυμος, ὁ,
ee
a Κλεῖτος, ὁ.
close (adj.), ἐγγύς.
——, 10, κλείω.
clothes, ἐσθής, -ἦτος, ἡ.
cluster (of grapes), P&
τρυς, ὁ.
cold, ψῦκος, τό, ῥῖγος, τό.
—— (adj.), ψυκρός 8.
collect, σνλλέγω, σννίστῃ
μι.
colony, ἀποικία, 7.
combatant, ἀϑλητής, ὁ.
combat, μάχη, 7; to a
gage in single combat,
μονομαχέω w. ἃ.
come, ἔρχομαι, ἀφικνέο-
μαι; = I have com,
am present, rw.
in or into, elsipy®
μαι, εἴςειμε.
come inte existence, 7i7-
youd.
— together, συνέρχομαι.
‘ ——— to a knowledge οἵ
γιγνώσκω.
command (= office), dp
χῆ, ἡ.
command, to, κελεύω, &m-
PaTTW, Tpocr.; of ge
erals, παραγγέλλω.
command, to be at one’s,
πάρειμι.
commander, ἐπέτακτήρ,
«ἦρος, δ; = a general,
στρατηγός, 6; to bes
commander, ἄρχω.
commend, ἐπαενέω.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
common, κοινός 8.
common origin, συγγενής,
«ἔς. ;
companion, ἑταῖρος, 6.
compare, ὁμσιόω τινΐ τι,
εἰκάζω τινί τι.
comparison with, in, παρά
W. ἃ. |
compassion upon, to have,
κατελεέωώ τινά.
competent, ἱκανός 8.
complete, to, διατελέω.
comptlsion, ἀνάγκη, %.
comrade, ἑταῖρος, ὃ.
conceal, ἀπο-, κατακρῦπο
τω, κεύϑω, 88.
concealed, κρυττός 8.
concerns, it, μέλει.
concerned, to be, dpovri-
ζω w. g.
condemn, κρίνω ; to death,
Savarov.
confer blessings, ed ποιέξω
τινά, εὐεργετέω τινά;
great blessings, μεγάλ,
evepy. τινά. 2
confide in, ἐπιτρέπω, πε-
ποιϑέναι.
confidence, to have, in,
ϑαῤῥέω.
confine (= shut up), xa-
τακλείω, kadeipyw.
conformably to, μετά w. g.
confused noises, ϑύρυβοι,
οἱ. [w. d.
congratulate, συνήδομαι
conquer, νικάω, 88.
conscious, συνειδώς ; to be
conseious, σύνοιδα.
consider, σκοπέω, νοέω,
188: be considered, vo-
pilouac.
considerate (== moderate),
μέτριος 3.
——, to be, σωφρονέω.
consideration, λογισμός, ὁ.
constitutionally, νομίμος.
construction (building),
οἰκοδόμησις, -εως, 7.
consult an oracle, μαντεύ-
onat.
consume, ἀναλίσκω.
contemplate, ϑεωρέω, oko-
πέω.
contend (fight), μάχομαι ;
as in music, with des-
.tiny, etc. ἐρίζω w. ἃ.
contentedly, very, ebrap-
κέστατα.
contention, ἔρις, -ἔδος, ἧ.
contest, μάχη, "ἦ, ἀγών,
«ὥνος, ὁ.
continue, διατελέω, διάγω.
continually, ἀεί, συνεχῶς ;
also by διατελέω, with
the Part.
contrary to, παρά.
contrive, unxaväonat.
control, κυριεύω w. δ.
κρατέω W. g.
conversation, διάλογος, ὁ ;
= instruction,öptAde, 7.
converse with, διαλέγομαί
τινι.
convict, to, ἐλέγχω, ἐξελ.
convince, πεΐίϑω w. 8.
coöperation, with the, of,
συνεργοῦντός τινος.
corn, σῖτος, 6. [ὁ.
—, ear οὗ στάχυς, -ὕος,
corpse, νέκυς, -ὕος, 6, ve-
κρός, ὁ.
correct (adj.), ὀρθός 8.
correctly, ὀρϑῶς.
corrode, ἐσθίω.
corrupt, to, διαφϑείρω.
Cotyöra, Κοτύωρα, τά.
coansel, βουλῆ, 7.
country, χώρα, γῆ, 7; one’s
country, πατρίς, -ido¢, 7.
—~—, of the, belonging to
the, πάτριος 3.
——, native, πατρίς, -Ἶδος,
$81
courage, ἀρετή, ἡ, Ouuör,d.
courageously, ϑαῤῥαλέως.
courier, ἄγγελος, 6, Aus:
ροδρόμος, ὁ.
course, δρόμος, ὁ ; == jour -
ney, ὁδός, 7.
court, ϑύραι, al.
—— of justice, δικαστῆ-
ptov, τό.
cow, βοῦς, 9.
creature, ζῶον, τό.
credit, to, πείϑομαι.
Crete, Κρήτη, ἡ.
crime (= insolence) ὕβρις,
«εὡς, 9.
Critias, Κριτίας, -ov, ὃ.
croak, κρώζω.
crocodile, κροκόδειλος, 6.
Croesus, Κροῖσος, ὁ.
Crotonian, Kporwved rye,
-ov, 6.
crown, a, στέφανος, 6.
crush, ϑραύω.
cry, 8, κραυγή, ἧ.
cry out, κράζω, dvax.; to
cry out to, βοάω revit.
cubit, πῆχυς, -δως, ὃ.
culture (education), tar-
deia, ἡ, παίδευσις, 1.
cultivation, see culture.
cup, κύπελλον, τό.
custom, ἔϑος, -συς, τό,
37906, -ους, τό; it is an
established custom, vo-
μίζεται.
Cyaxares, Κυαξάρης, -ove
(ace. -nv), ὁ. [ὁ.
Cyclops, Κύπλωψ, -wmog,
Cyrus, Κῦρος, ὁ.
D.
dainty food, ὄψον, τό.
dance, to, χορεύω, ὀρχέἕο-
μαι.
danger, xivdovoc, 6.
, to incur, or be in
danger of, κενδυνεύω.
dare, τολμάω.
Darius, Δαρεῖος, ὁ.
dark (= black), μέλας.
darkness, νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ.
daughter, ϑυγάτηρ, -Tpög,
N.
day, ἡμέρα, ἡ.
daybreak, at, ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ.
ae ἀγάλ-
a οὐ ἀπαλλάτ-. —
Tw; =to free from,
ἐλευϑερόω.
—— up, παραδίδωμι.
delivered, to be (== to be
saved), σώζομαι.
dead, ἀποτεϑνηκώς, νεκρός deliverance (== safety),
death, ϑάνατος, ὁ.
——, to put to, ἀποκτείνω.
deceive, ἐξαπατάω, 47,108,
118.
decide, κρίνω, diax., δια-
᾿ γιγνώσκω.
— upon, βουλεύομαι.
declare, ἀποφαίνομαι, ἀπο-
δείκνθμε.
decree, a, ψήφισμα, τό.
en πρᾶγμα, τό, ἔργον,
τό.
deem, νομέζω ; to be deem-
ed worthy, ἀξιοῦμαι.
deep, Batic.
defeat, ἦττα, ἡ.
defence (by speech), ἀπο-
λογία, ἡ.
defend, φυλάττω ; to de-
fend oneself by speak-
ing, ἀπολογέομαι; hy
force, or fortress, ἀμύ-
vopuas.
defendant,&moAoyovuevoc.
deformed (= disgraceful),
αἰσχρός 3.
degenerate, to, μεταβολὴν
ἐπὶ τὸ κακὸν λαμβάνω.
deity, ϑεῖον, τό, δαιμό-
viov, τό, Sede, ὁ.
delay, to, μέλλω.
deliberate, to, βουλεύομαι.
to, εὐφραίνω, TEp-
σωτηρίς, ἡ ; == freedom
from, ἀπόλῦσις, ἡ.
. Delos, Δῆλος, h.
demand,to (= ask), αἰτέω.
demean oneself to one,
προςφέρομαί rive ; kind-
ly to, φιλοφρόνως ἔχω
d ‘
w. d.
Demeter (Ceres), δημή-
τηρ, -τρος, ἡ.
Demosthenes, Δημοσϑέ-
νῆς, τους, ὁ.
deny, ἀρνεομαι.
depart, ἄπειμι, ἀπαλλάτ-
τομαι, ἀπέρχομαι.
departed (= dead), ἀπο-
τεϑνηκώς.
dependent, to be (= beru-
ἰϑὰ) ἄρχομαι,κρατέομαι.
deplore, κλαίω.
deposite, τέϑημε; in some-
thing, ἔν rev.
deposited, a thing, παρα-
καταϑήκη, 7.
deprive, crepéw, ἀφαιρέο-
μαι, 113.
derive (= enjoy, 6. g. ad-
vantages), ἀπολαύω;
derive gain, κερδαίνω.
descendant, ἔκγονος, ὁ, 7.
descended from, Exyovog,
6, ἡ.
describe, συγγράφω.
desert, beyond one’s, παρ᾽
ἀξίαν.
desert, to, καταλείπω, ἀπο-
φεύγω.
deserter, φυγάς, -üdog, ὁ.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
deserve, ἄξιος εἰμί.
deserving, ἄξιος.
——, to think, ἀξιόω.
desire, a, ἐπιϑυμία, i, öpe-
Eis, -εως, 9.
desire, to, ἐπιϑυμέω; =
wish βούλομαι; = pray,
εὔχομαι.
desirable, alperög.
desirous, to be (= wish),
ἐϑέλω.
despair, to, ἀπογιγνώσκυ,
ἀϑυμέω;; of oneself,
ἀπογιγνώσκω ἐμαυτύν.
despise, ἀτιμάζω, κατο
φρονέω.
despised, to be, xarafpe
νέομαι.
destiny, μοῖρα, ἧ.
destroy, φϑείρω, d:ag., κα’
ταλύω, ὄλλυμι;
overthrow, ἀνατρέπο.
determine (= resolve),
γιγνώσκω.
determined, it is, δοκεῖ.
devote oneself to (=tum),
τρέπομαι.
Diana, "Aprepic, «ἴδος, 1.
die, to, ϑνήσκω, ἀποῦ,
τελευτάω.
—— for, ὑπεραποϑνήσκω.
differ from, dcagépo w. §.
different, διάφορος 2; Ὁ
run in different direc
tions, διαδιδράσκω.
—— from, to be, διαφέρω.
difficult, βαρύς, -εἴα, +
δύσκολος 2.
dignity (gravity), Papo
«ους, τό.
dig through, διορύττυ,
διασκάπτω.
diligence, σπουδή, ἡ:
diligent, σπουδαῖος 3.
diligently, σπουδαίως.
Diodorus, Acédupag, ὁ.
Diogenes,A:oy ένης, 006
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
Diphridas, Διφρίδας, -a, ὁ.
direct, to, ἰϑύνω ; = to-
wards something, κα-
τευϑύνω ; oneself, τρό-
disclose, ἐκκαλύπτω.
discourse, λόγος, ὁ.
discourse, to, διαλέγομαι.
discover (== show), ¢aiva.
discreet, φρόνεμος 3, ovve-
τός 8.
disease, νόσος, 4.
disgrace, λύμη, 7.
disgraceful, αἰσχρός ὃ.
disgracefully, αἰσχρῶς.
dishonest, πονηρός 8.
dishonor, drınia, ἡ.
dishonorable, αἰσχρός 3,
ἀδικής, -ἔς .
disorder, ταραχή, #; to
throw inte diserder, ra-
parre.
dispel, Abo.
dispirited, to be, ἀϑυμέω.
display, ἀποφαίνομαι, Gro-
δείκνυμε.
displease, ἀπαρέσκω rivt.
displeased with, to be, dy-
ϑομαι.
dispose (== arrange), τεχ-
νάομαι.
disposed, kindly, εὔνους 3.
disposition (-- feeling),
γϑθώμη, 4, φρένες, αἱ.
dissension, διχοστασία, ἡ.
dissipate (== scatter), oxe-
δάζω.
dissolute, ἀκρᾶτής, «ἔς .
dissolve, καταλύω, διαλύω.
distance, at a, from, πρό-
σωϑεν.
distant, to be, from, ἀπέχω.
distinguish oneself, be dis-
tinguished for, diapepw.
distinguished for, rien
μος 2.
disturb, raparre, συγχέω.
disturbance, ταραχή, ἢ.
divide, μερίζω, νόμω, κα-
τανέμω.
divine, ϑεῖος 8.
divination, μαντική, ἡ.
do, πράττω, ποιέω, δράω.
do good to, εὐποεέω τινά,
ebepyeréw τινά; do
wrong, ἀδικέω, κακῶς
ποιέω.
dog, κύων, κυνός, 6, %.
domestic, ὁ οἶκοι.
dominion, ἀρχή, 9, ἦγεμο-
via, N.
door; Sipe, ἢ, πύλη, ἡ.
double-speaking, διχομθ-
doc 3.
doubtful, to be (== fear-
fal), φοβέομαι.
Draco, Δράκων, -ovrog, ὁ.
draw, σύρω.
draw up (of an army),
Tatra; (laws), ov
γράφω.
dress, στολή, 9, ἱμάτιον,
τό.
dress in, ἀμφιέννυμι.
dried up, ἐσκληκώς, -via,
«ὅς.
drink, to, shy.
—— out or up, ἐκπένω.
drive, ἐλαύνω.
away, ἀπελαύνω,
ἀπωϑέω. [ϑέω.
—— in, εἰςελαύνω, εἴςω-
—— out, ἐξελαύνω.
drunkenness, μέϑη, %.
during, κατά, ἐν.
duty, d&ov, τό, 167.
duty or part of any one,
it is, εἰμί w. g:
dwell, olxéw, vaio; = to
be, εἰμέ ; = be in, mpöc-
ξιμὲ; == lie, κεῖμαι.
dwelling, οἰκία, ἡ, οἶκος,
ὁ, οἴκημα, τό.
E.
Each, ἕκαστος.
each other, ἀλλήλων.
eager to learn, ¢/Aopa-
Ing, -éc. [2.
for honor, φιλότιμος
eagle, ἀετός, 6.
éar, οὖς, ὠτός, τό.
earn, to (= work ont),
ἐξεργάζομαι. ὶ
earth, the, γῆ, 7, χϑών,
χϑονός, ἡ.
earthen, κεράμειος 8.
earthquake, σεισμός, ὁ.
ease, ἡσυχία, 4.
easily, ῥᾳδίως.
east, ἕως, -ὠ, #.
easy, ῥᾷδιος 3.
ext, ἐσθίω.
echo, ἠχώ, -0v¢, ἡ. [4]
edge, ἔσχατος [$ 148, Rem.
educate,raudevw, διδάσκω.
education, παιδεία, 4, dt-
δασκαλία, 9.
educated, πεπαιδευμένος.
effect, to (= accomplish),
ἐξεργάζομαι.
effeminate, to render, μα-
Aakilw.
efforts (= by themselves),
καϑ' ἑαυτούς.
Egypt, Αἴγυπτος, ἡ
Egyptian, Αἰγύπτιος, ὃ.
either — or, 7—7.
elder, see old.
elegance (=gracefulness),
χάρις, -ırog, h.
elevate, ὑψόω.
eloquent, λόγιος 8.
else, everything, ἄλλος,
λοιπός 3.
embassy, πρεσβεία, ἧ.
embrace, ἀσπάζομαι.
employ, χράομαι w. ἃ,
884
employed in, to be zeal-
ously, σπουδάζω.
empty itself (of a river),
ἐμβάλλω, ἐξίημι.
emulation, φιλοτιμία, ἡ.
encampment, a
dov, τό.
—, to break up an, üya-
ζεύγνυμι. [w. d.
encounter, to, ὑποστῆναι
encourage, TapaxaAéu, πα-
ραμυϑέυμαι.
end, τέλος, -ove, τό; end,
6. g. of war, κατάλῦσις,
eu, N.
end of life, τελευτὴ τοῦ
βίου.
endeavor, to, πειράομαι,
Dep. Pass.
endure, φέρω, ὑποφέρω,
ὑπομένω.
enduring, very, καρτερι-
κός 8.
enemy, πολέμιος, ὃ, ἐχ-
ϑρός, ὁ.
energy, δύναμις, -εως, 9.
enfeeble, reipw, κατάγνυμι.
engage with (of an army),
συμμίγνυμι.
in a naval battle,
vavyayéw; in single
combat, μονομαχέω.
enjoin upon, ἐντέλλω.
enjoy (= taste), ἀπολαύω
w. g., γεύομαι w. g.;
allow one to enjoy (par-
ticipate in) something,
μεταδίδωμί τινί τινος.
enlarge, πλατύνω.
enlist, συγγράφω; intrans.,
orparebouat.
enrich, πλουτίζω.
enslave, dovAöw.
enslaved, to be, δουλεύω.
enter, εἰςρβάλλω; = to
take a course or way,
τρέπομαι ὁδόν.
entreat, ἱκετεύω.
entreaty, δέησις, -ewc, ἡ ;
to gain release by, éfas-
τέομαι.
entrust to, ER
enumerate, καταριϑμέω.
envy, φϑόνος, ὁ.
— to, φϑονέω; envy
one something, or on
account of something,
-φϑονέω τινί Tivos.
Epaminondas, ᾿ Επαμινών-
δας, -ου, ὁ.
Ephesus, "Ἔφεσος, ἡ.
epic poetry, ποίησις τῶν
ἔπων, or τὰ ἔπη.
equal, ἶσος 8.
— to make, ἐξισόω.
equivalent, to be, dvrafeig |
εἰμι.
ere, πρίν.
erect, to, ὀρϑόω, ἐξορϑόω ;
as a statue, ἀνατίϑημε,
ἀνίστημι. [ὁ.
Eretrian, ᾿Ερετριεῦς, -éuc,
err, ἁμαρτάνω.
escape, to, ἀποφεύγω w. a.
especially, μάλεστα..
establish, καϑίστημι.
esteblished custom, it is,
ψομίζεται.
esteem, to, τιμάω, ϑερα-
πεύω; == value much,
ποιέομαι περὶ πολλοῦ
== consider, think, vo-
pile.
—— happy, μακαρίζῳ, ζη-
Adu.
esteemed, τίμιος 8.
estimable, ἄξιος 8. fe.
Euphrates, Εὐφράτης, -ov,
Europe, Εὐρώπη, ἡ.
Euryalus, Εὐρύαλος, ὁ.
Eurysthenes, Εὐρυσϑένῳς,
-ovg, ὁ.
Eurystheus, Εὐρυσϑεύς,
«ἕως, ὁ.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
Euxinus Pontus, Ἐδξεν
νος Πόντος.
even, «ai.
— if, καὶ ἐάν.
—— now, καὶ νῦν.
1—— though, καὶ. ἐάν.
evening, δείλη, ἡ.
event, συμφορά, 9.
ever (== always), dei
every, ag; = φυάκρω,
ἕκαστος.
everything, πᾶν.
everywhere, πανταχοῦ.
evident,d7Ao¢ 3, φανερός 8.
evidence, τεκμήριον, τό
evil, κακός 8, πονηρός ὃ,
φαῦλος.
evil, an, κακόν, τό, κακία,
9.
evil-doer, κακοῦργος, ὁ.
. exact from, to, ἀπαιτίω
ti Tıva, πράττω τί τινα.
exalt, ὑψόω.
examine, ἐξετάζω, ἐλέγχω.
examination, ἔλεγχος, τό
== deliberation, κρίσι(,
-“εως, ᾧ.
excellence, καλφοκἀγαϑίε͵
ἡ, ἀρετή, ἡ
excellent, ἀγαϑός.
except, πλήν.
excess {= luxury), Tp
$7, 7; excess in any
thing, ἀσέλγεια, ἡ.
exchange, to, μεταλλάτ-
Ta; = to exchange
one thing for another,
ἀντικαταλλάττομαί τί
τινος.
excite, ἐγείρω.
exclude, ἀπελαύνω.
execute (= accomplish),
ἐπιτελέω, διανύω.
exercise, to, γυμνάζω, de
xéw; == make trial of
πειράσμαι.
exercise, ἄσκησις, -εῶ, δ.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
exhort, tporpérw,. παρα-
καλέω. [γέγνομαι.
existence, to come into,
expect (= hope), ἐλπίζω ;
== look for, ὑποπτεύω,
προςδοκάω. ᾿
expedition, to make: an,
orparetu.
experience, ἐμπειρία, 7.
exploit, πρᾶγμα, τό.
exposed to, see stratagems.
express, to, φράζω͵ ἐκφαίνω,
ἀποφαίνω, 160.
extent, dpsdudc, ὁ, πλῆ»
Boe, -ους, τό.
exterior, σχήματα, τά.
extol, εἰς ὄψος ἐξαιρέω.
extraordinarily,de:vdc,100
eye, ὀφθαλμός, ὁ. ᾿
F.
Face, πρόσωπον, τό, ὄψις,
-εὡς, fp.
fail, ἐκλείπω, προλ., κα-
Tad., ἐπιλ.
fair (== beautiful),zaAör 8.
faithful, πιστός 3.
fall, to, πίπτω.
— away, ano-, περιῤῥέω.
—— back (= retreat),
ἀποχωρέω.
—— upon, ἐμπίπτω.
—— into (of a river), εἰς-
βάλλω, ἐμβάλλω.
falsely, to swear, ἐπιορκέω.
fame, εὔκλεια, ἡ, κλέος,
-ἔους, τό; == report,
δόξα, ἡ.
famine, λιμός, ὁ.
famous, εὐκλεής ’ «ἔς ’ φα-
vepöc 8.
far (of distance), μακράν,
τηλοῦ ; with Com.roAd.
far, so far from, ἀντί.
fare, to, πράττω, w. adv.,
e. g. ev, to fare well.
fast, to hold, ἔχομαι w. g.
fasten, κλείω.
fat, πίων, -ovorc.
fate, μοῖρα, ἡ ; = fortune,
τύχη, ἡ.
fated, it is, εἴμαρται w. d.
father, πατήρ, -τρός, ὃ.
fault, ἁμαρτία, 9.
favor, χάρις, -troc, 9.
——, a, εὐεργεσία, ἡ.
—— on, to confer a, do to,
ed ποιέω w. a., ebepye-
TEwW. 2. [σχω.
——, to receive a, εὖ πά-
fear, φόβος, ὁ, 54.
——-, to, φοβέομαι, δέδοικα.
fearful, δεινός 8; to be,
φοβέομαι.
feet, πόδες, οἱ. for, ὁ.
fellow-combatant, σύμμο-
fetter, a, πέδη, ἡ.
few, ὀλίγοι, -at, -α.
field, ἀγρός, ὁ, yvia, 7.
fight, to, μάχϑμαι.
fill, πίμπλημι, ἐμηίπλημι.
filled with, μεστός 3, πλή
PNS, EC. j
find, εὑρίσκω, 141.
fine (beautiful), καλός 3.
fine, a, χρήματα, τά, ζημία,
7; to punish by a, ζη-
μιόω.
fir, πεύκη, 9.
fire, πῦρ, πυρός, τό.
——, to set on, ἐμπέίπρημι.
firm, βέβαιος 8; stand firm,
ὑπομένω.
firmness, καρτερία, ἡ.
first, πρῶτος 3; adv. πρῶ-
τον, πρῶτα, Ta.
first, at, ἐν ἀρχῇ.
fish, a, ἐχϑύς, -ὕος, 4.
fit (proper), ἐπιτήδειος,
lxavoc 3.
fit, in a, of madness,
μαινόμενος, δαιμονῶν.
fitted (= of such a na-
ture), τοιοῦτος.
835
fix (= determine), ὁρίζω ;
=to make firm, 77y-
γυμι.
flagon, χοεύς, ὁ [§ 41].
flatter, κολακεύω.
flatterer, κολαξ, -ἄκος, 5.
flattery, κολακεία, 4.
flay, dépw.
flee, φεύγω.
— away, ἀποφεύγω w. a.
flesh, κρέας, -éwe, τό, σύρξ,
-ρκός, N.
fling, perro.
flock (= herd), ἀγέλη, ἡ.
flourish, to, ϑάλλω.
flow, to, péw.
—— by, παραῤῥέω.
flower; a, ἄνϑος, -ους, τό,
ἄνϑεμον, τό.
flute, αὐλός, ὁ, σῦριγξ,
-tyyoc, ἧ.
fly away, ἀναπέτομαι, ἐκπ.
follow; ἔπομαι w. d., ἀκο-
λουϑέω w. ἃ.
folly (madness), uavia, ἦ.
fond of learning, φιλομα-
Bic, -&.
fond of war,d:AomdAepoc 8,
food, βρῶμα, τό, Bopé, ἡ.
fool, μῶρος, 6.
foolish, μῶρος 8.
foot of, at the, ὑπό. [yap.
for, mp6, ὑπέρ, ἐπί; (conj.),
forbid, ἀπαγορεύω.
force, military, δύναμις,
“EW, ἡ.
—— (violence), Bia, 7.
——, to employ, βιάζομαι.
forefathers, mpoyeyevnuf-
vor, ol.
forehead, μέτωπον, τό.
foreign, ἀλλότριος 3.
foreign to (= besides),
πλήν τ΄. β΄, χωρίς W. Fy
ἔξω w. g.
foreigner, ξένος, 4.
foresee, προοράω.
886 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
forever, ἀεί; to be foe- gain, to (= acquire), ara party), ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπο-
ever (= abide in), elui, ovat; =get gain, ae βαένω.
διατρίβω. [w.g. δαίνω, to gain release, —— through, διέρχομαι.
forget, λανϑάνομαι, ἐπιλ. ἐξαιτέομαι. ——— round, περίειμι.
former (= old), παλαιύς 3. gallant and noble, καλὸς goal, τέρμα, -arey, τό
forthwith, τὴν raxziorys, καὶ ἀγαϑός; γενναῖος 8. goat, aif, -γός, ὃ, ἡ.
ὡς τάχιστα. gape, κέχηνα, 130. goblet, κύπελλον, τό.
fortify, τειχίζω. garden, κῆπος, ὁ. God, a god, ϑεός, ὁ.
fortune, τύχη, 4. garland, στέφανος, ὁ. goddess, θεά, 4. [τά
—, good, εὐτυχία, ὁ. garment, ἱμάτιρν, τό, oro- gold, χρυσύς, 6, χρυσίον,
fortunate, εὐδαίμων, -9v0S, An, 9. golden, χρυσέος, «οὖς 3.
εὐτυχής, -&. gate, πύλη, ἡ, Pipa, ἡ, gone, te be, οἴχομαι.
——, to be, εὐτυχέω, eb general (commor), κοι- good, dyadic, καλός; of
δαιμονέῳ. νός 8. ἀγαϑοί, the good; τὸ
forward, to bring as 4 general, a, στρατηγός, ὁ. ayadév, the good (ab
charge, κατηγορέω. generation of men, ye stract).
found, to, «τίζω, ἱδρύω. vea, ἧ. good will, εὔνοια, ὁ.
foundation, apyrrig, -idos, generonsly, ἀφθόνως. @overn, κρατέω w. g, &
4; metaphor., ϑεμέλεον, get out of the way of, εὖ χω w. g.
τό. κω ὁδοῦ. government, πολιτεία, ἡ;
fountain, πηγή, ἡ. _ giant, γίγας, -αντος, ὁ. == ἃ goverued provines,
frankness, παῤῥησίᾳ, 4. gift, δῶρον, τό. ἀρχή, ἡ.
free, ἐλεύϑερος. give, δίδωμι, τίϑημι. governor’s residence, 4p
——, to, Abu, ἐλενθερύω. ——~ 3 sign or signal, oy- χεῖον, τό.
—— from, ἀπολύω. μαίνω. graceful, zapisıg, ἐπίχα
freedom, ἐλενϑερίᾳ, 7; of —— one a share of any- _ pic, -ἴτος.
the state, abrovouia, 7. thing, peradidupl τινί gracefully, zapeévras, in
— ofspeech,rapßnoiah. τινος. χαρίτως.
freemen, ἐλεύϑεροι, ol. —— ἃ response, xpGu. Graces, χάριτες, al
friend, φίλος, ὁ, ἐραστής, —— back, ἀποδίδωμι. gracious, ἵλεως [$ 80].
«οὔ, ὁ. — way, ἐνδίδωμι. grain, σῖτος, ὁ.
friendship, φιλία, %. gladiy, very (=by. all grant, to, δέδωμε, παρέχῃ.
frivolity, ῥαδιουργία, ἡ. means), πάντως. gratify, χαρίζομαι.
frog, βάτραχος, 6. go,ßaivw,ropevona, πρός- gratitude, εὐχαριστία, 4,
from, ἀπό, ἐκ, παρά. εἰμε, 89. χώρις, -ἴτος, 9.
fruit, καρπός, 6. —— about, mepıßaivw, ἔῥ- gravity, βάρος, -ous, τό.
fruits, first, ἀπαρχαΐ, al. bw. great, μέγας.
fugitive, φυγάς, -ἄδος, 6. —— back, ἀναχωρέω. greatly, μεγάλως, δεινῶς.
fulfil, τελέω. away, ἄπειμι, ἀπέρ- great deal, πολύς. [{.
full, μεστός 8, πλήρης, -es. χομαι, ἀποβαΐνω, olyo- greatness, μέγεϑος, -0v%
full power, ἐξουσία, ἡ. μαι. Grecian, 'EAAnvıröc.
furnish, ἐπαρκέω. down (as the sun), Greece, Ἑλλάς, -ὅδος, ἡ.
future, the, τό μέλλον. xaradvonat. Greek, a, Ἕλλην, «νος, ὁ.
—— forward, προϊέναι. _ grief, λύπη, ἧ.
G. —— into, εἴσειμε; as a grievous, χαλεπός 3.
Gain, κέρδος, -ους, τό, κτῆ- contest, etc., ἐνδύω. grind, λεαίνω. [
σις, -εως, h. ——, over (as to another ground, the, χϑών, -σνύρ,
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
gross, μέγας.
growing old, not, dygpuc,
" -@v.
grow up, αὐξάνομαι, with
Pass. Aor.
guard, the, φυλακή, ἡ.
guard, ta, φυλάττω, diag.
—, against, to be. on
one’s guard, φυλάττομαι.
guardian, φύλαξ, -κος, ὁ.
guide, a, ἡγεμών, -ὄνος, ὁ,
ἡνίοχος, ὁ.
—, to, ἰϑύνω, κατευϑύ-
vo, ἡγέομαι..
guilty (= wrong deer),
ἀδικῶν.
Gyges, Γύγης; -ου, 6.
gymnasium, παλαίστρα, ἡ.
Η.
Hades, &öns, -ov, ὁ.
hair, ϑρίξ, τριχός, ἡ.
halcyon, ἀλκυών, -όνος, ἧ.
hand, χείρ, χειρός, ἡ.
happens, it, συμβαίνει, τυγ-
χάνει, συμπίπτει.
happiness, εὐδαιμονία, ἧ.
happy, εὐδαίμων.
——, to be, εὐδαιμονέω,
εὐτυχέω.
—, to esteem, μακαρίζω.
harbor, λεμῆν, -Evog, ὁ.
hard (difficult), χαλεπός 3.
hardship, πόνος, ὁ.
hare, λαγώς, -0, ὁ.
Harmodius, ᾿Αρμόδιος, 6.
harmony, ὁμόνοια, ἧ.
harp, φόρμιξ, -ıyyos, 7.
harp-playing, κιϑαρῳδία, ἡ.
haste, σπουδῇ, ἧ.
hasten, σπεύδω.
hastily, to flee, οἴχομαι
φεύγων [§°175, 3].
hate, to, μισέω, ἐχϑαίρω.
hated, to be, ἀπεχϑάνομαι.
hateful, μισητός 3.
haughtineas, ὕβρις, -ews, 7.
ρήφανος 2.
have, ἔχω, κέκτημαι.
head, κεφαλή, ἧ.
heal, ἰάομαι, ἀκέομαε.
health, ὑγέεια, 7.
hear,dxotw,dxpocouat w.g.
heart, καρδία, ἡ, κῆρ, κῆ-
pos, τό; =feeling or
disposition, ψύχη, ἡ.
heat, ϑάλπος, τους, τό.
heaven, οὐρανός, ὁ.
Hecter, Ἕκτωρ, -ορος, ὁ.
heed, to take, εὐλαβέομαί
τι. :
height, ὕψος, -ους, τό; =
summit, ἄκρα, 7}.
Helen, 'EAévy, ἡ.
Hellas, Ἑλλάς ᾽ «ἄῤος, ἡ.
Helle, "EAAn, 7.
Hellenes, Ἕλληνες, ol.
Hellespont, Ἑλλήςποντος,͵
ὁ.
help of, with the, σύν.
Hera (Juno), Ἥρα, ἡ.
herald, κήρυξ, -Dxog, ὁ.
Hercules," Ἡρακλῆς, ἔους͵ ὁ.
herd, ἀγέλη, ἡ.
herdsman, νομεύς, -ἕως, ὃ,
ποιμήν, -ἕνος, ὁ.
Hermes (Mercury), ‘Ep-
μῆς, -00, ὁ.
hero, ἧρως, -woc, ὁ.
hide, κρύπτω, ἀποκ. 12.
high-souled, μεγαλόψῦχος
highly, very, καὶ πάνυ.
highly, to esteem more,
περὲ μείζονος ποιέομαι ;
to reverence or prize
highly, epi πολλοῦ
ποιέομαι,
hill, γήλοφος, ὁ.
hinder, efpyw. [6.
hired laborer, 97¢, ϑητός,
Hipparchus, Ἵππαρχος, ὁ.
his own (business, posses-
sions), τὰ ἑαυτοῦ.
29
881
. haughty, ὑπέρφρων, ὑπε- historian, ἱστοριογράφος, ὁ.
hold (have), ἔχω; hold
fast, ἔχομαι w.g.; take
hold of (= toueh, em
gage in, effect), ἅπτο-
μαι w. g.
hold before, προβώλλω.
hold out (= sustain the
attack), ὑποστῆναι.
holy, ἱερός 3.
home, οἶκος, ὁ.
Homer, Ὅμηρος, ὁ.
honor, to, τιμάω.
honor, τιμή, ἡ.
honor-loving, φελότεμος 2.
honorable, etdofo¢ 2, xa-
Adc 3, φανερός 3.
honored, τέμεος 8.
hoof, ὁπλή, ἡ.
hook, ἄγκιστρον, τό.
hope, ἐλπίς, -Idog, %.
hope, ἰο, ἐλπίζω, ἔλπομαι.
horn, κέρας, τό |$ 39],
horse, ἔππος, 6.
host, ξένος, 6. la.
hostile, πολέμιος 8, ἐχϑρός
house, οἶκος, ὁ, οἰκία, h..
household, οἶκος, ὁ.
how? πῶς; in an indi-
rect question, ὅπως;
how much, ὅσος 3.
human, ἀνθρώπινος 8;
human race, τὸ γένος
avd porwr.
humane, φιλάνϑρωπος 8.
hunger, λεμός, ὁ.
——, to, be hungry, wee
vaw.
hunt, to, ϑηρεύω.
hunter (huntsman), 8η-
pevrae, «οὔ, ὁ.
hartful, βλαβερός 3.
husband, ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ.
Ι.
If, el, ἐάν, ἦν, ἄν.
ignorant, ἀμαϑής, «ἔς.
ines, νόσος, 9.
ills, κακά, τά.
Mustrious, λαμπρός 8.
imitate, μεμέομαι ; == em-
ulate, ζηλόω w. a.
immediately, εὐθύς͵ wape-
χρῆμα.
immoderate, äxpärhc, -ἐς
immortal, ἀϑάνατος 2.
impel, xporpére.
impiety, ἀσέβεια, ἡ.
implant, ἐμφυτεύω.
implanted. ἐμφῦτος 3.
impose upon (enjein),
φροςτάττω,ἐντέλλωπὰ, i
βιοῦν ἀπραγμοσόνη, ῇ,
ἀργία, ἡ, ῥᾳστώνη, ἡ
incite, προτρέπω.
increase, to, αὐξάνομαι.
kscur danger, κενδυνεύω.
imäsed, μέν ; indeed—but,
pév — δέ.
indictment, ypag7, ἡ.
imdolent, to be, ὀκνέω.
industrious, σπουδαῖος 3.
inferiors, ταπεινότεροι, of.
inglorious, ἄδοξος 3.
imhabit, οἐἰκέω.
inimical, ἐχϑρός 8.
injure, κακῶς ποιέω, βλάπ-.-
τω w. a, ἀδικέω w. ἃ,
injurious, βλαβερός 8.
injury, βλάβη, ἡ, ζημία, ἢ.
injustice, ἀδικία, ἡ.
innate, ἔμφῦτος 2.
imnocent, οὐκ ddixürv.
insane, to be, μαίνομδε,
δαιμονάω.
inscribe, γράφω.
instead of, ἀντί, ὑπέρ.
instil, ἐντέϑηρι.
instruct, παιδεύω, διδάσκω.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
jest, to, παίζω, σκώπτυω.
journey, δρόμος, ὁ, ὁδός, ἡ.
joy, χαρά, ἡ.
ἡπᾶρε, a, κριτής, -οὔ, 4,
δικαστής, -0%, ὁ.
——, to, κρίνω, διακ.
insträction, παιδεία, }, de- judgment, to render, dr
δασκαλία, ἡ, ὁρελία, 4.
imsufficient, to be, ἐνδεῶς
ἔχω.
intellect, γνώμη. ἡ. [ἡ.
intelligence, σύνεσες, -εως,
intelligent, συνετός 8, φρό-
ψιμος 3.
intemperate, dapärhc, -éc.
intend to, μέλλω ; also by
Fat. Part.
inter, Darra.
w. d., ἡ, κοινωνία, ἡ.
—, to have, with, ὁὀμι-
λέω w.d.
intestines, τὰ ἐντός.
intimate (of friends), ol-
κεῖος.
into, εἰς.
intoxication, μέϑη, ἡ.
intrust (commit), ἐπετρέ-
πω.
invent, ἐὑρέσκω.
invention, εὕρεσις, » “EQ, ἡ.
inventor, εὑρέτης, -ov, 6.
invest 4 city, περικαϑέζο-
μαι πόλιν.
invest with (= clothe),
ἀμφιέννυμέ τινά τι.
invincible, ἄμαχος 2.
Tonia, 'lovie, ἡ.
irrational, ἄφρων, ävoor 2.
island, νῆσος, 7.
issue, τέλος, τό, κατάλῦ-
σις, -εως, ἧ.
ivory, ἐλέφας, -αντος, ὃ.
J.
κἄζω; in the, of, πρός
wg.
Jupiter, Ζεύς, ὁ.
just δίκαιος.
justice, δικαιοσύνη, }, δίκη,
7; court of, δικαστή-
kindly, to demean oft
self, φιλοφρόνως Exo.
kindly-disposed, etvovs,
“OUP.
. kindness, εὐεργεσία, ἡ.
= favor, χάρις, -Irog, 4.
kindred, οἰκεῖος, ὁ.
king, βασιλεῦς, «ἕως, 6 ᾽
ἄναξ, -ακτος, 6
kingly nature, βασιλικὸν
ἦϑος.
know, γιγνώσκω, &xiore
peat, οἶδα.
know truly, ἐπέσταμαι.
knowledge of, to come ὦ
a, γιγνώσκω.
known, well-known, dart-
pös 3, δῆλος 8.
innumerable, ävapidun- Javelin, ἄκων, -ovroc, 6, ----- to make, δηλόω.
Tog &.
ἀκόντιον, τό
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
L.
Labor, πόνος, ὁ.
‚lover of, φιλόπονος 2.
——, to, (= work), &pyü-
ζομαι ; with toil, rovéw;
with the accompanying
κάμνω.
laborer, hired, ϑής, Saréc,
laborious, πολύπονος 2.
Lacedaemonian, Aaxedat-
μόνιος, ὁ.
lack, σπανίζω, δέω.
lake, λίμνη, 9.
land (region), χώρα, ἡ;
by or upon land, κατὰ
γῆν; native, πατρίς,
-ldeg, 9.
large sum, πολύς.
Larissa, Λάρισσα, ἡ.
lasting, ἔμπεδος 3,
late, ὄψιος, adv. ὀψέ, la-
ter, ὕστερον.
latter, οὗτος.
law, νόμος, 6; by law, xa-
TA νόμον or νομίμως;
observant of, νόμιμος 3.
lawgiver,vopodérne, -ov, 6.
lawlessness, ἀνομία, ἡ.
lay (place), ridguc; lay
by or up, κατατίϑημι.
— waste, διαφϑείρω,
τέμνω.
lazy, to be, βλακεύω.
lead, to, ἄγω, ἠγέομαι.
—— away, ἀπάγω.
— round, περιάγω.
leader, ἡγεμών, -övoc, ὁ.
leaf, φύλλον, τό.
lean, ἐσκληκώς.
learn, μανϑάνω ; = ascer-
tain, εὑρίσκω, πυνϑά-
ψνομαι.
learning, fond of, φελομα-
dns, «ἔς.
leave, ἐκλείπω, καταλείπω.
----- behind, καταλείπω.
leave off, παύομαι.
unrewarded, ἐάω el-
vat ἀχώριστον.
leisure, σχολῇ, 7.
——, to be at, to have,
σχολάζω.
length, μῆκος, -αυς, τό ; πα
number, measure, ἀρεϑ-
poe, ὁ.
lenity, πραότης, -ἢτος, ἧ.
Leonidas, Aewvldag, -ου, ὁ.
Lesbos, Λέσβος, ἡ.
lesson, μάϑημα, -ατος, τό.
lest, after a word denoting
fear. AN y = that not, by
Iva, ὅπως or ὡς μή.
let (permit), ἐάω.
letter, an alphabetical,
γράμμα, -aTog, τό.
letters, γράμματα, τά.
liar, ψεύστης, -ου, ὁ.
liberate, ἐλευϑερόω.
licentiously, ἀκολάστως.
lie, a, ψεῦδος, -ovs, τό.
——, to, ψεύδομαι.
——— (be sitnated), κεῖμαι.
—— in wait for, ἐνεδρεύω.
life, βίος, ὁ, Sur, 9.
light, φῶς, φωτός, τό; =
a light or lamp, λόκ-
voc, 6. -
lightning, ἀστραπή, #.
like, ὅμοιος 3, ἴσος 8, πα-
ραπλήσιος ; == such as,
olog.
likeness, ὁμοιότης, -NTag,
N.
lineage, γένος, -oug, τό.
listen to, Gxpocoua: w. g.;
= to obey, reidanaı,
ὑπακούω.
literature, γράμματα, τά.
little, ὀλέγος 3; adv. μεκ-
pov; less, μεῖον.
live, βιόω, Caw, βιοτεύω.
—— with, συγχγέγνομαι
w. d., συνδιατρίβω w.d.
long, μακρός ; == much,
a ἈΜλΩ [ro.
look after (guard), ¢vAar-
look at, βλέπω, προςβλέ»
πω, ἀντιβ.
loquacious, πολυλόγος ἃ,
κωτίλος 8.
lord, κύριος, ὁ, δεσκότης,
-ov, ὁ. ?
lose, to, ἀπόλλυμε, ἀπο-
loss, to be at a, ἀπορέω.
Loves, ἔρωτες, ol.
love, ἔρως, -wrog, ὁ.
of pleasure, φιληδο»
via, N.
1 10, φιλέω, στέργω:
= ardently, épaw.
lover, ἐραστής, -οὔ, ὁ.
— of labor, φιλόπονος
2. [8
—— of wisdom, φελόσοῤορ
Lybia, Διβύη, ἡ.
Lycian, Δύκιος.
Lycurgus, Αυκοῦργος, ὁ.
Lydian, Λύδιος.
lyre, λύρα, ἡ, κεϑάρα, ἡ.
Lysias, Avoiac, -ου, 6.
Μ.
Macedonia, Maxedovia, ὁ.
Macedonian, a, Μακεδών,
«ὄνος, 6.
mad, to be, μαίνομαι.
madness, in a fit of, μα,»
vöuevog, δαιμονῶν.
magistrate,d:cacrTH¢,-00,6.
magistrates, ἀρχαί, al
magnificent, peyatenpe:
RUC -é.
magnificently, πολυτελῶς.
maiden, κόρῃ, ἡ.
maintain (affirm), φημί.
majestic, μέγας.
make, ποιέω, cause &
make or be made, make
for oneself, ποιέομας;
make one something,
340
ἀποδείκνυμι; = place,
τίϑημε; = take place,
γίγνομαι. [τεύω.
make an expedition, στρα-
make use of, χρώομαί τινι.
man, ἄνϑρωπος, ὁ, ἀνήρ,
ἀνδρός, ὁ.
——, old, γέρων, -ovrog, ὁ.
man-seller,avdpamodıarng,
-ov, ὁ.
manage, ὀιοικέω, πολι-
τεύω; = arrange, δια-
τίϑημι.
manifest, φανερός 8, δῆλος
3, σαφής, -é¢.
——, to (show), δηλόω.
manner, τρόπος, ὁ; =
custom, ἦϑος, τό, &dog,
τό.
——, in like, ὁμοίως.
mantle, ἱμάτιον, τό.
many, πολύς.
march, a, σταϑμός, ὁ.
——, to, στρατεύομαι, πο-
off ), ἐκστρατεύομαι.
mark (evidence), rexun-
prov, τό.
marry, γαμέω [§ 124, 1].
mass, red-hot, διάπῦρος 2.
master, κύριος, ὁ, δεσπό-
της, -ov, ὁ.
matter (work), ἔργον, τό.
maturity, ἀκμή, ἡ.
meadow, λειμών, -ὥνος, ὁ.
mean (base), κακός 3, al-
σχρός.
means, by no, οὐδαμιῶς,
AKıoTa.
Mede, a, Μῆδος, ὁ.
Medéa, Μήδεια, ἡ.
Media, Μηδία, ἡ.
Median, Μηδικός.
medical, ἰατρικός.
meet, to, ἀπαντάω; =
fall in with, ἐντυγχάνω
συντυγχάνω w.d., προς»
πίπτω w.d.
meeting, a, συνουσία, ἧ.
Megarian, Μεγαρεύς, -ἔως͵
ὁ
Melitus, Μέλητος, ὁ.
melt, τήκω, 133.
memorial, ὑπόμνημα, τό,
μνῆμα, τό.
memory, μνήμη, ἧ.
Memphis, Μέμφις, -ἰος and
«δος, ἧ. [6.
Meneläus, Μενέλεως, -ew,
Menon, Μένων, -wvog, ὁ.
mention, λόγος͵ 6, uüdog, ὁ.
mentioning, worth, ἀξιό-
Aoyog 2.
mercenaries, ξένοι, ol.
mercifal, ἔλεως.
mere, μόνος; adv., μόνον.
message, ἀγγελία, ἡ.
messenger, ἄγγελος, ὁ, 4;
== ambassador, σπρεσ-
βευτής, -οὔ, 6; plural,
πρεσβεῖς.
Messenian, Μεσσήνιος, ὃ.
middle, middle of, μέσος 3.
midnight, μέσαε νύκτες.
might, δύναμις, -εως, 7.
mild, πρᾶος, -sia, -ov,
ἥπιος.
military years, στρατεύσι-
μα ἔτη.
milk, γάλα, -axrog, τό.
Milo, Μίλων, -wvog, ὁ.
mina, μνᾶ, ἡ.
mind, νοῦς, ὁ, φρένες, al.
——, to call to, μνημο-
ψεύω Tt. 5
mindful of, to be, μέμνη-
mingle with, μέσγω, κε-
ράννυμε.
Minos, Μίνως (Gen. Mi-
voor and Μίνω), ὁ.
Minotaur, Mivöravpog, ὁ.
mirror, κάτοπτρον, τή.
misfortune, a, ἀτυχία, ἡ,
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
κακόν, τό, συμφορά, ἡ,
τύχαι, αἱ.
mislead, παράγω, παρα-
πλάζω, ἐξαμαρτάνω.
mix, μίγνυμε, μισγέω, κε-
-ρώψννυμι.
mob, ὀῆμος, 4.
moderate, μέτριος 3; ==
abstinent, ἐγκρατῆς, -&c.
moderation, μέτρον, τό,
μεσότης, -ἢτος, ἧ.
modern, »éo¢, comp.deg. of.
modesty, αἰδώς, -οῦς, ἢ,
σωφροσύνη, #.
money, χρήματα, τά.
> travelling, ἐφόδεον,
τό.
month, μήν, μηνός, ὃ.
monument, μνῆμα, τό.
moon, σελήνη, 7. °
morals, #97, τά.
mote, mAsiov, πλέον, plus;
μᾶλλον, magis (comp.
much). |
mortal, ϑνητός 3.
most, πλεῖστος 3.
most of all (especially),
μάλιστα.
mother, μήτηρ, -τρός, ἧ.
motion, κίνησες, -εως, ἡ.
——, to be in, κιρέομαι
w. Pass. Aor. [π a.
mount, to, üvaßaivo ἐπέ
᾿ Mountain or mount, ὄρος,
-0UG, TO.
mourn, ὀδύρομαι, λυπέο-
er
for, κλαίω, πενϑέω.
[μαι. mournful, λυγρός 3, λυ-
πηρός 8; = plaintive,
γοώδης, -ες
mouse, Hue, -dög, ὁ.
mouth, στόμα, -ατος, τό.
move, to, κινέομαε; zu
affect, κατακλάω τινά.
moved to pity, to be,
ἐλεαίρω, οἰκτείρω.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOGABULART.
much, πολύς.
multitude, πλῆϑος, -ove,
τό, of πολλοΐ.
murder, to, φονεύω.
Muses, Μοῦσαι, al.
muse-leader, μουσῃγέτης,
-ov, ὁ.
music, μουσική, ἡ.
must, dei, χρή.
Mysus, Μυσός, 6. fos, ὁ.
Mytilenaean, Mur:Agyai-
N.
Naked, γυμνός 3.
name, ὄμομα, τό.
—, to, ἀνομάζω, καλέω,
ἀπο-, προςαγορεύω..
nation, ἔϑνος, -ους, τό.
native land or country,
πατρίς , “δος, %.
pature, φύσις, -εως, ὃ;
kingly, βασιλικὸν φᾶος.
naval, to engage in a, hat-
tle, ναυμαχέω.
Naxian, Νάξιος, ὁ.
near, παρά; adj., πλησίας
8; adv. ἐγγύς.
necessary, ἀναγκαῖος 8.
——, to he, δεῖ, χρῆ w.
acc. and inf.
necessity, ἀνάγκη, 9.
neck, δέρῃ, ἧ.
Roeklace, στρεπτός, ὁ.
meed, to, δέομαι w. g.,
χρύζω w. g.
peediness, σπάνις, -εως, ἧ.
neglect, to, ἀμελέω w. g.;
=to esteem lightly,
dAcywpéw ; = overlook,
περιοράω;; == pass by,
πάρειμι. fr.
neighbor, yeirwv, -avog, ὁ,
neither, οὐδέ; neither —
or, obre—otte, pare
— pare.
Neptune (Poseiden), Ilo-
σειδών, -Gvoc, ὁ.
Nestor, Νέστωρ, -ορος, ὁ.
net, a, νεφέλη, ἧ.
never, οὕποτε, οὐδέποτε,
μήποτε, μηδέποτε, 112.
nevertheless, ὅμως.
news, ἀγγελία, 9. [ö.
Nicocles, Νικονλῆς, -ἔους,
night, νύξ, νυκτός, #.
Nile, Νεῖλος, ὁ.
Nisus, Nioog, ὁ.
no, no one, none, οὐδείς,
μῃδείς; by no means,
οὐδαμῶς, ἥκιστα; no
longer, οὐκέτι (μηκέτι).
noble, ἐσϑλός 8, γενναῖος
8, εὐγενής, -ἐς ; == hon-
or-loving, φιλότιμος 2.
nebleness of mind, yev-
ναιότης, -ητος, ἧ.
nobly, γενναίως. [aé.
noises, confused, ϑόρυβοι,
aaa adi ἡ, βεῤῥᾶς,
«ὦ, ὁ.
north-wind, βοῤῥᾶς, -d, ὁ.
nose, pic, ῥινός, #.
not, οὐ (οὐκ, oby); with
the Imp., #7; not only,
ot μόνον ; not lesa, ot-
δὲν ἧττον; not even,
οὐδέ (μηδέ).
nothing, οὐδέν (μηδέν).
nourish, τρέφω.
Numa, Νουμᾶς, -ä, 6.
number, ἀριϑμός, ὁ.
nurture, to, τρέφω;
educate, παιδεύω.
=
Ο.
O that, eide w. opt.
oath, ὄρκος, ὁ.
——, false, ἐπίορκον, τό.
obedient, κατήκοος 2 w.d.
obey, πείϑομαι w.d, ὑπα-
κούω w. ἃ.
objeet to (bring.as acharge
against), ἐγκᾳλόω τί
τινί.
29*
841
abliged, to be (necessary),
dei w. acc. and inf,
ἀναγκαῖος eipi.
oblivion, λήθη, ἡ.
obscure, ἀφανής, -é. [8.
observant of law, νόμιμος
observe (perceive), αἰσϑά-
νομαὶ W. g. OF ἃ.
observe beforehand, προ-
νοέω.
obtain, λαμβάνω, τυγχάνω
W. g.
occasion (cause), αἴτιος ὃ.
——, (bring), ἄγω.
odious, αἰσχρός.
-- to be, anexd ἄγομαι.
(noe, Οἰνόη, 9.
offend, ἁμαρτάνῳ.
offer (afford), παρέχω ; as
a gift to a divimity, dva-
τίϑημε; = offer saeri-
fice, Ha.
offering, to bring an, @v-
σίαν παιέομαι. [ἡ.
office (im the State), ἀρχή,
often, παλλάκις.
often as, as, ὅταν, ὁπόταν
[see $ 183, (b)}.
oil, ἔλαιον, τό.
old, πρέσβυς, -eıa, -v, γε-
ραάιός 8; never growing
old, ἄγηρως.
— age, γῆρας, τό. [ὁ.
—— man, γέρων, -ovros,
Olympus, "Ὄλυμπος, ὁ.
omit, παραλείπω.
once, ἅπαξ; == before,
πρότερον ; = at ἃ cer-
tain time, more. .
ane, any one, some ene,
τὶς; when contrasted
with the other, by εἰς
μέν or ἕτερος.
one another, οὗ, ἀλλήλων.
anly, μόναν.
open, to be, ἀνέῳγα.
opinion, an, γνώμη, ἡ.
342
opinion, to be of, νομέζω,
ἡγέομαι.
—— from the, νομίσαντες.
opposite, ἐνάντιος 8, Ere-
ρος 3.
oppressive, χαλεπός 3.
oracle, χρησμός, ὁ.
——, to consult an, par
τεύομαι.
order, κόσμος, ὁ ; = a line,
τάξις, «εως, 9.
order that, in, va, ὡς.
—, good, εὐκοσμία, ἢ.
, to (= to arrange),
Tärto, diar.; = com-
mand, κελεύω w. acc.
and inf., ἐντέλλω.
origin, common, συγγε-
ving, -&.
ornament, κόσμος, ὁ.
Orthia, Ὀρϑία, ἡ.
Osiris, Ὄσιρις, -Idog, ὁ.
Ossa, "Ὄσσα, 4.
other, the (= alter), Ere-
ρος 3; = alius, ἄλλος.
otherwise (= another),
ἄλλος.
ought, δεῖ, χρή, ὥφελε.
σαὶ οὗ ἐκ.
over, ὑπέρ.
overhanging (over), ὑπέρ.
overtarn, ἀνατρέπω, περιτ.
owe, ὀφείλω.
own, ἴδιος 3; his own, τὰ
ἑαυτοῦ.
ΟΣ, βοῦς, "βοός, ὁ.
Ῥ.
Pain, ἄλγος, -ους, 76;
grief, λύπη, N; = 6%
vere, ὀδύνη, ἡ.
painting, ζωγραφία, ἤ.
palace, royal, βασίλεια, τά.
pale, ὠχρός 8.
Parasang, παρασάγγῆης,
του, ὁ.
parden, to, συγγιγνώσκω.
parent, γονεύς, -ἔως, ὁ.
Paris, Πάρις, -idog, ὁ.
park, παρύδεισος, ὁ.
part, a, μέρολγ -ους, τό.
——, to, μερίζω ; take part
in, μετέχω w. g-
participate in, μετέχω.
parties, both, ἀμφοῖν λόγος.
pass (= go), πορεύομαι.
—— by, rapaßaivw.
—, to (of life), διάγω ;
time in public, ἐν τῷ
φανερῷ εἶναι.
passage across, πάροδος, 7.
passion, madog, -ους, τό;
= evil desire, ἐπιϑυ-
pia, 9.
past (what is past), wape-
ληλυϑώς, -via, -d¢.
path, ὁδός, 9.
pay, μισϑός, 6. [δωμι.
—, to, drorive, ἀποδί-
peace, εἰρήνη.
——, to make, εἰρήνην
ποιξομαι.
peacock, ταώς, -ö, ὁ.
peep up or out, ἀνακύπτω.
Peleus, Πηλεύς, -ἕως, ὁ.
Pelops, Πέλοψ, -orcog, ὁ.
Peloponnesian, Πελοπον-
νησιακός.
Peloponnesus, Πελοπόν-
νῆσος, ἧ.
peltastae, πελτασταΐ, ol.
penetrate into, εἰςπέπτω
εἴς τι.
people, δῆμος, 6; = na-
tion, &dvog, Tö; = mul-
titude, πλῆϑος, τό.
perceive, αἰσϑάνομαι, γιγ-
νώσκω.
perform, ἐργάζομαι, δια-
πράττομαι, ἀνύω; =
display, ἀποδείκνυμε;
= take place, γίγνομαι.
perfume, μῦρον, rd.
perhaps, ἴσως.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
Pericles, Περικλῆς,-ἔους, 6,
peril, xivöovog, ὁ.
period (time), χρόνος, ὁ.
perish, ἀπόλλυμαι.
permit, ao, δίδωμε ; it is
permitted, ἔξεστι.
Persian, Πέρσης, -ov, ὃ.
person (appearance), el-
δος, τους, τό; = body,
σῶμα, τό.
persuade, πείϑω w. a
persuasiveness, πειϑώ,
-οὔς, N.
perverted, σκολιός 8.
Phaeacians, Saiaxec, οἱ.
Phanes, Φάνης, -ητος, ὁ.
Philip, Φέλιππος, ὁ.
philosopher, φελόσοφος, 6.
philosophize, φιλοσοφέω.
philosophy, φιλοσοφία, ἧ.
Phoenicians, ®oivixeg, of ;
adj., Φοινίκειος.
Phorcys, Φόρκυς, εὐυοσῦ, &.
Phryxus, ®pi£og, ὁ.
Phrygians, Φρύγες, ol.
physician, ἰατρός, ὃ.
pieces, to tear im, διαῤ-
ῥήγνυμι.
piety, εὐσεβεία, %.
pillar, στήλη, ἡ.
pine, ἐλάτη, 9.
pious, εὐσεβῆς, -é¢.
pity, ἐλεαίρω, οἰκτείρω;
to have, on, κατελεέω
τινά. [ἀντί.
place, τόπος, 6; in, -of,
“ἢ W, τίϑημι.
plague, to, reipw.
plaintiff, κατήγορος, 6.
plane-tree, πλάτανος, %.
plant, to, ἐμφυτεύω.
Plataeans,[lAarazeic,-éov,
ol.
Plataea, Πλάταια, ἡ.
Plato, Πλάτων, -ὠνορ, &
play, to, παΐζω ; play st,
παίζω.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
plea, λόγος, ὁ.
pleasant, ἡδύς, -eia, -6.
pleasantly, ἡδέως.
please, dpéoxw w. ἃ.
pleasure, 7dovn, ἡ.
plot, a, ἐπιβουλή, ἡ.
—— against, to, ἐπιβου-
λεῦω ν΄. ἃ.
plunge, ῥίπτω.
Plato, Πλούτων, -wvog, ὁ.
poet, ποιητής, -οὔ, 6.
poetry, epic, ποίησις ἐπῶν,
τὰ ἔπη.
political, πολιτικός 8.
pollute, μεαΐνω.
Polyclétus, Πολύκλειτος ὁ.
Pontus Euxinus, Πόντος
Ebgecvoc, ὃ.
poor, πένης, -NTog, πενι-
χρός 3; =mean,$adiog.
—, to be, πένομαι, πε-
νητεύω.
poorly (badly), κακῶς.
Poseidon (Neptune), Πο-
σειδών, -ὥνος, 6.
possess, ἔχω, κέκτημαι ;
oneself of, κρατέω w. g.
“possession, κτῆμα, τό, κτῆ-
σις, ἧ, οὐσία, ἡ.
possible, δυνατός 8: as
quickly as, ὡς τάχιστα.
— to be, ἔξεστι.
poverty, πενία, ἢ.
power, δύναμις, -εως, ἢ;
= influence, ἐξουσία, 7 ;
to be in the, of, yiyvo-
μαι ἐπί τινι.
——, it is in one’s (pos-
sible), ἔξεστι.
practice, ἄσκησις, 7. ὁ
practise, to, μελετάω, ἀσ-
κέω, yvuvalo; the last
two, usually of athletic
exercises.
praise, ἔπαινος, ὁ.
— to, ἐπαινέω.
prater, ἀδολέσχης, -ov, ὁ.
prating, ἀδολεσχία, ἡ.
pray, εὔχομαι ; = entreat,
ἱκετεύω.
prayer, εὐχή, #.
precaution, πρόνοια, 9.
prefer, αἱρέομαι. |
preparation, μελέτη, 7.
prepare oneself, παρασ-
κευάζομαι; for some-
thing, εἷς τι.
present, παρών, ἐνεστώς,
«υἷα, -ὦς. [péxu.
—— (submit, afford), ra-
——, to be, πάρειμι, fro.
preserve, σώζω.
president, mposrarnc,-00,.
press into, εἰςπίπτω εἴς τι.
—— on, ἔγκειμαι.
pretence, πρόφᾶσις, -εως͵ ἡ.
pretend, προςποιέομαι,
φάσκω.
848
does it profit? ri συμ-
φέρει. [ficiency.
progress, to make, see pro-
prohibit, ἀπαγορεύω, ἀπει-
πεῖν.
prominent, to be, above,
προέχω.
promise, to, ὑπισχνέομαι,
ἐπαγγέλλομαι. [ἡ.
promptitude,d£ürns,-nrog,
properly, ἀξιολόγως.
property, χρήματα, Ta, ob-
σία, ἡ.
Proserpine, Περσεφόνη, ἧ.
prosper, to, εὖ φέρομαι.
prosperity, εὐτυχία, ἧ.
prosperous, to be, ebtrv-
χέω, εὐδαιμονέω.
proud of, to be, σεμνύνο-
μαι ἐπί τινι, ἀγάλλομαι
ἐπί τινι.
prevail (exist), εἰμί; (of provide for, προςτίϑημι.
a usage), κεῖμαι.
prevent, elpyw, ἀπέχω.
pride, φρονήματα, ra; =
arrogance, ὕβρις ’ -εὡς ἧ.
oneself, to, γαυρόο-
μαι, ἀγάλλομαι ἐπί τινι.
priest, ἑερεύς, -ἕως, ὃ.
prison, δεσμωτήριον, τό.
prisoner, αἰχμάλωτος, ὃ.
private capacity, ἰδίᾳ.
prize, ἄϑλον, τό.
---- highly, to, ποιέομαι
περὶ πολλοῦ.
proceed, Paivo, προβαίνω.
proclamation, to make,
ἐκφαΐνω.
procure (=find for), εὖ-
ρίσκω.
prodigy, τέρας, -aroc, τό.
profess, ἐπαγγέλλομαι.
proffer, παρέχω, ἐπαρκέω.
proficiency, to make, in,
προκόπτω, ἐπιδίδωμι
πρός or ἐπί τι.
profit, to, ὠφελέω; what
—— for oneself in addi-
tion to, προςπορίζομαι.
provident, to be, mpovo&o-
μαι w. g.
provided that, el, ἐάν.
provisions, ἐπιτήδεια, τά.
prudence, σωφροσύνη, ἧ.
prudent, φρόνιμος 8; =
moderate, μέτριος 8.
public, δημόσιος 3;
common, koivoc 3; in
a public capacity, δη-
pooia; to pass timd in
public, ἐν τῷ φανερῷ
εἶναι.
public square, ἀγορά, ἧ.
punish, κολάζω, ἀποτίνο-
μαι; to punish by a
fine, ζημιόω.
punishment, τιμωρία, #;
as a fine, ζημία, ἡ. [μαι.
purchase, ὠνέομαι, πρία-
pupil, μαϑητῆς, -οὔ, 6.
purple, πορφύρεος 8, φοι-
νίκεος 8 (see $ 29).
844
purpose, for any, εἷς τι.
pursue, διώκω, ἀκολονϑέω.
put the hand to, ἐπιχει-
ρέω w. d.
put on, ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀμπέ-
χομαι.
put to death, ἀποκτείνω ;
== murder, dovebw.
Pyrrhus, Πύῤῥος, ὃ.
Pythia, Πυϑία, ἡ.
9
Quail, a, ὄρτυξ, -ὕγος, ὁ.
queen, βασίλεια, ἡ.
quick, ὠκύς, -eia, -v. [ψα.
quickly, ταχέως, τάχα, al-
rem as possible, ὡς Tü-
xıora.
quiet (adj.), ἤσῦχος 2.
R.
Race, γένος, -ave, τό; hu-
man, ἀνθρώπων γένος.
rail at, σκώπτω.
rain, ὄμβρος, ὁ.
ram, κριός, ὁ.
rank, a, τάξις, -εως, 9.
rapacious, ἅρπαξ, -αγος.
rapidly, ταχέως, τάχα.
rather, μᾶλλον.
rational, σώφρων, -ονος.
ravage, δηόω.
raven, κόραξ, -ἄκος, 6.
reach, ἐφικνέομαι w. g.
ready, to be (willing),
ἐϑέλω.
readiness, προϑυμία, #.
reality, in, ἀληϑῶς.
reason, λόγος, ὃ;
reason, δικαίως.
receive, δέχομαι, λαμβάνω.
recently, ἄρτι, ἔναγχος.
recompense (favor), χά-
pic, -Irog, ἡ.
record together, συγγράφω.
rectify, εὐθϑύνω.
Red sea,’ Ερνϑρὰ ϑάλαττα.
with
N
reed, a, κάλαμος, ὁ, pir,
ῥιπός, 9.
reflect, διανοέομαι, Aoyi-
Compas.
reflection, λογισμός, ὃ.
w- Ff ἡ.
reign over, βασιλεύω.
rejoice, χαίρω ν΄. ἃ. ἥδομαι.
release, ἀπολύω.
rely upon (trust), πιστεύω.
remain, μένω, διαμ. ; COn-
cealed, διαλανϑάνῳ.
remember, μέμνημαι σ΄. g.
remembrance, μνήμη, 9.
remote, most, ἔσχατας ἃ.
render effeminate, μαλα-
wif; service to (be ἃ
slave to), δουλεύω w.d.;
aid to, βοηϑέω w. ἃ.
renown, εὔκλειᾳ, ἡ, δόξα,
ἡ, κλέος, -ους, τό.
repay, ἀποδίδωμι, ἀμεῖ-
βαμαί τινά rive; some-
thing is repaid, τὲ ἀπο-
λαμβάνεται.
repel, ἀπωϑέω.
repent, μεταμέλομαι, or
impers. μεταμέλει Tint
τινος.
report, a, λόγος, ὁ.
reproach, to, ψέγω,ἐλέγχω.
reputable, εὔδοξος 2.
reputation, εὔκλεια,
δόξα, ἡ.
request, to, αἰτέω, δέομαι
W. δ. [εὐχή, ἡ.
——, 8, δέησις, -euc, 9,
requite a favor, ἀποδίδῳ-
με χάριν.
rescue, σώζω.
residence, gavernor’s, ἀρ-
xeiov, τό.
resolutely, προϑ ὕμωρ.
N»
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
resolution, a (decree), Bob-
Asvua, τό, ψήφισμα, τό.
resolve, γιγνώσκω, δοκεῖ
τινι.
respect, αἰδώς, -οῦς, §; to
have, for, aldéopai reve;
with respect to, περί.
respectable, ἀξιόλογος 3.
response, to give a, χράω
8, χρησμός, 6.
rest, the, ἄλλος ; == rer
quus, λοιπός ὃ.
restore, ἀποδίδωμι.
restore, hard to, dusera
νόρϑωτος 2.
restrain, elpyo, ἀπκέχῳ.
retire, ἀναχωρέω. ff.
retreat, a, κατάβᾶσις, -δοῖ,
—— to, ἀναχωρέω.
return, ἀναχωρέω.
reveal, ἐκκαλύπτῳ ; itself
δηλόομαι.
revenge oneself on, or up
on, τιμωρέομᾳς W. ἃ,
ἀμύνομαι w. a
revenue, mpdcodoc, ἡ.
reverence, αἰδώς, -obs, ἡ.
——, to, aldéquat, σέβει.
μαι; highly, wep? πολ’
λοῦ ποιέομαι.
revile, λοιδορέξω w. ἃ.
revolt, to cause to, ἀφίσ-
Tht; Mid., to revolt
reward, ἄϑλον, τό, yépar,
«ὡς, τό. [rog, ὁ.
Rhampsinitus, Ῥαμψένι-
rich, πλούσιος 8, ebwopor
2; be ar become rich,
πλουτέω. [τα, τά.
riches, πλοῦτος, 4, χρήμφ'
ride by, παρελαύνω.
right (just), δίκαιος 3; =
dexter, δεξιός 3.
ring, δακτύλιος, ὃ.
ripe, πέπων.
rise up, ἀνίσταμαι.
river, moräpög, &
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
road, ὁδός, UE
rob, ἁἀρπάζω; == deprive
of, ἀφαιρέομαι.
robber, λῃστής, -oö, ὁ.
robe, στολή, 7, ἱμάτιον, τό.
rock, πέτρα, ἡ.
Romans, Ῥωμαῖοι, οἱ.
room, ἀνώγεων, -ὠ, τό.
root, ῥίζα, N.
rope, κάλως, -@, 6.
rose, ῥόδον, τό.
rough, σκληρός 3.
royal, βασίλειος; royal
dominion, βασιλεία, 7;
royal palace, βασίλεια,
τά.
rugged, τραχός 3.
ruin, to, ἀπόλλυμι.
— to go to, at the same
time, συναπόλλυμι.
rule, rule over, to, ἄρχω,
βασιλεύω.
ruler, ἄρχων, -οντος, 6.
run, τρέχω ; run to, προς-
τρέχω.
— away, διδράσκω, ἀπὸ-
διδράσκω W. ἃ.
—— past, παρατρέχω.
—— in different direc
tions, διαδιδράσκω.
rush, to, ὁρμάω.
S.
Sacred to, lepös 3 w. g.
sacrifice, ϑυσία, ἡ ; to sac-
rifice or offer, ϑύω ; to
bring, Yvoiav ποιέομαι.
sadness, λύπη, ἡ.
safe, ἀσφἅλής, «ἔς.
safely, ἀσφαλῶς.
safety, σωτηρία, ἡ.
sail, πλέω.
— away, ἀποπλέω.
sake of, for the, évexa, περί.
Salamis, Σαλαμίς, -ivog, ἡ.
same, the, ὁ αὐτός.
Bamian, Σάμιος, ὁ.
Sardis, Σάρδεις, -εων, αἱ.
Sarpédon, Σαρπηδών,
«ὄνος, ὁ.
satisfaction, dixy, 7; to
give, δίδωμι.
say, λέγω, φημί, εἰπεῖν.
scarcely, μικρόν ; scarcely
escape, μικρὸν ἐκφεύγω.
scatter, σκεδάζω, σκεδάν-
φυμι, διασπείρω.
sceptre, σκῆπτρον, τό.
school, see Thales.
science, ἐπιστήμη, 7).
sciences, γράμματα, τά.
scourge, to, μαστιγόω.
scout, a, σκοπός, ὁ.
scythe-bearing, ὀρεπανη-
φόρος 2.
Scythia, Σκυϑία, 7.
sea, ϑάλαττα, 7; by sea,
κατὰ ϑάλατταν.
βοδ-οοδϑι, παραϑαλαττία͵ ἡ.
sea-bird, ϑαλαττία ὄρνις.
sea-fight, ναυμακία, 7.
season, against (unsea-
sonably), παρὰ καιρόν.
secret, κρυπτός 3.
secretly, κρύφα, see $ 175,8.
secure, GogaAnc, -é¢; =
firm, βέβαιος 3.
securely, ἀσφαλῶς.
sedentary trade, Bavavot-
κὴ τέχνη. [μαι.
see, βλέπω, ὁράω, δέρκο-
— to it, σκοπέω.
seuk, seek for, ζητέω.
seem, doxtw, φαίνομαι.
seen, not to be, ἀϑέᾶτος 2.
seize, συλλαμβάνω ; seize
quickly, ἀναρπάζω.
self, αὐτός. 19.
self-command, ἐγκράτεια,
self-control, ἐγκράτεια, ἡ.
self-tanght,cbrodidaxroc 2.
Selinus, Σελενοῦς, -οῦν-
„ro 6. - | waz.
sell, πιπράσκω, drradido-
845
Semiramis,
εἶδος, 7.
βοῃὰ, πέμπω,στέλλω͵ ἀποσ.
—— back, ἀποπέμπω.
—— forth or ουἱ, ἐκπέμπω,
senseless, ἀσύνετος 2.
sensible, συνετός 3; to be,
σωφρονέω.
sentence (judicial), κρίσις,
«εως, 9, δίκη, ἡ.
separate, to, διέστημι, κρί-
vw; (intrans.), δίχα yiy-
vouaı, διακρίνομαι.
seriously, to speak, σπου-
δάζω.
serve (= be a slave), δου-
λεύω w. d.; = render
service, ὑπηρετέω w.d.;
= become, yiyvoyat.
service (benefit), ϑερα-
πεία, ἡ.
——, to render, to, dom
λεύω w. a, χαρίζομαι
w.d.
servitude, δουλεία, ἡ.
set (place), καϑίζω.
set off (of a journey), πο-
ρεύομαι. [με.
set upon (place), ἐπιτέϑη-
sever, dılornus.
shake, ceiw.
shame, αἰδώς, -οῦς, ἡ.
shamefal, αἰσχρός, ἀεικῆς,
«ἔς.
shave, ξυρέω.
sheep, πρόβᾶτον, τό, οἷς,
οἱός, 6, ἡ.
shelter, στέγω.
shepherd, ποιμήν, “ἕνος, 6,
νομεύς, -ἕως, ὁ.
shield, ἀσπίς, -ἴδος, ἡ;
small, πέλτη, 7.
shieldsman, παλταστής,
«οὔ, ὁ.
ship, ναῦς, νεώς, ἡ.
shoe, ὑπόδημα, τό.
short, βραχύς, -εἴα, «Ὁ,
Σεμίραμις,
846
shortly, ἐν βραχεῖ,
shoulder, ὦμος, ὁ.
shouting, a (calling to),
παρακέλευσις, -εως, ἡ.
show, to, δείκνυμι, ἀποδείκ»
νυμι, φαίνω, ἀποφαίνω,
φανερὸν ποιέω, δηλόω ;
== offer, παρέχω. [inf.
shrink from, κατοκνέω w.
shun, φεύγω w. a
shut. κλείω, κατακλείω.
—— in or up, κατακλείω,
καϑείργω.
Bicily, Σικελία, ἡ.
sick, ἀσϑενής, -ἔς.
sick, to be, νασέω, ἀσϑενέω.
side, by the, of, παρά.
Sidon, Σεῤών, -ὥνος, 8.
Sidonian, Σιδώμεος.
aight, at sight of, Part. of
ὁράω.
signal, to give a, σημαίνω.
silent, to be, σιωπῴω, σι-
since (because), ὅτε, éarei ;
goo also § 176, 1.
sing, to, dw.
single (= any), in a neg
tive sentence, οὐδείς,
$177, 6.
single combat, to engage
in, μονομαχέω.
sink into or under, xare-
δύω; sink away (fall),
πίπτω.
Sinope, Σενώπῃ, ἡ.
sister, ἀλελφή, ἡ.
sit on, ἐφιζάνω w. a.
slave, δοῦλος, ὁ.
—, to be a, δουλεύω.
slave-labor, ὀουλεῖον ἔρ-
γον.
slavery, δουλεία, ἡ.
slay, ἀποκτείνω, φαγεύω.
-
sleep, ὕπνος, ὁ.
— to, cidu, καϑεύδω,
δαρϑώνω.
small, μικρός 8, ὀλίγος 8.
smell, to, dagpaivopac.
—— of anything, Kw.
Smerdis, Σμέρδις, «ἴος, ὁ.
snare, παγίς, -Idoc, ἡ ; lay
snares for, ἐνεδρεύω.
snow, χιών, «ὄνος, ἧ.
snow-storm, νιφετός, 6.
80, obrwe; = this, τοῦτο.
so far from, ἀντί.
so that, ὥςτε [$ 186].
Socrates, Σωκράτης, -ove,
soldier, a, στρατιώτης, -av,
solitude, ἐρημία, ἡ.
some, ἔνιοι ; some one,
τὶς ; something, 7?.
sometimes, ὀμιότε, woré.
son, υἱός, ὁ. [τό.
Song, vr, ἡ, μέλος, ««ὖς,
soon, τάχα.
sooner, πρότερον;
ther, μάλλον.
sophist, σοφιστής, -e8, ὁ.
a ΛΎΡΑΝ
a Ta
ae λύπη, ὁ.
soul, Yun, #.
sound, to the, ef, see
§ 167, 7.
sound-mindedness, co
φροσύνῃ, ἡ.
source, πηγή, ἡ
south, μεσημβρία, ὁ. [6
sovereign, ἄρχων, -οντος,
sovereignty, ἀρχή, ἦ,
sow, ta, σπείρω.
spacious, sufficiently (=
sufficient), ἱκανός 8.
sparing, to be, φείδομαι
ν΄. g.
EXGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
Sparta, Σπάρτη, %.
Spartan, a, Σπαρτιάτης,
-ov, 6.
speak, λέγω, φϑέγγομαε ;
speak seriously, orem
dulw.
spear, δόρυ, τό [$ 39].
spectator, Dedric, -οῦ, ὁ.
speech, λόγος, ὁ, μῦϑος, 6;
freedom or boldness of,
παῤῥησία, ἡ.
speedily, raza, ταχέως.
Sphinx, Σφίγξ, -γγοί, 2.
spirit, νοῦς, νοῦ, ὁ, φρήν,
«ἕνος, ἡ.
splendid, λαμπρός 8, πο-
λυτελῆς, -ἕς. (6.
sportsrman, ϑηρευτῆς, -φῦ,
spread, διασπείρω.
spring, belonging to the,
ἐαρινάς 8.
spring from (= be, or
originate from), el,
γίγνομαι.
square, public, ἀγορά, ἡ.
stadium, στάδιον, τά,
sing, ἔλᾶφος, 6, 9.
stage, σκηνή, ἡ.
stend, te, στῆναι, ὀστάκαι,
—— firm, ὑπομένω.
state, a, πολιτεία, 9, mi
Aig, -εως, ἡ.
, relating to the, πο-
λετικός 3.
station, to, τέϑημι. [Φ
statuary, ἀνδριαντοπφεῖα,
statue, ἀνδριάς, -ἄντος, 6.
steadfast ἐστηκώς,-υδα;,- ἀρ.
steal, κλέπτῳ ; steal away,
ἁρπάζω.
steersman, κυβερνήτης,
-ov, ὁ.
Stesichorian, Eryauröpseg.
Stesichorus, Στησίχαρος͵ ἃ.
still (yet), ἔτε
stillness, ἡσυχέα, ἡ.
stir (move), to, zındaa.
DT m | | re a er - -
BROLHH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. |
stolen, κλόπιμος 3.
stone (made of stone), Ai
Bivoc 3.
—, to, κατηπετρόω.
stranger, ξένος, ὁ.
stratagems, to be exposed
to, ὀπιβονλεύόμαι.
street, ὁδός, ἡ.
strength, ῥώμη, 4, ἀλκή, %
stripes, πληγαί, al.
strive (= endeavor), πεὶ-
ρθομαι ; = seek, ζητέω.
— for or after, ὀρέγο-
pat w. g., διώκω w. a.
strong, loxdpös 3; = firm,
βέβαιος 8, ἀσφαλῆς ’ «ἐς .
study, to, μανϑάνω.
stupid, ἀσύνετος 2, rerv-
φωμένος 8,
subject to, ὕποχος 2.
subject, to, χειρόομαι w. 2.,
δουλόω w. a.; subject to
oneself, καταστρέφομαι.
wubjugate, χειρόομαι, dov-
dow
eabmissive, ταπεινός 8.
sabmit (present, afford),
παρέχω.
— to (serve), δουλεύω.
subsistence, rpog7, 4.
subvert, ἀνατρέπω.
success, εὐτυχία, ἢ; =
riches, πλοῦτος, ὁ, 84-
Bog, 6.
Guccor, to, παραστῆναι,
συμπονέω w. ἃ.
such, τοιοῦτος 3 [$ 60].
such as, οἷος [$ 182, 7].
suffer, πάσχω ; = permit,
meptopaw w. Part.
suffering, πόνος, ὁ.
sufficient, ἱκανός 3; to be,
ἑκανῶς ἔχω.
sufficiently, ἑκανῶς.
suitably to (conformably),
οὖ κατά.
sum, large (much), πολύς.
summer, ϑέρος, -ovc, τό.
sumptuousness, πολυτέ-
λεια, ἡ.
sun, ἦλιος, ὁ.
superiors, οἱ κρείττονες.
supping, while, Part. of
δείπνω τ. neTake.
suppose, ἠγέομαι, νομίζω.
supremacy, ἡγεμονία, ἧ.
sure, ἀσφαλής, -&, ἔμπε-
δος 2.
surely, ἀτρεκέως; by οὐ
μή (see % 177, 9).
surpass, νικάω τινά, ὕπερ.
BGAAonai τινα. [ρί.
surrounding (around), πε:
Susian, Σούσιος, ὃ.
swear, ὄμνθμι.
—— falsely, ἐπιορκέω.
sweat, ἱδρῶς, -ὥτος, ὁ.
sweet, ἡδύς, γλυκύς, «εἴα,
a. [ὀξός.
swift, ταχύς, -eia, -, ὠκύς,
swiftly, τάχα.
swim, νέω.
sympathize, ἐλεαίρῥω.
sympathy, be moved to,
ἐλεαίρω.
Syracuse, Συράκουσαι, al.
Syracusian, Συρακοῦσιος, 6.
Syrian, Σύριος, ὁ.
T.
Take (receive), λαμβάνω ;
= capture, αἱρέω.
—— care, ἐπιμέλομαι.
—— from, ἀφαιρέομαΐ ri-
va τι. [τι.
—— heed to, εὐλαβέοβαΐ
—— hold of, ärronaı w. g.
—— in charge, λαμβάνω.
~— place (be done), yfy-
vonat.
taken, to be, ἁλέσκομαι.
talk, to, λαλέω, κωτίλλω.
tame out, ἐξημερόω.
taste, to, yebouac w. g.
847
teach, διδάσκω τινά τι.
teacher, διδάσκάλος, ὁ.
tear, a, daxpvov, τό.
tear, to, ῥήγνθμι.
—— in pieces, dcabpiryv®
με. [6.
Telamon, Τελαμών, -ὥνος,
tell, λέγω, φράζω.
Tempe, Τέμπη, -öv, τά.
temperate, &yxpärns, -&.
temple, νεώς, -e0, 6.
temple-robber,/epocbAor,6.
tend (feed), βόσκω.
tent, σκηνῆ, 9.
terrible, δεινός 8,
terrify, καταπλήττω, ἐκ.
testimony, μαρτυρία, #.
Teucer, Τεῦκρος, ὁ.
Thales, Θαλῆς, ὁ (6. Θά.
λεω, D. -ἢ, A. -m);
Thales and his school,
ol ἀμφὶ Θαλῆν.
Thamyris, Θάμυρις, -ἰδὲ
and -idoc, ἡ.
than, #; also by the fela-
tion of the Gen. after 4
comparative.
thank, to, χάριν εἰδέναι.
that, in order, ὡς, ὅπως.
theatre, ϑέατρον, τό.
Theban, Θηβαῖος, 6.
Thebes, Θῆθαι, al.
theft, κλοπή, 9.
Themistocles, Oewtoro-
κλῆς, -Eoug, ὁ. [roe, ὃ.
Theophrastus, Θεόφρασ-
therefore, οὖν.
therewith, μετὰ τούτου.
Thermodon, Θερμώδων,
-ovrog, ὁ.
Thermopylae,
Aa, al
Thesprotia, Seorpuria, 9.
Thessalian, Θετταλός, ὁ.
thief, κλέπτης, -ov, ὃ,
κλώψ, -ωπός, ὁ.
thievish, κλόπιμος 8.
Θερμοπό-
848
thing, χρῆμα, τό, κτῆμα, τό.
think, ἠγέομαι, νομίζω,
δοκέω
—— about, φροντίζω w. a.
thirst, δέψος, -ους, τό.
though, καὶ ἄν ; alsobya
Part., see $ 176, 1.
thought, νόημα, τό.
thoughtful, φρόνιμος 8.
Thracian, Θρᾷξ, -ᾷκός, ὁ.
throne, ϑρόνος, 6.
— to ascend, εἰς βασι-
λείαν καταστῆναι.
through, διά.
throughout, ἀνά ; = whol-
ly, πάντως.
throw, ῥίπτω.
—— a bridge over, üva-
ζεύγνυμι. ᾿
------ down, καϑίημι.
— into disorder, ταράτ-
To,
— ont (as words) ῥέπτω.
thus, οὕτω(ς).
thwart, ἐναντιόομαι w. ἃ,
Tigranes, Τιγράνης, -ov, ὁ.
tile, πλίνϑος, 7.
till, Ewe, μέχρι.
time, ‘xpövos, 6; right,
καιρός, 6; life-time,
alöv, -övog, 6; at the
same time, Ga ; to pase
time in public, ἐν τῷ
φανερῷ elva.
Tissaphernes, Tcocagép-
νῆς, -ους, ὃ.
to-day, τήμερον.
together with, ἅμα w. d.
toil, to, pox déw.
to-morrow, αὔριον.
tongue, γλῶττα, 7.
too (also), xai; denoting
intensity, ἄγαν, or by
the comp. deg.
tooth, ὁδούς, -ὄντος, ὁ.
top, ἄκρος 3 [4148,8.6π|.9].
touch, to, ἅπτομαι w. g.,
ϑιγγάνω w. g. :
towards, πρός.
town, πόλις, -εως, ἧ.
trade, a, τέχνη, ἧ.
tradition, λόγος, ὃ.
traduce, διαβάλλω.
tragedy, τραγῳδία, 9.
train (exercise), to, ἀσκέω.
transition, μεταβολή, ἡ
(see degenerate).
travel, to, πορεύομαι.
—— abroad, ἀποδημέω.
travelling-money, ἐφόδιον,
τό.
treason, προδοσία, ἧ.
treasure, ϑησαυρός, ὁ..
treasures, χρήματα, τά.
treaty, συνθήκη, ἧ.
tree, δένδρον, τό.
triad, τριάς, «ἄδος, 7.
trial, to make, of, πειράο-
μαι w.g-
tribute, φόροι, oi.
trivial, φαῦλος. [ἡ.
Troezene, Τροιζήν, -ῆνος,
trophy, τρόπαιον, τό.
trouble, πόνος, ὁ.
oneself about, φρον-
τίζω w. g.
troubled, to be, λυπέομαι.
troublesome, χαλεπός 3,
λυπηρός 8, ἀργαλέος 3.
Troy, Τροία, 7.
true, ἀληϑής, -ὅς, ἀληϑὶ-
voc 3; τῷ faithful, πὲσ-
τός ὃ.
truly (really), ἀληϑῶς ; to
know truly, ἐπίσταμαι.
truampetoaAmyé,-tyyoc,7-
trumpeter, oaAmıyaras,
«οὔ, ὁ. [τεύω.
trust, to, πείϑομαι, πισ-
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULART.
truth, ἀλήϑεια, ἡ.
—, to speak the, ἀλή-
ϑεύω.
turn, to, στρέφω (trans.);
== devote oneself to,
τρέπομαι. ίτημι.
—— away, τρέπω, ἀφίσ-
- - to, ™por, ρέπω.
tusk, ὀδούς, -övrog, ὁ.
twice, dic.
tyrant, τύραννος, ὁ.
Tyrtaeus, Τυρταῖος, ὁ.
unchanged, ἀμετάβλητο,
uncle (by the father’s side),
πάτρως, -wog, 6.
under, ὑπό. [pépe.
undergo, ὑπομένω τι, ὑπο"
underneath, to be, dreipt
understand, ἐπίσταμοι,
olda. [νώσκω.
, thoroughly, διαγιγ
understanding, νοῦς, ὁ
φρένες, αἱ.
undertaking, ἔργον, τό.
undone, ἄπρακτος 3.
uneasy,to render,raparre.
uneducated, ἀπαίδευτος 3.
unexpected, παράδοξος 3,
ἀνέλπιστος 3.
unfortunate, ἀτύχής, -ἔς.
— to be, δυςτυχέω.
ungrateful, ἀχάριστος 3.
unhappy, ἀτύχής, -ἕς.
unharmed, ἀπήμων, ΡΟ.
unintelligent, ἄνοος, dot
veroc 2.
united, to be, ὁμονοέω.
unjust, ἀδίκος 2
unknown, ἀφανής, -ἔς.
unrewarded, ἀχάριστος 3.
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
virtuous, ἀγαθός 3, σπου-
daioc 8.
, visible, ὁρᾶτός 8.
voluntarily, ἑκουσίως.
unseemly, αἰσχρός, ἀει-
κῆς, -ἔς.
until, μέχρι, πρίν.
unvarying, διγνεκής, -&.
up, ava; lay up, xarari- Yoluptuons, τρυφητῆς, -οὔ.
ϑημι.
upon, ἐπί. [μαι. W.
upward, to soar, dvaréro- Wage war with, πολεμέω
usage, νόμος, ὁ. w.d.
use, to, χράομαι. wait, περιμένω.
—, to be of, συμφέρω. "walk, to, Baivw.
——, to make, of, ypao- wander about, περιπλα-
pat τινι. " vaoyal.
useful, χρήσιμος 2, ὠφέλι- want, to, δέω, δέομαι w. g.
μος 2. ——, be in, σπανίζω w. g.,
——, to be, ὀφελέω.
using, χρῆσις, -εως, 9.
utter, to, λέγω; = emit
as a sound, mpoinui.
χρήζω w. g.
war, πόλεμος, ὁ.
——, to carry on, πολεμέω.
warlike, πολεμικός 2.
warning, σωφρονισμός, ὁ.
V. warrior, στρατιώτης, -ov, ὁ.
Valuable, moAvreAnc, -&, war-song, παιάν, -ἄνος, ὃ.
τίμιος 8. : wash, νίπτω, πλύνω.
value more, or more high-
ly, wept μείζονος ποιέο-
vehement, δεινός 8.
venture, to, τολμάω.
wasp, ψήν, ψηνός, ὁ.
watch, to keep, τηρέω.
water, ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό.
way (road, journey), ὁδός,
7; = manner, τρόπος, ὁ.
verdant, to be, ϑάλλω. wax, κηρός, ὁ.
versed in, ἀγαϑός, ἔμπει- weak, ἀσϑενής, -ἕς.
ρος ἃ. weaken,to,reipw, ἀμαυρόω.
very, λίαν, σφόδρα; also
by the Comp. or Sup.
- of the adjective.
vessel, πλοῖον, τό.
vice, κακία, ἡ, κακότης,
weal, σωτηρία, ἧ.
wealth, πλοῦτος, ὁ, χρή-
ματα, τά.
wear (have), ἔχω.
—— out, Teipw.
τητος, ἧ. weary, to be, κάμνω.
victory, νίκη, 7. weep, to, KAaiw.
Village, κώμη, ἡ. welfare, σωτηρία, %.
vine, ἄμπελος, 7.
violate (as a treaty), λύω.
violence, Sia, ἡ.
violent, βίαιος 3, σφοδρός
3; = severe, ἰσχῦρός 3.
violently, σφόδρα, λίαν,
ἰσχυρῶς.
Virtue, ἀρετή, ἡ.
well, καλῶς, εὖ; do well
to, εὖ πράττω, εὖ ποιέω,
evepyetéw; to be well,
ev ἔχω.
well-disposed, ebvoog.
well-known, ὀῆλος 3, φα-
vepög 3.
well-ordered, εὔτακτος 2.
80
349
west, ἔσπερος, ὃ.
what? τίς, τί.
whatever, ὄςτις, Seep.
when, dre, ἐπεί.
whence, ἐξ οὗ. :
whenever, ὅταν. [πῇ;
where, ov, ὅπου ; where?
wherever, οὗ, ὅπου w. opt.
whether, πότερον.
while, expressed by the
_ Part. [$ 176, 1].
whip, μάστιξ, -Lyoc, ἡ.
whither? πῇ; [ Tic.
who, which, ὅς ; interrog.,
whoever, ὅςτις, ὄςπερ.
whole, πᾶς, σύμπας͵ ὅλος 8.
wicked, κακός 8, πονηρός 8.
wife, γυνή, γυναικός, ἡ,
γαμετή, ἡ.
wild beast, ϑηρίον, τό.
willing, ἑκών, -οὖσα, -ὄν.
ἐϑέλω.
willingly, ἡδέως.
wind, ἄνεμος, ὁ.
wine, οἶνος, ὁ.
wing, πετρόν, τό, πτέρυξ,
-γος, ἧ. [τό.
----- (of an army), κέρας,
winter, χειμών, -ὥνος, 6.
wisdom, σοφία, 7, σωφρο-
ovvn, h.
wise, σοφός 3.
wisely, σοφῶς ; = well, εὖ.
wish, to, βούλομαι, ἐϑέλω.
with, σύν, μετά w.g.
within, ἐντός w. g.
without, ἄνευ w. g.
witness, μάρτυς, -ὕρος, 6, ἡ.
wolf, λύκος, ὁ.
woman, γυνή, γυναικός, 9.
——, old, γραῦς, ypüös, 7.
wonder, to, ϑαυμάζω.
wonderful, ϑαυμαστός 8.
wont, to be, ἐϑίζω.
word, λόγος, ὃ, ἔπος, -ovg,
τό, ῥῆμα, τό.
850 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY.
work, ἔργον, τό. wrong, to do, ddixéw, κα- young, νέος 8.
—— for, to, δουλεύω. κῶς ποιέω. young man, veavlag, -ov,
— out, ἐξεργάζομαι. ὁ, νέος, 6.
— with, συμπονέω. x youth, νεότης, «τος, 4%,
world, κόσμος, ὁ. Xenophon, Ἐενοφών, -ῶν-. Bn, ἡ. 12.
wership, to, προσκυνέω, τος, ὁ. , a,veariac, -ov, ὁ, νέος,
αἰδέομαι. Xerxes, Ξέρξης, -ov, ὁ.
worst, to, χειρόομαι. 2.
worthy, ἄξιος 3; to think Y. Zealous, σκουδαῖος 8.
worthy, ἀξιόω. Yarn, νῆμα, τό. zealously, σπουδαίως ; to
worthless, ἀνάξιος. year, ἔτος, -ους, τό, iviav- be zealously employed,
wound, to, τετρώσκω; = στός, ὃ. σπουδάζω.
strike, πλήττω. yet, ἔτι, πώ. Zeno, Ζήνων, -ὠνος, ὁ.
write, γράφω. yet even now, ἔτι καὶ νῦν. Zeus, Ζεύς, ὁ [$ 47, 8].
wrong-doer, ἀδικῶν. yield, εἴκω. Zeuxis, Ζεῦξις, -Idog, 6.
ENGLISH INDEX.
[The figures refer to the sections].
Accent in contraction, 11, 2.
Accentuation, 10—16 ; of the first Dec.,
' 96, 4 and 5; of the second Dec., 28,
Rem.2; of the Attic forms, 30, Rem.2;
of contracts, 29 and 11, 2; of the third
Dec., 33 ; of adjectives of three end-
ings, in Gen. Pl., 26, 4, (y); of con-
tracts, 29; of the verb, 84.
Accusative, Synt., 159 et seq.; double
Ace., 160; Acc. with Inf. 172; Acc.
with Part., 175,2; Acc. Abs., 176, 3.
Active verb, 71; with Fut. Mid, 116, 1
and 144, c; Synt., 149, (a); with
trans. and intrans. sense, 150, 1; with
" g causative sense, 150, Rem. 2.
Acute accent, 10, 2.
Adjective, 23; Declension of adjectives,
see Declension; Comparison of. 49
et seq.
Adjective-sentences, 182.
Adverbial sentences of place and time,
183; denoting cause, 184 ; condition,
185; consequence or effect, 186, 1;
comparison, 186, 2 and 3.
Adverbs, 53; Comparison of, 54.
Agreement, 146 et seg.; Masc. Adj.
with Neut. subst., 147, (a); PL verb
with Sing. Subj., 147, (a) ; Neat, Adj.
with Masc. or Fem. Subst., 147, (b);
Sing. verb with PL Subj., 147, (d);
PL verb with Dual Subj., 147, (e).
Anomalies, see verbs and Dee.
Answer to question, 187, Rem. 4.
Aorist, Synt., 152; Aor. second with
intrans. sense, 150, 2.
Apocope, 194, 6.
Apodosis, 185, 1.
Apostrophe, 6.
Apposition, 154, 2; with possessive
pronouns, 154, 8.
Arsis, 189, 2.
Article, Synt., 148.
Atonics, 13.
Attraction with prepositions, 167, Rem.;
with Inf., 172, 3; with Part, 175, 2;
in adjective sentences, 172, Rem. 1;
with the relative, 182, 6 and 7.
Attributives, 154.
Augment, 85 et seq.; in composition,
90 et seq.
Barytones, 10, Rem. 2, and § 12
Breathings, 5.
Caesura, 189, 3.
Cardinal numbers, 65, a, and 67.
Cases, 22; Synt., 156 et seq.
Characteristic of the verb, 77; of the
tenses, 79, (a); pure and impure
characteristic, 104.
Cireumflex, 10, 3.
Classes of verbs, 70 et seq. and 149.
Comparative, construction with, 168, 8.
Comparison of adjectives, 49 et seq.;
of adverbs, 54.
Conditional adverbial sentences, 188.
Conjagation, 76; in -@, 81 et seq.; im
«μι, 127 et seq.
Consonants, 4; movable consonants
at the end of a word, 7, change
of, 8.
Cedrdinate sentences, 178.
852
Copula εἶναι, 145, 5.
Corsnis, 6.
Correlatives, 63.
Crasis, 6; with the accent, 12, 2.
Dactyl, 189, 1.
Dative, 161; with Inf. 172, 3; with
Part. 175, Rem. 3.
Declension of substantives : first, 25—
27; second, 28—30; contraction of
second, 29; Attic of second, 30;
third, 31—48; gender, accentuation
and quantity of third, 33; anomalies
of third, 47; Dec. of adjectives in
-0¢, τῆ, τον, 28, Rem. 3, and 26, Rem.;
in -o¢, -ov, 28, Rem. 3; of contracts
in -οος, -67, -00v, in -00¢, -oov and
in -eog, -éa, -eov, 29; of those in -wr,
-wv, 30; in -7¢ and -a¢, 27, Rem. 2;
in των, -ov, 35, Rem. 4; in -eıs, -e0-
oa, -ev, 40, Rem.; in -ὕς, -eia, οὖ,
46, Rem. 1; of tbe irregular adjec-
tive, 48; of pronouns, 56 et seq.; of
numerals, 68.
Demonstrative pronouns, 60.
Deponents, 144; Synt., 150, Rem. 5.
Diaeresis, 3, Rem. 3; in verse, 189, 5,
and 194, 2.
Digamma, 193.
Diphthongs, 3.
Disjunctive coördination, 178, 8.
Division of consonants, 4.
Division of syllables, 17.
Division of vowels, 3.
Dual, Synt., 147, (e) and Rem. 3 and 4.
Dual subject with Pl. verb, 147, (e).
Blision, 6; accent in elision, 12, 3.
Ellipsis of the Subst, on which the Gen.
depends (ἐν ddov), 154, Rem. 2; of
the Subject, 145, Rem. 2.
Enclitics, 14—16.
Feminine substantives conneeted with
neuter adjectives, 147, (a) and (b);
in Dual with Masc. Adj., 147, Rem. 4.
Future, Attie in -@ and -oüueı, 83;
ENGLISH INDEX.
Doric in -σοῦμαι, 116, 3; without o,
111, 1; with the Mid. instead of Act.
116 and 144,c; Synt, 152, 6; Fat.
Perf., 152, 7.
Gender of substantives, 21; of third
declension, 33.
Genitive, 156—158; attributive Gen,
154; Gen. with Inf, 172, 3; Gen
Abs., 176, 2, and Rem. 2 and 3;
Gen. Abs. with ὡς, 176, Rem. 3.
Grave accent, 10; grave instead of
acute, 12, 1.
Hiatus, 191.
Historical tenses, 72, 2, b; Synt, 152,8.
Imperative, Synt., 153, 1, (c); with
μή, 158, Rem. 8. ὁ
Imperfect, Synt., 152, 9 and 10.
Impersonal construction changed into
the personal with the Part, 175,
Rem. 5; in substantive sentences
with ὡς and ὅτι, 180, Rem.
Inclination of the accent, 13 et seq.
Indicative, Synt., 153, 1, (a); of a past
tense in expressing a wish, 153, Rem.
1; of a past tense with ἄν, 153,
2.
Infinitive, Synt., 170 et seq.; with ἄν,
158,2, ἃ; with the article, 173; with
ὥςτε, 186, 1, (a); with οἷος and ὅσος,
186, Rem. 2; with ἐφ᾽ dre, 186, Rem.
3; with ὡς, 186, Rem. 4.
Interrogative pronouns, 62.
Interrogative sentences, 187.
Intransitive verb, Synt., 149, (1), (8);
in the Pass. (φϑονοῦμαι), 150, 6.
Tota subscript, 3; with Crasis, 6, Rem.
Masculine adjectives connected with
Neut. substantives, 147, (a).
Metathesis,117, 2.
Middle verb, Synt., 149, (2), 150.
Modes, Synt., 151 et seq.; sequence
of, 181, Rem.
Mode-vowel, 79, (b) et seq. and 129.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Movable consonants at the end of a
word, 7.
Negative particles, 177.
Neuter adjectives connected with a
Masc. or Fem. substantive, 147, (b);
Neut. Pi. with a verb in Sing., 147;(d);
Neut. Pt. of verbal adjectives instead
of Sing., 168.
Nominative, Synt., 145, 4; two Nomi-
natives, 146, 2; with Pass. of intrans.
verbs which govern a Gen. or Dat.
(φϑονοῦμαι), 150,6; Nom. with Inf,
172, 1 and 2; with Part., 175, 2.
Number, 22; see also Agreement.
Numerals, 65 et seq.
Object, 155.
Objective construetion, 155.
Oblique or indirect discourse, 188.
Optative mode, Synt., 153.
Oxytones, 10, Rem 2.
Paroxytones, 10, Rem. 2.
Participials, 74.
Participle, Synt., 174 et seq. ; difference
between Part. and Inf. with certain
verbs, 175, Rem. 4; with τυγχάνω,
etc., 175, 8; denoting time, cause, etc.,
176, 1; with dv, 153, 2, d.
Passive verb, Synt., 149, (3).
Perfect, Synt., 152, 5; second Perf.
with intrans. sense, 150, 2.
Perispomena, 10, Rem. 2.
Person of the verb, Synt., 146; when
the subjects are of different persons,
147», 2.
Personal endings of the verb in -w,
79, (Ὁ) et seq.; in -wı, 130.
Personal pronouns, 56.
Personal construction instead of the
impers.; see impers. construction.
Pluperfect, Synt., 152, 11 and Rem. 6.
Plural Subj. with Sing. verb, 147, (a).
Position, syllable long by, 9, 3, and
190, 4; short by, 190, 3.
Possessire pronouns, 59.
858
Predicate, 145, 5, and 146.
Prepositions, 24; Synt., 162 et seq.;:
attraction of, 167, Rem.
‘ Present tense, Synt., 152, 4.
Principal sentence, 179.
Principal tenses, 72, 2, a;' Synt., 152, 2.
Proclitics, 13.
Pronouns, 55 et seq.; use of, 169.
Pronunciation of particular letters, 2.
Proparoxytones, 10, Rem. 2.
Properispomena, 10, Rem. 2.
Protasis, 185,1; omission of, 185, Rem.4.
Punctuation-marks, 18.
Quantity, 9 and 190; of third Dec., 33.
Reciprocal pronoan, 58.
Reciprocal verb, 149, Rem. 1, and 150,
Rem. 8.
Reduplication, 77 and 88; Attic, 89;
in composition, 90.
Reflexive verb, Synt., 149, (2).
Reflexive pronoun, 57.
Relative pronouns, 61.
Relative sentence; see Adj. sentence.
Sentence, 145.
Sentences denoting purpose, 181.
Singular Adj. connected with Masc. or
Fem. Pl, 147, (Ὁ); Sing. verb with
Neut. Pl. Subject, 147, (d).
Spondee, 189, 1.
Stem of the verb, 77; pure and im-
pure stem, 100; strengthed stem,
101.
Subject, 145; when omitted, 145, Rem.
2, (a), (b), (e).
Subjunctive mode, Synt., 153.
Subordinate clause, 179.
Subordination, 179.
Substantive, 20; Gender of, 21; Num-
ber and Case, 22.
Substantive sentences with ὅτι, ὡς
(that), 180; with ὅπως, Iva, oc (in
order that), 181.
Superlative, 49 et seq.
Syllables, 9—17; division of, 17.
854
Syncope, 117, I.
Synizesis, 194, 4.
Tenses, 72; formation of secondary
tenses, 103; Synt., 151 et seq.
Tense-characteristic, 79, (8).
Tense-endings, 79, (b).
Theme, 100, 3.
Thesis, 189, 2.
Transitive verb, Synt., 149, (1), (a).
Trochee, 189, 1.
GREEK INDEX.
Variations of the stem vowel, 102.
Verb, 70—114; pure, 93 et seq.; con-
tract, 96 et seq.; mute, 104—110;
liquid, 111—115; special peculiari-
ties in the formation of particular
verbs δι -o, 116; anomalous, 118 et
seq.; verbs in -μέ, 127—143; verbs
in -@ analogous to those in -μέ, 142.
Verbal adjectives, 168.
GREEK INDEX.
"Ayaodaı const. 158, R. 6.
ἀγγέλλειν w. part. and inf.
175, Β. 4, (g).
αἰδεῖσϑαι w. part. and inf.
175, Β. 4, (k).
αἰδώς dec. 43.
αἰσχύνεσθαι w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 3, (k).
ἀκούειν w. part. and inf.
175, R. 4, (a).
ἄκρος w. art. 148, R. 9.
ἀλλά 178, 6.
ἀμφί prep. 167, 1.
ἄν 153, 2; omitted 185,
R. 3.
ἄν instead of ἐάν w. subj.
185, 2.
ἀνά prep. 165, 1.
ἄνευ w. gen. 163, R.
ἀνήρ dec. 36.
ἀντί prep. 163, 1.
ἁπλοῦς dec. 29, R.
ἀπό prep. 163, 3.
’AnöAAwv dec. 34, Rem. 1.
ἀποφαΐνειν w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 4, (bh).
ἄρα 178, 9.
dpa 187, 3, (2) and (3)
and (8).
"Apne dec. 42, Β. 3.
ἀστήρ dec. 36, R.
-arat instead of -vraı 106,
ἅτε w. part. 176, R. 2.
-aro instead of -vro 106,
ἄττα and ἅττα 62.
αὐτάρκης accent. 42, R. 4.
αὐτός, use of, 169, 8, 7, 8
ἀφ᾽ ob 183, 2, Ὁ.
γάρ 178, 9; in a question
187,3,(1); in the answer
γέ with pronouns 64, a; in
the answer 187, R. 4, c.
γέρας dec. 39, R.
γῆρας dec. 39, R.
γιγνώσκειν w. part. and
inf. 175, R. 4, (d).
γυνή dec. 47, 2
Aé, autem 178, 5.
de, sufüx 58, R. 8.
δεικνύναι w. part. and inf.
175, Rem. 4, (h).
Δημήτηρ dec. 36.
διά prep. 166, 1.
διότι 184, (b).
δόρυ dec. 39.
δύω dec. 68.
"Rav 185, 2.
ἐάντε --- ἐάντε 178, 8.
ἑαυτοῦ Synt. 169, 4—6,
ἐγώ Synt. 169, 8.
el, εἰ 185, 3 and RB. 3; in
expressing a wish 168.
1, (8) and ΒΞ 1; =
whether 187, 3, (9), b;
el —# 187, 3, 10.
eldévat w. part. and inf.
175, R. 4, (b). [1.
εἶϑε 153, 1, b, (β) and R.
εἰκών dee. 85, R. 3.
elu: with the sense of the
Fat. 152, R. 1.
ele prep. 165,2. © (7).
εἶτα in a question 187, 3,
elre— elre 178, 8; 187,
8, (10).
éx prep. 168, 4.
ἐκεῖνος, use οὗ 169, BR. 1.
um ii we TR Ls
ἐν prep. 164, 1.
ἐν ᾧ 188, 2, ἃ.
ἐξ ὅτου, ἐξ οὗ 183, 3, Ὁ.
ἐπεί 188, 2, Ὁ; 184, 1.
ἐπείδαν 183, 8, Ὁ.
ἐπειδή, seo ἐπεί. [, (7).
ἔπειτα in a question 187,
txi prep. 167, 3.
ἔςτε, cr’ ἄν 183, 3 and 3.
ἔστιν of 182, R. 8.
ἐφ᾽ Gre 186, R. 3.
ἕως, Ewe ἄν 183, 2 and 3.
Ze, suffix 53, R. 3.
Ζεύς dec. 47, 3.
"A with the Com. 168, 3;
in a question 187, (8); 7
— 7, aut— aut, 178, 8.
% in a question 187, 3, (1).
ἥκω with the sense of the
Perf. 152, R. 1.
ἣν (βάν) 185, 2.
ἡνίκα, ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν 183,2 and 8.
Θαυμάζειν const. 158, R. 6.
dev and v1, suffix 53, R. 2.
Opié dec. 47, 4.
Ἵνα, in order that, 181;
where, 183, 1.
Kai; καί --- καί 178, 8,
and R. 1.
καίτοι 178, 6,
κατά prep. 166, 2.
κέρας dec. 39, R.
κλείς dec. 47, 5.
κλέος dec. 44.
κρέας dec. 39, R.
κύων dec. 47, 6.
Δάγως dec. 30.
λᾶς dec. 47, 7.
Μάρτυς dec. 47, 8.
μέγας dec. 48.
pév — δά 178, 5.
μέντοι 178, 6.
μέσος w. art. 148, R. 9.
μετά prep. 167, 4.
GREEK INDEX.
Pres. or Subj. Aor. 153,
R. 3; pleonastic 177, 7
and R.; in a question
187, 8, (4) and (8) and
(9), ©.
μὴ ὅτι (δπωρ) ---- ἀλλὰ καί
(ἀλλὰ οὐδέ) 178, 4.
μὴ οὐ w. inf. 177, 8.
μηδείς dec. 68, R. 1.
μήτε — pare 178, 7.
μόνος w. art. 148, R. 10.
μῶν 187, 3, (5).-
N ἐφελκ. 7, 1.
ναῦς dec. 47, 9.
Οἷος re w. inf. 182, R. 3.
οἴχομαι with the sense of
the Perf. 152, R. 1; w.
part. 175, 8.
ὅμως 178, 6.
ὁπόταν 158, 2, Ὁ; 183.
3, (b).
ὁπότε 183, 2, a; 184.
ὅπως 181, 1.
ὅσῳ-τοσούτῳ 186, 3.
ὅταν 183, 3, (b). ᾿
ὅτε 183, 2, a; 184, 1.
ὅτι, that, 180; because,
184, b.
οὐ (οὐκ, οὐχ) 177, 3;
in 8 question 187, 8,
(b).
ob un 177, 9.
ob μόνον -- ἀλλὰ καί (ἀλ-
λὰ οὐδέ) 178, 4.
οὗ, ol, &, use of, 169, R. 8.
οὐδέ 178, 7.
οὐδείς dec. 68, R. 1.
οὐδείς ὅςτις ob 182, R. 4.
οὐκοῦν in a question 187,
3, (6).
οὖν 178, 9.
οὖς dec. 39.
οὔτε —otre 178, 7.
οὗτος, use of, 169, R. 1.
855
Παῖς dec. 38, R. 1.
mapa prep. 167, 5.
πᾶς, πᾶσα͵ πᾶν dec. 40, R. ;
w. art. 148, 10, c.
περί prep. 167, 2.
πολύς dec. 48; compari-
son of, 52, 9.
Ποσειδῶν dec. 84, R. 1.
πότερον (nörepa)— ἦ 187,
8, (8) and (10).
πρᾶος dec. 48.
πρίν 183, 2, c, and R.
πρό prep. 163, 2.
πρός prep. 167, 6.
Zöv prep. 164, 2.
σφεῖς, use of, 169, R. 3.
σχῆμα xa ὅλον καὶ pé-
ρος 147b, R. 2; 160, Β. 6.
σωτῆρ voc. 34, B. 1.
Te; ré—ré; τέ--- καί
178, 3.
Tolyap, Toiyaprot, ToLya-
ροῦν, τοίνυν 178, 9.
τοιόςδε, τοιοῦτος, TOOO-
τος w. art. 148, 10, (b).
τριήρης dec. 42, (1); ac-
cent. 42, R. 4.
"Ydup dec. 47, 10.
ὑπέρ prep. 166, 3.
ὑπό prep. 167, 7.
®aiveoda: w. inf. and part.
175, R. 4, (f).
φϑάνειν w. part. 175, 8.
Xeip dec. 35, R. 2.
χελιδών dec. 35, R. 8.
χοεύς dec. 41.
Ὥς prep. 165, 8.
ὡς w. part. 176, R. 2; w.
inf. 186, R. 4.
ὡς, that, 180, 2; in order
that, 181; as, when,
183, 2,a; because, 184,
(1); ns, 186, 2.
ὡς ἄν 181, 8.
nexpı,u&xpıav183,2and3. οὐχ ὅτι (δπως) --- ἀλλὰ ὥςπερ 186, 2.
μή 177,5; with the Imp.
καί (ἀλλὰ οὐδέ), 178, &
ὥςτε 186.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11